NOTES ON THE HEBREW TEXT

AND THE TOPOGRAPHY

OF

THE BOOKS OF SAMUEL

HENRY FROWDE,

M.A.

PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD

LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK, TORONTO MELBOURNE AND BOMBAY

NOTES ON THE HEBREW TEXT

AND THE TOPOGRAPHY

OF THE

BOOKS OF SAMUEL
WITH AN INTRODUCTION ON

HEBREW PALAEOGRAPHY AND THE

ANCIENT VERSIONS
AND FACSIMILES OF INSCRIPTIONS AND MAPS
BY THE

REV.

S.

R.

DRIVER,
;

D.D.

REGIUS PROFESSOR OF HEBREW, AND CANON OF CHRIST CHURCH, OXFORD HON. D.LITT. CAMBRIDGE AND DUBLIN HON. D.D. GLASGOW AND ABERDEEN FELLOW OF THE BRITISH ACADEMY CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE ROYAL PRUSSIAN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED

OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1913

?s

FROM THE PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION

present volume is designed as a contribution to the It philology and textual criticism of the Old Testament.

THE

may, I hope, be found useful as a sequel to Mr. Spurrell s The Books of Samuel are not so Notes on Genesis 1
.

reading book for a beginner in Hebrew as for though they con some of the other historical books
suitable

as

tain

classical

examples

of a

chaste and beautiful

Hebrew
of

prose style, they have suffered

tional

unusually

from

transcrip-

corruption,

and hence

raise

frequently questions

text, with which a beginner is evidently not in a position But for one who has made further progress in the to deal.

familiarize

language, they afford an admirable field for study they him with many of the most characteristic idioms
:

of the language, and at the same time introduce him to the grounds and principles of the textual criticism of the The idiomatic knowledge of Hebrew is Old Testament.
best

acquired

by an
writers
;

attentive

Hebrew prose

and

have made

and repeated study of the it my aim through

out not merely to explain (so far as this was possible 2 ) the text of the Books of Samuel, but also to point out and illustrate, as fully as seemed needful, the principal idiomatic
usages which they exemplify. sought to bring within reach
especially

In the Introduction

have

of the

student
often

materials
difficulty

relating

to

Inscriptions

with

accessible, including matter which, at least to some readers, will probably be new. More space could easily have been
1
2

Clarendon Press, 1887

ed. 2, 1896.

For there are some passages which

from whatever cause

defy, or elude,

explanation.

VI

Preface

to the

First Edition

devoted to the subject of the Ancient Versions but enough, their character, I hope, will have been said to illustrate
;

and

their

value

to

the

student

of the

Old Testament.

questions, and questions touching the structure of the Books of Samuel, lying outside the plan of the work, have been noticed only incidentally: I have, however,

Historical

articulated the
I

two Books

in a

manner, the

utility of

which
to

will, hope, appear to those readers who proceed study of the sources of which they are composed.

the

portion of the volume was already in type, when the loan of some MS. notes of the late Prof. Duncan H. Weir,
l extending as far as 3 Sam. 4, 13 was offered to me. Know ing, from the extracts in Prof. Cheyne s Isaiah (1884), the
,

value of Dr. Weir

suggestions,
notes,
I

thankfully availed myself

of the
I

offer.

The
;

found, were less complete than

and though I gladly quoted from them had expected what I could, I did not obtain from them as much assistance as I had hoped.
remains to speak briefly of the history of the textual Books of Samuel. To Otto Thenius 2 belongs the merit of having been the first to point out systematically
It

criticism of the

how

the

restoration

Septuagint frequently supplied materials for the His Commentary is of the Massoretic text.
;

and for the manner eminently suggestive and stimulating has recovered, with the help of the Septuagint, in which he the true text and meaning of numerous passages in the two
Books, he has earned the lasting gratitude of Hebrew scholars. Thenius results were largely utilized by Ewald in the first
edition of his History of Israel (18 43)
3
:

Fr. Bottcher

followed

1 2

See the Academy, 1889, Aug. 24,

p. 119.

Die Biicher Samudis

i,

in the Kurzgefasstes exegetisches

Handbuch zum A.T.,

2, p. vii).

ed.
3

1842

ed. 2, 1864.

Neue

Without suitable acknowledgement, as Thenius complains (Pref. ed. exegetisch-kritische Aehrenlese zum A. T. (1863). Comp. ib.,

p. viii.

Preface

to the

First Edition

VII

on the same

lines,

sometimes correcting Thenius, at other

times, not always happily, seeking

to supplement him. It be denied that Thenius shewed a disposition cannot, however, to adopt readings from the Septuagint without sufficient

discrimination
in point

and his restorations were sometimes

scholarship.

deficient

of

Hebrew

In 1871 appeared an un

pretending but epoch-making work on the textual criticism of the Old Testament the monograph of Julius Wellhausen

on
this

The Text
book

of the Books of Samuel.

The importance of
which
it

lies in

particular in the strictness with

emphasizes the discriminating use of the Ancient Versions for purposes of textual criticism. With rare acumen and
sagacity, Wellhausen

compares the Massoretic text with the Ancient Versions (specially with the Septuagint), and elicits
from the comparison the principles that must have operated, on the one hand in the process of translation^ on the other
in the transmission

both of the Hebrew text

itself

and of the

He thus sets in its true corresponding Ancient Version. between renderings which pre light the crucial distinction suppose a different Hebrew original, and those which do not
do
this,

but are due to other causes

and shews further that

both texts, the Massoretic text as well as that of the Septuagint, have received modification (chiefly in the form
of harmonistic or other additions), though in unequal degrees, in the process of transmission. Naturally he endorses a large

number of Thenius
stantial basis.
is

restorations;

a keen criticism, shewing that they

but others he subjects to do not rest upon a sub

is

Wellhausen
;

scholarship

fine

his

judgement

rarely at fault

and

in the critical

treatment of the text,

have been strongly sensible of the value of his guidance. But I have uniformly maintained an independent judgement,
I

whether towards Wellhausen or other scholars

and

have

been careful to adopt nothing of importance, from whatever source, without acknowledgement at the time.

VIII

Preface

to the

First Edition

The fact that valuable original readings are preserved by the Septuagint or other Versions has been recognized also 2 by Gratz *, Stade and other scholars in this country by
:

Commentary on the Books of Samuel in the Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges, and the Rev. F. H. Woods, in an Essay on the 4 subject contributed by him to the Studia Biblica
Mr. (now Professor) Kirkpatrick
,

in his

work than any of these, also dealing largely with the criticism of the text, is Klostermann s Commentary on the Books of Samuel and Kings, forming part of the
recent

more

und Neuen
and
his
it.

Kurzgefasster Commentar zu den Heiligen Schriften Alten Testamentes, edited by Strack and Zockler (1887).

Klostermann

is

a genuine scholar, an acute and able

critic

Commentary has

upon

evidently had great pains bestowed But in his treatment of the text, where he adopts

an independent line, it is, unhappily, very rarely possible to follow him. Klostermann can make, and has made, clever

and probable emendations

he
is

but his originality

is

excessive

too ready with an ingenious but recondite combination he is apt to assume that the text has suffered more than
;

is

probable

and

his restorations themselves betray

sometimes

defective appreciation
it

of

Hebrew modes

But

remains his merit to have been the

first

of expression. to perceive

distinctly the critical

importance of Lucian
it

recension
in

of
his

the Septuagint, and to have utilized

consistently
S.

Commentary.
R. D.
CHRIST CHURCH, OXFORD,
November, 1889.

1 3 4

Gesch. derjuden,

i.

(1874).

Gesch. dts V. Israels,

i.

(1887).

sinee 1906, Oxford, 1885, p. 21 ff.

[And now (1912),

Dean

of Ely.]

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION

JUST twenty-three years have elapsed
of the present
since the first edition

work appeared.

In the interval

much
;

has been

done

for

the elucidation of the

Old Testament

and the

student of it especially the English student finds much at hand to help him which in 1890 either did not exist, or, if it
did exist, was either unknown, or with difficulty accessible. If the years have not been marked by any such epoch-making

work as Wellhausen s History of Israel (1878), yet a number of works placing much new and important matter in the hands of students have appeared for instance to name only a few the two series of Commentaries on the Old Testament,
:

edited

by Nowack and Marti

the

fifteen

volumes which

have at present (Oct. 1912) appeared of the International

Critical

by

Prof. Briggs, Prof.

Commentary ; the Hebrew-English Lexicon, edited Brown, and the present writer Kittel s
;

; greatly improved from 1889) of Gesenius Hebrew Grammar, two of which have been translated into English (1898, 1910)

very useful Biblia

editions (dating

Hebraica

Kautzsch

the

two great

repertories

of

Biblical

learning,

Hastings

Dictionary of the Bible (1898-1904), and the Encyclopaedia

Biblica (1899-1903);
tions

G. A.

Cooke

North-Semitic Inscrip

(1903); and the Papyri of Assuan and Elephantine, published respectively by Sayce and Cowley (1906), and

Sachau (1911), which have thrown such unexpected light on the social and religious condition of the Jews of Upper Egypt
in

the

fifth

century B.C.
derivable from these and other sources,
far as the

The new knowledge,

I

have endeavoured, as

to

make

scope of the work permitted, available for students of the Old Testament in the

present

edition.

This edition exceeds the

first

more than 100 pages.

i3s

The

character of the a 3

edition by work remains,

Preface

to the

Second Edition

however, unaltered,
text of the

object being still, as I said in the Preface to the First Edition (p. V), not solely to explain the
its

Books of Samuel,

but, while doing this, to teach

the student to understand Hebrew philology, and to appre The increase in size is due partly ciate Hebrew idioms. to the incorporation of new matter of the kind just referred to,

and to the notice that necessarily had to be taken of the many new suggestions about the text, which had been made in
(especially)

the very ably-written Commentaries

of

H.

P. Smith,

and Nowack

and partly
and,
I

to the fact that I

Budde, have
on

enlarged the scope of the book,

hope, increased at the

same time,

its

usefulness,

by adding

fresh notes, not only

points of philology and idiom, but also on the topography I was led in the first instance to of the Books of Samuel.
deal with the latter subject these

by

the desire to illustrate from

Books the

force of the

went up

and

came down,

at

once so characteristic of the historical books of the Old

Testament, and so vividly reflecting the of the country in which they were written
of the
sites
I

physical
;

features
in

and then,

view

many

in

highly questionable identifications of ancient the current English maps of Palestine 1 (to which
2
),

have called attention elsewhere

notes are brief;

went

further,

and added

notes on the sites of places mentioned in the

Books of Samuel.

The

but they

embody

often the result of

considerable research.
of the Books, I

topography have added Maps, indicating the elevations (which are important for following properly the history), and
1

To

illustrate further the

Except those in the Encyclopaedia Biblica, which are above reproach. See the Expository Times, xiii (July, 1902), p. 457 ff. xxi (Aug. and Sept. 1910), 495 ff., 562 ff. Expositor, 1911, Nov., p. 388 f., 1912, Jan., pp. 25 ., 26 ., 32 f., Feb., p. 124 f. Bartholomew, though an admirable chartographer, clearly does not possess the philological and historical knowledge enabling him to distinguish
2
;
;

between a sound and unsound identification of an ancient

site.

But G. A. Smith

Historical Alias of the Holy Land, which is likely now (Feb., 1913) to appear shortly, may be confidently expected to satisfy all requirements.

Preface
including
all

to the

Second Edition

XI

such

sites as

can be reasonably identified, those

which are doubtful or conjectural being marked by a query. I have naturally, in preparing this edition, adjusted refer
ences (e.g. those to Gesenius-Kautzsch) to the latest editions
of the works referred to, and also referred to
accessible

more generally

books

in preference to

the less accessible books

which

in
in

NSI.,

1889 were often alone available (e.g. to Dr. Cooke s I have also enlarged the preference to the CIS.}.

Index, and
to study

made Hebrew

it,

I hope, more useful to those who wish idioms. In the transliteration of Hebrew

and Arabic names, especially names of places, I say, I have not succeeded in attaining uniformity

am
;

sorry to
I

but

hope

that no serious misunderstanding will arise in consequence.

Conjectural emendation, especially in the prophetical and poetical books of the Old Testament, is at present much in evi dence and I venture to add a few remarks upon it.
;

The value
text
is

with the precautions noted on pp. xxxviii, xlv

of the Ancient Versions for correcting naturally, the Massoretic

now

must be evident

But it generally recognized by Biblical scholars. to a careful student of the Massoretic text
all

that the Versions do not enable us to correct

errors in

it

and hence the necessity of conjectural emendation must be admitted. Passages often occur which strongly excite sus
picion
;

and the character of the ancient, unpointed

script

is

such as to lend itself readily to corruption. The fact that a clever scholar can indulge his genius for improvement to excess is not evidence that conjecture, in itself, is illegitimate.

We

tion, to

must exercise judgement and discrimination. An emenda be convincing, must yield a good sense, unmistakeably

superior to that of the Massoretic text, be in accordance with

idiom, and not differ too widely from the ductus litterarum of the existing text, It ought especially in the older script.

presume unduly that, when only limited remains of Hebrew literature have come down to us, we have an
also not to

XII

Preface

to the

Second Edition

absolute knowledge of what might, or might not, have been

said in the ancient language.

Conjectural emendations, satis

conditions, have unquestionably been made, some which have afterwards been found to be con including On the firmed by the testimony of an Ancient Version.

fying

these

it is impossible not to feel that a large proportion of the conjectural emendations which have been proposed rest upon arbitrary or otherwise insufficient grounds. There are

other hand,

also

many of which
be

it is

impossible to say more than that they

may

but we

right, they are such as the author might have written, Hence can have no assurance that he did write them.

The they can be adopted only with the qualification perhaps. conditions under which the writings of the Old Testament have come down to us are such that the legitimacy of con
jectural

emendation

is

undoubted

we must only
sound and

satisfy

ourselves, before definitely accepting a conjectural emendation,

that the grounds

upon which

it

rests are

sufficient.

For the typographical accuracy of the volume I am greatly indebted to Mr. J. C. Pembrey, Hon. M.A., the octogenarian reader of the Clarendon Press. Oriental Nearly every
Oriental

work that has been published by the Press during the

last fifty years, including, for instance,

Max

Miiller s Rig-veda,

Thesaurus Syriacus, and Neubauer s Catalogue of Hebrew MSS. in the Bodleian Library, has had the benefit of Mr. Pembrey s watchful supervision but, notwithstanding
s
:

Payne Smith

his years, his eye, as I can testify

dimmed, and he
scientious care,

is still

from experience, is still unas able as ever to bestow upon a book

passing through his hands that interest, and more than con

which so many Orientalists have learnt to

S.

appreciate.

R. D.

CHRIST CHURCH, OXFORD,

October 28, 1912.

CONTENTS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

....

PAGE
.

XV
XIX

ADDENDA

INTRODUCTION
i.

The Early History of the Hebrew Alphabet

2.

Early Hebrew Orthography

Characteristics
:

.....
. .

xxvii
xxxiii
Iv

3.

4.

The Chief Ancient Versions of the Old Testament of the Chief Ancient Versions of Samuel
.

APPENDIX

The Inscription of Meshd commonly known as

,

Stone

NOTE ON THE MAPS

NOTES ON
I

SAMUEL

........ ........
the
. .
. . .

Moabite
Ixxxiv

xcv
i

NOTES ON

II

SAMUEL

INDEX OF SUBJECTS INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS AND IDIOMS

... .........,231
.

381

INDEX OF PLACES.

........
FACSIMILES.
.
.

384

389

I.

II.

Hebrew Inscribed Tablet from Gezer The Siloam Inscription

III.

The

Carpentras Stele

IV. Part of an Egyptian Aramaic Papyrus, of 484 V. Egyptian Aramaic Papyrus

VI. Inscription of Tabnith, King of Zidon
.

.... ....
.
.

To face

p. vii

p. ix
p. xii
,,

B.C.

p. xvi p. xvii

,,

p.

xxiv

MAPS.

The

Pass of Michmas
.

To face
.
.

p.

106
1

Section of Northern Palestine

Section of Central Palestine
Section of Southern Palestine

p. 2

At

the

end of the volume

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
= American Journal of Semitic Languages. = aliter. = alternatively (to denote one of two suggested views). III = Aptowitzer, V., Das Schriftwort in der Rabbinischen Aptow.
AJSL.
al.
alt.
alii,

I, II,

Literatur : (I) in the Sitzungsberichte der Akad. der Wiss. in

ibid. vol. clx cliii (1906), Abhandl. VI; (II) Abh. VII (on ancient renderings, and citations, of (1908),

Wien, vol.

AV.
SB

= = the
=

i Sam.); (Ill) in the XVIII. Jahresbericht der Isr-Theol. Lehranstalt in Wien, 1911 (on 2 Sam. and Joshua). Authorized Version.

Rabbinical Bible, edited by Jacob ben Hayyim, and published by Daniel Bomberg, Venice, 1524-5.

Baer

Liber Samuelis.
pressit,

Textum Masoreticum
Masorae
varie

accuratissime
notis

ex-

fontibus

illustravit,

criticis

Bo.

= Bottcher,

confirmavit S. Baer (1892).

Fr.,

Neue

exeg.-krit. Aehrenlese

zum A.

T.

(above,

p.VIf.).
Sometimes also the Ausfuhrliches Lehrbuch der Hebr. Sprache, 1866, a gigantic Thesaurus of grammatical forms, of great value for occasional refer
ence, but not adapted for general use.

Bu.

= Budde, K., Die Bttcher

Buhl

CIS.

= Buhl, F., Geographic des alien Palastina, 1896. = Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum, Parisiis, 1881
I

Samuel erklari, 1902 Hand-Commentar zum A. T.).

(in

Marti

Kurzer

ff.

Tom.

contains Phoenician Inscriptions

Tom.

II

Aramaic
five

Inscriptions.

DB.
Dh.

Hastings
1904).

Dictionary of

the Bible.

In

volumes (1898-

= Dhorme, Le Pere P., Les Livres de Samuel, 1910. EB. = Encyclopaedia Biblica (1899-1903). Ehrl. = Ehrlich, A. B., Randglossen zur Hebr. Bibel, vol.
Clever
;

iii,

1910.

but apt to be arbitrary, and unconvincing,

EVV.

= English

Versions (used in quoting passages in which

AV.

and RV. agree).

XVI
Ew.

List of Abbreviations
H., Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Sprache, ed.

= Ewald,

7,

1863

ed. 8, 1870.

The Syntax has been

Gi.

translated

by

J.

Kennedy, Edinburgh, 1881.

= Ginsburg, C. D., Massoretico-critical edition

1894
;

of the Hebrew
appearing.

Bible,

ed. 2,

much

enlarged,

GK.

now [1912]

Gesenius

Hebrew Grammar, as edited and enlarged by E. Kautzsch (ed. 28, 1909), translated by A. E. Cowley,
1910.

= G. A. Smith, Historical Geography of the Holy Land, 1894. JBLit. = Journal of Biblical Literature (Boston, U.S.A.). Ke. = Keil, C. F., Commentar iiber die Biicher Samuelis, ed. 2, 1875. Kenn., Kennedy = A. R. S. Kennedy, Samuel (in the Century Bible],
Jf.G.

1905.
Kit.,

Kitt.

Biblia Hebraica (with footnotes, containing Kittel, a selection of various readings from MSS., the Versions,

and conjecture), 1905.

Kit. ap.

Kautzsch

= Kittel s translation

of Samuel in Kautzsch
2,

Die

Klo.

= Klostermann, Aug. (above, p. VIII). Kon. = Konig, F. E., Historisch-kritisches

Sprache,
i.

Heilige Schrift des A.T.s, ed.

1910.

Lehrgebdude der

Hebr.

(Accidence), 1881
Hi.

ii.

(Forms of nouns, numerals,

adverbs, &c.), 1895;

(Syntax), 1897.

Exhaustive, with full discussions of alternative views.

Kp.
Lex.

Kirkpatrick, A. F., Bible for Schools

Commentary on Samuel and Colleges, 1880.

by F. Brown,

in the

Cambridge

= Hebrew and English Lexicon,

C. A. Briggs, 1906.

S.

R. Driver, and

Lidzb.

Lidzbarski,

Lo.

= Lohr,

Handbuch der Nordsemitischen Epigraphik, 1898. Max, Die Biicher Samuels, 1898 (in the Kurzgefasstes

LOT? =

Exegetisches Handbuch, taking the place of a third edition of Thenius).

Driver, S. R.,
ed. 8, 1909.

Introduction

to

the

Literature

of

the

OT.,

Luc., Lucian

= Lucian s

recension of the

LXX

(see p. xlviii

ff.).

= Massoretic text. NHWB. = J. Levy, Neuhebraisches

MT.
1876-1889.

und Chalddisches

Worterbuch,

List of Abbreviations

XVI I
(in

Now.

NSL =
Ol.

Nowack, W., Richter, Ruth und Bilcher Samuelis, 1902 Nowack s Handkommentar zum A.T.).
G. A. Cooke,

Text-Book of North-Semitic Inscriptions, 1903.

= Olshausen,
A

Justus,

Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Sprache,

i.

1861.

masterly work, containing, however, only the Laut-, Schrift-, and FormenLehre. The author never completed the syntax. The chapter devoted to
the formation of

Hebrew proper names

is

valuable.

Onom.

= =

P.

OTJC? PEFQS.
Perles

de Lagarde, Onomastica Sacra, ed. i, 1870. W. R. Smith, The OT. in the fewish Church, ed.

2,

1892.

Quarterly Statement of the Palestine Exploration Fund. Felix Perles, Analekten zur Textkritik des A.T.s, 1895.

PRE? =
PS.

ed. 3 (edited

Realmcyklopadie fur Protestantische Theologie und Kirche, by A. Hauck), 1896-1909.

Payne Smith, Thesaurus Syriacus.

Reinke

Reinke, Laur., Beitrage zur Erklarung des A.T.s, Miinster, 1866.

in

vol. vii.

On

transcriptional errors

the

Ancient Versions, with

Catholic,
prejudice,
in

many

illustrations.

Massoretic text, or presupposed by the The author is a Roman

free

his attitude

towards the Massoretic text entirely

from

and

in fact not sufficiently discriminating in his criticism.

Rob.

RV.

= Edw. Robinson, Biblical Researches = Revised Version.

in Palestine, ed. 2, 1856.

The

University Presses have issued recently, very unfortunately, an edition of the Revised Version without the marginal notes of the Revisers. This is

a retrograde step, which is greatly to be deplored. The Revisers marginal notes contain not only much other information helpful to the reader, but
also a large
text,

number of renderings unquestionably

it is

superior to those of the

of which

an injustice to deprive the public, even in a single edition.

Readers of the present volume are asked, as occasion offers, to explain to those who desire to make the best use of the Revised Version the paramount
importance of reading it in an edition containing the marginal notes. On the character and value of these notes, and on the bestway of making profitable
use of them, I

may refer

Version (1906).

to pp. xxiv-xxxii of my Book of Job in the Revised In the notes to this edition of Job, as also in Woods and

s very useful Hebrew Prophets for English Readers (4 vols., 19091912), attention is regularly called to the marginal renderings preferable to those of the text.

Powell

Sm.

= Smith, =
On

H.

P.,

The Books of Samuel, 1899

(in the International

Critical Commentary}.

Stade

Stade, B., Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Grammatik, i. 1879. The most convenient book for those who desire an accidence more comprehensive than that of Gesenius-Kautzsch, and
the lines of Olshausen,

XVIII

List of Abbreviations
The

yet not so minute or elaborate as those of Olshausen or KOnig.

syntax never appeared.

= Thenius, Otto (above, p. VI). = Conder, C. R., Tent Work in Palestine, We. = Wellhausen, Julius (above, p. VII).
Th.
T.

W.

ed. 1887.

ZATW., ZA

ZDMG. =

ZDP V. = Zeitschrift des Deutschen Paldstina - Vereins. 01 = TDfol and the rest etc.

W. Zeitschrift ftir die Alttestamentliche edited by Bernhard Stade, 1881 ff. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen

Wissenschafi.

Gesellschaft.

The readings of the Septuagint, when not otherwise stated, are Lucian s those of Cod. B, as given in Dr. Swete s edition (p. xlvii).
recension (p. abbreviation
xlviii)
is is

LXX

denoted by LXX (Luc.) or Luc. The construed with a plural or a singular verb,
is

according as the reference

more

particularly to

the

translators
it.

themselves, or to the translation in the form in which

we now have

In words transliterated from the Hebrew, breathings (except sometimes the earliest uncial the light breathings) and accents are not inserted
:

and those inserted in Swete s edition have no authority whatever, being merely added by the editor in accordance z Their with the orthography and accentuation of the Massoretic text
neither
;
.

MSS. have

introduction

is

unfortunate

for not only does

it

suggest an anachro

inferences.

nism, but their presence in the text might readily give rise to false After what has been said, however, it will be obvious

that nothing can be inferred from them respecting either the readings of the MSS. upon which the Septuagint is based, or the accentuation

of

Hebrew words

in the

Targum are cited from the editions The sign t following a series

age of the translators. The Peshitto and the of Lee and Lagarde, respectively. of references indicates that all

occurrences of the word or form in question have been quoted. The small superior figure (as OTfC. 2 ) denotes the edition of the

work

referred to.
this

In case

allowed to explain that

volume should reach any German readers, may I be no doubt and doubtless do not affirm as

than to

strongly as undoubtedly/ unzweifelhaft ?

1

and

that they correspond to

wohl

rather

Swete, Introd. to the OT. in Greek, p. 136. See Swete s OT. in Greek, i. pp. xiii-xiv.

ADDENDA
Guthe (Mittheil. des Deutschen Pal.-Vereins, 1912, p. 49 ff.) P. 45. agrees that the Stone of Help of 7, 12, set up by Samuel, is not the Eben-ezer of 4, i, that Beth-horon is better than Beth-car in 7, n,
and
see
that

Yeshanah

(p. 65),

if

Ain Sfniyeh,
the

will

not suit
site for

7,

f.

And on Mejdel Yaba, marked on

ib.

Map as
(cf.

a possible

Apheq,

1911, p. 33

ff.
1.

P. 98, note
P.

on

v. 3,

for

10, 10

6) read 10, 5.

PEFQS. 1881, p. 253) objects to d (leading up to Michmas see the Map (Plate V) at the Ja end of ZDPV. xxviii), as the scene of Jonathan s exploit, on the ground that this approach would have been naturally guarded by
106 bottom.
(in the

Conder

W. Abu

the

Philistines,

and

that
it

there
his

would have been no occasion

feet
;

for
cliff

Jonathan el-Hosn (=Bozez), which, with difficulty, he climbed himself almost to the top (p. 252 f.), to be the place where Jonathan made his
ascent.
If the scene of the exploit
is

to climb

up

on

hands and

and considers the

ever to be determined definitely,

to be necessary.

a fresh exploration of the

Wady would seem

n, 20 read

Jud. u, 30. I 15, 6. The following synopsis of the occurrences of in 33, the critical editions of Baer, Ginsburg, and Kittel, and MSS. and editions
P. 112, last line:/0r Jud.
"^

cited

by Ginsburg, may be convenient. It will shew, among other things, how considerably, on Massoretic minutiae, texts and authorities differ. Fortunately, for exegesis, such minutiae have no importance.
ViB Tin
6

Jud. 20, 43
*i

BaG

(v.

Baer, p. 102);

T)n

[not 1]

SK.
Mass,
lists

Sam.

i,

*io, 24

2 BDpnn SBBaKG ; 1 6 MSS., 4 Edd.J Dnwn ggBaKG 2 1 4 MSS., 3 Edd., and

;

cited
15, 6

vn no
35
fl

by Aptow. II, p. 73. BaG 8 i MS., Yemenite Massoretic

list

ap. Ginsb.

*i 7

The Massorah, iii. 73 ; Vin 33K 39 MSS., 10 Edd. Dirann 93BaKG 2 25 MSS., 4 Edd.; -| 2 MSS., 4 Edd.

23, 28

Tp BaG
[not

2
]

MSS.; fno 33K 25 MSS.,

Yemenite Mass,
list

Edd.;

ap. Ginsb. I.e.

The

asterisk denotes cases

% In each case, of the

his first edition,

MSS. and

mentioned by Kimchi, Michlol, ed. Lyck, p. 57*. early Edd. (excluding 93, which is cited here

separately) quoted in Ginsburg s second edition

(G

2
).

On

the passages cited from

no MSS. or Edd. are quoted by him.

XX
2

Addenda
1 8,
1

Sam.

sfntD
2

Ba

MSS.; *fnp K;
list, I.e.

*l "H

23G

|*no 4 MSS.,
Ill, p. 56.
;

Edd., Mass,

p. 74, cf.

Aptow.

23, 28
*

^n

[sic]

Mass,

list

(but in
2
,

no MS. or old Ed.

list,

ad
i

loc.).

Ki. 6, 32

Dnwn SBaKG
10, 24);
-i

Mass,

/.r.

p.

73 (on

Sam.
2
.

5 MSS., 4 Edd.
22");

Jer. 22, 22
*

3 9, 12
1 6,

*Ez.

nn ggKG mTnjnn Ba (v. Baer, p. 99; GK. 93BaKG 2 (v. Baer, p. no; GK. SPJ neiNtp
rn?

^ SBaG K.
list;
2

22").

21, 35

FPjyn-^K Mass,
tf&i

SBBaG K.
i

*Hab.

3,

13

WHO BaG
p.

27 MSS.,

Ed., Yemenite Mass,

list,

90

tftfl

8K

15 MSS., 9 Edd.
list,

*Ps. 52, 5

jn rantf SSBaG K,

Yemen

p. 93.

Prov. 3, 8

TJgj
Jn
te

Wi

roKfi SBBaG K.

*ii, 21

*i4, 10
*i 5
,

ijrnago SBBaK;

^G
;

1
.

20, 22

V^nttW^

Ba; JH

SBG^.
2gK.

Job 39, 9
*Cant.
5, 2

D^

n^NVi

BaG 1 Dn

Ezr. 9, 6
2

Ch. 26, 10
I 17, 17. It

arnapo Ba; 21 ggG

was
objected,

^
my
first

by a reviewer of

edition, to the

proposal to read nin D!"6n mt^y, that Dr6 must be the accusative of specialization (comp. Wright, Arab. Gr. ii. 96), and that the Arabic grammarians (Sibawaihi, ed. Derenb. i. p. 251) in this case
distinctly forbid the

employment

of the art. with the subst.

But there

are in

Hebrew

several cases of the

numeral
s 14 D

in the

st.

abs. followed

by

a subst. determined by the

13 (bis}. 15, 14 Jud. i, 20. i Ki. n, 31 DD3B>n mspy ns), or a suff. (Zech. 4, 2) ; and are we certain that the subst. in such cases is not in apposition (GK. Or, if in all these 134^; Kon. Hi. 312^) ?
passages, the
si. c,
(n"!^!,

art. (17,

i>"lin

\W}&.

Jos. 6, 4. 8 (bis),

etc.)

is

to

be restored,
I.e.),

in

accordance with
it

the alternative Arabic construction (Wright,

then

will

be equally

legitimate to restore

it

in i

Sam.

17, 17 as well.

On

I 17, 40,

1.

2,

/or Blpfel read t^!?.

1912, p. i if.) points out objections to the iden with Be eroth, and suggests el-Lattdtm i^ m.
t

P. 253.

Guthe

(ib.

tification of el-Bireh

NW. of Gibeon.

INTRODUCTION
i.

The Early History of the Hebrew Alphabet.

except, possibly, the
latest

THE Old Testament

and a
recollection of the

portions

was
;

not written originally in the characters with which

we

are familiar

change through which the Hebrew alphabet In the passed is preserved both in the Talmud and by the Fathers. Talmud, Sank. 2i b we read Originally the law was given to Israel
, :

in the

Hebrew character and

in the sacred

tongue

it

was given again

"

to them, in the days of Ezra, in the

"Assyrian"

character (niptf 2032),

Aramaic tongue. Israel chose for themselves the "Assyrian character and the sacred tongue, and left to the iSiwrai the Hebrew
in the

and

character and the Aramaic tongue.

said,

Who

are the iSiomu

R. Hasda

The

Cuthites

[i.e.

the Samaritans: 2 Ki. 17, 24].

said,
("H^y

Hebrew
character

character?
is

R. Hasda

flttKP^
203), the b two
,

2D3

2
.

What is the The original

4
mtJ>K
.

here termed

Hebrew

new

character

In the Jerus. Talmud, Megillah Arid why of the latter term:

straight
it

i,
is

7i
it

explanations are offered

mB>K?

called

Because

it

is

pB Np)

in

form.

R. Levi says, Because the Jews brought

5
.

home

with them from Assyria

The

explanation Assyrian

is

teacher of the school of Sura, d. 309.

n^a Dr6 n:mi

c6i

mm anipn

pc?!?i

nnipx 2rp

bane*!? ]rh

xnon i -ins* mmnn JKO r aro snon n ION nnay ans KO.
3

nay 2D32 bvnffh mm rurva r& p^h rvn& N anaa H^DIN ptyh nay an3 mwnrb

mm

An

expression of uncertain meaning: comp.

s.

Hoffmann

in the

ZATW.

i.

337;
8

Levy
4

NHWB.
p^am

v.
is

The same term

}rc6

used

elsewhere

thus in the Mishnah, Megillah

rmiitoi

i,

rnnrni

^32 panaa
i.e.

onson^ N^N

p^ani?

onao

pa p

nHIC N N?N P203J p^Nj

5

the sacred books might be written in any language,

but the Tefillin and Mezuzoth only in the

Assyrian

character.

DT3 rby

DB>

i?y

nb i ncK

unaa

1365

Introduction
the

more probable, whether

Aramaic

it

be supposed to be used loosely for

it

Babylonian/ or whether
of Syrian or

as others have thought

have the sense

been the case J ),

appears to have and so embody a true tradition as to the origin of the

(as occasionally in later times

new character. the name of

sacred name,

The

^1tJ>K

2J13 is that

which
.

in later times acquired

V2"jK)

2H3 or square character 2

Origen, speaking of the

says that in accurate

characters, unlike those in use in

Kat TO
aveK(j><livr)Tov
1

MSS. it was written in archaic his own day s eon Se Trap avrois
:

TeT/mypa/A/Aarov oTrep
Kvpios 8e
KOLL

CTTI

TOU xpvfrov TrcraXov TOV

e/cc^wvemu.

dp^tepcws eyeypaTTTO
fv TOIS aKpiflicri

TOVTO Trap

"EAA^crt

Kat

TWV

dvTiypa<cov
4>a(rl

E/?paiKots dp^aiois ypo^nt-a

"E<ropav

d\\ ou^l TOIS

aix(J.aXwo-ia>
.

vuv.

yap TOV

ere pois
9,

XP 1 ao ^ ai
1

In his

Commentary on Ez.

4 he adds that a con

that
yp<-

verted Jew, in answer to an enquiry, told

him

TO.

apxala a-Totx^a
at

Incepts

fx

tv

T0

^ a^ T 4* T0 ^ trravpov x aP aKT

Jerome,

the

beginning

Prologus Hebrews, Syrians, and Chaldaeans had

of the

Galeatus

*,

after

observing

that

the

characters, continues,

an alphabet of twenty-two Samaritani etiam Pentateuchum Moysi totidem

all

litteris scriptitant, figuris

tantum

et

apicibus discrepantes.

Certumque

est

Esdram scribam

legisque doctorem, post capta Hierosolyma et

instaurationem templi sub Zorobabel, alias litteras repperisse quibus

nunc utimur,

cum ad
effect as
5
,

illud

Hebraeorum
to the

characteres fuerint.

usque tempus iidem Samaritanorum et On Ez. 9, 4 he makes a remark

In his
letter to

same

Origen.

Marcella,

De

decent

nominibus Dei

he

writes,

Nomen

TCTpaypa/x/xarov

quod
:

aveKfpwvrjTov

id est ineffabile putaverunt

non

intelligentes

quod his litteris scribitur niiT quod quidam propter elementorum similitudinem cum in Graecis
LXX.

1 *

Cf. Jer. 35 (42),

n.

Ez. 32, 29

Aaavpioi for

DIN,

i.e.

DIN)

in the

For other statements made by the Jews respecting the change of script, and often dependent upon most fanciful exegesis, see Chapman, Introd. to the Pentateuch
(uniform with the Cambridge Bible}, 1911, pp. 279-287). 3 On if/. 2, 2 (quoted by Montfaucon, Hexapla, i. 86
:

in a slightly different

form, from other MSS., in ed. Bened. ii. 539 = Lommatzsch xi. 396 f.). 4 Or Preface to the Four Books of Kings (which were the first translated by

Jerome from the Hebrew), designed as a defence (galea) against

printed at the beginning of ordinary editions of the Vulgate. 5 Ep. 25 (ed. Bened. i. 705 Vallarsi i. 129).
;

detractors,

i.

Change of Character

in the

Hebrew Script
Epiphanius
2

iii

litteris

repererent

mm

legere consueverunt
to that

makes a statement
that the old

similar

(d. 403) contained in the extract from

Sanhedrin, that a change of character was introduced by Ezra, and

The
witness,

fact

form was only retained by the Samaritans. of a change of character, to which these passages bear
:

the only error is that it is represented as having is correct been introduced by one man. Tradition, as is its wont, has attributed to a single age, and to a single name, what was in reality only accom
plished gradually,

and

certainly

was not completed

at the time

of Ezra

(who came

to Palestine B.C. 458).

What, then, was

the Samaritans

that older character of

which the Talmud and the

still

Fathers speak, and which they describe as being

?

retained by

It

was the character which, with

slight modifications

of form,
the

is

found upon the Inscription of Mesha (commonly known as

),

upon early Aramaic and Hebrew gems, upon Phoenician Inscriptions, and upon the few early Hebrew Inscriptions
Moabite Stone
which we
at
3
.

present possess, viz. those found at Samaria, Gezer,

It

and Siloam

was the common Semitic

character, used alike, in

ancient times, by the Moabites, Hebrews, Aramaeans, and Phoenicians,

and transmitted by the Phoenicians to the Greeks. This character remained longest without substantial alteration in Hebrew proper and
Phoenician
:

in

Greek

it

which we are now familiar

changed gradually to the character with the transition to what is termed above the
in

^WN

2rD was

effected

first

Aramaic;

it

was only accomplished

at

a later period in
influence of the

Hebrew, Aramaic language

in

consequence, no doubt, of the growing

in Palestine, in the period

imme
in

diately preceding the Christian era.

Tables of the chief ancient Semitic alphabets are to be found

1

Comp.

the

Hexapla on
xxxii.

if/.

26 (25),

Is. I, a

(with Dr. Field

note); Nestle

in the

ZDMG.

466-9, 507.

In the palimpsest Fragments of the Books of Kings [i Ki. 20, 7-17 ; 2 Ki. 23, 27] in AquilcCs Translation, found by Dr. Schechter in the Cairo Genizah, and published by F. C. Burldtt in 1897, and in those from the Psalms, published in C. Taylor
* 3

n-

s Cairo Genizah Palimpsests (1900), the Tetragrammaton is regularly written in the archaic characters here referred to (cf. Burkitt, p. 15 f. ; DB. iv. 444).

De xiigemmis,
See p.
vii
ff.

63

(ed.

Dindorf, 1 863, IV.

13

cited

by Hoffmann,

s.

p. 334).

IV

Introduction
]

most Hebrew grammars of modern times It will be more instructive repeated.

and they need not be here

place before the reader

to

The earliest specimens of Inscriptions themselves in facsimile. of all, that of Mesha (c. B.C. 900), has not been included, Inscription
as facsimiles of
it

with transcriptions in modern

2
.

Hebrew
this

characters
Inscription
,

are

readily obtainable

The

characters

used in

most ancient of the West-Semitic type that are known 3 though they differ but slightly from the earliest of those that are the differences may be studied in detail with the aid figured below
are the
:

of the Tables mentioned below.

Here

are examples of seals

(Figs.
i.

with Aramaic (Figs,

first

and

2)

and

Hebrew
Fig.

3 and

4)

Inscriptions, the

three of which are

Fig.

2.

Fig- 4-

(Levy, Taf.

I, i)

(Levy, Taf. 1, 3)

l.TTTV (Levy, Taf. Ill,

TrOWI!
i)

(Levy, Taf. Ill, 3)

assigned by

M. A. Levy*

to the eighth cent. B.C., while the fourth is

somewhat
1

later.

More extensive Cooke s North-Semitic Inscriptions (1903), Plates XII-XIV; in Plates XLIV-XLVI of the Atlas to Lidzbarski s Handbuch dernordsemitischen and especially in Chwolson s Corpus Inscriptionum HebraiEpigraphik (1898) carum enthaltend Grabinschriften aus der Krim, etc., 1882 (a Table constructed by the eminent German palaeographer Euting, containing specimens of not less
There
is

a good one at the beginning of Gesenius-Kautzsch.

in

Tables

may be found

than 139 alphabets). 2 See Die Inschrift des Konigs

Mesa von Moab

filr akademische Vorlesungen

i.

herausgegeben von Rudolf Smend und Albert Socin (Freiburg Plate I in Lidzbarski s Handbuch (above, n. i).
3

B.,

1886); and

The

Inscription on fragments of a
in 1872,
is,

Cyprus Cooke,
4

bowl dedicated to pH? ?}Q, found in however, considered by some to be of greater antiquity (see
i).
etc.

NSL

Siegel

No. 1 1). The characters are very similar (Lidzb. Atlas, II. und Gemmen mil aramdischen, phb nizischen, althebrdischen

In-

schriften (Breslau, 1869), pp. 6, 8, 34, 37.

i.

Old West-Semitic and Greek

Inscriptions

v
:

No.

was found under the pedestal of a

colossal bull at

Khorsabad

Nos. 3 and 4 were obtained by M. Waddington, the former in Aleppo, The resemblance of some of the characters the latter in Damascus.
to those of the

Greek alphabet

will

be evident

the 1 and D are closely

"i

similar to

A and
1

E, while the forms of n and

become, when turned

round so as to face the

exhibit quite the forms

right, E

and P

respectively.

The

and y

alphabets,

which they still have in modern European and O, but from which in the later Hebrew alphabet

they both diverged considerably. seals and gems are so similar that
to

The
it

characters on old Phoenician

has not been deemed necessary

add

illustrations

2
.

The

following specimens of ancient Inscriptions

from Thera

will illustrate the derivation

s
:

of the Greek alphabet from

the Phoenician

the letters, as

is

often the case in the

left
:

most ancient

Greek

Inscriptions, are read from right to

Fig5-

Fig. 6.

(From Roehl

Imagines Inscriptionum Graecarum Antiquissimae, Berolini, 1883, Nos. i and 4.)

The E does not differ materially from the n in Fig. 3 ; the fl differs but slightly from the S of Mesha"s Inscription, and indeed agrees
NSI. No.
distinct
2

In the Inscription of Mesha as in that to p3^ pjn, from Cyprus (Cooke, 1 1 Lidzb., Plate II, A), the 1 is a simple triangle, with no elongation of the right side downwards ; it thus exactly resembles the Greek A, and is also
, ;

from the

"1

Examples may be seen in Levy, /. c. Taf. II cf. Cooke, PI. IX, B 1-7. 3 For two other rather interesting examples, from the Gortynian Code, and the Treaty between the Eleans and the Heraeans (c. 525 B.C.), see Berger, Hist, de rcriture dans V Antiquite* (1892), pp. 132-4 (also in Roberts, Greek Epigraphy,
;

Pt.

i. (1887), pp. 42, 288, PP- 2 3 ff., 39 ff., etc.).

with

many

other facsimiles of archaic Greek inscriptions,

vi
substantially with the

Introduction
of
s
:

F|

modern printed
the
I,

texts

the r

and K are quite

straight

the

and 3 of Mesha

which has not yet become a

origin
(cf.

line, retains

evident traces of

its

Fig. 3)

the

as
3,

with the N has a double turn at the top, exactly as in Fig.

the

compared the P and

are

more

differentiated, but
I

do not

differ

in

principle from

the forms in Figs. the right, the later

and

2.

By turning
The

the letters round so as to face

is

and usual form of the Greek character

evidence

(in

most

thus cases) immediately produced. confirms the testimony of Herodotus, respecting the origin of the

of Inscriptions

Greek alphabet from Phoenicia *. The most ancient West-Semitic

next to that of

Inscriptions,
\xb>

at present

known,
near

Mesha

are probably the

i>SD

Inscription from
Zinjirli,

Cyprus

(p. iv n. 3),

and the Old Aramaic Inscriptions of

Hd.

5.

58 Of

5t QotviKes OVTOI ol

avv KaS^ai dmKofJ.(voi

a\\a re

iro\\a,

oiKT](ravTes
ypd|i|jurra,

ravrrfv rfjv xwprjv,

OVK (ovra

trplv

taqyayov SidaatcaXia Is TOVS "EAAT/raj, Kal ST\ Kal rois" E\\r]ai, ws e/xof SoKtetv irpSira ptv, rotai Kal airavres
HfpioiKtov

Xpitavrai Qoiviices
f>v6p.ov

fifra 5e, \p6vov Trpoftaivovros,

ypa/jifj.a.Tcui
l<ws.
.

(the shape) ruv

apa ry fyuvy pitTt&aXov Kal -rov 5e atyfas TO. TTO\\O. ruv ^wptav
StSaxy wopa ruiv &OIVIKOJV rcL Archaic Greek characters are

TOVTOV rbv \povov

EAA^j/OH

ot irapa\a!36vTfS
-

fpa/j./MTa fj.(Tappvd(*iffavTfs

ff<p(ow

oXiya fxp^ cavro

termed by him accordingly

(ib.

59) KaB|rf|i a ypafiftara.

different directions, the

how by continued modification in Greek and modern European character on the one hand, and the Hebrew square character on the other, have been developed from a common Out of the archaic 2 , the Greek B arose by turning the letter from left to origin. right, and carrying round the lower part of it so as to form a complete semicircle
little

consideration will shew generally,

the square 3 arose by the opening and ultimate disappearance of the upper part of the original letter, as explained below (p. xiv f.). and P in Greek preserved

the distinctness of type which these letters shew on Mesha"s Inscription : by the addition of a tail to the 1 , and the gradual degeneration of the upper part of both letters, they acquired the great similarity of form which they present in most of the

Hebrew alphabets. Eshmun azar s 1 is almost our Z by successive shorten The ing of the strokes, and extension of the angles between them, t is produced. old P is nearly our L by the addition of a tail on the right, the square 7 is produced. Mesha"s J? is our O ; the first stage in the derivation of ]} will appear
later
;
:

in Plate III.

Out of the old

5),

the Greek

arose by the gradual prolongation

:

downwards of
the final
SJ

is

the upper left-hand part of the letter (see the first stage in Fig. 5) nearly the same as the old form ; the medial 3 merely differs from it

did not bring the scribe

lower part of the letter, when the end of a word hand to a pause (cf. p. xix). The crooked of the archaic Greek (Fig. 5; Roberts, 23 ff., 40 ff.) before long becomes straight (ib. 30, 61).

by the turn

to the left given to the

s

HEBREW

INSCRIBED

TABLET FROM GEZER

(Reproduced by permission of the Palestine Exploration Fund.)

[Face page
vii

i.

The Gezer Inscription

1
.

vii

Aleppo (8th cent. may be passed by

ancient
in
is

B.C.)
;

and we may look

2

For our present purpose, however, these at what is at present the most
Calendar-Inscription discovered
is

Hebrew Inscription known, the

at

1908
later

Gezer (Plate
Mesha"s

I)

Its

date

uncertain, but in

any case

it

than

Inscription,

and

earlier

than the Siloam Inscription

is
3
:

(p. ix).

Those who think

B.C.,

that the
it

Siloam Inscription
*
;

not earlier

than the 3rd cent.

considers
assigns
it

place
5
.

in the 6th cent. B.C.

Lidzbarski

it

much

older than the 6th century

and G. B. Gray

to the 8th century

The

Inscription reads (Lidzbarski)

f

NTT
t?pi>

*)DK inn* irrv

yn
im<

n-p 4

inn

nor inn

11

KP rrv 7 u
(

innratWinor FTishril.

The month

of (2) sowing.

ERRATA
Page
vii, 11. 3,

5 of the inscription

.
fo>

^^^
poor scuac
,

following lines),
it

month and ingathering

the
is

yields a

^^

seems
i,

that,

in spite of its rarity in the

1JVn),
1

Gen.

24

pN

(only once in prose, the old case-ending, the 12 occur

OT.

rences of which in

OT.

are given in

GK.

90.

frequent occurrence in the autographs of the

Was this OT. than

of
it

more
is

in

See Cooke, NSZ. p. 159 ff. and, for the characters, the Atlas to Liclzbarski s Handbuch, Plates XXII-XXIV, XLV, col. i. 2 The inscriptions on ostraka, found in 1910 on the site of the ancient Samaria,
1
;

and belonging to the time of Ahab

3

1911, p. 79 ff.), are more ancient; but facsimiles of these are not at present (July, 1912) available.

(PfQS.
f.

4
*

Stanley A. Cook, PEFQS. 1909, p. 308 Ibid. p. 26 ; Ephemeris, iii. 37.

PEf QS.

1909, p. 32.

HEBREW

INSCRIBED

TABLET FROM GEZER

(Reproduced by permission of the Palestine Exploration Fund.)

[Face page
vii

i.

The Gezer Inscription

1
.

vii

Aleppo (8th cent. may be passed by

ancient
in
is

B.

c.)

and we may look

2

For our present purpose, however, these at what is at present the most
Calendar-Inscription discovered
is

Hebrew Inscription known, the

at

1908
later

Gezer (Plate
Mesha"s

I)

Its

date

uncertain, but in any case

it

than

Inscription,

and

earlier

than the Siloam Inscription

is
s
;

(p. ix).

Those who think

B.C.,

that the
it

Siloam Inscription
B.C.
*
;

not earlier
Lidzbarski

than the 3rd cent.

considers
assigns
it

place

in the 6th cent.

it

much

older than the 6th century

5
.

and G. B. Gray

to the 8th century

The

Inscription reads (Lidzbarski)

r

IITV SJDK

inT

v$b IHY in

ntpa nvy in-p 3

D*W
i>a

nvp

rw
11

4 5
6
7

nxp IHT
nor inn

fP

m<

The month of (2) sowing. I.e. i The month of ingathering [Tishri]. The month of late sowing. 3 The month of cutting (or hoeing up ?) flax. 4 The month of barley-harvest. 5 The month of the general 6 The month of (vine-)pruning. harvest. 7 The month of summerfruits.
i.

UTV.

Though

SjDfcO

("IT

might be read (and similarly

yields a

in the

following lines),
it

month and ingathering

the
is

seems
i,

that,

in spite of its rarity in the

IJVn),
}

OT.
90.

poor sense ; and (only once in prose,

Gen.

24

px

the old case-ending, the 12 occur

rences of which in

OT.

are given in

GK.

frequent occurrence in the autographs of the

Was this OT. than

of
it

more
is

in

See Cooke, NSI. p. 159 ff. and, for the characters, the Atlas to Lidzbarski s Handbuch, Plates XXII-XXIV, XLV, col. i. 2 The inscriptions on ostraka, found in 1910 on the site of the ancient Samaria, and belonging to the time of Ahab (PEFQS. 1911, p. 79 ff.), are more ancient;
1
;

but facsimiles of these are not at present (July, 1912) available.

3

4
5

Stanley A. Cook, PEFQS. 1909, p. 308 Ibid. p. 26 ; Ephemeris, iii. 37.

f.

PEFQS.

1909, p. 32.

viii

Introduction
Ex. 23, 16 }D

MT.

*|DK,

mtrn. 34, 22+. 2. (Am. 7, it, differently), or (Marti, p. 225) B pb, here, apparently, the late sowing in Feb. (Dalman, PEFQS.
1909,
p.

TWJIK

IBDKS

rtttwi

nKJD

e|pKn

:m

118;
cf.

cf.

Wetzstein, ap. Delitzsch on Job 24, 6).

Is.

3.

"WJ?

(or 1&J),

"l-?^

44, 12. Jer.

In Ethiopia

1XJJ is to rra/.

10, 3 (an axe for cutting Flax is usually pulled up ; but

trees).
it

may

have been anciently cut in Palestine, as it is still about Aleppo (ibid. Or (Dalm.) it may have been cut out of the ground with p. 90). cf. as a D^p. was used in time of harvest (Pt dh iv. 4). a
"ttJflO,
1"IB>3,

n?>9

Hos.

2, 7.

21, 9), in April.

5.

The month meant is March. The D is placed below the

6.

4.

tr$fe>

? (2

Sam.

line for

want of space.
i.e.

The month
1

of the reaping (or harvest) of

all things,

of the
will

general harvest in May.

The pruning

("O

Ct. 2, 12)
7. f*p (i.e.

meant
f*?P_)

be (Dalm.

p.

19), the second pruning, in June.

the late

summer
Calendar

fruits
is

(see

on

Sam.

16, i), ripe in July or August.

:

The

imperfect, containing only 8 months

it

but this and other

difficulties

connected with

need not here be considered *.

The

characters are bold and clear, though evidently the

work of an

unpractised hand.

Most of the characters have archaic forms (compare,

f,

for instance, the X, 1, \

n, D, V, p, t?

with the earlier forms in the Tables

of Cooke, Lidzbarski, or

GK.)

there are few or

none of

the curves, or

other modifications, which are characteristic of the later forms.

The

in

1.

is

very abnormal

but this

may be due
2
.

to the inexperience

of the engraver.

The

letters at the

lower left-hand corner are read by

perhaps [p ljX aN Until the discovery of the Gezer Inscription, the Inscription on the wall of the tunnel of Siloam (Plate II) was considered to be the oldest
Lidzbarski as
3X,

known Hebrew
extreme
the
S.

Inscription.

The Pool
hill

of Siloam

is

situated at the

of the Eastern

of Jerusalem (on

the N.

of which

Temple formerly
;

valley

stood), near the entrance to the Tyropoeon and a conduit or tunnel cut through the rock from the Virgin s

See further

PEFQS.

1909,

26

ff.

(Lidzbarski), 30

ff.

(G. B. Gray), 113

ff.

(Daiches, on Babylonian parallels), n8f. (Dalman), 189 ff. (Gray), 194 f. (Lidz Lidzbarski s Epkemeris, iii. 37 ff. (notice, p. 45, the parallel from Tosefta, barski) p. 215, 1. 15 ff., ed. Zuckermandel) ; Marti, ZAW. 1909, p. 222 ff.
;

The

line

above a

letter indicates that the

reading

is

not quite certain.

PLATE

II

[Face page

ix

i.

The Siloatn Inscription

ix

Spring

the one natural spring which Jerusalem possesses

it,

situated

some
it,

distance above
it

on the E.
2
.

side of the

same
is

hill,

leads

down

to

and supplies
feet

with water

The

tunnel

circuitous,

measuring

(Warren), or 1757 feet (Conder), though the distance in a straight line is At a distance of about 19 feet considerably less.

1708

from where the tunnel opens into the Pool of Siloam, and on the right-hand side as one enters it, is an artificial niche or tablet in
the rock, the lower part of which

The

Inscription was

first

is occupied by the Inscription. observed in 1880, by a pupil of Architect

Schick, who, while wading in the Pool with a lighted candle, observed what appeared to be characters engraved on the rock. Ultimately, in 1 88 1, a gypsum cast was obtained by Dr. Guthe, who published

a photograph, with accompanying description, in 1882

since

3
,

which has

been often reproduced. A portion of three lines in the In scription has been destroyed through the wearing away of the rock
but the general sense
literated into
is

quite plain.

Here
:

is

the Inscription, trans

modern Hebrew
-|ijn
.
.

characters
,

**********
p
.
B>N

bp

y[ctw

3]pjni>

n
.

3i * * * * * *
.

mpjn nan rvn mi nox vhv nijni nn 1x3 mr rvn -a jE D

. . . . .
. . . . ,

!>K

mpjn PK
. .

* * *
.

fnan
.

iyi
.

hx
.

N-I

13^1

;na

by

|na
.

ijn

mp^>

B>K

wxnn
,

i3n
,

nap: 4

Soi

TOK

ej^KT
.

5 nxo3
,

naian
.

^N
.

NXisn
.

jo
,

D on 5
.

oaxnn

two

by

nvn

ma
this

rvn

nex

n 6

I.e.

i.

[Behold] the piercing through!

And

was the manner of

lifting

the piercing through.

2.

Whilst yet [the miners were

up]

the pick, each towards his fellow,

cubits to

and whilst yet there were three be pierced [through, there was heard] the voice of

each

call-

3. ing to his fellow, for there

was a

fissure (?) in the

rock on the right-

hand ........ And on the day of the

1

Not

Volume.

the Virgin s Pool, as stated incorrectly in the Palaeographical Society s This is a small artificial reservoir near St. Stephen s Gate, and has no

connexion with either the Virgin s Spring, or the Pool of Siloam. a See the Plan in EB, ii, facing col. 2419-20, or G. A. Smith, Jerusalem (1907), and comp. i. 87-92. ii, Plan facing p. 39
;

ZDMG.

1882, pp. 725-50.

See also Lidzbarski, Ephemeris,

i.

53.

Introduction
piercing through, the miners

4.

(lit.
:

hewers) smote each so as to meet

his fellow, pick against pick

5. 6.

and there flowed

1200 cubits; and one hun-

the water from the source to the pool,

dred cubits was the height of the rock over the head of the miners. The Hebrew is as idiomatic, and flowing, as a passage from the
i.

Old Testament,
is

nsp.J or H3J53
al.)
;

does not occur in the

a hole or aperture.
:

OT.

3pj

to

pierce (2 Ki. 12, 10

p.

|^? is
iSP.

On
2

the use

of 131, comp.
as Gen. 48,

192

note.
4, 7.

2.

as Jer. 6, 21
i.e.

usually ^jn.

iijn

7, cf.

Am.

3.

JVn,

probably JVn as

Ki. 9, 37

Kt.

uncertain, the
11T

"Hi?-

meaning is altogether word being not otherwise known, and the derivation from producing no suitable sense. 4. mp^, vocalize rnp. p, the infin. of 5- The order of the numerals in ?]i?N1 DTiNO (the smaller before
Nu.
3,

mt:

the letters are quite clear, but the

the greater), as

OT.,

except in

P, Ez. Chr.

50 ^Ni niNO vh&\ but the order is rare in 1 (GK. 134*), and with fj^N very rare
.

5-6. fiDN TlKO, as rut?

p.

nSD Gen.
No. 8;

5, 3,

and often besides in P (LOT.

1348).

131 (edd. 1-5,

p. 124),

GK.

On
The

the orthography

of the Inscription, see below, pp. xxx, xxxii.

Inscription of

words, as in the
2
.

Mesha

are separated by dots, without spaces

The Inscription has been generally assigned to who is stated to have made the pool, and the
water into the city
(2 Ki. 20, 20)

the time of Hezekiah,

conduit,

and brought

to the west side of the city of

David

(2

Ch. 32, 30) in terms which appear exactly to describe the

is
3
.

function of the tunnel in which the Inscription

E.
J. Pilcher,

however (PSBA. 1897,

P-

l6 5

ff
->

wit-k a

Taole of Alphabets

1898, p. 213 ff.), pointed out the resemblance of several of its characters to those of a later date, and argued that it belonged to the time of Herod. His conclusions

were combated by Conder (PEFQS. 1897, p. 204 ff.) he replied ibid. 1898, p. 56 f. Stanley A. Cook, in his detailed palaeographical study of the Old
:

Hebrew alphabet

late as this, agrees (cf. p.

1909, p. 284 ff., though not accepting a date as 305 bottom) that the characters point to a date later than c. 700 B.C.: if placed early, he remarks (p. 308), it embarrasses, and will always he cannot, indeed (ibid. n. 2), fix the embarrass, Hebrew palaeography
in the

PEFQS.

approximate date with any confidence, but thinks a date in the time of Simon, son of Onias (see Ecclus. 50, 3 Heb.), probably c. 220 B.C., not impossible. Let us hope that future discoveries will make the date clearer.
1

Add

Ki.

5, 12,

Ez. 48, 16. 30.32. 33. 34;

and

see, for further particulars,

f.,

Herner, Syntax der Zahlworter a See further, NSf. No. 2.

im AT.,
*

1893, pp. 72
/. c.

74, 79.
;

Gnthe,

pp. 745-8

Smith,

i.

102

f., ii.

151.

i.

The Siloam Inscription

it is

XI

For our present purpose

further.

not necessary to consider this question

Although some of
Plate

the Siloam characters

do resemble the

later, rather than the earlier, examples of the older script (see, in

Lidzbarski
N,

XLVI, Table
tail

III,
2,

the parallel cross strokes of the

the

T,

the curving

in 3, D,

and

a,

and the disappearance of

still

the left-hand upright stroke of the v), they are the archaic type, and there
is

substantially of
to the

no appreciable approximation

square

type.

The Samaritan character, as stated in the from the Talmud and the Fathers, preserves the old Hebrew type, the modifications being
originally,

passages quoted above

in all essential features

confined to details, and

:

no doubt, being merely

calligraphic variations

In Palestine the old Hebrew character was used regularly on coins,

from the
(B.C.

earliest

Sheqels and half-Sheqels struck by Simon Maccabaeus

141-135)

to those of the Great Revolt, A.D.

65-68, and of Simon

is

Bar-cochab, A.D.
third year
(j

I32-I35
nj>)

1
.

The example

(Fig. 7)
:

a Sheqel of the

i.e. 3

of

Simon Maccabaeus
Fig.
7.

(From Madden

Coins of the Jews, p. 68, No.

5.)

As

characters that were entirely

unknown would

evidently not be

suitable for use

upon

coins,

it

may be

inferred that though in the time

,

of Christ the older character had been generally superseded (for the

Matth.
it

5,
still

was

by no means the smallest letter in the old alphabet), known, and could be read without difficulty.
8, is

Madden, Coins of the Jews

(ed. 2, 1881), pp.

67

ff.,

198

ff.,

233

ff.

xii

Introduction

In the characters represented hitherto, no tendency to modification

in the direction of the

a tendency

first

modern square type has been observable. Such manifests itself in the Aramaic alphabet, and may be
Plate III

traced most distinctly in Aramaic Inscriptions from Egypt.

is

a facsimile of the

Carpentras

stele
is

1
,

monument
d Inguimbert

carved in lime
is

stone, the early history of

which

not known, but which

in the
is

now

deposited in the Bibliotheque et Muse*e

town of

Carpentras (dep. Vaucluse) in France.

The monument

a funereal

one

the representation above the Inscription exhibits the

embalmed

body of the deceased, a lady named Taba, resting on the lion-shaped bier, and attended by the jackal-headed Anubis at the feet, and by the
hawk-headed Horus
vases beneath.
at

the head, with the four customary funereal

The

figures stationed as

mourners

at a little distance

from the head and

feet

of the bier are Isis and Nephthys.

The

first

three lines of the Inscription are about

9^ inches long

the height of

the letters

is

f of an inch, or a
(

little
i.

more.

The

Inscription
is

= CIS.
noiK
si?

II.

141

= NSf.
snn

No.

75),

in square

characters,

as follows:

Nr6tf

"T

Knacn
x-oi
;

mn
vb

jon rona
ts"N3

non

men

B*K

may
v in

Djn:

Tip

po nois DIP ...... .TDH pn

mna now
njnM nrta

Dip
<in

I.e.

i.

Blessed be Taba, the daughter of Tahapi, devoted worshipper

of the
2.

God
evil

Osiris.

Aught of
uttered.

she did not, and calumny against any

man

she never

3. 4.

Before Osiris be thou blessed

from Osiris take thou water.

Be thou a worshipper

(sc. before Osiris),

!].

my

darling; and

among

the pious [mayest thou be at peace

i.

^C

1
!"?

1 1
:

Monk
is

is

an Egyptian word, meaning perfect, pious; the

prefix ta (/

the fern, article.

T^Heb.

DT: the demonstrative with

the force of a relative, as regularly in Aramaic.

But

if

= Arab.

is
jj>)

usually hardened to

in

Aram. (Dan. Ezr. passim)

the

same form,

Plate

LXIV

in the Palaeographical Society s

Volume.

PLATE

III

Face page

xii]

i.

Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions

i,

xiii

however, recurs in Plate V, lines

is

3,

5,

and, as

is

now known,
1
.

the form

all

but uniformly found in Egyptian Aramaic

the oldest extant form
in the
3

2.

DJ?^P
in
:

something"* is

of the
4
,

Mandaic as DN1TO,
comp.

Targums

as Djnt?
is

word which appears : and in Syriac as

ZDMG,

xxxiv. 568, 766.

to

B"N3

the older form of the Syr.

21,

ui-o evil:
often,

comp. C^Nl

be evil in the

Targums, Gen.

n, and

Nt^a (emph.) evil, rn?Jj and rnpK are the usual Aram, forms JHS must correspond to what is usually written in of 3 fem. pf.

Aram, as ^~)p
is

(see
;

Dan.

3, 8.

6,

25)

in

Mandaic, however, the root

J"|$L>,

written

pp

and comp.
Blpp.

Syr.

)^*>

= Heb.

and Mand.

N35J>13

:=jfcC*.o!o:=Heb.

The term

will

be used here in the derived

(though this explanation is not free from objec cannot mean perfect (n?3FI) because adjectives of this tion) form are very rarely derived from verbs (the Aram, form is
sense of
5
.

calumny

nn

y"y

<*+*),

and because, as the

subj. of

mK,

we should expect
OS?,

the
17.

emphatic nnon. If 6, i. 6. 12, it must mean

as in the world
earthly
it

nnn = Syr.
there,

^br=Heb.

as

in Ezr.

5,

yonder, the speaker being conceived

referring to
:

beyond the grave, and therefore

yonder."

this

life

as

"

This seems, however, rather forced

s

and

is

perhaps better to adopt Lagarde

"

suggestion that

nn = Syr.

j>

ofcoo (rad. yxaol)

ever"

(Dr. Wright).

The

word must be allowed

See the Glossaries of Sayce-Cowley, Aramaic Papyri discovered at Assuan

It is (1906), and Sachau, Aramdische Papyrus aus ... Elephantine (1911). also the form found in the old Aramaic of Zinjirli and Nineveh, and in that of

Babylon, Tema, and even Cilicia.

See the particulars and references given in

LOT?
2

1504,

515.
scibile

From ND jn3O
Levy
s

quid

(cf.
ii.

Fleischer, in

Chald. Worterb.

3 Now (1912) attested as early as not as B.C. 510 (Sachau, 52, see p. 185), and also occurring elsewhere in

V^lp, knowledge, from JJT, Dan. 5, 12) 567 Noldeke, Mandaische Gramm., 186. B.C. 407 and 419 (Sachau, 2, 14; 6, 7), if
; ;

Egyptian Aramaic (see Sachau

Glossary, p. 2851, and in Nabataean (Cooke, NSI. 94, 5, of the ist cent. A.D.). Also in the pi. NDDjnJO, Sachau, 2, 12. 3, n. 4 So in the Palmyrene Tariff Inscription of A.D. 137, NSI, 147, i. 5 }ST1; 8, 9
s
5 6

Lagarde, Symmicta,

ii.

p. 61

f.

Comp.

"^xXj,

juj^,
*T%

y~
1
P"

i,^

-N.. ft ,

i-^o,

*AO>,

-n, TV, nif,

?P,

"*P,

(Lagarde,

Anmerkungen zur

ua^oi, by the side ot griech, Obers, der

b Proverbien, 1863, on 4, 3 ).

xiv
to be uncertain.

Introduction
as

3.

D"]^.

|B,

Dan.

2, 6,

and

often,

po,

i.e.

f?P.

The
tions

expression Receive water

1
;

may be illustrated from Greek Inscrip and the representation of the bestowal of water upon the

dead

is

common on
is

of no explanation)
"TlDy?

4. iny3 (which admits Egyptian monuments. supposed to be an error of the stone-cutter for

my
:

pleasant,

delightful

one

(cf.

Sam.
(or 1.n)

i,

26.

Cant.

7,

7).

njpn=Jj^
supplied

the pious.

At the end nD te

Mn may be

plausibly

some have thought that traces of these letters The language of the Inscription discernible on the stone.
pure Aramaic
in
:

are even
is

almost

Hebrew (or Phoenician) element

2
.

is,

however, present

EX
The

and Tip (np6)

to

date of this Inscription

is

not perfectly certain

but

it

belongs

probably

the fourth cent. B.C.

An
B.C.

earlier type of the

is

Egyptian

Aramaic character, dating from

of Saqqarah (2 miles

482,

exhibited on the stele

s
;

NW.

of Memphis), found in 1877

the stele of

Carpentras has been preferred for reproduction here, as the characters

(in the

photograph) are more

distinct.

Observe that the upper part

formation of

of the

2, 1, 1,

and y

is

open

this is the first stage in the

is

the later square character, of these letters,

which

ultimately produced, in the case

top of

by the disappearance of the two parallel lines at the and by the addition of a tail to the y. (These letters are formed similarly on the Saqqarah stele.) The stroke at the upper
3, 1,
"I,

right-hand corner of the X

is

almost,

if

not quite, separated from the

:

transverse stroke which forms the body of the letter

this is
4
.

a similar

change
1

in the direction of the later

form of the character

The two

Boeckh, Corp. Inscr. Grace. 6562

avtjp
TTJ

0(ofs) KfaraxOoviots}. Avprj\ia Tlpoaobw

-

AioaicovpiSqs
tinf/vxfi, Kvpia,

eavrov

Kal BO((TJ) trot

awfiiy \prfarorarri Kal y\vKVTO.TTi ftvtlas X-P IV 6 Oatpis TO t^xpov viSojp. The same wish, ib. 6717.

2 Both now (1912) known to occur frequently in Egyptian Glossaries in Sayce-Cowley and Sachau.

Aramaic:

see the

Plate

LXIII
I

in the Palaeographical
:

Society

Volume

Lidzbarski,

Plate

cf. the transcription, with notes, in NSf. (drawn by the author) No. 71. The Inscription is dated the 4th year of Xerxes ( =B. c. 482) the name Xerxes is written KHN^t^n Hshiarsh (Pers. KhshayArshS), as regularly in

XXVIII.

Egyptian Aramaic (see the Glossaries in Sayce-Cowley and Sachan). * The form of the N (as of many of the other letters) in Palmyrene is, however, the one which approaches most closely to the square type see Fig. 1 1 below, and
:

the Tables in

Cooke or

Lidzbarski.

I.

Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions

Pi

xv

lower horizontal strokes of the old

is

are

merged

in one,

which however

separated from the perpendicular stroke, and hangs

down from

the

upper horizontal stroke, thus anticipating the form ultimately

1

assumed

and t have both nearly assumed the modern form, by the letter. n appears (as on the Saqqarah stele) with only a single horizontal
bar: the bar,
if

a
of

little

lowered, produces H,
(as
in the

H,

if

little

raised, n.
"

On

the

stone

Mesha

Inscriptions figured above)

appears composed of four distinct strokes (like Z with two parallel

strokes

on the

left

at the top):

here the four strokes are crumpled

up becomes
in
its

so as to form a sort of triangle, which,

the

when reduced
^

in size,
still

modern V

In the stele of Saqqarah, the

appears

old form.
left,

The two
still

diverging lines towards the top of the 3,

stele,

on the
line,

which

appear on the Saqqarah

become

a single
its

turned up at the end, which in the Papyri becomes in

line.

turn
to

a single thick

D exhibits a modification which

is

difficult
is

describe, but which,

when
1
.

the

tail,

as happens afterwards,

curled

round

to the left,

produces an evident approximation to the modern

*i

form of the
a longer
tail,

letter
{?

scarcely differs from T except

by having
:

has been modified, and approaches the modern type

almost the same form appears on the stele of Saqqarah.

longer a complete cross
right-hand side of the
:

is

no

the horizontal cross-line

is

confined to the
:

letter,

and

is

further prolongation of this deflection,

deflected downwards by the and the accompanying reduction

is

of the

upper part of the perpendicular stroke, the modern n

7,
,

produced.

3,

B,

are not materially changed, shewing, as

was

said, that the transition to the

square character was gradual, and not

accomplished
separated, not

for

all

the letters at the

same

time.

The words

are

by

dots, but

by small spaces.

In Papyri, the softer material, written upon by a reed-pen, led

naturally to the production of
is

more cursive

characters.

Here

(Plate IV)

part of an Inscription written on a Papyrus discovered in 1907-8,

at Elephantine, the ancient

below the First Cataract:

Yeb, at the extreme south of Egypt, just it is dated in the 2nd year of Xerxes

Cf. Lidzbarski, p. 191

and see Plates

XLV,

cols.

6-25,

XL VI,

II a, cols. 2, 6.

xvi

Introduction

(B.C.

484),
l
.

and

is

consequently two years older than the Saqqarah

it

stele

Transliterated into square characters,

reads

H
v

JD3J

N3H3N

H3T

K1SD3

}3TI3

1 1 1

K-raiK

nso
N3i>D

cnpt N37O JV3

PTID n n?N unaa? pn-io^ p^y 13 1 4 ivaa pea K nao mpi

...... spa ti| jcna *|D3 nb 3in: torus 15 ..... N27 jva n jonaa 071? njxi Kn?K 16 Niiaya Kbcnn ny nnD^ D^ HJN j^ 17
T

nx^nN DS ^y

ynn
at

nna 18

The
is

Inscription (taking into account the part not here reproduced)

a contract between two Jews of the military colony

to supply provisions for

Elephantine

and a dealer

two

hundreds

(companies) of

the garrison;

what has been supplied

and the passage quoted deals with the payment for but the words lost at the ends of the lines
:

make

it

impossible

to

give

a continuous
:

translation.

The

parts

which remain may be rendered as follows

ii

.....

written

(i.e.

named)

in this deed.

We

will give

12. the house of the king

(=the government), and

us) to
.
.

before the scribes

of the treasury
13.

by our hand
written

(= through
[in this

bring to these
.

men who

are

(named)

deed]

14. to thee

by number

(or

by

mna s)

in the
.
. .

house of the king, and

of. ...

15.
1 6.

We

before the scribes of the tr[easury] 2 shall owe thee 100 karashas of

silver, silver

1 7.

thou hast authority over (a charge upon) our salary, which the house of the king [gives] to us thou hast authority to take (it) until thou art fully paid for
the god.
;

And

the corn.
1

8.

Hoshea has

written (this deed) at the

mouth

(dictation) of Ahiab.

13. paiD, inf.

Qal from 73
1

which occurs

in these

Papyri in a trans.
house].

sense

(1.

42,

7.

43

(i),

"jnu?

J^3 bring me to thy

In Bibl.

Sachau, Aramaische Papyrus undOstrakaauseinerjiidischenMilitdr-Kolonie zu Elephantine (1911), No. 25 (p. 99). a A Persian weight, equal to 10 shekels (Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, iii. 76, 130).

PLATE IV

Face page xvi]

EGYPTIAN ARAMAIC PAPYRUS

Reproduced, by permission, from Plate XXVI of the Facsimiles of Manuscripts and Inscriptions published by the Palaeographical Society.

[Face page xvii

i.

Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions

i>3n,

xvii
the

Aram., Tgg., and Syr., only the Aphel, ^ata, form in Egyptian Nabataean and Cappadocian Aramaic,
Ezr.
5,
,

^o/T
fV-.N
:

n^>N,

Jer. 10,

u,

15 Kt., for the Biblical Aram, and Targumic

see

Lex,

io8o b

LOT.
7,

255

w.

15.

ftsna,

BH3 1
DID,
6.

as the
16.

name
B7CJ>,

of a weight,
i.e.

occurs often besides in these Inscriptions.

4,
(

20.

24

al.

(Z<?.r.

ni5
ii.

b
).

see

Sayce-Cowley,

&?& Ezr. L 6, P 3

= Lidzbarski,

Ephemeris,

224,

237, 3).

The word may mean

:

properly a portion or measure of food (Sachau, p. 52

(TLTOfjxTpiov

Luke
17.

12, 42, PS. col.

cf. Ue;3 = 3279; and Sachau, Pap. 36 (Taf.

32),
1

8).

8.

03
i>y,

so Sayce-Cowley,
6. 17.
1

N^Bnn, see Sachau, Pap. 28 (Taf. 28-9), n. 17. L 16. Cf. in Heb. Jer. 36, 4 7113 an3 1
8.

1.TBT ^55.

As was remarked

above, the differences from the Carpentras script

are due mainly to the

more

yielding nature of the material used for

producing the characters.

Instead of the sharply cut characters incised

the strokes, especially the horizontal

on the Carpentras
stele

stele,

and

slanting ones, are thick;

and those

lines

which are

straight in the

shew a tendency

to curve.

And

in 3, 1, 3,

1, the part

open

at the top
its

almost disappears owing to a single thick stroke taking

this stroke ultimately

place

becomes the top

line of these letters

in the

square form.
following (Plate

The
script

V)

is

a specimen of the Egyptian Aramaic

in the British
2
.

on a fragment of Papyrus now

Museum, belong
is

ing to the late Ptolemaic or

Roman
II.
i.

period

Here

a transliteration

of the Inscription

(=CIS.

1458= .MS/.
n
3

No. 76 B):

...... tota nay inn in JMIB ....... yi lex ND^JD n N^D BWS 12 ....... ..... ni i^n anna inn ion nta(p) ...... ND rvas? n tMtn ftrv n .....
"is

3 4

1
iii.

Read
76.

incorrectly

by Sayce-Cowley (A

7 al.)

KO3.
s

See Lidzbarski, Ephemeris,

Plate

XXVI

in the Palaeographical Society

i.

Volume.
s

So De Vogue in CIS.H. the word is transliterated

1365

145 B.

In the Palaeographical Society

Volume,

xviii

Introduction
lNK

pnrp *b TEHJI

"]^>N5

.... 6

I.e.

i.

... for
.

my
. .

sons according to the testimony of the king, and

he heard
2. 3.

... the son of Punsh, he delayed

... the son of

(?).

The

king answered
.
.

Punsh the words which the king had spoken, and

kill

4.

... thou didst

strength,

them.

Mayest thou go with the sword of thy

and ....

5 6

and the captives which thou hast taken this year in them and thy bones shall not descend into She ol, and thy shadow
;

on

the thousands of the king

....

The
be a
to the

text, as is evident, is

much

mutilated.

The

subject appears to

tale,

composed

either

by a heathen Aramaean,

who was

hostile

Egyptian religion \ or by an Egyptian Jew as a Haggadah on

Ex.

i,

more probably

the latter.

The language

is

Aramaic, tinged
2.

Carpentras Inscription) with Hebrew or Phoenician. Nata njy, cf. Dan. 2, 5. 8. 20 etc. 4. ton them, as Ezr. 4, 10. 23
(like the
-inn, c f.

etc.

Ezr. 5, 5.

5.

NT (fern.), as
i.

Sachau

2,
;

17

NWN3
those,

NT.

6!

NT

ND^,
12 etc.

Repert.
l

d &pigr. Se m.
*7

247 NT

NHT3
6.

=Bibl. Aram. NT
as

(Lex. io86
3,

cf.

and

p.

xii

bottom.

"=]?&<

Dan.

pnrp from rin^ the

common Aram, word

for^o down.

The
to the

characters are in general very similar to those of Plate III;

is

but, in so far as there

a difference, they have approached nearer a form

square type.
n.

The n assumes
of the
letter
ID

more resembling

the

square
left,

The

tail

and the whole

shews a tendency to curl round to the approximates to the modern form. In

is

the

same way the right-hand stroke of the n

letter,

longer,
*]nn
(1.

and
4),
is

curls

round, so that the

especially the

one
11.

in
"jnn,

closely

resembles the square n.

exactly like the

The 3
final
*].

(notice

T OiJ)
3

almost

square

The

square form of

is

produced
:

by the stroke on the

left

being gradually brought lower

down

see

There

is

an allusion to the

Egyptian gods

in the first

column of the Papyrus

published as Plate

XXV

of the same

Volume (Cooke, NSI. 76 A).

i.

Transition

to the

Square Character

xix

col.

13 in

GK.

the Inscription

1H Dnn

Gezer (Lidzbarski, Plate XLVI,

(ibid.

II a, col. 3),

Boundary of Gezer from and the Palmyrene 5

in

Cooke, Plate XIV, cols. 6, 7, 9). The gradual change of script can also be well studied in the Table Gesenius-Kautzsch (ed. 1910). From this it appears at once that
cols. 10, 13
;

Plate

XLV,

the characters of
Zinjirli,

Mesha"s

Inscription

(c.

840

B.C.)

and those of

near Aleppo, of about a century

later, are practically identical

only the B, for instance, being in the latter

more curved

at the

top

than in the former.

ninth to the
the
first

In the Phoen. and

Hebrew
is

characters from the

cent. B.C. (cols.

in the

2-6) there

not any great change:

marked changes occur

cent. B.C.;

Aramaic

types,

from the eighth to the

third

and the

earliest

examples of the square

Hebrew

character (col. 14) are developed most immediately, not from the

Hebrew

series (cols. 3-6), but

from the Aramaic

that, of the
final

series (cols. 11-13).

It further

appears from

this

Table

characters,

~\, \, P),

f
:

are really the older,

in the

more

original forms of the letters in question

tail

middle of a word, in cursive writing, the to the left, producing the medial forms 3, 3,

was curved round

;

D,

at

the

end of

a word, where there was a natural break, the original long perpen
dicular
original
line

remained.
:

The

final D,

on the other hand,

form of the

is

not an

form

it

arises

from the

later

being closed

up on
cf.

the

left

(see col.
.

14; and comp. Lidzbarski, Plate

XLVI, Ha,

XLV, cols. 20-25) From the immediate neighbourhood

is

of Palestine an early example

of the Aramaic transition-alphabet

sisting of

afforded by an Inscription, con

(

a single word, found at Araq el-Emir

Cliff of the

Prince

),

in the country of the ancient

Ammonites, 9 miles

NW.

of

Heshbon *.

Here

Hyrcanus, grandson of Tobias, and greatOnias II, being persecuted by his brothers, found himself a retreat among the hills (B.C. 183-176), where he built
(Jos. Ant. xii. 4.

n)

nephew of

the

High

Priest

a stronghold, one feature of which consisted in a series of fifteen

1

See, for further particulars

ff.

on the gradual evolution of the square characters,

(Phoenician), p. 183 ff. (older Heb.), p. 186 ff. (Aram.), and the three Tables at the end of his Atlas. pp. 189-192 (square Hebrew) 2 See Socin s Paldstina u. Syrien (in Baedeker s Handbooks], Route 10 (end)
Lidzbarski, p. 175
;

in

more recent editions

(revised by Benzinger),

Route

17.

C 2

xx
caves, in

Introduction
two
hollowed out in the side of the rock
1
.

tiers,

At the

1 1 and 1 3 in the right hand of the entrance to two of the caves (Nos. surface of the rock beside Memoirs) in the lower tier, on the smoothed

No. 13

(Fig. 8),

on

the

unsmoothed

surface beside

No.

(Fig. 9),

stands the Inscription, in letters nearly eight inches high.

Fig. 8 (A).
-

A".

;..

Fig.

9( B )-

j
(From No. 383 of the Photographs
published by the Palestine Explora tion Fund.)

(From the Facsimiles attached to Chwolson s Corp. Inscr, Hebr No 1^

From its position, the Inscription cannot well be period when the caves were constructed, and may, of 2 It must be read H*:iiD The transitional character
.

earlier

than the

course, be later.
of the alphabet
in the
1

appears

in the

approximations to the square type

without
"

the right-hand upper stroke, in the 2

open

at the top,

and

in the

and

n approaching the type of Fig.

1

10.

The

0, also, originally a cross

vol.

See the view of the caves in the Memoirs of the Survey of Eastern Palestine, i (1889), opposite p. 72 ; or in G. A. Smith s Jerusalem (1908), ii. 426 (also,

p. 428, a
3

cf. p. 427 n. De Vogue" {Mtlanges, 1868, p. 162 f.), and disputed. Clennont-Ganneau {Researches in Palestine, 1896, ii. 261), both of whom had

photograph of the cave with the Inscription A),

The reading has been

seen and copied the Inscription, read it H^D. On the other hand, the Photo graph (Fig. 8), and the reproductions in the Memoirs, p. 76 f., and the Plate

and so iT2"iy opposite p. 84, seemed to leave no doubt that the first letter was J? was adopted in the first edition of the present work, and by Lidzbarski in 1898
;

(pp. 117,
in

It appears now, however, from the very complete descriptions 190). the Publications of the Princeton Archaeological Expedition to Syria in 1904-5 [Division II (Ancient Architecture in Syria), (Southern Syria), Part i

Division III (Inscriptions), A (Southern Syria), Part i (Ammonitis), pp. 1-7 (Hebrew Inscriptions of Araq el-Amir), by Enno Littmann], Div. Ill, A, Pt. i, p. 2 (Photos. and B), that (as stated above)

(Ammonitis), pp. 1-28

Araq

el- Amir);

there are in fact two inscriptions (cf. Smith, 427 .), one (A) agreeing with Fig. 8, the other (B) agreeing with Fig. 9 (except that the circle of the D should be closed at

the second can only be read PP21O , and this determines the reading of the top) there are no traces visible, any more than there are in the photograph the first (in
:

from which Fig. 8 is taken, of a line, like that hand upper-corner; but Littmann expresses
inscription on the

in
it

B, drawn upwards from the leftdistinctly in his sketch of the

iii.

same page).

Lidzbarski

now

accepts iTQlD (Ephem.

49).

i.

Transition

to the

Square Character

xxi

circle, shews (in B) a modification, similar to that in Aramaic and Palmyrene, and approximating to the square Egyptian

enclosed in a

type.

The

next Inscription

is

that of the

B e ne

Hezir, above the entrance

Tomb of St. James, situated on the Mount of Olives, immediately opposite to the SE. angle of the Temple-area.
to the so-called
Fig. 10.

Inscription of the

Be ne

Hezir.
6.

(From Chwolson

Corpus Inscriptionum Hebraicarum, No. No. 148 A.)

Cf.

NSL
nr

pm

yycsv

nnw
mri

irjn*

mn nry?

3[3]t?om i3p[n]

"03

nryiw *|D[vh] ... 3 ... p epv y3 Tin J3D ....

the resting-place for Eleazar, Hanniah,

I. e.

This

is

the

tomb and

Yo ezer, Yehudah,
The

Simeon, Yohanan,

sons of Yoseph, the son of ..... [and for Yojseph and Eleazar, the sons of Hanniah,
(i.

.... of the sons

e.

family) of Hezir.
the square character.
i

Here we observe Hebrew advancing towards

Hezir, ancestor of a priestly family,

is

mentioned

Ch. 24, 15:

is

another Hezir, not a priest, but one of the chiefs of the people,

named Neh.

10, 21.

The

date of the Inscription

is

probably shortly

before the Christian era.

is

The advance

towards the square character

|j,

very marked.
;

Notice, for instance, the N, the n, the

the D, the

J?,

the 1

and

the bar of the n, higher

up than
left

in the

Egyptian Aramaic.

Notice also that by the turn to the

the
3,

given to the lower part of

when standing
letter are

in the

middle of a word, a medial and a final

form of the
line)
:

distinguished (as in
is

pnv

at the

end of the
it,

first

when

follows, this turn

:

regularly connected with

i.
1

giving
T

rise to

a ligature

the

same happens with 3 followed by

and

are

xxii

Introduction

scarcely distinguishable from one another.

The
.

first letters
! ,

of line 3

are uncertain

they

may

perhaps be read as
is

The

ligature just

spoken of

peculiarly
a

T3 common
.

in the

Palmyrene
differs

character.
,

The Palmyrene

Inscriptions

are written in a dialect of

Aramaic 3 and date from

r

B.C.

9 onwards; the character

from

the square type only in calligraphical details.

is

specimen

(Fig.

n)

given

(=A SI.

No. 141),

for the sake of illustrating the

tendency

of Aramaic on the East, as well as on the West, of Palestine to

advance in the direction of the square character

Fig.

n.

(From De Vogtie

Syrie Centrale, 1868, Plate V, No. 30*.)

H nn
*13
s

jn3p
irony
1:3

I. e.

This tomb

is

that of

Athinathan, son of Kohilu, which

built over

m^y

him

his sons
his sons,

pTTl I^TD JMVO JO 1

"03

Kohilu and Hairan,

of (the family of) the children of Maitha,

in

III!

-3

HI
is

T\y& J133

!W3

the

month Kanun,
9]*.

in the year

304

[J1J3
1

written J131]

= B.c. [Seleuc.

may be

Other Inscriptions (mostly fragmentary) from approximately the same period, seen in Chwolson s volume, Nos. 2 (113 DPlD Boundary [Aram.] of No. 5 is bilingual, and Gezer), 3, 4, 5 (Aram., from the Hauran), 7, 8, 9, 10.
be found also in
?
2

may

De Vogue,
08a<Va0os

Syrie Centrale, p. 89

n33

""I

niCPI
Xa/jparj;

Arv^Aoi; yKoSofirffftv T^V

<STJ]Kr\v

See Cooke, NSS. pp. 263-340.

Which

exhibits

some noticeable

affinities
;

with the Aramaic of Ezra and Daniel

see Sachau,

ZDMG.

1883, pp. 564-7

A. A. Bevan,

Commentary on Daniel
letters,

(1892), pp. x, 37, 211 if.; LOT? 504. * On the Nabafaean Inscriptions, in which

some of the

esp.

10

i.

Transition to the Square Character

xxiii

NSI. No. 148 B), from the lintel of In the following Inscription ( a door, belonging to a ruined Synagogue at Kefr-Eir im, a village a few miles NW. of Safed in Galilee, discovered by M. Renan in the
course of his expedition in Palestine in 1863, the transition to the square character may be said to be accomplished the date may be
:

c.

300

A.D. (Renan), or

somewhat

earlier

(Chwolson).

Fig. 12.

Ini

n
(From Chwolson
s

Corpus Inscriptionum Hebraicarum

nioipio
ai

l
,

No.

7.)

nov

>N"i52

nm

oipon

DI

nma Nan
I.e.

nrn

sppB>n

ntw
all
:

p
!

May
upon

there be peace in this place, and in

Levite, son of Levi, made
his

the places of Israel

Yosah the

this lintel

may

blessing

come

works

B>VyD

is

evidently

an error of the carver

for

VB>J?O

he

first

omitted
this

the

by accident, and then attached it at the end. Inscription the close resemblance between 1 and

&

Notice in

which
">,

in the
left
;

Inscription of th$

B 9 n6

Hezir are distinguished by the turn to the

a survival of the primitive form of the letter

also that

at the top of the

between 3 and D

(cf. p. Ixvii),

as well as the final D.

Notice
(p.
iii)

also the regular plena scriptio.

in a character

The resemblance
be evident.
is

of mrp to

mni

such as
a

this will

In

conclusion,

specimen

given

(Plate

Phoenician Inscription

(=NSL

No.

4),

VI) of a complete which may serve as an

example of the style, as regards character and general appearance, in which the autographs of the Old Testament must have been written. The Inscription was found at Zidon in 1887, engraved on the base of
a sarcophagus of black basalt, of Egyptian workmanship, and bearing

and ]} approach closely to the square characters, see Cooke, NSI. p. 2i4ff., and, for the characters, Plate XIV, Lidzb. Plate XLV. 1 In the original the Inscription is in one line it is divided here merely for
:

convenience.

See Photograph No. 459 of the Palestine Exploration Fund.

xxiv

Introduction no doubt
originally for
to

in front a hieroglyphic Inscription, designed

use in Egypt, but diverted from

its

original

purpose and taken

Phoenicia in order to receive the remains of a Phoenician prince.

The
latter

contents of the hieroglyphic Inscription bear no relation to those

Transliterated into square characters, the

of the Phoenician one.

reads as follows

fa

DJIV ita mnfc?y jro

nn
s

IJK

p3
n hx
!>N

33^ wix ita

mn^y jm
K>K

-iry:r:tj>K

pun
SIDD

jbiK

x
r

pan J^IN K 3

rv

DIN

ns o
^21

jmn iw T^y nna

n^o DJO
^nn

4
5

nan ^N

i>K

p&a 22^

I)N n!?2

na

DNI NH i2in nintry nayn a jrnn ^NI ^n^y n 6

BP nnn

n^nn jnr [7$ i[aj ^M jrann

mi

nby nnan n

I.e.
2.

i.

I Tabnith, priest of Ashtart,

king of the Zidonians, son

lie

of

Eshmun azar,
:

priest of Ashtart, king of the Zidonians,

in

this coffin
3. 4.

whoever thou art, (even) any man, that bringest forth this open my sepulchral chamber, and disquiet me not ; no image of silver, there is no image of
gold, nor

coffin,

do not

for there is

5.

any jewels of?: only myself

am

lying in this coffin;

do

not o6.

-pen my sepulchral chamber, and disquiet me not ; for such an act is an abomination unto Ashtart ; and if thou at all
openest

7.

my

no seed among the

8.

chamber, or disquietest me living under the su-

at

all,

mayest thou have

-n,

or resting-place with the Shades.

The Tabnith who

whose long and in 1855 on the
describes
site

speaks

is

the father of the

1

Eshmun azar

(II)

interesting funereal Inscription

(22 lines) was found

of the ancient necropolis of Zidon, and

who

himself (lines 13-15), as

Zidonians, and of

Amm ashtart,
M. A. Levy
in
s

son of Tabnith, king of the priestess of Ashtart, and grandson

It

may

be found in

Phonizische Studien,
I.
i.

i.

(1856)

in

Schroder

Die Phon. Sprache

and elsewhere
:

(1869), p. 224, with Plate I; CIS.

No.

3 (with facsimiles);
I).

most recently

Cooke, NSI. No. 5 (with facsimile, Plate

PLATE VI

S3

o
Q

Na

9
r

3
S

Face page xxiv]

i.

The Inscription of Tabnith

as

xxv
s

Eshmun azar (I), who is mentioned here From the style of the Egyptian ornamentation
of

Tabnith

father.

displayed both by the

sarcophagus of Tabnith,

and

also

by the related sarcophagus of

is

Eshmun azar
it

II,

it

is

concluded that the date of the Inscription

not earlier than the fourth cent. B.C.; and as upon other grounds

cannot be
1

much

later

than

this,

it

may be

plausibly assigned to

The Inscription is of value to the Hebrew student, not 300 B.C. only on account of its palaeographical interest, but also on account of
c.

the illustration which

it

affords of the language

and ideas of the Old

was pro
vowel

Testament.
occurs frequently in Phoenician Inscriptions: nounced probably 13K (Schroder, Phon. Spr., p. 143): a
1.
"1JX

it

final

is
T,

often
3,
2.

not represented in Phoenician orthography

9
.

comp. below

(Win

On
t

the pronunciation Ashtart, see p. 62.

pN
T,

of a

coffin,

or

3.

i.e.

(Heb.

nj).

mummy-case, as Gen. 50, 26. So regularly, as NSI. 9, 3 T

42, 3 (the sacrificial
i.

"Wn

this

gate;

19,
T

J"QD

this pillar;

table from Marseilles)

(cf.

riN&>n

this

Observe that
the

payment; CIS. I. (unlike the Heb.

it
:

88, 4
is

TpBOPI

Cooke,

p. 26).

nt)

without the

article,

although
t

accompanying noun has

T

pronounce, therefore, here

jn

PN2
:

(not PN3), as line 3

pn.

With

DN D

cf.

NSI.

64, 5-6. 65, 8

DIN

is,

however, somewhat awkward.

s
T

Renan,

observing that in

Eshmun azar
nnD

Inscription there
23E>>

occurs twice the similarly worded

*?2

phrase, line 4
Tl^J?
i>N

JVX nnsy ^N D1K ^31 robcD

5>a

HN

Dip, line

20

DIN*

bl natao
OJp,

riN

Dip, suggests that

is

is

an error

of the

stone-cutter for

which
Gittin
a

supposed, on the strength of

7
("1CKtJ>

a statement in the Mishnah,

4,

1HN2

}l*i^l

nB>J?

1BH3D

K ON Drtp

inE>^

i.e.

man

in

Zidon said to
!

his wife

Wip

A
a

curse

(upon me),

if

I do not divorce thee

),

to

have been

Render
1 2

Phoenician formula of imprecation (see further Cooke, p. 34). in this case, then My curse (be) with every man, whosoever
:

Ph. Berger in the Revue Archeologique, Juillet 1887, p.

7.

So ?K

these (p.

34 note),

in

accordance with the dissyllabic form found in the

Semitic languages generally, was pronounced in all probability

v. i,

?X

(in the

Poenulus
:

9 written ily; in an Inscr. from N. Africa,

b
).

ZDMG.

xxix. 240,

N7N

Lidz-

barski, p. 264

Comp. Cooke, NSI.

p. 26.

xxvi
thou
art,

Introduction
that bringest forth/ etc.

>K,

the Phoenician form of the

to

relative, occurring constantly in the Inscriptions,

be pronounced

\ esh, if not rather as a dissyllable pan prob. pan or pBTl; cf. Aram. pS3 to go forth, pDK to bring forth, or Heb. for the p QH (Is. 58, 10). JVK:=Heb. HS, the mark of the accus.

probably ish or

$K

vocalization,

cf.

Arab. 13L
in

4.

vby: comp.
aat^D r6y
lecti
T

Eshmun azar s
JDO^
^Nl
10,

Inscription

(NSI.

5), lines

5-6
huic

na^m

nee
"ijp

superaedificent
7K1 TlPy fins
1

lecto

cameram
T&y.

alterius,

and 20-21

?K DIN 73

ft!, comp.
Is.

in i S. 28, 15.

used of disquieting the spirits of the dead S a i.e. 3 ( 3), as often (Schrod. p. 218 f 14, 16.
. ;

mn

K ?. Lidzbarski, p. 295): e.g. CIS. 2, 12. 13 -pN 3=li the Greek ttSwXov. 0&. p. 49 [intf, probably T 24, 5. Y~!$, the usual Phoenician word for gold (A SL 3, 5 CIS. 327, 4-5 pnn TN pn this plating of gold; 33, 3. 5
;

0/.-

cf.

yp"l

Ijpb the

goldsmith]; in
pi.

Hebrew
nbass

confined to poetry.
piba.

D?

prob.=Aram.

|ND,

p3Mo,
6.

KJO.

NH

imn
Dt.

n^nt^y rayn

rniT in

(7, 25 xin 7ni?N

comp. the very

nayin
<a.

similar use of rayin

i.

17,

18,

12.

22,

5.

23, 19. 25, 16. 27,

i5)andPr.
T

(3, 32.

n,
2,

20. 12, 22

al.).

NH

"121H,

NH
;

without the
1

art.,

as

above: so CIS.

22 NH lUTDDil that kingdom

66,
7-

<5

4 Nn Dn^n.
fr),
1 8.
p"

On
1

the orthography of NH, see below, p. xxxi.

inf.

1.1?"!?

with the
,

Qal, according to the

p.

scheme noticed

on

II 20,

i.e.

M,

impf. from p3 (see

285 footnote ; NSI.

p. 294).

and the Glossary in Lidzbarski, Index, p. 369 % n\T. D?D3 yni 42, 13 Dinab p = Heb. D
;
11

Cf.

NSI.
^N1

3foi>

comp. the corre

sponding imprecation in Eshmun azar s Inscription, lines 8-9 DJnnn y*lT1 p DP and let him (them) not have son or seed
(their) stead;

11

in his

11-12

Bt?

nnn DTia ism by6b

8

"121

KJDJJ

ur\w ch

p
11

11

^s

(see
8.

Is. 37, 31).

DNS"]

nx

aat^Di

comp.

z 3.

line

DNsi ns aacno D^

^NI

33^^
as
1

of a resting-place in the underworld, as Ez. 32. 25: the D^NDl

\l/.

Is. 14, 9. 26, 14. 19.

88, ir. Pr.

2, 18.

9, 18. 21, 16.

i. 4. 6.

Job

26,

5t

2
.

56 assamar
3

In the Poenulus of Plantus represented by si (V. i, = "1DK tJ S). Comp. Schroder, pp. 162-6.
referred to

8),

and ass (V.

2,

For further information on the subject of the Phoenician language and

is

Phoenician Inscriptions, the reader

M. A. Levy, Phonizische Studien

in

2.

Early Hebrew Orthography

xxvii

z.

Early Hebrew Orthography.

the old

Having determined the nature of Did

this differ

Hebrew

character,

we
and

have next to consider the nature of the old Hebrew orthography.

from that which we find

?

in

modern

printed texts

if so,

in

what respects

In the Inscription of Mesha and in the Siloarn Inscription the words are separated by a point, but in Inscriptions on gems and coins and in Phoenician Inscriptions
i.

Division of words.

generally (see

e. g.

Plate VI) separations between

words are not marked 1

Whether they were marked

graphs of the

(either by points or spaces) in the auto

:

OT.

cannot be determined with certainty

if

they were,

4 Parts, Breslau, 1856-70; Schroder, Die Phb nizische Sprache, Halle, 1869; the

Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum, each Inscription is specified in full)

Tom.
;

I (where the Bibliography relating to Cooke, JVSf. pp. 18-158; and Lidzbarski,

Nordsem. Inscr. pp. 4-83, 493-499 (Bibliography [to 1898]), 204-388, 500-504 (Glossary), 389-412 (synopsis of grammatical forms, etc.). The best treatment of the relation of Phoenician to Hebrew is to be found in the Essay of Stade in the
Morgenlandische Forschungen (Leipzig, 1875), pp. 179-232. All these authorities may, however, in greater or less degree, be supplemented from Inscriptions that have been discovered more recently, and for which search must be made (chiefly)
in the Repertoire

Epigraphie Stmitique (from 1900), a supplement, appearing from time to time, to the CIS., and in Lidzbarski s Ephemeris fur Semitische Epigraphik (from 1902), with Glossaries at the end of each volume.

For further details respecting the history of the West-Semitic alphabets generally, and of the Hebrew alphabet in particular (in addition to the works of Levy, Chwolson, Madden, Berger, and Lidzbarski, mentioned above), reference may be

made

to Lenormant, Essai sur la propagation de r Alph. Phlnicien dans Fane, monde, 1872-3; Stade s Lehrbuch, pp. 23-34; Wellhausen s edition of Bleek s ed. 1886, p. 580 ff. ; De Vogue, Melanges d ArEinleitung, ed. 1878, p. 626 ff.
1

cheologie
1

Orientale

(1868),

1909, pp. 284-309 ; the other Facsimiles of Semitic Inscriptions contained in the Palaeographical the Plates in the Society s Volume Killing s Nabatdische Inschriflen (1885) Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum ; and Neubauer s facsimiles of Hebrew
;

Alphabet H^bra ique; S. A. Cook s study, mentioned above

especially Isaac Taylor

pp.
s

141-178,

L Alphabet Arameen

et

History of the Alphabet, Chaps. IV,

(p. x), in the

PEFQS.

Manuscripts, with Transcriptions, Oxford, 1886.

1

In
:

many
f.

of the older

point

in the

p. 202

Aramaic Inscriptions also the words are separated by a Papyri they are usually separated by a space. See further Lidzb., perpendicular line, seemingly a clause-separator, occurs twice in the
(11.
I.

Gezer Inscription

2).

xxviii

Introduction
and neglect must have been shewn
in the

some

irregularity
:

observance

of them

for the existing

MT.
(a)
;

contains instances of almost certainly

incorrect division of

words

and the

LXX

frequently presuppose

a different division from that in

MT.

(), which (whether right or

wrong) could scarcely have arisen had the separation of words been marked distinctly. It is probable, however, that before the Massoretic
text

was

definitely fixed, the division of

established,

and the
J,

distinction

made between
:

words had been generally the medial and final

forms of

3, D,

8,

V (above,

p. xix)

for the Massorites, instead of

altering in the text

the text as
division
;

it

is,

what they view as a wrong division of words, leave and only direct the reader to substitute the correct

this

implies that at the time

when

notes such as
in the

those

referred to were added, the division of

words found

2TD was

regarded as definitely settled

(a)
:

(c).

Gen. 49, 19-20 ^ND 3py leg. 2 S. 21, i ttOTn jva-Sw l. D OT

Is. 17,

nna

(rayon

1.

man
"

Jer. 15, 10 *2lb^PD

r6a (a grammatical monstrum)\.

22,
1.

14 pBpl T**^
fteo

^i5
1.

*
1

(another grammatical anomaly)

w^n h

jnpi.

23, 33

NBnrnp-nX

Nto
1.
:

DfiK

(so

LXX,

Vulg.).

Ez. 43, 13

noxn p*m

1.
""?

nis-m.

Hos.

6, 5

N^

ni

Ttaaswi

1^3

CE^
niyiB

so

LXX,

Pesh.

Targ.).
ijf.

25, 17

Win 13^n-in yhmj

l.

3-rnn (see the Commentators).

"os

42, 6-7 \n^N

:wa
1.

nwB>

1.

:*nbw

(so

LXX,

Pesh.

comp.

v. 12.

^. 43, 5).

73, 4 DHID^

Dn teA

(so

Ew.

Hitz. Del. etc.).

() Nu. 24,22
I

S. I,

14, 21

40 s-an ^: Tropcvov, cto-eX^^Nia nab. Ch. 17, rob -^rnjNi: KO! av^o-w o-= ?}^2l.
20,

6 Jer. 5,
9,

nmy
<?w^-5

DNT: AVKOS

etos

TWV

ocuov=JT2"iy ast.
J

nDID

-]in3

^n3^

IX^J

(ou)

SieXnrov TOO

rt-

TOKOS eVt TOKO) ^"

2.

Early Hebrew Orthography

xxix

>

25

17, II

tf

-NJ>y

n&>y

TTOIWV TrXovrov cdrrou

ov=
6

31, 8 njv

33: ev

0,3x77= nyioa.
:

46, 15

PjriDJ

yVlO

8ia TI

!<vyev

(aTro

(roii)

*A7rts;=

Hos.
Zeph.
Zech.
i/r.

II, 2
3,

Dn^SO
19

e* 7T/3oo-w7rou /xot

"pjyD

i^TlN

ev

o-oi

evc/ccv

crou

(as

though

t[R

n,

\*3J|

|3>:

ets

T^
iva TL

4, 3

nW>

^23:
3

fSapvKa.pSt.oi;

^$
\.

^23.

44, 5 HIS

106, 7
Pr. 13, 14
14, 7

Dn?: 6 eos /AOU, 6 fVT\\6fJifvo<s=^ ^ PX. CH *?: dva)8aivoKres=C3vSJ.

nPplOO:

^TTO TrayiSos

njn^ai: oTrAaSe aio-^o-eu)S=nn

K SJ nvytt
if/vxr)
1i"ljn

27,

pntOI:

Karapp^yvvrat Se VTTO

(j.a,T<av

= VZ)
14)

HSfJ/

O H^np^lM.
t^V IB^yn:

Job

40,

19

(LXX

Uin

ireiroi^ivov

ljKa.Ta.Tra.i-

C<rtfot=fei-pnfc>|)

^yn

(^. 104, 26).

;

See also

i/f.

76, 7.

Jer. 6, 9. 23, cited below, pp. Ixv, Ixvi

ni>

Gen.
J

28, 19 OvXa/ji^avs (for

D^INl). Jud. 18, 29 OvAa/xais (for {r^ D^Nl)

and the notes on

(<r)

i,

24. 2, 13.
:

21, 7.

a Jer.

6,

29
1

Dn^NO

DH BM2 np.

^. 55,

6
i

niDH5: HID

7.
p.

Job 3 8,

my on j:
:

n^yisn jo

40, 6 myojJD

nnyo jo

p.

Neh.
1

2, 9,

13 D SllBOn:
4

D^HB
:

DH

p.
"31

Ch.
4,

pa
a

*32
:

J0^3

p pB
P.

|D

"33

p.

/S

La.
2

3 Qijy

n^P?
"inn
:

Ch. 34, 6 DITTO

Dn^nanna
:

p.

2 S. 5, 2

aom

ND

nnn
DC>:

^3om M^sion
r

nn

p.

21, 12

mvehsn

D^ne^B HBB
:

p.
r

Ez. 42, 9 n^sn nia^i?

nnnnn
nnyT:
:

n^xn ntoB^n nnnci

p.

Job

38, 12 ioipo ins?

4,

io^pp

in^n ny^^
p.

p.

Ezra

12

^falW nun

Kl^l

xxx

Introduction
re-division of

However, as the need of a

it

words

is

comparatively

unfrequent, may perhaps be inferred that in old Hebrew the divisions between words were not regularly unmarked *.
2.
11

MSS.

The

plena scriptio was rare.

is

Thus

in

Mesha"s

Inscription the
p?B>n

of the plural

regularly not expressed (line 2 ]W?W thirty: 4

}D*,

(p. Ixxxix); 5

pn

i.e. !?!

ft?}

many days; 16 p3J,

")p

we have
1
"i"

also 10. 13.

20

B>N,

for

what

in

MT.
i

PO? men): would be t^K,

i.e.

!?

further (attaching the points, to avoid repetition)

2Kb, 4

"OJJB

saved me, 27

^?,

^T ^
1

ar

>d

even 23. 27. 30 D3, 7

nfl3,
1

for TV?, nJV3

(once 25 nrVQZl); the duals, 15 DIHVn (in

hundred, 30 fr6aT

H2
is

(Jer. 48, 22

MT. ^l^L 20 }n D6:n 31 pin (Isa.

),
n"3),

/aw
15, 5

DWh).
(i.e.

sometimes omitted, not merely in nfnN1 n. 20 njnty, ninkj), 24 -IBNI OP^J), where the radical N following the

Even N

prefix of
in

ps. sg. of the imperfect is

its

dispensed with as in Hebrew, but

HBH

20 = n^Nl

chief(s).

Similarly in the
2

Siloam Inscription we find

3 nvn
("),

2.

4 K

(i.e.

^K),

n^N

(i.e.

nb),
;

po
1

(P
is

T *?),

4-

6
2

onxnn (cn?nn),
^>p

6 n^n plJfn)

MT.

and even (where the usually ^p), 3 D a (i.e. Q^3

defective

radical)
s

(so rarely in

never
i.

in

MT.).

We
5

find,

however, beside these

forms

liya

0^?),

N1Oi"l,

and 6 tPNl.
Perhaps the most remarkable case of the defecliva
the pron. of 3 sing., which
is

scriptio

is

that of

twice on
1

Mesha"s
>I

Inscription (in the

3).

masculine) written
Inscriptions,
2

Nil

(6

NH

DJ

"1DN"

!;

27 NH D~}n
is

In Phoenician
with
both

the

same orthography

found

regularly
all

genders

it

appears, therefore, that, while Nil was

that

was

written,

the context

was regarded
it

as a sufficient guide to enable the reader

to pronounce

correctly

to a masc. or fern, antecedent.

hu or hi\ according as the reference was (The alternative supposition that hu

is

was used

for both

genders,

excluded by the fact that all other

to

Semitic languages have a feminine with yod, which obliges us

1 2

Comp.

further (with reserve) Perles, Analekten (1895), p. 35

3,

ff.

Cooke, NSI.

9 Nil

pIX

"]^?0

he was a just king, 13

that

NH rDNbtt
(254

that

work

5,
I.

10
i.

NH DIN

that

man,

NH rotao
;

kingdom;

27, 2
;

B. c.)

and CIS.

94, 2 ntJ

NH

that year

NSI.

44, b 4

NH

CPlbn

and

in the Inscription of

Tabnith

(p. xxiv), line 6.

See Lidzbarski,

p. 257.

2.

Early Hebrew Orthography

xxxi

of the different

suppose that the double form was already possessed by the ancestors Semitic nations when they still lived together in a
1

common home
It

.)

may be

inferred that the plena scriptio

though,
it is

so far as

is

concerned, the instances of

was introduced gradually, its omission, where

it

required by the etymology, are so exceptional, that

was probably
and
there
is

in use, as a rule,

from the beginning.

In the case of

abundant evidence that the

it

LXX
;

translated

from MSS., in which

in

was not yet generally introduced for in passages where it is found MT. they constantly do not recognize it. Thus, to take but a few

examples out of many

I

S. 12, 7

i"

nipIV
.

nx

TTJV iraa-av SiKauxrvvrjv

.

K.

<l//<l

KCU /carw/acrev

8,

27
5

DIK^I:
JVN"!:

A, Luc. xai
IvparjX)

eTrAr^xoo-ev auras =DtyD

eISov=J"!Nn

l.

I 9,

(TTS

or

HNT (construction

as

17, 2l).

20, 26

f^"linD:

KeKa6dpi<TTa.i

^<y.

21, 14 (13
2 3, 2 5

LXX)

T1V1: KaTe/3pet=Tl.*l.
:

rnp^nn

y^?D

Wrpa
:

fj

/xcpio-^eio-a^npjnDn V7D.
-y^

27,
2
S.
7>

8
I

pn

nwsr nan
:

i8ov

To=Y^n

w^

nan.

l^ fT On

KaTK\r]pov6fJi^(Tv aurov=^ri3n.
1

Jer. 6,

15 DvDJ2

vS"

Treo-ovvrai
:
<Ls

ev

ry

TTTWO-CI

auraiv^Q^SJ? vB\

23 nOT&D^ t^SD

TrC/3

(^3)

ets Tro Xe/xoj/.

Ta/CTj

29 1pn3 N? D^yil
12, 15 17, 25

TrovrjpLo.

avrwv OVK

= ^? W

D^l.

CTU^m:
D DIDJI
:

Ko.1

xarotKiw avrous =0^3^111.

*cat ITTTTOIS

avraiv^QD 10 ?
1
^l.?." .

11

3 2 (39).

5 1?*5 eureA.u0-6Tai=
1

50 (27),

6 y?.^:

o-Tre

p^a^VI]

(in spite

(nN being disregarded). of the parallel

SpeVavov).

51 (28), 59

nnwo

"i^:

apx^v 8wpo)v=nri3o IB

The view formerly held that the epicene X1H was an archaism in Hebrew, Hebrew must have cannot, in the light of these facts, be any longer sustained Cf. Noldeke, possessed the double form from the beginning. 1866, p. 458 f.; 1878, p. 594; Delilzsch, Comm. on Genesis (Engl. Tr.), i. pp. 42 f., 50 ;
:

ZDMG.

Wright, Comparative

Grammar

of the Semitic Languages (1890),

p. 104.

xxxii
Ezek.

Introduction
24 D
ty

7,

pN3

TO
<t>pva.yp.a.

r^s tcr^uos

avTwv=DjV P&U (comp.

24, 2l).

*3
42,

!3

nnyo nn:
SiefjLtTpTja-e

TTVOT/V

cai/3ouo-av=rnyb nn.
. .

16-17

(similarly
i.e.

*al 5T3D: KCU eVecrrpe^e 17-18) *n "HO 32D (so most moderns: comp.
.
z>.

19 MT.).
\J/.

title

nvTUn

^N: VTrcp

7-775

58, 12

104, 17 107, 17 D^ltf: avTeXdfSeTO

ai>Ta)v=D^.N

or

Job
3.

19, 1 8

D^iy:

eis

TOV aiwva

= D^iy

2
.

The

suffix

of 3 sg. masc. was written n- instead of

1-,

as

is

normally the case in

as seen
also
in
still

MT.

The

original form of

this suffix
^i?.^!?,

was

in-,

in

^a, and

in derivatives of

n*7 verbs as

^IP,

etc.

such verbal forms as Vin^, irtax,

345,
628),

"^Pin:,

^njnriy:,

man,
used

nnanK, vurnj (Stade,

regularly in Arabic
;

and the form

-A

is

but in the majority of cases a contraction takes

place, the aspirate being rejected,

first

and a-hu,

for instance,

au and ultimately

6.

At

first,
it

however, the orthography

o,

becoming was not

altered, n-

remained, though

followed the
:

and

in fact
i-

a sign of the final long vowel

substituted for
it.

in the end, however,

;

was only was mostly

Mesha

still

writes uniformly n:

e.g. (adding the

points) ninxa, ni3, nraa, na, nbnri., etc.

on the Siloam

Inscription,

on the

contrary, the examples which occur, viz. fan thrice, have V.

In MT., though in the vast majority of cases the contracted suffix is written i-, there occur a number of instances in which n- has been
suffered to remain, testifying (in the light of the cognate dialects)
to a previous general prevalence of this form: viz.

Gen.

9, 21.

12, 8.
;

13,3- 35. 21 nV]N;

49

riTy an d nrwo;

Ex. 22, 4 Tvjn

26

nhiD3; Ex. 32, 17 nyi2; 25 njns; Lev. 23, 13 nbD3; Nu. 10, 36

As though from a verb

a.

1X or

cf.

if/.

22,

nX

dvri\.rpf/is

20

IJLOV

88, 5

P^K pN

tf}orj6r}Tos

Syr. JL,/ help, succour, Ephr.

:

i.

398

al.

so/w cases the //^wa scriptio must have been in use Jud. 9, 37 rapaivuv xara Qa.Ka.aaav Tl 1 ) Jer. 22, 20 DH2yD eis TO -ntpav TTJS OaXaaays

Yet

in

(D"

2.

Early Hebrew Orthography

7
9)

xxxiii

23, 8

nag; Dt. 34,

10 rnvitn;

nnb; Jos. n, 16 nhjjg^j Jud.

25
nfe6&>;

9,

49

nbYfc>

2 Ki. 6,

19, 23

nifj? (Is.

20, 13

(=Is. 39, 2) nhbj;

jer. 2, 3

nhwan;

17, 24
all

na;

37, 24 top); b 22, i8 nnh;

Ez. 12, 14 rniy; 31, 18. 32, 31. 32. 39,

niton; 48, 8 (so $,

;

nbin Kittel, but not Baer and Ginsburg). 15 end. 21 end

18

nhKn
10 nu?c

naoa; 42, 9 nn^; Dan. u, and the eighteen (seventeen) cases of n?3 quoted on II 2, 9*. The non-recognition of this form of the suffix has sometimes, as in i S.

Hab.

3,

^. 10, 9 .

27, 5

14, 27 (see note).

2 S.

21, i (see note). Is. 30, 33 (rd. nivnD). ^z.

43, 13 (see p. xxviii), led to error in

MT.

Comp.

also

Gen. 49, 10 in

the Versions
is

1%).

The

retention of the form in the instances cited

:

probably due to accident

it

cannot be said to occur more frequently

;

thus in passages that are (presumably) ancient than in others Gen. 49 and Ex. 22 there are numerous cases of the usual form in i-,
in
in

other ancient passages there are no occurrences of

3.

!"1-

whatever

2
.

The Chief Ancient Versions of the Old Testament.

lie

It

does not

within the compass of the present

work

to give

a complete

account of the different Ancient Versions of the

it

Old

Testament

will suffice if

enough

be said to illustrate their general

character and relation to one another, so far as the

1

Books of Samuel
the Decalogue

fl-

occurs also in

i"l[foB>]

and
:

rQ

in the

Nash Papyrus, containing

and Dt.

6, \i. (2 cent. A.D.)

see S.

A. Cook,

PSBA.

1903, 34

ff.,

or (briefly)

my

Exodus,

p. 417.

2 I do not stop to shew in detail that ancient Hebrew MSS. were unpointed. That they were unpointed is (i) probable, from the analogy of all ancient Semitic writing, which has come down to us in its original form (Moabitic, Aramaic, Phoe

nician, Hebrew Inscriptions); (2) certain, (a) from the -very numerous renderings of the Ancient Versions, presupposing a different vocalization from that of the Massoretic text, which it cannot reasonably be supposed that the translators would have adopted had they had pointed texts before them ; () from the silence of the

Talmud and Jerome

as regards any system of punctuation, which, when it is con sidered that passages are frequently discussed, and alternative renderings and pro nunciations compared, both by the Rabbis and by Jerome, is more than would be

credible,

had Hebrew MSS.

in their

day been provided with

s

points.
n. 4], p.

(On Jerome,
43 ff.)

particulars

may

be found in

Nowack

monograph

[p.

liii

The

system of points must have been introduced during the sixth and seventh cent. A.D. a period of which the literary history is unfortunately shrouded in obscurity, which even the pedigree of Aaron Ben-Asher, brought to light by the Crimean MSS.
(Strack, in the art. cited p. xxxiv n. 4, pp. 610-613), does not enable us to pierce.
1365

xxxiv
are concerned,

Introduction

and

to establish the principles

.

upon which they may

fact that
at

be used for purposes of textual criticism l The special value of the Ancient Versions consists in the
they represent
present extant,

MSS.

very

much
in

earlier

than any

Hebrew MSS.

and belonging

some cases

to different recensions.

The

majority of
2
.

Hebrew MSS.
earlier

are of the twelfth to the sixteenth

:

centuries

Very few are

the earliest of which the date

is

known
St.
it

with certainty being the

MS.

of the Latter Prophets,

s

now

at

Petersburg, which bears a date

= A.D.

916

This MS., though

from the great majority of Hebrew MSS. by exhibiting (like others acquired within the last half-century from the East 4 ) the superdiffers

linear system of points

different text.

and accents, does not contain a

so soon as
s,

substantially

In

fact,

we

pass beyond the recognized

variants

known

as the Qre
;

the variations exhibited

all

MSS.

are slight

in other

words,

MSS.

belong

io the
.

by extant Hebrew same recension,

Existing

and are descended from the same imperfect archetype 5 6 all represent what is termed the Massoretic text
.

MSS.

That

this text,

For

fuller

(where special monographs are not referred to) Wellhausen

Einleitung, ed.
4,

information on the subject of the following pages, see generally s edition of Bleek s
1878, p. 571
ff.,

or ed.

5,

1886, p. 523(7., with the references.

ff.

Comp. Burkitt s art. TEXT AND VERSIONS (OT.) in EB. iv, col. 5011 2 Comp. Strack s art. TEXT OF THE OT. in DB. iv, p. 727 ff.
3

Published in facsimile with Prolegomena by H. L. Strack, Codex Babylonicns Pet ropoh tanns (St. Petersburg, 1876). Another relatively ancient MS. is the Reuchlin Codex of the Prophets at Carlsruhe (A. D. 1105), De Rossi s 154, the facsimile of a page of which may be seen in Stade s Gesch. Isr. i. p. 32, or in
the Palaeogr. Society s Volume, PI. LXXVII. Ginsburg (Introd. to the Heb. Bible, 1897, p. 475 ff.) describes a MS. (Brit. Mus. Or. 4445), which he assigns toe. A.D. 830. 4 On these MSS. see Strack in the Zeitschr. fiir Ltith. Theol. u. Kirche, 1875,
p.

605
5

ff., and \Vickes, Hebrew Prose Accents, App. Comp. Olshausen, Die Psalmen (1853), p. 17

ii.
ff.

p. 142
;

ff.,

with the references.

p. 2
;

Lagarde, Proverbien,

and the note

in Stade,

ZA TW.

iv.

303.

6 The variations exhibited by existing MSS. have been most completely collated by Kennicott, V. T. c. Var. Lect. 1776, 1780 and De Rossi, Variae Lectiones V, T., 1 784-98. But for assistance in recovering the genuine text of the passages which
;

are not few

face,

in the

Hebrew

Bible,

which bear the marks of corruption upon

in vain.

their

one consults these monumental works

for the

same end from the

s

from Cornill

collation of
p. 8

And how little is to be gained MSS. discovered since De Rossi s day, may be learnt the MS. of A.D. 916, for Ezekiel, Das Buck des Prof.

pheten Ezechiel (1886),

Baer

editions of the text of different parts of the

OT.

(the whole, except Ex.-Dt.) are valuable as exhibiting the Massoretic text in

3-

Character of the Massorehc Text

not reproduce the autographs of the

xxxv
in

however, does

OT.

their

original integrity
sufficient care

becomes manifest,

as soon as

it

is

examined with
of the school

and minuteness.

It is true, since the rise

called the Massorites in the seventh

for parts of the
earlier date, the

and eighth

centuries,

and probably

Old Testament,

especially the

Law, from a considerably

Jews displayed a scrupulous fidelity in the preservation and correct transmission of their sacred books but nothing is more
:

certain than that the period during which this care

was exercised was

preceded by one of no small laxity, in the course of which corruptions of different kinds found their way into the text of the Old Testament.

The
that

Jews,

when

it

was too

late to repair

by

this

means

the mischief

had been done, proceeded

to

guard

their sacred

books with

extraordinary care, with the result that corrupt readings were simply
perpetuated, being placed by
cisely the

them

(of course, unconsciously)

on pre
fictitious

same footing

as the genuine text,

and invested with a

differ,

semblance of

originality.

Opinions

may

and, as our data for

arriving at a decision are often imperfect, cannot but

to differ, as to the extent of corruption in the Massoretic text

be expected but
:

of the

fact,

there can be

no question.

The

Professor Kirkpatrick in a paper read at

was shewn by the Church Congress at

proof, as
in
in the

Portsmouth, 1885 (Guardian, Oct.

the

7, p.

1478; comp. The Psalms,

briefly,
it

Cambridge
:

Eible, p.

Ixvi),

is

to

be found, stated
in

following facts

(i)

There are passages

which the

text, as

stands,
is

cannot be translated without violence to the laws of grammar, or

of names) found in

irreconcileable with the context or with other passages; (2) parallel

passages (especially parallel

what no
is

lists

more than one

deemed by

its

editor to be

its

best attested form

service to those

whose object

it is to

but they are naturally of ; get behind the Massoretic tradition, for the

purpose of obtaining a text that is purer and more original. The same may be said of Ginsburg s Hebrew Bible : this exhibits the Massoretic text in what its editor
considers to be
its

best attested form

but though variants from the versions, and

even conjectural readings, are occasionally mentioned, the great majority of variants collected, especially in the second edition, with indefatigable industry, from a large

number of MSS. and

early printed editions, relate only to differences of orthography and accentuation, not affecting the sense. The best collection both of variants from the versions and of conjectural emendations is that contained in Kittel s

Biblia Hebraica.

But

in

the acceptance of both variants and emendations, con

siderable discrimination must be exercised.

xxxvi
book,
differ in

Introduction
such a manner as to
;

make

it

clear that the variations

are due largely to textual corruption

(3) the Ancient Versions contain

various readings which often bear a strong stamp of probability

upon

them, and remove or lessen the

difficulties

of the

Hebrew

text.

The

present volume will supply illustrations.

character and orthography
text of the
is is

When

the nature of the old

is

considered, the wonder indeed

that the

Old Testament
If,

as relatively free of corruption as appears

to be the case.

then, these corruptions are to be

if possible,

removed otherwise
a text (or
texts),
is

than by conjecture, we must discover,

which, unlike the text of
relatively free
all

Hebrew MSS. which we

possess,

Versions.

such texts are afforded by the Ancient These versions were made from MSS. older by many
;

from them.

And

centuries than those which formed the basis of the Massoretic text

and when we consult them

text

in crucial passages,

where the Massoretic

has the appearance of being in error,

we

constantly find that the

readings which they presuppose are intrinsically superior to those exhibited by the Massoretic text, and have evidently been made from
a

MS. (or MSS.) free from the corruption attaching to the latter. The work of the Massorites, it should be remembered, was essentially
:

conservative

their

aim was not

to

form

text,

but by fixing the pro

all essentials,

nunciation and other means, to preserve a text which, in

they received, already formed, from others.

text

The

antecedents of the
text

which thus became the basis of the Massoretic

It

can only be

determined approximately by conjecture.

the

same

in

ii.

v.

cent.

A.D.

for

was already substantially quotations in the Mishnah and

Gemara
1

exhibit

no material variants

The Targums

also (see below)

This seems to be

true,

the

Talmud, Midrashim, and even

notwithstanding the very large number of variants from later Rabbinical authorities, collected with great

industry by V. Aptowitzer in Das Schriftwort in der Rabbinischen Literatur (see in Vet. p. XV), from 1-2 Samuel, and (III, 95 ff.) Joshua (cf. Strack, Proleg, Crit.
Test.,

1873, p. 94 ff.).

These variants,

viz., relate

mostly to small differences, such as

;

the presence or absence of \ , the article, DK, or other unimportant word 7V or P for ?N, or vice versa; the sing, for the plural, or vice versa, in such a case as 115,6;

for 3 with the inf., or vice versa: the variants practically never affect the sense In many cases also the variant materially, or correct a certainly corrupt passage. seems to be due to the citation being made from memory, the substance being

There are, however, cases in recollected correctly, but not the exact wording. which the number of seemingly independent authorities agreeing in a variant is

3-

Character of the Massoretic Text

xxxvii

presuppose a text which deviates from it but slightly, though the deviations are sufficient to shew that, even in official Jewish circles,
absolute uniformity did not exist.
All that can be said
is

that the text

which was adopted by the Jews as a standard, and which, as such, was made by the Massorites the basis of their labours, had in previous
stages of
its

history been
it

exposed

to influences,

which resulted

in the

introduction into

of error and corruption.

The MSS. on which

the
is

Septuagint

is

based, and those from which the Massoretic text

descended, must, of course, have had some

(prior to the

common

meeting-point
the

second or third century

B.

c.)

and whilst on

whole the
individual

purer text was undoubtedly preserved by the Jews, in

many
texts

cases the text in their hands underwent corruption, and the purer

readings are preserved to us by the Septuagint.

The

on which

the other Ancient Versions are based (which usually deviate less from

and often accordingly [e.g. Ez. 40 ff.] reproduce corruptions from which the Septuagint is free) will have been derived from the current Jewish text at a later period than the LXX, when the
the Massoretic text,

corrupting influences had been longer operative upon

versions also sometimes agree with
the purer text
*.

it.

Still,

these

LXX

against

MT.

in preserving

was always at fault, and in these cases MSS. In some instances this is known
Kennicott and others
in others,
(e. g.

larger than can be reasonably accounted for by the supposition that the memory the variant depends no doubt upon actual

^32

for

to be the case
in I 18,

from the MSS. collated by

for S]1TIK in I 30, 8);

14

P|mNn

though no MSS. at present known exhibit the variants, there may well have been such, especially where the variant is supported by the LXX or other
extant in Talmudic times, and even later
(cf.

ancient version,

Aptow.

I,

p. 3; and,

for the distinction of certain, probable,

and possible, MS.

for

variants, p. 28, III, p. vi).

But even these variants can hardly be called material or important.

noticeable
is

The most
18,

perhaps TlDXn
I, p.

(as

LXX)

Dv6n
MSS.

JHX

in

14,

which

seems (Aptow.

48

ff.)

to have been read in

as late as Ibn Ezra s time

On the other hand, there are numerous cases in which the readings of the Talmud agree minutely (e. g. in the plena or defectiva scriptio] with the Massoretic text (Strack, op. cit., pp. 70-72, 80-94). 1 No doubt there are passages in the MT., the character of which makes it prac
(A. D. 1104-1165).
tically certain that,

though neither the

LXX

nor any other version exhibits any

variant, the text

the

MSS.

nevertheless corrupt, i. e. the corruption was already present in which were the common source both of the and other versions, and
is

LXX

of the

MT.

Here,

it

is

evident, the only

remedy

is critical

conjecture (a brilliant

xxxviii

Introduction
is

The

use of the Ancient Versions

not, however,
last

always such a

simple matter as might be inferred from the

paragraph but one.

The

Ancient Versions are not uniformly word-for-word translations,

text

from which the Hebrew

recovered at a glance
:

followed by the translators might be

their
text,
its

sometimes

especially that of the

LXX,

has not been transmitted to us in

it

primitive integrity;

and

even where
to contain,

has been so transmitted, they contain, or are liable

an element of paraphrase, the nature and extent of which

In deter

must be determined as accurately as possible before they are available

as safe guides for the correction of the Massoretic text.

mining the character of this element, each Version,

book, or group of books, contained in a Version
parts of

and often each

for the different

an Ancient Version were not always the work of one and the same hand, and the different translators were liable to follow different

methods

in translating

must be examined separately

our standards

of comparison must be those parts of the Massoretic text which afford

presumptive evidence of being free from corruption and, in cases where this is matter of doubt, the intrinsic superiority of one text above the
;

other, as estimated

correctness,

its

conformity with the context, its grammatical agreement with the general style and manner of the

by

its

writers of the

Old Testament, and similar considerations.

In the use

of an Ancient Version for the purposes of textual criticism, there are

which must always be observed (i) we must reason ably assure ourselves that we possess the Version itself in its original integrity (2) we must eliminate such variants as have the appearance
three precautions
: ;

of originating merely with the translator

the remainder,

(3) the text represented

it,

by

when we

are able to recover

the translator,

which

will

be that of the
carefully,

MS.

(or

MSS.) used by

we must then compare

in the light of the considerations just stated, with the existing

text, in

Hebrew

order to determine on which side the superiority

less

lies.

The

second and third of these precautions are not

important than

jectural

one in Cornill on Ez. 13, 20 D B Dn JDX for D^DiTlK). The dangers of con emendation are obvious and many such emendations rest upon doubtful
:
;

theories, or are for other reasons unconvincing

but some, especially such as involve only a slight change in the ductus litterarum, are well deserving of acceptance. Cf. G. B. Gray, Encycl. Brit. iii. 860 ; F. C. Burkitt, EB. iv. 5029-31.
:

3.

The Ancient Versions and Textual Criticism

:

xxxix
in

the

first

it is

necessary to

insist

upon them,
1
.

as cases are

on record

which they have been unduly neglected i. The Septuagint. The Version that
purposes of textual criticism
is

is

of greatest importance for

as the Septuagint^.

that

known

In

the case of the Pentateuch, this

third century B.C.

Version dates, no doubt, from the

according to tradition from the reign of Ptolemy

:

Philadelphus, B.C. 285-247

the subsequent parts of the

in

OT. were

probably completed gradually

centuries, for the
different

the

course of the two following

hand.

differences of style and method exhibited by the books shew that the whole cannot be the work of a single The characteristics of the LXX are best learnt from actual
it,

study of

though

illustrations,

so far as the

Books of Samuel
is

are

concerned, are given below.

In some books, the translation

much

more

literal

than in others

in difficult passages, especially such as

are poetical, the translators have evidently the sense

been often unable

to seize

of the original.
is

Except

in

such passages as Gen. 49.

Dt. 32. 33, the Pentateuch

the best translated part of the historical

books

the Psalter

is

tolerably well done,

and though few Psalms are

is

wholly free from error, the general sense

the translation of Isaiah
is

fairly well
;

expressed

poor and paraphrastic

those of Job and the

Minor Prophets
text represented
text as to

are often unintelligible.

In the case of Jeremiah the

by assume the character of a separate recension 3 There are few books of the OT. in which the Massoretic text may not, more or
.

LXX

deviates so considerably from the Massoretic

less frequently,

be emended with help of the

LXX

4
;

but the

LXX

1 In Prof. Workman s Text ofJeremiah (1889), the neglect to observe the second precaution has led to disastrous consequences a very large proportion of the exam ples cited, p. 283 ff., in the Conspectus of the Variations presuppose no difference
:

in

the

Hebrew

text read

translator did not

criticism
1

make

by the translator, but are due simply to the fact that the it his aim to produce a word-for-word version. See a

by the present writer in the Expositor, May, 1889, pp. 321-337. See, very fully, on this Dr. Swete s excellent Introduction to the OT. in Greek (1900) ; and St. John Thackeray s Grammar of the OT. in Greek, ace. to the Sept., also Nestle, DB. iv.437 ff. vol. i (Introduction, Orthography, and Accidence), 1909
;

See

LOT*

269

f.,

with the references; and add L. Kohler,

ZAW.

1909, 1-39

(on Jer.i-9).
* And naturally, sometimes, of other Ancient Versions as well. minimum of such necessary emendations may be found in the margin of the Revised Version
:

xl

Introduction
is

Version of Samuel, parts of Kings, and Ezekiel,

the

of special value, as

(or MSS.) on which the Massoretic text of these books is based, must have suffered more than usually from corrupting influences.

MS.

The Versions of Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion.

against the use of the

After

the

destruction of Jerusalem in A.D. 70, a reaction began in Jewish circles

LXX,

partly, as

seems probable, originating

in

(who from the times in which the NT. was written had been accustomed to quote the LXX as an authoritative
opposition to the Christians

Version of the OT.), partly in a growing sense of the imperfections of the Septuagint translation, and of its inadequacy as a correct repre
sentation of the
A.D. the three

Hebrew

original.

Hence

arose in the second cent.

Theodotion,

improved Greek Versions of the OT., those of Aquila, and Symmachus. Aquila and Theodotion are both men
(iii.

tioned by Irenaeus

21) writing

c.

A.D.

180:

Symmachus

lived

probably somewhat

later.

Of

these translators, Aquila

was a Jewish
literalness
*,

proselyte of Pontus.

His method was that of extreme

such an
extent, that

which he carried

he sought to represent words which had acquired derived meanings in accordance with their etymology, and even to reproduce particles for which Greek possessed no proper equivalent 2 Jerome on Is. 8, 14 mentions a tradition that
to
.

a larger selection
necessary
is

and

the majority, at least as it appears to the present writer, not less afforded by the notes in the Variorum Bible, published by Eyre Spottiswoode. But many more are in fact necessary see examples in the
:

writer

Book ofJeremiah* (1906), and Nah.-Mal. in the Century Bible (1906) and compare (with discrimination) any recent critical commentary. A good collection of emendations from the LXX and other Versions, with explanations, will be found
s
;

in T.
1

K. Abbott, Essays chiefly on the Original Texts of T. AovXtvtuv TTJ E&paiKrj At f ti, Origen, Ep. ad Africannm,
Jerome, Ep. 57 ad
ille

and NT. (1891),

2.

p.

i ff.

Pammachium

quia Hebraei non solum habent apOpa sed

KOI

et

irp6ap6pa,

KanotfiXcas et syllabas interpretatur et literas, dicitque tv KtfyaXaiw

(KTicrtv o Ofbs criiv

-5f, as
n<ptip8e

[DN] TOV ovpavov

<rvv

TTJV ffjv.

locale

he represented by
of etymolo

Ki. 22, 49;

KvprjvrjvSf 2 Ki. 16, 9.

As examples

gizing renderings

be quoted aTiK-nvoTrjs for "injf\ bitbrnj.aTiaa.vT6 pt for "OTirD Sometimes, in 22, 13, (K\tKTwOr]Tt for Y13H Is. 52, II, Ttvovrovv for P)"Ty, etc. if/. genuine Rabbinic fashion (e.g. Gen. 41, 43 Targ.), he treated a word as a com

may

pound
T3

thus
;

Sam.
1

6, 8

WIND

is

3"3^3

^- 16,

DJ"OE

rant ivo<ppaiv

rendered by him tv KO.I aw\ovs (Df!

*]D)

v<ptt

Kovpas as though

73, 21 plflE^X irvp Kairvt-

^optvov (J3in

C N)
ff.,

cf. p. Ixxxiii.

Hexapla,

p. xxi

or in the art.

See more in the Prolegomena to Dr. Field s HEXAPLA (by Dr. C. Taylor) in the Dictionary of

Christian Biography.

3-i.

The Greek Versions of

;

the

Old Testament
is

xli

Aquila was a pupil of R. Aqiba

the character of his translation.

and the statement

at the

confirmed by

For R. Aqiba,

beginning of the

second cent.

A.D.,

introduced a

new system of

interpretation, laying

exaggerated stress upon even syllables and

followed by Aquila
*.

letters, quite in

the

manner
than

and hence frequently agrees with it. Renderings of Theodotion have often found their way into MSS. of the LXX,
translation,

The new

Version of Theodotion was rather a revision of the

LXX

sometimes as doublets, sometimes as insertions made with the view of In the supplying apparent omissions (i Sam. 17, 12-31 in Cod. A).
case of Daniel, Theodotion
s

Version superseded that of the

LXX, and

occupies

its

place in ordinary

MSS. and

editions

2
.

Symmachus was an Ebionite

praised by Jerome

(Eus. Hist. Eccl.

vi.

17).

He

is
:

as frequently clever

and successful
s

in his renderings

not slavish like Aquila, and yet reproducing, often with happy

accom

modations to Greek idiom, the sense of the original

Origeris Hexapla.
their entirety
:

These three

translations are not preserved in

they have been transmitted only in fragments, chiefly

is

through the work of Origen, which

now

to be described.

Origen (A.D. 185-254), observing not only the variations between the Septuagint and the Hebrew text current in his day, but also the
variations between different

MSS.

of the Septuagint

itself,

undertook

Illustrations
p.

may
80 ff.

Punishment ?
1

be found in Dr. Pusey s What is of Faith as Gratz, Gesch. der JuJen, iv. 53 ff.

to

Everlasting

The

LXX
s

Version of Daniel was

it

In Tisch.

edition

first published from a unique MS. in I77 2 stands at the end of the second volume in Swete s it is printed
;

in parallel

pages with Theodotion.

Renderings agreeing remarkably with Theodo

tion s Version occur in the

:

129 .) and writers of the early part of the second century it has hence been conjectured that his version of this book is based upon an earlier Greek translation independent of the (Salmon, Introd. to the
(cf. p.

NT.

LXX

NT.,
!

ed. 3, p.

586

ff.).

Illustrations are given in

instance, in his use of the ptcp., of adverbs, of

(literally) \v
T$>

abundance by Dr. Field, Hexapla, p. xxxi f. for compounds, i Sam. 22, 8 LXX
:

SiaOta8ai TOV vlov pov SiaOrjKrjv,

nal
-npoaidrjitf. rtKreiv,

Symm. OWT&tplvm)
;

TOV vlov pov

15

Gen.

4, 2

LXX

Symm.

teal

na.Kiv tTtKtv; Pr. 15,

i

1}

3113

Symm.

6 evOvfiwv, Is. 9, 15
;

D^S
id.

K1BO

aiStaipos

Sam.

25, 3

^3^

03113

LXX

ayaOr) avvtati, 5. tvdiav6T)Tos

fvuHtuv;

Sam.

12, 8 njri31

D v/VD jn LXX vovrjpbs tv tniTTjSevnaai, n3H3 LXX Kara ravra, 2. TroAAawAa a/ova.

2. KUKO-

xlii

Introduction
if

the task of recovering,

partly by aid of the

possible, the true text of the Septuagint,

partly

by aid of the other Greek Versions. For this purpose, he arranged the different texts which he wished to compare in six parallel columns ; the work thus formed being known

Hebrew,

in

consequence as the Hexapla.

text;
;

In the

first

column, he placed the

transcribed
in

Hebrew

in

the

second, the

Hebrew

Greek

characters
tively
;

in the third

and

fourth,

Aquila and Symmachus respec

in the sixth,

in the fifth, the Septuagint;

Theodotion.

In the
in
;

Septuagint
the

column, additions,

to

which nothing corresponded

1 Hebrew, were marked by an obelus prefixed (-74) omissions, where words standing in the Hebrew were not represented in the Greek, were filled in by him, usually from Theodotion, and

noted similarly by an asterisk (-)S ^) of the LXX differed between themselves, it

2
.

In cases where copies

is

probable that Origen

adopted

silently the

reading that agreed most closely with the Hebrew.

Proper names,

also,

transliterated with

some freedom, sometimes expressed

which the original translators had sometimes in accordance

with the older pronunciation, or which in other cases had become

corrupted by transcription, Origen assimilated to the current

text.

Hebrew
long in

The manuscript
use

of this great

work was preserved

;

for

the Library of Pamphilus in Caesarea

his

Jerome
into the

collated

it

specially for

own

but in 638 Caesarea

fell

hands of the Saracens,

and from

that time the Library

and

its

contents are heard of no more.

;

Copies of the whole work were probably never made but the Septua gint column was edited separately by Eusebius and Pamphilus, and

The

sign

4.

indicates the close of the

words to which the obelus or asterisk

refers.
2 The following is the important passage in which Origen himself describes both the motive and the plan of his work Nwt tit orjkovort Tro\\rj ytyovtv f) ruiv dvn:

ypd(puv Sicupopa, tire diro pq0v/jiias

StopOwafcus rSiv ypacpo^fvuv, tire

rivSiiv

duo

ruiv

7 pcKptuy tirt dirb Tokprjs nvwv ftoxOrjpas rfjs rd tavrois Soieovvra ev ry SiopBwoti irpoari-

i) dtpatpovvruv. Tty ptv ovv Iv rrj SiopQuati rrjs ira\aia.s SiaO-fi/cr)? bituptavlav, Otov SiSovros, tvpofiev IdcfaaOat KpiTqpuo xp jo dfievoi. TO.IS Xoiirais CKSoaeaiv ital

Otvruiv

rtvd

/*fv aj/3t\iffa(i.tv ev

T>

E&paiKw
rai

^r/

Ktiptva ov ToA^crcwTes avrd

TrdvTT) irtpuKiiv,

rtvd 5

^er dartpiaicwv irpoaeQrjKaptv, Iva 8fj\ov f

avn<j>6fl>uis

on

p.rj

K(i/j.fva irapci rots

ix

rwv

\oiirwv (/eS6fftuv

E/3pcuie<p

TTpofftOrfKclntv, nal o p.tv &ov\6fi.tvos irp6ar)rai

fj

avrd,

cu

5^ rrpoffKOTrrft ro roiovrov & @ov\trai irpi rfjs TrapaSox^s avruv,

^77, voiTjffy

(Comm. in Matth.

xv.

14).

3-i-

Origen s Hexapla

xliii

was widely used. At the same time, the more important variants from the Versions of Aq. Theod. and Symm., contained in the other columns, were often excerpted ; and many of these have thus been
preserved to us, partly through citations

made by

the Fathers, partly

s text

from the margins of other

MSS.
text),

In particular, Origen
with

of the

LXX

(called the

Hexaplar

many such

marginal variants,

was translated

in A. D. 617-18; and a peculiarly fine MS. of this translation (containing the pro phetical and poetical books), preserved in the Ambrosian Library at

into Syriac

by Paul, Bishop of Telia,

Milan, has been published in facsimile by Ceriani.

plete edition of the

The most com

(Oxford, 1875),

who

remains of the Hexapla has shewn remarkable

is

that of the late Dr. Field

skill in

recovering from the

*.

renderings of the Syriac translation the original Greek

s

Origen work was projected with the best intentions and it has been the means of preserving to us much, of priceless value, that
:

would otherwise have perished.

he had in view.

But

it

did not secure the end which

Origen did not succeed in restoring the genuine translation of the LXX. He assumed that the original Septuagint
that which agreed most closely with the Hebrew text as he knew it : he was guided partly by this, partly by the other Versions (Aq. Theod.

was

and where the Symm.), which were based substantially upon it Septuagint text differed from the current Hebrew text, he systematically
:

altered

it

to bring

it

into conformity with

it.

This was a step

in the

wrong

direction.

Where

a passage appears in two renderings, the one

free, the

other agreeing with the existent

Hebrew

text,
:

it is

the former

which has the presumption of being the more original the latter has the presumption of having been altered subsequently, in order that it
might express the Hebrew more closely. Origen, no doubt, freed the text of the LXX from many minor faults ; but in the main his work
tended to obliterate the most original and distinctive features of the
Version.

To

discover the

Hebrew

text used

must

recover, as far as possible, the text

by the translators we of the Version as it left the

the practical effect of the

translators hands ;

and Origen

labours, instead of facilitating, rather

this,

impeded

this process.

In addition to

See further Swete, Introd.

to the

OT.

in Greek, pp. 59-76

DB.

iv.

442

ff.

xliv

Introduction
to

improve the purity of the LXX MSS. themselves for not only were the signs which he himself used to indicate additions and omissions often neglected, as the Hexaplar

method adopted by Origen was not

;

text

of the

LXX
MSS.

was

transcribed,

but the Hexapla, from

its

very

nature, encouraged the formation of

for instance,

mixed
l
.

texts or recensions, so that,

arose exhibiting side by side the genuine

LXX

and

corrections introduced from Theodotion

The original text of the LXX. For the recovery of 2 ing canons have been laid down by Lagarde
:

this,

the follow

1.

The MSS.
who aims
likewise.

of the Greek translation of the

OT.

are

all
it

either

immediately or mediately the result of an eclectic process:

that he
at recovering the original text

follows
eclectic

must follow an

method
style

His only standard

will

be his knowledge of the

will

of the individual translators: his chief aid

be the faculty
before

possessed by him of referring the readings which

their

come

him

to

Semitic

original, or else of recognizing them as corruptions

originating in the Greek.

2.

If a verse or part of a verse appears in both a free

and a

slavishly

literal translation, the

3.

text,
it,

be counted the genuine rendering. If two readings co-exist, of which one expresses the Massoretic while the other can only be explained from a text deviating from
former
is to
is

the latter

to be regarded as the original.

The

first

of these canons takes account of the fact that existing

exhibit a

Greek MSS.
whole the

more or

less

mixed
:

text,

and

justifies

us in not

adhering exclusively to a single

MS.

a given

relatively truest text of the

LXX

MS. may contain on the but other MSS. may also

the text which

in particular instances, in virtue of the

mixed origin of

they exhibit, preserve

and

third

ings in

genuine Septuagintal renderings. The second canons formulate the principle for estimating double render the same MS., or alternative renderings in different MSS., and

derive their justification from the fact that the general

method followed

by

later revisers

of the

LXX
1

to

and correctors was that of assimilating the renderings the Hebrew text (the Hebraica veritas ) current in

On

such

Hexaplaric

texts, see

Swete, Introd., pp. 76-78, 482.

t

Anmerkungen zur griech. Obersetzung der Proverbien

p. 3.

3- 1.

The Original Text of

the

Septuagint

xlv

their day.

The

process, however, of recovering the genuine Septua-

gintal

rendering,

from two or more

variants,

can be successfully

carried
-text
:

on only by
is is

the continuous comparison of the existing

Hebrew

it

this

passage,

which affords us a general idea of what, in a given to be expected, and supplies us with a criterion for

estimating the relative originality of the variants that

us.

may come

before

An

illustration

Ewald.

Cod.

taken from Jud. there reads cr/ccTny vcavtSeoi/

may be

5, 8, cited

by We. from
avr]<f)0r)

cripo/x.ao-T(ov
;

Kai

<rtpo/xao-nys.

These words are evidently corrupt

how
}2D.

are they to be

restored

This gave the clue, which enabled Ewald to explain and restore the words quoted. The Hebrew shews that they contain a double rendering, which must
?

The Massoretic

text is noil

n^v DK

be read
//.ao-TT/s,

CTKCTT^I

eav

tSoo

KOI o-ipo/Aao-njv
either
a.

and

OVCC TH;

eav

6<f)@fj

KOL aipo-

and

that the

first

freer rendering of
is

nx"V

DN, or

presupposing the variant

njON DN

the true reading of the

LXX.

But

this

could hardly have been determined, or at least could not

have been determined with the same assurance, without the guidance
afforded by the

Hebrew

text itself 1

Of

course, after the application of

Lagarde
textual

canons, the two

:

allviz.,

important

questions

still

await

the

critic

whether,
is

(i) the reading which deviates from the Massoretic text

actually

based upon a divergent

text;

text,

or

is

simply a freer rendering of the same

and whether,

further, (2)

the

more probable,
text.

the

divergent

supposing the former alternative to be text is superior or not to the

Massoretic

And

these two questions can only be determined

by help of the general considerations alluded to above (p. xxxviii).

Illustrations will

be afforded by the notes in the present volume. In but not unfrequently very many cases the answer is apparent at once more difficult cases arise, in which the answer is by no means
;

Various readings which exist only in the Greek, and disappear when the Greek

is

translated

back into Hebrew,

are, of course, only indirectly,

and

in particular

cases, of importance for the textual critic,

who

is

interested primarily in such

I, 4. 5.

variants alone as presuppose a different

tKoif/av

Hebrew

original: thus in Jud.

17

(B) and firarafav (A) equally express the

f/jiirpuaOta

and

T!J

irpoOvpov

and

a.fM<pt9

all

4 rcl equally represent the same Hebrew term

12^1
;

Hebrew

in I

Sam.

5,

Variants of this kind are frequent in

MSS. of

the

LXX.

xlvi

Introduction

immediately evident, or in which the arguments on both sides

nearly equally balanced.
It is

may be

handling the more

that

difficult

judgement and acumen displayed in cases which arise under these two heads,
the

mark
one

a textual critic

of the

first

order,

and

distinguish,

for

example, Wellhausen, in a conspicuous degree, both from Thenius

on

the

side,

and from Keil on the

According
the

other.

MSS.
three

of the

LXX.

to a

well-known passage of Jerome,

main recensions of

Septuagint prevailed in antiquity, that

of Hesychius in Egypt, that of Lucian in Asia

nople, that of Origen in Palestine
l
.

Minor and Constanti

recensions

The Manuscripts containing the of Hesychius and Origen are not certainly known 2 though
;

Ceriani with

some reason supposes Origen

to

be contained in the

Syriac version of the Hexaplar text, mentioned above, and in the allied Cod. 88 of Holmes and Parsons, and the Cod. Sarravianus 3 ; that of Lucian has been edited (as far as Esther) by Lagarde, and will be

spoken of below.

The
Sinaitic

three principal
(tf

MSS.

of the

LXX
i,
i

are the Vatican (B), the

or S), and the Alexandrian (A).

46,

The
28.
is

Vatican
2

MS.
2,

is

complete with the exception of Gen.

10-13.
>A-

Sam.

5-7.

IO 5

27

J
37>

6; the Sinaitic

MS.

defective for nearly

the whole of Gen.

Esdras, in the rest of the

OT.
18

the only serious

lacuna

is

Ezekiel
15, 1-5.
ii.

the Alexandrian

MS.
i

is

complete except for Gen. 14,

12,
14,
9.

14-17.

16-19.
all

6,

6-9. of

Sam.

^. 49,

2079,

That of
a
rule,

MSS.

LXX, B

agrees), as

exhibits relatively

(with which X frequently the purest and most original

Preface to Chronicles (printed at the beginning of the Vulgate)

;

Alexandria et

Aegyptus in Septuaginta suis Hesychium laudat anctorem Constantinopolis usque mediae inter has provinciae Antiochiam Luciani martyris exemplaria probat
;

Palestinos codices legunt quos ab Origene elaborates Eusebius et Pamphilus vulgaverunt totusque orbis hac inter se trifaria varietate compugnat. The last of
:

these recensions

is

naturally the source of the

Jerome states elsewhere (I 635 Vallarsi) that lem and in the churches of the East.
s
8

Hexaplar text spoken of above ; and it was read at Jerusa ( decantatur )

xxix. 47-50.

Lagarde, Mittheilungen,

ii.

52

comp. G. F. Moore, AJSL.

Le

recensioni dei

LXX e la versione latino, delta /fa/a, Estratto dai Renditonti

it.

del R. istituto
/. c.

p. 56, says that

Lombardo, Serie II, vol. xix, fasc. IV (Milan, 1886), p. 2. Lagarde, he knows of one MS. of the Octateuch (in private hands), not
almost certainly contains

yet collated,

which

3- 1.

Manuscripts and Editions of

is

the

Septuagint

xlvii

Septuagintal text,
2

generally allowed

1
:

that

it

contains double ren

will

derings, and has otherwise not escaped corruption,

(p. Ivff.)
.

The Alexandrian MS.

exhibits a text

appear presently which has been

systematically corrected so as to agree

more

closely with the

i

Hebrew
i

proof of this is afforded by almost any page: thus Cod. B has *Av$po>7ros ^v e AppaOai./*. 2eua, Cod.
avfyxoTi-os
is

Sam.

i,

where

A
|E>

has Kcu eyevero

Apfia.Oai.fJL

2w^t//.

= D aW
1|

DTl~in

THK

W$ Wl
Swete

s
.

The

best edition of the

LXX

for ordinary use is that of Dr.

4
,

which contains (so far as they are extant) the text of B with the Lucian variants of N and other selected uncials on the margin
:

5 The readings of other MSS. Lagarde s edition must, however, sometimes be consulted (for they may preserve read ings of importance); these, so far as they have been collated, are

must be read

in

chiefly to

be found in the great work of Holmes and Parsons

:

6
.

1 Its value, however, varies in different books in some it exhibits more Hexaplaric elements than A. See Procksch, Sludien zur Gesch. der Sept. (1910),

Swete, p. 487 f. ; and comp. Torrey, Ezra Studies (1910), p. 92 ff. Respecting the recension to which B presumably belongs, its text is of a character which led Dr. Hort to infer {Academy, Dec. 24, 1887) that it was copied from a MS. (or MSS.) partially akin to the MS. (or MSS.) which Origen, with the
pp. 44-9
a
;

adaptations fitting

it

to his purpose,
p. 7,

made

the basis of the

comp. Ceriani,

/. c.

exhibits the unrevised text of

LXX text in his Hexapla LXX as it was before

This view was accepted by Cornill (Gott. gelehrte Nachrichten, 1888, Origen. pp. 194-6, where the view propounded by him in Ezechiel, pp. 81, 84, 95, is aban doned) and it has been further confirmed by recent research see Silberstein, who,
;
:

in a study p. 26)

on the

LXX
(p.

of

Ki.

with Cornill

196)

(ZAW. 1893, p. that B cum grano

i ff.,

1894, p. I ff.), agrees (1894, salis is the Vorlage of Origen s

and Rahlfs, Studien, i. 85. Rahlfs argues further ; 1899, p. 72ff. ; cf. Studien, i. 87), from the order of the books in B agreeing with that given by Athanasius in his 3gth Festal Epistle (A. D. 367), that B was written in Egypt, shortly after this date.
in the

LXX

column

Hexapla

(Gott. gel. Nachrichten,

3
4

See further Swete, Introd. p. 125 ff. The OT. in Greek according to the Septuagint, vol.
3 (

1891

1907), vol.

iii

2 (

larger edition

(The OT.

i, 1887 ( 1901), vol. ii, This edition supersedes that of Tischendorf. 1899). in Greek, edited by A. E. Brooke and N. McLean), con

taining an extensive apparatus criticus, is in course of publication by the Press: at present (July, 1912), three Parts (Gen.-Dt.) have appeared.
6

Cambridge

Librorum

Vet. Test.

Canonicorurn Pars Prior Graece Pauli de Lagarde studio

sumptibus edita (1883). This edition is very convenient; but it has no critical apparatus, and the text is not entirely satisfactory (see Moore, AJSL. xxix. 56). 6 Vetus Testamentum Graecum cum variis lectionibus, Oxonii, 1798-1827.
et

See Swete, The

OT.

in Greek,

i.

p. ix

Introd. pp. 185-7.

^ ut

^- n -

above.
3>

xlviii

Introduction
In the apparatus criticus of

Luciaris recension of the Septuagint.

cited frequently as agreeing together in exhibiting a text considerably different from

Holmes and Parsons

four

MSS.,

19, 82,

93 \ 108, are

that

of either

or A.

That these MSS. preserved

in

in

some

cases

important readings of superior originality even to those of

noticed

B was
full

by Wellhausen
fact,

1871

2
,

though he did not perceive the

bearing of the
that Vercellone

or pursue the subject further

beyond observing

had remarked

that the readings of these

MSS.

often

coincided with those of the

of the

Itala, or pre-Hieronymian Latin Version

OT.

That

these

MSS.
first

exhibit in fact the recension of

3

Lucian
.

appears to have been

recognized by Ceriani in i863

4

The

same conclusion was

arrived at also by

Lagarde

who

pointed to the

numerous agreements between the text of these MSS. (to which he adds 1 1 8) and the citations of Chrysostom, who, as a priest of Antioch,
and Bishop of Constantinople, would presumably,
s

in

accordance with

its correctness Jerome statement, 5 was further established by Dr. Field who shewed that the text of the same four MSS. corresponded with readings cited in the Syriac
;
,

make

use of this recension

and

Hexaplar

text with the letter

L.

Lucian was a
at

priest of the

Church
accord

of Antioch,

312 he prepared with great pains a revised edition of the Septuagint, which he sought by com parison with the Hebrew to free from the corruptions which by accident
:

who

suffered

martyrdom

Nicomedia,
,

A.D.

6 ing to the passage of Suidas cited below

*
3

MS. 93 is in the main the basis of Lagarde s text (Rahlfs, iii. 79 f. Moore, 57). Der Text der Bticher Samuelis, pp. 2 2 1-4. Monumenta Sacra et Pro/ana, ii. 2 (1864), pp. 76, 98, 102 (specially Codd. 19,
;

108, 118,

and the Complut. text); also

3, 7.

Lam.
doret

2,
is

22 end.

22. 29. 30. 33. 63. 4, 7 etc.,

also noted.

See also Ceriani

Lamentations) ib. i. (1861), on where the agreement of Theoopinion as cited in Dr. Field s Hexapla, ii.
(for the

429 (published originally in 1869). * Pars Prior etc. Preface, pp. vii-xiv.
5

Hexapla,

p. Ixxxvii. 6 /jdprvy

S. v. AovKiavbs

OVTOS ras Upas

/JAovs Qtaoautvos

7roA.ii

rb voObv
d<^>

fiffStfapfvas, TOV ye \p6vov

\vpr)van(i>ov

rroAAd TWV ev avrais,

/cat TTJS

avvt^ovs
,

(Ttpeav

(h tTtpa ptTaOtataK, Kal pivroi xai Ttvoav avOpwiraiv Trofrjporarcav ot TOV E\\t)viffnov irpotiffTTjKfiffav, irapaTpt^/ai rbv tv aiirafj OfXijaavTcuv vovv, leal iro\v rb
E/3pai 5os
(wavfveiiiffaTO
teal

Ki05r)\ov ivaKtvaffaptvcuv, avrbs dirdffa? avaXafUvv (K TT)S

yAaiTT^s,
ffv

avri)v ts roL fj.a\iara fy fiKpifiaiKus irovov

TJJ

tiravopOuifffi Tr\dffTov

3-i. Luciaris Recension of the Septuagint

or design had in process of time been introduced into
class
it.

xlix

One

large

of alterations

made by Lucian
:

affect,

however, only the literary

form of the Septuagint

they consist namely in the substitution of

for

synonyms

(as Trapeyevero

^A#ev,

eTroXe /A^o-c

for

Trapera^aTO,

TO

dpeo-rov for TO dyatfov) for the words originally used by the translators.

of the Hebrew.
recension,
i.

Obviously variants such as these do not point to a different reading Double renderings also occur frequently in Lucian s
e.

retaining the normal Septuagintal version of a passage,

it

he placed beside

a rendering expressing

more

closely the current

framed by himself, or (more probably) adopted from particular MSS., or other translators. But what imparts to Lucian s work its great importance in the criticism of the OT., is the
text, either

Hebrew

fact that

it

embodies renderings, not found

presuppose a

in other

MSS.

of the

LXX, which

Hebrew

original self-evidently superior, in

the passages concerned, to the existing Massoretic text. these renderings were derived

Whether

by him from MSS. of

the

LXX

of

which

all

other traces have disappeared, or whether they were based

directly
intact,

upon Hebrew MSS. which had preserved the genuine reading whether in other words they were derived mediately or im
the

mediately from

Hebrew,

is

a matter of subordinate

moment:

the fact remains that Lucian

ultimately

recension contains elements resting

upon Hebrew

sources, which enable us to correct, with

absolute certainty, corrupt passages of the Massoretic text.

instances will be found in the notes in the present volume.
of these,
it

Several

In some

is

instructive to notice, a

conjectural emendation

made
in all

by a

modern

scholar has proved to be afterwards confirmed by the

1
.

testimony of Lucian

The
:

full

gain from this quarter

is

probability not yet exhausted

number

of passages, selected from

text
I.

the

Books of Kings,

in

which the Massoretic

may

be emended
2
.

by the help of Lucian

s recension, are

noticed by

Hooykaas

Let

him who would himself investigate and advance learning, by the side of the other Ancient Versions, accustom himself above all things to
1

So

in

Ki. 15, 10 Gratz

for the
*

un-Hebraic DST72p

clever conjecture (Gesck. der Juden, ii. I, p. 99) is confirmed by Lucian. Cf. on II 24, 5.

lets over de Grieksche vertaling

ff.

p. 12

Cf. Burney, Notes on the

Hebrew Text of Kings

e

van het oude Testament (Rotterdam, 1888), (1903), p. xxxL

1365

Introduction
and Lagarde
s

the use of Field s Hexapla,

edition of the Recension of

Lucian

V
now
the very thorough discussion of his recension of 1-2 Ki. in

On

Lucian, see

Rahlfs, Sepluaginta-Studien, iii. (1911), with synopses of the various readings (for these books) found in the MSS. (19, 82, 83, 108, 127) of Lucian s recension itself

m an(i a l so f Lucian s readings found in other MSS. of LXX ( ( 9~ I 15-21), or quoted by the Fathers ( 25-38). A minute study of Josephus ( Lucian s text of i Ki. i (pp. 163-191), and a study of all its principal variants in
3)>

4~7)>

1-2 Ki. generally (pp. 191-290), lead Rahlfs to the conclusion (pp. 190 f., 192) that while some of the variants are corrections introduced by Lucian himself from the

Hebrew

into the

LXX
;

text current at the time, others cannot be so explained, but

and (pp. 235, 290 f.) that the foundation of Lucian s text is an old,/r-Hexaplaric text, closely allied to (though not identical with) Cod. B, and to the Greek text which formed the basis of the older 1 Ethiopic version 3
point to older sources
.

Josephus, though he by no means agrees always with Lucian s readings, affords evidence that readings of Luc. were current in the ist cent. A. D. Rahlfs ( 16) cites
after

ings not specifically Lucianic

Mez, Die Bibel von Josephus (1895) who, however, quotes also many read from 1-2 Sam. nine cases of Jos. agreeing with
viz.
:

Luc. against Codd. A, B,

11
3>

n T*N,
"oVs,

IoA: Luc.

2(>0a

Jos. vii. 23 St/3aro;.

etc.
;

15, 12

Vulg. raAa/xwf afos,

Qtitaivet

Luc. Jos.

vii.

197

Tt\n<v-

vaios.

16, 5
1
9>3^.

D^PIB,
D!"ID3

Baot;p()(^

Luc. Xoppaju
Xa/taa/x,

Jos.
:

39

(v.

41 |TO3),

Xavaav

vii. 207 ~X.wpa.vov, ~X.wpa/jiov. Luc. Axwaav, Ax^a**/*, etc.

Jos.

vii. 2

74

Klostermann, Die Biicher Sam. u. Konige (1887), p. xl. Of course, this advice must be understood with the needful and obvious qualifications it is not intended
1
:

that everything to be found in Lucian

is

to be indiscriminately preferred to the

in

Massoretic text.
chaff (cf. Torrey,

There

is

undoubtedly wheat
ff.);

Ezra

Studies, 1910, 105

and

it is

Lucian, but there is also the task of the textual

much
critic

to distinguish between them.

The Complutensian
108

Vatican 330

is

Holmes MS. Polyglott is based upon the text of Lucian. the manuscript which was sent in 1513-14 by Leo to Spain

for the use of the editors of that Polyglott

the minutes relating to the loan and

return of the

MS.

still

exist in the Vatican Library (Delitzsch, Fortgesetzte Studien

p. 2). It

zur Entstehungsgtsch. der Compl. Polygl., Leipzig, 1886,

ever, reproduce

does not,

how
from

MS. 108

exactly.
it

Where

the text of the

MS.

differs materially

the Heb. or the Vulg.,

2

was constantly corrected, sometimes from other Greek

(see Rahlfs, p. 18
ff.).

MSS., sometimes from the Hebrew

The antiqua versio! See Cornill, Ezechiel, pp. 37-42. 3 The antiqua versio is based upon the LXX, and in particular on the recension See Rahlfs, i. 84, 85 Raupp in Z.fiir Ass. xvi. (1903), 329 (in represented by B. a study, p. 296 ff., on the oldest Ethiopic MS. of Sam.-Kings, in the Borgio Museum
;

at

Rome

the article contains also a collation of Dillmann

s text).

3- 2, 3-

Lucian, the Targums,

Boxo/>()i

and

the Peshitto

li

20, 1

^33,
"TltJJnn,
800"

"Boxopiov

of the Greek Jos.

(vii.

278)

Luc. BtS-

Sa5(), the Latin

21, 18
23, 8
<5

Jos. Beddadi.
6 Aoremuflet, etc.
<

A<ra0t,

[i

Ch.

n,
.

300*],

800

Luc. Jos. vii. 301 6 XtTrafoy. Luc. (both Sam. and Ch.), Jos.

vii.

308

900

23, ii
24, 9

JON,
vii.

Aya, Aca,

etc.:
,

800,000 + 500,000

so

Luc. H\a, Jos. vii. 310 HAoC (genit.). Luc. (and Codd. 52, 236, 242, Cat. Nic.), Jos.
:

320

900,000 + 400,000

1
-

2.

The Targums
These

are Aramaic Versions

made

for the use of the

Jews, in Palestine or

Babylon, when Hebrew ceased

to

be generally

and not always certain date. Accord spoken. ing to tradition, the Targum that was first committed to writing, in the first century, was that on Job; but other of the Targums
are of various

undoubtedly

embody

traditional

interpretations

that

were current

orally before they were definitely fixed in writing.

originally

The Targum was

an extemporaneous translation and interpretation of succes

of Scripture, delivered by the JBJnVlQ in the public worship

sive verses

of the Synagogue.

From

the circumstances of

its

origin

it

lent itself

readily to expansion: edification, rather than literal translation,

was

the aim of the jCJniriD

and hence the very paraphrastic character

which the Targum especially that on the Latter Prophets is apt In the historical books, however, except in poetical to assume. passages (as Gen. 49, Jud. 5, i Sam. 2, i-io, 2 Sam. 23, 1-7), the

Targum
3.

is

as a rule tolerably
is

literal.

The Targum on
2
.

the

Former

and Latter Prophets

ascribed to Jonathan ben Uzziel

The

Syriac Version,

commonly known

as the Peshitto
()^">

)-K^*i3

editio

simplex], originated in the

needs of the large Syriac-

speaking population N. and NE. of Palestine, whose literary centre was Edessa. No historical details respecting its origin have come

down
that
it it

to us
is

already Theodore of Mopsuestia (fourth cent.) declares

is

known who translated the Scriptures into Syriac ; but considered to date, at least in the main, from the early generally
not

part of the second cent. A. D.

Like the Septuagint, the Peshitto

is

On
For

the alleged dependence of Luc. on Theodotion, see Smith,

fuller

particulars see the art. Dictionary of the Bible ; Bacher in the

TARGUM

(by E. Deutsch)
ff.
;

ZDMG.

xxviii, p. I

Comm,, 402 ff. in Smith s and art. TARGUM

(T. Walker) in

DB.
e 2

lii

Introduction
and the
of the different books,
translators

not the work of a single hand

or groups of books, varies.
either

style

Mainly, no doubt, the

Christians.

were

Jews

or,

more probably, Jewish

1

Thus

the transla

tion of the Pentateuch, for instance, often adheres closely to ancient

Jewish exegesis

traces of

which are also discernible

in other books,

especially in the Chronicles,

the translation of which

has additions
.

and embellishments, imparting to it quite the character of a Targum 2 while the translation of the Psalms Job, on the other hand, is literal
:

is

strongly influenced

by the Septuagint, with which

it

often

re

markably agrees, where both deviate from the Hebrew.

4.

We

reach

now

the Latin Versions.

Of

these the

first is

the Old
c.

Latin Version, used by early Latin Fathers, as Tertullian (died

220),

Cyprian

(d.
s
.

257),

Lactantius,

Lucifer

of Cagliari

(d.

371),

and

Augustine

This Version exists only

in a

more or

less

fragmentary

form, derived partly from MSS., partly from quotations in the Fathers.

Of
in

the

OT.

the part most completely preserved

4
1

is

the Hexateuch,
:

published (to Dt.

Robert from a Lyons MS. (1881) ) by Ulysse the Books of Samuel only fragments are extant derived from the
1,

sources just named.

Of

these fragments, such as were

known
1864 in

at the

time were published by Sabatier in 1743 in his great work, Bibliorum

Sacrorum Antiquae Versiones Latinae : Vercellone

of the

in

vol.

ii

Variae Lecliones Vulgatae Latinae Bibliorum editionis printed

other considerable extracts from the margin of a Gothic

in at
5

MS.

at

Leon

Spain

three fragments, discovered in the bindings of

(II 2,

some books

Magdeburg
i-8 a

29
a

3,

5 [also

Ki. 5, 2-9*]) and Quedlinburg

";

; 15, io-i7 ), were edited by Von Mulverstedt in 1874 two other fragments, discovered similarly at Vienna, were published

(I 9,

1
a

Sig. Frankel,

See especially J. Perles, Meletemata Peschitthoniana (Vratislaviae, 1859). Die Syr. Obersetzung zu den BB. der Chronik(i% ]()).
>

3
iii.

See

fully,
:

on

this Version,

H. A. A. Kennedy
;

comprehensive
iii.

article,

DB.

47

ff.

comp.

PRE?
ii.

viii.

433-443 (Fritzsche)
:

PRE?
i.

25-31 (Nestle).

On

the continuation, see

8 6

Variae Lectiones,

DB. iii. 49**, iv. 446*. pp. xxi-xxii, 179, etc. comp.
in the

pp. xciii-xcv.
frag

Zeitschrift des ffarzvereins, 1874, pp. 251-263.

The two Quedlinburg

ments were re-edited by

5,9

6,

n*

Stud. u. Kritiken, 1876, p. 123 f. (i Ki. has recently been recovered from the same source: A. Diining, Ein
des Quedlinburger Itala-Codex, 1888).

W. Schum

neuts

Fragment

3-

4-

The Old Latin Version

liii

in

1877

*;

in

1885

J.

Belsheim edited some longer fragments (of

as well as 1-2 Sam.) from a palimpsest

other parts of the

OT.

MS.

at

Vienna 2

The Old

Latin Version does not, as a rule, possess an

independent value for the textual criticism of the OT., for it was not made immediately from the Hebrew, but was formed upon the Greek.

As

the extant parts of

it

shew

that

it

existed in different recensions

3
,

it

becomes a matter of importance to inquire how these are related to one another, and upon what MSS., or family of MSS., of the LXX As will be shewn below (p. Ixxvi ff.), in the Books they are based.
of Samuel the recensions which

we possess

are based

upon a

text

agreeing with that of Lucian.

More important for our present purpose is the Latin Version of Jerome, commonly known as the Vulgate Jerome began his labours as a translator by merely revising the Old Latin but ultimately made
*.
;

new Version

directly
5
,

from the Hebrew.

after

He

had

originally learnt

Hebrew

as a youth

and

having dropped the study for a while,

Augustissimae Bibliothecae Caesareae Regiae Palatinae Vindobonensis PraeDoctori Ernesto Birk munerum publicorum feliciter peracto annorum cydo gratulantes qui a Bibliotheca sunt Veteris Antehieronymianae Versionis
fecto

XL

Libri II cipem
2

Regum

sive

Samuelis Cap. X. 18
inlustratam

XL

17 et Cap.

XIV. 17-30

prin-

editionem

dedicant

Tabulis

Photographicis

(Vindobonae,

MDCCCLXXVII).

Cited as Vind. 1 .

Palimpsestus Vindobonensis antiquissimae Vet. Test. Translationis latinae fragmenta e codice rescripto emit et primum edidit Johannes Belsheim Christianiae,
i, 14 2, 15. 3, 10 4, 18. 6, 3-15. 9, 21 I0 2 5- io, 13 i 1 ! l8 12-34. 2 Sam 13*13 Cited as Vind. 2 (One column of this MS., containing II

1885 (rSam.
14,

10, 7. 10, 16
T
4>

4>

5>

4-

1
7>

n, 1218,

13.
9).

n,

2-6, had been pub

lished previously, as a specimen,

matica, Vindob. 1837, p.

ix.)

by Eichenfeld and Endlicher, Analecta GramFor some other recently discovered fragments see
see

DB.
3
iii.

iii.

50*.

Regarded by some as independent versions:

PRE?

viii.

434-6;

DB.

48-9. 4 On the Vulgate generally, see the elaborate article by Mr. (afterwards Bishop) Westcott in Smith s Dictionary of the Bible : on its relation to the Hebrew text of
the

OT.

in particular, the careful

monograph of W. Nowack, Die Bedeutung

des

Hieronymus fur die means be consulted.

5

alttestamentlichc Textkritik (Gbttingen, 1875), should by all See also H. J. White s art. VULGATE in DB. iv. p. 873 ff.
;

I2 5)

Preface to Daniel (printed at the beginning of editions of the Vulgate) 12 (Migne, j. 1079), an interesting passage, too long to quote.

Ep.

liv

Introduction
it

resumed

in his later years, after his migration to

Bethlehem in 386.

The Books
the whole

of Samuel and Kings were published first (c. 393), but work was not completed till 405. For the purpose of perfecting his knowledge of Hebrew, and also subsequently for
assistance in the translation of particular books,

Jerome engaged the

help of Jewish teachers, to

once alludes 1

and from

whom in his commentaries he more than whom no doubt he derived the Rabbinical

interpretations

which occur from time

his

Vulgate

*.

Though

to time in the pages of the Version was made afresh from the Hebrew,

he did not disdain

to avail himself of the labours of his predecessors,

and consulted constantly the Greek Versions (both the LXX and Aq. Theod. Symm.), the renderings of which he frequently quotes and
discusses.

He was

especially prone to be guided

Where

the Vulgate exhibits a rendering which deviates alike

text

by Symmachus. from the

Hebrew

and from the LXX, the clue

to

its

origin will generally

be found in one of the other Greek translations, especially in that of

Symmachus
NOTE.
be done
(cf.

(see pp. Ixxxi-lxxxiii).

text of the
is

For the recovery of the original

E,i\.

5021

f.).

The

first

step

LXX, much yet remains to the more accurate collation ofMSS.

Upon
this

for the purpose, if possible, of

field

grouping them

in families, or recensions.

of study Lagarde(d. 1891) stood pre-eminent (comp. Cornill,

zA.,p. 63): but

1 Putabant me homines finem fecisse discendi. Veni rursum lero3 Ep. 84, solyma et Bethleem. Quo labore, quo pretio Baraninam nocturnum habui praeceptorem Timebat enim Judaeos, et mihi alternm exhibebat Nicodemum. Preface
: !

to Chron.

Denique cum a me

litteris flagitassetis

ut vobis librum

Paralipomenon

Latino sermone transferrem, de Tiberiade quemdam legis doctorem qui apud Hebraeos admirationi habebatur assumpsi et contuli cum eo a vertice, ut aiunt, usque ad extremum unguem et sic confirmatus ausus sum facere quod iubebatis.
:

Preface to Job

Memini me ob

intelligentiam huius voluminis

Lyddaeum quemdam

praeceptorem, qui apud Hebraeos primus haberi putabatur, non parvis redemisse he alludes to the Hebraeus qui me in sacris Scripturis nummis. On Am. 3, erudivit: similarly on Zeph. 3, 8. Gal. 3, 14 al. On Hab. 2, 15 Audivi Lyddae

quemdam de

Hebraeis qui sapiens apud illos et Sfvrepturijs rantem huiuscemodi fabulam, etc. On Zech. 14, 20 Quod
:

N3ri] vocabatur nar-

cum ab Hebraeo

quaere-

rem quid significaret, 2 Comment, on Is.

lectione erudivit

ait mihi, etc.

:

Hebraeus autem qui nos in Veteris Testament! 22, 17 on ~I33 gallum gallinaceum transtulit. (See the Comm. of Rashi ad loc.} Comp. M. Rahmer, Die hebrdischen Traditionen in den Werken des Hieronymus
(Breslau, 1861); continued (with reference to^Hosea) in Frankel
s

Monatschrift,

1865, pp. 216, 460;

1867, p. 107; 1868, p. 419.

4the task

The Vulgate

Iv

was greater than any single man, even with Lagarde s extraordinary powers of and he was only able to point the way which others could His mantle has fallen upon his follow (see Rahlfs, Sept. Studicn, iii. 3, 23-30). pupil and successor at Gottingen, Alfred Rahlfs, who has published exhaustive investigations on the pre-Hexaplar LXX-text of 1-2 Kings, as inferred from Origea s citations on the text and MSS. of the Psalms ; and on Lucian s recension of
work, could accomplish
; ;

1-2 Kings (Septuaginta-studien, i. 1904, ii. 1907, iii. 1911). See also O. Procksch, Studien zur Gesch. der Sept. 1910 (on the text of the Prophets) ; and G. F. Moore s
valuable article on the Antiochian Recension of the
pp. 37-62.

And, on the recovery of the Hebrew original of

LXX in AJSL. xxix (Oct. 1912), difficult LXX render

;

ings, see Margolis,

1905, 311 ff., 1906, 85 ff., 1907, 255 ff. AJSL. xxii (Jan. 1906), noff., xxvi (Oct. 1909), 33 ff.; Harper Memorial Studies (1908), i. i33ff.

ZAW.

4.
i.

Characteristics of the Chief Ancient Versions of

Samuel 1

The

Septuagint.

a.

Features which presumably are not original elements in the

Version, or due to the translators themselves.

(a)

Examples of double renderings

/cat:

doublets

these

are

fre

quently connected by I I, 1 6 Luc. VPS^

aOvpias
1, 2,

3"TO

e/c

Tr\rjOov<;

a.SoAeo xi as p-ov

/cat

e/c

TrXrjOovs

p.ov.

26 24

i"ODy=VW7r(,6V (TOV /ACTtt (TOV.

yB>

VMN IK S nyDKTI HUD

rj

Xlb

^ ^1

^X

/x.7/,

reWa, on

OVK ayaBr)
a/coat as

0x077

*l

^7^ O.KOVW ,

p.rj

Trotctre ourais

on

OVK ayaOal al

OLKOVW.
ya>

4,

!4-l6
Kal

(to i?y ?N)

= [l4

KO.I

r)Kov<Tf.v

HAet
/cat /cat

TTJV

^>OJVT)V

TT^S ySo^s

ciTrev

Tts

f)

/Sor) rr}s

^>cov^s

rauT^sy

av6p<airo<;

o-7reu(ras

e urfjXOfv /cat aTrr/yyetXci/

CTCOV, /cat ot
6<f>8a\fJiol

TW HAcr

15

HXei

rtos fvemrjKovra
/cat etTrev

avrov

eTravf<TTr]<rav

Kal OVK lySXcTrev ]

HXet rols avSpao^iv rots

TOVTOV
;

Tra/aeioTTj/coo-tv avrai

Tts

?}

TOV
<f>u>vr)

^ou?

/cat

6 dvr)p a Trevo as irpO(rrj\6fv

HAet Kat
a

?7rev atru).

In

LXX
;

14

is

a doublet to I5 b-i6 a

I5t>-i6

represent the

original

LXX

of 14-16*

Heb.,

15

Heb. being accidentally

was afterwards supplied, a closer ren dering of 14 Heb. being given at the same time.
omitted
the omission
5,

4 jnQDJTvK
avrov

Dims VT

niQ3

<

TlB> l

/cat

d/oTepa
e/cao"TOt,

TO,
/cat

a.<f)rfpr)p.fva

CTTI TO, ffj.Trp6(r6ia afJiatfteO

ot /capTrot
1

TWV ^ctpwv avrou

Only the more

TreTTTCD/cdres CTTI

TO TrpoOvpov.

salient features

can be noticed.

Ivi

Introduction
Luc.

6, 7

>iy

DiTy

ry

~\VK

= avcv

TWV TtT^yp.ivw
fc6
"IB>K

as OVK
</>

ejrT&7 vyos (dvu TWV TT. = ^y DH^y

6,
6,

We.).

1J1N

DnrvtJ l^/cai tfaTrooTeXeiTe avrrjv, Kal aTreXdo-aTe aurr/v.

12 Luc. IWI *pn 137n

CKOTTltoV
T *ya;
.

nnX r6DEQ = ev

Tpt/3a>

cvfleia eTTOpevoiro

68<i)

/Ala fTTOpfVOVTO TTOpfVOVfTaL

KO.I

ftowCTat (cKOTT.

:=:

for ^yai).

IO. 2 Luc.
14,

nV7X2

= /Aeo-i;/A/3ptas

dXXo/Acvovs jaeydiXa (see note).

40 Luc. jrwi ato nns nayb vnn niun i?iN^ b nyn

Travri dvSpi
la-payX.
"Y/nets

nci
ecreo-^e ei9

SovXciav, xai

eya>

icat

Iwva^av 6 vtos

p.ov ecrd/ie^a
o"ov

ts

SovXetav.
Kal
/cai
ya>

cat etirtv 6
CITTC

Xaos

TT/SOS

SaouX To
Xaov Y/xeis
ev
/xe pos.

dpecTTov evtoTridv
e<rf<r0f

woiei"

2aovX

?rpos TOV
eis

eis ev /xcpos,

xai

Iwva^av

I<r6/j.t6a

Here a second

translation,

correcting the
its

strange

mistranslation of
place.
14,

LXX,

is

inserted in the text out of

proper

47 ri3v!Dn

"13P

= eXaxv

TOV /JacrtXevetv, KaraKX^povrcu Ipyov

1 (nsbon read as ro^BnnaK^tsn) . 15, 3 vby ^nnn xh b nc N ^3 nx Dnonnni=Kat

icpei/z *cal Trdvra

cai

ra avrov Kal ov

TrepiTroi^crr/ e^ avroO KCU e^oXc^pevcrets avrdv*

/cat

dva^eju-aTieis avrov Kal Trdvra ra auroG

ou

cf>eia-r)

air

avrov.
z>z>.

Here each verb

i5al.),
DnO"inni

is

rendered twice

(e^oXeflp.

= Dnnn

as

9.

being represented moreover a third time by

KO.L Icpet/A. 1 6, 1

"p

D1D1

= Kat

bination of two

(The com Th. as the renderings, though accepted by

dya^dv
(roi lo-rai /cat dvaTrava-ei ere.

original text, has the effect, as

effect before the cause.)
1 8,

We. remarks,

of putting the

28 Luc.

inmnN ^1X^-n3 ba*D1=iau [MeXxoX

Here by the
see note.
(p"iy).

rj

Ovydrrjp avrov

KOI] Tras Itrpa^X rjyanra avrdv.

side of the genuine

LXX
later

rendering

is

inserted a second translation expressing the

:

(and corrupted) Hebrew text

ri ere
.

2O, 9

*Jvy =

ts rots

TrdXeis crou

($afft\fvtit> :

Lucian combines the two renderings rather cleverly Karaie\r]povrai TO %pyov TOV cf. 12, 2 (the addition of CK TOV vvv). 16, 20 (p. Iviii). 17, 2. 21, 12.
:

4- I-

Characteristics of the Septuagint

Ivii

21, 14

(13

LXX) -wn
ev TT;

nir6i
IKCLVT],

*?y
KO.L

im

DTZI

CTroi^craTO
6vpai<;

^epa

tTvp-rrdvi^f
eT

TT/S

TroAews

/cat 7rape<epeTO
7roAea>9.

ev rats \epo~iv avrov Kal

is

ri

ras 0vpas r^s

twice.
D^DU*

Each verb

represented in the

Greek
23, I

ni3"lin~nN

nDi"n

= Kai

avroi 8iap7raovo-tv

Toil?

II 6, 2

=001^ 17, 53-) (*caTa7raTeto:=nDCJ> 14, 48; miiT vy2D = a7ro TWV dp^ovrwv lovSa cv ava(3d<reL (i.e.
aXws.

for

^V2O

[see p. Ixvii]

Klo.

view

is

less

probable)
2
.

*.

While

doublets

are thus not infrequent even in Cod. B, they are

peculiarly characteristic of the recension of Lucian

When

Lucian

found in

his

MSS. two

divergent renderings of a passage, he sys

tematically combined them, producing thereby

what would be called

conflate

in

the terminology of

New

Testament

criticism
this

readings.

As
from

my

friend,

Prof.

Sanday, reminds me,

method of combining

different readings is characteristic of the Syrian school of critics,

whom

the

modern

Textus Receptus

of the

NT.

is

essentially

derived.

The

application of the

same method,

same time and

to

place, to the text of both

at approximately the Testaments must be due

some common

influence, even if (as has

been conjectured

it

be

not Lucian himself to

(l>)

whom

the Syrian recension of the

NT.

is

due.

Corruptions originating in the Greek text

itself in

the process
letters
it

of transmission.

Where by

the

change of one or two

the

Greek may be brought

(especially if
it

into conformity with the

Hebrew,

is

more

probable, as a rule, that the variation originated in the Greek only

it is

one that might be

facilitated

by the context), than

that
:

is

due

to a difference in the
/cAai)crev
rjif/yo-fv

I 4, 19 ytDJll
1 8.

Hebrew text used by the translators from wxXao-ev (We.): see i Ki. 8, 54.
vij/uo-ev

19,

9,

24 DTI

(probably) a corruption of
.

(cf. vi/^ow

44. 20, 18-19. 22

See also the notes on I 20, 30 (Luc.). 27, 8 b II 13, 16. 14, 6. 15, 17 f. 19, For doublets connected by ij, see Margolis, AJSL. 21,1. 5.
-

xxv (July, 1909), p. 259 and 2 Add, from Lucian, I i, 6.

;

cf.

II 19, 43

2,

11. 4, 18. 6, 8. 7, 16. 8, 8. 12.

10, 27

n,

a
.

12,

2. 3.

14, 7. 33.

15, 29. 32.

16, 14. 18.

I?,

(OVTOI=

18. 22.
n^>N).

25, 14.4!

end. 26, 17. 27,8*. 28, 23. 31, 9 etc.

8

Westcott and Hort, The

New

Testament in the Original Greek,

ib., p.

ii.

138.

For

examples of conflate

readings, see

94

ff.

Iviii

Introduction
induced by the context.
.

Ki.

2,

13.
for

6,

7),

10,

TW

o/3i

eV

TO>

6pto>

13, 4 py.S*l

oLveftr/a-av

corrupted likewise
(^pS>-f?l

LXX do through the influence of the context for avffiorjvav not recognize the Nif. of this verb: cf. n, 7). So 14, 20 dve/Jr; for
avefiorja-e (as in

A).

14, 5 (see note).

close to (so e^o/Ltevov

ib.

i>1D

bis, e pxo/Ae vw

to

one

coming Nu. 22,

.,

from

Luc.), which represents

6 Xaos

ho

5.

Dt.

n,

30.

14,

45 Luc. IXcov (from

[V

read as

Dy] to bring the meaning into

some

relation with the context).

1 6, 2O Luc. yo/iov (from yo/)p, *5s 2 3 ^fpoLTreiav (from 0cpa.(j>iv). adapted so as to harmonize with ~rtCn oVov). 17, 40 reXcious (from 1 8, 2I ^ uc * v TC S H^jyni Luc. l^qpx VTO (f r ^/3X OV ) 7 Aetovs).

>

"

BwdfJ-ffTiv (for

oWiv A).
from

2O,

1 1

N31

KCU

/Ae ve for KCU uo/Aey (We.).

15 cvpeOfjvai prob. for

II 17, 9

ega.p8r)vai (as A).

26, IO TraiSevorT/ (for

Tratcrr;).

BOYNfiN
cf.

BO0YNON.

16

/caTaTreioT; (for /caTaTrtr;).

1

23, 8 o-rpartwras (probably for Tpav/tarias: See t.

(for

8).

9 avefiorjcrev

aW/fy:

the reverse change above)

:

2
.

Cf. II 14,

20
)B IpVJTl
at dve-

Compare from other books

2 Ki. 3, 21

HVOI

H"13n

Tin

^6r)aav (K TTCLVTOS Trfpitfafffitvoi

wvr)v xal flirov *fi for KOI

indvw under the influence

\fi.

of the preceding (incorrect) dvt^orjaav ; 23, 5. ir rQ5J*1 Ka.TtKa.vat for Kartiravat ; 4, 8 J"iyO O.TTO Kapnov for duo Kaipov ; 17, 14 D^J^ 1V25^ ixppTdaGrjaav veuw*

Luc. tc Tofy
:

opiois.

The same corruption Jud.

i, 3.
I

2,

9 (Cod. A),
i

t^.

78, 54*. Ez.

n,

10. IT
*

the converse one Mai.

in
!

Comp.
;

proper names: I 5,
5>

A.&evvr]p; 17,

I5ot>/*aias

21,

(see note)
rS>

A/3|ieAfx
ro\ta0

43 (B). 29, II (A, B, Luc.) II 2, 2 al. AX ^OO^ 30, 14 rA/3ou

2
;

PXjnr
;

laparjK
;

25,

44 Luc.
;

tic

-fj

Icrpar)\tiTis

8, 7

it po@oa.ft

10, 6. 8

H3yD
P3
(

A.fja.\i)n;

II, 21. 22 A.Set^f\tx vlov

ltpof}oa.\i.

12,

30

M\XO^

(usually for

Cl);

14, 27

end AfraOap.
also,

Sometimes,

constantly, as
Ie)3o(T^<

MXX*;
(cf. II 3,

ntt

3TJ"

(Luc. A/SeSSaSav)

Opvti\,

^3^02 A O/was).

?T2tf A&iycua. (no doubt A for A) (but in II 3-4 Me(i<|>i0off0 ) I Ki. 1-2 Erjpffa^tt (throughout) iT JlK Luc.
; ;

Dn~l3

Comp.

|1J

Navjj.

But where the incorrect form

is

is

constant,

it is

probable that

it is

due generally to the translators, and

not a

mere error of

transcription.

3 Whence saturati sunt porcina found its way into some copies of the Old Latin Version, and is mentioned by Augustine, e. g. IV. 73 (Bened.) ubi dictum est "saturati sunt non nulla exemplaria "saturati sunt filiis" habent: ex porcina

ambiguo enim graeco

gen, 1885, p. 40).

interpretatio duplex evenit

(quoted by Lagarde in his Probe

finer neuen Ausgabe der lateinischen Obersetzungcn des Alien Testaments, Gottin-

4- i- a.

Characteristics

of

the

Septuagint
;

lix

(swine

flesh!)

ninDO

iraXaias

from vlStv; 31, 16 TlflV 01 KXrjpoi pov from ol Kcupoi pov 39, 6 from iraAeutmiy (as A) 44, 13 DiT"^niD3 y TOIS d\a\dyfiaaiv avruiv
;

fromd\\dyfMatv 49,9 pim tKomaatv from fKoirafftv (see Amos 7, 5) 69, 27 rpa.Vfia.Tuv fiov from rpavfw.riojv aov 89, 21 UJHp fD5T2 ey tAt ei 07(0; from f\aiw
l
;

"]v,>n

KO.T opOw from WOT opOpov (A) Jer. 15, 10 -Q 1SW t6l !39 9 ovT6 &<p(\ijaa, ovre w<pf\rjafv /j.t oiiStis, already noted by Origen as a ypcuftutuv
"U"IK>

VWJ

N^>

afidpTTjiia,

for

w((>ti\T)ffa,

w<pti\T)<rtv

Ch. 18,
;

Margolis,

ZAW.

1907, 226).

Cf. p. 78 n.

2 ^7a7ra from Tjjrara (so MS. 243: Thackeray, 36-38; and esp. Margolis,

#. 225ff.
b. Features due presumably to the translators themselves
:

(a)

The

translators are apt to be very literal, representing

Hebrew

expressions not by idiomatic Greek equivalents, but by word-for-word

renderings:
;

thus

I
al.

3,

6 Trpoa-f&tTO
.
.

/cat
.

e/caXeo-evJ
3,

al.

Trpoa-t&cro
o>s

II 2,
4,

28
7 al.

Trpoa (.6f.ro rov

IO

al.

DJ?S3
z
<5.

DyDD

aTra^

7ra|.

DK^E>

^IDnN ex^^ s Ka
"

Tpi-rrjv.

(see note)

nn n
s

yeyove TOiavrrj.
/x^ /3oav.
.

6, 7
7>

t^ 71

OTTLtrOfv
J
7>

avrSw.

8 /r)

4-

a ^J

T^
25
a.7ro
.

P2 ova
V.
2O, 21 24, xat tTTCKfiva.

18, 22 Kat

aTTO

o-ov

w8e.

2 ^QH ^e Xttv 22 nN7ni

et

ev

fjov\eo-6a.i o-ov
.
.

"]DD

is /tot

irapa Kvptou (HirT D),

8,

7roti;o-<o

28, 17 AaAetv

Ttvo5.
wo-TTcp

II

"lyBTl

1 s ?S d^i x c ^P a r^smJX^s.
i,

24, 3

DD31 DnD

aurovs

/cat

watrfp avrovs (contrast Dt.

by a different

hand

DD3

u>s

core ^tXtoTrXao-tcDs).

The pron. "aJN (when expressed in the Hebrew) is (after II 7) seven times represented curiously by the substantive verb I2 7 Kct^ ^7*^ Al II II, 5 eytii tt/u ev yacrTpi X W fpvcrdfjirjv erf /
:
>

15, 28 eyw

flfj.1

o-rparcvo/xat

1 8,

12 Kat eyw
CTTI
3
.

et/xt IO-TTJ/JH

2O, 17
t/xt

eyw

ct/At;

24, 12 T/3ta

yw
.
.

et/u

atpw

o-, 17 i$ov eyw

Comp.
1 2

7,

29

OTI o-v eT

eXaX^o-as

22,

Comp. Land, Anecdota Syriaca, iv. 190 and Field s note ad loc. Also Jud. 5, 3. 6, 18. 11, 27. 35. 37. Ru. 4, 4. i Ki. 2, 2. 2 Ki. 4, 13. 10, 9. 20. Ez. 36, 36 A (dub.); and occasionally in Aq. and Theod. (Hatch-Redpath,
: ;

p. 55)

Thackeray (Journ. of Theol. Stud. 1907, 272 f. cf. Grammar, Concord., p. 367). thinks that the usage is due to an attempt to represent ^33X (as distinguished
but though it does always express "O3X, except a Ki. 10,9. 22, 20. Ez. uniformly. by no means stands for From II 2, 7 (incl.) there is a singular change in the rendering of 03, which is
"OK)
;

from
3

36, 36,

it

""DJS

now often
20.

represented by

KCL I

yt

II 2,

7.

11,12.17.21.24. 12,14.
2.

5>^

Hi

6. 7-

15, 20. 24. l6, 23.

17, 5. 10. 12. l6.

(So before in

and

19, 20. 40. 43. 2O, l6. 21, L. 19, Luc. but not in B, as I i, 6 L. 8, 8 L. 18, 5
l8, 22. 26. 27.

Ix

Introduction

(3)

They even
I
I,

translate not unfrequently wholly regardless of the

sense:

26

O
8,

lv

e/xoi.

5,
:

QW1
1 1

KO.L

eV^yayev avrois
8,

the suffix construed as a dative

TT;S

GK.

X
).

3 yxnn

*,riK

o-WTtXtias.

6 IfiSN/ D,

H^yi KCU
(

aTroSe/caTwo-ei

("l^VI)
*BE>n

epya avrov.
Orjcreo-Oe

12, 2

JjOPJ xai Ka^o-o/xai

FaB }).
I.

12, 25

(as though ^SpFl from ^P^): SO 27,

14,

14,
I5>

38 ras ywvt as TOV

IJ wapaKXi7/*ai
Trapa.Kf.KX-r)ft.ai
1

Icrpar/X.

40

"Qy?

is
:

oovXeiav

([i"l]"12y7).

(so

II

24,

26

7raptK\r)6ri

DH3

= TrapaKaXe

o)

hence

derived mechanically to express the Nifat).

7rt

18, 21 *nni K at ^v

1
"!":

!)

laouX

(!)

^elp

aXXo<vX(ov.

(r)

Hebrew word not understood,

if

or treated incorrectly as a
is

proper name, or
I I,

of a technical character,
2,

often transliterated

24

oi<i,

ve/3eX [lO, 3 do-Kov].

eTrio/uYj.

18

e<ov8

/?ap.

28

al.
f>ov8

[in

the Pent, regularly

al.

32 (Cod. A) Kparaiw^a /AOUWV.

13, 3 Nao-ei/3.
6. II. 12.

9, 12.

13

Ba/Aa.

IO, 5

al.

vaflXa.

14,

eis

Meo-cra/?

TWV

dXXo(^>vXcov

(but 13, 23

vTroo-Tao-is).
Dri"|53 !).

15

Mecro-a<.

23 r)v

Ba/Aco^.

20 yo/^op (see note). 17, 2O cts T^V Ap/xarra/oet. 1 8 Luc. 2O, 19 Trapa TO epya/3 CKCIVO. fpov(3a. 21 you^ay. 25, 18 32. 39 Luc. 4! aTTO TOV ap-ya/3. yo/xop.
33
ev Te66aifji (for

16,

ot^>t,

II 3, 33. 34 NaySoX. 8 J 5- 2 3 yeSSovp (for ina). Bapovxdoubt A for A). 15, 28 and 17, 12, 31 Luc. ptazi eV Ma8c(3/3a (no
3>

6 ApafiuO.

15, 32
cra<<u>$.

ecus

TOU

apa(f>(iD@.

29
13

21,

Pows (Luc. Pws SO 16, l); 17, 19 2O MaStuv. 23, 9 Luc. ev "^eppafj. (for
:

DD~in3).

eis

KaSwv.

24, 7 Mai/^ap.

Cf.

Thackeray, Grammar,

i.

32-34 And so
"UX?

in other

books

as Gen. 28, 19

pDV

TZptKaxcap. Jud. I, 19 el s Aa)3o)

E/ia6>.

TV 0,51^1 OT( DH? 7P3 331

""S

*at

OvXamjavs (!). Jos. 7, 24 PrjxaP SitaTtikaro avrots. 3, 3

27
at tiroir]"T

DOn

N13P iy

6,

26 tiyO

Maoi/.
D^INI

8, 7 affapierjyeiv. 9,
oi Ov\aftais.

aav (\\ov\etp. 41 Iv Aprjua.

18, 29

^b

20,

48

DHD

ytD

24 A. 24, II L. II
1

2,

6 A.
i

3,

19

and

in other

books sometimes

in B, as Jud. i,

22. 2, 10. 17. 3, 22 al.

Ki.

i, 6.

48

al.)
is
;

The

transliteration of
I.

Hebrew words
;

also

characteristic of

Theodotion

C. C. Torrey, Ezra Studies, Chicago (1910), pp. 66-81, 339 (who argues from the frequency of such transliterations in translation of these books is really the Septuagint of Chr. Ezr. Neh. that the
Field, Hexapla,

xxxix-xlii

Swete, p. 46

LXX

accepted by Moore, A jfSL. xxix, p. 54, but which, for reasons stated by him, appears doubtful to Rahlfs, Studien, iii. 85 f.).

Theodotion

a conclusion which

is

4- i. b.

Characteristics of the Septuagint

Ixi

d7r<>

jr($A.cw M0Aa. 2 Ki. 2, 14 K1H ^N d^xjxu. 3, 4 HpJ vojKrjO. 10, 10 N1DK d^xfw. 5-7 y35f. 9 [see Stade, ZATW. 1885, p. 289 i.=Akad. Reden u. Abhandl. 193, 199 and Kittel, ad loc.~\. 23, 4 niBIt? ffa\T)n<0 (A for A). 5 x^a/sti/*, paoivxu0,

12,

etc.

Sometimes the
giving
Of.p.a.Ti

translation

and

transliteration are
:

found side by
a//.a<e#.

side,

rise to

a species of doublet

I 5, 4 (p. lv)

6,

8
7,

ev

/?epex$av

(A apyo).

II. 15 KCU TO Oefj.a epya/3

p. 3.

(A apyo).
14,

TO.
is

0X0-77 Ao-Tapw0 (nnn5?yn, as

12, 10, taken

as=rvn&?Kn, which
25
(for

regularly rendered
15,

aXo-?;).

10, 5 dvao-re/ota .... Nao-ei/J.

(p.
Ivi).

laaX (see note). D inn). 32 Luc.

cow
TTICTTIS

lepei/x

lepei/u,
T<3

aTre /CTeivev

^ Ava^co^
"

TpffJUav.

21, 2 tv

TOTTO)

TW

Aeyo/xtVa)

(as

though

^P(^)

^)

^eAXavei Mae/Atovi (for ^73 D1pD2

23, 14 ev Macrepe/x ev TOIS
ev TOIS o-revoi?

^JD7N).

OW.)(pfJi,tvOS

Nceo-wapav (^V?.)m"li*D3).

(TTCV019 (for

nilSBB read as
24,
is

19 ev Meo-o-apa
!

(for

nnxm).
There

23

eis

n l IJfGin-7y). T^V Mecro-apa OTCV^V (for

(d)

a tendency in the version to

make

slight additions for

rilling

the purpose of giving

an explanation or otherwise
OVK
KOL
ic

out the

sense

thus

I I,

+ oVi
ib.

rjv

avrfj TraiSiov.

ib.

+V7rep Tcumfv. 14 (TO

Kvptbu.
21

Tratoaptov)
2r;Acoju..
6<j>6a.X(j.(i>

HAet.
2,

-\-

iropevov
pews).
01

IK

7rpoo~a)7rou

+ ev +

12

HXei (TOV
5>

28 end + els
K<H)

/3pwo-iv.

29 (dvatSet)
9,

(see note).
IO,

I2

(^wvres

fjirj

dtTro^avdvTes.

15

Trpos aurov.
A/Ayu.aviT7;v).

4 8vo (eiTrap^as) apTtov.

1

II,

IO

Trpos

Naa?

(TOV

(/cupiw)

and
43

+ Trpos SaoiA. 23^. afterwards + Trpos ^a/j.ov/]X and

15,
7
*<at

16,
OTI

12

dya^os
CO-TIV

6pao-et

owos

(dya^os).

17, 36.

eiW AareiS

Ot>^t

dXA ^

^etpcov KUVOS.

19,

8+7rp6s

SaouX.
KOI

2O, 28 ets B^^Xee/x (T^V TroXtv auToC Tropeu^ijvai).

21, 4

end+

<t>dycT(u.

25,

26 TOV

/ry

eX^etv eis

at/xa

(d^aiov).

31 end-\-

dya^worai avrrj.
(e)

Hebrew

writers are apt to leave something to be supplied

:

by

the intelligence of their readers

thus the subject of a verb

is

is

often

not expressly named, and the object

either not

named

or indicated

merely by a pronoun, the context, intelligently understood, sufficiently

meaning. In such cases, however, there was a temptation sometimes even to a scribe of the Hebrew, but still more to a trans
fixing the
lator,

to facilitate the

comprehension of the reader, or to preclude

as possible,

some misapprehension which he contemplated

explicitly the imperfectly

expressed subject or object.

by inserting Cases in which

Ixii

Introduction
and

MT.
"ICN^I

LXX

vary in the presence or absence of subject or object

are numerous.
/cat etTrev

Thus
HXct.

I 2, 28 1DX TOV OLKOV TOV Trarpo s o-ov.

6,

3,

i8 b

2O b

/cat 7T/30S

Tiva dva/^o-fTai (/a/3a)Tos KV/HOV)

dc/>

-f}fji(i)v

9)
1

^ TO TratSapiov.
Kai
?TTC

24

/cat etTre

(SayMov^X TW 2aovX).
I5>

12, 5

DiTvX

"lEN

3,a./j.ovr]X

Trpos TOV Xaov.

etc.

27

/cat

iKpa.Ttja f

(2aovX).

6,

12 inntJ D xptcrov TOV AavetS,

lays

Hence Wellhausen
differ in respect

down
it

the canon that

if

LXX

and

MT.
had

of a subject,

is

probable that the original text

neither.
I 2,
avroi).

2O b ICIpcb

"Obi"!!,

LXX
o/Dtov

/cat

a.Tn)\6v 6 avfyxoTros

ets

TOV TO^-OV
fbl33

The

original text

was lB1pE&
for

^m.

7,

14

i?N"lB^

^SH

HN1

D^nK ba TD,

LXX
Jfn

/cat

TO

Io-pa^A

dc/>tXavTO

KT\.

Both

MT.

and

LXX

may be accounted
jSaa.

by the assumption of an

original nNl
Sa/xovr/X.
/cat

DVIB^D n^O b

10, 22

The
TOIS

original text

had

bB^.
1DN

^X^l, LXX Kal an/pomprev n, 9 D 3ft&D^ nDN" ), LXX

1

CITTCV

dyye Xots-

Originally

1,

here best read as a singular

(We.).

on

account of the definiteness of the message

Kat e^ptoSa/toir^X.

15

Q^Ot,

LXX

17,

39^ IvVO

"TH

DIDM,
as

LXX

Kat

a(f>aipov(riv

aura

ob-

ai Tov.

Originally only V^yo D1DM, fixed in

MT.

to a sing,

by

the addition

of 111, read by
/cat
:

LXX

D"}P)1.

30, 20

in

np"

JNSrH>3TIK,

LXX

lXa/3ev TravTa Ta Trot/xvta.

"NT

almost certainly

a false
c.

Explicitum
the

see the note.

On

Orthography of the Hebrew Text used by

ff.).

LXX

(comp.

above, p. xxviii
(a)

The number

of cases in which
verb, or in

LXX

and

MT.
itself

differ in respect

of the

number of a

which the

MT.

has one number

where the other would be expected, makes it probable that there was a time when the final consonant was not always expressed in writing,

and

that

when

the scriptio plena

left,

was introduced an (apparent) singular

plural.

was sometimes
omission was
in

which ought to have become a

cases

The

some

made

good by the Massorites in the Qre,

32, 25

but not always.

Nu.
J31K1

13, 22
<ni

pian iy
33,
7.

wi n2
8, 6.

i^yi (read INTI).

i
/cat

-ION<I

Tl.

Jud.

Sam.

9,

4^
i

just

mentioned),

LXX

eI6W.

20 NT1 (of the Ki. 13, 1:3 N13M

19,

(the sequel DiT3fc6

DnBD l shews

that

"6

^SD

132

Ni3>1

must

4. i- c.

Character of Hebrew Text used by the

:

LXX

Ixiii

have been intended

cf.

LXX

Ip-^ovrai ol viol avrov KCU

^QtJ>3

^3 were intended DVJKn by the author). 22, 49 (probably 3?n and ^DK (contrast ihep/ura/s in Jer. 10, 25^). , 79, 7 1OBT1 if/.
. ,

The
i

correction
43, 28

is

made

in the
111
)

inrns^;

inntt"i

np

jud. 21, 20.

1

Qre (Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 119), Gen. 27, 29 i Sam. 12, 10. 13, 19 DTIB^S ION
(as Is. 39, 7

"o.

Ki. 9, 9. 12,7.
\r](iil>fTcu}.

Ki. 20, 18

rip"

inp

11

but the sing,

may here stand

:

LXX
42,

Est. 9, 27 (contrast #.23). Ezr. 3, 3.

Elsewhere the sing,

25
i

may

be explained by the principle noticed on I 16, 4

v
<u

Gen.

p
<

D."6
1

ETJP1 sc.
sc.
,

48,

C]D

"DDfcOl

(LXX IDIKH (LXX *ol

nt^iyn

l?^^

t?y1 would be unnatural).

"IDKl).

dirrjyy(\r)

*VDK

12M

(LXX

diTT]-yyt\T) 5i ..

\fyovrfs~).

Conversely

MT.

sometimes has a plural where

I
7,

rightly) read as a singular:

vwo-cv Kvptos
i.e.

13 DTlE^a WW1,
l 15f"i

(comp.
111

p. Ixii).

10, 23 innp^l

1
J

LXX (not always LXX KCH ercaruLXX both sing.,

19,

innp

!.

12,

9^ Q3 IDPI^Mj

LXX
, , ,

mi

cVoAe/^crej/.
as V131_, by
. ,

21

nri,

LXX
so
i

^3^:
all

KOI aTT^yye Ar/ (iJ^i b Ki. i, 23). 30, i

read in

MT.
"D

121^1

ID^S

LXX as ^OSI, LXX

^\>

sing,

(as

MT.
or

itself
3).

sometimes in similar cases:

2ob

15, 6

IDI,
i.e.

Nu.

14, 45.

Jud. 6,
"IDNM

nNM, LXX
;

Kat eXcycro
cf. p.

("ICN^,

either

TiN
25,

the latter not idiomatic

is

258).

2 ib

^NB1,

LXX
Gen.

KOL rjpwTTjo-av avrov (the subject

the

men

left
:

behind).

Comp.

25

wy ip
is

IXIpM,

LXX

tTrwvo/xao-ev

26 (in a similar

context)

MT.

has Nlp^l,

LXX

e/caAco-cv.

The
11

correction

made

in

(np lEWl) nNM b^T^ C^ N (the correction is

DJ?n !?N
2

the Qre {Ochlah ive-0chlah t

(the subject
is

No. 120):

Jos. 6, 7
1
"!)

Joshua). 9, 7
i

(np 1DX
i

IIE^I
3. 21.

here unnecessary),
Nn^l) liO*)
. , ,

Sam.

15, 16.
ai

Ki. 12,

Ki. 14, 13
b

pQ
is

D^T (np

^Qn,

LXX

^ev.

Ez. 46, 9 b

INif^ (io

strangely not made).

Neh.

3,

15 (comp. v. 14).

The
phrase

case

particularly clear in

some of

the instances in which the

This strange con struction Kara (rwecriv might be supposed to have been forced upon the translators when they found what would only naturally be read
aTrr/yye X?;

(or dv^yye Xi;) Xeyovrcs occurs.

1

by them
19, i.
i

as

">bxb

1|M I 15, 12. 19, 19.

2
:

II 6, 12.

15, 31

(MT.

Tan).

Ki.

i,

51

but

it

is

scarcely credible that they should have

1 a

Winer,
J
"12

Grammar of NT.
20.
i

Greek,

lix.

n.

So also Gen. 22,

1

38, 13. 24 (cf. 45, 16. 48, 2). Jos. 10, 17. Jud. 16, 2 (in

MT.

has dropped out),

Ki.

2, 29.

41 (without ItOfcO).

Ixiv

Introduction
their
i.

gone out of
I 14, 33.

way
it

to use

it

for

what

in

MT.
i

stands as

23,

instances, therefore,

simply
into

"Wl,

Ki. 2, 39: in these can hardly be doubted that the original text had which was read by LXX as 13 ^, but in MT. was resolved
24, 2
(AeyovTcov).
II 3, 23.

VTW.

(b]

those parts of the

The MSS. used by the LXX translators except, probably, in OT. which were translated first must have been
.

That it was not form of the square character l the unmodified archaic character appears clearly from the frequency with which letters, which have no resemblance to one another in that
written in an early
character, are interchanged in

many

parts of the Septuagint.

For

the

same reason

it

can hardly have been very similar to the Egyptian

illustrated above.
It

Aramaic alphabet

was no doubt a

transitional

alphabet, probably a Palestinian one, of a type not greatly differing

from that of Kefr-Bir im

1

(p.

xxiii).
2,

In

this alphabet,

not only are

and

remarkably alike

2
,

but also

and 3, and 3 and D (of which

it,

there are

many

clear instances of confusion in the Septuagint):

other.
*i

n,

and

the final

D also approach each

:

and 1 resemble each

next

other in most Semitic alphabets

to that of
1

so that from their confusion

in

and

the most
3

common
.

LXX

little

can be inferred

respecting the alphabet used

1 So long ago Gesenius, Gesch. d. Heb. Sprache u. Schrift (1815), more recent opinion, see K. Vollers in the ZATW. 1883, p. 230 f.

p.

158

for a

They

are also alike,

1

acter in

which

niPI"

is

it may be observed, in the late type of the archaic char written in the fragments of Aquila mentioned above (p. iii) :

see p. 15 in Burkitt s edition.

scriptio

Kefr-Bir im alphabet is considerably later than the LXX (as the e plena alone would shew), but the Inscription of B ne Hezir, and those alluded to p. xxii, note i, appear to shew that an alphabet not differing from it
J

It is trne, the

and

was in popular use in Palestine at least as early as the Christian era more abundant records had been preserved it would probably be found to and 1, and D and 3 (which begin at an earlier period still. The confusion of
materially
if
:
*"

frequent can only have been translated after the change of character had been effected the Pent., as tradi tion states, may have been translated earlier. Possibly a large and discriminating
:

cannot be explained from the old character) may be due to accidental causes the books

is

in the Pent, so

uncommon

that

it

in

which

it

is

induction of instances (in which isolated cases, especially of proper names, should be used with reserve) might lead to more definite conclusions.

4- i. c.

Character of Hebrew Text used by the

in
11

LXX
1,

Ixv

Examples of letters confused

(a)
I 2,
(

LXX
12,
2

MT.

LXX
1

II 23, 7

N7D

KCU 7rXr?pes

= K?Dl) MT. LXX

:

>

29 fiy[o]
24,

6(f>6a.\fj.Z>

(=

jiy).

(p. Ix).

19, 22

13^2

cv

2e</>i

^3K>3).

6 rvni yeVoiTo

(=nw):

both changes together, 12, 3

Very
tj/.

clear examples are afforded

by the Psalms

MT.

s
,

LXX

2,
1

6 *3/D
3

^?P^ KdT(n
TTttVTa TO.

6,

VDn 73
13 jy^

20, 10

KCU

22, 17 32
1
35>

4
6
2

36,

^^
^yjj

2"lp2

ev
6.

38, 12 45, 46,

1

T/yyto-av^V^ (see 32,

Kat
TT/DOO-KU

88, 4).

17

""inriKVII

^^3tit3
rii^n

K Tp r/VLacTf TO
(see 52, 2).

50, 21 58,

avo//.i av==nfan

4 2T3

69, 33 D^n!
73,
7 ^D3

y dSiKt a

io a icy 6
76,

12-13

25, 39,

and

cf.

i/c.

106, 43).

90,

6
6

nKV
11^
a

/cat

t8e=i"IN"U.

91,

Kai SaifjLoviov^^W} (see 106, 37).

/<ai

122,

6 V7E*
"T^N

ev^vta^nibB T;

l
:

(j;. \

7). i /

144, i5

= ^^, efjidKapia-av the LXX scrupulously

their

passage

which shews how

in

expressed

what they found

MSS.

for in the parallel clause

\nri1

n^K^aKa/no?.
p.e

Add

Is. 29,

13

31

TIN DJ1NT

15, 8;
Jer. 6, 9

Mk.

7,

pdryv 8e o-e/3ovrai 6)=TiK Dntrv inhl.

KT\. (so

Mt.

1P?iy ?Piy KaXa/Aao-^t

TO,

IO,

2O ^N^r Kai
5,

7rpo/3aTa p.ov

=
etc.

Zech.
13G5

Wy

17

dStKta avrwv

= &$}?.,
f

Ixvi

Introduction

MT.
\l/.

i,

LXX
12

17, ii i:i1t?K cK/SaXoVres

/A=

??

(perhaps Aram. T!?^)-

Won

vTT&afiov
CLTT

/ie^^B"*.

22, 25 13CO

e/AOvr^ErD.
iB>B3i

30 ,Tn
41,
56,

N^>

Kat

77

^vxn

p-ov

aur
l

9 12 piy KareOevro
8 p

KO.T

I(j.ov

=
z;.

hy wepToS/w70evos

= pK

by.
1

59, 10 iry TO /cparos /iou

= W (cf.

8).

62,

pnrr

5
64, 65, 68,
7

IDNJ^
2")

rrjv

pi

7rpocre

8 D^oxf)
7

pem
1J35^

rapaxOriffomu

6vr]=Wtb
ra^ots^1

fliV (or
?

?$).

nnTTO

Tor s /caroiKowTas ev

V.?^-

b 73, io 76,
7

N^D
DID

O1 not

iJ/npanrX^pets=K^D
eVucrrafav
01

(xal added).
ITTTTOVS

D1D1 2311 01*13

tTriySe^KOTes TOVS

91,

109, 10

28
119,
3 npiy

01

fTravicrTa.fj.evoL /AOi

vyD N? nhy
i>j?B

f|N ov yap

ol f.pyaZ,6p.fvo(. TTJV

dvo/UO

=N/

Add

Ez. 48, io b ni.T

o-Tai=n\T.

35 lOt^

mn

Lam.

3,

22

Won N^

eo-rai TO ovo/ta avT^s^lttK JIM*. 3 OVK e&Aurov /ie=*3En N^ (GK.

H7 X

).

Sometimes both confusions occur

J
>A-

in

one word or verse

35>

9
"

45 5
23 Illy 1231
11

Jer. 6,

D^DID
ijj?

?J/1
</>

ITTTTOIS

Kai

ap/j.a(n

7ra/3aTafeTat=

r 2311 D^D1D

2
.

So
etc.,

in Kt. 39,

i.

77, i.

Neh. n,

17.

Ch. 16, 38
for

and

in

LXX

of

Ch.

9,

6
2

where

MT.

has regularly pniT.

Instances such as
;

Si0

for

?]1

A-yx
;

"*

C"OX

^. 8 title

DTllH

-TUJV

XTJVWV

= nin;n

27,

6 D11

C^cufff

D^l

11

88,

1O1p

D^KDI OS ^

larpol ivaar-iiaovoi

= 10^ D^DI CN
presupposed by

(cf. Is. 26,

LXX

is

due probably, not to confusion of

14) are not cited, as the difference of pronunciation 1 and *, but to the absence

of the plena scriptio. That the MS. (or MSS.) upon which the Massoretic text

is

founded must also

at

4- i. c.

Character of Hebrew Text used by the

1,

LXX
3

Ixvii

(/3)
v3"i;

MT.
see
SoSAot
ev

LXX

1:

I 4,

10 and 15, 4

"b"l

ray/Aaron/ (as
;

though
14, 21

Nu.
;

Dn3y

nmra

rjTrap (H33); 23, 15 Tf Kaivi}; 24, 3 Luc. nix T^? &?pas (TV); II 19, 18 msyi KOI eXciTovpyrjcrav rrjv Aeirovpytav 22, 21. 25 Luc. &6av,
;
I9>

24 iyv cyvoxrav 2, 2, etc.); 1 3 *1 23 bis 13y SovAeiav 40

10,
I

13,

and

"^33

MT.

n,

LXX
A<DT)K

n:

17, 8 an3JJ
,

E/?pa>i;

19, 22 bl3

aXw (pa);
4

21, 7, etc.

6 lupos

23, 14. 19.

Sco-yncveis

24,
;

miSO
30, 8
i

Matrepeyu,, Mecro-apa,

v rots O-TCVOIS;
n*3*iN,

24, 12

("H)

"11*13

yeSSoup; II
2 Luc.,

3,

B
6,

OpveiA,

Opvtas, Luc.
i

Opna
i4
a
,

[so

Ki.

through
etc.)

out]

10-12 (so
(as

Ch. 13,
-

13.

but not 15, 24. 25,

13y

DIN A/?38apa

though

n-\N 12J?).

And
(y)

often in other books.

2,

MT.

LXX

D: II
21
f.

5,

20 D^ia
aftao-t;

^33

CK

TWV

7ravo) SiaKOTrwv

= D^Q (
by
18,

^yoo); n,

pn
<?^

21, 19 33 Poft;

and probably
is

(though not certainly) in the following places where 2

rendered
16, 13.

d,
8.

e\: I
19, 23.
1
.

4>

3-

25

II 2, 31.

5, 24.

6,

i.

9, 4^.

A/y.eivaSa^

40 Luc. (noy for -ay; so 2 Ki. 6, 30). Cf. 2ir3N Notice the resemblance of 3 and D in the Kefr-Bir im

Inscription (above, p. xxiii, Fig. 12).

MT.
note);

D,

LXX

3:

I 6,

20 noy SifXOdv (I3y);

.

9,

V; 26

(see

14, i; II 13,

34

a2

one time or other have been written

similar,
1

in

a character in which

""

and
"Hp,

is

clear from the frequency with

which

occurs with
"Hp

"

and

were very * with

i

Hp
1

(Ochlah

we-OMah,
Sam.

22, 17. 25, 3. 2

15, 20

Nos. 80, 81, 134-148), the being often, as (though not always), indisputably correct.
for

Sam.

See also Dt.

both

LXX

i, 44 and MT.).

pWD
b

T yba
.

32, 3
a
.

78, 26*.

v^Xa (D^DI). 12, 3 24, 5 a ni1pD3 in the Inscr. of Kefr-Bir im). i Ch. 7,6 13 and 10, 6 3T 13, 9 13 LXX, Pesh.
D
Q"!
1
"

2 Sam. as in rightly), if. 18, 14* (t b Pr. 10, 21 105, 36*. 119, 8 4 . 139, TOTTOW (DIpD notice 28, 12. 28 Dlp3
\\

13".

"HOT

for

"n3T

Jos. 7, i.

Hos.

5,
b
.

Iap<^.

(rightly). Jer. 38,

2,

24

b
.

46, io

Ez. 16, 6 (K TOV cufMT6s

ffov for
"]^D13.

Ob. 21. Hab.

15, 23).

mariws pov

for

inJIEKS. Jos.
3

3,

i6 b

n3y

dorr,*"

(cf.

on II

See also ^. 45, ifiv. 68, 23 b (Irin spite of I* 23*). 36*. 81, 7 b (H313yn 1H3 for nnnyn nn). 104, i 5 a n 9 , 68 b (3^?^ read as 311331) cf. 70, 4 131B* for
.

\ftVP 40, 16.

Pr. 17, io b .

Jer.

21,

iTB yD

Ba<raoi;.

46, 25

(P133). Ez. 48, 29

nSn:2
it

for

r6n|O

rightly (see Jos. 13, 16. 23,

K3D TW uidv aur^s 4 n^HJO is un;

transUteable).

Jos. 8, 33

D HDy

napfiropeiiovro.

Sometimes, as

i//.

b 31, 8 . 135, 21*.

Jer. 9, 18 (19). ao, 17,

may

be doubtful whether the variation points to a difference

f 2

Ixviii

Introduction
letters

Other
himself.

confused in

LXX

may be
:

noted by the reader for

All cannot

be reduced to rule

a certain number are due

to accidental causes, as the partial illegibility of a letter in particular

cases
(c)

J
.

2 According to Lagarde the three letters n, D, n, when occur ring at the end of a word, were not written in the MSS. used by LXX, but represented by the mark of abbreviation ( ) which already
,

This is not improbable though it may appears on Hebrew coins. be doubted if it was in use universally. Certainly there are cases in
:

which the difference between

LXX

and

MT. may

be readily explained

by the supposition
resolved

that a

mark of

abbreviation has been differently

;

(or overlooked) in

one of the two texts 3

but they are

hardly numerous or

certain

enough

to establish a rule, the differences

;

for instance, being frequently capable of explanation in other ways from textual imperfection or corruption, or from looseness of rendering

on the part of the translators. Thus in the 2 pf., MT. has sometimes a pi. where LXX express a sing., and vice versa: but it is difficult to
shew conclusively
2

that such variations

can only be explained

in this

manner; sg. pf. (as I^J), and the variation may have arisen from confusion between n and D or again,
;

masc. has often n- in

MT.

as the variation often occurs

in passages
it

where the number of the

pron. in

the

Hebrew changes,

may

tendency on the part of the translators.

a group or of an individual belonging
that the variation

be due to an assimilating Change of number is so

frequent in Hebrew, according as the speaker or writer thinks of

to,

or representing, a group,

may

in

such cases be original.

In the case of

numbers, as of persons, the temptation to assimilate to the context, or to define more closely what the Hebrew left undefined, or to adopt a more idiomatic usage in the construction of collective terms, would
of reading, as the may have rendered loosely but in most of the instances quoted, there seems no reason to suppose this. Cf. J. M. P. Smith, Nahum (in the Intern. Crit. C0mm.}, 191 2, p. 300 f.; and on 3 and D confused, ibid. p. 361 (Index).
:

LXX

On graphical errors in MT., comp. (with reserve) Gratz, Die Psalmen, pp. 121-144, where they are classified and illustrated. 3 Anmerkungen zur griech. Obersetzung der Proverbien, p. 4.
1

Consider Lagarde
.

remarks on Pr.

2, 20*.

3,

i8 b

b
.

7,

I7

u,

b
.

I5

13, I9

14,

Jo

15, 15*.

16, i3

b
.

16. 21, 2j b .

4-

i. e.

Character of Hebrew Text used by the

:

LXX

Ixix

often be strong

so that, though there are,

this

probable that variations of

be attributed, as a

kind between
*.

no doubt, exceptions, it MT. and LXX are

At the same time
2
.

is

to

rule, to the translators

it

may
Only

well be that abbreviations

2.

were

in occasional use

The Targum.

The

text deviates but rarely

:

from

MT.

two features need here be noticed

as in (a) the tendency, in this

other Targums, to soften or remove anthropomorphic expressions

with reference to
(a) I i, 3 to

God

(ft)

the tendency to paraphrase.

sacrifice before the
v.

worship and

Lord of Hosts
if
3

(so 21)

10 was praying before the Lord (so

26);

the affliction of thine

sees/)
;

handmaid
the
:

is

revealed before

Thee (Heb.
/c
>

if Thou

19 end and

memory
so v. ii.

of her entered in before

2,

Dip

nron

by\

Heb.

man
he

21)

28
r>>

"b

vntatrn

have delivered him up

*>

that
;

may

minister before
* ;

ib.

? 71NI? he shall minister before

2,11

ministered before
to slay

25

b
I

pan

"O

for

it

was pleasure (NWl)

before

up before me; 6, 17 as a guilt and worship before Him alone (so v. 4. offering before 7, 3 b 12, io ); 17 and built an altar there before 10, 17 gathered before * II 7, 5 shall thou build And so frequently. before me a house ?
will raise
<;

them; 35 and

>;

Dip

flD

from

before

is

employed
before
io b

similarly: I

i,

and children were

have
a

withheld from her

1

from
Sam.
;

20^ for from before

29, 3

asked

So, for instance,

5,

Ex. 14, 25 ilDIJK

<pvf<ap.(v

Jud.

u,

19

TlK end ; 20,

^wv

30,22

Sam.

10,

n bis

23. 28 etc.

2 Unless, for instance, the translators found abbreviations in their text, such ren IVQ HX * derings as the following are difficult to account for Jud. 19, 18
:

iTl!"^

TOV olxov pov

""JV2

?K;
;

Jer. 6,

nifT

HCn

rov Qvpov

/iou

TlDPI

25,

37

and unless they could assume them, as something familiar, a b they would scarcely have been led to adopt these renderings Jer. 2, 2 -3
11

mn

f]N 9v/j.ov fiov

= DX

trip [repeated by error] \eyti Kvptov, 6

3,

a-fios
(

lapar,\
/s

(=
"

*
B>Hp

19

"J^K

ytvoiro Kvpif

on =

*3 niH

11

fOK
t>J

3
70;

for yevoiTO

= }OK
53, 8

see ii, 5); Jon. I, 9

OJN
(

"niiy

AoCXos

u/)to;

"OJN

13V.
"

Is.

\V?

(Is 6a.va.Tov

<=

mJD,5
) is

177*;

GK.

87
:

plural in -r-(Ew. also best explained as an error due to the neglect of a mark

1D?).

The supposed apocopated

note on
Is. 5, i
;

of abbreviation
points to 14, 33

comp. Cheyne,

critical

if/.

45, 9.

We.

(p. 20)
it

Dm^Q LXX
some

iv FeOBain, as proof that the abbreviation,

though

any rate was not universal. Comp. further (with reserve) Perles, Analekten zur Textkritik des A.T.S (1895), pp. 4-35. 3 So constantly when as 9, 16. Gen. 29, 32. 31, 12. Ex. 3, is used of God
might be used
in

cases, at

!"1KT

7.

9 etc.

Ixx
him.
8 b that

Introduction
it

3,

was

called

to

the child

from

before the

Lord

20 the request which was asked from 6, 9 then from before before \ him is this great evil done unto us 2 to seek instruction from 9, 9
.

before
*

(Heb.
(so 17).
15,
i

DTl^ Emi ).
n,
7

15 and
fell

it

was said

to

Samuel from
*

before

and there

people.
before

o and the

upon the word of prophecy was with Samuel from

a terror from before
"

% saying (so II
let let

7, 4).

26, 19 if from before

thou art stirred

if

up

against me,

mine

offering be accepted with favour, but

the

children of men,

them be accursed from before i. These are very numerous, and only (b) Paraphrastic renderings. specimens can be given here I i 1 2 b and Eli waited for her till she
:

should cease;

16 Dishonour not thy handmaid before a daughter of

2,

wickedness

^y

"m

in Eli s lifetime (for

^y ^smx)

32"*

and

thou shalt observe and shalt behold the

affliction that

shall

come

upon

the

men
;

of thy house for the sins which ye have sinned in

after that I will bring

my
and

3, 7 good upon r Samuel had not yet learnt to know instruction from before \ and the was not yet revealed to him; 19 and Samuel grew, prophecy of

sanctuary

and

Israel

and the Word (NID^O) of was his help 3 4, 8 who will deliver us from the hand of the Memra of whose mighty works these are ? and he slew among the men of B., because they rejoiced that 6, 19
*
;

they had seen the ark of

exposed (^J 13) and he killed among the elders of the people seventy men, and in the congregation 50,000 7,6 and poured out their heart in penitence as water before 9, 5 they
*
;
;
"

came

into the land wherein

for trai^;

see
(for

was a prophet (for Hab. 2, i Heb.);

5)1

fHK
12.
v.

cf.

i,

9,

14.

25 rV3
10, 5.

dining-chamber
ii

nan
;

NJTDnDN
29

= rot^T!
me

22);

NnSD
sons

scribes (for

DWIM)
and
it

15,

And

if

thou sayest,

I will

turn

(repent) from

my

sin,

shall

be forgiven

in order that I

and
is
it

my

may

hold the kingdom over Israel for ever, already

decreed upon thee from before the Lord of the victory of Israel,

On
So

Such impersonal constructions are common in the Targums. the retained mechanically from the Hebrew, in spite of the construction
]"P

being varied, see the Journal of Philology,

3

xi.

often
2.

when Yahweh

is

said to be

227 f. with a person: 10,

7.

16, 18. 18, 14.

Gen. 39,

3 etc.

4- 2.

Characteristics of the
is
is

Targuni of Samuel

Ixxi

before
said
;

for

whom He

not as the sons of men,

;

no falsehood, and who turns not from what He has who say and belie themselves,
25, 29 but
life

who

decree and confirm not

may
"n

the soul of

my

lord be
;

thy God (xD^y TXQ) before 1 (on the margin of the Reuchl. Cod.: Lagarde, p. xviii, 1. ic ) and to-morrow thou and thy sons shall be with me in the treasury of

hidden in the treasury of eternal

28, 19

eternal life; II 6, 19
I

*1QE>K

(see note);

20, 18

and she spake, saying,

the

remember now what

first

is

written in the
;

book of

Law

to ask

peace

of a city

[Dt. 20, 10]

;

so oughtest thou to ask at Abel whether

they

will

make peace

21, 19

and David the son of

Jesse, the
!),

weaver

of the veils of the sanctuary (Heb.

slew Goliath the Gittite.
3.

DVHK njp-p pn^N

text

of Bethlehem,

The

Peshitto.

The Hebrew

presupposed by the Peshitto

deviates less from the Massoretic text than that which underlies the

LXX,

though

it

does not approach

It is

it

so closely as that

on which the

Targums

are based.

worth observing that passages not unfre2

.

quently occur, in which Pesh. agrees with the text of Lucian, where

both deviate from the Massoretic text

In the translation of the

Books of Samuel the Jewish element alluded to above (p. Hi) is not so strongly marked as in that of the Pent. ; but it is nevertheless
and may be traced in certain characteristic expressions, uhich would hardly be met with beyond the reach of Jewish influence.
present,

God, God, are, as we have seen, a dis tinctive feature of the exegesis embodied in the Targums and they meet us similarly in the Peshitto version of Samuel. Thus I i, 10
where the Hebrew has simply
to
;

Expressions such as

to say, speak, worship, pray, sin before

prayed before the Lord (so

II 7, 27).
2,

v. 26. 7, 5. 8. 9.

8, 6.

12, 8. 10. 19.

15,

n.

ii Ju^ao

c Joo

lA.siA.V)
8,

ministered before the

Lord

(so

3,

i).

26 in favour before God.

10,

21

spake them before the

II

Lord (Heb. JNC).

17 gathered before the Lord.

n, 27 end

Comp. Bacher,

ZDMG.

1874, p. 23,

who

also notices the other readings

pub

lished

by Lagarde from the same

source, pointing out,

authorities.

where

it

exists, their

agree

ment with other Jewish Midrashic

2

I 12, ii.

24,

13,5. 14,49. l J?* 12 - 3, !5- IIn,4. 15,7. for some other cases, in which the agreement is mostly not
s>7-

in text,

21,8. 23,17. but in

ff.

interpretation (as I 4, 15.

10, 2.

17, 18), see

Stockmayer,

ZAW.

1892, p. 220

Ixxii

Introduction
21, 6. 23, 1 6

(for

Wyi).

*</.

these passages, except II

n,
b

10 and 17 (said before): in all 27, Targ. also has Dip. Similarly
24,

oj3

^o from

before: I

2,

25 DTlta 1^21 he
(for riN
:

from
DyD:

before the

Lord.
6,
I

16, i4

ask (forgiveness) so Targ.). II 3, 28 (for

shall

so Targ.).

9 (so Targ.).
24,
7.

23,

17 Juj^a ^.js

vik
^>

un-

(so Targ., as also

Jutao

26,

n,

^).
is

I 2,

17

^ nmo
i

where, however, Pesh. has simply

is

nx IVW
Ki.
22,

rendered by

)ujj*>

which
24, ii

a Jewish paraphrase for to curse or provoke

God

y,j9 oj^j^ see Lev.

:

al.

Onq.

(for bbp);

54.

Ki. 17,

Targ. Pesh.
2,

often also besides in Targ. for this word); (for D^yan:

22
(cf.

nmvn
note);

who prayed, Targ. ^ii_s3? ^sb pa^njV t*39J9 yO^xiAJ 30

Dip;
17,

nK7,>

fONT who came

to

pray

shall minister before

me, Targ.

49 inVD ^N
J>i/,

oaxLx k*s
for
1
D"

as Targ.;

21, 3

yo^N
6,

^
Da
2

w^^Jsoo

cf.

U^>

Targ. (both here and 2 Ki.

8)

TDD1
(cf.

27, 7

ypo ^^x
me

as Targ. 1

II

i,

21

^dLs
Ex. 25,
lit.

the renderings of niOlin

and D nn
Pesh.
1
");

in the Pent., e.g.

Onq. NnienQN
they separate for

Dip pBHS

1,

U*,o3
6,6 pDJ

w^.

vcL,tajo,
7,

that

a separation

jLuil

|JpnD; 14

"I313D

paraphrased by

^IQ

praising, as in Targ.;

23 rttNTU JuoJ
26, 8. 34, 12
^>o,

visions (cf. the rend, of NTID, niNTlD

by

f1]n

in Dt. 4, 34.

[where Pesh., as here, Joju. or Jjoju*]); 8, 18

.

D^m

Targ.

3 pnian; 24, 15 njno ny ny to the sixth hour As a whole the translation, though not a strictly

literal

one, repre

sents fairly the general sense of the original.

Disregarding variations

which depend presumably upon a various reading, the translation deviates from MT. (a) by slight and usually unimportant additions

So
Cf.

29, 3. II 13, 23 Pesh. (but not Targ.)

Gen. 24, 55 Onq. (but not Pesh.)

Nu.
a

9, 22

Onq. and Pesh.

d<paiptna.
:

LXX

probability, correct

The explanation underlying these renderings is, in all D nn is to lift off, nDllfl that which is lifted off, or separated,
illis

from a larger mass

3

for the purpose of being set apart as sacred (cf. p. 236). Syrus in eandem sententiam de verbis 1V1D HV IV abiit, quam de b Rabbini statuerunt, Berach. 62 1CN 7W "XO nyid ny njM

WO

ny

vnn
iyi

nn-n^ nysro

w:n

"n

.TD^E
nyK>.

w:n

n^nn xno

nixn ny ION pnr t

mpnt

chaidaeus ergo (o^jntsi p^y

est

XT^n)

primam, Syrus alteram secutus

sententiam

(Perles,

p. 16).

4- 3-

Characteristics of the Peshitto of Samuel

Ixxiii

or glosses

(l>)

an

inability to

by omissions, due often either to understand the sense of the Hebrew

o/xotoreAevrov, or to
:

(c)

due sometimes likewise to an inability to give a

occasionally of a curious character.
(a) Additions:
I 2,

literal

by paraphrases, rendering, and

classes
:

Specimens of these three

13 (and they

made themselves

a prong of three
the people;
fight (with

teeth)

and the

right of the

priests

(they took) from

35 a priest faithful (after

them).

My own

heart); 4, 9 end-io
;

and

And
7,

the Philistines fought (with Israel)

5,

8 (thrice)

the

Lord;

14 to Gath and their borders [nN neglected], and (the Lord) delivered Israel, etc. 8, 6 to judge us (like all the peoples) ; 12 + and and captains of tens; 12, 6 the Lord (alone of hundreds captains
; .

God,) who, etc.; 24 + and with all your soul; 14, 49 + and Ashboshul (= Ishbosheth 1 ); 23, 12 end+ Arise, go out from the
is

city;

24,

20 and when a

man

treated as a continuation of the protasis]

reward him with good);

(cf.

30,

enemy and sends him [in?Kn on a good way, (the Lord end + and David sware unto him 15
finds his
s

Luc.).

II 6, 5 of (cedar
let

and) cypress; 12, 8 and thy master

wives (have I

sleep)

in thy
will

bosom;

18, 4 beginning

+ And

his
;

servants said to David,

We

go out and hasten

to fight with

them

8 and (the beasts of) the

wood devoured

of the people, etc. (so Targ.);

20 Kt. for (thou wilt announce) respecting the king s son that he is dead; 20, 8 end and it came out, and (his hand) fell (upon his sword); 24, 7 and they came to the land of Judah (in thirty-eight days) [text
disordered].

There are also many instances of the addition of the

or of the substitution of a noun for a pron.
it

subj. or obj. of a verb,

suffix ( Explicita
),

of which

is

not worth while to give examples.

In

Sam. 22 the
1

text has generally

been made

to

conform with
2

that

of>.

8.

(3)

Omissions:
2
.

I 3,

21
2

1^3

$W|OB^
17

*"

fl^H

"a

r6xn fnK 12, 14, i ovn vn.

from ICK V
15, 2

^nno.

^
3
.

5,

10 N133
13, 4
a

W1

vsb Drv^y
b from

"H?N.

IJJOP

34 Drtafco.

35

^nn inx.
JJN

36
"J^l

a
.

n^.
16,

b DP 1PN

32 nnj

V^N

Pesh. identifies Ishui with Abinadab (see 31,

2).

2
3

Probably through op.oioTt\tvrov.

Probably not understood.

Ixxiv
b a I5 -i6
for

Introduction

nnx
, , .

N3.

i6 b DT6tf.

nr:n/n2
JVD3
. ,

39

nSn nDN
24,

itrx
1

17,

ii

n^Nn.
b
.

13
-icitj>.

n^!?^ otn.
2
.

i4

22

31

1
-!
.

45

b nt?N

18, 9
3
).

nSni.
30
8,

23,
"IB>K

n b-i2 a
^33
3
.

^IKl?
[cf.

20 b (abbreviated
i,
1

25,

nm
14

33
D 2S3
<?</

3
ra</

II the paraphr. in 26]. i2 b 18 (the whole verse 13,

.

21

^2.

DnX2 and
B>tJ>.

DC>.

).

15, 18

eN
l
.

DIND

20

t*a^
.

for

ncxi ion
2b
.

3
.

"]r:y

24 pis
f>

nx

ipvi ovi^Nn
)

rvn
>

1
.

27 nnx
,

nsnn 3
11

18,

-3

a
.

(O

K5fn
(first

NVX XV
five

3
(first
v. 7).

13^N

inO

DK1

2i b

26 a

words).

19,

18

four words).

21. 6

T ni.
(<r)

a b 24, 6 (6 follows at the

end of

23

"]tan.

Paraphrases (including some due to a mistranslation or to a

I 2,

faulty text):

17 (see

p. Ixxii).

22 pae*

^jj^^.
30
"OD^

24 D
iiapnn
11

TOyo
should

^*\^^.V9.

25.

29

\\y

from

the wilderness.
-)

minister before me.

32 pyo

n^an

(31 there shall not be an old

3,

man

in

thy house) or one holding a sceptre in thy dwelling.

13

WWOLS ^.o, ooa ^j_5k-so>. 4, 2 ^DHI Joo. 6, 6 b and how they mocked them, and did not send them a ^Jn 10, 22 t^N D^n Tiy N3H where is this man? 12, 3 away. b Q-^O] I stand before you. ^i*^ L?.o 12 ^ y Q^yKI behold, 3 6. 13, 4 t^X3J 6 Dyn B JJ 3 1^ Ti *3 simply cu^?o ^.m-. and they feared. 7 12 tfb innx simply c^.^-V.. b -N^ fc^JU. H. ^o. 24 a And Saul drew near 14, 7 t ^\^* in that day, and said to the people, Cursed, etc. 25** And they went
VJ3 Srt?
)ctfi.v>>.
CH^>

D^pn ^

w>X.

*</

mn

*T<hr\

"J32^3

into all the land,

and entered

into the woods.

16, 4
^</

IrWD

i^ nj3 IN

O*UOD
it

Ju;j? alaa/.
17,

20 Dn^ (and laded

Targ. TVn
(1112^

with) bread.

19 i8 b *^.

fNX2
yocxlis^ooo
(cf.

)K/

dyyeAtW avruv).
18,

n^, and the doublet in Luc. KOI cio-ourets 39 03^ ^N 1 and would not go. 52 iyT1
1|

p.oi rrjv

o">->N.Uo.

22

icsb

o!?2

v^ the son of Jesse (!). 20, 12 rVB^Wl at the third hour : so 19 for n^B l. 26 N1H IIHO
**JL*^

^2
14.

^3

perhaps he
U=><xo

is

clean, or perhaps he

is

not clean.

21, 6

^
1

ocx

^^-^

(as

though

137

rrixy

nE N!): see also 21,

6.

22, 19 (33 nsi

oX OOMO

the

two words read as one and

Probably through opoiort\tvTov.

Or perhaps

transposed.

Probably not understood.

4- 3-

Characteristics of the Peshiito of Samuel

23,

Ixxv
6

connected with
read as nno).
27.
Jj/).
6,

fro).

22 a

25,

8.

i7

26.

27, 8.

30,

(mo

14*.

II 2, 13

(JLNa^Nv
J^JJ).

thrice for nana).

3,

24 (PICK
"p

29 (jnnarr^a
4,

icu^

34. 39** (rwroi

5,

(D>Dn

connected with D\XBn).

2i b
.

(lim
8,

16 (T3T3B1 USD Jbxfc^soo )i?).

7,

23^.
13, 4

I3

a.

n,

25
7JJ

(3"inn

?as n

it

happens

in war!).

12, 25
"

ra</.

26. 32 (*B
["*-?]

oo^-^-is in his mind).

14, 7. 17 24.

^)-

w^ (

#fo

morem

gereres:

PS.

col.
^.so).

279). 4
(

30.

32^.
fc^/

15,

19.

(no

Jwxaa.-/
J)

TV inn^n v*^

-s^).

16, i. 2 32. 34. b b 8 2i 17, 10

. .

(baajsokoo (take

o^aa^sl^^a will not melt).

i6 b

20 (see note).
29.

18, 5*

me

the

young man Absalom

19, 9

(iribaa for ina^a).

(io

b
).

33 [19, i Heb.] 18: in^VI they have crossed 17 (Heb.

alive).

18.

and bridged Jordan).

nnbi!).
20, 8

31

(32) end.
^./)i

35 (36
i8 b
.

)l>)u.o

)*>.,

i.e.

DH t?

(myna i^^^
to

19*.

b 21, 2 (in his

set

zeal to

cause the Israelites

[?i? Djpn]

sin).

5.

23,

(Saith the
)>fl\xa

man who
a^ ^so ^K
4
J

of his Messiah l\

8.

u (mn
>o^

up the yoke of the mountain

to

of
to

the king: so

25 for H~inn). 33^ (ninn

"V^

19. 22. 23 (inytD^D

go out and
-

come
i" 11

in).

)l^-l

t^

?)-

a
-

l6

25

("1^^

psb

t^X^llo: The Syriac text of Pesh. sometimes (as might indeed be anticipated from the nature of the character) exhibits corruptions, similar to those

Jcxi/

lwo

not so elsewhere).

noticed in the case of

cu*2>...xi\

LXX,
the

p.

Ivii

f.

Thus

i,

21
in

oo^ax^.
facsimile
).

for

(so

rightly

Cod. Ambr. published

2
,

by
2,

Ceriani
[*+3o
3,

1
:

also the Arab, version in the Polyglotts

f r
,

to offer

^^
, ,

li

v*>>>

"^"

(*

at

the beginning has fallen out).

"^.-o

14 o

^^x>r

for

>

k-oo/ (Heb. TiyatW). 19

for
JJ?

for

oto
21
JJ>

(Heb.

inan).

9,

li^Q^j
v

)tli4j

(Heb.
1

nB^).
N^
1C>N
:

12,

probably for
1

Lcu*>

(Heb. l^yi

notice the

Cornill, Ezechiel, p.

144^, exaggerates the extent to which

:

this

been corrected after

MT.

its

approximations to
it

MT.

(p. I4off.) are slight,

MS. may have com

it

pared with the cases in which

agrees with other

MSS.

against

(p.

148

ff.).

1889, pp. 180-192. 2 Which, in the Books of Samuel, and in certain parts of Kings, is based upon the Pesh. : see Roediger, De orig. et indole Arab. libr. V. T. hist, interpr. (1829).
Rahlfs,
3

Comp.

ZATIV.

So Tuch on Gen.

10, 6,

and PS.

coll.

681-2, 741.

Comp.

Ki. 4, 42 Pesh.

(t&fy&

connected similarly with

(>

^tJ>,

D*^vK>,

commonly

represented in Pesh.

Ixxvi
ptcp. for

Introduction

following

iW
for

x^l).

17,

20 JLo^k

for

JL^.N (so Cod.

28,

Ambr.).

40

JLi
^_*>

JLJ ^
prophets

(Heb. ^mn-}0).
).

for rcLJisulr) (so Arab,

II 12, 8 b fcJia prob. for

though possibly a paraphrase.

"lya).

18, 17

J^ci^

prob. for }jk^L-* (Heb.

(Several of these instances are noted by Well., p. 8.)

2~ID
is

The

name
4.

represented regularly by

oj.
the

The Latin Versions. (a) The affinity subsisting between

Old Latin Version and

first

the recension of Lucian appears to have been

distinctly

per
.

ceived (with reference in particular to the Lamentations) by Ceriani

Afterwards,

it

was

as characteristic

and frequently remarked on, by Vercellone, of the excerpts of the Old Latin Version on the
noticed,

margin of the Leon Manuscript (above, p. lii), that, when they diverged from the ordinary Septuagintal text, they constantly agreed
with

Holmes
on

four

MSS.

19,

82,

93,

108,

which,

as
.

was

clear,

represented

their part

one and the same recension 2

A
3

version

identical with that represented in the excerpts

was

also, as

Vercellone
.

further pointed out, cited

by Ambrose and Claudius

is

of Turin

The

conclusion which the facts observed authorize

thus that the Old

Latin

is

a version made, or revised,

on the

basis of

MSS,

agreeing
his
D.
;

closely with those

recension

4
.

which were followed by Lucian in framing The Old Latin must date from the second cent. A.
:

hence

it

cannot be based upon the recension of Lucian as such

lies in

its

peculiar interest

the fact that

it

affords independent evidence

s

of the existence of

MSS.

containing Lucian

characteristic readings
8
.

(or renderings), considerably before the time of Lucian himself

The
of
(p.
i

following comparison of passages from the Old Latin Version

2

and
lii

Sam., derived from one of the sources indicated above

all

f.),

and

presupposing a text differing from that of the

et
ii.

Monumenta Sacra
Variae Lectiones,
H>.

Profana,

I. i

436 (and
2, 5).

in

(1861), p. xvi (Addenda). other passages).

p.

455

f.

(on 3 Reg.

Comp.
Rahlfs

Ceriani,
(iii.

Le

recensioni dei

LXX,

etc., p. 5.

I59f.) agrees with Ceriani and S. Berger (Hist, de la Vulg., p. 6) in questioning this conclusion (cf. Moore, AJSL. xxix. 60), on the ground that there is no sufficient evidence for the early date assigned to the Leon fragments by Vercel

lone

he thinks rather that the resemblances shew them to be later than Lucian.

4- 4-

Characteristics

of the Old Latin Version

Ixxvii

normal

LXX,

but agreeing with that of Lucian, will shew the justice

Although, however, the text upon which the Old based agrees largely with that of Lucian, it must not be supposed to be identical with it there are passages in which it agrees 1 Sometimes with B or A, or with other MSS., against Lucian
of this conclusion.

Latin

is

be observed, other particular MSS. agree with the moreover, Old Latin, as well as those which exhibit Lucian s recension. A more
it

is

to

detailed inquiry into

the sources of the

Old Latin Version of the

OT. must be
Lucian
is

reserved for future investigators.

(The

list

is

not an

exhaustive one.

The words
from B.

printed in

heavy type are those

in

which

s text differs

In the passages marked

s

f, the deviation

confined to the
at
least

quoted

MSS. which exhibit Lucian by Holmes and Parsons

recension,

and

is

not

for

other

MSS.

The

quotations will also illustrate the variations prevailing between different

recensions of the Old Latin.)

I
i,

6 Goth, qnia ad nihilum reputabat

earn.

Luc.

8id

TO

tov0Viv
So
55,

avrr^v

(for

HDjnn
similarly

113J?3).

158
74,

and
106,

(tovOtvovaa)

44,

120, 134.
1 3 14,12 Vind. Et

cucurrit.

BA
B
teal

KcH tSpaptv (Luc.

oi

ai

tt

16 Vind. J

Qui venit homo pro-

avfy airtvaas irpoafi\6tv (Luc.

perans.
9,
2 24 Vind. Ecce reliquum. 10, 2 Goth, et in Selom, in Bacal-

airtKp iOrj 6 avijp 6 (\ri\vOiiii).

BA
iv

ISov vtr6\infj.a (Luc. naprvpiov}.

S^Xo* iv BaKa\a9 XI, 44, 64, 74,

144, 236; iv ST;iv
~S,rj\cap.

lat salientes

magnas

fossas.

106, 120, 129, 134,

\<up

Vind. 2 reluctantes hie et salientes

iv

BaKa\aO 244;
55.

Baa\o
[itfaKa

magnum.

29

iar)\cu tv Eaiea\aO

242

iv 2rj\ca

tv Ba.Ka\\aO

a\\o/Atvovs

10, 17

Vind. 2 Et praecepit
venire.

con-

BA BA
B

Luc. utarjuPpias dAX. ywyaAa.

(Luc.
ai
avi>T)yayt}.

ai vapr]yyfi\(v

12, 25
14, 20
17,
i

Goth, apponemini in plaga. Vind. 2 Et exclamavit.

D^IDI

irpoartOTjfftaOf (Luc. airoXtiade).

A
tv
J

xal avtOoyaiv
2t<j>ep/j.e

(B Luc. KOU
52
;

avifir]).

DDK

Goth. Sepherme.

435
tv

2wM
64
Spvfuv
2,

121

(Sa<ppnatfj.

29,
44>

119,
2 36
,

>

92

S.ttyepnain 55,

S.a^apntiv 245).

II

8,

6 Vind. 2 in silvam Eire.

2 9 Vind. Et occurrit Absalom.

rw

EtppatfJ.

(Luc. iv rw Sp.

Maaivav).

BA tcdiawr)i TT]afvA.. (Luc.at T^/xt -yas A.).

s

Nor does
/3/u as).
27*".

the

Old Latin express Lucian

doublets in I

n.

6, 12. 10, 2 (utarjuit,

15, 29. 32.

6 G. 16 G. (not V. 3 ).

Sometimes, however, his doublets do occur in 2 4, 18 G. 6, 7 G. (not V. ). 16, 14 G. 27, 8 G.

as I i,

Ixxviii
I 2, 10

Introduction
Vind. 2 + quia iustus
est.

Luc. SIKO.IOS

oiv.

So other MSS., among

71, 74,

them 44,
158, 246.
2 15 Vind.

55,

120,

134,

144,

+ ante Dominum.

Luc.

vu>mov

Kvpiov.

So other MSS.,

among them
1583,

44, 55, 71, 74, 120, 134,

cited with the reading
all

14 Sab. et nunc sic iuravi. Vind. 2 et ideo sic iuravi.

Vind. 2 in viam

No

Greek MS.

is

therefore for

pb,

having ov5

(or

6, 12

rectam.
civitatis.

ovx) otirott (see note). Luc. (v rpifiw (\>Q(ia f.

9, 27
10, 3

Vind. 2

in loco

summo

Luc.

(is

aKpov

TTJS TToAtcos

Goth, usque ad arborem glan2

LUC.

ttOS TTJS
teas rrjs

SpVOS TTJS tKXtKTTJS

*.

dis electae.

246

Spvbs Qa&tup

rfjs tK\tKTT)S.

Vind.

ad arborem Thabor alectae

electae).
et

(i. e.

12,3 Goth, aut calceamentum,

ab-

Luc.

fj

VTToSrjfjia,

Kal

scondam oculos meos in quo dicitis adversum me, et reddam vobis.

Sab. vel calceamentum, dicite adversus me, et reddam vobis.
14, 14

64>0a\|ji.ovs

^iov

v aura)

diTKpv\J/a TOVS etwart tear

;

l^ou, Kal airoSwaca v^iv \.

So

Goth, in bolidis
campi.

et petrobolis

ar for also (with /ioC) d/*oi Theodoret., Quaest. 16 in \ Reg, Luc. tv PoXiai Kat tv -n-trpopoXois HOI
tv

et in saxis

Kox\ai TOV

ntSiov.

Vind. 2 in sagittis et in fundibolis in muculis campi.

et

14, 15 Goth, et ipsi nolebant esse in laboribus.

Luc.

aJ

avroj,

at

OVK fjQtKov

troveiv

(iroveiv also in

15, ii Sab.
statuit.

Quedl.

verba

mea non

245 LUC. OVK

:

X, others have
?<TTI)(T

56, 64, 71, 119, 244,

note/j.tiv).
flOV.

TOVS \6fOVS

So

17,

39 Goth, et claudicare coepit ambnlans sub armis.

21 Goth, in virtute eris mihi gener hodie.

A, I2 3 Luc. Kal

b.

XtoAcuve

AamS

\v TO)

tv airots (158

dffx^ av( }trn

1

1 8,

Luc. tv rats Bwajxtcriv

P.OI ffr]fj.fpov

(so 44, 74,

06,

20, 134).
-yvvai-

20,

30 Goth.

Filius

puellarum

va-

Luc.

vlt Kopaaitav

avro^o\oi>VT(av

gantium, quae se passim coinquinant esca mulierum.

27, 8 Goth.

KOTpac})!)

(yw. added also

tirl

in

29,

55,

71, 121 marg., 243, 246).

Et apponebant se super
et ex-

Luc. xal fTTfriOevro

{ovTa,
aovpaiov.

iravra TOV (y^itirl

omnem
t

appropinquantem, tendebant se super Gesur.

Kal

t|Tivov

ruv

Tfff-

So, except for the difference

of one or two letters, 56, 158, 246.

30, 15

end

(in

the current Vulg.) et

Luc. Kal ui}xo(jv auTW (121 marg. Kal

atria AaviS.

Si.

iuravit ei David.
a b

So

Pesh.).

13n
In
9,

being connected with

"112

to choose

out

see II 22, 27.

4 (per terrain Sagalim et non invenerunt) Quedl. agrees also with 123, not with Lucian (who has dia, TTJS 777$ FaSSi T-qs iroXews 27aAti/* cf. 56 Fa55(
:

TTJS 7ToA.teos

alone).

4-

4-

Characteristics of the
Cura
te (al. curare), Is

Old Latin Version

AKpij3a<rai,

Ixxix
virtp

II I, 19 Goth.
rael,

Luc.

laparjX,
)".

KT\.

de

interfectis tuis.

Sab. Considera, Israel, pro his qui

(106 aKpifiaxrai o T^A.axrai) doret., Quaest. in 2 Reg.

So Theo-

mortui sunt.
2,

8 Goth. Isbalem.

Cod. 93 (but not

a
.

19, 82) EtajJaaX.

2, 6,

29 Magd. in castra Madiam 12 Sab. Dixitque David, Ibo et

Luc.

sis

irap(ff0o\as MaSiap..
iTre

So 158.
TT\V

Luc. Kal

AaviS

EmcrTpi|/<o

reducam arcam cum benedictione

in
7, 8

tv-Xoyiav els TOV OIKOV fiov.

So

158.

domum meam.
Goth.

Accepi

te

de casa pas-

Luc. fx
vitov ).

rfjs

[tavSpas

Ivos

T<OV

iroip.-

9,

ex uno grege. 6 Goth. Memphibaal.

torali

1 2 oranes reges qui 10, 19 Vind.

con-

Luc. MffupifiaaX f. Luc. IT&VTSS ol paffiXei s

(xevoi

ol

venerunt ad [Vind. 2 cum] Adrazar

.
.

[so

158]

Tcj>

ASpaafap
/j.eTa

crv[jnropv6Kal .
. .

et

disposuerunt testamentum
Israel, et sertri-

8i0evTO
e8ov\evov

8ia6T|KT)v

Iapa.T]\

Kal

coram [Vind. 2 cum]

bus].
11,

TW

IcrpaijX

(.

vierunt Israhel [Vind. 2 Israeli

4 Goth,

et

haec erat dimissa

Luc.

/cat

airr)

Jjv

X\OU|AVT|

d<j>8pov

[Alias et haec erat abluta] excelso

loco.

avrfjs.

So the Ethiopic Version d and

Pesh.

Vind. 2 e haec autem lota erat post

purgationem.
26 11,12 Vind.

redi hie.

I. e.

nK>

for

y&
f.

f
.

Not

cited

from any

Greek MS.
] 13 Vind. 16 Vind. 1 ii, ubi sciebat

n,

J
>

inebriatus est.
in

Luc.

f/j.(0\><rf)T]

2
!

locum pessimum

Luc.

tirl

TOV TOITOV TOV TTOvoCvxa

[o5

etc.

2 et caecidit Joab de populo secundnm praeceptum Davit, ii, 24 Goth, de servis regis quasi

Ii, 17 Vind.

Luc. Kal
Luc.

(irfffov

fK TOV \aov Kara TOV

A&YOV AaviS.
dtro TUIV $ov\cav

TOV I3aai\v$

tocrsl

viri

XVIII.
Vind. 2 et deficit animo valde h
2
.

13, 21

avopfs StKa Kal OKTOJ. So 158. Luc. Kal fiOv/j.T]fft ff<pu5pa f.

13, 32 Vind.
[?

in

ira

enim

est

ad

Luc. ort V op-yn Luc. tKaTovf.

?jv aiiT

eum] Abessalon.
Goth. Vind. 1 centum.

14, 26

*
b
c

But
Kal

in v. 31

Magd. has ab
added

illo

Trap

avrov, against Luc.

B.

oit9, oiaO.

to rjvrofto^rjaav

on the marg. of

by an ancient hand

d
e
f

Based evidently on \(\v^evrj for AeXou^eV?;. Which is based on the LXX ; see p. 1, n. 3.

BA
1

ayiafruevri.

There are lacunae in these passages in Vind. Unless indeed redi be an error for sede : cf. sedit in clause

b.

K
>r.

Verba TOV
Field).

irovovv-ra eleganter vertunt

Hebraeum VT

"U^N

[pro

Goth,

et

iratus foetus est agrees here with

Kal tOv

Ixxx
II 15, 23 Goth,
et

Introduction
omnis
terra

bene-

Luc. KCU naffa

fi(ya\r]

TJ

yrj

U\OYOVVTS
.
.

<p<avri

dicentes voce

magna [lacuna] per

Kal KXcu ovrts

/card rfjv

viam
17, 8

olivae, quae erat in deserto. Goth, sicut ursus qui a bove

:

uSuv TTJS sXatas rfjs

v rfj fpi^ajf.
T>

Luc.

wffirtp apKoi

irapoio-Tpwcrai tv

/. [Alias ab aestu stimulator in campo.

ab oestro]
Luc.
OJTCUJ pi) etiptOfi

J
7>

*3 Goth, ut non inveniatur ibi

Kt

avcTTpocj)-?! f.

conversatio.

Vind. 2 ut non inveniatur tumulus

fundamenti.
2 17, 20 Vind. festinanter transierunt

Luc. AieX-qXvOaeri trirtvSovres

KOI frj-

prendere
etc.

aquam
.
. .

(et inquisierunt)

17, 22 Sab.

et
.

antequam denu.
.

Luc. ems roO

(AT^

dirOKa\t)<j>0Tivai.

TOV
.

daretur
17, 29

verbum

Goth,
Vind. 2

et lactantes vitulos.
et vitulos saginatos.

\6yov, OVTCOS Sif&rjaai rbv Iop5di 7; t Luc. KOL Y*Xa0T)va jiocrxcipia. So 158.
fecit

1 8,

Vind. 2

Et

tripartitum

Luc.

rov \a6v\~.

Davit populum. 2 1 8, 3 Vind. non stabit in nobis cor

nostrum.
20, 8 Goth,

Luc.

oil

aTT|o-Tai Iv

T)H.IV

KapSia

).

gladium

rudentem

(/.

Luc. fiax ai Pav

trro/iov
(/. ^i

bidentem, We.). 20, 23 Goth. Et Baneas films Joab

desuper lateris et in ponentibus
(/.

Luc. Kal Baraia?

irXivOiov Kal
7T(

vlos

IcaaSSai

iirl

TOV

TOVS

8wacrTas"t".

So

potentibus).

23, 4

Goth,
a
.

et

non tenebrescet a

In-

(except Swarovs") Theodoret., Quaest. 40 in 2 Reg. Luc. Kal ou (TKOTacrei [so other MSS.,

mine quasi pluvia, quasi herba de

terra

among them

44,

56,
o>s

158,
l

246]
7775.

airb

tptyyovs us veros,

Poravr)

23, 6 Goth,

quoniam omnes qui

ori-

Luc. OTI irivres 01 dvarcXXovTSS

dicavda,

wffirep

untur sicnt spinae, et reliqui quasi quod emungit de lucerna.

23, 8
.

Kal ol Xoiirot us

a.ir6\>.vy\.<i

Goth. lesbael films Thegemani hie adornavit adornationem

.

ovroj Luc. Io-{3aaX vios 0K|xavci auTwv km TT)V 8ieKocr(xei. 8ia<TKVT|V

.
.

suam super nongentos vulneratos

in semel.

fvvaxoffiovs Tpavp.aTias (is awaf

).

(b)

On
(p.

the general characteristics of

Jerome

Version of the OT.,

reference must be

made

to the

monograph
it

of

Nowack,

referred to

above

liii).

synopsis of the

principal deviations

from the
is

Massoretic text presupposed by

in the

Books of Samuel,

given

a But 23, 3 agrees partly with Die hominibus.

BA

In

me

locutus est custos Israel parabolam

4- 4-

Characteristics of the

Old Latin Version

Ixxxi

ib.

pp. 25-27, 35, 37, 38, 50; the most important are also noticed,
1 proper place, in the notes in the present volume following instances (which could easily be added to)
.

at their

The

will

exemplify the

dependence of Jerome in exegesis upon

his

Greek

predecessors, especially
I
I, 1

Symmachus

2,

VH vb 2. (ov) SierpaTn; (m), Vulg. non SUnt amplius in diversa mutati. 5 1^in 2,. dvcvSeeis eyeWro, V. saturati sunt.
8 Tiy
i"6

5,
6,
1

D^ayi

2- xara TWV K/ouTrrwv

o? KM/A???
.

8 ipsn 123 lyi 2.

V. in secretion parte. dreixto-Tou, V. usque ad villam

,

z quae erat absque muro 9, 24 nyio^ 2. eTriT^Se?, V. de industria. V. calumniatus sum 12, 3 vrrtn lo-vKO(f>dvTr](ra,
"AAAos"

*.

22
14,

^Nin

>3

V. quia

iuravit

Dominus.

48 (TTl) t^yi
iv-un

"AAAos*

20, 41

in

*iy

o-voTr/o-a/x.ej o?, V. congregate (exercitu). AaviS Se vTrepe(3a\Xev, V. David autem S.

amplius.
22,

6 bt^Nn A. TOV SevS/awva, S. TO

larly 31, 13.

<f>vTov,

V. (in) nemore.

Simi

The

current (Clementine) text contains

many

passages which are no genuine

part of Jerome s translation, but are glosses derived from the Old Latin (marked *), or other sources. The following list of such passages (taken from Vercellone, Variae Lectiones, ii. pp. ix-xiii) is given for the convenience of students
:

topugnam*; 5, 6 from et ebullierunt* ; 9 from inierunt*; 8, 18 from quia*; 9, 25 from stravit^; 10, i from et liberabis*; n, i to mensem*; 13, 15 et reliqui. Benjamin*; 14, 22 from Et erant*; 41 Doming Deus Ssrae/and quid est ... sanctiI 4, i
. .

tatem*; 15, 3 et non

tremens*; 17, 36

b a aliquid*; I2 -i3 Saul offerebat

. .

auferat*; 21,
.
.

Nunc* incircumcisus ; cum vidissent David ( ex

.

19, 21

ad Saul*; 32 et from Et iratus*; 20, 15 from

.
.

ignoto fonte ); 23, 13-14

et

salvatus

opaco ; 30, 15 et iuravit ei

David*;

II i, 18

from
.

et ait,

Considera*; 26 from

Sicut mater ; 4, 5 from Et ostiaria ; 5, 23 Si . meas ; 6, 6 et dedinaverunt earn; 6, 12 from et erant ; 10, 19 expaverunt . Israel. Et ; 13, 21 from et noluit*; 27 from Fecerat*; 14, 30 from Et venientes ; 15, 18 pugnatores validi ; 20 et Dominus veritatem ; 21,18 de genere gigantum.
. . . . .
.

2 3 * 5

Comp. Mic. 4, 8 pQ y 2. diroKpvQos. Comp. Dt. 3, 5. Comp. Amos 4, i calumniam facitis.

See Ex.
2, 21

bxi v 2.
)

wpieiaf 5e,

V. iuravit ergo, which shews the source of

iuravit here.
1365

Ixxxii

Introduction
<

23, 13

11

D7i"in

"ltJ>N2

13?nn^ 2.

26 DntDy Ot

XotTTot

Ippf^ovro OT in 7rc/Ho-T<avowTs, V.
/ecu,

modum

coronae

cingebant.
25,

3
7

D^yo

y~\

2- /caKoyvw/Mwv, V. (pessimus et) malitiosus.

2- (OUK) eVwxAi7o-aju,ev (a^rovs),

DlJO^n N?

V. numquam

eis

molesti fuimus.
1

8 D^plBV

2-

eVSto-yuous

ora^tSos,

V. ligaturas uvae passae.

So
29

30, 12.

mnV
ytJ ini

2.

7r</>uAay/AeV?7,

V. custodita.

31 ilpIS? A. 2-

(eis)

Xvy/xw, V. in singultum.

33
26,
27,

2.

e/cStKiyo-ai,

V.

et ulciscerer

(me manu mea).

V. Aliquando
inci-

5 73yCQ 2- (ev
I

TTJ) o-Krjvr),

V. in tentorio.
TTOTC,

*inX

D1

11

HSDN
die.

2-

TrapaTreo-oC/xat

dam una
30, 1 6 II
2,
1

D^PtM 2- dva7r7rTWKOT9, V. discumbebant.

6 D HVn

Dp7n A.

2-

xA^os

TWJ/

crrepewv,

V. ager robus-

torum.
8,

nrao
*11"Q

W:
IK

2. i7ro ^opov, V. sub tribute.

TT/SOS

10,

Naj 2. cKaKovpyycrav fecissent David.

AaviS, V.

quod iniuriam

12, 14

DNJ
all

}N3 2- ^Xao-^/t^crat e7rot?/o-as (the other versions differently), V. blasphemare fecisti.

15,
1

8,

28 nonrsno 2- Kpuflr/o-opai, V. abscondar. Oi F (Kara r^v 68ov) rrjv StaT/Avovcrav, V. per 23 132H viam compendii.
.

"JTI

dividing artificially a

Three examples, shewing how Jerome followed Aq. or Symm. in Hebrew word (p. xl n. 2), may be added the last
it

being of peculiar interest, as

explains a familiar rendering of the

Authorized Version
\}r.

1 6,

"Tnb

DD3J3 A. TOV raTretvo^/Dovos KCU airXov rov AavtS, Jer. 2 humilis et simplicis David.
oculos habuit Hieronymus eleganter vertens

Symmachum ante
Jerome
s

hue atque

illuc

vagabantur incerti (Field).

2

own

translation of the Psalter failed to supersede the older Latin

;

Version that was in general use

hence

it

never

made

its

way

into the

Vulgate,

4- 4-

Characteristics of the Vulgate

eis 6Vo//,a ptrcrou

Ixxxiii

Ex.

32, 25

nXDBv A.
miniam

(ilKV DEv), Jer. propter igno-

sordis.
S

Lev.

1 6,

/TNTJ??

5.

rpdyov aTrep^o/xevov

(#.

IO

d^ie/xevov), A. fts

rpdyov
capro

a.Tro\v6p.evov (or aTroXeAv/xevov) i.e.

7JK TVp, Jer.

emissario.

Hence

the

Great Bible

(1539-

1541) and

AV.

scape-goat^.

and must be sought elsewhere (Opera, ed. Bened. I. 835 ff. Vallarsi, IX. 1153 ff. Migiie, IX. 1123 ff. ; Lagarde s Psalterium ffieronymi, 1874 [now out of print] or Tischendorf, Baer, and Franz Delitzsch, Liber Psalmorum Hebraicus atqtie The translation of the Latinus ab Hieronymo ex Hebraeo conversus, 1874).
;

Psalter contained in the

Vulgate

is

merely the Old Latin Version, revised by

Jerome with the aid of the

1

LXX.
:

3 ^3^ pXII? usque ad satietatem videndi (as though And the wicked The same interpretation in the Targ. shall be judged in Gehinnom until the righteous shall say concerning them HD^D Win We have seen enough The renderings of Aq. Symm. are not here pre served but from their known dependence on Jewish exegesis, there is little doubt Comp.
Is.

66, 24

"IIJ

JIN"!

Hp) omni

cami.

that

Jerome

rendering

is

derived from one of them.

APPENDIX
The Inscription of Mesha
,

commonly known as

the

Moabite Stone!

THE
original

Inscription of

Mesha (which has been

B. c.,

several times referred

to in the preceding pages) is of such importance as

an authentic and
illustrating

monument

of the ninth century

remarkably

the Old Testament, that I have inserted here a transcription and

translation of
it,

accompanied by a

brief

commentary.

have con

fined myself to the

minimum

of necessary

explanation,

and have

purposely avoided entering upon a discussion of controverted readings or interpretations. The doubtful passages are, fortunately, few in

number, being limited

of

chiefly to certain

letters

at

the extreme

left

some of

the lines,

and

to

two or three

a.Tra.%

eip^eVa, and do

not interfere with the interpretation of the Inscription as a whole. Palaeographical details must be learnt from the monograph of Smend and Socin, referred to on p. iv, and from Clermont-Ganneau s Examen Critique du Texte, in the Journ. As., Janv. 1887, pp. 721 1 2 *. The deviations from the text of Smend and Socin, adopted
in the
first

edition of the present work,

were introduced partly on

the authority of Clermont-Ganneau, partly on that of E. the Journal des Savans,

in the Lit.

Renan

in

1887, pp. 158-164, and of Th. Noldeke

8,

Centralblatt, Jan.

1887,

coll.

59-61

in

the present

few changes in the uncertain places have been made in consequence of the re-examination of the stone and squeeze by Nordlander (Die Inschrift des Kb nigs Mesa von Moab, 1896), and
edition, a

Lidzbarski, Ephemeris,

(1902), p.

a
ff.

Of

the

older

literature

connected with the Inscription, the most important is the monograph of Noldeke, Die Inschrift des Konigs Mesa von Moab (Kiel, 1870),
to

which in parts of
1

my

explanatory notes

am

indebted.

It

ought

See also the Revue Critique^ 1875, No. 37, pp. 166-174 (by the same writer). See also the transcription, with notes, hi his Altsemitische Texte, Heft i (1907),

p. iff.

The Inscription of Meshct

only to be observed that at the time
published,
as

Ixxxv
monograph was

when

this

some of

the readings

had not been ascertained so accurately

the interpretation of the Inscription, 4
ff.
;

was afterwards done.

On

see also
article

now Cooke, NSI. p. MESHA in EB. iii. The

is

line

and comp. the present writer s above a letter indicates that the

reading

not quite certain.

nn

wa p
. .

ata
.
ne>]3
I

-pro

nt?
.

3KD
,

by

2
.

nmp3

xr

noan

"ins

TI

i
5
]
.
,

5
,

nK
ns
ns?
,

ns3
.

rus

ndbm
,

nx

6
7

noy

n^y
.

nax
.

nax
,

nnaa)

na

NIKI
.

n:a

^i
,

^m
.
,

na
.

xannc
t^oa
.

8 9

na
.

wi
,
I

jyo^ya

nx
.

psi
.

na

"jta

nb
.

p
.
.

nby
.

nioy pxa a^
nrnsi
.

n
i

BW
^oai?

jnn?
,

10
1 1
1

[D]

nyn
,

^a

[D]NI
B>N

mn ^nx
.

nnsi nx
.
.

npa

nnuy nx
. .

^n^
,

D^D
.

aew
.

nn
i

npn

nsi

pp
.

B>K

n
.

na
.

nnpa
.

B>

oa

vsb .nan 13

Si

bx~\w
i

by
.

naj
,

nx

rns
,

nnno
,

14

nxi
[i:]i
[a
,

Dinvn
.

ny

nint^n
,

ypa
,
I

na

nnn^si
,

n^a
nnxi
I

^n
,

15 16

man
.

p:i

p[a]a
I

nya^
B^

nba
,

nr
.

n]
,

npNi
.

nnonnn
I

ntonii
.

n 17
J?

nS
<|

ma
,
.

^i
nB>"u*i

t^Da
s
i

on

anosi

nin*
.

18
19

[i
.

]3Q

a
.

nonn^na
,

na
.

ai^i

yn*

nmsi
.

nNKw
py^n

n^i
.

^s
.

JHND
i

asDD
.

npx 20

nom
anp3

non

nnip
,

a
,

"pK

pn
.

^y

nso^ 21
^syn 22
,

12x1

nnys?

^33

*p&o

n3
nyn
,

Tin
nai
i

23

bib

nt:Ni

nmp3
.

npn

3"ipa

JN

npn 24
.

nnn
.

nn^aa
.

ia

E>N

ni?Dt:n
.
"ix

nyny

rm
.

na 25 [] 26

py

Din

<a

noa
.

na

yx

pn
i>y

pn

B>

27 28

naa

pxn

ppa

nso
,

ns]

30

Ixxxvi

Appendix
pi
I

m
m
nt?

3B*
.

plim
*n
, .

pH
.

}N

31

p->im

nnn^n
^yi
,

e>D3

-iBsn

32

nro

p3

na[B"i]

33
34

1.

am Mesha

2.

-ibonite.

son of Chemosh[kan ?], king of Moab, the DaMy father reigned over Moab for 30 years, and I reignfather.

3.

-ed after

my

And

made

this

high place for

Chemosh

in

QRHH, a [high place of sal-]

4.

-vation, because he

had saved me from

all

the assailants
all

(?),

and

because he had

let

me

see

my

pleasure

on

them

that hated

me.
5.
-i

Omrafflicted

king of Israel

Moab

for

many

days, because

Chemosh

was angry with

6.

his la;

-nd.

And

his

son succeeded him

and he

also said, I will afflict

Moab.
7.

In

but I saw

my days said he th[us ;] my pleasure on him, and

on

his house,

and

Israel

perished with

an everlasting destruction.

And Omri

took

8.

possession of the [la-] -nd of Mehedeba, and it

(i.e.

Israel) dwelt therein, during his days,

;

and half
9.

his son s days, forty years

in

but [resto-]
I built

-red

it

Chemosh
in
it

my

days.
(?)
;

And
and

Ba al-Me
in

on, and I

made

the reservoir

I built

10. Qiryathen.

And

the
;

men
and
I

of

Gad had

dwelt

the

land of

Ataroth from of old

11. -srael
I

built for himself the

city,

king of Iit.

Ataroth.
all

And

fought against the

and took

And
And

slew
city,

the people [from]

12. the
I

a gazingstock unto Chemosh, and unto

(or,
its

Moab.

brought back
(or
?

took captive) thence the altar-hearth of

(divine) guardian),
in Qeriyyoth.

Davdoh
13.

rHn

and

drag-

-ged

it

before

Chemosh

And

I settled therein the

men
14.

of SHRN, and the

men

of

MHRTH.
Israel.

And Chemosh And I

And
I too-

said unto

me, Go, take Nebo against

15.

went by night, and fought against

noon.

it

from the break of dawn

until

The Inscription of Mesha

1

Ixxxvii

6.

-k

it,

and slew the whole of

it,

7,000

men and male

it

sojourners,

17.

and women and [female sojourner-] -s, and female slaves: for I had devoted

to

Ashtor-Chemosh.

And
1 8.

took thence the [ves-]

-sels

of

YAHWEH, and

dragged them before Chemosh.

while he fought against me.

And

the

king of Israel had built

19.

Yahaz, and abode in

it,

But Chemosh

drave him out from before

20. I took of

me
it

and
chiefs
;

Moab 200 men,

unto Daibon.

even

all its

and

brought them
of

up against Yahaz, and took

21. to

add

it

I built

QRHH, the wall of Ye arim

(or,

the Woods), and the wall of

22. the

Mound.

And

I built its gates,

and

I built its towers.

And

23. I built the king s palace,

and

made

the

two

for reser[voirs (?)

wajter in the
24. the city.

midst of
the city, in

25.

And there was no cistern in the midst of And I said to all the people, Make QRHH. you every man a cistern in his house. And I cut out
for

the cutting

QRHH

with the help of prisonerI built

26.

Israel. [-s of]

Aro er, and

made

the highway by the

Arnon.
27. I built

Beth-Bamoth,

for

it

was pulled down.

I built

Bezer, for

ruins
28.

[had

it

become.

And

the chie]fs of

Daibon were

fifty,

for all

Daibon was obedient (to me). And I reign-ed [over] an hundred [chiefs] in the cities which 29.
land.

added

to the

And

I buil;

30.

-t

al-Me on Mehede[b]a, and Beth-Diblathen, and Beth-Ba

I

and

brought thither the

31

w^ ^(?)-keepers, there sheep of the land. And as for HoronSn,

and

dwelt therein

32

Chemosh
Horonen.

said unto

me,

Go
it

down,

fight against

And

went down
in

33

[and] Chemosh [restored thence

my

days.

And

34

And

Ixxxviii

Appendix

The

Inscription gives particulars of the revolt of

i,
1

Moab from
is

Israel,

noticed briefly in 2 Ki.

3, 5.

have taken place

Inscription
in fact
it

after the

death of

The Ahab
is

revolt
;

there stated to

but from line 8 of the

late,

is

evident that this date

too

and

that

it

must

have been completed by the middle of Ahab s reign. The territory N. of the Arnon was claimed by Reuben and (contiguous
to
it

on the N.) Gad

it

but these tribes were not permanently able to

hold

against the Moabites.

David reduced the Moabites to the

8,

condition of tributaries (2 Sam.

tion that this relation

2); but

we

infer

from

this Inscrip

was not maintained.

Omri, however, determined

at least the

to re-assert the Israelite claim,

district
till

and gained possession of

around Medeba, which was retained by Israel the middle of Ahab s reign, when Mesha revolted.
to

for forty years,

How

complete

the state of subjection was is shewn by the enormous

(2 Ki.
3, 4).

which

Moab had

thus been reduced

to Israel

tribute of

wool paid annually

The

Inscription

names

the principal cities which

had

been occupied by the Israelites, but were now recovered for Moab, and states further how Mesha was careful to rebuild and fortify them,

and

to provide

them with means

for resisting a siege.

8,

Most of the

places

named

(1-2, 21, 28 Dibon,

30 Mehedeba, 9 Ba al-Me on,

14 Nebo, 19 Yahaz,

10 Qiryathen, 10,

Ataroth, 13 Qeriyyoth,

26 Aro
31

er,

27 Beth-Bamoth, 30 Beth-Diblathen, Beth-Ba al-Me on,

are

Horonen)

mentioned

in

the

OT.

in
f.

the
Jos.

passages which
13,

describe the territory of

Reuben (Nu.
48,
i.

32, 37

15-23) or

Gad

(Nu. 32, 34-36. Jos. 13, 24-28), or allude to the country held
2. 4. 5. Jer. (Is. 15,

by Moab
Ez. 25,
24,
9.

3. 18. 19. 21. 22. 23. 24. 34. 41.

Am.

2,

2);
pK>,

27 Bezer in Dt.
14

4, 43.

Jos. 20, 8

only

3,

21,

25

nmp,

13

mn,

21

pyn
all

are not the

Bible.

Except, as

it

seems, Horonaim,

known from the places named appear

i.

to have lain within the controverted territory

North of the Arnon.

xxx-xxxii.

On
seems

the
to

orthography,

comp. above

pp.

There

be room for only two letters after Clermont-Ganneau read "UB^a Lidzb., after a fresh examination of the stone, thinks the
B>3 .

letter after

B>

to

tfP33\ }iT33).
in

1-2.

be a 3, and suggests, though doubtfully, pCTO (cf. ynnn, 21, 28 pH, i.e. Daibon, not (as pointed

MT.)

^"^

Dibon.

Had

the vowel in the

first

syllable

been merely

i,

The Inscription of Meshd

it

Ixxxix

is

not probable that the scriptio plena would have been employed.

2.

fW
as
in

I^f"

= Heb.

rut?
3.

ttB^P.

1^

as in Phoen. (p. 84
:

.);

f r

*jw,
fem
the

na

for *rua.

DNT nean = Heb. nxm noan

in the

notice (i) the

J1-,

as in Phoen.,

and sporadically

OT.

(2) nNT without

art.,

also as in Phoen. (p. xxv).

The

passage

illustrates Is. 15, 2.

16, 12. Jer. 48,

custom

35 (of Moab); comp. i Ki. 10, 2 (of Solomon). The of worshipping on was one shared by the high-places

Canaanites and Israelites with their neighbours.

(cf.

nmp, perhaps nhip

Ki. 16, 34 nh*)J) j it is against the apparently obvious vocalization nrnfj, that the fern, is regularly represented in the
ifTV, inT,
in
i

once

Inscription by

4.

p^n,
it

i.e.

pbfefa or
in use in

P?^h.

T^ n

in

Heb.

is

to fling or cast ; possibly

was

Moabitic in Qal with the

letter is

meaning throw

oneself against, attack.

The

very indistinct

p^cn

the kings

Nordl. that there

all possibilities

was formerly read; but Lidzb. agrees with Cl.-G. and is no trace of the shaft of the D, and says that of
that of
t? is

the greatest.
afflicted
if

*K?^"?33

^ijnn ^. 59,

u.

118,

7.

5.

13JH (Nold.)

and

(Ex.
"po

i,

n),

the third radical

being retained.
^>,

As

the text stands,

be read (as seems natural)

h
:

this, 117 a, GK. iu however, is harsh ; so that probably *pD should be read ^ptp, and ?y has accidentally been omitted before (cf. 1. 2) by the carver of the

the

can only be explained by Tenses,

^N"ltJ"

Inscription.
pf.

^N^

impf. Qal (i Ki. 8, 46), in a freq. sense, though a

would rather have been expected. The reading ppxri (i.e. *\Z$n the Arab. V conjug.) has been suggested but Lidzb. says that the
:

=
i

is

clear.

His land:

cf.

Nu.

21, 29. Jer. 48, 46,

cf.

where the Moabites are

nia, i.e.
i.e.

called Bto| Dy.

6.

nbbw,
i,

^Lli, and
31. 6,

Is. 9, 9.

Ahab.
13.y^.

KH, p. xxx.

xn

DJ, as Jud. 3,

35

al.

UJJN,

D,

probably H33
preferable
letters
1
.
:

(i Ki.

48).

HND
7.

(Jud. 8, 8) would, as

Hebrew, be

but there seems not to be

7.

na

KnJ

^. 118,

ch]}

(poetically

for

Dhj).

Or

possibly
is

room for more than two 13N Tax, Q^as ^. 89, 2. 3. 38 12X "QK; cf. Jer. 51, 39. djj?

1?1, as

a plup. sense

required, this by the principles of

Smend and Socin imagined that they could read "Q13 but the traces are far make it probable, in view of the close general similarity of the two languages, that what is impossible in Hebrew (it should be nTH "1213 or
1
;

too indistinct to

was possible

in Moabitic.

xc

Appendix
.

Heb. syntax should be tjnj HOjn Or, perhaps, S5n;i should be read. 8. Kfino, in Heb. roTD._no, i.e., if the n be correct, no; (for
yamaihu,
1
i.

e.

VO;)

cf.

the

same

rare

form

in

Hebrew

(see

on
n

Sam.

14,

48; and Wright, Comp. Gramm.

is

p. 158).

The

original
o-.

(Stade,

113. 4)

seen (though not heard) in the Aram.

Jer. 17,

The

same phrase occurs

difficulty

n.
iii.

Forty years.
3047.
It
is

On

the chronological

involved,

see

EB.
e.

relieved,

though not

entirely removed, by reading, with

(like no;) his sons
soiis.
(i.
:

Nordlander and Winckler, njD

8-9. naety
in

Ahaziah and Jehoram), instead of nb3 his the letters supplied were conjectured cleverly by
9.
J3N1.
.

Noldeke

1870, and have been generally accepted.

(cf.

niBWt, prop, depression

nrntJ

),

t/

perhaps an excavation used for

etc.,

the storage either of provisions, arms,

Cf.

or

(cf. line
:

n^K
n?
[

Ecclus. 50, 3 Heb., of Simon, son of Onias

DJ3]

23) of water. fnaa hna

-IB>$

r d.

03 mtPK njpo
vSarwv,
10.

fr

^/*epaw
[rd.,

avroS ^XATTwOij
with
in

[rd.
were!

aTroSo^etov

^aX/cos
jnnj?
fr.

A,

XCI/CKOS]

TO Trepi/Aerpov.
(Jud. 20,
17, etc.).
lip?
cf.

(Nold.),

Heb. D^T?.

#W

r&,

Heb.

n. DnnSKJ from Dnr6n=Arab.

riTHNJ.

VIII

conj.

against the

city.

12.

BTM^

nn

a spectacle

unto Chemosh:

Nah.

3, 6.

Ez. 28, 17.

-

Either

^BW

(Jos. 14, 7), or

NIN, to be explained probably (Clermont-Ganneau, Renan) 3 f NJ. from Ez. 43, 15. 16 of the hearth of the altar, which was prized by the But captors as a kind of spolia opima (Smend and Socin, p. 4).
this explanation is not certain.

mn
;

of a god:
Jer. 22, 2

cf.

KAT?
Sam.

225, 483

EB.
E>C3

i.

apparently the name, or title, 1126, 1127. 12-13. ninj??!

19. 2
9.
;

17, 13.
2

13.

*)*&, cf. nirv

^sb

Sam.

15, 33.
to
i

Sam. 21,

2EW:

Ki. 17, 24.

1.

14.

^4</

Chemosh said
;

me,

Go, take,
23, 4;

etc.

similarly

32

comp.

Jos. 8,
cf.

Jud. 7, 9
:

Sam.

2 Ki. 18, 25^.

14-15. ^Pn?J,
9,

once (in 3

ps.)

Ex.

23.

15.

Job 16, 22. 23, 8 in prose = Heb. nT?3. y p3O, cf. Is. n^3

58, 8: the ordinary

P2|i, rfoa,

Hebrew

equivalent would be
1
D"

ID^n
i,

ni7i?O.

16.

/w^ women. On the

"};!,

cf.

on

Sam.

13.

17.

nbH"),

Jud.

5,

30: female slaves are probably meant.

to

Ashtor-Chemosh, ac
deity,

cording

Baethgen, Beitrage, 254

ff.

1
,

compound

of a type

1 Cf. pp. 39, 47 f., 84-7; so also G. A. Barton, in an article on West-Semitic Deities with Compound Names, JBLit. 1901, p. 22 ff. ; H. P. Smith in an art. on

The Inscription of Mesha

xci

male Ashtor

of which other examples are cited from Semitic mythology. The is a South-Semitic deity, ib. 1 1 7 ff. cf. Encyd. of Religion
;

and

Ethics,

ii.

ii5

nncnnn

see p. 131.

17-18. ^[3

n]tf,

others

are quite

Renan supply ^[N-|]X, cf. 1. 12. dans la nuit, and that

says that the last

^3 DX
18.

two letters of 1. 17 garde toute sa probability.

(contrast
as
1.

Against i^NIN he objects the absence of

plural (contrast the sing.
the reading
is
I.

DX
(if,

12),

and the

12).

Dn

seems

to

be the case,

correct)
cf.

as an accus.,

must be a case of the independent pron. used Aram, ten (Ezr. 4, 10 etc.). 19. rJ3"3B i.e. he
>l
>

made
i.e.

it

a post of occupation during his war with

the analogy of the
inf.

Mesha

nDI"ir6m,

on

Heb. place-names CORK S,

^WK

of the Arab. VIII, nbhflpn3:

(see
:

cf.

the

on

Sam.

30, 28).
B>D3

nbn^l

in exactly Mesha speaks of *33D BH3 (provided jiT be masc.). the same terms which the Hebrew used of niiT, Dt. 33, 27. Jos.

24,

8.

20. fnKD, in

Heb. D^ND.

nfcfew._2i. nsob (Hold.) from

i.

Theophorous Proper Names p. 48. Among the names

2-3),

in the

OT.

in the

cited are Milk- Ashtart

(mnB>y3B>K
:

Harper Memorial Studies (1908), (mn J73^D Cooke, NSI.

:

10.

Eshmun- Ashtart
(CIS.
I.
i.

NSI.

p. 49), mpbD3EB>K

(ib.},

"nN33DK

118),

^J?23^O and

notO^D

(NSI. pp. 49,

103,

104),

Sjjnmp^D (NSI. 150. 5), nipi DIS and D3mX (UAzb.Nordsem.Epigr.z&m); seePfi. s or Encycl. of Religion and Ethics, s. v.) and the Atargatis (nnjnny
: ;

each case, a fusion of the personalities and characters of the deities named being supposed to have taken place. Baudissin, however, argues strongly that in all these cases the second name is in the genitive, so that we should render Ashtor of Chemosh, Eshmun of Ashtart, etc., the
Bab. Adar-Malik, and Anu-Malik
:

in

meaning being that

worshipped
cf.

Ashtor, for instance, was the associate of Chemosh, and

in his

PRE.*

ii.

temple (Adonis und Esmun, 1911, pp. 259-66, 269, 274-9; Ed. Meyer (Der (1897), 157, vii. 293; and Moore in EB. i. 737).

Papyrusfund von Elephantine, 1912, p. 62 f.) takes the same view. These Papyri exhibit other remarkable names of deities of the same type, viz. Pap. 18, col. 7. 5

^SD aOK N
the

ib.

1.

6 ^NJVarDJ? Anath-Bethel or Anath of Bethel

:

Bethel

being

name
f-l

of a deity

cf.

Pap. 34. 5

fn31!T
i.

13 [fU^KA a
(cf.
;

the
;

name formed
and

exactly like fri31,T,

437

Pa P-

2 77
;

JJ^K; CIS. II. 54 ?Nn 3D"in [DIP! another

i|

jfni>KIV3

rp^p

KAT?

divine

name

cf.

Pap. 34. 4 |n3Din

13] and even (Pap. 32. 3) liTTOy Anath- Yahweh or Yahweh s Anath Anath as belonging to, or associated with, Yahweh). See further Sachau, . Papyri aus Elephantine (1911), pp. 82-5; Meyer, pp. 57-65; Burney, Church Quarterly Review, July 1912, 403-6. It is now clear that in Zech. 7,
(
. .

fr^WTa

pp.

PN~rV3 should be read

as one word,

And

Bethelsarezer sent,

etc.

xcii

Appendix
Pointed irregularly by the Massorites

^IPJ.
Is.

30,

i.

pS??n
-jta
i,

/&*

woods,
i

probably the
16,

n SDp n B 9? Nu. 32, name of a place.

either

14. 22.
cf.

na

Ki.
//fo

18.-^?
</#;.$,

fo/4

(Nold.),

or possibly
24.
"13

locks or

from the root N^3.

13
;

}?>?

/or wafer,
21,
2).

cistern.

= Heb. pK (Gen. 47, )N

cf.

on

Sam.

25.
sort
;

of

some

Probably nrnaen (or nrnaan) a cutting (or cuttings) tW the special application must remain uncertain.

nJTQ3 12
1

for the

custom of every house having

its

cistern, cf. 2 Ki.

8,

31, and, in

the ancient Leja (see

DB.

i.

146),
p.

on

the East of
f.,

Jordan,

Burckhardt,

Travels in Syria

(1822),

no

cited

by

Thomson, The Land and the Book, Vol. on Lebanon, Damascus, and Beyond Jordan, p. 469, and EB. 88. 25-6. ^BKS. 26. n^DDH = Heb. n?DDn. 27. ri2 rn, probably the same place as DIM Nu.
i.

21, 19;
3, 12.
iTii

^JD niB3 22, 41.

Jos. 13, 17.

is

D^n

Ki. 18, 30.

five letters.

J?V

Mic.

28. Before W, there

Is.

space for four or

After py,
first

(or? Hin
1.

16,

4)

suggests
^["*1]

itself naturally

as
1.

the
20,

word
is

of

28.

The

conjecture

has the support of

and

the

restoration usually accepted

i.e.
fifty

but HaleVy suggests t?[K3] for

it

t?["l3],

I built Bezer, for ruins

had become, with

see p.

the help
note.

of(d.
If

1.

25)

men of Daibon/
(the 3
:

etc.
is

nyD&?,

182

29.

fO^O
be

28-9 be correct

not quite certain), the next word must almost

still

necessarily be ?y

the two letters for which space

remains

may

KH
the

(as exhibited in the translation).

Lines 28-29

^ tnen describe

number of

chiefs, i.e.

either heads of families, or warriors, over

itself (if 5JH1
is

whom Mesha
in the cities

ruled in

Daibon

right in

1.

28),

and

which he recovered.
Socin)
:

pi53 in the

cities

(Clermont-Ganneau,

Smend and
Yahaz
11.

with what follows,

1j?.3,

cf.

the expression used of

pj is

20-21.

30.

if

the reading be correct,

possible,
will allude

says Lidzbarski, though the letters

to the persons

seem

to

him

to

be yo,

engaged

in cultivating the

breed of sheep, small and

stunted in growth, but prized on account of their wool (see on

Am.
the

Cambridge Bible), for which Moab was famous. word which is actually used of Mesha himself in 2 Ki. 3, 4.
i, i

in the

It is

32. Cf.

1.

With go down Clermont-Ganneau pertinently compares Jer. which speaks of the QiJ"iin "HIE or descent to Horonaim. 48, 5 PIT And 33. No doubt ra?*| as 11. 8-9. HaleVy proposes
14.
Dfe>D
i>jn.

The Inscription of Mesha

beside
it

xciii

was set/ supposing the sequel to relate to a guard of but the sing, followed by [pot? ; twenty p]t?y is difficult. The language of Moab is far more closely akin to Hebrew than
there

men

any other Semitic language

at

present

known (though

it

may be
were
otherwise

conjectured that the languages spoken by

:

Ammon

and
from

Edom
it

approximately similar) than dialectically l In syntax, form of sentence, and general mode of expression, it is entirely in the style of the earlier narratives con
.

in fact,

it

scarcely differs

tained in the historical books of the

OT.

The
that of

vocabulary, with two a airag

elpr)p.evov

or three exceptions, not

more

singular than

many

occurring in the OT.,

respects, the language
distinctive features,

is

identical with

Hebrew.

In some

of the Inscription even shares with

Hebrew
to

as the

waw

conv. with the impf.,

jWin
It

save,

nt?y to make, DJ,

2 njO, t^T
ban, BHJ,

to take in possession,

nn, ^sh,

the dual
"pN

Din*,
with
(tMN,

Qnnn
131,

to

mpl, and

especially IBfc.

shares

Hebrew and
Jill).

Phoenician, against Aramaic, Arabic, and Ethiopic

compared with Hebrew, are riNf noan (not nXTn as in Hebrew), the n of the fern, sg., and the of the dual (except in D1HX 2 15) and plural, the n and of the f
noticeable differences, as
J

The most

plural both occurring only sporadically in the

OT. 3

the conj. DHJvn,

vp

city,

rnx ii, 14

to

take a city

(Heb. 1??); and the following

words, which, though they occur

terms, c^n 6

OT., are not the usual prose to succeed, yp2 15 of the break of dawn, H?3 and rhria 16 (in a context such as the present, the normal Hebrew expression would be D^JN and D^tJO), fkn~i 17, $&) 20, 30.
in the

By a happy instinct

the truth

was divined by Mr.

(afterwards Sir George) Grove,

before any Moabite document whatever was known, in his interesting article MOAB, in Smith s Dictionary of the Bible (p. 399*): And from the origin of the nation and other considerations we may perhaps conjecture that their language
six years

was more a
2

dialect

If this be really a dual,

2,
}

paring p.
5

of Hebrew than a different tongue? and not a nominal form in D -^- cf. GK. b 257 below), and on the other side Konig, ii. p. 437, iii.
:

88 C (com
.

The

i S. 21, 20]

87 [add, as the text stands, 25 times, mostly dialectically, or late (GK. Stade, 323*), and some doubtful textually, 15 times being in Job, but
;

even there irregularly

fem., see

(jvO
.

13 times, against

DvD

10 times).

On

the

of the

GK.

8of

xciv

Appendix
chief features of historical interest presented
(i)

The

by the Inscription

may
Ahab

be summarized as follows:
(2) the fact that
Mesha"s

the re-conquest of

Moab by

Omri;

revolt took place in the middle of

2 Ki. i, i); (3) particulars
;

s reign,

not after his death (as stated,

regained independence (4) the extent and fortified by Mesha of country occupied (5) the manner and terms in which the authority of Chemosh, the national deity of Moab,
its
;

of the war by which

Moab

is

recognized by Mesha

(6) the existence of a sanctuary of

YAHWEH
had been

in

Nebo

*
;

(7) the state of civilization and culture which

reached by

Moab

at the

Grove, in the article referred to

end of the tenth century B.C. Sir George on the last page, writes (p. 396)
in the

The

nation appears

from allusions

OT.

as high-spirited,

wealthy, populous, and even, to a certain extent, civilized, enjoying

a wide reputation and popularity .... In

multitude"
"

its cities

we

discern a

"

great

of people living in

"glory,"

and

in

the

enjoyment of

great

treasure,"

crowding the public squares, the house-tops,

and

the ascents and descents of the numerous high-places and sanctuaries,

where the

"priests

and

princes"

of

Chemosh

minister to the anxious

devotees .... In this case there can be no doubt that

pastoral people of Syria,

among
all

the

Moab

stood next to Israel in

matters

of material wealth and civilization.

This conclusion

is

confirmed

by the Inscription.
Inscription

The

length, and

finished literary form, of the

shew

that the Moabites, in the ninth century B.C.,

;

were

not a nation that had recently emerged from barbarism

reveals himself in
it

and Mesha

solidating

his

monarch capable of organizing and con dominions by means similar to those adopted by
as a
in the

contemporary sovereigns

kingdoms of

Israel

and Judah.

The

reading PHiT

is

quite certain

the letters can be read distinctly on the

plaster-cast of the stone in the British

3

Museum.

Chiefly

Is.

1516;

Jer. 48.

Note on

the

Maps

xcv

NOTE ON THE MAPS

THE Maps in this volume have been drawn by Mr. B. V. Darbishire, of Oxford. The Map of the Pass of Michmas is reproduced, by permission, from a Map by Gnstaf Dalman, the well-known Hebrew and Aramaic scholar, now Director of the German Evangelical Archaeological Institute in Jerusalem, in the ZDMG. (see
and the three Maps of Sections of particulars in the note attached to the Map) Palestine are based upon Maps published by the Palestine Exploration Fund, and
:

by Messrs. John Bartholomew

& Co.,

of Edinburgh.

In the three last-named

Maps

the coloured contours, geographical features, and -modern sites, are reproduced (with permission) from the sources mentioned the ancient sites have been repro duced from them only after a careful examination of the data on which the
:

determination of the sites depends, such as rest upon questionable or inconclusive grounds being marked by a query, while those which rest upon clearly insufficient

grounds are omitted altogether. The identification of a modern with an ancient site depends mostly, it must be remembered, in cases in which the ancient name itself has not been unambiguously preserved, partly upon historical, but very largely upon

and men who are admirable surveyors, and who can philological considerations write valuable descriptions of the physical features, topography, or antiquities of a Hence the f in. to the mile Map country, are not necessarily good philologists.
:

of Palestine containing ancient

sites,

published by the P. E. F., Bartholomew

of Palestine in general (with the exception of those in the Encyclopaedia Biblicd], include many highly questionable and uncertain identifications 1 Maps described as being according to the P. E. F. Survey are
in fact current

Maps, and

English

Maps

not better than others

is in fact misleading for the Survey geography, and modern topography of the country the ancient sites marked on such a map are an addition to what is actually determined the authority attaching to the Survey does not consequently by the Survey
:
;

the description

relates only to the physical

extend to them at
basis.

all ; and, as a matter of fact, many rest upon a most precarious In the articles and notes referred to above (p. .), I have taken a number

of names, including, for instance, Succoth and Penuel (Exp. Times,

xiii.
;

457
ib,

ff.),

Luhith
562
f.),

(Is. 15,

ib. xxi.

495

ff.),

and Ja

zer (Is. 16, 8,

and elsewhere

xxi.
.

and shewn in detail how very uncertain the proposed identifications are 2 or two may be mentioned here. The compilers of the f in. to the mile P. E. F. Map, referred to above, mark on the SW. of the Sea of Galilee the

An example

ancient

the principles which should regulate the identification of modern Arabic with Hebrew place-names, the scholarly articles of Kampffmeyer, ZDPV. xv (1892), 1-33, 65-116, xvi (1893), 1-71, should be consulted. 2 Guthe s beautiful and very complete Bibelatlas in 20 Haupt- und 28 .ben-

On

karten (1911)

and

scholarly.

may be commended to English students as eminently instructive And the forthcoming Historical Atlas of the Holy Land, by
likely to prove in all respects

G. A. Smith,

is

adequate and trustworthy.

xcvi

Note on
:

the

Maps

Plain of Zaanaim Bartholomew, in the Map at the beginning of vol. i of Hastings Dictionary of the Bible, does the same, and even goes further; for, both in this and in other maps designed by him, he inserts on the NW. of Hebron in
this case without the support of the P. E. F.

Map

the

Plain of

both these

plains

are purely imaginary localities; for, as every

is

Mamre. But Hebrew scholar

knows, though
really
in the

plain

the

rendering of

JvN and

|i?N in AV., both words

mean a

tree,

most probably a terebinth or an oak, and they are so rendered

On the other 6, etc.: Jos. 19, 33; Jud. 4, n). hand, the P. E. F. authorities, for some inscrutable reason, have never accepted Robinson s identification of Gibeah ( = Gibeah of Benjamin and Gibeah of Saul)
Revised Version (Gen. 12, with Tell el-Ful, 2\ miles N. of Jerusalem l it is accordingly, in the f in. to the mile map, not marked at this spot, but confused with Geba and Bartholomew, in
:

2 maps, including even those edited by G. A. Smith , confuses it with Geba likewise. It is true, the two names have sometimes been accidentally interchanged

his

in the Massoretic text

3
:

but

Is. 10,

29 shews incontrovertibly not only that they

19, 13, that

were two

distinct places, but also, taken in conjunction with Jud.

Gibeah must have lain between Ramah and Jerusalem, very near the highway leading from Jerusalem to the North, which is just the position of Tell el-Ful. Unless, however, the relative positions of Gibeah and Geba are properly appre
hended, there are parts of the narratives of Jud. 19 it is impossible to understand.
the hard breathing
20,

and

Sam. 13

14,

which

In the transliteration of modern Arabic place-names, I have endeavoured to insert (=?) and the diacritical points in accordance with either
s

Buhl

excellent Geographie des alien Paldstina, or E.

H. Palmer

Arabic and

English Name Lists published by the P. E. F., though I fear I may not in all cases have secured entire accuracy. Still less, I am afraid, have I attained consistency in

marking the long vowels.

usefulness of the

But

I trust that these

of the history. ruin, ruined site.

Maps for those for whom they are The frequent Kh., I should add,

imperfections will not impair the primarily designed, viz. students

stands for

Khurbet

nil"inj j

1 Comp. Grove s art. GIBEAH in Smith GIBEAH in DB., and below, p. 69.
2

Diet, of the Bible, Stenning

art.

himself adopts the Tell el-Ful site (Jerusalem, ii. 92 .). reader will do well to mark on the margin of his RV. Gibeah against Geba in Jud. 20, 33 ( on the west of Gibeah: in v. 10 the correction is made already
3

Who
The

in

EVV. ; in -v. 31 put Gibeon against Gibeah}, \ Sam. 13, 3 (see 10, 5) and Geba against Gibeah in Jud. 20, 43. i Sam. 13, 2 (see v. 16). 14, 2 (see 13, 16). 16 In 2 Sam. 5, 25, on the other also, with a (?), against Gibeon, 2 Sam. 2, 24.
; ;

I Ch. 14, hand, Gibeon (LXX 16) is better than Geba ; and in 2 Sam. 21,6 read probably (see the note and cf. v. 9) in Gibeon, in the mountain ("1H3) of Yahweh for in Gibeah of Saul, the chosen one of Yahweh.
;

(T"I3\

NOTES
ON

THE BOOKS OF SAMUEL

1,
i

4,

a.

Birth andyouth of Samuel.

fall of Eli
s house,

Announcement of the

1,

i.

nnx E^N] The same

in the sense of

nns;

13, 2

idiomatic use of nnx, especially with tJ^ a certain (man), quidam, as II 18, 10. Jud. 9, 53 rvnn iot?i Tin nnsc-DD nynvD ins tys TM. i Ki. 13, n.

20, 13.

2 Ki. 4, i al.

D^DIV

DTlnn] Grammatically
DTI"li"l;

indefensible.

D^SIV cannot be a ptcp.

in apposition with
(cf.

for this, being fern.,

would require
;

niaitf

men D^y
V

I/A.

8,

28

etc.),
(!)

not to say niaten

after

nor can

it,

as Keil

supposes,

be a genitive

DTlEnn

the

two heights of the

Zophites
D^DI^
2
,

LXX
man
(so

has

2ei<a

lg opov-s

E^pai/n, pointing to

EW

for

the

of -|HD having been in

of Ramalhaim,
etc.
}*"IX ;

MT.

accidentally written twice,

hill-country
district in

certain

a Zuphite of the

of

Ephraim

We. Klo. Bu.

called
?]1X

GK.

125^).

The
ib

which

Ramah
ib, v.

lay

was

(ch. 9, 5):

either therefore
(v.
,

actually the

name

of an ancestor of Elqanah

Zuph was Ch. 6, 20 Qre

;

ii Zophai [see p. 4]),

and the fpx fiK was so

see the notes), or,
as
is

called
(cf.

from

its

having been originally settled by the family of Zuph

27,

10 3JJ

bwDmVl;
(We.
(cf.

30, 14 3^3 3JJ:

more probable

al.),

the

land

is

in

the genealogy personified as the ancestor

Jos. 17,
i

Gilead/ Nu.
i.

26, 29.

al.).

DTlEnn]

e.,

at least
It
is,

two
1

heights.

according to the present orthography, The however, the opinion of many scholars (see esp.
286
is

The
1

reference to

Ew.

inconclusive
i

the

first

word
cf.

in the instances

there cited being in the construct state (on

2

Ki. 4, 12 see on II 20, 15).

and

are often interchanged in

ai5T as

LXX

must have read

Eftf: cf.

Hebrew and Aptaaa 26,

B

LXX
6
al.,

9, 5

2et<

P]1S.

P/3a

II 23, 29 (We.).

1365

The First Book of Samuel,

Philippi,

ZDMG.
in this

1878, pp. 64-67, Sirack, Genesis*,

p.

135
all,

f. ;

GK.

88 c ) that

and many other proper names,

is

if

not in

the dual

expansion of an original b ioo^, h This is based substantival termination in D 8s (GK. ). partly upon the fact that in parallel texts several of these names occur
is

form

not original, but

a later

artificial

without the

*;

partly

upon the
itself

fact that

many

of the duals yield

a meaning improbable in

as the

name

of a place, or inconsistent
;

with the character of the places so

far as

they have been identified

and

partly
is

on the

fact that the

most

common

of these dual forms

DJKTPj
ally in

shewn by

the Tell

el-Amarna
is

tablets to

have ended origin

-im (so B?in2, in D^inj DIN,

in the Tell

el-Amarna

letters

Narima :
the

Heb.

ir^, |VW, Samaria

cf.

which must have arisen out of

).

f"}*?^,

Aram, form of
38, 21, but
2

Thus we have D^^n Gen.

,

D r# Jos. 15, 34
DC"]i?

(cf.
>

|Vn Gen. 37, i7 a

but
J

jrn
(

tf bi f 2

Ki.

6,

13
-

);
I

Ch

6 6l3 but
>

N?T
3

J os

2I
>

32

D ^T~H?

N U1.

32

37- J os

3,

i
]

9
5-

Jer. 48,
5

i.

23
3

,Ez. 25, 9
3

<),

Djnkn-?
Mesha s
7

(Jer. 48,
inscr.,

22 3 ),

D^H
1.

(Is.

Jer- 48, 3
11.

34

jn^m ru,
E:DTU

31, 32 jmri.

30 Other dual forms of nouns cited by Philippi

),

but in

10 frYHp,
3

andStrackareDiaKIs.i5,
Jos. 15,

8;

D^K
8
.

Ch.n,
ii,

9;

B^N
6,

28.13,23;
Jos. 19, 19
2 S. 2, 8
10
.

36
3.

D:?? 2 S. 4, 3

Neh.
-

33;

DH?n
65
9

Q^rjO Gen. 32,

Jos. 13, 26. 30. 21, 38

11

(=i
]

Ch.
12

).

12^.29.17,24".

27
io<i

19,33"-

Ki.
>

2,

8
-

2
.

4 ,i 4

^rpy
22
all
;

Ez

47>

D
6

^9n
cf.
fall

s-

18 22
2

Ch

J
3>

;D:nHi|Jos. 15,36; 13 os 2i 4 ^ D
^?i? J
14
>

D^W Jos.

15,

36

D?V

Ch. 13, 19

Qr

(Kt. pSJ/)

Still

these do not necessarily

into the

same category, and some may

will

have been really duals.

dual
is

In several, as the notes

have shewn, the

hills

also expressed in
s village,
it.

LXX

(cod. B).

If there
1

were two

at

Samuel

as there are at Gezer,

BX^l ? would
ii.

be a very natural
15

name

for

And we
i

have the corresponding form yi^kooi

Cf.
iii.

in the

Syr. version of

Mace. 11,34.

Konig,
3319.

437

and note the

forcible

arguments of G. B. Gray,

EB.

s LXX (A) each time Acu0a^. LXX (B) Atuflaet^. LXX LXX LXX LXX n6\as irapaOaXaaffias ( = mp). LXX ASwpai. LXX r00cu. LXX Maewcufl. LXX -(/i. LXX Maavatttov. LXX -atif*. LXX -a^. 15 14 LXX Codd. AS corruptly others Pa/xafo/t. EQpuv.
1 2

-at/*.

HD"

-4<ju.

10

"

12

13

"PaOanuv

The

transition

from either

Di ?! ?
i

or

&C"?"}?

to

ncnn

v.

19

is,

In MT. the form occurs here alone, however, abrupt and strange. Samuel s home being elsewhere always nin. LXX has ApfjLaOaifji. not
only here, but also wherever
no"in

occurs accidentally with n, in conse

to
it

quence of the n of motion being attached

7, 17. 8, 4. 15, 34.

(nnoin),

i,

19.

2,

u.
:

16, 13. 19,18. 22, as well

asforTOin

in 25, i. 28, 3

in 19, 19. 22. 23. 20, i (asinjud. 4, 5) for

nD~Qit haseVPa/Aa. In 25,1.

n"in

28, 3 cod. A. has Pa/x.a

in this cod. therefore

is

consistently Paytta,

DTIDIH (or DJlDin) and nno^n

however,
this is

are consistently Ap/xa^at/t.

Probably,

merely a correction of a kind not unfrequent in cod. A, made with the view of assimilating the Greek text more closely to the

Hebrew, and not a part of the

original

LXX.

It is

scarcely possible to

frame an entirely satisfactory explanation of the variations. It seems clear that in 2, 1 1 etc. A.pp.a.Oa.1^ is due to the presence of the n in the

form of the Hebrew word there read by the translators but it would be precarious to conclude that this was actually DTi~tn (or DniOin).
:

From
the

the abruptness of the change in

v.

19 to the sing.,

We.

thinks

it

probable that the original

first

form of the name was the singular, which

in

instance stood in the

Hebrew

text everywhere, but that the

dual form
rection in

came
i,
i

into use subsequently,

in

and was introduced was

as a cor

MT.;

in

LXX

Pa/xa

originally the uniform

distinction
it

rendering, but in course of time an

artificial

was drawn

between noin and nncnn, and when

into the text of

this

was done

was introduced
20,
i

LXX
(

in cod. B,
:

however, in 19, 19

only, in

cod.

uniformly

Pa/m = ncnn

= nncnn). Ap/Aa0ai/A
<

Klo. ingeni
(so Bu.

ously proposes to punctuate

D^ncnrrp

from the Ramathites

manner

Sm.; not Now.), cf. 7iD*in i Ch. 27, 27: but this is not the usual in which a person s native place is designated in the OT.
is

the

name

of several places mentioned in the

OT.
of

and the

site

of
is

this

one

is

not certain.

The

best

known

is

the

Ramah

Is. 10, 29,

which

modern er-JRdm, 5 miles N. of Jerusalem. Bu. argues in favour of this but does not overcome the presumption that the unnamed city, the home of Samuel in ch. g, which was clearly (comp. 10, 2 with 9, 4 f.) N. of Benjamin, and consequently not er-Ram, was the Ramathaim of i, i and the Ramah of
certainly the
;

i,

19, etc.

Eusebius (Onomastita*, ed. Lagarde, 225, 11-14) sa ) s tnat Ramathaim

to

was near Diospolis (Lydda),

which Jerome

(ib. 96, 18)

adds

in the district of

Timnah

and

Mace.

1,

34 speaks of

Ramathem

as a toparchy

which had
Eusebius

belonged to Samaria, but was transferred in B.C. 145 to Jerusalem:

B 2

The First Book of Samuel,

f.) and Jerome (146, 23 f.) also identify Arimathaea (= Ramathaim) with Pe/^iy or Remfthis, in the territory of Diospolis. These statements would point either (Buhl, Geogr., p. 170; Now. cf. H. G. 254) to Beit-Rima, a village on a

(288, ii

hill,

of Bethel, 13 miles ENE. of Lydda, and 2 miles N. of Timnah, or (Guthe, Knrzes Bibehvorterb. t 1903, p. 536; Lagrange) to Renlis, a small
12 miles
others have thought of

NW.

village 5 miles

of Bethel
favour.

H. P. Smith and of Beit-Rima, and 9 miles NE. of Lydda. Ram- Allah, a village standing on a high ridge, 3 miles SW. but either Beit-Rima or Rentis has better ancient authority in its

W.

See further

DB.

iv.

198.

Yerahme el, perhaps rightly Iepp.f-rjX, i.e. 7Xl?nn^ DDT] The pedigree of Samuel is (the name Yeroham occurs elsewhere).
given twice besides, with variations similar to those which usually occur
in parallel passages in the
9

LXX

OT., especially
i

in

lists

of

names
i

(LXX
Samuel
Elqanah

Ch. 6, 13-11 28-26).

(LXX

Ch. 6, 18-20 33-35).

13 Samuel

18 Samuel

12 Elqanah

19 Elqanah

Yeroham
Elihu

Yeroham
Eliab
ii Nahath*

Yeroham
Eliel

Tohu
Zuph

Toah 3
20 Qre Zuph
4

Zophai

resident in
is

appears to represent Elqanah not merely as Ephraim (Q HDN iriD), but as an Ephraimite; in i Ch. 6 he represented as a Levite, of the descendants of Qohath (Nu. 3, 27 etc.).
discrepancy
is

THSX] This word

The

hard to reconcile.

Jud. 17, 7 the expression

of the

family of Judah, applied to a Levite, has been supposed to shew that

Levites settled in a particular tribe

may have been reckoned

,

as belong
NliT)

ing to
1

it;

but even

if

that

were the case 5 the addition

would

Thenius
2. 4.

,5NIO~I\

on which We.,

De

Gentibus

et

Familiis Judaeis quae

numerantur (Gottingae, 1870), remarks justly (p. 27), Dresdense potius quam Hebraeum? 2 So Vulg. Pesh. LXX KaivaO. No doubt the 3 is an error for the two letters being somewhat similar in the old character, though which of the three
i

Ch.

]"l,

forms
Keil
3

is

original cannot be definitely determined, probably

is

Tohu.

In any case
Pesh.

explanation of the variation

untenable.
i.e.

LXX
It
is

4
5

So also

(B) &fit, (A) eoove, Vulg. Thohu, LXX, Vulg.; Kt. Ziph.

Tohu

as in

i,

i.

more probable
in

that

Levite

denotes there a profession, rather than

membership

a tribe

see

Moore, ad

loc.;

McNeile, Exodus, pp.

Ixvi

f.,

26.

I.

*-3

there

make
to

the double relationship clear; here the addition

that the

seems

shew

narrator has no consciousness of Samuel

Levitical descent.

The

explanation that the term designates

civil rights

as an Ephraimite, merely so far as his

Elqanah and standing were

concerned, makes it express nothing more than what is virtually de clared in v. a and moreover implies a limitation which is not, at least,
,

sustained by usage.
in

It is

a question whether the traditions embodied

Ch. have been handed

down uniformly

in their original form,

artificially

and

whether in some cases the genealogies have not been

pleted.

com

The

supposition that Samuel was really of Ephraimite descent,

in
later

and was only

2.

times reckoned as a Levite,

is

the simplest

explanation of the divergence.

D^ :

TIP

"61]

The
17,

order,
1 8.

and form of sentence, as

1 8.

17, 12.

25, 2

(cf.
8,

36), II

14, 30.

23,

22. Jud. 3,

1 6.

Zech. 5,9. Dan.

3 etc. in
itself,

nnx] The numeral, being definite Nu. 28, 4 Ew. art.; cf. 13, 17. 18
;
:

290*";

may GK.

dispense with the

126*, 134!.

But

in a

connexion such as the present nntfn would be more

2, 1 1.

classical

(Gen.

4, 19.

10, 25 (all
2

Dt. 21,15;
several

4>
)>

ar

>d

belonging to the Pentateuchal source J); ought probably to be restored. It is read by

MSS.

TVl] before the plural D

nX

according to

GK.

145; Ew.

31 6

a.

So not unfrequently
20, 46.
i

e.g. with the same verb Gen. i, 14. 5, 23. Jud. JIIDa "OrD n 1 that there might be (Tenses, Ki. 13, 33 63)
:
<i

l|

priests of the high places.

3.

n^jjl]

The
b

pf.

with
il
,

waw

conv. has a frequentative force, used

it

to

go up; comp. 4 ~7

where observe that

interchanges, not with the

bare perfect; the tense of simple narrative, but with the impf., which
likewise expresses habituation
:

see Tenses,

120,

GK.

112^; and

comp. Ex.

17, ii.

18, 26. Jud. 2, i8f. etc.

T\W D^D]
21, i9t.

The same

phrase, likewise with reference to the obser

2,

vance of a pilgrimage or sacred season,

DVOS
cf. v.
lit.

i9

a.

Ex. 13, 10. Jud.

1 1,

40.

days, tends by usage to denote the definite period

2,

of a year:

21.

i9

b
;

and on

27, 7.

S.

r6p] now Seilun, in a secluded nook, 9^m. N. of Bethel, and of Shechem. See the writer s art. in DB. s.v.

n m.

The First Book of Samuel,

31

Dt^l]

LXX

KCU

et

HXei Kal ot Suo vioi avrov, which has been

"

T^ pj? supposed Eli seems to be presupposed by v. g

to point to

vV ^3

DB>1.

Some

independent notice of
1

either, therefore (Th. Klo.),

^y

has dropped out in

v. 3,

MT.,

or (We.) the mention of Eli originally preceded

the period, of which the

perhaps in the course of some more comprehensive narrative of life of Samuel which we still possess formed
:

but an episode

in the latter case, the reading of

LXX

will

be a cor

rection, introduced for the purpose of supplying the deficiency which

thus arose in the narrative.

4.

DVn TIM]
Job

The same
i, 6.

idiomatic expression recurs 14,

if.
.
.

i.

2 Ki. 4,

8. ii. 18.

13.

2,

Is
.

was a day (Job AV.), and

. .
.

i,
?

AV), and

now, to be construed or And it fell on a day /

it,

And

there

(2 Ki. 4, 8
in favour

(GK.

126":

We.)
:

Modern

authority

is

of the second of these alternatives

but the fact that DIM when used as

an adverbial accusative

signifies
it

regularly to-day

may

authorize the
i.e.

inference that in this phrase

the subject of
article,

was conceived

as a nominative,

as

W1

(cf. 20, 24 tjnnn TVl).

In either case the definite

is

where we should use Hebrew manner of thought

:

the indefinite,
in the

in

accordance with the

mind of

the

Hebrew

narrator, the

day

is

connected

in anticipation with the events

it,

about to be described

as happening

upon

and

is

thus regarded as defined.

Comp. 1SDH

Nu.

5,

23,

^2nn

Jos. 2, 15, the scroll, the cord, defined in anticipation

as those taken for a particular purpose,

where our idiom can only

cf.

employ a: see on
frui]

6, 8.

10, 25.

19, 13

and

GK.

I.e.

4
.

a ~7 is parenthetical,
:

describing what Elqanah

habit was
is

(see
in 7

on v
b

3)

the narrative of the particular occasion 4 a

resumed

rmni.
:

Render therefore
(v.

(for the

emendations adopted, see the

to

notes below)
there
fell

3)

And

that

man

used

go

up, etc.

(v. 4)

And

a day, and Elkanah sacrificed:

etc.
.

now he

used

to

give to

Peninnah,

as they went

up

to

(#-7) and so used she to do year by year; as often the house of Yahweh, so used she to vex her and
;

she wept [on the present occasion] and did not eat. Elkanah her husband said to her, etc.

(v. 8)

And

nuo]
cf. 9,

portions, viz. of the flesh partaken of at the sacrificial meal

23.
it

Notice here the position of the object at the end, where

rounds

off the sentence

and brings

it

to its close.

The English
in
13, 13.

order, in such

a case,
striking

would produce a very weak sentence instances of the same order, see Jer.
a
;

Hebrew.

For two
6,

Am.

14

cf.

Ex.
5.

8,

i7

and see further on

II 14, 12.

D*2K]
at

Many

attempts have been

made

to find a

meaning

for this

once defensible philologically, and suited to the context. It has been rendered (i) heavily. So, for instance, the Vulgate (fris/is), a portion several mediaeval authorities (e.g. the Great Bible of 1539
word,
:

and amongst moderns, Bo. Th. But for this ), is no support in the known usage of the sense of D?|N there language D*SS3 occurs with the meaning in anger in Dan. n, 20; but that
with an heavy cheer
:

would be unsuitable
"liy

here,

and the expressions

v.
1

"pa

l^DJ

(Gen.

4, 6)

and

r6 VH $b rvJS (below,

8) are not sufficient to justify the sense

It

of a dejected countenance being assigned to D^QX.

in
}

has been rendered

connexion with nns n30 one portion oftwofaces ( (2) So Keil and even Gesenius. It i.e. a double portion.
Syriac
^3/"

= two persons),
is

true that the

;

corresponds generally in usage with the

is

Hebrew D^S

but, to say nothing of the fact that a Syriasm

and

that even in late

unexpected in Samuel, Hebrew D DK does not occur with the Aramaic

is

sense of person/ there

suggest that the dual would, in

(like

nothing in the use of the Syriac word to Hebrew, denote two persons ^&l*
:

D^D)

is

used of one person, the singular not occurring.

it

If D?SK

must be implied that the singular PJK might denote one person, which the meaning of the word (nostril] obviously does not permit. Secondly, the construction, even if on lexical grounds

means two persons,

this

D^DN evidently rendering were defensible, would be unexampled. b cannot be a genitive after nnN fWD: Ew. 287 (cited by Keil) com
bines together cases of apposition

and of the accusative of

limitation

but the disparity of idea (one portion and two persons) shews that D^QN it cannot be in apposition with DHN n3D might be an accusative
:

defining the

amount

or measure of the
1

nnN HJB

(Tenses,

App.

194)

but

how

unnaturally expressed

one (emph.) portion,

i.e.

immediately

defined as a portion suitable for two persons,

as in fact not one portion at
all,

as a double portion,

but two
lexical

Upon

grammatical grounds,
this

hardly less decisively than

upon

grounds,

rendering must

thus be pronounced inadmissible.

(3)

The

rendering of

AV. a worthy

8
portion
is

The First Book of Samuel,

inherited from the

Geneva Version of 1560, and

P^IH,
to the
it

is

based
choice
;

ultimately
portion.

upon the Targum, which has TTU in

"Vna

i.e.

one

choice corresponds in the

it is

Targum
it,

Hebrew D^DX

but
it

it is

clear that

no

translation of

nor can
his for

be derived from

by any intelligible process. Kimchi, in Book of Roots, makes two attempts to account
Evidently
it is

Commentary and the

it

both unsuccessful.

a mere conjecture, designed to replace the untranslatable

that will

word by something

more or

less

harmonize with the context.

In the
at

The Hebrew

LXX

D SX

is

admit of a defensible rendering. This reading represented by irX-ffv, i.e. DDK.

text does not

once

relieves the difficulty of the verse,

and

affords a consistent

and gram

matical sense.
as in
this,

""3

DDK

restricts or qualifies the

preceding clause, precisely

to give

Nu.

13, 28.

But unto Hannah he used

v. 4,

one portion:

following the portions of

might seem

to

felt less

affection for her than for Peninnah.

l
:

To

imply that Elqanah obviate such a mis

conception, the writer adds

Howbeit he loved Hannah; but Yahweh

had shut up her

womb/
i.

the last clause assigning the reason

why

Hannah

received but one portion.

This reading

is

followed by We.,

199), Now., Kp., Kenn., Dhorme, and is on the margin of R V. the words because she had rightly represented no child, however, though found in LXX, formed probably no part of

Stade (Gesch. des V. Isr.

by the comment. explanatory

the
6.

text used

translators,

but were added by them as

an

DJ?3

02
i.e.

... nnDjni]
vexed her

and

used
is

to

-vex
it :

her even with a

is
it

vexation,

bitterly.

DJ?3

not (as

often rendered)

to provoke to anger, but to vex, as DJQ is vexation the feeling aroused by some unmerited treatment;

always denotes

cf.

Job

5, 2.

6, 2

Dt. 32, 19 the vexation caused to

Yahweh by
27

the undutiful behaviour

of His
the

sons and

daughters,

vexation from the

their

enemy/
triumph

i.

e.

vexation

which

He

would experience from

at

Israel s ruin.

DJD]
Is.

The
p

abstr. subst., in place of the

more common

inf. abs.,

as

21, 7 3

Ttrpm; comp.
hurling,

also 22, 17 will hurl thee as a

man

[or,

O
up

man] with a
ivith

i.e. will

hurl thee violently, 18 will wind thee

a winding; 24, 16. 22

gathering [but read here

^Bn

be gathered, as captives, with a Ez. 25, 12. 15; 27, 35; Mic. f]DK]
will
;

f.J-6
4,

D3 occurs in the same 14; 27, 12. Gen. 31, 15. 46, 4. Nu. 16, 13-)-. Perhaps, inf. abs. indeed (Ehrlich, Randglossen zur Hebr. Bibel, iii. (1910), p. 163), we

9; Hab.

3,

9; Job

16,

position before the

should read here the

inf.,

DV2.
:

nmv]
parison of

her rival- or fellow-wife

eius,

LXX

(Luc.)
is

fj

dvTt?Aos

avrijs,

Vulg. acmula

Pesh. oti^.

The meaning

certain.

A com
common

Hebrew

with the cognate languages, Arabic and Syriac,

shews that

in old times,

when polygamy was

from a root JLi
Jl^X

prevalent, a

term was in use

among

the Semitic peoples to denote the idea of a

to

rival- or fellow-wife, derived

injure or vex, viz.

Arabic
IJ^>

darratun

Syriac

ar/M

Hebrew

rnx.

The
it

variation in the initial letter shews that the term

was not borrowed by

ancestors of the
:

one Semitic language from another, within

historical times, but that

was

already in use at the time

when

the

common

Hebrews, Aramaeans, and Arabs dwelt together in a common home after the three branches separated, the initial consonant in process of
time underwent a variation
till it

^ in Aramaic,
word, see
:

and as

in
I.

appeared finally as V in Hebrew, as For an example of the Syriac Arabic 1

.

65 D, where Hagar is spoken of as the Ephrem Syrus, it is also used here in Pesh. to For JliX of Sarah represent the Arabic, see Lane s Arab. Lex., p. 1776, and The 1001 Nights

m.

s translation, London, 1865, ii. 135), Budoor and Hayat-en-Nufoos are both by Lagarde ( wives of Qamar-ez-Zeman, and the one is 5^ = mv to the other

(Habicht),

iii.

276, 8

(cf.

Lane

referred to

compare

Samuel
i.

i,

6 of the family of

Elqanah

Lane, Modern

Egyptians,

232 ; S. A. Cook, The Laws of Moses and The Code of Hammurabi, p. 116 (who cites examples of the working of the system

in Syria,

and quotes the

)
:

alliterative proverb,
s

ed-durra murra,
1 8,
1

A fellows

wife
1

is

bitter

also
is

Saadyah

version of Lev.
:

8 (in
if

Le Jay

or

The

variation

in

accordance with rule

where Heb.
:

corresponds to

Arab.

^,

its representative in

n?

L^p

$1
n

^
=

Aramaic
also,

is
>&>.,

e.g. fNU

J.L5
10,

=
*-^.>

?V

>

(it

in

the

Aramaic of

Jer.

(NpIN), of
pj?

Nineveh and Babylon,

Zinjirli,
:

Cappadocia, and Egypt, becomes p (as

see

=
^e

VK - J7j nD P =
NSI.
p. 185).

~"??)

LOT?,

1909, pp. 255, 504, 515;

l

Cookc,

See Lagarde, Semitica, I. (1878), pp. 22-27, or tne 178. Appendix to the writer s Hebrew Tenses (ed. 3),

st

io
Walton
Paris,
s

The First Book of Samuel,

Polyglott, or in
1
.
"i"^

Derenbourg
is

edition of his

Works,

vol.

i.

iSps)

from
wife

m,

denominative (GK. 38 as used here, having the sense of to take a rival- or fellowin Lev. 18, 18

<r)

(LXX

yvvaiKO.

CTT

dStXe^rj avrfjs ov Xrj^r) di

Tt^Xoi

2 )
,

just like the

Arab. Ill C\2-

In post-Biblical Hebrew
3
i
.

occurs in the same

sense in the Mishnah, Yebamoth, ch.

riEjnn]

On

the anomalous

^ (with dagesh dirimeni) see

GK.

22 s

Stade, 138*. The root Dyn elsewhere in Heb., (6) (20*) ; Ew. except Ez. 27, 35 (where read probably with LXX, Pesh. DiTJQ lyen), means always to thunder (e.g. ch. 7, io) but in Targ. it means in
;

28 b

the Ithpaal
13!? v
))
;

to

murmur,

complain (oft. for

to

J17,

as Ex. 16, 2

1jnntf

for

meaning Ethpeal and Ethpael, and in its derivatives, numerous examples in PS. s.v.) in the sense of
Syr. (besides also

and

in

thunder] the root, esp.

is

in

very frequent

(see

be indignant, complain,
>

and

lament (e.g.

yCL.v>.\tir

Jj

= p)

x a ^ e7rat/vT

<*aaj>l?

=
be

r)yava.KTT)<Tav ]

and

vi *\o t

p.op.^rj,

Col. 3, 13).

The

Hif.

may

rendered here

to irritate her.
is

The Arab. J^ (which

and
is

used of the nose cleaving

to

usually a denom. from llij earth or dust, to the dust, fig. of abasement) has also
i

the sense of

and v: Lane, Arab. Lex., 1113 f.). It is possible that, in this sense, it is allied with the Aram. Djn mentioned above, and with the Heb. D^in here.
anger
(conjj.

and

iv; cf.

iii

7.

Wy]

Difficult.

Keil:

So used he (Elqanah)

to

do

(viz.

gave

1 And a woman with her sister thou shall not take LJJ15 JjjxU that she be her fellow-wife. 3 Keil s rendering of "nx?, derived from Knobel, is not probable.

may

See further on
s

this

word Lagarde,
or
is not,

Deceased Wife
entitled

Sister

is,

in his essay Whether Marriage with a prohibited in the Mosaic Writings, published

No. 13, and reprinted in the volume Substantially the word was already (1884), pp. 125-134. correctly explained by Alb. Schultens in his Consesstis Haririi quartus quintus et
originally in the Gottingen Nachrichten, 1882,

Mittheilungen

i.

sextus (Lugd. Bat. 1740), p. 77

Sub

.^0

regnat speciatim usus obtrectandi et

.

Hinc gjU !T1X aemulandi, contendendi ex Zelotypia, quae vocatur *|1*J et ^o est mutter quae cum alia communem habet maritum. Sic i Sam. i, 6 and he
:

Jiff os^ ductafuit super aemulatione, i.e. alleri uxori quotes the phrase sy i,^o \^ f in Lev. 18, 18. fuit adiuncta, and refers also to (Similarly in the Animadversiones Philologicae et Crilicae ad varia loco. V. T. (1709), on this
*
.
"fl"T3K>

* -

passage

reprinted in the Opera Minora, 1769, p. 166.)

/.

6-9
i.e.

ii
the

her a double portion),

so used she to vex her,

more he
:

shewed

his affection for

Hannah, the more Peninnah vexed her

double portion,
there
.

but,

even apart from the untenable expl.

is

no

analogy
is

for this sense of the repeated

1tJ>N3

p
:

the

more

the

more

...
.

(Ex.

i,

12).

Th. We. point nt?^

so was

it

done year

by year
n^yj
(loot
to
is

so (namely) did she vex her

but this use of the passive

hardly a

Hebrew

idiom.

Probably we should read with Pesh.

)a),
p

do year by year
is

Vulg. (implicitly), nb^Tl pi and so used she (Peninnah) in this case so (namely) used she to vex her
.
.
.

the second
njtt 3

simply resumptive of the

i.e.

first.

nj>]

year for year,

i

elsewhere, as

Ki. 10, 25.

one year like another See Lex. p. po a

.

= yearly.

So

^P]
run
11

lit.

out of the sufficiency

of,

idiom, for as often as

BnSy..

see Lex. 191^.

nr&y] Read probably with Vulg.

which
to

JV33] After the verb of motion,

is

we expect

the accus. run JV3,

11

probably

be read with 34 MSS., Kimchi, and three Rabb.

authorities ap. Aptowitzer, I (see List of Abbreviations), p. 37.

n33ni] Instead of continuing, by

every year, the narrator, the description of
in v. 4 a .

"X

?^,

to describe

what took place

by using

the hist, tense 1133111, glides here into

in the particular year referred to

what happened

&O1 would have ^3Nn xh] More significant than the normal and emphasizing the continual condition in which Hannah was been,
n;>3K
:

see Tenses,
8.

30, 42

/3,

85 Obs.;

GK.
HE

107^.

So roan

v.

icA
;

nop] So pointed only

in this verse (thrice):

is

GK.

IO2 1

Lex.

554

a.

Comp.

the cases in which

s 173 c ); and for the tone Mil el the yv] So Dt. 15, 10 cf. the yi 3^ (sad heart] of Pr. 25, 20, and
:
p^>

pointed anomalously HD (Stade, anomalous HD? Job 7, 20.

the opposite 310 said of the heart ch. 25, 36 (where see note)

also

D jn D^S (Gen. 40, 7), said in Neh. 2, 2 to be due to 3.? JH. TVTrm 0-c for in?., i. c. ^1 but unsuitably (see 24, 6. II 24, 10).
,

LXX

9.
!"IN"V,

H73X]

The

inf. cstr.

with the fern, termination, as regularly with

D3HX, and with

this

word

in Jer. 12, 9, the Priests

1

Code, and
Is.

Ezekiel; also sporadically with other words

(cf.

injj5?3

30, 19;

See Journal of Philology,

XL

(1882), 235

f.

GK.

45*.

12

The First Book of Samuel,

Dt. ii, 22):

and with the

suffix

omitted, as also takes place

i

exceptionally (e.g. ch. 18, 19. Gen. 24, 30.

Ki. 20, 12).

B;OK

(so

LXX) is, however, what would be naturally expected

to the party generally, in spite of

the suffix referring

Hannah

not joining with them.

nb^3

is,

however, in fact superfluous,

:
"6tJ>3n

as the entire incident takes

place at Shiloh

the boiled flesh (cf. 2, 15), or perhaps (We.) on v. 18), should be read. Klo., in view of v. 18 (Kittel) ns^?? (see

LXX,

for

r6ea rfax nnx, emends very

cleverly

nse^a rtax mrn,

and left her food (uneaten) in the (dining-)chamber (see 9, 22), followed by (see below), and stood before Yahweh. This emendation
is

accepted by Bu., but not by Sm. Now.: see further on

v. 18.

nhC J Very anomalous

of an
irnnB>

(cf.

GK.
1
:

ii3

e
.),

being the only

i

example
"nriN

inf.

abs. after a preposition

contrast

Ki. 13, 23
;

v?N

nnxi Dn?.
to

LXX
rtax

be an addition
in

"HPIX,

do not express nnt? nnNl and it may well made on the analogy of other passages

which

nnE>

follows ?3N (e.g. Gen. 24, 54).

"

LXX

have, however,
(cf.

after

"vCfa

xal /care cm;

is

ei

WTriov Kvpiov, i.e.

l/

"

jap 32Tnni
is

v.

26.

10, 19), which

indeed required for the sequel, and

accepted by

Th. We. Klo.

etc.

a^i] The ptcp. describes what Hannah appeared where he was.

nriro ^y]
10.
tt

Eli

was doing

at the time

when

*?y

= 6y:

Lex. 756*.

BJ

mo]

Cf. 2 Ki. 4, 27 rh

mo

ntyan: Job

3, 20.
i.e.

27, 2

al.

The

expression implies a state of mental embitterment,

disappoint

ment, dissatisfaction, discontent (Jud. 18, 25. ch. 22, 5). ?y] for the more usual 7N, which is read here by several MSS. There is a tendency, however, in these two books to use and ^N
^>y

interchangeably: comp.
Is. 22,

v. 13. 2,

n.
Cf.

II 19,

^3

also

Ki. 9, 5 b 20, 43.

.

15; and see on

HN"in

13, 13.

Lex. 41*.

n.

nx~l

DS]

The

expression of a condition
abs.
:

by the addition of the

1

inf.

see

on

20, 6

is often emphasized and exactly as here,

The
b

inf.

abs. occurs, however,

though even then

).

rarely, as the object of another

verb (Ew.

24o

a
;

GK.

( 339 ), appears to note in Michaelis], though against the Massorah).

Ewald, in his explanation of this passage have read HP3S (as some MSS. and Edd. do read [see the
113

On

thought, perhaps, to afford a parallel to the

text, see the

Ex. 32, 6, which might be note on 22, 13.

g-i)
connexion,
cf.

Nu.

21, 2.
v.

For *W
:

in a similar

Gen.

29, 32

and

for

13T (also

i9

b
),

Gen. 30, 22.

pf.

^matt]

The
Here

with

waw
s.v.

conv.

carrying on the impf.

19, 5
a
.

nN"in,

according to Tenses,
VTirui]

115

DK.

So Ex.

a 23, 22 etc.
ib.

So

the pf. with waw conv. b b 20, 6; Ex. 19, 5 23, 22 etc.
.

marks the apodosis :

Swcrco

136

a.

VTl
eu>s

*W 73

ITIDJ

)]

LXX
/cat

has

/cai

avrov Ivutmov

crou SOTOJ/

rjfjiepas Oa.va.rov

avrov

oTvov KCU p.f.0vo~p.a ov rcierai.

This

is

probably an amplification of the Hebrew text, by means of elements borrowed from Nu. 3, 9. 18, 6. 6, 3 (all P), designed with the view of
representing Samuel
12. iTni]
s

dedication as

more complete.
is

As

a frequentative sense

here out of place, this must be

the perf. with simple

waw,
9.

in place of the

normal n^ such as
l|

is

met

with occasionally, as 10,

(see note); b. II
7,

13, 22.
3,

17, 48.

25, 20 (see note). II 6, 16

4, 19.

and with other verbs

13, 18 (?y31, as Jud.

13 (but see note).

16, 5. 23,

17, 38.

3, 23).

quently in later Hebrew): see Tenses,

133.

20 (and more fre We. Bu. and others

violent: but
it

would correct rpm always to

W.

This

may seem

is

observable that in almost every case future tenses precede, so that

a scribe might, even more than once, have written nTil by error,

supposing inadvertently that the future verbs were to continue.

the discussions in Tenses,
I.e.;

Cf.

GK.
"3

ii2PP~ uu

Ron.

iii.

37o

c ~ r.

?/snr6
or

nnmn]
cf. Is.

lit.

did much in respect

^/"praying,

i.e.

prayed long

much:

55, 7
5.

mbo? naT
So

for

he

will

abundantly pardon,

II 14, ii.
in respect

Ex. 36,
<?/"

^. 78, 38.

^1X!^>

JWpn

thou hast done hardly

2,

asking

= thou
N^>

hast asked a hard thing 2 Ki.

19, 4;
rrni>

10; 23JJT

Ninb

come

in stealthily II

nN2n3 = fled
i

secretly

Gen.

31, 27;
Jer. i,

n3^ men
12;
:

= shall not

comeback

Ki. 13, 17; niS 1^ ratDTJ

ni2^

Tl?:np I

was beforehand

in fleeing

=I

fled

betimes

Jon.

4, 2

GK.
.

114

with the footnote.

12-13.

rnmD

aon

mm

10#

^jn]

Two

circumstantial
.

clauses (Tenses,

b 160), HM1 being resumed by mt^m in i3 here the sense of observed, i.e. marked not a common use of
\l/.

1EK>

has
at

"IC5^,

least in prose:

13.

fcOil]

17, 4. Job 39, comp. For the pron. (which is unusual, as thus joined with the
cf.

i.

Zech.

n, n.
199

indef. ptcp.)

Dt. 31,

3.

Jos. 22, 22

Tenses,

note.

14
nn? by

The First Book of Samuel,

msiD]

not, of course, as Is. 40, 2

al.

in the sense of con

in
ev,

soling, but, the pron.

being

reflexive, as

?N

"Ul^

Gen. 24, 45
so that there
"lEtOl

=
is

to

speak

to

oneself (where
for

LXX
i?y
"ION

likewise render

by
in^

no ground
of course
27,
i.

changing here
21 (We.).

into 2).

Comp.

^N

(followed

the verb being

8,

by the words supposed to be said)

another instance of

Gen.

It is

Py^N.

yp|S^ fcO] not yp&?3 &6, in

agreement with the continuance expressed

by the preceding ptcp. 6 as Gen. 38,

3E>n]

fiiyj.

15.

Job 33, loal.

14.

p*DnB>n]

the

of the 2 fern, sing., retained regularly in

viz.

Aramaic

and Arabic,
Is.

is

found in Hebrew only seven times,

2, 8. 21. 3, 4.

here, Jer. 31, 22.

470).

45, 10.
"Jvyc]

Ruth

18 (Stade,
its

553;

GK.

from upon
17,
1 6,

thee

the wine (in

effects) being conceived as

clinging to her,
literally)

also Jud.

and weighing her down. Comp. for the idiom (applied 39. Gen. 38, 19 al., and (metaphorically) Am. 5, 23: 19 vbyo 1R3 ID^ (in allusion to the hair as the seat of

Samson
15.

s strength).

nn
W\>

nt^p]

The

expression occurs only here: upon the analogy

Dt.
2,

of 2?

Ez.

3, 7

(cf.

30)
77

it

would denote
i.e.

hard-spirited,
Qinw\>,

i.e. is

obstinate, unyielding.

LXX

cr/cA^pa TfAepa,
W\>

which

is used in the sense which supported by Job 30, 25, where DV here desiderated, viz. unfortunate, lit. hard of day, i. e. one upon whom times are hard (cf. Sw^/xcpia). So Th. We. Hitzig (on Job I.e.), etc. is
"33N]

mil

el (Tenses,

91), the pausal

form of

"^N,

here with a

flw

wr

disjunctive accent (zaqef}, such as often induces a pausal form (Tenses,

i3)
^33]
the
i.e.
is

the emotions the seat:

<i

and
>//.

desire, of

which

in
i.

Hebrew psychology
142,
3,

soul

cf.
i(
>

42, 5;
1 6.
f.

also 102,

which

illus

trate at the

same time n b

v.

See the synopsis of passages in the

writer
1 6.

Parallel Psalter,

p.

459

tfyfysTQ i)zb]
\f/.

fro

means

to

make

into,

}fl3

to

treat as

(Gen. 42, 30.

9, 6) or to

44, 12):

JD? fro
2,

means elsewhere

/0 set before

(i Ki.

give up before (Dt.

If the text

31. 33)

neither sense, however, being

like,

suitable here.

be correct, vsb must have the force of

which

it

also appears to possess in

;

Job

3,

24 (parallel with
is

3).

4,

19

(Ew. Del. Hitz.)

but in these passages also the sense

questionable.

i3-i
but
"}

i5

LXX

express simply

yy^yKt?

}T\)

never occurs in the sense of

to represent as.
treat not
. .

The

best suggestion

seems

to

be to read 3 033,

,fnJV7N
in

as (Gen. 42, 30), throwing out iJB?, as having

come
s.v.

by

error from the line above

Tl"m]

(Sm.

Bu.).

On

^JJv2, see

Lex.

LXX
for

lKTf.Ta.Ka,
^rOKB>

Targ. JT3TIN,

both paraphrasing.

2^. Here begins a series of which the stem ?W& is brought into plays (i, 17. 20. 27. 28. 2, 20) by connexion with the name Samuel. Cf. Gen. 17, 17. 18, 12. 13. 15.
17.

^ID^J

(unusual),

GK.

21, 6 (Isaac);

25, 26. 27,

is

36 (Jacob).

1DVO] Dyo

idiomatic with
Cf.

bw.
Ki.
2,

v. 27.

Dt. 10, 12.

$>#

Is. 7,

al.

(Lex. 768^ fo//0).

1 8.
n3"l"v]

nso

16 sjriKD

3i

nriK rb$&.
avTrjs, i.e.

LXX

adds KOI

fla-ij\6cv eis

TO KoraAu/m

no

doubt, as
into

We.

rightly perceived,

nnaK pn

the (dining-)charnber

LXX

(see 9, 22) and entered having incorrectly treated the n

fern.

Naril

locale as the suffix

of the 3 pers. sing.

The

natJ b

was a chamber

near the mif

>3*n,

as in 9, 22 near the HD3, in which the sacrificial

meals were held.

In later times the word denotes the chambers in the

Temple Court
^NJYi]
rif
rn

in

which the

priests lived: Jer. 35, 2. 4.

Ez. 40, 17

etc.

LXX
Dy

FIB*K

for this has

nJ

an

entire sentence,

presupposing the Heb.

?|fh

ta?l.

If these

words are

original,

and they certainly read as if they were, Hannah leaves the sacred meal (v. 9) before it is over, and goes to the temple to pray she then returns to the dining-chamber, and finishes her meal with her husband.
:

Klo.

emend, of

v.

g agrees with this representation.

Would

the

narrator, however, have said,

her merely as returning to

and went her way, the adjoining raw? (Sm.)

if
?

he had pictured
If the additional

words

in

LXX

here are not original, then

this will
ro&5>i>

72Xm
of
is

will

mean and
to
s

ate

in

general; and with

agree

MT.
it

v. 9,

according
Klo.

which

Hannah leaves
of
v.

the

after the sacred

:

meal

finished.

emend,

is brilliant,

and
is.

attractive

but

is difficult

to be as confident that
it,

it is

right, as

Bu.

Nowack and Smith do

not accept either

or the

LXX
pause,

reading here.
milra\ on account of the disjunctive accent, zaqef: out of
(mil
el)
;

i>3Km]

we have ?3Nni

so e.g. Lev. 10,

2.

See

GK.

68 d

e.

iTSS]

OS rQTJJK TVC? nrQPN

D OS of a vexed or discontented countenance, as Job 9, 27 nBN ON. LXX understood the word

16
in
its

The First Book of Samuel,

iTOSl ordinary sense, reading (or paraphrasing) TIP vEtf N?
4, 6).
is (cf.

Gen.

Klo. nb an *6 (Jer.
doubtful
if

3,
is

12) for n^ Vn vb.

in its original form.

20. It

the text

We
it

should

expect
diately

(cf.

Gen. 30,

2 2 f.)

the

remembering

to

be followed

imme
stands,

by

the conception,

and

the date which, in the text as

fixes the time of the conception, to fix rather the time of the birth.

Hence Reifmann (Or Boqer,

the beginning of the verse
to pass, at
effect
:

Berlin, 1879, P- 2 ^) supposes a trans

position to have taken place, and would restore the words run inni to

And Hannah
year, that
/cat

conceived

and

it

came
So
in

the

close

of the

she
T<O

bare a son.
/catpw
TO>V

LXX
style

(KCU crwe Aa/3ev,

eyevTj^

r/fjifpfav

Kal

ITCKCV vioV), but without the retention of run,

which

is

desiderated by

Hebrew
D^OTi
1

(Tim

alone being too light by the side of the long clause

following).

Read, with 6 MSS., HDlpn^ (the pi. is strange; and niD1pni>] would form no part of the original text Introd. 2. 2), at the (completed) circuit of the days, i. e. not (as Th. We.) at the end of the
the
:

period of gestation, but like

rwn

nsipn Ex. 34, 22

(=rwn

nN3?3 in

the parallel, Ex. 23, 16), of the Feast of Ingathering at the close of

the year, which was no doubt the occasion of the pilgrimage alluded
to in v. 21.
Cf. the cogn. F|p3 in Is. 29,
i
11

IDpJ

D^n

let

the feasts go
*?

round,
II

i.e.

complete

their circuit.
2

as vv. 3. 21.

of time as

n,

i.

Ki. 20, 22. 26.

^.

Ch. 24, 23 rwcri naipn?.

naipn occurs

besides only
^SIDC?]

19, 7.

The

current etymologies of this

name cannot be

accepted.
still

This

is

evident at once in the case of the old derivation, which

margin of AV., that is, Asked of God, as if P^E^ were contracted from 7NO P^Nt? for such a contraction would be altogether
lingers in the
;

alien to the genius of the

Hebrew language.
in the

What
the

the writer

means

to express

must be (as often

the

OT.) an assonance, not an ety

mind
pp_

mology,

i.e.

name

PNIOt? recalled to his

it.

word

!?1NB>

asked,

though
the

in

no sense derived from

So

or HE D, for instance,
to

recalled or suggested the verbs rup to get,

and HE D

draw
or
?

out,

though
out.

names do not themselves

is

signify either

gotten
i

drawn

What, however, explanation Asked of God

the actual

meaning of the
was seen
to

name NIEE

When

the

be untenable, an attempt was

/.

20
sort of

17
connexion with the text by heard of God signified

made

to bring the

name
it

into

some
-^Jf
1

the suggestion that

(so e.g. Keil).

was
this,

^,

and

Had

however, been the writer s intention,

we

should have expected the word hear to occur somewhere in the narra
tive,

which

is

not the case.

(i)

to this derivation,

Had

But there are even more serious objections this been the true account of the name,
letter elided
:

the

rather than the y

would have been naturally the

rise to
1
.

an

original /NjnDIp would have given

7NJ?EB>?)

PNJWO^ (on the analogy of

proper names in

rather than to b^lES?

(2)

Compound

Hebrew
models:

are constructed, for the

most

part, after particular types or

thus one large class consists of one of the sacred

last

names

followed by a verb in the perfect tense (the

vowel only being

|->;>K,

lengthened, after the analogy of substantives), as

i.e.
"$
"!),

\\
as
(or

^11?$,

El

(or

Yah) has given, El

(or

YaK) has known.

first,

Another
( )i"i^3n,

class
S>J3n,

is

similarly

compounded, but the verb stands

class the verb

Yah

(or El) has been gracious, 0) "lf]$,

(less

V)3[, Yah
still

El) has
first,

helped.
is

In a third

numerous)
PNprn*
!),

stands

but

in the imperfect tense, as

El

hath mercy (or, with an optative

force,

May El

have mercy

(fy"IJ3W<!

Yah

hcarkeneth (or,

May Yah
com

hearken!}.

There

are, of course, other types, which need not however

be here considered.

But numerous as are the proper names

pounded of one of the sacred names and a

to

verb, there are none, or next

none,

compounded with a passive

participle.

Obvious as such a form

it

as blessed or helped or redeemed of Yah might appear to be,

was

uniformly discarded by the Hebrews.

participle
is

In proper names, the passive

used only by

itself.

We
(

have

^"la

and
or

"U2T,

for instance,

but taaia or infzra^, not rrarci; -nn\

*OJ>N

0)^3}, not
i

we have not only frota and not however bwnj we have

;

}riJin<

O r jnjV), but also (tynfaia and

0)n$QB>

and *?$$&&

(also

^^),

but

not

7XyiEC>.

There
i

is

no

name

in the

OT. formed

analogously to

a presumable
1

NyiO^ heard of God* ;

7,

and the

fact that this

type of

In
KSj

Ch.

al.

even the

is

not elided.
4, 18,
if

The

only possible

exception would be ^N^TO Gen.

is far

this

mean
a

smitten of God, which, however,

vocalize ?K^niO, which
giver
1365

from certain

following the Qre,

we may
life-

would agree with the

C

LXX

Ma^X,

i.e.

God

is

(Budde, Biblische Urgeschichte, p. 128).

But, in any case,

an archaic

i8

The First Book of Samuel,

studiously avoided

compound name was

by the Hebrews

is

practically

conclusive against the proposed derivation.

The
is

derivation suggested
it is

as obvious as

natural.

by Gesenius, PWEt? = Name of God, It is suitable and appropriate in itself;

and the form of compound which it implies is in exact agreement with Face of God/ Friend of God, ^X3 Majesty of God.
<

*>K3

f>$JH

The u

is

the old termination of the nominative case (see

GK.

Qo

k
),

retained as a binding-vowel, both in the instances cited, and also occa

sionally besides
:

e. g. in

rptWiD

Man

of the

weapon \ and

Man who

belongs to

God.
,>S1CtJ>

does not mean The preceding argument, on its negative side, that Heard of God, has been generally allowed to be conclusive but it has been felt by some that Name of God does not yield a good sense for the name of a person
:

and other explanations of it have been proposed. i. ?X1DK>, it has been pointed out, resembles

in

form certain South Arabian

proper names of the type Sumhu apika, His name is mighty, Sumhu-yada a, His name has determined, Sumhu-kariba, His name has blessed, Sumhu-watara,
is pre-eminent [Heb. "in^etc. the names of two of the kings of the Babylonian dynasty, c. 2100 B.C. (of South Arabian origin), Shumu-abi, Shumula-ilu, have been also explained similarly, viz. (Shumu being regarded as a con
:

His name

first

His name traction of Shumn-hu) Hommel, who first called attention to

85
f.,

is

my

father,

Is

not his

name God?
His

these resemblances (Anc. Heb. Trad., 1897,

99

f.),

interpreted these

names

in a monotheistic sense,
;

and understood

name

to be a periphrasis for

and compared many (Die ATliche Schatzung des Gottesnamens, 1901, pp. 103-113, 140-144), regards it, with much greater probability, as a periphrasis for the name of a god whom the The same view of giver of the name for some reason shrinks from mentioning. the Bab. names is taken by Winckler and Zimmern (see KAT.*, pp. 225, 483 f.,
with the references).

but Giesebrecht, who discussed the subject, names of similar formation, such as Ili-kariba, Abi-kariba,

God

And

all these scholars

is

regard

7fcOEJJ>

as formed similarly,
f.,

and

as

meaning

His name

God,

i.e.

(Giesebrecht, pp. 108

H2f.) the

name such
Ch.

as this has

no appreciable bearing upon the usage of the language

active participles, there occur the

in

historic times.
I

With

compounds
is

(lN!"POpB

9, 21. 26, i. 2. 9;

and the Aramaic

7X3rK>p

God
6,

a deliverer

Neh.

3,

al.,

and pNQtp nip

God

is

a benefactor

Neh.

10 (in Gen. 36, 39 the

name borne by the wife of an Edomite king). 1 Though more probably rvB* conceals the name of some Babylonian
see conjectures in Skinner s Genesis, p. 133;
3

deity

and the writer

s Genesis, p. 81.

The

VJ

marks

this

word

as a Babylonian formation:
in

cf.

?XK*. HO

in the
it

special sense
fell

husband

is

common

Ethiopic

in

Hebrew,

as a living language,

out of use, except in the plural.

/.

20-21
1

IQ

name

of the god in question (here niiT ) is itself a Divine manifestation, and possesses a Divine force and power (cf. Ex. 23, 21 13"lp2 capable of helping and protecting the child who bears it (cf. the use of D2* in ^. 20, 2.
""EG?

"O),

54, 3. Prov.
2.

8, 10: see further

on

this subject

DB.
it

In Heb., as in other Semitic languages,

or pet

v. 640 f.). seems that long names were

in

familiar use sometimes abbreviated,

tive,

names

arose.

and that in this way, hypocoristic, caritaThus names of the form H}$n (from rP3B>n), JfiT
$flBK>

(from PPyB>), to judge from modern (from iljyT), Cff?^ (from HJD^, Arabic names of the same form, and with the same force, are caritatives: there Semitische Kosenamen, in his Ephemeris, are also other types (Lidzbarski,
ii.

1-23

see p. 21).

Pratorius,

now (ZDMG.

1903, 773
1

ff.),

considers that these

names were Yah knows

known, short for [He whom] ), though afterwards phonetically modified, when it was felt that they were not really participles, but proper names. And Pratorius would extend this
originally passive participles (as

JHT

principle to the explanation of

:

?N1DB>,

and of some other names of the same

f

an abridged caritative of bNJJJ3S5^ formed type from the ptcp. JHD$, with loss of the final letter, but with preservation of the Divine name ; and he would explain similarly tWQn (i Ch. 4, 26) as for ptO^En
PN1OC>

he would regard

viz. as

from from

tatam

^SIDS
[cf.

(Joel
;

VT13B?
is,

HSQ^]

= *?$ nVlB = iwNjI 7N^K3

i,

i)

from

i>KTinB*

$>NB

^3B

explanation

names were
3.

really

however, purely conjectural formed by the process assumed.

:

from *?$$?, (p- 777 ff.). This we do not know that any of these

Jastrow (JBLit. 1900, p. 103

is

f.),

observing that in Ass. shiitmi, properly

name,

often virtually equivalent to offspring, esp. in proper names, as

Nabu-

shum-tikin, the offspring

Is. 14, 22.

Nabu
(cf.

has established an offspring, Bel-shum-usur, O Bel, protect DC* in Heb. in such expressions as cut off or wipe out the name,
establish the

Dt.

7, 24,

name,

2 S. 14,
),

though of course

in

these

expressions

DIP does not mean

offspring

supposes the meaning of 7N1E5P

to be son of God,

and that

it

is

the correlative of

7NMN

My

father

is

God.

But would D5^ express

this sense, except in a

connexion which shewed that the

name was thought of as attached to, and perpetuated by, the offspring ? Name of God, It may be doubted whether the objections to the explanation,

A name, unless there are good reasons for supposing it to have passed through considerable phonetic change, surely means what to all appearance it This may seems to mean. The obvious meaning of /KICK is Name of God.
are cogent.

very naturally have been understood to

mean

Bearing the

name

of

Noldeke,
after

EB. NAMES, 39, who compares AwoAAii v/tos, Apollo, Named after Hecate. For the omission of saying
8, 4.
cf.

"EKO.TUVV/JLOS

God cf. = Named

:

\3]

Gen.

4, 25.

32, 31. 41, 51. 52;

Ex.

vnWj
17, 5.
i

GK.
Used

44 d, 64*.
similarly

So
Gen.

v.

28

wni>Npn.

21. B*Nn]

19, 9.

Ex. n,

3.

Nu.

12, 3.

Jud.

Ki. ii, 28. Est. 9, 4.

c 2

2o

The First Book of Samuel,

see

D CTI DDT] the yearly sacrifice; of an annual family festival.

22.
X

on

i, 3.

So

2,

19: also 20, 6

J1

iy]

Cf. Jos. 6, 10. Jud. 16, 2

also II 10, 5 (Tenses,

115

s.v. ny).
"OS

DS]

w the presence
4, 6.

of,

as

2,

n.

17.

18

>//-.

16, 10.

21,

7-

140, 14; Lev.

17

(in

front of the veil).

for

Perhaps, however, the

original reading

was n$n

HN13, in which case

:

nx would be
on Ex.

the

ordinary sign of the accusative

or Dt.
23.
all
1 6,
1

see the writer s note

23, 15,

6,

Cheyne on

Is. I, 12,

Kirkpatrick on

\ty.

42, 2 [Heb. 3].

in

nil nx] LXX,

Pesh. express the second person Tp:n~nK

probability, rightly.

There has been no mention

:

in the

preceding
in so far

verses of

any word or promise on the part of God

and even

as it may be supposed to be involved in the wish expressed by Eli in v.iT, tnat has been fulfilled already in the birth of the child. Establish
i.e. give it effect, permit it to be carried out. "m D^pn is used especially of a person carrying out a command or injunction laid

thy word,

upon him,
14.

as

15, 13.

Jer. 35,
s,

16;
i

or of

Yahweh giving
Is.

effect

to

His own, or His prophet

word, as

Ki. 12, 15.

44. 26. Jer. 33,

LXX,

rendering TO le\6ov IK
see
;

ro\>

o-To/taros o-ov,

use the more

32, 24

formal expression:
1B>j?n

Nu.

30, 13

nTSt?
3.

K1D

i?3.

XWni

WSB.
jiB

Dt. 23, 24

also Dt. 8,
<h/

Jer. 17, 16.

24. TVth&

Dnan]
(see
is

LXX

povxy rpinl&vn, Pesh. Jk^oL Jioko

no doubt
correctly, for (i) the order
is

"123

Gen.

15, 9):
:

HBB>

DHQ

1 very unusual

(2)

only one IS

spoken of
:

in v. 25. in the
"",

The change

is

really only

older orthography Q

one in the grouping of letters for ia would be written regularly cna (without
final

and

without the distinctive

form of the

19

cf.

on the Siloam Inscription

O2Vnn
scriptio

D^snn

was not

furlher in the

also many indications that the plena MSS. used by the LXX translators. See For nnx with one term only of the Introduction).
;

there

are

in use in the

It is,

however, doubtful whether this argument should be here pressed

in
:

list

of different things, the substantives

7, 17.
:

may

stand
(In

first

for

emphasis (GK.
to

134)

cf.
1.

nearly always after* should be more often after: Herner, op. cit., pp. 58-59, gives more than three pages of instances in P with the numeral before the subst., and hardly half a page of cases with it after /)

Gen. 32, 15 f. (JE), Nu. 5, there is an oversight

23

etc. (P).

the footnote

GK.

134,
1

/.

21-28
after

21
/cat

enumeration

cf.

16, 20.

LXX

add
f.

W7WD

"1D1

aprots

Dr6l

probably (We.) from Ex. 29, 23

HDp]
tion
npjp.
:

may be

either in appos. to

see Tenses,

1^{J>]

DWp. Ex. 1 6, The correction 1^2

inxnm
9
b.
:

194; and cf. 32 19 -lE yn &6o,

is

nnN HD^X, GK. i3i d

etc.

or an accus. of limita

>P.

So Gen.

18, 6

B^B>

unnecessary
10, 26.
i2*>.

the

accus.

is

under

the influence of
10, 15. 43.
:

cf. v.

19.

15, 34. II 20, 3. Jos. 9, 6.

8,

Jud. 9,

5.

21,

njn njttm]

AV. RV. and

case.

the child

implies that

"iyj

as predicate expresses

was young. But this rendering more than it does as subject,

which cannot be the

lad

was a

lad.

It is

only be rendered and the in just possible that this might be understood
as meaning more about

The words can

accordance with the Semitic usage explained on 23, 13

the lad

was what he was

is

there

is

no occasion

to say

him

but the case

;

usage

and

this fact

barely parallel to the other examples of the about Samuel would be so obvious from the
it

narrative in general that

would scarcely deserve

It is
"ijJjfTi:

to

be made the
is

subject of a special remark.

error.

more

probable that the text

is

in

LXX
It

express
is

Ef>y

but this

tautologous, following

24

MT.

best to

read with Klo. Bu.

(LXX

eicr^A0ev) N3JR1

rroy nyjni

i^[2] mif rra.

icn^l] (We.) see on

25.
:

The
16, 4.

subject

is

not

Hannah and Elqanah,

but D^ntJJn

1N

av

i]

viz.

DWaon

(see the last note), the attendants of the temple,

Or we might read either with perhaps the same as D^DH^n. KSrn came with or N^Fn brought. here and Jud. 6, 13. 15. 13, 8. i Ki. 3, 17. 26 render 26. *l]

LXX

LXX

unintelligibly

by Ev e/W, elsewhere (Pent. Jos.) correctly by Aeo/xat, On this precative ^ (Gen. 43, 20 al), see Lex. io6 b
.

n] See on 17, 55.

so merely an orthographical variation for (here only) n Nu. 22, 33; nanx EX. 29, 35 1; naa EX. 3wt; 22, 30. 141, 8f; nab Gen. 27, 37. II 18, 22. Is. 3, 6t.

^V

nafis Ex. 15, ii

7,

?*

29. II

\IT.

^N] with reference to, regarding (not_/or); as Is. 37, 21. 33. 28 a lajN DJi] et ego vicissim, Job 7, (Th. from Le Clerc), cf. ch. 28, 22 II 12, 13. The so-called D3 correlativum. (Lex. i69 b 4.)
(
.

22
HTl
. . .

The First Book of Samuel,

nirV9]

The

first of the

two zaqefs always marks the greater

break (GK.

m i5 ),

as indeed the sense frequently shews;

comp.

2, 14.
i.

mrr^ liTTl^KPn] ^ grant him his request

WH
:

is to let

a person ask
let

(viz. successfully),

e. to

lit.,

therefore,
to)

(one) ask
12,

him

for Y. == let

him be asked
ask in
3, 22.

for (lent

him

Y.

So Ex.

36 (the correlative of
;

u,

2,

as of the

same word here

in vv. 17. 27
2

for

bx&

asA in the sense of borrow, see also Ex. 22, 13.

Ki. 4, 3

*).

In the

cognate languages, however, the word by usage acquires definitely the sense of lend: see Luke u, 5 Pesh., where ^.i,.^,)^^ stands for
the Greek xprja-ov
Jl
2

/AOI

D^TT^D]
as

all

the days for which he shall be (Vulg. fuerit ; the

:

fut. perf.,
(lit.

asked

Gen. 48, 6 for) Yahweh.

n
Gen.

Tenses,
It
is

17

GK.

106), he

is

granted to
read,

probable that for .TH

we should
to

with

LXX,

Pesh. Targ. (though these, as AV.,

(cf.

may
is

indeed merely

paraphrase),

5, 5);

but in any case Nin

be construed

with what follows, not (as by

rniT b
^1NK>

htf^]

LXX) with what precedes. asked (borrowed) for (= lent to) Yahweh
:

cf. 2

Ki. 6, 5

NIDI
.

28 b

(= borrowed} The last words of v. 28 must be dealt with

.

in

connexion with

2,

na
2,

LXX
(KCU

do not express
KO.TfXt.Trev

i,

28 b
6/cei

on the other hand they have

evwTrtov
K.vpt.ov,

in
eis

ll a

avrov

Kal

a.7rfjX6ev

Apfji.a6ai.fji)

an addition to MT., which looks

i,

like
.

a various recension
texts
:

of the words not expressed by them in

28 b

The two
is

may

be

compared, by placing one above the other, as

done by We.

MT.

irrn-^y

nnoin

rup^N

1^1
sjbni

mn^
nin^

DP

LXX
1

nnmn

igb DP
For
in

In the light of the context,

LXX

deserves the preference.

are to borrow

As Bu.

aptly remarks,

7XP

and

T NPJI

and

lend, as a trans
in

action between friends, nip and

sense.
2

nvH
is

are to borrow

and lend

a commercial

Cf. Sir. 46, 13

Heb.

(the clause

not in the Greek text)

^XIPOH

(rd. the

Hof. ptcp.
3

bPn) 1K
asker
(viz.

fB3:

Syr.

oaoi? J^ota

^.ao

^Ifcs^l?

^ao.

Jastrow (JBLit. xix, 1900, p. 100) supposes

p^p"

TNPil

to be a denominative

from

of the Divine will,

a function of the pries f), and would

:

render accordingly,
filiTQ

have made him an asker (priest) to Yahweh

but though

PKP

is

often said (e.g. ch. 22, 10),

is it

the priest, nor

never occurs as a designation of throughout this narrative used of Samuel.

7$W

/.

2811.

23

MT. Hannah
(vv.

alone
so
v.

is

24-28*:
a
)

22

mentioned as coming up with Samuel to Shiloh thou ); when the account of the I, v. 23
as the subject of inrWI,

visit is

ended, an
i i

unnamed he appears
resolved into Elqanah.

who

finally (2,

is

Had

the conception of the writer,

been present
for

at this visit to Shiloh,

Elqanah, according to he
earlier stage of the

would assuredly have been named

narrative.

explicitly at

an

There

is

the less

ground

supposing that

LXX
is

altered

arbitrarily the

genders
v.

at the end, as in their text

introduced in

24;

so that the masc. in

v.

Elqanah 28, had the

already

translators

had innyi before them, would have occasioned no

given no occasion
probability that
for

difficulty,
is

and

a change.

On

these grounds there

a strong
Pesh.

LXX

have here preserved the original

text.

Vulg. render innt^l by a plural verb (as though the reading were b where the Tinn^M punctuators direct comp. Gen. 27, 29. 43, 28
:

innii"

be read as a plur.) ; Klo. suggests that may be a mutilated but neither of the remedies relieves the real of ^N1E fragment
1

to

D>

difficulty

of

MT.,
is

that only

Hannah

is

mentioned (not

allusively

merely, but circumstantially) as

coming up

to Shiloh with Samuel,

and

only Elqanah
If
it

be true that

that

Hannah s 1 2, i-io. Hannah s Song The figure i. PilDl]

.
""Jlp

as returning from Shiloh to Ramah. (2, n) MT. is but a variant of 2, i i a LXX, it will follow Song is inserted in MT. and LXX in a different place.

mentioned
i,

28 b

is

that of

an animal carrying
:

its

head
;

high,

and proudly conscious of

if/.

its

strength
al.

cf.

\j/.

92,

1 1.

112, 9

and

(in the Hifil) v. 10.

75, 5. 6. 89, 18

On

the contrary, Jer. 48,

25,

awe pp

nym
27 MSS., and

nirrn (2)]

some Rabb.
l|

quotations, ap. Aptowitzer, I

(see List of Abbreviations), p. 37,

pK?

so

LXX,
is

Vulg., and

moderns
:

generally.
$. 3,
"3

The
1

variation in the parallel clause

Is.

an improvement
to have read
:

cf.

8.

8, 7*.

40, 27^.

Tltf hy

nm]

49 5 b. For these words

,

LXX

seem

2m

the thought hfj which may be preferable (We. Now. Hpt.) *nn?2ty is rather parallel to clause c (cf. a), than the ground jnjJ1&"3 of it. Bu. Sm. prefer MT. For the figure *a am, cf. ^. 35, 21. Is.

TIN

See on this Song,

in addition to the

Commentaries, P. Haupt

learned and

interesting study,

The Prototype

of the Magnificat, in

ZDMG.

1904, pp. 617-632.

24
57, 4

The First Book of Samuel,

a gesture of derision

the tone (nrn, mil

s

and contempt. For the retrocession of f cf. 4 nw, 8 el), *pp and see GK. 29*. 2] nyiB* means here deliverance, help: see on 14, 45. 2. *]n^3 px 13] The clause gives an insufficient reason for BYlp pX iTiT:), besides destroying the parallelism, and (by the second person)
;

"|nyit?

being out of connexion with

C place, viz. after 2 .

2a

and

2C;

in

LXX also
it is

it is

in

a different

Upon
2a

these grounds
or,

probably

to

be regarded
*3

as a gloss (Lo.

Now. Dhorme),
1 8.

in the

form *]r63 ETlp pN

(LXX), as a
-nv]

variant of

(Bu. Hpt.).

Cf. Dt. 32, 4. 15.

is

37
18,

Is.

30, 29
Is.

ch. 23,

3;

and (where

the thought also

3.
1"i2*in

similar)

i//-.

32

44, 8.
first

"DID

7X]

The two verbs

do-wSerw9, the

verb expressing

a general relation, for which in English an adverb would

used,

commonly be

and the second, expressing

subordinated
to
its

the principal idea of the sentence,

for
:

being

the

first

the

limiting the range of

lowliness, sit

application

so Jer. 13,

purpose of defining and 1 8 shew

"Qt?

li>*BB71

down
N!>;

sit
5,

down

CmK

"liy

PpDIX

i, 6 lowly, and frequently in Hosea iKin &z/A /& upon himself, hath *]^n
:

walked

= hath

walked willingly;

6,

4=

13,

"jb

n D OE B;
285* ).
in

9,

innP Ip^Byn; Is. 7, idiom more common

In

MT.

etc.

(GK.
on

i2os; Ew.

An

in Syriac (Nold. Syr.

i,

Gr.
12
is

337) than

Hebrew.

Hebrew

the construction noticed

generally preferred.

nrQ3 nroa]
in the

The
(and
not

reduplication, as Dt.

2,

27

"]Tn

T^a
Qoh.

/^

?fay,

way

(and not elsewhere) will I go;

this alone) shalt

16, 20 f]Tin plV pIX

7,

justice, justice

thou follow;

24 (GK.

i33

k
).

Do

let

your words breathe ever (U~tn), and emphatically

But the line is unduly long, as (nma nnaa), a spirit of haughtiness. b and the word may have been accidentally repeated. compared with 3 X J1 NY ] Clause b, though not attached to a by 1, is governed by bs
;
1

at the

beginning
,
tfi>

so
3,

i/r.

35, 19. 75, 6,

}a
i/^.

and with S^

b $. 9, 19. Is. 23, 4

a 38, i8

HD^ Job

u,

13, 5

comp. GK.

i^.

The

person
!?K

of the verb here changes in the second clause, and the repetition of (Hpt.) would certainly be an improvement.
1

Comp.
1,13".
;

similarly

after

\]&?
^.

if/.

10,

i.

44, 25.

74,

i.

88, 15.

Is. 63,

17*.

Hb.

Job

10, 18;

HD M?

10,13;

HE ny
106,

79, 5 (nearly
is.

89,47); TIB ny

74, 10

run ny

62, 4; ^B 89, 7 (cf. 49).

2.

42, 23.

//.

7-7
See
Z<?.r.

25
80 i a
Is.
.

pny] ^. 75, 6

also 31, 19.

94, 4t.
Pr.

m$n] So job 36, 4: cf. HMOS Is. 40, 14 al. nicon ^. 49, 4 al.
;

28,20;
i/r.

nm

27,

nunn
Poetic,

mn

76, ii. Pr. 22, 24.

amplificative plurals

m^y
nounced

(GK. i24 ). unro xh] Read with the Qr

alike,

171. Js^ and l!?, being pro were sometimes in error written one for the other and
:

in certain cases

(though not always) the correction was

made by
Ez. 45,
1

the

Massorah
mated

(see

Lex. 52O b ).

And by Him

actions are tested or esti

5, 18.

(viz.

by the application of a measure, f^, Ex.

1);

for 7, as introducing the efficient cause with a passive verb, see Lex. i2i f /cat #os 5i4 d , GK. eToi/Aa^wv would correspond no
.

LXX
)

doubt
is

(cf.

4 Ki. 12,

1 1

to

simply a free one

it

if

\^ pn
is

/$}

but in

all

probability the rendering

here,
it

i>X1

had once stood

is

difficult

to

understand why
Dfap
f3hi

should have been changed to uariJ

applied to
it is

171.

The

epithet

estimater of hearts
\3F\

Yahweh

in Pr. 21, 2. 24, i2f,

actions are estimated
:

and rrinn

H. 16, 2t; here

is
:

said that

man s

by Him.
has
full

The argument

Do

not speak arrogantly

for Yahweh
all

knowledge of what you do, and your actions are thus

in

appraised by Him.
4.

B^D]

principal idea,

the pi. by attraction to DH12J, because this is the and what the poet desires to express is not so much that
Cf. Is. 21, 17.

the bows, as that the warriors themselves, are broken.

Zech.

8,

10

and Ew.
te>2;

3i7

d
,

GK.

i46

a.

Ehrlich, however, suggests

Is. 20, 5.

cleverly

ton Dnaj

the two verbs parallel, as

37, 27

al.

^n
X

nrx] ^. 18, 33
J1
*1J?]
lit.

^n nTKon

fon.

5.

even to the barren

she beareth seven

= even
lo,

the

barren beareth seven.

to the

iy recurs in the same sense Job 25, 5

even

moon,

it

doth not shine.

Foriy ^jn (^in

}?"]

absol. as Dt. 15,

cease to
toil,

u),

Reifm. Klo. Bu. Now. Kitt. would read *^y.

rightly.

probably

The

v.

is

evidently related to Jer.

1 5,

9 ny:K?n

rnTP

n^EN

though which is original cannot from a mere comparison of the two passages be determined.
6a
.

Dt. 32,39 rvriNi rvox

JN: 6 b . ^. 30,4.
\fr.

Pyi] continuing the ptcp., as

34, 8. 65, 9 etc.

Tenses,

80, 117

GK.
7.

inu,

ii 6^ (end).
be

^TiD] To

poor

is

WFi-, so

we should expect

^19

Bn* (Qal)

26

The First Book of Samuel,

in Jud. 14, 5
;

means, however, to impoverish

in

and Knfa

to be impoverished

Gen. 45,

al.

(Lex. 439
#">

b
);

so

contamination of signification

through confusion with

may

be suspected
,

(Moore, Judges,

p. 337).

DEIIE
a

f]H

^2B>]

for this poet, use of f|N

"ipnp

introducing emphatically
65, 14
S)

new
;

thought,

cf.

Dt. 33, 20

f]X

ynr spui. ^.

VW
8a
is
.

and often
Cf.

in II Isaiah, as 42, 13
.

mv
f.

f|N

yn\

43, 7

vjVB>y.

Zo;. 64 b
of

Hence

(with variations)

\^.

113, 7

the

mound

dung and other

rubbish,

The now

nDK>K

(cf.

Lam.

4,

5)

called a mezbele, or

place of dung, which accumulates outside an eastern town or village,

and on which beggars

often sleep.

Davidson
division

sit, asking alms of passers-by, and, by night, See Wetzstein in Delitzsch s Hiob (on 2, 8), quoted in Job (in the Camb. Bible, p. 14). In clause a the main

is

at

}V3N

(cf.

on

i,

28): the two clauses which follow are

1

parallel, the force of

cbnv
to

.....

being dependent on, and deter

to
sit

mined

by, ywirb,
to]

make them

(=
45,

and
r.

cause them to inherit,

5, 2 al.
:

etc.

So

with nobles, 2 b. Is.

10,

and
b.

he will
14, 25.

13, 9
.

\l/.

105, 22. Pr.

cf.

Tenses,

118;

GK.

ii4 r

8 b.

I. e.

because the earth

will.

is

owned by Yahweh, and He can dispose

,

of

it,

as

He

LXX,

b however, omits 8 and in

/ecu

lieu of 9* reads

evXoyrjcrfv

try SIKCUOV

= ^1?

"H3p

fri3

Apparently

this variation represents

an attempt

to

accommodate

the
it is

Song more
not in

closely to

Hannah

position.

But, as

We. remarks,

harmony

with the general tenor of the

Song

(which represents God as granting more than the desires or expecta tions of His worshippers).

8.
to

pVtt]

pour from p!P, Job 41,

9.
1DB"

out, melt, cast,

Only here if correct, from and so something

:

ptt (Job 28,

cast firm

2.

29, 6)

= pJP,
P^
,

and hard

(cf.

15.

1 6,

and p3ND Job 38,

38),

i.e.

a metal pillar. b^fQ.

VTDH ^n]

Ehrlich, cleverly, (Neh. 9,

12)1^ VTDn

This, of 9 b
figure

it

is

& true, brings the figure of g into logical antithesis with that
is

but the idea of 9 a

antithetic to that of 9 b (apart

from the

by which it is expressed) in MT., and with that the poet may have been satisfied. On QH^DH godly (properly, kind} see the writer s
Parallel Psalter, p. 443
f.

ion*] Cf. Jer. 49, 26. 50,

30

also (in Qal)

^.31,18

II.

j-io
acrdfvr) Trot^crei

27
TOV dvriSiKOv avrov,

IO.

I^IO
4
a
)

IDn"

!Tl!*r]
(

LXX
c f.

Kvpios

i.e. (cf.

tano nnj
here.

Is. 9, 3) for

uno wm,
is at

which Th. We. Klo.

not a necessary one
is
;

would restore

But the change

197. 2
;

least

the casus pendens (Tenses,

GK.

143*)
3.

forcible
Is.

and very

idiomatic: see
existing
text

i/r.

10, 5.

n,
1
f.

4.

46,5. 89,

90, 10.

34, 3.

The

of

LXX
23

after this

clause exhibits

long

insertion

borrowed from

Jer. 9,

DJTV tfBBQ ^y] Cf. +.

retained)
is

8, 14.

The

suffix

in

by

(if

MT.nno

is

to

be referred to individual members of the class V3HD,

whom

the poet, for the

moment, mentally

particularizes.

There are
.

many such cases in Heb. poetry, e.g. Jer. 9, 7. 10, 4. 16, 6 b 31, 15 end (wa; ? rM3 h; onan naxp). job 18, 5. 21, 19-21. 30. ^. 7, 3
.

17,

if.
.

35,

7 f

41, 6f. 84, 8:

see further

on

II

24,
the
;

13;

GK.

M5 m
in

Now. Hpt. would read Djnj D CSPS 1% heaven [but D^DtJ D /hwz heaven would be better
Bu.

Most High on the inter

(ij/.

change of 1 and

see Introd.

4.

i
*

c
\

b y] will

raz

2, 9).

ry

;)v]
i.e.,

^. 29,

//

jrv

tt>yV

ry

D~l^]

as pointed, that he
D"W

may

exalt.

But the sense

174.

is

forced:

and probably 137] So j^.

rate,

should be read.
;

Cf. Tenses,

1 8, 51 It is plain that this verse, at any ^3/D i/r. 2, 6. cannot have been spoken by Hannah, even granting that the

allusion

is to

the ideal king.

The

ideal

itself,

in a case like the pre

sent, presupposes the actual (notice especially the

expression His

anointed};

risen to the conception of

and the thoughts of the prophets of Israel can only have an ideal king after they had witnessed the

establishment of the

monarchy
is

in their midst.

however, the reference

to the actual king.

And

Far more probably, indeed in style and

tone the Song throughout bears the marks of a later age than that of

Hannah.
one
to
in

prominence given and contrast in this respect bows of the mighty are broken the Magnificat (Luke i, 46-55), where though elements are borrowed from this Song, they are subordinated to the plan of the whole, and
:

Nor do the thoughts appear as the Hannah s position observe, for instance,
:

natural expression of
the

the

the

first

thought, after the opening expression of thankfulness,

is

For

Comp.

the insertion in
\f>.

14, 3

LXX

from Romans

3,

13-18.

28

The First Book of Samuel,

hath regarded the lowliness of His handmaiden? The presence of here does not prove more than that it was attributed to Song
at

He
the

Hannah

the time

when

the

Books of Samuel were compiled:

indeed, as

its

position in

LXX

and

MT.
still.

is

not the same,

its

insertion

may even belong

nize that
its

to a later period

sober criticism, while not

asserting categorically that the

specific

Song cannot be by Hannah, will recog character and contents point to an occasion of a

different kind

as that
is

upon which

it

thought of the Song

the abasement of the lofty

was composed. The central and the elevation of

and
well-

the lowly, which the poet illustrates in a series of studied

balanced contrasts, vv. 4-8.

which, as
it

On

the

ground of some humiliation

v. i in

seems, has recently befallen his foes, he breaks out

a tone of triumphant exultation, and bids those whose sole thought

was how

to

magnify

their

own importance

recollect that

God

s all-seeing

He points vv, 4-8 to the instances eye was ever upon them, v. 3. which experience affords of the proud being abased, and the humble The poem ends vv. 9-10 with an expression of confidence exalted.
for the future.
set

Human
to ruin

strength

is

no guarantee of success.

Such as

themselves in opposition to

Yahweh and

seek to thwart His pur

are secure.

poses only

come

those devoted to

Him
was

Yahweh

judges the earth,

and

in so

doing designs the triumph of His

last

own
,

anointed

king.
is is

From
a king,

the

words

it

inferred

1 by Ewald

that the poet

who

alludes to himself in the third person.

;

But the tone

right in

national rather than individual

it

and Smend

supposing

to

have been spoken originally in the

s

may be name of the

people, and intended to depict Israel

the ungodly.

triumph over the heathen and

na
i?y]

Read
Several

with

LXX

nrurjn

!JJPrt;

and connect with

i,

28*, as

shewn on

p. 22.

MSS.
rvn]

read ^N.

See, however,

on

i,

10.

nb
6,

m!?E>

was ministering
is

(at the time in question, and with

cf.

which the narrative

8:
Tenses,
.

about to deal):
Cf.

Gen. 37,

2.

Ex.

3, i.

Ki.

135. 5.
4, 2O.

LXX

II, 14.

13, IO.

i, r/v XcLrovpywv ; Acts I, 14. IO, 24. 12, 2O

Luke

10 ty
etc.

Die Dichter

des Alien Bundes,

p.

I.

(1866), p. 157

ff.

ZATW.

1888,

144.

//.

io-i4

29

13-14. Is what
or a rightful due
?

is

described here an abuse on the part of the priests,

V.
1

f.

clearly describe

an abuse
1

and

DJ at the

beginning, which expresses a climax, shews that v. an abuse likewise (We.). therefore, in
13BB>D,

f.

must describe
will

MT.
And

denote

merely custom, not right, and the clause will read,

the priests with the priests (was this)
all
1
:

the

custom of

since Th., however, practically

in

Commentators (including even Keil) have followed LXX, Vulg.

a

joining i3

to

12**,

and in reading with

LXX
i,

(Trapa.

rov Xaov), for

Dyn nx D^mn, &yn nxi? [nan ( c f. on Heb. MSS. also read JiKD, but with the

24

Pesh. Targ. and 9

pi.

D Omn):

they

knew not

Yahweh,
people
:

or the right

(i.

e.

the rightful due) of the priest

from

the

comp. esp. Dt. 18, 3

TQT DXD

DJT1

DXE EWmn

D2E>>

.TiT HT1

mm.
It is objected by Ehrlich to this view, that when the first of two or more nouns has fix, all must have it, so that 31 DDtJ JD DX! would be needed here. It is but there are true, this is the general rule (e.g. Ex. 35, 10-19. Jos. 21, 13-18) exceptions to it not only Ex. 24, 12 (where the 1 of ni^Eil rmnni is explained
:
1

a by Ehrlich as the 1 of concomitance \_Lex. 253 ]), but also Ex. 12, 28 [18 MSS. and Sam. pHX DX!], 32, 2. i S. 7, 3 (text dub.). 8, 14. 18, 4b [?rd. VlODl and Ehrl.]. II 19, 6. i Ki. i, 10 [10 MSS. DX1]. 44. 10,4. 15, 15. 2 Ki. 10, II
;

1890, p. 220), i Ch. i, 32. 2, 13-15. 8, i. Ezr. 9, 3. Neh. 9, 6. Possibly there are other instances but these, even disregarding the textually doubtful ones, seem sufficient to shew that the rule, though observed
in later

Hebrew

(A.

M. Wilson, Hebraica,

generally,
31

was not

absolute.
f|OT
is

t^X ^3] The constr. is unusual. ptcp. absolute (cf. Gen. 4,15. II 23,

to

3.

Prov. 23, 24.

be regarded as a Job 41, 18

sacrificed, etc. (see
pf.

MT.),

all

GK.

men u6 w
,

sacrificing

if,

or whenever, a
is

man

159*); the pred.

1 1
, ,

then introduced by the

and

waw
DX

conv. N21

(GK.

2),
,

precisely as, in
11

an analogous case,
.

after

(Gen. 31, 8
to bear
.
. .

n^l
:

ION DX
123/3,

if ever he said

then the flock used

5>3

Tenses,

GK.

i59

v
).

In other words, t^X

PQT

mr

is

the syntactical equivalent of POT

if

ran DX t^X.

The
:

constr.

would be more normal,

19,

^x
is

^3 were preceded by

iTTil

see Jud.

30; Ex. 33,

7!).

The
1

implicit subject

yKbpri

see

on

16, 4,

and comp. 11,2.

cf.
1

Though we should
2. 19, 4.
i

rather in this case expect

;

DD?i>>

Hf!

"H"

Dt. 15,

Ki. 9, 15

Nu.

8,

, ,

flfetyD nil.

Ki.

7, 28.

30

The First Book of Samuel,

Is. 10, 14.

So, after a 3 of comparison, Jud. 14, 6. 2 S. 3, 24.

12, 10.

Zech.

13, 9.
jVtDTtt]
lit.

D OPn P^P
sition (Tenses,
cf.

//fc

prong, the three

teeth

a case of appo
:

188;

GK.

131).

E^f* (not npjjp), JP being fem.

e&K>

D^yn P^f Nu.

35, 14; D^tfn

Lev. 25,21.
is

To
;

be sure, in
it

14, 5 }P in the metaph. sense of a pointed rock

masc.

whether
.

was
If
it

also in that of the tooth of a prong,

is

more than we can say 2

aS>TfTi,

was, we must read

either

JBTI

HP^P

or (We.)

npi>P

i4f. Observe

how

in these verses the tenses are

1

throughout

fre-

quentatives (continuing

3 X2i).
:

ll] can only be rendered therewith

the Versions express the sense

"6

for himself, which

is

more

suitable, but requires

for 13.

r^P3 DP]
15.
}1"lt3p\j

Tautologous.

LXX

for

DP

express WJf^
pi.

The

is

the original termination of 3

impf. pre

served in classical Arabic (in the indicative mood), Aramaic (usually),

Ethiopic, Phoenician
3
.

In the

OT.

it

occurs sporadically (305 times altogether), though the

its

principle regulating

occurrence

is

difficult to

determine.

It is not

mark of

antiquity, for,
it

though

it

occurs seldom in the latest books,

those in which

occurs with greatest comparative frequency are not

in Dt.,

(upon any view) the most ancient (56 times

1-2 Kings, 23 in Job, 12
Psalm, 104).
sections (e.g. Gen. 18,
in Genesis,
it

37

in Isaiah, 15 in

Further, while

Numbers, 15 in a single sometimes abounds in particular

7 in
2,

28-32

Joel

4-9),

it

is

absent from others

(e. g.

belonging to the
in the

same

narrative, or of a similar character

in the

9 times
its

Laws, Ex. 20-23, never

Laws, Lev. 17-26).

From

frequency in Dt., Job, the Book of Isaiah, and some of the Psalms, it may be inferred that it was felt to be a fuller, more emphatic form
in a sacrificial inscription of Cos {Journ. Paton and Hicks, Inscriptions of Cos, 1891, p. 82) and the Tpiw&o\ov, which according to Eustathius on //. i. 463 (ib. p. 327) was preferred by the Greeks as a sacrificial implement to the irf^7ru0o\ov. (nap-now in
1

Cf. the 6@f\os

Tpiti>\ios,

mentioned

of Hellenic Studies,

ix.

335

the same inscr., see p. 336, illustrates the use of Kafmcvais,

2

6\otcdpnaj<ns

in-

LXX.)

If Albrecht s explanation
is correct, it

(ZAW.

1896, p. 76, see p. 60) of JP in 14, 5 being

masc.
3

would not follow

33, 6.

for

|P here.

Cooke, NSI.

5, 22.

//.

14-16

31

than that in ordinary use, and hence was sometimes preferred in an

elevated or rhetorical style.

In
:

Sam.

it

occurs 8 times

2,

15. 16.

22 (to). 23. 9, 13 (to), ii, 9 tive, but in the Psalm 22, 39.
"Itip ,

in 2

Sam. once

only, not in the narra

destroy (which

though rendered conventionally burn, does not mean to burn so as to cf. the Greek is fjlb ), but to cause to become sweet smoke (J"Qbp
:

comp. the Arab, qatara (of meat), to exhale odour in roasting. The word is always used of burning either a sacrificial offering (Lev. i, 9 etc.) or incense and would be better rendered, for distinctness, as in Driver and (Ex. 30, 7)
Kv iarf)
:

White
In

Leviticus (in Haupt s Sacred Books of the OT.\ consume in sweet smoke. (always) and Chr. (mostly) the verb is used in the Hif il ; but in the older
s
;

language the Pi el is usual (e.g. Amos 4, 5) and probably both here and in v. 16 s we should vocalize f a very (notice in v. 16 "ItDp; [Vltpj?^ *^P is
|V"lt2j3

anomalous type; GK.

N21]

113",

second sentence).

larly after

The pf. with waw conv. appears simi rightly T^CTO. D103, though of reiteration in present time, in Ex. i, i9 b before the midwife comes to them Vv*1 they are wont to bear.
1

LXX

1 6.

"IDN

)]

This should

strictly
:

be

"^?$,

in accordance with the

other tenses before

and

after

but

Hebrew

is

sometimes negligent in
;

such cases to maintain the frequentative tense throughout

12, 5f.
;

see Jud.

Jer. 6,

17; and Tenses,

114.

scribal error for

1DN1 (so

GK.

H2

11
;

However, IDNM might be a Smith s "lEWI is against the

usage of Heb. prose).

33nn DV3 piTBp

(then) take,
etc.

11

"lBp]

The

Let them burn (emph.) the fat first, and inf. abs. strengthens the verb in a manner
in
is

which may often be represented In 3V3, the consciousness of DV

our idiom by the use of

lost,

italics.

and

it

is

used as a mere

adverb of time, especially to express the present lime, as contrasted

with the future,
i.e. (in

our idiom) first of all, first.

sell

So Gen.

25, 31

imi33
Yahweh.
jt?a:

JIN

DV3

m3O
i

me first

(before I give thee the pottage)

thy birthright, 33.

Ki. 22, 5 inquire, I pray, first at the

s.v.,

word of

See Ges. Thes.

*1B>S3]

Lex. 409^11, and We.

p.

37

note.

rnxn
i

Similarly II 3, 21 -jpaj
al.

mxn
el),

IK>N

^33, Dt. 12,

subst. njN

20. 14, 26.

Ki. ii, 37

Both

rijx

(in Pi

and the
tj>aa.

(23, 20), are rarely used except in conjunction with

jnn nny
it

ib

ICSl]

And

he would say to him,

"

Thou

shalt give

me

now."

With

this reading, 13,

standing before the direct narra

4, 21),

tion, is like

on

recitativum (e.g.

Luke

and

^1, ? (constantly),

32

The First Book of Samuel,

:

and cannot be represented

so in English except by inverted commas Gen. 29, 33. Jos. 2, 24. i Ki. i, 13. 2 Ki. 8, 13 al. The 10, 19 Qr and 17 MSS., however, for i? read tib (so LXX) And he would

MT.
;

say,

No

for

(=

but) thou shalt give

pointed,

it

now

(cf. 12,

12

II 16, 18

al.).

The

latter is

more
;

and deserves the preference.

*.

Targ. here

agrees with

MT.
:

Pesh. Vulg. express loth readings

is

Tinp5]
Tenses,
17.
jl

The
136 y
1VNJ

bare perf. in the apod,

uncommon and
it

emphatic
!

Nu. 32, 23.

for the

And

if

not, I take

by force

Nu.

1 6,

30^

"S]

men

(viz. Eli s

sons) contemned/ etc.

see
art.}

n?Kn D^JXn 1NJ

a.

O WNn (with the

denotes

Ex.

men who have been in some manner specified (e.g. 6, 10. not men in general. 1 8. 1181, and on v. 33. nyj] accus., as a youth, etc.: see GK. *tt TiDN] for the constr. in the accus. after T)jn, see GK. i2i d and cf. 17, 5. On the ephod see DB. (Driver), EB. (Moore), and
5, 9),
;

the writer

Exodus
, . ,

(1911), p. 312

f.

19. nnpyni

ntJ>yn]

used to
INI.

make
and

and bring up
i,

Gen.

2,

noiKn os ^n nx nppm npy

20. laivri
.
.
.

nnsTi rat, as
Eli

21

cf.
.
.

on
.,

i, 3.

-|DK1

"p2l]

KW#/</

bless

and say

and they would go

1

to his place.

D5?"

LXX

airoTLo-ai, i.e.

D?B^
cf.

/a^
Gen.

^<?od/.-

cf.

Ex. 21, 36 (likewise

7.

followed by nnn).
I

With

MT.
on

4,

25 (n^). 45,

NB ]

Difficult syntactically.
,>N$n

As
is

the text stands, the subj. can be

only the implicit

(see

16, 4)

which he that asked asked

which was asked

but the passage

not one in which this impersonal

Either, with We.,

construction would be naturally in place.

point as a ptcp. pass.

we must

ad sensum,
is

the

?N^ asked for = lent to (see i, 28: the masc. n?S^ being Samuel), or we must suppose that
(

i>N{5>

an error
).

for n ?^^

in lieu

of the petition which she asked

better sense,
i

for

Yahweh
ptcp.
is

The former gives the

though

"T&R

with a bare

not very

common

(Dt. i, 4.

Ki. 5, 13).

If the latter

be

right,

Similar variations occur in other passages:

;

thus Jos. 5, 14

MT.
1^5
;

Vulg. Targ.
Pesh. both.

J<b

LXX,

Pesh.

&

Ki. 11, 22

MT.

Vulg. Targ. tib;

LXX

Cf. on v. 3.
2

Inadvertently quoted by Jastrow (JBLit. 1900, p. 87)

this to

asked

of.

Of

course

do not suppose

be the meaning of P 7 KB

//.

16-22
?$W
to

33
be played upon
27 was
also
:

we must suppose
petition

the double reference of

<9/"Yahweh

the

which was asked

in i, 17.

Him.

The Versions merely

:

guess

LXX,

Pesh. Vulg.

asked/br which thou

didst lend, unsuitably

Targ. very

freely

which was asked from before

Yahweh.

Bu. Sm. Now. Kit. Dh. read

yMpn, rendering,
unto Yahweh;
iv.
i

in return
cf.

for the loan (so

Loan

for

nW maybe
they

EVV.), which she hath

cf.

lent

i,

28.

lEIpE^ 13^11]

Hebrew
DElpD^.
is

style.

4008. 49 ; right: would go to his place is not in accordance with LXX lOlpo^ S^KH 12 MSS. and Pesh. l^ni
"]^T1
:

NHWB.

PS.

col.

Either of these readings

"pill

may be
to

right in concluding 1D1pE7

but probably We. original be the original reading in MT.

: :

the verb

was read

as a plur.

a singular, and supplied

21.

and so became tt?m, the man.

:

LXX

treated

it

as

Ipa

^3] obviously

cannot be right

the fact that

is

Yahweh

visited

Hannah cannot form

with

the

ground of what
implicitly):

related in v. 20.

Read,

LXX,
:

Pesh. (and
e.g. Is. 39,

AV.
ib

"lp?!l.

3 and

are confused

elsewhere

jjB^i, for which

y>

LXX,

Pesh. and the parallel

in 2 Ki. 20, 12 have rightly

13;

and

Jer. 37,

16 where Nl

*3 is

evidently an error for Nyi (LXX K al ^X6ev). Dy] i.e. at His sanctuary: cf. Dt. 22, 2, and Lex. 768 3. 22. yt?i] as i, 3 and he heard from time to time (Dr. Weir).
"

D twn ns] See Ex. 38, 8. The entire clause (from I^N riNl) is not found in LXX, and is probably not part of the original text (the context speaks of a P3T1 with doors, not of an ?riN i, 9. 3, 3. 15).
J1
:

niN3Xn, both here and in Ex.,

is

paraphrased

in

Targ. Pesh. who

prayed (or who came Ex. quae excubabant.

legislation of the

to

pray] Vulg. renders here quae observabant, in But xnV is used often peculiarly in the ritual
:

Pent,

(the

Priests
;

Code

of the service of the

Levites about the

Tent of Meeting

and Ex. 38, 8 and here expresses

In the fragments of

the performance of menial duties

by the women.

Targum published by Lagarde (Prophetae Chaldatce, 1872, p. xiv) from the margin of the Cod. Reuchl., there appears an endeavour to
palliate the sin of Eli s

sons (as described in the existing

"oznp

Hebrew

text)

r6xb friNi fTanon NVJ women s offerings). Comp.

in the
1365

iv jntron

rn
the

[i]ns [~I]BD (delayed the

to the Prophets,

Bacher,

On

Targum

ZDMG.

1874,

p. 23.

34

The First Book of Samuel,

K] the Tent of Meeting. The sense in which nyiD was understood is explained in Ex. 25, 22. 29, 42.
23.
31
"itPN]

for
from

that, in that (15, 15.

etc.

of you (as)

evil,

20, 42) I hear the accounts D lyi, not D jnn, like njn Dnm Gen. 37, 2;
11

njn pNPl
predicate).

nm

Nu.

14,

But

LXX

37; NDD Dcr6 I^N Ezek. 4, 13 (a do not express the words the sense
;

tertiary
is

clear

without them;

and they may have been originally (Lo. Bu. Now.) In this case, of a marginal gloss (without nx) on n^Nil DHT13. will mean simply which. Otherwise njn DaniHTiK course, IPX
(Gen. 37,2) might well have stood here (Ehrlich), and would yield an
excellent sense.

r&N Dyn ^D J1ND]

from

all

the people,

(even) these.

An un

Dyn 73 DNO, as uniformly Why paralleled juxtaposition. LXX have TTCXVTOS TOV Xaov Kvpiov, whence We., remark elsewhere ?
not ing that in a later time
2

HM

DVPN was

apt to be substituted for niiT (e.g.

15. 22, 6
;

Ch. 10, 15

18, 5;

22, 12; 23, 9

2 Ki.

n,

3.

10),

would restore
article in

compared with i Ki. 12, mrv Dy ba riKD (cf. v. 24

it

<?</).

This,

however, leaves the

Dyn unexplained: and

is

simpler to

suppose that
the Pent.,

PvX (once, no doubt, written 7X, as still eight times in and i Ch. 20, 8, and in Phoenician 1 ) has arisen by ditto:

graphy from the following px

flNE]
lit.

so Bu.

Now. Sm.
:

Ehrl.
to buy,
np^>, !?KC>

from zvM=Trapa
.

with a gen.

so with HJp

b (8, 10), etc.; see Lex. 86

24.
:i
"IC

Yahweh s people to be spreading. So Ex. 36, 6 njn2 hp W2JH. Elsewhere, it already Rashi, comparing is true, where this idiom occurs, it is accompanied by an indication of the locality in or through which the proclamation is made to pass
N]

which

hear

(as Ex. I.e.; 2 Ch. 30, 5

^O^

bra

36, 22
1D15J>

(=Ezr.
:

i,

i); Ezr. 10, 7;

Neh.

8,

15: Lev. 25, 9 D3V1N ^33

T2yn)

but the alternative

Israel to transgress
Dn>3VD

rendering (AV. RV.)

is

(Ye) make the people of

is

doubly questionable: (i) Dnx

3)>

desiderated after

(see

on

6)

2)

"I2y>

when

it

signifies to transgress, is

an accus. of the law or precept

overpast, e.g.

^ *a JIN

always followed by 15, 24. Nu.

Cooke, NSI.
;

5,
2

22

>K

DBHpn DJN
;

these holy gods;

i.

27, 3

NH

these images

45,

^X D EHpC^

and C75.

14, 5

^N nn3O

these offerings.

//.

22-2$

35

14, 4 in

rnin

the Hif.

Is 2 5 (comp. the Commentators on ^. 17, 3**), and does not occur in this sense at all. The case is one,
4>

however, in which the integrity of the text

suspicion.
25.
If a

is

reasonably open to

man
if

sinneth against a

But

man
him
?

sin against

man, God will mediate (for him) Yahweh (emph.), who can intercede
:

for
I.e.

man against man, God may interpose and His representative, the judge) for an offence through For DTI^X as against Yahweh, there is no third party able to do this.
For an offence of
arbitrate (viz.
:

signifying, not the

judge as such, but the judge as

f.
:

the mouthpiece
ib.

a Divine sentence, see Ex. 21, 6. 22, 7

the judicial decisions given

and comp.

18, 16,

of where

by Moses
s

are described as the

statutes

and laws of God.

nations; comp. Sir

Ideas parallel to this occur

among

other ancient
i,

Henry Maine

Ancient Law, ch.

:

and

the ex

pression applied to judges in

(II. i.

Homer

OITC fe /uoras IIpos Atos elpvarat

to

239).

The

play between 7?9

mediate (see
is

\f/.

106, 30

1DJH
to

^a^l Drwa, where

PBV.

and prayed

quite false),

and

^SDH

interpose as mediator, specially

by means of

entreaty (Gen. 20,

17),

cannot be preserved in English.

The

idea of mediation or arbitration

appears in other derivatives (rare) of 7^10; as D^^B Ex. 21, 22. Dt. In the suffix must have the force of 32, 31; rM>2 Is. 16, 3.
vi>ai

a dative, for him

(GK.

ii7

x
;

Ew.

3i5

b
);
:

but probably, with We.,

the plur. would be in

vp?^ should be pointed

(so Lo. Bu.

Now.)

accordance with the construction of DTPS, as thus applied, in Ex. In NErV niiT^ DN notice the emph. position of mrp! It is 22, 8 b
.

the rule with

words

like

DK, vh,

fJJD^, }a etc. for

the verb to follow

it

immediately; when another word follows immediately,

is

because
20, 18.
ii.

some emphasis attaches

to it:

see e.g. 6, 9. Lev.

i, 3.

10.

Nu.
Hist.

The

general sense
:

is

well

expounded by We.

(after

Ew.

58 1

For the settlement of ordinary cases arising between man and man, there is a ^.?arp (arbiter), viz. Elohim (speaking through His representative, the judge) if, however, Yahweh is the plaintiff,
[Eng. Tr. 412])
:

Or, perhaps (Bu. Now. Sm.), act the mediator : but only to mediate by entreaty or prayer.

??ann

elsewhere means

36

The First Book of Samuel,

cannot also
is

He

(as

Elohim) be the ??%.

As

the priest in point

of fact

the judge, this

means
:

the play

between

Yahweh

and

Elohim being disregarded

the sin of the priest against

priest,

God

cannot

be adjusted before the tribunal of the vengeance of Heaven.

IJttDB*
J1

but incurs the direct

t&] See on

i, 7.

f*Dn *a] Cf. Jud. 13, 23.

Grotius (quoted by Th.) illustrates the

thought from Aeschylus

(ap. Plato,

Rep.

ii.

380 A)

orav
26. 11131 7131

/caKajcrai

Swyna

Trai^TrrjSrjv

6f\r).

"pn]=
.

continued growing greater

and

better

cf.

II 3,

trini

D^in

ptni -jhn
i,

(which shews that 3tej

13. Est. 9, 4; after

^3

are adjectives).
19, 19.
2

15, 12. 17, 12:

Pr. 4, 18. Jon.

n.

W1, Ex.

Ch.

GK.

113"

end.

It is possible,

however, that TIB

may be

used here of bodily physique, and mean goodly (i. e. fine and comely}, as cf. 9, 2. Gen. 6, 2. Ex. 2, 2. i Ki. 20, 3 (so Dhorme Ehrlich).
;

Oy]
27.

/fo estimation of, as II 6, 22.

i.e.

Cf.

Luke

2,

52.

rta:n] thy father, or not, that ye, his descendants, have thus scorned

Tvbw

Did

indeed reveal myself to the house of

me ?

An

impassioned question, expressive of surprise, as though the fact

(cf.

asked about were doubtful

Hitzig
it

weakened by treating n as though

force to the question
:

on Job 41, i), not to be &OH The inf. abs. adds were

GK.

13^.

There

is

no occasion

to treat the

n in r6j3n as dittographed from the n in

J1

niiT.

DDVm] MT.
But

when they belonged

unnatural

in

Egypt

to

the house of

Pharaoh.

this is

DH^y. has dropped out after

(cf.

can hardly be doubted that ; DHVO2, corresponding to LXX SovXwv

it

and

Comp. Lev. 26, 13. 2 ihM] GK. us Ew. 351. As Ehrlich observes, the order is fnbp
Targ. ^ pnayntw).
28.
:
""p]

Dt.

6,

21.

correct: see Gen. 12, 19

"6

6, 3.

28, 9,

and often

iT&tib

29, 29 PinfiB^
c>.

&/ , Jud.

17, 5

ib

\T1;

Dyb

Ex.

6, 7 (cf.

Dt. 29, 12.

12, 22. II 7, 23. 24,

and frequently); ^.

94, 22 (for cases of the opposite order, induced

doubtless by the rhythm, see ^. 33, 12 [n^ltJP 1^ would here be heavy]. Lex. 512^). The fact, 132, 13. Is. 49, 5. Job 13, 24. 30, 21
:

however, that a family,

and not an

individual,

is

referred to suggests

II.

25-29
fn?f>

37
(Bu.).

that

we should

(with

LXX

lepareveiv) vocalize

Ehrlich

we always have ^ fn?b (Ex. 28, 41. 29, i al.): but be prefixed for emphasis ? Otherwise the tribe (inx=? /, might not not him), as a whole, must be regarded as priest to Yahweh cf. the
objects to this that
"6

sing,

numbers
is

in Dt. 31,

i6 b-i8.

Is. 5,

26-30.

17, I3

-i4 a

etc.

nW]
though
it

naturally

Qal (LXX, Pesh. Vulg. Ke. Klo. Bu. Now.),

v. 33.

might be Hif. (Targ. Th.) for Tfhyrb (comp.

13, 21

II 19, 19

vayb; Ex.
26,

Dnrob; NU.

5,

22 *?&&,

nui6;
is

Dt.

12

"TV?);

however, as the contraction

not
is

i, 33 Ewnmb; common (about

twenty instances altogether in

MT.

),

and there
is

nothing here to

suggest or require the Hif., the latter

less
it,

probable.

To go up
i

upon
12,

the altar, i.e.

2 Ki. 16,
it,

upon a ledge beside

:

as Ex. 20, 26;

Ki.

33;

12 end; 23, 9
9,

conversely,
i,

TV

is

used of coming

down from

Lev.

22

cf. i

Ki.

53.

11SN 1WB6]
always.
Cf.

to bear,

not, to wear,
b
;

the

ephod before me.

ii.

So
s

DB.

i.

726

Moore

in

EB.

1307;
11

the writer
cf.

Exodus, 313; and Kennedy

29.

s
:

note here.
if }iy
is
is

For rnn WK,

Dt. 18,

i.

fiy] Untranslateable
2
.

right,

read ^tyca; ^iyo (RV.,

in poetry,

implicitly) is not sufficient

1

Jiyc

word found mostly

11X6;
2

To
8

those given in the text add II 18, 3 Kt.

Ki.

9,

15 Kt.
;

Tab;

Is. 3,

nnb
39

23, ii

nDt^

29, 15
;

into;
"VV3;

37, 12

78, 17 nVTo!?.
"ItS

pbnb; 39,7 tf?b Pr. 31, 3 ninDb; Dan.

2

inob 33, i (corrupt) Am. 8, 4 frapb; ^.26,7

;

"jJTlbiJD

Jer. 27, 20

yB>b;

73, 2Q(?)

ii, 35 fabb.

Qoh.

5, 5

K Bnb.

Neh.

10,

ya.

Ch. 31, 10

N ob-

(In

some of

these instances the text

may be

doubtful, or the punctuation as Hif. unnecessary.)

3.

rtiyb Ex. 10,

(as pointed)
2

Pr. 24, ibipaa

17. fjtpjja

Lam.
12
:

2,

Comp. in the Nif. n. -ri^b Job 33, 30; and

3^n2
Ez. 26, 15.

niX"IP

Ex.34,

2 4-

Dt. 31,

n.

Is. I,

also
:

JV3

or

rP2n

(absol.), never

means in the house

accus. to express rest in a place is restricted to

by custom the use of the cases in which a noun in the So nyiD ^HN HHD (.
22),

genitive follows, as

TQN
/

ITO,

^OH

s/

"

JTQ,

n s l.
:

ibilN Pins (Ex. 33, 10)

the entrance of his tent

but at the entrance (absolutely)

would be nnS2, not HJlDn simply. So pNTTQ, Drv~rV3 may denote in in Bethlehem but in Gibeon, must be expressed by in Dan Bethel, b py^jn, p3 (see 2 Ki. 10, 29 ). Where a word like I^P, D^WT seems to denote
:
1

at Shiloh, at Jerusalem,

it

will be found that a verb of

motion always precedes, of

;

which the
said

Hence BHp

may

Dt. 3, i; Jud. 21, 12. (Exceptions to what has been here be found in MT., but they are very rare e.g. Is. 16, 2. 2 Ch. 33, 20.)
subst.

expresses the
is

goal:

so e.g. II 20, 3

f. 134, 2

to the sanctuary.

38

The First Book of Samuel,

(ty.

and the more elevated prose

Dt. 20, 15
al.
"JtJHp

26,
:

"jn^

pytt,
its

of heaven)

so

it

Temple; would not be unsuitable.

pJJD,

of the

The
that

objections that
it is

absolute use

is

late (faiytp 2

Ch. 36, i5t), and

B^ri) and
. . .

here superfluous, are not cogent.

TI (TTffiXeif/as
.

LXX
;

(omitting TV1V l^x)

fitp2n (or

have Iva

dvatSei

i.e.

6</>0aAyna)

(Klo.) i^yEj

Why
lit.

hast thou looked (or, dost thou looK) upon

it

with
plj/D

an
is

evil eye ?

eyeing

(18, 9).

So Bu. Sm. (not Now.).

either

But

a very doubtful restoration.

MNnar6]
nxnanb
Dyi*]
"oyb

Read probably

the

Nif.

D3$nan!>

(Bu.),

or

(Ehrlich).

This again cannot be

s

right.

We

might
"3Sp

easily alter

TtfW
(We.).

to

y bans*, but the ^ appears also in

or

of

LXX

Perhaps ^Dp,
this,
is

TVp. though
it

einrpocrOtv

does not elsewhere represent

the true reading; the

is

Bu. Now.;
slight.

meaning

will be, in full

accepted by Hitzig (on Amos 2, 13), view of me, aggravating the

30.

THEN

TICK]

said
is

(emph.).

The
is

intention,
inf.

which had

afterwards to be abandoned,
i)*b Iji nrv]

emphasized by the
esp. in such a

abs.

To
2.

walk before any one

2 Ki. 20, 3);

to live

and move openly

as (a) to deserve,

before

him

(12,

way

and consequently
is

(t>)

to enjoy, his approval

and

favour.

The

expression

used chiefly of walking before

is

God

and then sometimes one of

the other.

these ideas

the

more prominent, sometimes

Thus

in

Gen.

17, i,

and prob.

in 24, 40. 48, 15 the thought of (a) predominates

;

(LXX

evapecTTfiv IVOVT IOV or evcoTrtov)

here, V. 35,

and

\j/.

56, 14.

1 1 6,

9 [shall, not will] the thought of () predominates. is not so strong as DV^ttn nx *]^nnn Gen. 5, 22. 24.
r

(The expression
6, 9.)

31. 17
(

ai

D^NS

D^D"

run]

formula occurring besides only

2 Ki. 20,

= Is.

39, 6),

and

in the prophecies of

Amos and

Jeremiah.
i33B>

^O;

DVn JHJ3 iTDJM iynn 3N1D pp nynjj. LXX vocalized Jer. 48, 25 but this by no means agrees so well as MT. ^p| with the
21, 6 iriK

nN Tiyui]
and

Cf. for the figure Jud.

figure implied in *nyi:i.

V^T metaph. of strength, as

;

Job

22, 8

X1

n i^ynr; ^. 10, 15 yvn ynr inc

32.

83, 9.
(cf.

pyo nx]

Again,

if

py
m.).

is

right
Eli,

on

29),

we must

read either
is

o (RV.)

or yiyoa

(RV.

however, whose death

recorded

//.

29 -tf

39
the temple at

in 4, 21, did

not survive any time

when

Shiloh was
clause

unfortunate,

and

Israel in

general

prosperous.
"15?

The

must

Bo. suggested tiy? and thou shalt look consequently be corrupt. but tD^n with an accus. is not to look for for a rock of defence :

something non-existent, or not

something actually
proposed.
1B>N

visible,

but to look

at,

or behold,

in

view.

No

satisfactory

emendation has been

^33]
.
. .

lit.

in the
i>23

whole of
is

(that,) as to

which ...

in all

wherein

*it?N

commonly

followed by a verb of motion, as

14, 47, in

which case

it

= wherever.
is

DN

y*>"~\

^BM

with a personal object

32, 10.

usually construed with ^ or

is

Dy (Gen. 12, 16; 13 al.): chiefly Deuteronomic (Dt. 8, 16. 28, 63. 30, 5; so
40. 41
;

the construction with an accus.

Jer. 18, 10.
is

32,

also Zech. 8, 15.

i/r.

51, 20).

subject to

TB"

desiderated.

We must either
observe that
all.,

suppose that niiT has

supply

fallen out after

it

(Bu.

Now.

Kit.

EVV.

God

in italics), or read

TU

K (Sm. Bu.
etc.

33.
is
"j^

Dhorme). Yet one

I will not cut off

belonging to thee from mine altar/

:

the dat. of reference, as often in similar phrases

9, 5.

II 3, 29.

Ki.

2, 4.

14, 10

al.

(Lex. 512^ 5),

Dyo]
y\

Cf.

Ex. 21, 14.

Cf. Lev. 26,
1

nfoi>]

6 (certain diseases)

OD3 ni^niM

&yy

ni;CD;

Dt. 28, 65 PDJ p3NT!

twy ivb.
v.

msb]
it

for

3 1^[ (on ^
I

28),

from [TIN]

3NT.

21X, however,

is

not substantiated elsewhere, in either

is

Hebrew

or the cognate languages:

S probable therefore that N is merely an error for n, and that Hroi (corresponding to rQHO in Lev. I.e.) should be restored. Cf. Jer. 25, 3
D^t^n.
,

DWX for
Tt
a3
,

T^y]

The ^N, no
ch. 22,

doubt,

is

Abiathar,
s faithful

who escaped

the

massacre of the priests

his lifetime, but

was David

attendant during

was removed from

the priesthood by

Solomon, and

banished by him from Jerusalem, on account of the part taken by him If in the attempt of Adonijah to secure the throne (see i Ki. 2, 27).

MT.

be

right, the reference

must be

to the father,

supposed

to

be

conscious of the fortunes of his descendant, and suffering with him.

Such a

sense, however,

seems

to

be one which

is

scarcely likely to

40

The First Book of Samuel,

s

have been in the writer

1K>S3

mind

(contrast

Job

14, 21).

LXX

read

V^y, the pronouns referring to Abiathar himself, the end of

was passed in disappointment and vexation. preferable (so We. Th. Klo. etc.). the increase (viz. generally, so far as none are rva")E] whose
life

This

is

specially

exempted).

Or, perhaps, as
11

Ch. 12, 29, the greater part.

will die as men (= in the flower of their age, AV.), ] D^tWX being an (implicit) accus., denning their condition at the time of So Is. 65, 20 DID HKD p will die as a man 100 years dying.

D^3N

iniB

11

n3B>

old;

Lev. 20, 20 (Tenses,

is

161. 3;

GK.

1181).

But, though the

unexceptionable, D^tWN does not signify in contradistinction to men of any other age and LXX has ev adults,

grammatical construction

potato, av&pwv ; in all probability therefore a word has MT., and D JMK anna should be restored.
35.
il

fallen out in

n^N3]
is

for the expression, cf. 14, 7. II 7, 3.

2 Ki. 10, 30.

The

clause

attached to what precedes somewhat abruptly, but a

similar

abruptness
:

may
;

be observed sometimes
nB>ni

in

the

Books of

Samuel
35
the
b
.

a e.g. 9, 6

19, 5

TVNi.

TWG>]

JN3 JT3] Cf. 25, 28 The passage, like

ITK>D:

(the
2,

hope expressed by Abigail).

10, presupposes the establishment of

monarchy (^

16, 6;

24,

7.

1 1

etc.).

The

original pro

phecy must have been re-cast by the narrator, and in its new form coloured by the associations with which he was himself familiar. The

meaning
tinually.

is

that the faithful priest will enjoy the royal favour

con

36.

jl

rpiTl]
is

lit.

and

it

shall be,

as

(=
^>a,

whoever

left)

in thy father s house,

regards all that are he shall come etc.

;

left

The
The

construction exactly resembles Dt. 20,

II 15,

35:

and without
i).

Nu.

17,

20
is

(cf.

16, 7);

Ki. 19, 17 (Tenses,

121, Obs.

force of hi

similar to that in v. 13.

Instead of Nia s the sentence

might wiih equal propriety have been resumed by the pf. and waw the construction with the conv. X^; see Nu. 21, 8; Jud. n, 31
:

impf.

is,

however, somewhat more flowing, and

is to

less formal.

^DDD] nso
30, 7

attach: 26, 19.

Is.

14,

apy rva hy

IHSDJI

Job
In

Pu al (=

to cling together) f.

The

interpretation of the entire

(In Hab. 2, 15 read ^E)*?.) passage, from v. 31, is difficult.

x-)
Eli, (i)

41
a sudden disaster 31*
l .

MT.
b
,

two troubles are threatened to

escape of his entire family (T2N JV2 v. 31) 33 no old man in thy a permanent weakening of his family (32^ (2) in 3i a 33 b the allusion is to the No doubt house continually ).
will
:

from which few

massacre of the priests at the one alluded to in 33 a

,

Nob

(22, 17-20):

and Abiathar himself

is

who escaped

the massacre,

and so was not

cut off

from the

altar,

continuing to hold the office of priest under

priest of v.
is

David, and only superseded by Zadoq (the faithful upon the accession of Solomon. The sign in v. 34 death of Hophni and Phinehas, recorded in ch. 4.

35)

of course the

But with reference

to the passage as a whole,

it is

difficult to resist

We.
:

argument.

As

the text stands, v. 32 a expresses a consequence of

it deals, however, with 31 something which Eli is to witness himself: hence 31 must refer to something within Eli s own lifetime which can only be the disaster of ch. 4, in which his two sons perished. This

implies that the survivor in 33

to

Samuel

(so Th.).

Ahitub (14, 3); and that 35 relates But the sign in 34 is also the disaster of ch. 4:
is

consequently,
sign,
V. 3
1

upon

this interpretation,

the death of Eli s sons

is

a
!

not of some occurrence in the remoter future, but of

itself

must thus

refer to
s

something

subsequent to ch. 4,

and

so,

subse
:

quent also to Eli

it

death (the massacre at Nob, as explained above)

follows that the text of 32* cannot be correct,

surmised above, upon independent grounds.

as indeed was already LXX omits both 3i b and

and We. supposes and the same gloss, due

32*
;

b 31^ and 32 are but two forms of one a originally to an (incorrect) application of 3i
that
Still, though it is true that 33*, expressing a form a natural sequel to it, it would follow it

to the disaster of ch. 4. a would limitation of

3i

somewhat quickly and abruptly

the suspicion of being due to
"JJV22

open to the recurrence of the same words }pT

;

and the omission

in

LXX
in

is

in

both 31^ and 32 b

What

is
is

really

wanted

lieu of the

corrupt words at the beginning of 32

something which would lead

on
1

naturally to the notice of the permanent

weakening of Eli

family

This sense of the figure seems to be demanded by the limitation which cannot V. ( Yet one I will not cut off\a thee from mine altar ). be a limitation to for the sparing of a single individual, on a particular
follows in 33*
33"
:

32*"

occasion, forms no exception to ihe permanent weakening of & family.

42
which
is

The First Book of Samuel,

the point
in

Did we which 32 b advances beyond 3i b its possess 32* original form, it would yield, we may suppose, a suitable sequence 31 would refer to the massacre at Nob, 32 to the and 33 would after-history of Eli s family (comp. 36 "JJVZD invjn
in
. :
i>3),

revert to the subject of 31

survivor, Abiathar (22, 20).
3.
i.

in

order to follow the fortunes of the

Ip

11

precious

rare, as Is. 13, 12

TSD STON

"VplN.

pD3] spread abroad

2.
y\

= frequent

Ch. 31, 5

">^n

pMI.

iy& ^jn]
is

From

here to the end of

v.

3 follow a series of

circumstantial clauses, describing the conditions which obtained at the

time

when what
pi.

related in v. 4 took place.

}

nin|] fem.

from nn|

an

adj.

of the form expressive of bodily

21).

defects D.;, HDB,

1$, enn (GK.

84^

Syntactically the adj.

is

to be conceived here as an accusative, defining the aspect under which

Eli s eyes

began:
i

lit.,

therefore,
"pTiro

began as dim ones

finishes! as

= began

to be

dim.

Cf. Is. 33,

-niK>

when thou
See

a devastator
161.

=
2,

when thou
and
inf.

finishes! to devastate.

GK.

120^; Tenses,

But the p. xvi; and cf. Segal, Misnaic Hebrew (1909), p. 49. nina would be more in accordance with the Biblical usage of
2,

?nn (Sm. Bu. Now.): see Dt.

i?3V vb~\

25. 31. Jos. 3, 7 (Sm.).

expressing his continued inability more distinctly than

Kb
->bj

would have done: so Gen. 48, 10; Jos. 15, 63 Kt. b 3 Evidently Samuel was sleeping in close proximity
.

to the ark

perhaps, in a
as the
4.

chamber contiguous
strictly

to the 73T1 in which

it

was,

if

not,

Hebrew taken
7N]

i>K1t?

LXX

would imply, actually in the 73T1 itself. no doubt rightly: cf. v. 10, where pKUDtr
5>K\DB>,

we read

as beforeiime, Samuel, Samuel.

In

v. 6

LXX

repeats the

name

similarly, not expressing Dp o (which

v.

may
;

have come in here as

a gloss suggested by
introduced by
times)
is

8).

The

repetition can hardly have

for there the

been
(both

LXX on the
OT.
are

strength of v. 10
all.

name

not expressed by them at

The
2.

only
3, 4.

other

similar

duplications in
5. *?]

Gen.

22,

n.
lie

46,

Ex.

For the dagesh, see GK.

20 f

23G? Tit?] return, lie vrNi j and see on 2 , 3.

7.

down

down

again

cf. Is.

21, 12

tta>

X7T]

QIB followed by a

perfect

is

very rare

Tenses,

27/5

note.

43
Here, the parallel r6a? makes it probable that the narrator himself would have vocalized in?.: cf. GK. 107.
8.

NIP] wa.r calling

Gen. 42, 23

EVV.

wrongly had

called.

10. ayJVl] Cf. the description of a nocturnal revelation in

Job

4,

16.

oyaa nyaa] So

20, 25. Jud. 16, 20.

nJC>3

20, 30. 31.

Nu.

24,

it; ova

DV2

<r/$.

8,

iof;

IW3

2 Ki. 17,

4t.
i,

DJ?D2 Dj?D does not occur

alone; but (on the analogy of rut^l rwt?

anothe r

7)

would mean

<?#

/?>

M<?

= generally
"OJK

hence, with 3 prefixed, as generally,

or, as

we may
the

substitute in a case like the present,

11. n:?y

as at (other) times.
I

njn]

Zo,

/ am domg=Lo,
135. 3;

am

about to do:

fulurum
Ex.
9, 3.
.

install?,

as often in Divine announcements, v. 13,

Gen.

6, 17.

Dt.

i,

20 (see Tenses,

GK.

n6P).

Cf. 10, 8.

nb
cf.

The same

figure 2 Ki. 21, 12. Jer. 19, 3f.

is

In both passages,

the form, from

^,

written nj^Jfn

(GK.

67^).

With

the form here,

the

rwaDFlj and in explanation of the hireq, see

tywi>3,

syntax of

see Tenses,
CTTI,

121, Obs.
i>y,

i,

GK. 67?. For n6 w note; GK.

.

12. -6y ^x]

LXX
cf.

Pesh. Targ.

Vulg. adversum.

with

the force of ^y:

on

i, 12.

reference to his

house:

i,
i.e.

27. 4, 19. effecting

beginning and ending,

pletely.

my

purpose com
8, 2
:

Ew.
13.

The expression occurs only 28o a GK. u 3 h.

;

here.

Construction as II

Tnjm] Read, with

DS>]

Klo. Bu.

etc.,

PTUm

(with

consec.)
al.

cf. v.

is

JN
the

Tenses,
i

135. 4.

So

Jer. i, 12.

38, 14

In Aramaic,

pronouns of

and

2 pers. coalesce with the ptcp. to

:

form a new

tense with the force of a present

still

but in

Hebrew

the

two parts are

its

distinct,
")5^N

and the

ptcp. receives

some emphasis from

its

position.

yT
clause

pys]

ity is

in the constr. state,

because the following relative

is

conceived as defining and limiting

in the genitive

meaning, exactly as

would do: GK. 1 30 footnote; Ew. 332. But probably Jiya should be omitted (the text then reading, Because (l& N, Lex. 83^ c) he knew that his sons did curse God, etc. ) LXX
a
:

noun

presupposes VJ3 py3; and )iy2 has probably found its way in here from a MS. with that reading (We. Lo. Ehrlich regards it as an al.).
old error for
JS?!

because.
s

VJ3 DH7

Dv^pD a] The

text hardly admits of being construed

for

44
7bp does not

The First Book of Samuel,

mean
to

bring a curse upon any one, and

is

followed not

by a dative, but by an accusative.

OTL

There can be

little

doubt that

LXX

have preserved the true reading, viz. b^77p *2 KaKoAoyowTes V32 D\T7K (cf. Ex. 22, 27 ??pn N^ If the text be correct, Dr6 DTI7N).
eov

can only be construed as a reflexive dative (Ew.

cursed for themselves
1E9 13V? 1
~>ro]

315*
if/.

Lex. 515** h)

= at
1lp.

their pleasure:
this

cf.

44,

end; 80,

Job

6,

19 ID?

But

does not yield a satisfactory sense.

here. Apparently (Nold. a by-form of Syr. }\& to rebuke (sq.

Only

Mand. Gramm.,
i

p.

72

.)

Ki.

i,

cs
v.

JJio

JJo).

In

Mand.
14.

the form

is

NH3.

Cf. Arab. (Jfverbis do/ore affecit (Freyt.).

13), strangely

p?]

LXX

ovS OVTWS (attaching the words to

treating p7, as though contracted from p~N7.

4,

15 (also Pesh. Vulg. here);

cf.

30, 15 (}3? in
i

So elsewhere, as Gen. these passages has an

2 Ki. i, 4. 6.

idiomatic force:
22,

on

28, 2).

Ki. 22, 19.

21, 12.

20

al.

With 14^

cf. Is.

21, 14.

On DK after an oath,=jr^/j/ we?/, 1D3rp] LXX, rightly, e<Aacr$?;o-eTcu.

ON]
usages,
art.

GK. i49 c -*.*:. 5o a The actual meanings, and of IS? can be determined from the OT. itself see the writer s
see
lD
;
.
:

PROPITIATION in
is

DB.

iv.

(1902).

Whether, however, as used

to

be

assumed (though primary meaning of the root was (from Arab, kafara) to cover is now doubtful. corresponds to the Assyr. kuppuru, which, whether its
not confidently) in this art., the
">B3

supposed, and

primary meaning was to wipe away (Zimmern, KAT? 601 f. ; cf. Syr. jAs), or to remove (Langdon, Exp. Times, xxii. (1910-11), pp. 320 ff., 1 in actual use denotes ritual purgation (e.g. from disease); SSof.)
,

and the word seems

sense attaching to
related
it,

to

have come into Heb. from Assyrian with this which was there developed so as to express the
(or
declare

ideas of to

expiate

expiated}

sin,

to

clear the
s

offender,

and
in

to

appease the offended person.

See the writer

Ethics.

art.

EXPIATION
15.

Hastings Encycl. of Religion and

In y

MT. T&a

D3Bfy

(LXX)

has been passed over after

(We.).
better, 7N1?JP 7K.

6.

7NlDKmN] 44 MSS.

17. 01 nc?y na]

1

form of imprecation peculiar

meant
f.

to Ruth, Samuel,

For a

third view (that the root

ff.
;

originally to brighten,

and so to purify},

see Burney, ib. 325

Ball, ib.

478

///. I3

- IV
//.

i Ruth

45
19, 14.
i,

and Kings:
i

14, 44.

20, 13.

25, 22. II 3, 9. 35.

17.

Ki.

2,

23. 2 Ki. 6, 31,

i

and with a

verb (in the mouth of Jezebel

Ki. 10, 10

and Benhadad)
19.
ai

Ki. 19, 2: 20, iof.

the idiom
cf.

^an t&] For

i

w WO ^
}

fc6

JTTIX; and, in Qal,

Jos. 21,

and without ims*,

Ki. 8, 56
of,
:

in the

Deuteronomic passages
has a partitive
a<r).

43 (45). 23, 14.

also Est. 6, 10.

force, with a neg.

aught
0<?

20.

31

P?W] (was) (The

as

b 58o 3 accredited or approved to be a prophet unto

as Dt. 16, 4 (Lex.

Yahweh.
Mtt&]

ptcp., not the pf.)

9,

Ti>

16; 13, 14;

"fab

15,

II

2,

4
:

al.

21. nknnfj]

So Jud.

13, 2if, for the

normal

riiKnn

Stade,

622 b

GK.

750.

On
LXX,

the clause at the

end of

(see Kittel), restored

all

by Klo. from
6,

Ehrl. remarks rightly (see

the instances

on

12)

that
is

wherever the construction h^Nl

always used absolutely, and
4,
i

T^n

1^1 occurs, the second

inf.

is

never followed by an object.

3, 21.

a.

This should stand as the concluding clause of

4,

ib

7,

i.

Defeat of Israel by the Philistines.

restoration

Capture and

of

the

Ark.

4,

LXX

introduce this section by the words Kai eyevi^r; cv TCUS

CTTI

EKetvat? KOL (rvvaOpoi^ovraa aXXoipvXoi ets 7roA.c//,ov

i?y

Icrpa^X

nn^o^ n^n^s

ivnp

i|<

onn n^on

\TI.

Something of this
ns"lp!>,

sort is required, if

only for the sake of explaining the following

though the clause (taken with what follows in which the same word occurs) would be the better for the omission of ntDHPO?.
"ityn

pxn] nryn
In
5,
i.

is

in apposition with

pNH

the stone
is

Help
J2K,

Tenses,
is

190).

7,

12, however, the form used

"Uyn

which

also best read here.

But Eben-ezer here,

and

5,

r,

in the plain,

somewhere near Lydda

of
7, 12,

(see the next note), can hardly be the Eben-ezer

hills;

near Mizpah, 18 m. SE. of Lydda, in the

its

or, if

it

is,

there will have been different traditions as to

situation.
:

pSS2] The name Apheq has not been preserved meant must have been the one in the Sharon (Jos.
spot, probably near

but the

Apheq
some

12, 18), at

Lydda

or Antipatris, which would form a suitable

46
starting-point for

The First Book of Samuel,

an expedition
either in the direction of Shiloh

and

Central Palestine, or (ch. 29, i) into the plain of Esdraelon and Gilboa
(notice the road leading north

from Lydda and Antipatris, through the

also those leading
is

plain of Dothan, to Jezreel

and

up
in

east into the

i

hill-country of Ephraim).

Apheq

mentioned also

Ki. 20, 23.

See further
2.
1
E>Bni]

W.

R. Smith and G. A. Smith in

EB.

s.v.

APHEK.
the Nif. in II 5,
battle inclined

Perhaps,
f.K\ivfv,

and spread
i.e.

itself

abroad :
Bfll

cf.

8.

22.

LXX

seemingly

and the

(viz.

in a direction
battle

adverse to Israel).

Pip and the

im]
3-5.

was hard;

cf.

II 2,

Smith conjectures plausibly 17 np~j3 nOTWI nm so Bu.

:

LXX,

Pesh. Vulg.

Ol.

LXX
in v. 4

read in v 3
.

W&N

fntrnN, in

z>.

4* miT

niN2),
of

pisn

(for

DT^ttn

mn

jns), and in

}nK DN (without p. 5 mrr jnx,

thus omitting

rvn

each time, in accordance with the general custom

(vv. 6.

MT. in

Samuel

n. 17-22; 3,3;
24 aa see note]).

ch.

5-6;

II 6 throughout;
it

II 15, 24 a 0. 25. 29

[on

jy.

here into

MT.

at

a time

when

the expression

was introduced Probably was in more general use

than
4.

it

had always been.

DPI]

LXX,
s

Vulg. omit

D5J>

no doubt,

rightly.

The

point

is

not that Eli

into

sons were at Shiloh, but that they came with the ark
(v.

the

camp

u).
i

The word may have been

i,

introduced ac

cidentally through a reminiscence of

5.

PNH Dnm]
23

Ki.

45

mpn
Bin

i, 3 (We.). nnni: Ruth

i,

19

Tyn onm.
is to
&>

On
f o^-

the form Dnrn, see

discomfit, Dt. 7,

GK.
:

72^.

(usually Don), however,

is

confuse,
/

what we expect
i

a form from
:

non

A?

molion, stir, of a

a /y,
The

Ki.

i,

41. Is. 22, 2

so Ehrlich

may

be right

in vocalizing OD^l7.

DTita N2]

Philistines

God
<

absolutely: read probably BnJK

l

would hardly speak of Yahweh as D^n5N N3 (We.).

nN

l]

Not

to be omitted
is

(LXX).
a genuine

Though

the speakers are the

:

same
the

as in a , the remark

of a different character

and

in

such cases
e.g.

repetition

of

HDN^

is

Hebrew idiom (We.):

cf.

26, 9-10. II 17, 7-8.

riNDJ
119,
7,

LXX
S^
32, 6;

TOLavrr)
,

a Hebraism:

^. 27,
11

14 fuav
al.
;

102, 19.
also Jud.

5i/f.

avrrj

TTJV fj-ovoycv?)

/xou^^nTn

i//.

22, 21

14;

118, 23 (Matth. 21, 42), notwithstanding the fact that

IV. 2-i)
in these cases there is a subst. in the

47
to

Greek

which the

fern,

might

conceivably be referred. 8. r6sn D TnNn] DTI^K construed as a

(cf.
i

pi. in

the

mouth of a heathen
see Gen.

Ki. 19, 2), as also, sometimes, in converse with one, Gen. 20, 13

(E\v.
;

318* end).
4>

However,

this limitation is

not universal

r 9 N1 n D BTIp DTi^N a (the plur. of majesty), II 7, 23 35, 7 J os 2 here divine beings); and in (but see note); \l/. 58, 12 (unless

OwN

the phrase
Ti

D^n DTi^K
2,

Dt.
i

5,

23

al.

(Is. 37, 4.

^X

is

used Hos.

al.).

Cf.
:

GK.

17 Tl DTI^K in poetry also h 1246, i32 1451.

:

DH

ribs]
i>23]

Gen. 25, 16

al.

Tenses,

201. 3
smiting,

Lex. 24i b

4.

ri3D

With every manner of

it

Kp., excellently.

ro

is

not a
I

plague, though
19, 8.

may be

TrAr/yr/,

but rather denotes slaughter,

v. io. 6, 19.

121O31]
9.

Probably

J"

?^ (We.) should be read.

, ,
,

plTTD] carrying on

vm

iptnnn

GK.

1 1

2 r.

D^JK^ DJVm

is

logically superfluous; but

in

it

resumes

D^N?

VD1 after the following clause,

accordance with the principle noticed on 17, 13 and 25, 26. but in this phrase, i o. P^nttb B*x] The Versions express lirix^
:

except Jud.

20, 8

(which

is

not altogether parallel), the plural

is

regularly found.

^D

11

!]

the sing, as Jud. 12, 6 b

cf.

on

i, 2.
:

^n]
12.

construed with C^K as a collective

It is

so B^N I^N, 133 P)7K, etc.

fDm"^^]
(

the rule in
e
),

Heb. (GK.
determinate

i27

a
),

though there
7

are exceptions

i27

that

gen. determines the

preceding nomen regens

only
Jud.
the
7,

hence We. remarks here that

either

2 E^N means
(Nu. 25,
1

man

of B./

a particular known
the

man

8.

14. 10, i), or,

11

more commonly,
etc.,
X

Dnax ^N min
,

{^N,

men of B. (so constantly): comp. Moore on Jud.

is

^X"!^"

E"N,

7,

14,

p. 207.

Accordingly, as 3 E^N
read, with

here not determinate,

Ie/^u/cuos), either

We.
B-

Klo. Bu.
^N
cf.

Now. would
21), or
^"O)

LXX (di/T/p
1

^PH?
is

(cf. 9,
.

EN
"JIT

(II 20, i).

Ehrlich, cleverly, 1DU3 for jo J3;

16.

13. nSi D

Massorites
,

(Qre T) T ] The meaningless f toT but though we have Tp 19, 3.

:

corrected by the
140, 6 ^:yo *pb
;

\j/.

by ii 15,

nyt^n
,
.

"jm

i?y.

Job
is

i,

14

^s

14, 30.

8, 4

">y^n

?K;

,T by
it

itself is

not used
true,

to

express position
:

(though such a use of

I

would

not,

it

be contrary to analogy

48
see

The First Book of Samuel,

on
2,

29 footnote}.
:

desiderated with *JT1

being prose) is so (i) the smallest change would be Tfin Tb

(the passage

The

article also

H3VD

(=

Pesh.).

(2)
(cf.

LXX

Trapa. TTJV TrvXrjv

cr/coTrevwv TT)V
2, 2

68ov

= Iv
:

Tfin nsro

*wn

Pr. 8, 3

Dnyp

T>b

and Nah.

T|T1

nss)

so

We.

v. 1 8). (cf.

(3) Targ. has

N3DO Njnn miK BO3 by

exactly as
in pre

II 15, 2 (and also 18, 4).

supposing

gate,

This rendering agrees with and would point to nSE n

"iy

LXX
1v

"pi

as the

original text.

The

supposition that lytPn has fallen out would most

"pT

readily explain the absence of the art. with

in

MT.
is

But probably

the second of the suggested corrections

15.

is

the best (so Bu. Now.).

nop]

wy being conceived
:

as a collective
n3SB>

construed with

its

predicate in the fern. sing.

IDS^). $. 18, 35. 37, 31

so Dt. 21,7
b.

WT
:

(Qre needlessly

in^K Tyon
broken,

73,

2Kt.

etc.

seeEw.
is

3i7

a
;

GK.

i45

The Arabic
same sense
i

or collective, plural
t

construed

constantly in the
recurs in the
1

same way: Wright, Ar. Gr.

Ki. 14, 4 (of Ahijah).

ii.

144, 146.

Dp

6.

N3H
:

"Oitf]

Not

am

come, but

am

he that

is

come

(6

^KWV

surmising that Eli would expect some one with news, the messenger replies that he is the man. Cf. Dt. 3, 21. 8, 18. Is. 14, 27

LXX)

(Tenses,
!"D"iyEn

135. 7
(first

GK.
It

i26 k ).
is

Notice the order

y\

time)]
the

an improvement to read, with

LXX,

Klo.

Bu. Kit. Dh., naron

17.
"IBQlDn]

camp.

The

original sense of the

word has been

forgotten,

and

used for a bearer of tidings generally, even though, as here, the tidings be bad ones.
it

is

18. ND3PI

cases says

byo] We say simply, fell from the seat: Heb. in such from upon: so }nb&n PJHD, raten byo, etc. (see Lex. 758).

T
and
T>3

lya]
nj?2 to

LXX

e^d/xevos (cf. footnote

on

v. 13).

We. considers 1
:

in this

be different corruptions of an original T3 sense is very rare (Job 15, 23. Zech. 4, i2t 2

and, although
cf.

*T3

I
"A-

>

6), the usual idioms being

Tp,
(so

^!~ ^, or
3

y (see

on

v.

13),

it

seems

that

we must
is
:

acquiesce in

it

Sm. Bu. Now.

render

Kit.).

It

true that elsewhere

LXX

compounds of

by

avti

x e ^Pa

or
>

txopeva
as this,
2

but absolute uniformity is hardly to be expected of them in such a matter even in one and the same book.

In Jer. 41, 9 Sin

hlJ

ID

is

clearly to be read, with

LXX,

for

Kin

in^a T3.

IV. ij-2i
19.

49

rnn

fern,

rml An
[niC **]
1

from [/H ?], of the same form as HQJ, HDJ. isolated example of a contracted form of the
1

inf.

m^>

the original [^1?]

instead of becoming exceptionally just as The the fem. of T?? becomes regularly finx and not [n^nK].
J">?

rfP>

form, however, in the

all

inf.

of verbs

^D

is

without parallel

so that in
the usual

probability

it

is

a mere transcriptional error for

).

flTjY>

form (so
7tf]

GK.

m 69

with reference to, about, as v. 21. Gen. 20, 2. i/r. 2, 7. r is, however, the tense that DEl] the finite verb by GK. ii4
.
J"ID*1

would be expected
o/~(Sm., with 6
T")

(cf.

on

i, 12).

But rri~;N1 and about

the death

MSS.) would be better Hebrew. n^y 13Sru] Dan. 10, 16; Dn^if also Is. 13,
nnin

8. 21, 3 f.

Turned

came unexpectedly.
20. nJ-Qirn
nj?31]
"\,

The

predicate, after a time-determination,

:

being introduced by
27, 34.

as

happens occasionally
127/3;
cf.

17, 57.

Gen.

19, 15.

37, i8al.:
(lit.

Tenses,

GK.
;

nib.
and see on
in II 15, 4.

!T7y] by

over) her:
7,

Gen.

18, 2
al.,

ro? nns?]
Trpoo-e^etv,

Ex.

23. II

13, 20

the

same sense of vow

21.

"1U3

post-Bibl.

is frequent as a negative in the Mishnah, and other Hebrew, and occurs once with the same force in the OT.,
.

animum N N]

attendere.

1 It may have Job 22, 30 (though the text here is very suspicious) been current anciently in colloquial Hebrew. It is, however, very doubtful whether more Inglorious is the real etym. of Ichabod
:

probably

it is

a popular etymology, like those given for fp, n^D, and

in the

many
tain;

other
1

names

OT.
is

The

real

meaning of 1123

""N

is

uncer-

"l^C

"^

and the Sidonian

3^

are

appearance of the same

formation; but their etym.

if

equally obscure.

Ityx
of

in

Nu.

26, 30,

the text be sound, will be a contraction

it is

"ityns:

but more

probably

a textual error for ityoN

*a]

(LXX

has A;(ieep).

bsne^o 1133 rta

calf of Beth-el).

n^3

would represent ID, as it is an ominous word DTTnD)

:

Hos. 10, 5 UOD n^j a (of the niaa of the much more than departed AV. (which Nu. 14, 9 DiT^XflD D^X ID. Am. 6, 7 nrno
Cf.
is

"1D1

in

Hebrew, and expresses

4.
5, 5
;

is

gone
18. 21.

It is

found also in Phoenician (Cooke, NSI. 4,

:

CIS. 165,

167,

n)

and

it is

the regular and ordinary negative in Ethiopic.

1365

5<D

The First Book of Samuel,

exile
It
is

into

probable that
desolation
the

this

victory of the Philistines

was

followed by books are

that
silent,

of Shiloh, of which, though the historical

recollection
14.

was
to

still

far

from forgotten
late

in

Jeremiah

day

(7, 12.

26, 6),

and

which a

Psalmist alludes

ty. 78, 60).

5,

i.

mntPK] Ashdod, now Esdud, one of the

five principal Philis

tine cities (6, i), 33 miles

due west of Jerusalem, and about half-way between Joppa and Gaza, 3 miles from the sea-coast. an object (or person) Gen. 43, 9. 47, 2. 2. )Pxn] to station or stand
:

II 6, 17 (likewise of the ark).

3.

more

definite

word than

D^b*.

DHnt?N]
is

Read DnnBWl.

in v. 4 the purpose for which the Ashdodites from what has preceded, and need not therefore be and no specified expressly, the case in the present verse is different doubt pjl rV3 INTl must be inserted before rum with LXX. ... It will

mnD]

Though
clear

arose early

be best also to accept the following

to fall on ones

^")*1

of

LXX

at the

same

time, in

order to follow throughout one and the same recension

ViS?]
(17, 49
14,

(We.).

own

face,

is

always in Heb. either VJQ by

al.),

and

often), or else Vaxi?

(Gen. 48, 12

or

VDK by
v.

(II

4al.);

hence We.

remark:
1
)

For

VOS^>

here and

4,

usage

requires either VJS by

(LXX

or VSN!?.

giving a rendering of the existing

MT.

in

It is for the purpose of accordance with the general

usage of the language that RV. marg. has the alternative

before it/

the following mrp pnx *)& being regarded as an explanation of ntfo-

But though such explanatory additions occur (Lev. 6, 8. Nu. 32, 33. i Ch. 4, 42. 2 Ch. 26, 14) they are exceptional, and are often under
the suspicion of having been introduced as a gloss (Jos.
i,

[^3?

bx~\W not in LXX]. Jud. 21,

Dnnub.

Jer.

41,3

[liT^na riK not in

LXX]).
inp
l]

It is better

here to restore VJ3 by.

LXX
"IN5J>3

/cat

f/yfipav, i.e. }i?J!

and raised up
left
17

so

Sm. Bu. Dh.

more expressive word than

4.

took.

V^y

pn

P"l]

only
right.

Dagon was

upon him (upon Dagon),

pax

which can scarcely be

LXX
LXX

TrXrjv

Aaywv

It is not,

however, certain that

iirl

read 1\]Q by rather than VBfc^

the

latter is

rendered by them equally

irpovuirov aurow in 20, 41

and

II 18, 28.

V. i-6
according to We., reading probably nothing different from
being led to pa^ts
SptTravov for

5i

by the similarity to the add

MT., but Hebrew pi (We. compares

(1013) II
2,

pll

13, 21, TrapaTctvowa for

;

pD3

29,

ec

II 6, 19 n?s for lat^X (13PK), for

8opa for

mix
We.

Gen. 25, 25

D p SK

i/f.

42, 2 ah, TOKOS for T]n (oppression) 55, 12 ah, rpo^rj for
for fin

spB in,
131

5,

T07raiov for ID (gold) 119, 127).

J

would read
only his
;

(supposing the

to have arisen

by dittography from

1NK>j)

was left upon him. This, however, is not very satisfactory fi shy part and irXty upon We. s explanation remains and, as pd^is means back,
unaccounted
read
5.
Via

for, it is

better to insert

1?.

back before pji, or (Lagarde) to

his back for

}1J1.

So Bu. Now.
8.

13 TP]

the impf., as II 5,

Gen. 10,

9.

22, 14 etc., expressing

the custom. H?n

DIM iy]
37n.

LXX

add on

vTrep/JaivovTcs

&r^Oj3otvouortv="OM
t,

*3

JMpT
6.

This wcy be a gloss derived from Zeph.

with 133,
Dt.
2, 15.

but

it

may
13.

also be a genuine part of the text.

">"

T]
Ex.

Cf.,
9, 3.

v. ii.

Jud.
2,

i,
;

35

and with

HM

v. 9.
i,

7,

12, 15.

Jud.

15

also Jos. 4, 24.

Ruth

13.

^s] ?y would be more usual.

DDB^l]
:

cf.

DCb>;i_

avrois ets
eis

tTT^yayev avrois, reading DCK^I (incorrectly) as Ex. 15, 26. Ez. 39, 21 (We.). LXX continue K al efe Cetrev Tots vaCs, with a variant (in Lucian s recension) Kal fcf3pa<rav
/cat
:

LXX

TOS
f.

vai)s

avrwv,

on which see We., and Aptowitzer,

ZA

W. 1909,

242
(\l/.

CDU^I means

a^ /a/i/ them
2,

waste or
;

desolate,

usually of places

79, 7) or things (Hos.

It is

14, of vines)

of persons Ez. 20, 26. Job

6, 7.

a word hardly found elsewhere, except in poetry, and the

more

elevated prose style (e.g. Lev. 26, 22. 31. 32; Ez. 30, 12. 14).

Destroyed

(EVV.)

is

too general.

But probably Ehrlich

is

is

right in

reading Q?n^1 (cf. vv. 9.

n), which, as Field shews,

(cf. 7,

also presupposed
7,

by Aquila

s e

^ayeScuVtcrev

io Aq.
:

1
\fr.

8,

15 Aq. Dt.

23 Aq.).

Dvayi]

To

be vocalized

Ey?^

the vowels of the text refer, of

traditional view of
^>sy

course, to the marginal D*lhl93.

it

The

was

that
;

denoted either the anus

(cf. 5, 1 2

LXX

eVATyy^o-av ets ras eSpas

5}

5 Vulg. quinque anos aureos), or an affection of the anus ; and hence, 3eing a coarse word, the Massorites directed D HnD to be read for

2^sy wherever

it

occurs (vv.

9. 12. 6, 4. 5.

Dt. 28, 27).

In

fact,

how-

52
ever,
it is

The First Book of Samuel,

pretty certain that
it

denotes plague-boils (RV. marg.), which

occur only in the groin, arm-pits, and sides of the neck.

See
ff.,

DB.

iii.

325* EB.
;

s.v.

EMERODS

Exp. Times,

xii.

(1900-1), 378

xv.

(1903-

4),

476

ff.

rr^amW intwnx]

epexeg. of Dnx, but attached in a manner

style,

unworthy of the best Hebrew

and probably a marginal

avri}s
avt<t>v-r)cra.v

gloss.

LXX

has instead

K<U

/JLCO-OV

TT)<>

xwpas

/xvcs,

represent an original Qr)K ?|taa

other additions of
7.

Dnaay
doubt

jn_ (cf.

Ex.

7, 29).

which may On this, and

LXX in this chapter, see more fully at the end of ch. 6.

i,

riENl] See on

12.

No

nCNM

should be restored.

8.
i,

3D

1
"

nj]

For the
13!?

order,

22. Jos. 2, 16
2,

mnn,

Jud. 20,

which gives brightness to the style, cf. Ex. 4. i Ki. 2, 26 i^ nroy, Is. 23, 12.
i

52, 4. Jer.
20,
6.

10

also (where the position is emphatic)

v.
J"I3

Ki. 12,

i.

Jer.

32, 5.

At the end of the

(LXX
:

ts

TfOOa) seems to be

desiderated.
9.
"lt?N

On
i64
d

the site of Gath, see p. 57.

"Don

nnx] I^N nnK occurs

)

frequently

(GK.

only here and Lev. 25, 48.

inf.

nnx HHX
(

with a

pf.

without
is

standing alone

elsewhere construed with an

confusion, panic, v.

constr.
14, 20. Dt. 7, 23

n.

discomfiture

).

AV.
ras 28/aas

follows the Jewish interpreters (Rashi

Dnnwn

JTa

Kimchi D-JSnn IHO DlpCQ Dorian

cis
avr>v,

MO

cf.

LXX

K al eTrdragev
this as
\y to

Symm.

eis

ra KpvTrra CLVTWV) in treating

is

equivalent to
written for D
:

^rrV.

There

no

difficulty in

supposing
is

be

but the meaning assigned to the Nif.

not a possible

one.
lips
:

In Arabic
if

j*

means

to

have inverted (or cracked] eyelids or lower

it

the text, therefore, be correct,

is

probable that

"inb*

is

de

rived from a root signifying properly to cleave,

and Arabic

to different affections of the skin.

and applied in Hebrew Render and plague2

boils brake out to

1

them

(Anglice

upon them
:

The same
list

Massoretic

the passage is quoted in a explanation is implied elsewhere of eighteen words written once with in lieu of the normal D
fe>

Mass.
3

Magna on Hos.

2, 8

see also Ochlah we-Ochlah,

Amongst

the passages cited is Hos. 8, 4 IT BTl = Pesh. has here a doublet: see PS. Thes. cols. 2757, 4309. Nestle 1909, p. 232), following the second of these, .Oo^^iia^a Q^Jkok./

No. 191 and ITDn (RV. marg.}.

;

ib.

p. 42.

(ZAW.
(= Aq.
but as

irtpit\v6r)aa.v at eSpai},

would read WlB^li a Hithp. from

tSpai, this yields

mB

to loose:

DvDy

does not

mean

no sense.

In illustration of the clause

Vi.e.

6-VI. 3
v. 6.

53

Evay.

Qre Q^ntp; see on

10.

pipy]
(see

12 miles

NE. of Ashdod, and

12 miles

NW.

of Beth-

shemesh

on

6, 13).

^N]
est in

to

me, spoken in the

.

name

of the people as a whole.

(

So often

as Ex. 17, 3 b

Nu.

b 20, 18. i9 .

21, 22. Jos. 9, 7

perhaps thou dwell-

my

midst,

said by Israel to the

17. 19

17, 14. Jud.

n,

end; 12, 3 a

20,

ambassadors from Gibeon). b Hab. 23 3, 14 ( to scatter

.

me

).

Comp. on

30, 22;

and

LOT. 366
Hebrew
;

f.

(edd. 6-8, 390).

By

riN1 *JJVBn?]

In the best
v.

style this

would be expressed

By nNI TIN TFCfih (as

Ex. 17, 3

II 14, 16).

The same com

bination occurs, however, eleven or twelve times in the course of the OT. Dt. n, 6 (contrast Nu. 16, 32). 15, 16. Jos. 10, 30 b 32. 33. 37.
:
.

39.

2 Ki. 20, 6 (
;

Est. 2, 9

cf.

38, 6). Jer. 32, 29. Ez. 29, 4 (Keil). Zech. 5, 4. 2 Ch. 28, 23 b Comp. Hitzig on Is. 29, 7.
.

= Is.

i2 b

Ex.

which ny lB
6,
I.

2, 23 taWRil ^N Dnyitt occurs in prose.

i>yni

the only other passage in

D tjnn]
njne>

LXX
Ex.

adds

/cat

eeco-ev
at the

rj

yf)

avrw

/ivas

^^1^1

nnziDy

end of the chapter. 2. D On DDp as well as on the other principal words used by EDp?] the Hebrews to denote divination and magic, the study of W. Robert
(c
f.

7, 28).

See

should be consulted.

son Smith in the Journal of Philology, See also the writer

xiii.

273 ff., xiv. p. 113 notes on Dt. 18, 10. 1 1.

p.

ff.

HB2] wherewith ? as Mic. 6, 6 (Keil). LXX, Pesh. DTIN DTI7B>D ON. 3. tPfb&D ON]

Analogy

certainly

demands

the insertion

of the subject;
9, 15.

see especially the similarly

framed sentences, Jud.

the ptcp. the subject
is

n,

9.

Jer. 42, 13 (Tenses,

it

omitted only when

(ib.

is

137): with indefinite, or when it

cf.

has been mentioned just previously

"Q

135. 6;
:

GK.
5,

ii6 e
;

>

t ).

UTi] return, render as

:

ITU* nrtJB
Dtf
Is.

Ki.

3,

a due (dwroSowai) Nu. 4 (of Mesha s annual tribute to

i^.

72, 10

Israel), etc.

N] AV.

trespass-offering,

RV.

guilt-offering (regularly,

except
is

53, 10, where

the

AV.

is

not altered, but the correct rendering

in

margin).
137,

On

the nature of the

that the cases in

given D N see Oehler, Theol. of

O.T.,

who shews

which the

guilt-offering
x. 4) cited

is

following in

LXX

and Vulg., see the curious Midrash (Midr. Sam.

1909, p. 242.

by

Aptowitzer,

ZAIV.

54

The First Book

of

Samuel,

prescribed in the Priests

another

s rights,

either a positive injury done, or

is

Code always imply some infringement of some right or due

used here in a more popular and general
is

withheld.

Doubtless Dt?K

sense

still,

the offering of the Philistines

tion for the

wrong which they conceive has been done

according
the

designed as a compensa to the ark whilst

in their territory.
4.
31

ISDD]
204
b

by,

to,

number
Job

of,

an accus. of

limitation

or definition.

Cf. v. 18.
;

Ex. 16,

16.

i,

5;

also II 21, 20;

and

Ew.
^ay]

i.e.

3000 GK. vsy. The Massorites mean vby

,
.

n8 h

to

be read V n 9
?.

cf.

on

5, 6.

D^]
5.

either

Babl

(8 Heb. MSS.) or

D?S>

(LXX, Pesh.) must

evidently be read.
V. 5 a (We.), or at least the DD^By] i. e. B?$B$ Qre D3 lHtp. words pixn nx D JVrWCn (Dhorme), seems to be a redactional gloss
s
:

see p. 6 1.

1123

Dnnn]
,

Jos. 7,
i?? is

19: and,

differently, Jer. 13, 16.

i

D3^yiO

^P

11

construed similarly
j/0z>
/<?

Ki. 12, 10. Jon.

i, 5.

move or o^c/, unimpres 6. 1*733 fi make the heart heavy, i.e. It is the word used by J (Qat and -#?/i) in the narrative of sionable.
the plagues, Ex.
7, 14.

8,

u.

28.

9,7. 34. 10,

i.

Comp.

the writer s

xodus

in the

Cambr.

Bible, p. 53.

^>ynn]

So Ex.

10, 2.

Not wrought wonderfully, but made

on
31, 4.
:

a toy

of

(cf. RV. mn^Bh

7.

marg.}; see
.

n^K3] So

12, 8

see on

4, 20.
i,

Dnx] The numeral has here a weaker sense than in i, scarcely more than a; cf. Ex. 16, 33; ch. 7, 9. 12. i Ki. 19,
2 Ki. 7, 8.
8, 6.

and

is

4.

22, 9.

12, 10.
suff.,

DD^y]
8.

the masc.
It is

according to

GK.

135;
T3"lS

cf. v.

10.

W"^N2]

possible, of course, that an

ri73y, in

may

have formed

a regular appendage to an
to
it

which case the

art. will

be prefixed

to exist (so

as denoting an object expected, under the circumstances named, b his 18, io the spear, almost probably 2, 13 the prong
:

spear: 25, 23 Ticnn; II 13, 9 mcpenviN, etc.); but there are many passages to which this explanation will not apply, and the rendering

a chest
fully

is

perfectly in accordance with

Hebrew

idiom.

See more

on

i,

4 and 19, 13.

VI. 4-12
9- l^ian

55
3, 24).

the
*]"i*l]
li>13J

way

to,

etc.,

as regularly (Gen.

On

the

after DN, see p. 35. "pi, immediately position of n n Kin it is an accident (which) hath befallen us rnpo]
:j>

(GK. IT
one

i55
K!>]

d f
)

cf. Notice the unusual order, intended to emphasize ^ Not Y. hath sent me (but some Gen. 45, 8. Nu. 16, 29 jri^
:
N!>

else),

ty.

115, 17.

Cf.

10.

cnosn] On

the D-,

GK. 1526; Lex. 5i8 b 6o b see GK.

.

(c).

ta] from nbs with

11.
coffer.

the sense of

And The
17.

they set the ark of

type of sentence
34, 29.
is

K?| (GK. 75^): cf. Yahweh upon the cart, and

one not uncommon
13,
in

^3

25, 33.

also the
(e.g.

Hebrew

Gen. 12,

43, 15.

Nu.

of the instances that occur might be explained as due to the com Nu. 13, a6 b ) ; but this does not appear to be the case in most and it must be recognized as a feature of Hebrew style, when

Some few

posite character of the narrative (so

:

two

subjects

containing attached subsequently.

i8 b
b
.

(or objects) have to be combined in one clause, for the clause one of the subjects (or objects) to be completed, the other being

See

a.

Gen.
"by

b
2,

41, 27*. Ex. 35, 22. Lev. 22, 4. V3.

2

Nu.

16, 2*.
i,

27

Jud. 6,5*

Drvbn&O

12,17 irva nNi a^nj D wa b i Ki. Jud. 21, io 5,9. Jer. 27,
.

DrP3p1 OH runs ns
a 7
-

Ki.

^ ym 34,29.
c.

6,

15:

6.

Gen.

i6 b

43,15.18. EX. 29,

b
.

3.

32, 29
1

(analogous examples with preposi

*]riN

tions)

Gen. 28, i4b

Ex. 34, 27 b ipfrOty HNI

a
.

nn3

YHD.
a
.

Dt.

7,

i4

28,46.

J3Jjm 13 1"in ^Kn. 56 cannot, in all such cases, be treated (Ew.

54*

1ND

Jer. 25, 12

MT.

40, 9

The word attached

339*) as subordinate.

12.

nnE"!]

(a)

The

pi.

fem. with the prefix

>,

as Gen. 30, 38.

Dan.
the 3
in

8,
pi.

22

f.

In Hebrew, except in these three passages, the form of

is

fem.

always ruaron
it

in Arabic,
is

Aramaic and Ethiopic,

is

on the other hand, as also regularly yaklubna, and the form

taktubna
k

noted only as a rare dialectical variety (Stade, 534*; GK. The most original form would seem certainly to be yaktubna 4 7 ). m^na ): taktubna appears to have been (2 pi. nron, maran: 3 pi. produced through the influence of the 3rd fem. sing. 3D3n. The latter
11

"QrO

form, however,

came

to

predominate

in

Hebrew, while

in Arabic

it

only prevailed dialectically.

1

In illustration of the recourse to the guidance of an animal in cases of doubt,

see Wellh. Reste Arab.

2

Heidentumes (1887),
\.

P-

I
47>

e d- 2

^),

P- 201.

See Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften,

(1885), p. 99.

56
(&)
cf.
"I5~]$n

The First Book of Samuel,

(with dagesh and short hireq) stands for a normal
1|

*l

n3"|B

fgjl

Ki. 3, 15 for fi*M: Stade,

division
:

121;

GK.

71.

i2 a

The main
i,

is

at

E>OB>

JV3, the first occurrence of the

zagef(see on
do-wSeVa>s r

28)

what follows

is

a circumstantial clause, attached

defining

more

particularly

how

the kine went along

p. 57.

(cf.

Ki.

1 8, 6,
is

and

Tenses,
:

163).

On

Beth-shemesh, see

nnx]
lyjl

here emphatic

the kine went along one highway, without

it.

attempting to deviate from

"pn

tthn]

Exactly so (except that sometimes there

is

a ptcp. for
6,
:

the finite verb) Gen. 8, 5 (rd.

9.
i3*>

wn
3,
i/r.

for the

wholly irregular VH). Jos.

Qre.

Jud. 14,

9.

II 3, 16.
Is.

2 Ki. 2,

n p?^ ^n
eyiSBI
1jp
761"!.

D^n)f
50, 4t

with the verb at the end,

16

m^n

Jer.

with the verb in the middle,

impf. with

126, 6 nbni

!pn.

And

with an
16, I3t;

with a

pf.

waw consec. for the second inf. abs. ch. 19, 23. II with waw consec. (frequentative) in the same place,
a
t.

II 13, 19

(see note). Jos. 6, i3

Cf.

GK.

113".

Comp. an analogous idiom

n ya,
8, 3

with an adj. (but see note) on 14, 19.

There
is

iya for
viz.

GK.

75.

another type, occurring twice,

Gen.

3bh *p7n 131^1. 12,9

8, 7

With

other verbs

we

have, of the type IJNl *]1n

1

"]1,

Gen.

N^
3fe>J

n
21,

15,

30 nbai ri^y
(rd. Tjbrn

^y

!.

Ki. 20, 37.

19,

Ki. 3, 24 (rd. with LUC.

, . .

n3rn NS

ifcoji).

13"

nhj.
17.

Is.
i,

22 Xterft V\V

P1J31.

31, 5 (rd.
11

^srn and

D^tpn !).

Jer.

12,"

Ez.

14 (rd. 3tri

N^ N^

ni>nn

hiJ ^). Joel 2,26f.

And

of the type

3^1

ffcri

mt^l

Jer. 7, 13

n^ni

D|^n

similarly,

always with

D3^n,

7,25. 11,7. 25,3.4. 26,5.19. 32,33 (rd.

2

ISIKJ; ID^N!

and

for the first

ID^).
IWDB

35, 14. 15. 44, 4.

Ch. 36, isf.

Cf. II 15, 23.

13.

onvp

n^ni]
lit.

GK.

145^.
is

pftyu]

An

pcy,

deepening,

highlander

term

for a

broad

depression between

hills,

especially for a

a mountainous country, like the Vale of Elah [see on 17,

wide avenue running up into the Vale of 2],

;

the writer s

Hebron, and the Vale of Aijalon (G. A. Smith, H. G., 384 f., 654 f. cf. art. in DB. iv. 846 with list of D^p^V mentioned in the OT.). Here it denotes (EB. s.v. BETH-SHEMESH) the broad, and beautiful,
still

and
1

well-cultivated

Wady

es-Sarar

(EB.

\.

567),

up which
. , ,

the

Jer. 41, 6
7f3>n

rohl

Tl

n
1]>l

**?!_ is

anomalous; we should expect

N3

nblfi

IJ^ n Nim.

Dnhm,

Cornill read, after

LXX, nbll

T]Sn

DoSl Dm.

VI. i2-i8
railway

57
is

now

climbs from Jaffa to Jerusalem. Beth-shemesh

feet

now

Am

above the sea, on the slope of the hills on the S. of this Shems, 917 Wady, 12 miles SE. ofEqron, and 14 miles W. of Jerusalem. The Wady
opens out on the N. of
2
it,

with Zor ah (Jud. 13, 2 etc.)

now Sar ah,

Wady.
is
niN"6

miles to the N., on the

hills

on

the opposite (N.) side of the

niNlb]

LXX

cis dTravn/criv avrijs

frlNlPr.

Though

not
so

ungrammatical, yet the pregnant construction UlK Tp? iniOB^

is

much more
it

forcible

and idiomatic (Jud.

JNB>

19, 3 ins~ip^
inK"lpi>

nK>

also with

other verbs, as 14, 5 insnpb

c h. 16, 4

mrvi;

21, 2) that

decidedly deserves the preference.

14.
B12t}>iTrV3]

Formed according
^Nrrrvo

to the regular
is

custom when the

art.
:

gentile adj. or patronymic of a

compound name
(i Ki. 16, 34),

defined by the
(Jud. 6,

so

tonbrrra (16,
17-18*.

i),

nrymaN

n).

Apparently (on account of the discrepancy between v. 18* and v. 4) not part of the original narrative see p. 6 1. V. i8 b will then continue v. 16.
:

7.

nrj?]

The most

south-westerly of the Philistine

to Egypt.
site

cities,

the last

town

in Palestine

on the route
it.

Ashkelon was on the seais

coast, 12 miles

north of

The

of Gath

not certain (Buhl,

196; G. A. Smith, H. G. 196); but it was not improbably Tell esSdfyeh, the collis darus of William of Tyre, and the fortress Blanco,
guarda, or Blanchegarde, of the Crusaders, now a mud village, on the top of a projecting limestone rock, with conspicuous white cliffs,

300

feet high,

looking

down towards Ashkelon,

196, 226
f. ;

12 miles to the
p.

WNW.

(see view in also p.

1

Conder, Tent Work in Palestine, ed. 1887,

;

273: see

275

f.

H. G.

Cheyne,

art.

GATH
/{

in

EB.}.
18, 8
:

8.

D^IDH nt?or6]
T1?D]

belonging

to

the five lords:

in
2

? as 14, 16.

similar delimitation

Ki. 17, 9

TV
cf.

"jy

Dnm
"Pen

TJT

11

men of
sit

the open country, country-folk

Dt.
11

3,

ny

cities

of the country-folk:

Zech.

2,

rfna

D^Bn

3^ri Jerusalem

shall

(metaph.

be inhabited)

as open

country districts.

r&ntfl

^3K

nj?l]

^>ax

meadow

gives

no sense

here.

We
"riV):

must

evidently read n
lV.l

px

(see

v.

15) with

LXX, Targ., and

,

for ^V\ either

(see Jos. 24, 27.

full

placing a

stop at

Gen. 31, 52) or (see Jud. 6, 24) then, And the great the end of i8 a we shall get

58
stone,

The First Book of Samuel,

upon which they
was
to
still

set etc.,

is

a witness [or,

is

still\

to this

day in

the field of Joshua the Beth-shemeshite.

The
at

stone on which the ark

was

set

shewn

in the field of

Joshua

Beth-shemesh; and

it

is

appealed
n7Tin
without
in

by the narrator as evidence of the facts which he relates.

px]
it, is

The
is

use of the

art.

with the adj.

when

the subst.

is

rare in classical

Hebrew, being mostly

restricted to cases
itself

which the subst.

a word which

may be
nvn
i

regarded as defining
Ki.
7, 8. 12.

(D1*
~iytJ>

Gen.
Ez.

i,

31.

2, 3.

Ex. 20, 10

al.,

Ez. 40, 28;

9, 2.

Zech. 14, 10), and even then being exceptional.

x.

The
209
;

instances have been analysed by the present writer in Tenses,

cf.

GK.

i26 w

>

Examples of a more exceptional type

21, 19. Jer. 6, 20.
this construction

are ch. 12, 23.

16, 23. II 12, 4.

In /^/-Biblical
there are

17, 2.

Hebrew

became more common

ones, as

in the

Mishnah
the

some

forty instances (including

some standing
),

HTIjn flD33

Great Synagogue,

ppDlin ~\}W

the ox to be stoned

but mostly in cases where

(according to Segal,

some emphasis

rests

Mttnaic Hebrew, 1909, pp. 19-21) 1908) pp. 665-667 upon the attribute, as contrasted with something different.

JQR-

Here

it is

best to restore the

it

art.

31

n^1?n
there

Xn or [

Ijnj n-ljn).
error,

19. In

this verse as
is

stands in

MT.

must be some

though
(i)
"pn

it

not possible to restore the text with entire certainty.

nx"1

does not
but

mean (AV.)
on or

to look into

^N

ns"i),

to look

at,

(which would be rather sometimes with satisfaction and

pleasure
6,

(\\/.

27, 13), at other times with interest

and attention (Cant.

ii to look upon the green plants of the valley: Ez. 21, 26 he looked

at the liver:

Qoh.

11, 4

D s 3y3 nsi he that looketh at the clouds:

if,

Gen. 34,

Jud. 16, 27 end):

it

therefore, the expression

be used

here in a bad sense,

interest (so

will

signify to
i.

gaze

at, viz.

with an unbecoming

We. Kp.

Stade, Gesch.

204).

(2)

The number

of those

smitten
1

is

and the juxtaposition of D^13n without 1 It is true, both numbers are in another indication of error
is

incredible in itself;

LXX:
for

but there they are even more out of the question than in
limits the slaughter to the

MT.;
!

sons of Jechoniah (cm for Dja) Josephus speaks of the number smitten as only seventy ; and modern
scholars generally (including Keil) reject
1

LXX

H$

t^tf

D^CH

as a gloss,

numeration, Gen.

These are some examples of the repetition of H3K 5, 8. 10. 13 al., but none without 1.

with similar ascending

VI. i8-2i
though how
speculation.
it

59
must remain matter of

found

its

way

into the text

(3) Instead of
KCU OUK

CtDK>

rP3
utol

^3X3

"p

LXX

has the remarkable reading

the

TJo-fxeViaai

ol

lexoft ou ev

rot? dv8pa(riv Bai0cra/*,vs,

its

originality of which
a0YAevio>

speaks

strongly in

favour.

Unfortunately
it

does not occur elsewhere in LXX., so that

cannot be
is

ascertained definitely what

not probable that

Hebrew word it may here express. It such an unusual word would have been chosen
inDB>

to

common term like (which indeed in v. 13 is represented S 33 1p3 K?l, i.e. And by the ordinary v</miveo-0ai). We. suggests the sons of Jechoniah came not off guiltless, were not unpunished,
render a

WW

among the men of Beth-shemesh, because they had gazed at the ark of Yahweh and he smote among them (DH3 for DJ73, as LXX) seventy men (so Now.). Klostermann suggests the rare ViPl (Ex. 18, 9) for And the sons of Jechoniah rejoiced not among the men rja-pevicrav of Beth-shemesh, when (or because) they looked upon the ark of Yah weh 1 (so Sm. Bu.). Whatever be the verb to which fop,, corresponds,
;
:

the adoption of the

LXX
:

reading effects a material improvement in

"pi

follows awkwardly upon MT. Djn and is in fact tautologous, whereas DH3 71 of LXX trBnV3 nWK3, refers naturally and consistently to the sons of Jechoniah before men
the style of the verse
in
"p

tioned.

The

first

*p

in

MT., on
13OO,
cf.
-

the other hand,

must be
.

just the

mutilated remnant of the clause preserved in

20. 13^ynJ
relieve

LXX
us,

more than
its
.

-from upon
II 13, 17.

from

off us, so as to
i

us

of

presence:

20, 21. 22.

Ki. 15, 19.

2 Ki. 12,

i9

8, 14.
site

Nu.

21, 7.
is

21.

vn] The

of Qiryath-ye arim
it

not certain, as the

name has
;

was most probably (Robinson; EB. s.v. cf. G. A. Smith, H. G. 226) at Qaryet el-Enab (the City of grapes ), miles NE. of Beth-shemesh, and 7 miles NW. of Jerusalem, 9-10 among the hills, 2385 ft. above the sea. Beth-shemesh (see on v. 13)
not been preserved: but

was much lower: hence

1

come down

(notice

went down,

of the

bable
3

Ew. Then, understand the passage ino ^ K^I.

%

similarly,

though they read the

less

pro

Vulg. represents the

first

K*6t by viros, the second

by

plebis

cf.

Targ., and

b Jerus. Sank. II 4 (2o 62), as cited

by Aptow.

ZAW.

1909, p. 243.

60
border

The First Book of Samuel,

from Qiryath-ye arim
to
.

1 Beth-shemesh, in Josh. 15, lo) Topographical distinctions are always carefully observed by the Hebrew Let the reader study, with this point of view in his mind, the writers.

history of
7,
i.

Samson

(Jud. 13-16).
Pesh., Targ.,

nynn] Read, probably, with 55 MSS., LXX,

and

II 6, 3
ch. 6,

nyim

T<5>K.

In

MT.
v.

presents two difficulties:

:

(i) the abrupt

mention of
in the

the mice in

(2) the disagreement between vv. 4

and 18

number of images

of mice

v.

18 speaking of an indefinite number

only of
five.

(one for each town and

appears to remove these
v.

village), v. 4
difficulties
:

At

first

sight,

LXX
in

for (i) the

mention of the mice

is

2 prepared by two notices describing a plague of mice in the

country in 5, 6 (on and (2) whereas in

in

linn

Dn33y

i^yi)

MT.

a 6, 5 is little

and 6, i (annay nine Dinto) more than a repetition of v. 4,

;

LXX

v.

is

confined to the DvSy,

but an unspecified

v. 5 to the

mice, not, however,

limited to

five,

number

(4

b KOL elirav,

Kar

apiOpov
vfuv
/AUWJ/

TWV crarpaTrwv
/cat

TOJV

rots ap^ova-Lv
Sia^>^ipovT(o

dXAo^uAwv TTCVTC ISpas \pvcras, OTL a v/xaiv KCU TW Xaw, 5 KCU /AVS xpuo-ovs
T^V y^v).

TTTOLcrfJia ev

o/toui>/Mt

TWV

TWV

The

additions of

LXX

in 5, 6. 6,

i,

and

the redistribution of the

DvSy and the mice

in vv. 4-5, are accepted

by Thenius.

We.

takes a different view.

right: the last clause
lords,

He
ofz>.

argues with great force that vv. 4-5

4,
is

MT.

is

for

one plague was on you

that,

all,

and on your

he points out,

intended to explain

although

only three districts (Ashdod, Gath, and Eqron) were implicated in

what had happened to the ark, and all must accordingly share
the mice as well as for the
1

all

had suffered through the plague,

DK>N

in the

the

number
it

five being

thus chosen, as representing Philistia as a whole,

was

sufficient for

D^Dy

and the cogency of the argument,

E. of Beth-shemesh, up the

Conder
Ismain,

s is

site

(DJ3. s.v.) at
less

Erma, 4 miles
(cf.

W.
is

much

probable

Buhl, Geogr. 167 n.}.

Notice (i) that there

the

no

sufficient reason for

supposing

mount Ye arim

mount of

woods

to

have been contiguous to Qiryath-ye arim; and (2) in so far as the identification rests upon the resemblance of Erma with Ye arim, that the m is radical in one
word, and merely the mark of the plural
2

in the other.
vi.

On

the destructiveness of field-mice, see Arist. Hist. Nat.

37, p. 58o

b
,

15-20, who relates how they would sometimes in harvest time appear suddenly unspeakable numbers, and destroy a crop entirely in a single night.

in

VII. 1-2
for

6i
it

one plague

etc.,

would be

just destroyed, if

were
6,

to

be applied
18
it
l

to the

number

of the

D^ay

alone.

He

concludes that

4-5, as read in
v.
;

LXX,

have been corrected for the purpose of agreeing with

and

accepting vv.

4-5 MT., he

a rejects v. i8 (to

pan), and with

v. 17,
.

as inconsistent (in the

number of golden mice offered) with v. 4 As regards the further point, the abrupt mention of the mice
4, he considers the difficulty as apparent merely
:

in

v.

the mice, he

argues, are mentioned not because there

but as emblems of a pestilence

in

the double

had been a plague of them, like the double dream

DB>K,

Gen. 41, 25, relates to one and the same object, viz. the plague s due to the supposition that of D^ay and v. 5 a is a redactional gloss And accordingly v. 4 implied that there had been a plague of mice.
:

he rejects the additions of

LXX

in 5, 6.

6,

i,

as

made merely

for the

purpose of relieving the apparent difficulty of vv. 4-5, on the theory that these verses pre-supposed an actual plague of mice. He admits,
however,
justly, that if this
is

explanation of the

mice

in v. 4

be not

accepted, there

no

alternative but to treat the additions in question

as a genuine part of the original text.

7,
2.

217. Samuel
31

judge ship.

Defeat of Philistines at Eben-ezer.

D^BTI

QT l]
here,

that the days were multiplied (Gen. 38, 12),

and

became twenty years.

Not

as

EVV.
means
it

Wl]
1

Only
if

nnj in Heb.

to

mourn or lament

(Ez. 32,

be most safely explained as a pregn. constr., mourned or sighed after Yahweh went after
8): so,
the reading be
correct,
will

Him mourning
1

or sighing (for the Nif.

to reconcile

cf.

PUNJ)

".

It is

doubtful

if

The attempt has been made

of the
priests,

w. 4 and

18 by supposing v. 4 to

relate the proposal

and

v. 18 to describe

what was actually

it is

done.

But had the proposal not been adopted as it was first made, that this would have been in some manner indicated as it
:

is,

natural to suppose the phrase in v. 10

is

And the men

2

did so.
s

Comp.

the form in which the story of the destruction of Sennacherib

(2.

army

reached Herodotus

141)

field-mice gnawing the leathern thongs of the soldiers

bows and 3 So in
*

shields.

his Composition des

ii.

Hex. und der

hist.

1 JSucher"

(1889), p. 241.

by the Syriac lexico graphers (I S. col. 2294) with the meaning ingemuit. In Eth. the corresponding verb means recreari, respirare, in the causative conj.
]oJ
is

So Ewald, Hist.

602 (E. T. 427).

cited

(II. i)

to console, in
:

the reflexive (III. 3) to console oneself (sc. by confession, as

Lev. 16, 21)

Dillm. col. 632.

62
Ges.
is

The First Book of Samuel,

right in rendering were gathered.
It is

true that M3J1K occurs in

it

Targ.

in a

connexion which implies gathering, but

r6aD7, so that
doubtful
-"n

is

always used

with reference to some religious object, being often followed by frvID^

i""1

or

<l//

it

is

if

it

expresses

to be
. ,

gathered
for

simply.

Thus ^.12,14
"

jiDn^K

NJrtas
.
,

inn

prunni
30,

ins

nvi:

Jer.

3,

prtan:

T nD ob pn,
/<?

Nrmisn prurv ^KIK Noyi: 33, 13. ^y NEy prun (for mi by nnnyn); Hos. 2, 17 prum
31,
11

17 22 b

H NOB
n<

ru r6ac& prum:

21

3nbiai
is

pnjm,
is

similarly 3, 3. 5.
is

The

use of pyw
pyr.

^^ called together

not parallel: for nnj

not a

synonym of

Probably the
occurring in
to

Targumic usage this passage, and the sense which

merely based upon the Hebrew word

it

was there presumed

very doubtful.

have, and cannot therefore be regarded as independent evidence

its
is correct, meaning. Whether, however, have eTre^Xe^c, whence We. conjectured ^Q?l

of

Wl

is

LXX
Jud.

(cf.

Ez. 29, 16);

but perhaps
9, 3.

^1

(Klo. Bu.)

is

better;
<

cf.

i
1|l
i

Ki.

2,

28; and (with 3p)

As Ehrlich

justly remarks, nrt3

is

2 (Is. 2,

= Mic.

4,

Jer.

31, 12. 51, 44 1) ap- Kittel

text:

much

too poetical for the present con

but his

own

ViTI (12, 14) does not

read very well after 17P1

just before.
3.
31
I

VDn] The same phrase

""13?.

in

Gen. 35,

2.

4;

Jos.

24,

23;

Jud. 10,

1 6.

*n?S

is lit.

gods of foreign-ness

(=foreign
78, 8.
/^<f,

gods}: so

133 (*33) }3

= foreigners).
rffz,

^f^ry

cf.

Job n,
al.

13.

i/r.

Ch. 29, 18

|?n^).

Ch. 12, 14

57,

8.

78, 37,

and pa:
pi.

Comp.
the

}to3

of the heart,

f
the
it

zfirm, unwavering,
as

spirit,
is

51, 12.

flinty] Massorites

The
:

of ninety,

name

vocalized

by

but the Gk. Ao-Tdprr)

(cf.

also the Ass. Ishtar)

make
J

practically certain that the real

(like

pronunciation was

Ashtart,

QriB y

MilK) having been chosen for the purpose of suggesting HBO shame (cf. on II 4, 4). mnK y is mentioned frequently in
for

^b

Phoenician inscriptions, often by the side of Baal. Thus Cooke, NSI. No. 5 (the Inscription of Eshmun azar of Sidon), 1. i4f. ONI

fnm mnCTJ
^yn
DB>

n3ro

Ashtart our lady;

nmB^

nnn^yOK and my mother Am ashtart, priestess of D pK pV3 Q31V f^ DH3 |33 (1. JH3K1 nni pV H3 and we are they who have built
11

17!".)

B>

5>yai>

VII. 3
11

63

temples [E
a

^]
;

temple

n ??]

gods of the Sidonians in Sidon, the sea country, to Ba al of Sidon, and a temple to Ashtart, the name of
to the

Ba

al; 6, 5

13, 3

an image [n^BD] (from Kition in Cyprus)

erected

by one Yaash
jaulus,
i.e.

mntJ>y!?

TSrb

to her lady, to Ashtart;

38, 3 (from

the sanctuary of the temple of CIS.l.\. 136. iJ MO, i mrwy^> Ashtart; 45, i (from Carthage); mtD TIN to Ashtart of Eryx 2 an altar of bronze; 255 (from "ntPjnJ

Malta)

mriB>y

D3 tJnpO

Carthage)

JTTINn

mnB>y

13y mptaiajf
(do.)
E>

Abdmelqart,

servant

of

Ashtart the glorious

nne>y
c>x

263

pri

S>ya5>

p&6i bya

ja

n:n^ na-fc

noyn

B>K

mnpyK

[TH]

to

the lady Tanith, the face

probably = revelation]
"15J>N]

of Baal, and to the lord Baal

Am ashtart,
(i.e.

who was

in the congregation of the

Hamman, which men [^ N]

(cf.

Ashtart

among

the people attached to her temple), vowed.

n Sidon
Ki.

Ashtart appears to have been the presiding goddess

5.

n,

33 D31
E).

Tlta

vlelqart

(mpi
is

Tyre she was subordinated to mntry) of Ashtart in the Philistine town of temple
:

in

^.shqelon
f

mentioned

in

31,

10
:

(see

the

note).

The worship
.

Ashtart was very widely diffused

ited

Index, p. 94i 64 footnote ; and cf. Head, mntryn] The Ashtorelhs will denote either images of Ashtart, r (preferably) the goddesses of that name which were worshipped

on

p.

see particulars in the articles b His I. Numorum 2

,

different localities, just as

cf.
}"tt
i>yn

DvlDn

v.

4 are the local or other special

5a als: 6,
i
;

just

cited;

fm^>

^y2 Cooke, No. 54 a; nv

i>ya

lenta
p.

Baal of Tarsus on coins of that city, Gesenius, Monunn Phoenicia, p. 2y6f., and Plate 36, VII. VIII. A, B, C, Cooke,
i>y2

3 DDK ^n Baal of 343-346, Head, Hist. Numorum, pp. 615, 6i6 eaven, Cooke, 9, and often: }DH ^y2 Baal Hamman, of uncertain
;

leaning

(EB.

i.

402; Paton, as
tablets

cited, p.

64

n., p.

287
p.

f.),

constantly

n the Punic votive

ipparently)
r

from N. Africa, Cooke,

104;

Baal

the Healer,
i.e.

CIS. Li. 41 (from Kition);

BaX/xapKwSo?,
site

le

IpiE ^y3 Baal of dances, in inscriptions from of an ancient temple at Deir el Kal a in the neighbourhood

g.
a

Heb. ;5OD (Ez. 8,3.5), ft en ( m asc. and fern.) in Phoenician inscriptions: Cooke, 13, 2 23, 2-5 25, i comp. above, p. 34 note. Erycina ridens, Hor. Carm. i. 2. 33.
; ;

Ed.

2 (1911),

pp. 731

f.,

816.

64
of Beyrout
1
.

The First Book of Samuel,

And
(in

in the

OT.

itself,

TiyQ ^yn,

JVO
on

by3, 312T by3,

and, as preserved in names of places, 13

}iyD,

^X/2 .Zfaa/
;

o/"

Fortune, ^ya

niya

i>yn

Hos.

9, 10), jia*
nnnK>yrn

2 ^yn, etc.

cf.

II 5, 20.

On

the position of
),

(separated from -OJn Tl^K, and after

cf.

on

6, ii.
#</

he may. or (Anglice)

he will.

On

the jussive, see

Tenses,
5.

62.

nnDXOn] with

the

art.,

the

word being an
is

appellative,

meaning the
called Nebi

outlook-point.

The Mizpah meant

feet), 5

the lofty height

now

Samwil (2935

miles

NW.

of Jerusalem.

add rmx, perhaps rightly: the water was poured 6. mrv ^sh~\ out not as a libation (for which toEM would have been said), but
probably as a symbolical act implying a complete separation from sin: sin was to be cast away as completely as water poured out upon the
earth, II 14, 4 (Ehrlich).
8.
\}/.

LXX

1JBO tjnnn ^N] pregn.

i

do not be deaf (turning) from

n
t t
i.

us,

cf,

28,

(GK.

ii9
cf. Is.

ff )-

PJM3 so as

cr y

ut (

away from

crying),

etc. ( 9.

ii9y);

33, 15^.

Gen. 27,

IPIN] as v. 12,

and

6, 7.

**v ^^3 nhy]

as a burnt sacrifice, (even) a whole offering, untc

cf.

Yahweh.
due, unto
J 733>

For

^3

Lev.

6,

15 Jiopn

^b v/;b
it

D^iypn a

perpetual

Yahweh
-

as a whole offering shall

o-vv TrctvTt raj

be burnt/ 16: Dt. 13

cf.

IO

LXX

Xaw

is

merely a paraphrase;

Dt
2

13, 17,

where 7^3

= TravS^/xet (We.).

!?v2 occurs as the

name

of

sacrifice in

the Carthaginian Table of Sacrifices

and Dues, now

iii.

ai

CIG. 4536

Le Bas and Waddington, Voyage

;

Archtologique, vol.
;

pt.

(Inscriptions de la Syrie),
fa)

BaXfj.apKuiSi
ff.),

No. 1855 Ei Aa0t /J.DI, BaA/iapa;s, KoCpav* Kcojitov ib. 1855 Clermont-Ganneau, Recueil cTArchtologu Orientate (Paris
.
.

SevTfpocfrdrrjs

.; p. 103 Aiovvaios Topyiov [y]*[v]valq> Ea\fj.apKu>St Otov BaA/ia/)/ccu5ov, dveOijitf rai Svo. For many other specia Ba als, see Paton (as cited in the next note), p. 285 ff. a The notices of the cult of both Baal and Ashtart, as attested by inscription-

1885

p. 95

[Kv^ply

and proper names, are collected and discussed by Baethgen, Beitrdge zur Semitischer Religionsgeschichte (1888), pp. 17-29, 31-37, to be compared with Noldeke
review in the

ZDMG.

1888, p. 470

ff.

See also the

articles

ASHTORETH

(Driver

and BAAL (Peake) in DB., and by Moore in EB. ; and the very full articles, esp, the one on Baal, by L. B. Paton in Hastings Encycl. of Rel. and Ethics, vol. ii
(1909).

VII. 4-16
Marseilles:

65
and
in the

Cooke, NSI. 42,

3.
9.

5.

7.

9 (so 43, 5),

ex

pression
10.

W>3

oh?

42, 3. 5.

7.

ii (see the notes, pp. 117, 118).

r6yo

^N1!3B>

TPl]

The

ptcp.
:

marks the action

e. g. 2

in the course

of

which the Philistines drew near

so

Ki. 6,

5.

26 (the

new

subject

in the principal clause following standing first for emphasis).

11.
"D-jra]

Not elsewhere mentioned

(so Dh.).
;

Targ.

}riB>rra;

Klo. con

jectures

prrn 5

of Nebi Samwil

and the

The Beth-horons were about 6 miles NW. road down to the west from Nebi Samwil
i

would pass
12. }tyn]

under

them, about

\ mile to the south.

locality

We
1

expect some known

to

be

specified,

cor

responding to nation, not

r5s TraXatas

an unnamed

crag of rock (We.).

LXX
;

(similarly Pesh.
If,

^) points
it
it

to such, viz. nJB^n, O r rUB^

(2 Ch. 13, 19).

s.v.),

however, this was

Am

Siniyeh (Buhl, 173

;

EB.

3^.

miles N. of Bethel,

was 10 miles from Mizpah

and not

likely to

have been named with

in fixing the position of Eben-ezer.

rny.
;

run ny]
1

We. Bu. Now. Sm.

Observe the
i,

^
3).

N n

cf.

Gen. 24, 30.

1

Jos. 24, 27.

6.

31

l^ni]
s

series of perfects with

conv., descriptive

of Samuel
rutJQ

custom (see on
"no]

rw

The same idiom

1 6.

the idea of recurrency expressed

"HD

by

nJQ

i"UB>

(ij

7) being strengthened by the addition of

is

found also Zech. 14,

differently
, :

Ch. 24, 5 f

(Is.

66, 23

is

to

be explained

EHn

^tt

is

there

made more

precise by the addition of

5,

on the analogy of 11DV3 DV now Beitin, on a rising

im
hill,

Ex.

13

al.).

10 miles N. of Jerusalem.

The
in Palestine, the

(sacred stone-) circle/

There were

several

Gilgals

most famous being the one in the Jordan-valley, a The one mentioned here, though in DB. ii. i76 b little E. of Jericho. identified with that, is however not likely to have been as distant, and
i

is

more probably
r6xn niDlpDH ^3

the village

now

called Jiljiliyeh,
p. 3
f.

miles N. of

Bethel.

See further

EB.

s.v.

On
very

HDin, see
difficult.
11

JIN]

nK is
but
(

is

most

easily taken as epexeg. of

PKT^ HN

Grammatically, the clause he judged Israel, even all

these places

(Keil)

Israel

denotes naturally such a

much

wider whole than the three places named, that the limitation implied
1

For the translation of a

1365

n. pr.

by

LXX,
F

see Jud.

r, 15.

35. 4, ii.

15, 17 al.

66

The First Book of Samuel,

is

in this construction

unnatural.
it

If such

were the sense intended by

treat [jHTB*

the

original narrator

would be best to
v.

DN

as a gloss,

introduced on the ground of

Gilgal,
activity.

15 by one

who
for

conceived Bethel,

and Mizpah as too narrow a sphere

Samuel

judicial

The
2

alternative construction
. .

is

to treat
r>X

DS
:

as the prep.
3, 19.

=
n.

near, as in the geographical phrase

i

"1&?N

Jud.

4,

Ki. 9, 26.

Ki.

9,

27

the

meaning

will

then be that the place of

It is

judgement was not

doubtful, however,
if

in but near or beside the cities mentioned.

the passages cited justify this rendering; for they

are not parallel in form,

and DN

is

not construed in them with a verb.

AV.

in is not defensible as a rendering of

signifies

in or through,
i,

when
19;

it

stands to

nx DX only (apparently) mark the accusative after

:

a verb of motion (Dt.

Dt. 16,
6.
i

2, 7).

Ehrlich would read ^N, comparing

Ki.

8,

29^. 30. as a sacred act

(cf.

Judgement was regarded

7-8, with the writer
sacred places
(cf.

Ex. 18, 15. 16. 22,

notes in the Camb. Bible} and administered at

holy,
also called
4,

Qadesh,

En-Mishpat,

Spring

of judgement/ Gen. 14, 7;

and Jud.

Deborah judging under

it

a sacred tree)

and from

LXX

ev

TTO.<TI

TOIS iqY iao M e l/ot s TOVTOIS

might be inferred that the translators read D^npnn (i.e. misread D KHpEn). Even, however, if this were not the case,
itself (like

the Arab,

maqam) appears
:

to

have sometimes the technical

Skinner
s note.

cense of a sacred place

17.
B2K>]

cf.

Gen.

12, 6, with

Why

the pausal form

stands here with a conjunctive

cf.

accent,

it

seems impossible

to explain:

Ew.

i38

a note ;

GK.

29

n.

8. Introduction to second account (10,

17-27*) of Saul s appointment as The people ask for a king in consequence of the misconduct king. of Samuets sons, acting as their father s deputies.
31
!>NV

8, 2.

"I132n]

A
in

illustrating the

manner
case,

comparison of i Ch. 6, 13 is instructive, as which errors have found their way into
having fallen out in the process of

MT.,

in this

by

letters
[i>NV]

transcription (n-QN

w[n]l

lIMn).

J?3jy~ixnn] in the far south,

on the edge of the

desert,

50

miles

SSW.

of Jerusalem.

VII.

I6VIII.
iran
(i.

i}
i

67
Ki.
2,

3.

nrw wi]
1

Cf.

Ex. 23,

nnK nio^;

28.
6.

DDt^D ID
Dt. 16, 19. 5 5
a.

and
24, 17

turned aside
al.

e.

"!]

perverted} judgement/ Ex. 23,

napf

nnx]

Thou (emph.)

art old.

Notice the separate pronoun.

^>33

Cf. for the

phraseology Dt. 17, 14

fte ^y

no^K
.

Cf. 1 2, i. Jos. i, 1 8. 22, 2 b regard to all that of ^DX and TIN. Cf. Is. 43, 22 Notice the emphatic position
,

"i^N

^3^]

zt #/J

3py ntnp TIN

*j*)BO]
8.
1E>y]

N^i; 57,
ft?

(bis}}

and see

further

on

15, i.

The

as in 7, 8.

LXX

adds

e/tot

*7,
)

which seems indeed

at the

to

be

pre

supposed by Bu. etc.).

9.
13

1^~D3 ( to thee also

end of the verse (Th. We.

cf.

except that . IK] (only here) side of DDK alone (Nu. 13, 28), ^ DJEX (Job 12,
.

"O

DSX by

the
4),

2),

run (^. 128,

an

(II 9, i al.),

a t&n (II 13, 28),

^^y^I
is

^
to

N^>

nx

(Dt. 32, 30).

DH3 T5?n iyn]

properly

bear witness in a court of law,

then more generally

protest,

(like testari, /xaprvpo/Aai) to testify,

aver solemnly,
especially in
133

sq. 3, as usually directed against a person,

:

connexion with a solemn charge or threat

B^NH. Ex. 19, 21. 23.
10.
(cf.
i

Gen. 43, 3
so with

Tyn lyn
14
al.

Ki.

2,

42. Jer.

n,
:

7.

f. 50, 7. 81, 9.
i>NB>

iHNO]

J"lNO=7rapa

with a gen. (2, 23)

Jud.

i,

Dyi?

to, f.
1

i,

17),

Km

Ki. 22, 7
in
2^^.

al.

(Lex.

86*>).

n.

dp"

03^3 DX] Note how

and

11-17 tne object

is

in each case

placed emphatically before the verb.

31

1^

DtJn]

will place for

himself

(i Ki. 20, 34. Jos. 8, 2

cf.

Lex. 5i5 b h, a] among his chariotry (collectively, as II among his horsemen. For jl Wn, cf. on 22, 17.
12.

15, i),

and

bwTl]

so-called

prose

etc. an example of the which occurs now and then in simple periphrastic future/ see Tenses, 206, GK. 114?; and cf. Lev. 10, 10. n.

and

will

be

for

making them,

13. ninziDpI rrinirip]

The form

nzic denotes

one who possesses an

established character (as H33 given to butting, N3p_ jealous), or capacity n3Ci cook 333 b (as [lit. slaughterer], thief, judge] see GK. 84 3 , and
:
"\^[

for a longer

list

of examples Kon.

ii.

89

f.,

cf.

179

(4).

Ehrlich would

point nirabh

rrinp.ib, remarking that

the later language has indeed

F 2

68
abstract

The First Book of Samuel,

nouns of the form
"^p,

but at no time has

Hebrew had
52^) l&JP

a fern, from the form ?Bp.

15. 17. 1&V-]

Read probably

the

Pi

el

(denom.

GK.

see

Neh.

10, 38.

And

so Dt. 26, 12 (see 14, 22). Neh. 10, 39.

D9")P2

Damrn] LXX young men have been

1 6.

(Ehrlich):

no doubt,

correctly.
1 1
f.

The
:

dealt with implicitly already in v.

(D^Jl)

in this verse the

asses.

ip3

is

enumeration begins with slaves, and continues with a collective noun, and may thus be construed with a plur.
i

Job i, 14). The instances of Dnp3 are too rare and doubtful (in Neh. 10, 37 unnecessary in 2 Ch. 4, 3 D s j?pQ must be read with i Ki. 7, 24; and in Am. 6, 12 read D ip23), f r
(II 6, 6

MT.

Ki.

5, 3.

11

D3Hp3 (adopted
31

in ed.

with We.) to be probable.

for his business:

rwi]

and use them

rDtfta as Ez. 15,

5.

Ex. 38, 24.

17.

DnNl] and ye yourselves (opp. to the children and possessions

mentioned before).
1 8.

^abo] a
:

later usage, in

such a case as
Ehrl.

this,

than

"3BD

(contrast

Ex.

3, 7)

see Lex. 8i8 a b.

would read
in

"ja,

supposing tjata
scribe s error.
:

to have arisen from the following

ta

Q33^O through a

D3? Drnra] The reflexive dative in common with irQ e.g. 17, 40. Gen. 13, ii. Jos. 24, 15. 22. cf. ^ tib Hab. i, 6. 2, 6 al. 19. \& 110501] So Gen. 19, 2
:

13, 2.

The

dagesh in these cases is probably designed for the purpose of securing a distinct articulation of the consonant (Delitzsch on \J/. 94, 12). Comp. Spurrell s note on Gen. /. c. ; and add to the references there
given Baer, Pref. to Liber Proverbiorum (rules of Dagesh), p. xiv
;

GK.
p.

208; and Konig, Lehrgebaude der Hebr. Sprache (1881),

is

i.

59 (where the subject

treated at length).

DS

*3]

= but
.

(10, 19.

12, 12 13 alone):

so

2,

15.

21, 5

al.

See

Lex. 475 a
9,
i

10,
king.

1 6.

First (and
is

oldesf]

account of Saul s appointment as

Saul

anointed king by Samuelfor the purpose of defending

1

Israel against the Philistines (v.

6),

and bidden

do as his hand

may find
0,
i.

when

occasion arises.

pCP-po]

the later part

That Kish was of Benjaminite descent is stated in of the verse and we seem to desiderate here a statement
;

VIII. if

IX. 4
i,
i
;

69
Jud. 13,
etc.,

of the place to which he belonged (cf. therefore, we should read, with We. Bu.
^3, 15).

2).

Perhaps,
(see

Now.

po^n njnao
cf.

Gibeah of Benjamin
1B>N

(13, 15.

II 23, 29;
34),

Jud. 19, 14

po jnb
(10, 26.

nynan), or
23, 19.

of Saul
26, i),

22, 6.

(n, 4. 15, was the modern

or nyzun alone
or,

Tell el-FUl,

as

there are

(ZDPV.
iyw
father
in
is

1909, 2-13),

no ancient remains here, Hawdnti, 500 3 miles N. of Jerusalem (cf.

yards to the
Is. 10, 29).

NW.
s

tjnK

p]

the son of a Benjaminite

the

name
is

of Aphiah

was
s

either not

Smith

remark,
i.

known
K^N

or unimportant.

There

force,

however,
"W

p
But

is

not without analogy, at least

CN

found II 20,
"

Est. 2, 5.

it is

unusual to terminate a genealogy

probable that

by saying
a scribe

son of a.

Benjaminite."

It is

is

the error of

who expected

to continue the genealogy.

v. 4.

Wiy] This occurs elsewhere as the patronymic of pD^Q:

on:
11

22, 7

-Oil;

20,

^O

t^X as here.
2 Ki. 15, 2 Ki. 5,
i

^Tl 1133]

Here, probably, as

20 (Bu.), Ru.
etc.),

2, i,

a sturdy
(cf.

man

of substance (not of valour,

a sturdy, honest

on

10, 26), well-to-do country farmer.

3.

typi ] the dative of relation, going with

cf.

nJiaxm

see

v.

20

and

Is.

26, 14;
o/"

ch. 13,

(some)
i

axw

Kish

But perhaps B*p NVOJ). ( should be read (Nold. Bu. Ehrl.); cf.
22
b

17, 8.

Ki.

2,

39 (GK.

1290).
is

inx-nx] ^nx
that
it

so

closely joined to,

st.
:

and limited
3,

by,

lapses into the constr.

so frequently, as Gen.
130").

22

MOO 1HS3,

V330 nnN3, etc. Jud. 17,11

9. II 4, ii
.

(GK.
,

Respecting HN
;

with a word not strictly defined see

Ex. 21, 28. Nu. 21,

Ew. 277 d GK. n7 d and comp. and (with the same word as here)

Nu.

6,

15

DnonnsrnK 1

4. The repeated change of number in this v. can hardly be original, though parallels can be found in MT. Nu. 13, 22 N3 1 ; 33, 7 2B^1. But it can scarcely be questioned that in all these cases the pi. was
I

designed throughout by the original writers.

4.
i

See the Introduction,

(thrice).

(a).

Read

therefore, with

LXX, ruyi

1 In illustration of a man being led to his destiny throngh the search for lost animals, Wellh. (Keste Arab. Heidentumes , 148, ed. 2, 201) cites Kitab al-Aghdni,
i.

133,4.8, xix.

3ff.

70

The First Book of Samuel,

p&J] presumably the district round 7\wv jD (2 Ki. 4,42), which, from the context, cannot have been far from the Gilgal of v. 38. This Gilgal, from which (2 Ki. 2, i. 3) Elijah and Elisha went down to Bethel, cannot, as

RV. with marg. references strangely suggest on v. i,- be the Gilgal of Jos. 5, 9 in the Jordan valley, between Jericho and the Jordan, some 3000 ft. below Bethel, but is, no doubt, the Gilgal of I S. 7, 16 (see note), the modern Jiljiliyeh, on a high hill (2441 ft.) 7 miles N. of Bethel. This Gilgal
the editors of the
is

indeed 450

ft.

lower than Bethel

in

but

it

is

separated from

it

by the great

W.
for

ej-Jib (1746

ft.,

for the

went down

parts 2030 ft.), the descent into which may account b to Bethel of 2 Ki. 2, 3 (DB. ii. i77 ). Rai6aapiaa (LXX

some

nt5>vtJ>

15

Roman
site

ruined

?JD in 2 Ki.) is said by Euseb. (Onom. 239, 92) to have been miles N. of Diospolis (Lydda), a situation which would just suit the Sirisia, 14! Roman miles or 13 Engl. miles N. of Lydda (EB. s.v.).
might very well be the modern Kefr Thilth, 4 miles NE. the Arab, th corresponds correctly to the Heb. &
:

Or Ba

al-shalisha itself

of Sirisia (Conder and others)

in EJp{J?.

Either of these places would be about 25 miles

NW.

of Gibeah.

D
Jud.

vytJ>]

not mentioned elsewhere.

The name has

often been supposed to be an

mentioned between Beth-shemesh and Aijalon: (Josh. 19, 42, i Ki. 35 4, 9 f), a place which, though it was no doubt in the neighbour hood, has been identified very precariously, for the names do not agree phoneti
error for
i,

D
;

l|

3,3yt}>

with Salbtt, 4 miles NW. of Aijalon. Aijalon would be about 20 miles S. of Kefr Thilth (above), and 12 miles W. of Gibeah. Whether, however, all the places mentioned are rightly identified, must remain
cally,

an open question if the map be consulted, a journey in search of the lost asses from Gibeah (Tell el-Ful) to Kefr Thilth (25 miles to the NW.), then 20 miles to the S., to some place near Aijalon (??), and thence either 13 miles back to Beit-Rima,
:

or

1 1

miles to Rentis, or 12 miles

the land of
it,

ENE.

to

Ram- Allah

(see p. 4), all within 3 days

(9, 20),

Zuph

(see p. i) being visited, not because

5. 6),

Samuel

home

was

in

but accidentally (9,

does not seem very probable.

(sc.

fW]
C>p3

and [there was] nought

41, 17

of them).
is

In

full,

ffW: but

the absolute use of ps in cases such as this

(Is.
:

idiomatic, esp. after

nJ

D E

D^p3 DW3KH1
i

D"3Vn ;

Ez.

7,

25
9 p

JW
Is.

cf. ch.

10, 14 (}N
&Ql"^

3),

Ki. 18, 10),

^. 69, 21).
this

and

nji?
J

(Job

3,

59, ii
5.

PW

njjM

1N
I

blKPI .... 1X3

nn] On

104?. by GK. and idiomatic manner graphic

The

of expressing a synchronism in place of the more ordinary DN133 TP!

hxtP 1ON Gen. 44,

17,

f)1

pN3,
;

see Tenses,
:

3.

Jud. 15, 14

also

165-169 and cf. 20, 36 II 20, 8 below v. ii (with the ptcp.). 14, 27
;
;

23;

2 Ki. 2, 23.

Ehrlich adds rightly that in this idiom the

first

sentence must only contain a single verb, with at most the addition
of a negative circumst. clause, denoting time or place (as Gen. 44, 4)
the
:

Old

Lat. 1N

N^l (cited in Kit.)

is

thus not original.

IX. 4-9
the
if

71

home

of Samuel, in Ephraim (see

on

i,

i),

which,

the places are rightly identified, Saul

must have entered again from

the

W. end
to

of Benjamin.

In 10,

2,

when

Saul leaves Samuel, he

re-enters the territory of

3X*l]

Benjamin from the North.

\\t.

be anxious or concerned:

38, 19 I

am

concerned on

account of

my

sin:

Jos. 22, 24 nJN TO out of concern.

}D, as Gen.
3, 22.

The

pf.

and
f.,

waw

conv. in continuation of inn

Ex. 34, 15

and regularly: see Tenses, 112?. 115, s.v., GK. on which we have started 6. rfky UD^n l^N]
here as including the goal
:

"jm

is

conceived
to

for of course they

would not need

be told the way they had already come.

Gen. 24, 42
5.

differently:

which I
7.

am

"

going

].?

upon
.?

so Jud. 18,

rum]
z/"we

And

lo,

we
. .

shall go,

and what
JO,

shall
:

we
on

bring?
20, 12,

etc.

=And
^>TN]

go, what

So

Ex.

8,

22

cf.

and

II 18, ii.

only here in prose, and only altogether

in the sense of

five

times in Hebrew,
is

mostly
in

going away, departing.

The word

common
"pn
:

Aramaic, being
is

in the

Targums

the usual representative of

(which

not used with the same constancy in Aram, as in Heb.)

e.g. in the

Targ. of
miB>m]

this chapter, vv. 3 b

6. 10.

N onp-px

pK, as pointed, must, as Ehrlich remarks, belong

to the inf. (Lex. 34** 5),

is

impossible to bring.
for

The

and the meaning must be, and a present it sense required is and there is no present
J

to bring,

which we must read either R*3?v miBTI

NI

(Ex. 17,

i),
.-

or tfani?

PK

mrew

(Gen.

2, 5.

Nu. 20, 5

nin^ j$

nna.

2 Ki. 19, 3

Lex. 34 b
rrnKTl]

top].

The

latter is the natural correction to

:

make
"fit?

here.
9.

only here

The passage may be

Elisha).
8.

illustrated

Is. 57, comp. the use of the cognate verb from 2 Ki. 4, 42 (the gifts offered

to

NtfEj] there is found, idiom, for there is here (21, 4), or there is
cf.

present (13, 16);

TinJl]

Lex. 594*.
with

Read nnnn

LXX, Th. We. Kp.

(Tenses,

etc.

the

pf.

with

waw
n,
v.

conv. with the force of a precative or mild imperative, as Jud.

al.

8: ch. 20, 25; 25, 27

119

8).
is

9.

An

explanatory gloss, the proper place of which

first

evidently after

ii,

where nsin

occurs in the narrative.

72
used

The First Book of Samuel,

to be called:

GK.

io7

So Ruth

4,
. .

n. 1NVO TOm

7 (probably a similar gloss); Jud. i, 23. D^y non] Where, in this idiom (see v.
is

5),

the

subject of the two verbs

38, 25; Jud. 1 8, 3. i2 b with i3 aa
.

the same, the pron.

2

is

repeated

as

Gen.

Hence

Ki. 10, 13 for Nirvi read Nini (connecting

NM, suggested in Kittel,

would not here be a Heb.

construction).
12. K

17

t.

So, alone, in answer to a question, 2 Ki. 10, 15. Cf. Lex. 44 i b a.

.y)
"inD

Jer. 37,

DVn

^3 nnjj

"PJS7

Din]

LXX

iSou

Kara

TTPOO-WTTOV

vfJL(t)V

vvv

Sta.

TT)V f](ji.fpav

restores Di

whence We., developing a suggestion of Lagarde 1 na nny M^?? n n lo, he is before you now, just at
KT\.,
, :

present, he

is

come

to the city/ etc.

In support of this restoration,

We. remarks (i) that the sing, "pa? agrees ill with v. 12, in which the pi. is used throughout (2) against MT. 1HD, that no reason appears
:

why
ing

Saul should hasten,

if

Samuel had

just

come

into the city

not,

as has been supposed, from

some

journey, but
v. 23,

from the neighbour

n3

(where he had recently been,

nB>N

J^K

THEN

to the cook).

The

and given instructions superfluous in in MT. We.

plausibly explains as a

explicit subject HNIH, which had been inserted by a scribe as a subj. for WJsi? (though, when the noun to which run refers has immediately preceded, the pron., whether

remnant of the

Nin run or (rare) 13H,

30, 3. b

is

not unfrequently omitted;

D1 H n3 will

cf.

15, 12. 16,

n.

16: Tenses,
,

135. 6, 2).

have the same force as in

v.

I3

where

it

is

likewise rendered 8ta TTJV -^pepav

5,

by LXX.

The

expression recurs Neh.

n, and means at

once, just

now, the force of

DV, as in DV3 2, 16, being forgotten.

13.

p]

often answers to 3 in comparisons (Lex. 486 a );

in time,
it

but to
6, 3, as

express correspondence

is

very rare.
^ "lNifD3

Cf.

Hos.

emended very
Nin O]

plausibly
.

by Giesebrecht,
for

13

WinK 3.

for he

Notice the emphatic pronoun.

nn
first

r>KXn

DVna in&na]

him

just

now

you

will find

him/ the

1HN not being subordinated directly to the verb, but being resumed

Anmerkungen zur
for

Griech. Utberselzung der Proverbien (1863), p.

iii

njon

inD -pab).

IX. 9-i?
in
is

73

1DN

at the end,

which thus becomes the direct accusative.

The

case

but an extension of the principle which is exemplified in Gen. 13, 15 to thee will I give nJnns . , i?3 nN ^ for all the land ,
"fr

pxn

it;

21, 13;

ch. 25,

29 and often (Tenses, 197.

6).

The resumption
:

only happens to be rare

2 Ki. 9,

when

the

first

object

is
!

a pronoun

but see

omit [as Th. 27 would do] one of the two inK borders on barbarism (We.). Klo.
IDN DJ
also,

man

Him

smite him

To

Bu., however, regard the

14.
"Vyn

first 1J1N

as an error for

nny

(cf. v. 1 2).

l^yi]

The

city itself

then was on an elevation: and the

it

nCQ on a
is said, v.

still

higher elevation outside

b
(

n2H

mbyi>

conversely,

it

25

Tyn noan
Probably
this

1TV1).
this is

vyn lira]
language of

an ancient error

for lytrn *]ira

in the

middle of the gate:

this

agrees better both with v. 18

and with the

in,

verse (Saul
to

and

his servant

were coming

and

Samuel was going out

15.
i"l73

meet them).
of the manner in which the pluperfect

^1]

An example
*"

tense

is

expressed in Hebrew.
^J
l

By

the avoidance of the

to

common
)

descriptive tense

(i.e.

lit.

and Y. went on

uncover

the

connexion with what precedes is severed, and the mind is left free to throw back the time of n?3 to a period prior to the point which the narrative itself has reached. So regularly, as 14, 27. 25, 21. 28, 3 ;
II
Cf.
1

8,

18
2.

etc. (Tenses,

76 06s.;

GK.

106?, 142*).

For a

f?N

HK

r6a,

20,
1 6.

12. 13.

22, 8. 17. II 7, 27.

at

"IHJD

ny3]

the time

to-morrow
i

= when
2.

to-morrow has
2 Ki. 7, i. 18.
i.e.

come.
10, 6f.

So

II 20, 12.

Ex.

9, 18.

Ki. 19,

20, 6.

Cf. Gen. 18, 10. 14. 2 Ki. 4, 16. i7t n*n njJS
it

(probably)

at the time, (as

is)

reviving

= in the returning year,

"ino

must not
In
1

in these phrases
full,

be regarded as a genitive, since riy3 has the art. would be ITO njm nvn?, nT! nyn WHS (Hitzig on Job 39, they
prince,
lit.

7).

T3J]

one in front,

leader

used often in the more

elevated prose (especially in the prophetic utterances in

Sam. and

Kings)
7, 8.
i

for the chief ruler of Israel (10,

i.

13, 14. 25, 30. II 5, 2. 6, 21.

Ki.

i,

35. 14, 7.

16, 2.

20, 5

cf. Is.

55, 4).

i6b.

Djrn]
"3]

LXX
1 8,

y
21.

^rnx

(Ex.

3, 7):

no doubt,

rightly.

^l

HN2

Gen.

17. Vljy]

n:y as Jud. 18, 14.

Is. 14,

10

al.,

to answer, not

some-

74

The First Book of Samuel,

may
require or suggest

thing which has been said, but as the situation

(Lex. 773*).
"p?8

THDN

as
1B>N]

to

whom

said unto thee, This

one/

etc.

cf.

v.

23^.
"13$

"ivy]

(in
1

here only in the sense of coercere imperio : cf. a passage, however, where the text is very suspicious).
8.

Jud. 18, 7

7N1CC?
fix

nx]

drew near

/0

is

evidently the sense that

is

intended,
1
,

which

with

will scarcely express.

No

doubt both here,

is

ch. 30, 2

and Nu.
19. 20.

4,

b 19 (as Jud. 19, i8 after

"J/n),

HX

merely an error for 7X.

(read with
three

Dnbxi] D^DM

LXX
D^E"),

KGU

<aye,

i.e.

pfew

(or

nn^Kl).

riK>7K>

DVn]
i.e.

to-day, three days

We.

Bu.,

GK.
DtT?

m i34
.
,

Cf. 30, 13 Ttifaff

, ,

for three days, (Anglice) DVn, where &W is omitted.

days ago.

nUHNTl]

principle as that explained in the case of the accus.

DH7 resumes nunX7 upon exactly the same on v. 13 cf.

:

Gen.
Jl

2,

17 (p). II 6,

23

(7).
is

2 Ki. 22,

18 (7X):

T>J<?J,

197 Obs.
70), as
it

i.
is i.

Db>rr?X]

The
the

tone

drawn back by ~7X

;

(Tenses,

(GK.

72*)

by

waw
;

consec.

cf.

II 17, 16 ?^PT7N. Ex. 23,

The
J1

idiom, set the heart (mind)

c),

to (on),

as II 13, 20

al.

Cf.

Lex.

523^ (3

524^ (3 c) and on 4, 20. D7l] Rightly rendered by LXX, Vulg. KCU

erunt optima quaeque Israel?
desirable in Israel?
2, 7

TOO, TO.

wpata TOV

la-parjX; et cuius
is all

RV. and for whom

in the

that

is

sense as in Hag.

D^n

73

mon is used men 1X21 (where

same concrete

note the plural verb)

see Is. 60, 5 end} of
it

and the desirable things

all
is

(i.e. costly offerings:

nations shall come,

etc.

But perhaps both there and here

better to point 21.

rnpn

(ptcp. pass.).
p.

33N] rmTel(GK.
naai?
1

po^a
(Ehrlich)

aBjpp]
.

6o.), on account of thepause (seeon i, 15). ^DplD should be logically fOjfW, or rather

Jt^jpr?

The

plural

may be due

to the illogical attraction

of
1

<Q2V

(read as

HM

So in the one passage in which the st. c. of ft3p occurs, 2 Ch. 21, 17. Ehrlich maintains that fbp and JtDp cannot be used promiscuously, but that jbp is the
form out of pause, fCp the form in pause (cf. GK. It is true, }bj3 is 29"). found with athnah and soph-pasuq, and JtDp is always found with a conj. always
accent
:

but with the smaller

disj.

accents the pointing varies

thus

we have

|C|?

IX. 17-24
B3PJ
ever, curiously
K>.

75
B3B>

1 Unquestionably an error for

(Keil).

How

We. Stade

enough, the same expression occurs Jud. 20, 12 732 in both cases to point (p. 204) propose
perhaps the archaic form of the
;

K>,

thinking that

st. c.

(GK.

go

should be here restored

but
6, 15,

this

is

hardly probable.

With the
affects,

passage generally,
similar modesty.

cf.

Jud.

where Gideon expresses, or

fTVyvn]

= the smallest:
See on
i,

GK.
1 8.
i

1338.

22. nnat??]
B>N"O]

We
;

should expect PlfttB^n.

at the head or top:

i

Ki. 21, 9. 12.

cf.

DWip =

those invited

to a feast, as

Ki.

i,

41. 49

&Op

z#. 9.

10.

23. n:o]

See on

i, 4.

24. iT7yni]

There are three cases

1 ;

in

which n has apparently the

force

of the relative

(i) with a verb, (a) where the construction

This is well substantiated for late depends upon the consonants. Hebrew (Ch. Ezr.), i Ch. 26, 28. 29, 8 al. but the one example in
:

middle Hebrew, Jos. 10, 24

2
,

is

so isolated that
easily

a textual corruption (d*3?nn

might

probably upon be restored): (If) where

it

rests

the construction depends solely

3rd sing. fem. perf. Qal (as

upon the punctuation, chiefly nN3H Gen. 18, 21 46, 27 nDBTl

;
"D

in the
Is.

51,
;

iob), or in the 3rd sing. masc. perf. Nif. (as in

ilN"un

H/on Gen.

21, 3

punctuation represents a genuine had n been in use in earlier tradition is extremely questionable Hebrew with the force of a relative, it is strange that it should appear
i

Ki.

u,

9).

Whether

this

once only with 3

~

pi.

its

restriction
"

to cases in

which a

different

accent

K2n) or punctuation
s
,

regular construction

p?^ n&p^n) would give rise to the and the fact that the Massorah itself does not
1

16,

u al.,
JJDj?

but fb i? 20,
Est.
i,

2 al.

fCp II

9, 12+,

but fbp ^.5,9. 20,35. 22,153!.;

If the

and

5f, but

|bp

ch, 25, 36-}-.

normal form were

fb[5,

it

is
sf.

strange that
the form
1

we should
b

find

always the fem. nHOj?, the //.

D^Dp, and before a

Comp. Ew.
For
156*;

33i

Jer. 5, 13 (Hitzig, Graf, Keil) is

(Ew.
8

GK.
Is.

138 ,^ very uncertain; either ~\3*] 52), or, more probably, "U^n should be read.
(i)

and note:

GK.

is

a subst.

See, e.g.
,

H77HH
(Ew.

read as
d
;

And so in Ez. 26, 17 51, 9 rQXnOri; Gen. 48, 5 17 D^713n. H77nn, may be the ptcp. Pu al without D, like 7|N Ex. 3, 2 etc.
.

i69

GK

52

).

76

The First Book of Samuel,

HN3n Gen.
n as a
46, 26
al.
;

point consistently (see e.g.

35,
i),

HXtJn Gen.

12, 7.
is

make
and

it

highly probable that the anomaly in these cases

in fact
relative
is

not

original,

that

unknown

to

classical
CTT

Hebrew.
it

(2) Before a preposition

as in the

Gk. idiom TO

avrr/s

occurs here alone in the OT., though combinations of the type

"^X

rivJJ

are of constant occurrence.

The usage

here

is

thus doubly

by precedent or parallel. Under the circumstances it can scarcely be doubted that Geiger (Urschrift, p. 380) is right in reading njpKrn and the fat tail (Ex. 29, 22 and
exceptional,

and

entirely unsupported

elsewhere in the ritual laws of P).

breeds of sheep

The tlfotk is the fat (commonly known as Cape sheep

in the

tail

of certain

),

and

is

still

esteemed a delicacy
it

East

when

dressed and served at table

much resembles marrow (the writer has seen and tasted it in Syria). The allusion in the v. will thus be to certain choice pieces reserved
23*")

specially (v.

for those
is

honoured with a place

DW^pn

t?N~Q

2
.

~ICN V|]
y\

The

subj.

Samuel, not the cook.

lyiD^ *3]

for thee, saying, I

because unto the appointed time [hath it been] kept have invited the people. 10*6 is construed with
a-vvea-iv:
cf.

11DB

freely,

Kara
is

Ex.

5,

14 (where the subject of the

preceding verb

not that implied in IDN^).

;

The

sense thus obtained,

niB>

however,

is

not good
;

and Kin

is

desiderated after
d
)

GK.

1 1

6s

nOE

or
It

(GK.

i44

ipE/, for

(though see met? would also be an

is

easy emendation).

can thus hardly be doubted that there

some

corruption in the text (especially in TlNIp DJ?n IDs!?). 1XBO also does not mean reserved (Ew.), but left over. V. 1 3 however suggests that

Samuel and Saul did not take

what we expect,

their

meal

after the others

had

finished,

but that the other guests waited to begin their meal until Samuel had
arrived
:

therefore, here is a

polite invitation to

Saul, as the guest of honour, to begin the

meal;
"Ntwn,

the others would

">K$n

then begin

theirs.

Sm. Now. suggest,

for

the flesh

(of

Comp.

illustration
fat tail.
3

the notice in Hdt. 3. 13; and see in the Jewish Encycl. xi. 250 an of such a sheep, with a small cart supporting the long and heavy

The shoulder and

the

fat tail

are

still

the pieces offered by the fellahin

of Palestine to the guest

whom

they desire to honour

f.).

(ZDPV.

vi.

98, cited

by

Nestle, Marginalien, 1893, p. 13

IX. 24
flesh

X. i

77

prepared for the table, Ex. 21, 10. ^.78, 20), and Sm. Bu. Gen. 34, 19), or -)D Now., for -W&, Hint* (irfnx Gen. 32, 5, or nriN ; Sm. Now. also follow Bu. in reading D JOjpn Dj? ^DKJ? for nDNij Eat is set before thee we then get, Behold, /&? TiX"!p Dyn
:

/^
;

thee unto the appointed time, that thou (or they) have tarried for with them that are invited! But the flesh is set before thee mayest eat
for

we

is

rather a bald
5,

and graceless
it

invitation

and

"inx

always (even in

opposed to Tna) has the idea of tarrying later than is usual, or might be expected ; though suitable, therefore, with to the appointed time? iyiDn~| (II 20, 5), would it be suitable with but in the to D^fcOpn DJ? hivh has been suggested Nothing preferable
Gen. 32,

where

is

earlier part of the verse,

it

would be a
"lOtwn

change
(see v.

to read, for

iN&wn,
~i1B>,

smaller, and perhaps a sufficient, that which has been ^/(reserved)

23

b
),

and

for

as suggested above,

^^0$ or

J
"W?B>

25-26. 13tJ1
fcrl

:ajn

i?y

/ISP Dy -nTl]

LXX

K al SieVr/owo-ai/
$>*$>

TW SaovA.
6) Vl2nl.

TO?

S</J/m,

Kal e/co^^r;
in

.*

33fl

33!!

^
and

(Pr. 7,

The sequence 1DW1 both being pre ("DTI mature, when 21 Nnp ! follows) that there can be little doubt that this And they spread a couch for Saul on the house is the true reading: and he lay down, to which Samuel s calling to Saul on the top,

MT.
11

is

so bad

house-top

in the

morning

(v.

26

31

Wl) forms now a

cf.

natural

and

suitable sequel.

27.

DV3]
I.

= first of all (before

Is
it

going on):

on

2,

16.

10,

fB>n"]B-nx]

Cf. 2 Ki. 9, i. 3.
?

3
1

N^n]

not that

Hath not?

is

shewn by

II 13, 28

Ew. on

the basis of

LXX
it is

irapcL

TOVS dfAAovr suggested for QJ?n

"IDS?

"IXE^D

Dyn =
best

above the rest of the people

(whom)
~)N2>

to acquiesce in,

though

true that

have invited, which We. is disposed is not a word found elsewhere in the
;

Hebrew

omission of
airoHvt^t

~15J>S

and the prose style (Ch. Ezr. Neh. Est., and of course in Isaiah) for T)N~)p have before Dyn is questionable (on 14, 21).

LXX

nip off (=

ppD

Lev.

i,

15

3Jfp

Ki. 6, 6:

f|Dp Ez. 17,

4. 21),

whence

Th. suggests Krjnj? c^ 0/Y (Anglice Help yourself!), cf. Job 33, 6 Jjm p ICHO But it is not probable that a word so rare in Heb. as fHp (and usually *3K D3 occurring in a different application py li lp would have been used in this sense.
.
1
")

It

must however be admitted that

:

in post-Bibl.
s.

Hebrew
tls

food into pieces

see Levy,

NHWB.

f*1p

is

used of cutting up

v.

LXX

ftaprvpiov of course presupposes

nothing different from ^IfD, which the translators elsewhere connected wrongly with cf. aierjvfi TOV paprvpiov
"liy
:

78
to be a
in

The First Book of Samuel,

good Hebrew expression: but the long addition preserved and Vulg. has every appearance of being original. The
would read
in

LXX

insertion

Hebrew

thus

^ytfin nnsi

tojr^8

nya
is

The
not out of place
:

circumstantiality of the account

here

the express mention of the signs at an earlier stage

v. 7, is

of the instructions to Saul than

the omission of the clause in

MT. may

what might be expected and be readily explained by the

:

supposition that a transcriber

the second.
2.

eye passed from the

first

miT

jnSJ

to

So Dr. Weir.
to,

Dy]

= dose
Is. 10,

near
s

Gen. 25, n. 35,

4.

II 19, 38

al.

As
i.e.

Jer.

31, 15 shews,

Rachel

grave must have been very near Ramah,

the

Ramah

of

29,

now er-Rdm.

Er-Ram

is

5 miles S. of Bethel,
:

which, according to Jos. 18, 13 (P), was on the N. border of Benjamin but at this time, it seems, Ephraim extended further to the S. (see esp.
Jud.
4, 5).

with Bethlehem,

Dr6 JV2 Kin, identifying Ephrath Dillmann and most commentators), or (Delitzsch on Gen. 35, 20) embodies a different tradition. the Northern border cf. on 9, 5.
7
is

In Gen. 35, 20. 48,

either a gloss (so

The word

arouses suspicion.

The

locality intended

seems

to be so accurately defined by

?m m3p
it

Dy, that

we

are surprised at
;

a closer definition following, especially in such an obscure form

as nsbx possesses

for,

no meaning,

near Rachel
a\Xofjivov<s

grave, at

cannot designate any particular spot which the men were to be met. LXX have

but though D7V AXAo^tevous fj.fya.Xa. (see v. 6) be rendered (metaph.) leap upon, r6x absolutely cannot express ^y may the idea of leaping. /j.eyd\a does not occur elsewhere in LXX in an
&?>
:

adverbial sense (We.);

so probably here
letters,

it

is

nothing but a

Hebrew

word

written in
.

Greek

and transformed
after

into something signifi

1 cant in Greek

Many MSS.
s

Bevia/mv

insert ev

S^Xw (=

lv BaKaA.a0

Lucian

recension after Bena/uv and before dXA.

Cf. i Ki. 18, 32 Od\affffav

from

i"6yn

Am.
34, 5

3, 12 iepeTs
ecus

from SJHy

(as Jerome,

cited

by Field, points out)

f-

Jer. 8, 7
4.

dypov

a 5ov K\avaovrai.

For other

examples, see the Introduction,

P- 37

la

b; Thackeray,

Gramm. ofOT. Greek (1909),

X. 2-4
adds
/AcoT7//,/2/oias

79
in

[as

though HX

^2 =

umbra

sereni :

hence Vulg.
render
:

meridie].

All these are evidently

different

attempts

to

or

represent the five consonants which stand

now

as

rw^a

but they

throw no

light either

upon

the

word

itself

or

upon the

original reading

which

may underlie it. nunsn nan ns*] =

Dt.
4, 21.
prj/j.a)

the matters

= the

concern of the asses

cf.

hy

D3nan

Comp.

Delitzsch or
natural.

Cheyne on

^. 65, 4.

But

"Qn

(LXX

would be more

3N~n]

113. 4 a;

The pf. and } consec., 1 1 GK. 2^), after

t? tM
5

with a frequentative force (Tenses, a bare perfect

(Bu.

al.),

following

is

(GK. 112*1). no improvement: we should need W

(Jer. 48,
3.
"V?y,

n);

the cases noted in

on.

GK.

n6

are different.

pass fpn] to come (or pass) on, usually with some swiftness or force
a tempest 21, i; a breath, Job
i,

To

Elsewhere only

in poetry, as a poet. syn.

:

of

of a

flood, Is. 8, 8;

4,

15; of the Chaldaean

9,

conqueror compared to a wind, Hab.

of days passing quickly

of God, Job
a stream,
:

u. n,
9, 26.

10;

away

like skiffs

down

word

is

hardly one that would be expected here

it

Job and Ehrlich would

The

read for

npbni.
ft.)

D^y] Bethel (2890

which the
hill

was

itself

on a

hill;

and the plateau on

stands

is

considerably higher than most of the surround

ing country.
DPl!?

To

God, Bethel being an ancient sacred place.

"IS?

nnrD
is

numeral

isfem. (Ex. 29, 23 al.); and though a fern, nt?ta] found here and there with a fern, noun (as Gen. 7, 13.

Job
with

i,

4:

GK.
t??K>.

97

C
;

Konig,

iii.

322),

it

is

probably best to restore

We.

Klo. Bu., remarking that two out of three loaves

to give as a present,

would be a large proportion

would read

(after

LXX
4.

dyy?a) 3^3
Dltai?
~fc>

baskets

^Nt?l]

(Am. 8, i); and shall ask

Sm. would read J|

thee

(9, 7).

with regard
5.

to

welfare,
al.).

common Heb.
327

expression (17, 22. 25,

is

Gen. 43, 27
:

Why
(cf.

the direct object k iii.

introduced by

!?,

is

not apparent

perhaps

Konig,

from assimilation to Dl!^.

Df6
1

Tit?]

the fern. Tit?

may be on account
insert here,
;

of

J"lii33

understood

J
;

Which Klo. Bu. Dh. would even

supposed,

after
is

LXX

Svti

airapxas apron?,
else misrendered

i.e., it is

DP33,

misread

ni"!33

but

DTDa

nowhere

8o
or, as

The First Book of Samuel,

Dr6
is

elsewhere construed as a masc. (nr6 mt?y

cf.

Ki. 14, 3.

Dr6

ntj>n

^.21,4;

D^:N

w,

D^JN

mpy GK.
:

97^), ^p

should

perhaps be restored.
5.
D\"6Nn

nyna] identical, as the DTIB^S

yw

shews, with the y23

and most probably the older name, marking it as an ancient holy place, of Gibeah of Saul. Ram- Allah, 7 miles N.
(rd. nyai) of 13, 3;

of Tell el-Ful (suggested in

H. G.

p.

250),

is

much

too far to the north.

On p

inx, see

GK.

298.

Oi j] LXX, Pesh. Vulg. express a

also 13, 3. 4,
3>3

singular

and, as the sing, occurs

probability be read accordingly here. The accidental transposition of two contiguous letters is not unfrein the Ochlah we-Ochlah, 91, there is a list of quent in MT. sixty-two such transpositions which have been corrected by the

should in

all

Massorah.

Some few

of the corrections

may be

questioned

but

the majority are certainly authorized (e.g.

Jer. 17,

JWm

Jud. 16, 26; yoitp

23; pnNTl Ez. 40, 15;

readings).

As

to

be original the meaning, 3^3 has the sense of pillar in Gen.

Pr. 31, 27 cannot
i

nw*n

19, 26, of prefect or deputy in II 8, 6. 14.

it

Ki. 4, 19; possibly also

like
;

might be used to denote a post or garrison,

these senses
it

3D

13,

23.

Which of
has

has here,
divided,

it

is difficult

to say

versions and
J

commentators are equally

dvacrre/xa,
i.e.

(a)

LXX

here (one rendering

prob. a pillar erected as a symbol or trophy of

Philistine

Bo. We.

domination: so (prob,) Pesh., and amongst moderns Th. (V) Vulg. has staiio, i.e. a military post, or garrison: so
(c)

EVV.

Ge. Ke.

Targ. has

^DiBDN

(i.e.

cn-pa-n/yoi)

both here and

13, 3. 4 (likewise

in

the//r.): similarly

Ew. Gr. Sm. Bu. Now., only

reading as a sing.
static

j tfJ

(prefect, officer].

On

the whole (the sense

is

being

not

otherwise

substantiated),

(c)

probably to

be

preferred.
It

appears from
in the

this verse that

a large area of Central Palestine

was now
f

hands of the
jussive
is

Philistines.

y\

Wl] The
it

unexpected.

In II

5,

24

(=

Ch. 14,

15),

Ruth
is

can be explained as expressing a command: but that 3, 4 not the case here; and it is better to suppose it to be an error

In the other rend, the word

is

simply transliterated

Naer</3,

as in

3, 3. 4.

X. $-8
for p;ni (Sm.).

8i

In

Ki. 14, 5^ read

^1.

The

explanation in

GK.

ii2 z

is artificial,

and not probable.

in
cf.

D^xa^nE ncni] a circumstantial clause, describing the condition which the prophets would be as they came down from the noa
:

Jer. 38,

22

rhDX

nani
is

= they saying (Tenses,

viz.

160

GK.

141).

The word, which

to

in the reflexive conj.

and a denominative, denotes

play or act the prophet,

1

by manifestations of physical excitement

not unlike those exhibited by the dervishes of the present day in

the East

such

as

are
is

more
seized

evidently described,

on

the

second 20
ff.

occasion

when

Saul

by the contagious

frenzy,

19,

Ahaz and Jehoshaphat were sitting in the gate of Samaria DiTJD^ D^N^DD DWaan ^31 comp. (of the prophets of Baal) From this peculiarity, the prophet is sometimes described ib. 1 8, 29.
So
i

Ki. 22, 10

mockingly as
6.

$$&

2 Ki. 9,

u. Hos.

9,

7;

cf.

Jer. 29, 26.

nrvl]
1

the

same word

v.

10; Jud. 14, 6. 19. 15, 14 (of Samson); ch.

is

ii, 6;

6, 1 3

(David); also 18, 10, where the subject

DTi^N nil, but

the direction in

which the inspired

activity displays

itself is different.

n aanm]
7-

for
, .

nKaanm;
rvm]

cf. v.

13.

See

GK.

7511.

nt?y

rvm would be resumed normally by JWJfl, or

n& yn

(the latter less usual in ordinary prose).

The uncommon
.

imper.

was chosen, no doubt, as more forcible: cf. Dt. 6, io-i2 a na The more usual form 45, i6f. San] So Jer. 9, 16. Est. 4, 4.
if/.

is

naxari (ii times), or (Gen. 30, 38)

T }ifcn

GK.

762.

p
8.

NYEn

-|>N]

The same
to first

idiom

in ch. 25, 8. Jud. 9, 33^.

Q o h. 9,

10.

Introduction

account of Saul s rejection (13, 7^-1 5 a ).

before
.

And
until I
is

thou shalt go
to

down

me
. . :

to Gilgal

and, behold, I

am
nani

coming down

thee to sacrifice

seven days shalt thou wait,

come

to thee,

and declare

to thee

what thou

shalt do.

(cf. Jud. 9, 33) and subordinate to DTV% nan the idea which it introduces into relief, and giving it greater throwing then b is supplementary prominence than it would otherwise have

a circumstantial clause

to a, defining

more
2
.

closely

what Saul

is

to

do

at Gilgal until

Samuel

meets him there

1

Comp. Lane, Manners and Customs of

the

Modern Egyptians

(ed. 5, 1871),

ii.

151-154, 174 f., I79f.; W. R. Smith, Prophets of Israel, pp. 86, 390 f. ("391 f.). 2 Keil s construction of this verse is illegitimate. The verse refers evidently to
1365

82

The First Book of Samuel,

The
Gilgal

here meant

is

rn"V"l]

the one in the Jordan-valley

ft.

(Jiljul or JiljuliyeK), near Jericho,

600

below the Medit. Sea, and

consequently some 3350 ft. below Gibeah; hence go down. Due probably to a scribe, who judged 9. iTiTl] See on i, 12.
error,
still

in

from the tense of the preceding verses, that another future was to follow Tn is the tense which ought to be used, and which
:

ought, no doubt, to be restored. leap vuena] Cf. spy njsn (in

*]Sn]

flight),
3, 9.

Jer. 48, 39.

For the

constr.,

cf.

Zeph.

10.
DB>]

redundant before nnyiun.

place
f.,

i.

e.

either the

mentioned

in v. 3

Read with LXX (cVeiflev) D#P, where Saul parted from Samuel, or the place the account of how the first two signs (vv. 1-4)
v,

came

to

pass,
will
.
.

Gibeah
tfltnp^
Pr.
7,

having fallen out of the narrative after be the Gibeah of God of v. 5.

9.

The

rum]

So (without a verb)
Exactly
oft.

II 15,

32;

Ki. 18, 7

10.
-INTI
,

1 1.

inv

b vn]

and analogously, with

iTni,

san vn so, II 2, 23^ nojm future time, Nu. 21, 8 al., and of
.
,

b
i

reiteration in the past, Jud. 19, 30.

iyiv 73

is

a ptcp. absol.
cf.

and

it

came

to pass, as regards all that

knew him,

that, etc.:

GK.

i6 w

Tenses,

121, 06s.

i.

For honKB, see GK.

20^.

13, 8-14, whereas, in the Book of Samuel as we have it, Samnel and Saul appear Keil therefore, seeking together at Gilgal earlier, viz. on the occasion u, 14 f. to exclude a reference to this occasion, and to interpret the verse as referring only

to the subsequent one, presses the circumstantial clause introduced by njfll saying that this presupposes that the preceding words And thou shalt go down before me
,

express merely a condition, in view of which, when it is satisfied, Samuel instructs And if thou goest down before me to Saul how to act. He construes, therefore Gilgal, and lo, I come down to thee, etc., then thou shalt wait seven days until
:

come

to thee, etc.
is

n3H1, however, cannot influence the sense of what precedes

and (what

more important) flTTI followed by bmn cannot express a condition. Had DTV1 expressed a (virtual) condition, it must have been followed by ffipnini
1

(so regularly, as 19, 3;

Num. 14, 15 etc. Tenses, 149) ?mn D^fD" J"iy2J^ being attached dowStrcus, shews that the preceding clause is complete in itself, i.e. that The clause 31 m"P1 expresses a positive command, and not a condition.
:

J"n"V1

b expresses what is to be done by Saul not necessarily immediately after 7 , but as soon after it as is convenient. The collision with n, 14 f. arises from the fact

that this part of the Books of Samuel is composed of sources originally distinct b 10, 8 and 13, 7 -i5 are thus related to one another, but stand out of connexion
: ft

with

ii,

14

f.

X. 8-i9
Prob. the ptcp.,
(Tenses,

83

was

prophesying, with Kin omitted after run

135. 6, 2

HM npno]
gives point to

nd*). What, now, has happened to

;

GK.

HT strengthens
;

and
""O,

HO; so Gen. 27, 20. Jud. 18, 24

in

al.

similarly in nt

npTD^.

Comp.

Arabic i*..I.^
i.

li

and see

especially Fleischer,

Kleinere Schriften,

355

f.

(who adduces from Arabic usage reasons

Lane, Arab. Lex.,
s. v.

in support of this explanation of the idiom);

li,

p.

948.

Briefer explanations will be found in

GK.

136; Ew.
more

183*, 325*12.
likely
is

Drvas
""Cl]

But who

is

their father?

i.e. is
?

their father

than Qish to have had a son a prophet

;

Prophetic inspiration

no hereditary possession

and

it is

not more remarkable in the case

of Saul, than in the case of any other

member

of the troop of prophets.

Against the easier, but weak, reading of

LXX,

Pesh. lifax, see

We.

nrvn]

for the

fern.

(=

//),

cf.

II 3, 37.

Jos.

n,

20.

Ki. 2, 15:

GK.
1 3.

44 b.

noan]

conversation, vv. 14-16,

With noan we should have expected i?yi for Km ; the is also more likely to have taken place in
:

a private house than on the Bamah. Hence We. and most read nnjan for noan. Ehrl. objects that irva ta or (v. 26. 23, 1 8) irva^,
not nn an,
<i

is

said of a person

going

to his

Gen. 43, 26 we have njvan

P1DV

Na

"!;

own house. However, in and nrpan here would be not so

much

his

house, as
1

19, 15. Jos. 2,

8),
eis

the house, as opposed to the street (cf. Jud. where Saul had been playing the prophet. Bu.
5.

Dh., after

LXX

rov fiowov, read (see vv.

v. 10.

10) nyaan

but that

seems
14.
1

to

have been reached in

See on
"ION
1K>X]

px a]
i>NlotJ>

9, 4.

6.

misplaced gloss, not expressed by

LXX.
:

EW.

conceal the

awkward and unnatural

Ex.
a.

position of the words

cf.

their rendering of

14, 9.

10, i7-27
17. nstton]

Saul chosen by
see
7.

lot

as king (sequel
16.

to 8).

NebiSamwtt:

on

7,

18.

"aJN]

emphatic, as II 12,

D Vn?n] construed with

19. DflNl]

imtaon Kara
G
2

orweo-iv; cf. Jer.

n,

2.

26, 2.

And
_>><?

(emph.),

in spite of

what

have done.

84
Kin

The First Book of Samuel,

1B>N]

who

is

a saviour to you.

Nin after the relative

"l!i>X.

sign, before a ptcp. or adj., as Gen. 9, 3 Tl Nin

8- 27. 4,

Nu.

9, 13.
i, 9.

14,

nb y N^n n^S. Jer. 27, 35, 31. Dt. 20, 20

:

9.

Hag.

Ruth
7,

15

similarly Ez. 43, 19.

So also

in

and
"3

in Targg., as II 20, 19.

li>

24, 17. Is.

Aramaic, pjx 42, 18 *.

2,

Dan.

17

PDNni]
Several

*3

with the direct narration, as

16

MT.
8,

(where see

note).

MSS. LXX,
"0

Pesh. Vulg. express N? (as

will,

19 MT., 12,
is

12 MT.), in which case

of course,

#/.

Either reading

admissible, but N?
i"

is

more pointed and

forcible.
:

^D?

"QVnn]

Take your stand, present themselves

(EVV.), but
2.

cf.

Jos. 24,

i.

WB^N]
20. 21.
i.e.
"D7"l

not

thousands
15. Mic.
5,

tribal subdivisions,

clans;

cf.

23, 23. Jud. 6,

]

viz.

by

lot

cf.
teal

14, 14+. Jos. 7,

Trpocrayoixrt TTJV
2-ij?M

16-18.
<J>vXr)v

IDDnJ
sense.

LXX

adds

Ma-rrapi
is

eis

avSpas

trn^>

noen nns^O-ns
N3n]

(see Jos. 7, 17), which

required

by the

22. tJ*N D^TI Tiy

Is there

still

(i.e.
;

besides ourselves) any one

come
there

hither
is

The people

are in despair

and they inquire whether

LXX,

yet any one amongst them, of whom they are not aware. however, have Ei ep^erat 6 avr/p fvravOa and it is true, as We.
;

remarks, that the answer

the question,
there
still

Lo, he

is

hidden,

etc.,

agrees better with

Is the

man come
hither
?

hither (B*Nn D^n X3n)?

than with

Is

man come
out,

Of

course, with E*Kn, *ny must be

omitted.

There are

several cases in

MT.

of an article having acci

dentally dropped

some

(e.g.

14,

32) being already noted by

;

the

Massorah (Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 165

or the Mass.

Magna on
:

II 23, 9).

D tan

!>N]

?R, on account of the motion implied in K2H3

Cf. Jer. 4, 3^.

he hath

hidden himself in among the baggage.

24. niTWit]

When

DJVN1

is

coupled with the n inter rog., the 1

is

regularly doubled (as

2 Ki. 6,

signified

32
^rv]

I^En
1

GK. The same

22"

(20^),

by lool

the dagesh dirimens]:

so 17, 25.

formula as II 16, 16.

Cooke, NSI.
27, 2
2,

Ki.

i,

25

al.

Comp.,
.

in Phoenician,

DB*

NH K N (= Heb.

N^
5, 32!

rOB*).

And

so also in Arabic (Qor.

58.

43, 51)

and Ethiopic (Gen.

14, a etc.).

X. /9-A7. 2
25.

85

=
")SE>3]

in a scroll, in accordance with the principle explained

on 1,4.

So, with the

Job
y\

19, 23.

Comp. GK.
Ex.
1

rw]

6,

26.

^nn]

LXX
"OH

33 woi

same word, Ex. 17, 14 and on 19,

Nu.
13.

5,

23

Jer. 32, 10.

126"

WIN rani. 34

8uva//,60)v i.e.

^nn

"02

= the

Jud. 21, 10).

has accidentally fallen out:

men of valour (see ^n means not a mere

is

band of men
appropriate.

(A V.), but a military host

^Tl

a sense that

not here but

^1 denotes not merely men of

and honest (Ex.
27

valour,

men
"03

morally brave,

loyal,

18, 21. 25):

here the ^Tl

and the PjJv2

"03

of

v.

stand in evident contrast to one another.

27*. ilf] contemptim: cf. 21, 16. i Ki. 22, 27. nruo] of presents offered to a superior, as Jud.

3, 15.

2 Ki. 8,

f.

10, 27

11, 13. (14.) 15.

Saul

does as his
is
i

hand finds

(9, 7),

wins

a success against the Ammonites, and

the people with acclamation (sequel to 9,

made king at Gilgal by

10, 16).

27

t^nnco Wl] MT. may

in

to a certain extent

be defended by the
II 4, 10,

use of 3 rvn in Gen. 19, 14^. 27, 12. Nu.

is

n,

i.

found mostly

connexion with TJJ3, which

justifies

though it and explains

the 3.
HTJfa

LXX
i.e.

join the

words
This

to
is

n,

i,

rendering KOL eyev?^?; us fiera

B^HIM

^--is

preferable to
(see

MT.

The combination
but
it

of D with a prep,
with
}

most uncommon

on

14, 14):

occurs

remarkably similar to the present one as fully to justify it here Gen. 38, 24 D^HH B^tPlM TH and it came to pass after about three months.
in a phrase so
:

11, i.
falls

nyi>:

WS\ The name W?

itself is

still

clings to
S. of

Wady

Yabis, which
:

into the

Jordan from the East, 9 miles

uncertain.

Beth-shean

but the

site

of the ancient town

it

Robinson and others have

identified

with ed-Deir, on the S. side of

Wady

Yabis, 6 miles E. of
hills

the Jordan

but Miryamin,

miles

NW.

of ed-Deir, on the

on

the

N.
of

side of the
it

Wady

seems

better to agree with Eusebius

Pella,

description

(Onom. 268, 8 if.) as 7 miles from to Gerasa (see DB. and EB. s.v.).
2.

on the road leading

condition
this
will

nxn]

pointing forwards to

"Jlp33

On

of

conclude a covenant with you, on condition of the boring out to you,

so Gen. 34, 22.
42, 15. 33.

etc.;

Ex.

7,

17.

Is. 27, 9.

The

b of

86
reference,
1

The First Book of Samuel,

as

Gen.

17, 10.
2,

Ki. 14, 13 (comp. on

ni"ON]
JV"O

Lev. 26, 5. 26; b 33): Lex, 51 2 (5 a).

34, 22;
8.

Dt. 23, 3^. 4 b

being understood, as 20, 16. 22,

-|p:n]

sc.

DnpUil:

GK.

i44

d e
,

and on

ch. 16,

(EVV. of course

paraphrase).

The same

verb, also of boring out an eye, Pr. 30, 17,

and

(Pi.) Jud. 16, 21.

rpnotn]
3.

The

fem. suffix

= it:

see

GK.

135?.

*pn] See on
p

15, 16.

unx
Jud T^N
2 7.
A?

yK>1

DNl]

The
137).

ptcp. in the protasis, as Gen. 24, 42

f.,

11,9 al- (Tenses,

IJN^l]

^S

N^

of going out to surrender, as

Is.

36,
9,
i.

^N

IKS.

Ki. 24, 12 (with ^y

= ta).
1

For
i>33

hB>

nyaj, see
.
,

on

Jud. 19, 29

ijx-isr

hna

nr6^i

rroxj^
i

nruw.

nna

is

divide by joints, esp. for sacrifice, Lev.

i, 6.

Ki. 18, 23.

LXX
is

far

D^K^O is better. more frequently

or /^rror

said in such phrases:

yet see

12,

^ ins]
1XV1]
I
;

14; and Lex. 29^.

//fo

ofYahweh:
23
:

cf.

Gen. 35, 5 (D
Ipy.??!:

i"vN

nFin).

LXX

c(36r)<rai>,

a mistranslation of

so Jud. 7, 23. 24.

;

2,

and even

for DpyT3 18,

cf. dvefiorjcrav 2

Ki. 3, 21

avefirjo-av

(corrupted from
avefiorjarev}

ch. 13, 4. dj/e/Sd^o-av),

Jud. 10, 17;

dve/fy (cod. Al.

is 14, 20. probably to be restored here, ^py.^1 been suggested (Bu.) by the preceding N?f\ having a frequent expression: II 19, 15. Nu. 14, 15. Jud. 6, 16.

for pW?l

20,
8.

i.

8. ii.

Ezr. 3,
Ibzik,

= Neh.
miles

8, it.

pD] now

1 1

SW.

of Beth-shean, and just opposite to

W.

Yabis.

mirr* K^Kl]

E^N construed
a.

collectively, as often in this

and similar

phrases, e.g. 9
9.

13, 6.

14, 22.

17, 2 etc.

nr:K

l]

Read with

LXX

-JENI.

nyittTl]

deliverance: see relief,

on

14,

Dm]
ii.

Better, with

Qre and 34 MSS., DrD

writers

45 (nyit^). c f. Gen. 18,

:

i.

II 4, 5.
all

poy]

LXX,

Pesh. express poy ^3, in agreement with the

.

but universal custom of the OT.

(^f.

Except once in poetry

either as

83, 8), the

Ammonites
1

are always

known

poy ^2, or

Noldeke,

ZDMG.

1886, p. 171.

XL
(rarely,

2-15

87
the

and mostly

late)

D Oloy.

On

other hand,
if/.

2N1O M3 1

2 never occur; D lN

^3
it

occurs once,

137,

7.

DHXtwn
were
left,

TVl]

And

came

to pass, as regards those that

that they

were scattered.
Tenses,

An

unusual construciion

cf.

however, 10,
12.

n.
?

II 2, 23:
. .
. .

>j8no/e;

GK.

n6 w
saith,

D^xn un

1ONn ^]
the

Who

is

he that

Shall Saul
particular
7,

reign over us

give

up

men

that

we may

slay them.

case of the idiom which

may

be most simply illustrated by Jud.

a E*
"0.01

N
"C

^ Who

is

fearful

and trembling
let

let

him return
In
this

etc.

Whoso

is

fearful

and trembling,

him

return

etc.

idiom ^o

person of a particular character, in order after wards to prescribe what he is to do (or what is to be done to him), or to state how he will fare. As in the example quoted, by a slight
invites attention to a

change of form
it is

in the sentence,

D may be
:

represented by whoso

but

really a

more

expressive, less

ordinary usage than that of whoso,

whosoever in English.
5. 6. 7.

Other examples
Is. 50,

Ex. 24, 14; 32, 33; Dt. 20,

8; Jud. 10, 18;

8 bis; Jer. 49, 19;

an imperative, Ex. 32, 24 1p~iann 3iir cf. 26 ^N mrr6 o Who is you!

2
\f/.

W
for

and followed by
?

Who

has gold

Strip
to

it

off

Yahweh?
is

(Come)

me!

34, 13
"\yby

f.

*]bw

Comp. Lex. 567 g. The sense of the words

?1W!>]

indicated by the tone in

which they are uttered

either affirmatively, in a tone of irony, or,

more probably,
Gen. 27, 24 ya
7JHB* ^y:
II

interrogatively.

So not unfrequently
i,

in

Hebrew, as

nns;
i5o

Ki.

24;

21, 7

nyf?n n^yn nny nn

16, 4.

ch. 21, 16,

n,
i3
b
.

ii

and GK.

22, 7. II 16, 17. a.

Comp. on

25,

and

II 19, 23.

15. D^D^tJ

DTOT]

So Ex.
effect

24, 5.

The words

are in apposition, the

second having the

first:

of specializing the sense expressed by the

188. i;

Tenses,

Appendix,

GK.

i3i

b.

Except once in late Hebrew, 2 Ch. 20, i. Not to be confused (as is done by Delitzsch on if. 25, 12) with the use of in \f/. 15, i. 24, 8. 10. Is. 33, 14. 63, i where the answer to *D is a siibstantive, not a verb, and describes the character of the person asked about. This usage is a figure
2
""O

peculiar to poetry, which, as the examples shew,

in the text.

is

not the case with that explained

The First Book of Samuel,

12.

Samuel s farewell

to the people (sequel to

7,

2-17;

8;

10, 17-27*).
12,
i.

Cf. for the phrases 8, 7. 22.

It is

evident that two accounts

of the appointment of Saul as king, written from different points of

view, though fitted together so as to supplement one another, have

been combined in our present Book of Samuel.

9,

10, 16 (in

which nothing is said of the unwillingness of Yahweh to grant a king) b is continued by 10, 27 (LXX). n, 1-13. 15 (note in particular the
connexion between
5
ff.)

10, 7 do that

which thine hand shall find and n,

and
ch.

ch.

13

the sequel of ch. 8

on the other hand

its

and

12.

The former

narrative, with

details, is the earlier

and more

original: the

is 10, 17-27* abundance of greater latter in its main elements

exhibits literary affinities

with the Hexateuchal source

but

it

has
style

probably

in parts

been expanded by a subsequent

writer,

whose

and point of view resemble those of the redaction of the Book of to whom may be attributed, for instance, parts of ch. 12, Judges, and
especially

the allusion in

v.

12 to ch.

1 1

(which

is

in fact a

contra
s

diction, for the attack of

Nahash was not

the occasion of the people

The verse n, 14 in the form in which it now asking for a king). seems intended to harmonize the two accounts, by repre appears the ceremony at Gilgal as a reneival of Saul s appointment as
senting
king.

The
DS^B^
Tll^"!
.

differences in style between the

two narratives are very

noticeable.
2.
"J^nno]
.
.

used herein a neutral sense: see on

2,

30.

3.

Tipt2>y]

The two words appear

pK>y

often in parallelism, as

Dt. 28, 33.

Am.

4, i.

is

to oppress, in particular

by defrauding

a labourer or dependent of his due.

12
. .
.

ISO] ~iD3

is

the price of a
to appease a

life,

the

money
s

offered for the

(cf.

life

of a

murdered man

kinsman

wrath

DB.

iii.

129).

The
for a

21-23) murder (the Gk.

is permitted in the oldest legislation (Ex. imposition of a 133 in a particular case of homicide (21, 30); but as compensation
71-011/17),

the

payment of

it

is

(in the

Priests

Code)
1

strictly prohibited (Nu. 35, 31

1PK

mm

PSii>

naa

mpn

sin

= Budde, ZA TIV. 1888, pp. 231-236 ( Richter and Samuel, 1890, pp. 180-185), however (see the last paragraph on p. 248), does not claim to shew that the who,
writer
is

identical with that of E.

Comp. LOT. 167-168

(edd. 6-8, 177-178).

XII. i-3
Nin).
forfeited,
it

89

In the sense of an equivalent for a life conceived as In Am. 5, 12 the nobles of occurs $. 49, 8. Is. 43, 3.

Samaria are denounced as 1Q3 T!p6.

of the word,
it

This being the uniform usage

Samuel here repudiates is that he has ever as judge taken a money payment on condition of acquitting a murderer brought before him for justice.
follows that what
13

D^yNl]

that I

might (Tenses,
is

63) hide

my

eyes in

it.

The

sense of the metaphor

obvious: comp.
uiroSTjfia
-

D^y

D1D3 Gen.
icar

20, 16.

LXX,

however, has eiA.acr/Aa KCU

"

diroKpiOitjTe

ep>u,

KOL

aTToSwcrw vfuv

i.e. ^3 Vy.

BvJWI

?3

The

pair of sandals

is

chosen

by Amos (2,6. 8, 6) which the Israelite of

as

his

an example of a paltry article, for the sake of and Sir. 46, 19 day would sell the poor
:

(in the praise of Samuel, with plain allusion to this passage), KOL irpo

Kaipov Koi/A^o-ews cuwvos eTrefj.apTvpa.TO evai/ri Kvpiov KOI ^pUTTOV Xp^/Aara

Kol Iws uiroSTjfiaTwi
airo Traces (rap/cos OVK

KCU OVK
tL\.r]<f>a.

veKaA.ecrv

to shew (as the author see the Pro av^pco7ros, has been held wrote in Hebrew and was conversant with the OT. in Hebrew) logue

avrw

that the reading existed in his day not merely in the

LXX,
is

but in the

Hebrew

text of Samuel.

The

objection to this view

that

1Q3 and

even a pair of sandals

D^yj do not agree very well together, and the sense required is or (so Th. und (waren es auch nur) em Paar
:

Schuhe

P],

which

is

hardly expressed by the simple copula

is

it

may be

questioned also whether a pair of sandals (which

mentioned by
be offered

Amos

as something insignificant)

would be a bribe

likely to

to a judge.

The

recently recovered
,

Heb.

text of Ecclus. (see Strack s

Die Sprite he Jesus

(in

des Sohnes Sirachs, 1903) has the

same reading
But
^y. is

my
is

*b DIN

i>31

*n(npb

^OD

D^yJ1 iSia);

but neither this nor the

here.
""?

LXX
it

proof that

it

was the

original
;

Heb. reading

a good antecedent to D3^ 2^X1

to

and Bu. may be

right in

supposing

have/a//^ out after 13 Ty. D:6 l^Nl] must mean, and

will

"m

I will restore it to you ; for and answer you (We.) the classical expression would be 3^X1 D3nx (e.g. Nu. 22, 8), with an accus. of the person, and omission

of 131 only in poetry (as

10,
1

Job
1

13, 22),

and

in the late passage 2

late

Ch.

6 (~i3T of

Ki. 12,

6 omitted).

In another
Cf.

book ^N TBTI
.

occurs in the same sense: Est.

4, 13. 15.

Lex. 999 b

90
5.

The First Book of Samuel,

nem]

sc.

noisn (on

16, 4).

LXX,

Pesh. Tg. Vg. would hardly

render otherwise than by a plural, even though they read the verb
in the singular:
i.e.
is
still

the sing,

is

unusual: hence the note

"PUD

thought or supposed (to be the true reading). also found in 19 MSS. In the Massoretic apparatus published
is

nONI

by Jacob ben Hayyim

in

in the large Rabbinical Bible edited

by him

in 1525, the note *V3D occurs

on about 190 passages

1
.

Dr. Ginsburg

(1883), 324-327 (arranged by books), 327-329 (arranged alphabetically), adding the p"V3D noted in other MSS., was able to raise the number to about 240; and now, he states 2 he has
ii.
,

The Massorah,

collected altogether as

many

as

350.

According

to

the

common

8 opinion the note points to a conjectural reading , which might be

expected, from analogy, or from the context, to occur, but does not

occur actually in the Massoretic text

but some scholars

are

of

opinion that these notes refer to the readings of actual MSS., not indeed agreeing with the MT., but preferred by the author (or authors)
of the notes in question. with each other
;

The two

explanations are not inconsistent

but

if

the latter be true, the value of the notes will

be the greater, as many will then embody evidence as to the readings of Codices now no longer extant. Its probability, however, can only be tested by a systematic examination of all the p~P3D that occur, and estimate of their value in individual cases. Both Heb. MSS. and
Versions not unfrequently (but not always) agree with the reading suggested by a ~P3D but this is not proof that manuscript authority is actually referred to by it. Examples: on Ex. 26, 31 (in the
:
fiB>jp

Rabbinical Bibles) occurs the note

nB>yn

PT2D

i.e.

twice

section of these are noted in ordinary editions of the Hebrew Bible. Massoretic apparatus (on other matters as well as on this) is contained only in the large Rabbinical Bibles. The notes relating to the pTQD, published
1

Only a
full

The

by Jacob ben Hayyim,

are collected

and explained, and the passages

referred to

given, in Frensdorffs Massoretisches Worterbuch (1876), pp. 369-373. 3 Introduction to the Hebrew Bible, 1897, pp. 193, 194 f.
5

See e.g. Elias Levita

Massoreth ha-Massoreth (1538),

in

Dr. Ginsburg

edition (text and translation), London, 1867, pp. 225-227.

4

p. 138,

Ginsburg in the Transactions of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, 1877, and Introd. to the Heb. Bible, 1897, p. 187 ff. Gratz, Die Psalmen (1882),
:

pp. 115-117; comp. Geiger, Urschrift (1857),

p.

253

f.

XII. 5
would be expected
for
nB>JP,

91
is

and a reference

added

to Ex. 25, 39.

;

In both passages, the context would favour the second person

this is

and

read in 26, 31 by 6

MSS. LXX,

Sam. and Pesh.

(LXX

omits).

39 by 3 MSS. But each case must be examined

Pesh.,

and

in 25,

upon

its

own

merits:

the correction

suggested by the note

is it

is

not

always supported by

the Versions, nor

always in itself necessary

:

The

note in

many

cases relates to the

number of a verb

thus,
it

where
11

MT. has Wl, the pi. iNin is eight NT is fourteen times suggested
3
.

times suggested, where

niDiO
l

has INS

gested eleven times besides (see

viz.

1ON^, as here, is sug the Rabb. Bibles on Jud. n, 15):

for

Ex. 14, 25. Nu. 32, 25. Jud. 8, 6. n, 3 20, 3. 2 Ki. 9, ii. Hos. 12, 9. Zech. 6, 7

15. ch. 16, 4.

.

19, 22

Ki.

The

reader

may examine

these passages
to

and consider
4
.

in

him

to be necessary

The
it

which of them the correction appears must be carefully distinguished "P2D

direct the suggested alternative to
is

from the

np

in

no case does

be

substituted in reading for that

5 however, as Ginsburg shews
,

which

written in the text.

It is true,

that a reading
is

which by one School

of Massorites

is

called a

"V3D,

by another School sometimes called

32),

a Qre (as D2 for ro in

recognized
Oriental

Is. 30,

and

that

it

may even be
,

the

reading (as Nu.

n,

21 D3^ for orh

i S.

18, 25

DN

*3 for O,

in both cases with the support of

in

Western MSS.).
:

List of
I
i,

pV2D
28 D3
*

(for D31).
2,

I-II Sam. as given in Ginsburg s Hebrew Bible (ed. i, 1894) So 2 Rabbinical quotations (Aptowitzer, II, p. 3).

2,

13 (ed.

De
1

Rossi,

1911, and The Massorah, but not in ed. i) JD for DX [7 MSS. i Baer (cod. Erf.). Pesh. Targ. read HND ; see note ad loc.~\.

In

some cases

certainly the correction rests

upon a
in other

false exegesis, as

when

r!2

for 13 is suggested in

Ex. 4, 17; Dt. 24, 7

2, 9, for instance,

passages the opinions of

commentators
defend 13.
a 3

differ;

Ez.

Cornill accepts PlU, Hitzig and

Smend

See, on the passages, Frensdorff s note, p. 370

f.

Only eleven passages are

is
:

cited,

though the number (elsewhere, as well as

It is p. 370.

on Jud. n, 15)
omitted passage
ii.

stated as twelve.
/. c.

thought that Jud.

In the
lists in

u,

19

may
s

be the

see Frensdorff,

Ginsburg

Massorah,
it is

pp. 325, 328, the twelfth passage

*

is

Comp.

also the notes on

in Jer. 5, 2 for

many
:

of the

given as Jos. 24, 21. pT2D cited above.

On

I 27, 6
St.

said

"V3D

pX

p?

so,

probably rightly, 16 MSS., the

Petersburg

cod. of A.D. 916, and Pesh.

5

Introd., p. i87ff.

Not

in

The Massorah.

92
2,

The First Book of Samuel,

20
5
b
1

12,

8
1

DEIpcb for lD1pb. So 10 MSS. 2 + 2 on marg., and Pesh. So 18+ i (Appendix, De R.) MSS. LXX, Pesh. iWUfO. So i MS. Ginsb., i Kennicott, and i Rabb. quotation.
(ed. 2)
l.

niDN

6,

nB&OV
bbB>n

So So

c.

30 MSS., and

Rabb. quotations.

*.

MS.

(Kenn.).

20 rfevfa
18, 14

1
.

732

(for
"a

W
2

NO MS.
5

).

So 18 MSS., and many Rabb. quotations.

25

ON

(for

3).

The
Gi., 3

Oriental reading.

Also 9 MSS., and 3 Rabb.

quotations.
19, 10

Kinn.

MSS.

Kenn.

22
20,

TIDKM

(2).

No MS.

Dy

(for

^).
.

25, 23

27
27,

nnK. ilN an

= 2 MSS. Kenn. (K. 154 6. J). So 7 MSS. So 25 + 1 (App.) MSS. The Orient. Tp (Baer, 105,
pb).
i

118).

by
*.

(for
2

MS.

(Gi.).
3).

II

3, 22 -IK3

MSS. Kenn. (K. 154 = G. MSS. Kenn.

29 byi
6, ii
13,

1-

So 10 MSS.
2
.

35 INin.

rvai

20

rvan

1
.

NO MS. NO MS.
E>K).

14, 19

W
B

(for
(for
:

17, 19
1

^B).
.

3 MSS. Kenn. So 10 MSS.

(in 3 the

8,

29

ob&n 1
DK*3

So 15 MSS. DeR.
i

deleted) + 3 Gi.

19,

(fira).
for

MS.

(Gi.).
i

9 INTI (for N3^,

22,
6.

sc.

Oyn).

MS.

44 Q^oy
nirr]

iny

(^. 18,

44 Dy).

Gi., 5 Kenn. So 4 MSS. + 2 Gi., and

LXX.

LXX Map?
difficult

Kupios=^

/<l

ly, certainly rightly.

HB>y.

nt?y]

A
:

and anomalous use of

The

explanation
is

which

is

best in accordance with the general use of the verb

that

of Keil

made Moses and Aaron

to

be what they were as leaders

(Ges. rendered constiluit,
it is

of men, the word being used not in a physical sense, but morally, of
the position taken

by them

in history.

appointed; but r\wy has this sense only

when

followed by a word
Ki. 12, 31
i
;

implying
(or set
up")

office or function, as to

make

priests,

to

make

tWy VI

UK

2 Ki.

21,6:

similarly II 15,

to establish chariots

and
7.

horses.)

riDBE N]

The

Nif.,

properly reflexive, as 1HD3

force, as

to

hide oneself,

acquires sometimes a reciprocal

1

DD2 3

to

judge one another,

Not in The Massorah. MSS. are cited from De

Rossi, except where otherwise stated.

XII.
i.

93
to set

e.

to

plead or dispute together in judgement; so HpiJ

i.e. to

right one

another,

argue or reason together

(Is. i,

18)

another,

i.e.

to take counsel together (i Ki. 12,

pyu to counsel one 6 and often) cf. GK.

:

5i
*

nipltf
is

OSB>3

prefix /cat aTrayyeAw fyiu/ ritf] construed with an accus. in Ez. 17, 20 vVO
i>3

LXX

= 03^

TT SKI.

DK>

ins TlDD&WI

\3

?yD

"KJ>N.

But the construction

i>y

is

harsh
i

and

in all probability in Ez.,

MSS.) or i^yo and here the words expressed by

either 1^J?O3 (so 9
is,
.
.

(so

MS.) should be read

LXX
5,

should be supplied.

no doubt, a reminiscence of Jud.

-1PN3] as 6,
6*>.

n.

LXX
(not 0^33?. Th.

add KCU

fTcurfivwcrev avrovs
i,

AtyvTrros

=
:

We.:

see Ex.

12. Dt. 26, 6. II 7,

10 Hebrew and

LXX).

The words

are needed on account of the following Ipypi

first

a copyist s eye passed from the

QHSD

to the second.

expresses just what

,

Moses and Aaron

did not do.

(the

LXX

Pesh. ol-o/, Vulg. collocavit D3B*1 has been

is

Cn^*l

subject being
in

God).
9.

The unpointed

filled in

wrongly

MT.

"OE^]

This figure

used

first

in the

Song

of Moses, Dt. 32,

30

of Judges,

and adopted thence by the Deuteronomic redactor of the Book who uses it often in the frame-work into which he fits the
by him
in his

narratives incorporated

Book

(Jud.

2,

14.

3, 8.

4,

2.

10, 7 [rather differently in the older narrative 4, 9]).

Chapters

7, 8,

12 of

Sam. have

affinities

in style

with the redactional elements

of the

Book
N3V

of Judges.
nt?]

1n
in

LXX

express

1WH

"l^D

p:r

SOX IP, which

is

more

accordance with Hebrew usage.

10.

*1CN vi] Here, where IpyTl closely precedes, the sing,

is

corrected

by

the
11.

Massorah into the

plural

nDX

l).

pi] No judge or

deliverer of this

name

is

elsewhere mentioned.
i3ff.
to.
:

Ewald regarded }12 as an abbreviation of psy Jud. 12, some better known hero is likely to have been referred
Pesh. have
;

but

LXX,

Judges before Gideon but between Gideon and Jephthah no suitable name can be and the order in v. 9 is not chronological. Targ. and suggested
p~i3.

Baraq,

it

is

true, is

mentioned

in

Jews explain

Samson, treating

p2

fancifully as

=p

p.

94
K1]

The First Book of Samuel,

Pesh. and Lucian
pt?BB>

riNI

probably a correction.
:

The

passage, of course, does not report the ipsissima verba of Samuel

is

the speech

the

work of the

narrator,

and indeed,

in this part,

appears to have been expanded by a later editor, who has forgotten The allusion is to the that it is Samuel himself who is speaking.
success narrated in ch. 7.
flBS]
n8<i.

An

accus.,

So Dt.

denning the stale, in confidence, security: GK. and in poetry Dt. 33, 28. Pr. i, 33 al.: but 12, 10
;

rmp
12.

is

the usual expression (Lev. 25, 18. 19.

Jud. 18,

7.

Ki.

5, 5 al.).

^ nxm] LXX,
II 16, 18.
Dr6xtJ>

Pesh. omit ^.

^
:

tib

= Nay,
is

but as

2,

16

Qre;
13.
for a

24, 24 al.
Cf. 8, 18

T#N Dmra n^s]

is

bxv

used of the request

king in 8, 10.

Nevertheless Dntaty lt?N appears here to be

superfluous,
Dni>KB>]

and

probably to be omitted with

LXX.

14.
pesis.
I
is

GK. The whole

("ins

44

d
,

64

verse consists of the protasis, ending with an aposio*nriK HVl

or)

= to follow
is

after,

as Ex. 23,

2.

II 2, 10.

Ki. 12, 20.

16, 21.

Thenius

bold enough to affirm that

insert

inx

nVl
after

not
:

Hebrew/ and accordingly would

not only, however,
is this

D^in
it

before

"i!"!N

LXX

needless in

itself,

but, as

We. remarks,

the position of Tropcvo/Aevoi in the

Greek shews that

merely represents

a corruption of
15.

wnta.
nrvrn]
Cf.

can

Ex.

9, 3.

Dt.

2,

15. Jud. 2, 15.

WTTONTi]

Since

and against your

fathers

gives an unsuitable

1 sense, and the passages in which 1 means, or appears to mean, as are but to accept LXX D33pp:fl in place dissimilar, there is no alternative

is

deduced stands

In the formulation of proverbs, where the relation from which the comparison in the second place (rare) Job 5, 7 For man is born to trouble
:

More com sparks fly upwards (i.e. both effects happen similarly); 12, II. monly the opposite order is employed Pr. 25, 25 Cold waters to a thirsty soul door turns upon its hinges and and good news from a far country; 26, 3. 9. 14

and

a sluggard upon his bed

27, 21

cf. \

19, 5

MT.

(Lex. 253* j).

Even supposing

that the passage could, on other grounds, be treated as an example of the first of these usages, the same verb will be must obviously govern both clauses : the
substitution of it

was

in the

second clause destroys entirely the parallelism of idea

depends.

upon which the idiom

itself essentially

XII.
of DDTI12N31
both with
v.
:

n-22
you

95

the mention together of

14 and

v.

25^.

MT.

will

and your king agrees be a lapsus calami, perhaps

due to a reminiscence of vv. 6-8.

1 6.

n ^y]

is

about to do/
viz.

The/#/. instans (on

3, il).

17. ni^p]

voices/

of Yahweh, in accordance with the

(\^.

Hebrew
al.:

conception of a thunderstorm
cf.
\l/.

18,

11-14)

so Ex.

9,

23. 28

29 throughout.

bxvb] in regard to asking: in our idiom, in asking (though would never be used in Heb.). So v. 19, and often, as 14, 33. Gen.
18, 19.
2 S. 13,

16;

cf.
:

GK.

114.
done
this evil
:

20.

DJ"lN]

emphatic

ye, indeed, have

only

("JX)

do

not go further, and turn aside from

21. 13] Intrusive

Yahweh
cf.

into idolatry.

and meaningless:

the similar untranslatable

^
;

in 2 Ch. 22, 6 (2 Ki. 8, in

LXX.

The word is not represented 29 rightly }o). remarks that Hnx 11 D is nowhere said Ehrlich, however,
that
"a

and suggests
as Dt.

may be

a mutilated fragment of H3

;>

?,

with

"ilD,

innn]

n, 28. 28, 14. The primary

idea of inn
it

the ideas associated with

reality, emptiness:

is difficult to seize ; but probably were those of formlessness, confusion, un

it

in the

Versions

is

ovSe v,

ILO.TO.IOV,

inane,

vacuum, vanum.
i,

It

mostly represented by KCVOV, thus denotes the formlessness

of the primaeval earth (Gen.

and the earth was formless and

chaos
(Jer. 4, 23:
cf.

empty
Is.

),

and of a land reduced

to a formless

34, n),

in each of these passages being parallel to ina emptiness:

in

Job

26, 7 (inn

?y

J1D1T

nD3) empty space;

it

then comes to

mean

empty, unsubstantial, unreal,

and

is

used of a groundless argument or

1$*!),

consideration

(Is.

29, 21
^1?

\>^

* "iro

of moral unreality, or false

(Is.

hood
1^5

(Is.

59, 4 inn

D^?), of something unsubstantial

40,

tttpro inni
Is.

DDKD, 23 n py inn?
DiTODJ inni nil

p
)

<BDB>);

and so here of idols;

not

cf.

41, 29

their
v
"i^

molten images are wind and

profit
s. v.

hollowness,

44, 9 inn D?3

^D|

with

in the following

clause, exactly as here.

See further Lex.

s

l^yv N? T^tf]
ID^rt l^yii (cf. v.
1 2

Jeremiah

expressions are similar:

2,

tfb

i"inx

n);

16, 19 ^yilD

D3 psi tal

cf.

also Is. 44, 9. 10.

57,

all
i>n;n

of false gods or idols.

IBB>]

22.

Jos. 7, 9

also Jer. 44, 26.

Ez. 36, 23.

96

The First Book of Samuel,

hath willed:
see

Win]
NOTO]
Far be
it

on

II 7, 29.

23. 133N] kcasus pendens:

cf.

Gen. 24, 27.

Is.

b 45, i2 ;

GK.
is

The

inf. after

n?7PI, expressing the act deprecated,

regularly construed
(lit.

with

},
sit

Gen.
:

18,

25.

44,

7.

fA.

26,

u:

not
!

Ad profanum
me
!

but Far be
"

\\.for

so that

see Lex.} from me that I should sin should not sin (lit. awayfrom sinning).
like
;DB>

D?

is

parallel with

M3DO, an(j dependent

2 Ki.

it

upon h
Is.

tfafyn,

Tin]
;

Comp.
20
aittn

20. 13

aian

(but
18.

39,

jwn
is

Jer. 6,

mp.

See above on

6,

But there

no

reason

why

here

we should not punctuate

as Jos. 24, 14.

^1"?.^.?

(Klo. Bu.

Sm. Now.;

GK.
24.

126*).

WV]
the

for

IK"]?,

ty.

34, 10.

See

GK.
il

7500.

^Ijn] hath shewn or exhibited greatness.

25. IBDn] shall be swept 27,
i.

inwardly transitive

or

internal
DP, as
<//.

Hif

(GK.
2. 3.
:

53

d
)

With
(not

126,

away

consumed, EVV.)

cf.

26, 10.

Gen. 19,

15.

Nu.

16, 26.
the Israelite country
:
:

13

14.

The

Philistines in the heart

s

of

Saul

and Jonathan
Saul
10,
13,
i
.

successes against them

concluding

summary of
10, 16
;

s other

wars, and notice of his family (sequel

15).

to 9, i

27^11,
hsB>
P!3B>

p]

rot?

in

accordance with Hebrew idiom can

mean
mos

only a year old (Ex. 12, 5 and often).

And
1

so Lucian

recen

sion of
d>s

LXX

vtos eviavToD
;

SaouA

1
;

Symm.
iT

(with an explanatory ws)

eVtav o-ios

Targ.
are
is

"J^O

13 hiMf P31H
sins,

n^T N3^

"133

as a child
(!).

a year old, in

whom

no

was Saul when he became king

In form, the verse

of the

of the type followed regularly by the compiler

Book

of Kings in stating the age of a king at his accession, and

i

the length of his reign (e.g.

1

Ki. 14, 21. 16,

n.

22, 42, etc.: similarly

Explained by Theodoret (quoted

in

Field

Hexapla, ad

loc.) in the sense

of

Symm. and
;

the Targ.
ovrcus

Iltus

vorjrfov TO, vios iviavrov SaouA. ev

vtos

ainuv

"S,v(iLfj.a\os

tf8auKfV

wv

(al. els) (vtavctos tv

rw 0a(n\evftv TU @aoi\tvtiv avruv.

T^V

Arj\oi 5f rovro TJJV

dnAoT^ra

rfjs if/v^f);

fy ti\ev

2aov\

fjviKa rrjs )3aCTiAeias

On the version Tavrr] 6J oii/c iwl itXtiarov exprjaaro, KT\. \fipoToviav totfaro. of Symmachus, as exhibiting the influence of current Jewish exegesis, see e pecially Geiger s essay on this translator in the Jiidische Zeitschrift, i. (Breslau, 1862),
p.

49

ff.

and

cf.

HEXAPLA

in the Diet,

of Christian Biography,

iii.

20.

XII. 22
II 2, io.
5, 4)
:

XIII. 2

97

was
for

originally intended to

no doubt therefore the number denoting Saul s age have a place between p and 7\yy, although,
it

some
ij-|B>

reason, the text as

stands
:

is

deficient

l
.

In clause

b, also,

to say nothing of the fact that the can hardly be correct QIJ^ seems to require a longer period, D^t? Tit? (in spite of D KO Tit?) history two years we have indeed D^S? &$& II 2, io. is not said in Heb. for
:

2 Ki. 21,

19

(=

Ch. 33, 2i)t; but the regular expression

i

is

DW^?
we

(Gen.

n,
}

io. II 14, 28.

Ki. 15, 25.

16, 8

al.).

If

with
TI5?

Keil

suppose

D HK y to have
to

fallen out, the

form of D^t?

must be

supposed

with usage,
in

i"Ut?

have been altered, and we must restore, in accordance DTjB l D nB V. The entire verse is not represented
it is

LXX, and
text,

quite possible that

it

is

only a late insertion in the

Hebrew

originally perhaps a marginal note

due to one who

desiderated in the case of Saul a record similar to that found in

the case of subsequent kings.
2.

btO^O

D^N

nvhw]

LXX,

Syr.

express men

after

3000.

Three or four MSS. of

LXX

which Jonathan, almost immediately figure seems to be required.

at
.

read vios TpidKovra Iruv but in view of the age after Saul s accession, appears, a higher
:

2 There is no ground for supposing (as is sometimes Not, as Keil writes, 3 done) that in ancient times numerals were represented in Hebrew MSS. by the If the numerals were not written in full, but expressed by letters of the alphabet. symbols, the ancient Hebrews, it is reasonable to suppose, would have adopted

a system similar to that in use amongst their neighbours, found equally in Phoenician, Palmyrene, Nabataean, and Old Aramaic inscriptions, and used also
in Syriac. This system may be seen exemplified in detail in Euting s Nabatdische Inschriften aus Arabien (1885), p. 96 f., in the Table attached to Plate LXXIV of the Facsimiles of Manuscripts and Inscriptions {Oriental Series], published by

the Palaeographical Society under the editorship of Professor W. Wright (London, 1875-83), or in Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigraphik (1898), p. 198 ff., and the

Table

at the

end of his Atlas of Plates.

first

These Tables shew

in

what manner

symbols which at

sight appear distinct, are in reality connected with one

another by intermediate links.

The
111^

first

ten numerals in Phoenician are

->l

|,

||,

|||

Mil, Hill. IHMI, Mil

I

III,

II

III

III III III,

~>

20
,
-

is

=;

or

#;

21

is

1=5

or

9 is H etc Tne notation by means of found on Phoenician coins (but not the earliest), on the coins of Simon Maccabaeus, and since mediaeval times has been in general, though
A/; 3
is

-5 //; 40

is

HH

HHH

letters of the

alphabet

is

not universal, use (not, for example, in the Epigraph of the St. Petersburg A.D. 916, or in the Epigraphs of many other MSS.).
1365

MS.

of

98
Perhaps
B"X

The First Book of Samuel,

has dropped out after
(Dr. Weir).
ft.),
it

D^N

on account of

its

resem

blance to {TO in ^JOB*D

troaon] Michmas (Is. 10, 28), now Muhmds (1980 NE. of Geba (see the next note but one), from which

was

2 miles

was separated

by the upper part of the valley, which a little lower down begins to have steep rocky sides, called now the Wddy es-Suwenit (see p. 106).

iwrvi in]
of Michmas.

the hill-country of Bethel,

now

Beitin,

4^ miles

NW.
ft.

The

road from
ft.)

Muhmas makes an
(2890
ft.).

ascent of 900

through Der Diwan (2370

to Beitin

was
Is.

po^n njOJ3] Read po ja the modern Tell el-Fill,

10, 29

jnaa, as v. 16.

Gibeah (see on
:

9,

i)

3 miles N. of Jerusalem

shews was

distinct)

Geba (which was the modern Jeba (2220 ft.), on

(13,
1 6.

the south side of the Pass of

Michmas

14, 5), 3 miles

NE.

of Gibeah

and the two places, owing

to the similarity of their

i

names,

are several times confused in

3.

MT.

po on yia recurs
see 10, 10
viz.

Ki. 15, 22.

3 XJ] See on

10, 5.

iQJ2l]

Read with LXX,

Let
the

Targ., njn32

(cf. 6).

D nayn lyOBN]
of course must

Hebrews hear!

the news,

and the

order,

implied in the proclamation, to

come and

join Saul in the war, which

now

follow.

V. 4 then describes

how

the report spread

among
D nnyn

the people,
is

and induced them

to respond to Saul s invitation.

:

But D nnyn

strange in Saul s

mouth

and

LXX

express
i,

W^S nb&6
This,
if

saying,

The Hebrews
be
in
its

have revolted
proper
will

(2 Ki.

i).

correct, will of course

place after

D^^vS lyDB^

in a,

and
v.

psn

^32 IDIEO ypn

i>1NBM

connect, and connect well, with

b So substantially We., who, however, instead 4 (see Jud. 6, 34 ). of assuming a transposition of the words from clause a, regards their

incorrect position as indicating that originally they were a marginal

gloss.
4.

This conclusion, however, is not necessary (Sm. Bu. Now.). lit. made l itself malodorous against (= was in bad odour
K>N33]

with): so II 10, 6; sq. rtN (with,

5. D^BW] The number doubt D^K* is an error for
jn

i.e.

towards) II 16, 21.

is

of chariots

disproportionately large

no

n^f

(so

LXX

(Luc.) and

Pesh.).

hro]
in

Jos. ii, 4. Jud. 7, 12.

2~b~\

regard

to

muchness:
cf.

7,

as often, introducing the terhum

19.

comparationis (Lex. 5140, b}\

Gen. 41,

Ex. 24, 10.

XIII. 2-7
from the low-lying
Philistine plain
;

99
presumably up the Vale 1 8), and across the

(py)
cf.

of Aijalon, past the two Beth-horons (on v.

elevated plateau

on which Bethel stands (G. A. Smith, H. G. 250;

251, 2iof., 291).

:

fINTPl ncnp] Beth-aven was W. (NW. see the Map) of Michmas, near Ai, E. (SE.) of Bethel (Jos. 7,2), and the N. border of Judah ran

up from
6.

it

to Bethel (Jos. 18, 12 f.); but its exact site

is

not known.

IfcO]

the plur. after the collective C^N

.

is

in itself unexceptionable
:

20 b (Jud. 9, 55. 15, 10. 20, 17.

have the sing, in
presupposes
rrtO,
9, 55.

b 33. 36^. 48. 2 S. 20, 2 b b 2 S. 20, 2 ) ; but 20, 33. 36

.

but

LXX
eTSev

LXX
~iv.

and

this is

supported by the following

"6

The

is also very common: Jud. 7, 23. 24^. 12, i. sing, after the collective 20 a. 41 (ter). 21, i. i S. 14, 24. 17, 25 al. (but have the plur. 20,

LXX

in Jud. 7, 23.

a 20, 20

41, second and third times).

QTTirai]
(Hist.
iii.

Thistles (2 Ki. 14, 9)

are unsuitable:

read with Ewald

44

abound

in

T. 31]), Th. We. etc. D^ra*, as 14, n. Caves the rocky sides of the lower part of Wady es-Suwenit.
["E-

DW\]
of

Only besides in Jud. 9, 46. 49, of some part of the temple TVO i?X, in which the Shechemites took refuge, and which was

burnt upon them, though what part precisely is not clear. In Arabic means a tower or lofty building (Qor. 40, 38), 1^2 (with
Ll^>

^>)

a narrow excavation for the body at the bottom ofa grave (Moore, Judges, the former suggests an idea which is here not probable; p. 266)
:

but

if

rvnx had
cavity,
it

some
would
s

less special sense

than

-i^, such as under

ground
a
7
.

suit at least this passage.

onnyi] We.

objections to

Dnny

are well-founded.
;

The word
on the

does not express

thought of
,

some of the Hebrews

there
is

and as

v. 7 carries

v. 6,
its

no ground

for the repetition of the subject

and

emphatic position before the verb: a verb coordinate

Also used similarly

in the

Nabataean Inscriptions (Earth, AJSL. July, 97,

273) found at Madain-Salih by Mr. Doughty (No. 8, lines 4, 5), and (re-)edited by Euting, Nabataische Inschriften (1885), of a sepulchral chamber: see No. 15

(= Cooke, NSI. No. 91), line 4 npSni KITnyi KIM p pin JT^n nD3D1&6l and to Arisoxe belong two-thirds of the tomb, and the NTTDrt NrUlO NTH: p
sepulchral chamber ; and her share in the niches is the east side, with the niches See also Cooke, No. 94, i (from Petra). there, etc. ; with Noldeke s note, p. 55.

TOO
with
iNnnJVl
v.

The First Book of Samuel,

6
is

what would be expected.

For

my
1"Qjn

nK he
ni~!3yp

conjectures accordingly, with but slight changes,

This is fords of Jordan. a decided improvement, except that nnyi should be TOST). This, lessens the similarity to B nsyi hence Klo. s clever suggestion however,
they passed over the
:

and

^1

BJfl

for

Dnnyi

is

probably best

and much

people passed over

For the frequent confusion of 2 and o in old Jordan Heb. MSS., see Introd., 5. 2.
(so Bu. Sm.).
7
7

-i5 a

First rejection of Saul at Gilgal (comp. 10,

8.

8).

W>JQ]

See 10,

pregnantly (cf. DJOp^ Tin 16, 4, ^K n Gen. 42, 28)= followed him trembling. We. conjectured plausibly VnnKD, which is also expressed by Luc. (diro OTTICT^CV avrov) trembled from after him

innx

mn]

forsook him trembling

pointing out that
8.

so
is

Now. Dh.

Bu., however,
.

prefers

MT.,

V"inXO

^m]
is

The

Kt.

is

b tautologous with 8 bnfa (Ntf.} as Gen. 8, 12 (not the Pfel ^rni,

which
II
1 8,

confined to poetry).

The Qr6

is

?ni s l

(ffif.),

as 10, 8;

14.
1K>S]

^NintJ>

^}oaa^?

is

good Aramaic, but ^NIO^ n^K

of Samuel.

is

not

good Hebrew,
"iy^

in the sense

verb has dropped out.

:

or ny? (see II 20, 5) is suggested by Ges. (Lg. p. 851) and Keil Tin (Gen. 21, 2) or "O? (ib. 22, 2 b ), the latter of which might easily but the word is fall out after expressed by LXX, Targ.
1E>K ,
:

which might drop out most

readily

is

Bb>

(see Ex.

9,

5) before i?N1CP

Comp. Ew. 292^ note. (so 5 MSS.); so also Dr. Weir. The Hif. of pa is always causative, except here, Ex. pQ l]
Job 38,
Cf. 28,

5,

12.

24.

Probably Qal should be read each time,

beside,

i.e.

here psjl.

Ivyo] from

from with:
.

so 2 Ki. 25, 5 with the

same

verb.

a ^footnote; Lex. 759 n. ^3] recitativum : see on

Nif.

2, 16.
is

PB3]

from pf3, which does not occur, but

:

assumed
(Nif.

to

be

a parallel form of J*9

GK.

67.

But probably fbj

but

from the

ordinary form, pS) should be read.

B>EOD]

Notice the emph. nnsi.

to

not at

Michmas (on

i, 24),

Michmas, D^DDXJ im

plying motion.

XIII.
12.

ITv] Gilgal (10, 8) being in the Jordan-valley, some 2600 below Michmas (vv. 5. n).
pasnNl]
13.

ft.

GK.
:

5 4 k.
"O

nny ^J nny

as a rule introduces the apodosis after *6 (e.g.

22, 29 Tenses, 144), nny having the force of in that case: and N7 (so II 18, 12; hence Hitzig, We. Bu. etc. would point here
nyDE>

Nu.

19, 7) for

nyDE? N7.

This

is

preferable,

though not perhaps necessary;

being
is

for

nny might presumably

expressed.
Cf.

refer to a condition implied, without

actually

Ex.

9,

15

where, though the context

differently worded, nny equally refers to a condition which must be inferred from v. 1 4 For in that case (viz. if such had not been
:

my

purpose),

should have put forth

my
:

hand, and smitten thee

and thy people,

?tf] 6, 15-

= by,
M, 34

etc.; and Job 3, 13. which would be more usual

comp.

2,

34. 3, 12. 5, 4. 6.

(contrast 33). 16, 13 (contrast 10, 6). 23 (i6?y).

20, 25 (by the side of by).
2,

18, 10.

19, 9. 16.

22, 13 (8 by).

17,3.51. 27, 10

(?N after by twice). II

sentence), 6,
3.

9 (thrice 7N followed by thrice by in the b and 8, 7 etc.: 20, 23* (23 8, 16 by)- 24, 4.
Cf.

same So
10

sometimes

in other books, esp. in Jeremiah.

is less

Lex. 41*.
:

by where 7N would be more usual

common

but see on

i,

and add II

14, r.

17,

n.
Jer. 3, i5t, of the ideal rulers of the future:

14. 121173 B*N]

So

Q73 ttjn D37 virm

After 7J73n } something 15. 7yi] See on v. 12 ; and cf. Jud. 2, i. appears to have dropped out of the narrative. In v. 4 Saul is at
Gilgal,

and remains there during the scene 9-14;

at Gibeah.
at

in v. 16

he appears

suddenly abiding (a^V) from Gilgal and arrival

A
is

clause describing his departure

Gibeah

thus desiderated.

LXX
*,

has such

a clause, continuing, viz. after 737jn

TOT)

ets

68ov O.VTOV

nal TO Kara.-

Aao9 dve/3^ oVtVa) 2aoiA

cis aTravr^criv OTriVco

TO

Xaou TOU

/crX

avrwv Trapayevo/Aevwr e/c raAyaAwv] eis FaySota Bevtttjaeiv, This may be accepted in substance, though not quite in the
in

form

which

it

here appears,

(i) 13117 following, as

text,

it

would do ?yi,

1 These words do not stand in Tisch. s and are printed in Dr. Swete s edition.

but they form part of the text of B,

s

We.

conjecture, therefore
is

(made

in

1871), that

eis

6Sov avrov has probably fallen out,

entirely confirmed.

io2
would give
(2)

The First Book of Samuel,

rise to

is a7rdvTr]a-tv OTTIO-CJ

a phrase not in use (I3~n Tl is always said). represents a non-Hebraic combination (though
(3) aurwv -rrapay.,
if it

adopted, without misgiving, by Th.).

sents, as
it

repre

seems to do, D
71N{?
satisfy
1

KSl

On must be followed by TpQ 71X81, not

:

as

MT.

by

HpS

11

(so always

see Tenses,

169).
style:

The
7yi
s

following

text
[

will

the conditions of
?WB>

Hebrew

7N1EK>

DpT

BfoK

or] Dy

null?!)
rjjfjan

nrjK r^y Dyn

TTi.ii

:i2nii>

*jb .V|

btanrp

3i

pcya nyaa

jo 1x3*1

nDnbsn.

The

omission in

MT.
5

is

evidently due to the recurrence of ba^jrrfD. 1 6. The Philistines had expelled Saul from Michmas
v. 2),

b
;

(v.

cf.

and he had

retired to

Geba where Jonathan

,

already was

(v. 2).

17. nTlETOn]

(ZAW.
Ez.
9,

Probably a technical expression, denoting 1907, 59) the part of an army employed in ravaging and
14, 15.
cf.

So

destruction:

esp. Jer. 22,

(cutting

down

trees);
I

also
,

46, 22.

iK

21, 36.

Ew.

(JERst.ioi.

33.) compared^j^J

of a body of

raiders (Lane, 2307).

D^NT
which
DH1T3

TIB6&?]

as three columns, an accus. defining the

:

manner

in

JVnK>on

issued forth

Ew.

279; GK.
art.,

n8.

Cf. 2 Ki. 5, 2

INi"

D1N1 came out GJ marauding bands.

being definite in
itself:

ins]
126",

the numeral without the

see

GK.

I34

1
;

and

cf.

on

i, 2.

Notice the frequentative TUB\

may] According to Jerome, Ophra was 5 miles E. of Bethel, whence it has been generally identified with et-Taiyibeh (2850 ft.), 4 miles NE. of Bethel (2890 ft.), and 5 miles to the N. of Michmas
(1980
18.
ft.).

Cf. Jos.

1 8,

23

and on

II 13, 23.

hw>

px] LXX

SwyaX.

Unknown.

as the

Upper Beth-boron, now Bet-tir el-foka (2020 ft.), was 10 miles, crow flies, W. of Michmas. Lower Beth-horon, now Bet-ur
to

et-tahta

way DSr Diwan (2370 ft.), Michmas), and then on

(1310 ft.), was if miles WNW. of Upper Beth-horon. The Beth-horon from Michmas would be to the NW., past

up

to

Bethel

(2890

ft.,

900

ft.

above

to the west.

The

north border of Benjamin ran up from Jericho to

n
I-II Sam.

{MS

or)

Dy

is

This, however,

is

a phrase that occurs in Joshua, but not elsewhere in not decisive against its originality here.

XIII. i6-2o
near

103

Ramah
"pi

(on 10, 2); so

it

would

pass, presumably, near

Michmas
;

1
.

But

the

way

to,

suggests a particular place, not a line

:

and

fjpSWn (that leans out over

see

Nu.

21, 20.

23, 28)

would be more
Ta/?ee points to
this

naturally said of a height than of a border.

LXX
;

njnan

the

hill

(not the place of that

name)

and

ought pro

bably to
will

be read, with nap^an for P,ptwn.

hills

The
cf.

wilderness

meant

be that consisting of the

and wadys sloping down eastwards

Jud. 20, 47
into the

into the Jordan-valley (see the next note):

wilderness, to the crag of

Rimmon

(3^ miles N. of Michmas).

D^JDXn

j]

the Ravine of the Hyaenas.

The Wady es-Suwenlt

about 5 miles below Michmas, on the SE., runs into (see W. Farah, and 2 or 3 miles below the point of juncture, there is a

on

v. 2), at

valley called

Wady Abu-Daba\ running from

:

the

SW.

into

W.

Farah.

This, however, seems an insignificant valley perhaps (Buhl, Geogr. 98) D^JDS M was the ancient name of W. Farah itself (which to the east
of this point
2 miles
is

north of

now known as W. Kelt). There is a road, about W. Farah (see the large PEF. Map), leading straight
the Jordan-valley, which

here meant.

down from Michmas into The JHJ (or

19.
,
, ,

may be
hill

the road

rather njnj)

may

have been a

near this

road, overlooking

W. Farah
the

or

W.

Kelt.

Cf.

H. G.
31, 39.

p.

291

n.

KVO
fa

11

frequentative, just as (e.g.)

"O]

Gen.

"U2K

same idiom, implying always

is

that

steps are
31, 31

taken to prevent what

feared from taking place, 27,

13, 17.
i/r.

n. Gen.

(comp. 26,

7).

42, 4.

Ex.

38, 17

al.

1DN] Qr

TIEN.

See Ochlah we-Ochlah, No.

1

H9 2

where eighteen

cases of an omitted
(e.g.

at the

end of a word are enumerated, several

this.

Jud. 21, 20.

Ixii

i
f.

Ki. 12, 7) similar to

See further in the

Introduction, p.
20. ^n*.V]
i,

Point rather, with Klo.,

1

^n,V!>

with a freq. force (on

v. 21.

3), in

agreement with NVD*

v. 19,

and nrvni

LXX
1

eis

yrjv

aXXo(f)v\wv.

Ought we not
?

to read

i>N

(from 5totl) or possibly [so Bu. Sm,] .niriK

2

(Dr. Weir.)

Ki. 23, 8

from Geba to Beer-sheba implies that Geba was on the N. border

of the Southern
1

Kingdom
No.

cf.

Zech. 14, 10.

Or, in the Rabbinical Bibles, the Mass,

letter 1,

magna on

Ki.

I, i,

or the Final

Massorah,

18.

104

The First Book of Samuel,

LXX
fore,
132")*!

both words being used

render this by opeVavov, Pesh. by in v. 21 to represent pTin.

^^^ (ox-goad),
Probably, there
verses will then

should be read here for iriKnnc.

The two

agree in the
the

implements enumerated
iPiE

and the

repetition of almost
will

same word (inannp,

inp )

in

one and the same verse

be

avoided.
21. D^D

Symm.

Si /ceAAa,

HT SSn]

mattock (so EVV.). These words are hopelessly

corrupt.

They

are

rendered conventionally bluntness of edges: but (i) the plur. of ns is elsewhere flVS; (2) the meaning bluntness, viewed in the light of
the sense which the root
ful
1
;
"1VD

elsewhere expresses,

is

extremely doubt

(3) the construction

is

grammatically inexplicable

DTi D). D^n "i^Dn (inf. Hi/, with the force of a noun Ew. 156), suggested by Keil, would lessen the grammatical anomaly,
but does not really remove the
difficulty

(m^sn for rather T SSn,

LXX

6 Tpv-yrjTos for

iTWQn presupposes almost

TJV

which the words present. the same word

but their rendering of the clause KCU

supplies
is

6 rpvyijTos erot/xos TOV

no

basis for a satisfactory restoration of the text.

AV.

file

derived immediately from the Jewish commentators, Rashi, and

:

David Kimchi
of Targ. Pesh.

its

ultimate source

is

merely the conjectural rendering

(N^aiB>).

occurs in the Targ. of Qoh. pu6p B^B^l] Another crux. ii (= Heb. but possibly it may be only borrowed 12, from the present passage: it is not cited as occurring elsewhere
\*tth\>

rri"lD>p)

in

Aramaic, or post-Bibl. Hebrew.

Still

the root (see Levy) has in

Aramaic the sense of being charger B^p N*l^n of thin

that JlB^p
j1B>i>p

thin (hence

Nu.

7,

13 Ps.-Jon. a silver

plate), so there remains the possibility

may
will

have been in use to denote a fine

point.

In that case

vhw
in

be a sort of compound
is

= tridens.
of suspicion

But such a com

;

pound
v. 20.

Hebrew
saw

by no means

free

and we expect
that are

naturally to find a reference to the

same implements

named

LXX

in the

words the high price which the

with

Philistines

The combination

of

"1VD

^ai

to cleave,

hence as applied to a sword,

to

i.e. blunted sword (Schultens, Opp. Mm., p. 168), hack, .Ui.9 L_fl-^JL is altogether questionable, the interchange of consonants being against rule ("1B

a hacked

should correspond to an Arabic Joj, not JLs; see the

list

of examples in Tenses,

Appendix,

178).

XIII. 20

XIV. 4
:

105
ra Se
o-Keur)

exacted for sharpening the tools of the Hebrews

in v. 20) fy rpets crucAoi ets TOV 686vra,
i.e.

(= DTIK
This

JE ?

Eyi^? HBOE S.

reading

will

of course presuppose that the corrupt words D^D JTV XBn

:

expressed originally the idea of sharpening

to

And sharpening used be obtained for the mattocks and for the coulters at three shekels
etc.

tooth,

But DTIX and nissnno are not constructed with teeth

and
:

the price stated appears to be incredibly high.

:

}rnn (Bomberg, Ginsb. Kit.)] The ^ is peculiar but in spite of the

;

?:rnn (Baer, with Qimhi, p. 99).

following

2 (not

3), dor-,

not da-re

is

intended:
Jfii?

GK.

On

the form,

GK.

85^; Stade,
;

52*; and

comp.

22. rvni]

qorbhan Ez. 40, 43 (Baer, Gi. Kit.) H^K Est. 8, 6 (st. c.). would be expected (cf. on i, 12); and perhaps rvni is
""iTI

an error

for

it,

due to the preceding nnvn.

is cstr.

nDr6]
23.
(v.

the form

The

garrison of the Philistines

Probably fc^DD should follow so LXX. moved from Michmas itself

;

16) to the

Pass of Michmas/
pass
14, 5).

i.e.

to the point

on

the north edge of

W.

es-Suwenit, where the

across (not down) the

Wady began

(see the

Map; and

cf.

on

2O] LXX luTrdcrracrts, attempting, no doubt, to render etymologically.

However, woo-rao-is was used by Sophocles
(Hatch, Essays
14,
i.

in the sense of Ive8pa

in Biblical Greek, 1889, p. 88).

4.

6n
6, 2
4>

DVH vm] See on i, i.e. on; off "OJJ]

opposite
2 Ki. 4,
side).

see

the note
17,
;

on

v.

this

side-across

(or this

Tpn this recurs

;

20

25

23, 17

Zech.

2,

26; 20, 19 Dan. 8, i6f

:

LXX;
cf.
n^>n

Jud.

Gen.

65; 37, igt; ^?n Ez. 36, 35t.

<jj)l

All are akin to the

common
i,

Arabic

who, which (Lex. 229^: Wright, Arab. Gramm.

347

Compar. Gramm., p. 117). Everywhere else, however, the noun to which T^H is attached has the art. hence (Bu.) we ought perhaps to
:

read either t^n I2j?nip

2.

( c f. v. 4),

or

&? inpn najo

so 9, 27.

across this

/aw.

a^V] was
It is

abiding,

at the time.
(lit.

Notice the ptcp.

nvpa]
1

at the outskirts

extremity] of:

Nu. n,

i.

20,

al.

a pity that the obscure archaism

in the uttermost part

of

has been retained in

RV.
;

njnan]
4.

Read

jn: the

see 13, 16
is

and

cf.

14, 5.
2, 7),

nvayon]

form

absolute (Jos.

not (Sm.) construct.

io6
J1

The First Book of Samuel,

"Dyne]
"Oy

= side,

as v. 40.

Ex. 32, 15 DifQy OB D

lit.

their

two

sides.

f!9,

as constantly, in defining position,

off,

in our idiom,
, .

from a

different

point of view,

on

(Lex. 578

b
).

nTO

HTD the

repetition has the effect of placing the two identical words in contrast

with each other

there:
II 2,

So

often, as 17, 3;

hence they acquire the sense inn 11 23, 26 HTD

off here
.

off

HTD inn 1XD.

13; Nu. 22, 24 ruo T(y\ HTI9 T13. 32, 19 *; and similarly (in n SO (Ez. 40, 10 Ezek. only) n SD and in analogous expressions al.) hie ., Render, then, on the side, off here (e.g. flT . . JIT ille).
. , , ;

on

the side, off there

5.

on the one

side

on

the other side.

LXX

686s can only be a corruption of oSous

/cat

second version

6SoiJs TreVpas e* TOUTOV)

;

in v. 4 the (cf. hence the Gk. text here

must have sustained a double corruption

first,

oSovs

must have been

changed (by accident or design) into 6Sos, and then the genders must have been altered designedly to agree with it. With \&, cf. the Fr. den/,
of a pointed rock, or mountain top (as in
opposite to

Les Dents du Midi/

Montreux).
Michmas,
ff.

On
161

the Pass of
xxviii.

see especially

Dalman

s articles,

ZDPV.

xxvii. (1904),

(with several corrections of the first), containing minute descriptions of the position of Jeba and Michmas, of the Pass, and other subordinate a In these articles Dalman places routes, between them, and of Wady es-Suwenit
ff.,

161

Bozez and Seneh at

d,

on the Map, where the sides of the

Wady
down

steep, but are not yet as precipitous as they

become

further

begin to be the valley.

Now, however (Palcistina-Jahrbuch, 1911, p. 12), he places Bozez more than a mile further down the Wady, at el-Hosn et-tahtdni (see the Map, Plate V at the
end of

ZDPV.
;

xxviii),

i.

e.

the

Lower

fortress,

a block of hermits

caves with

end of a gully running into the Wady on the peak Kurnet Challet el-Hayy, on the opposite side of the Wady, supposing the Philistine post to have been at el-Merjameh, nearly a mile SE. of el-Miktara. At the mouth of W. Rahab seemingly close by

windows in the cliffs, the N. and Seneh at

at the

NW.

el-H6sn et-tahtani
iii.

there is (Rawnsley, PEFQS. 1879, 122 = PEF. Memoirs, 142) a tooth of rock that, like a tower on a bracket, hangs in mid air at the and Conder (PEFQS. 1881, 253; cf. T. W. 255 f.) angle of the rock cliff;

supposes Jonathan to have climbed up the rocks near here. Dalman with Rawnsley in making him climb up a gully a little further to the

now

agrees

S., viz.

W.
:

Abu Ja d(= Rawnsley s Sh ab

but
d, c

el-Huti,

i.e.

She

b el-Huti:

ZDPV.

xxviii. 167)

would seem
sites.

to suit the terms of 13, 23. 14, 5 better than either of these

suggested
1

See further the Addenda.

s

Comp.

the writer

Deuteronomy,
(

p. xliii note.
),

Properly es-Suwenit

of the

little

acacias

but pronounced

now (Dalm. ZDPV.

see ibid* 161
ff.

xxviii. 162, cf. 174) es-Sw$nt{.

For a

fuller description of the

Wady,

THE PASS

OF

MICHMA

a, b.
c, d.

Bozez and Seneh, according to Robinson.

Boze/-

and Seneh, according to Dalman

places

in

1904.

(Dalman now

them a mile
:

further

down Wady
p. 106.)
>

es-Suwenit, to the SE.

see above,

Si

8>

&

^resent

route

between Jeba and

Michmas
e,
f.

for passengers with animals.

f,

e.

Shorter route for foot-passengers.

Wady
r.

Steep descent into Wady el-Medineh (the of the City, i.e. leading to Jerusalem).

Ras el-Wady

Head

of the

Wady

es-

Suwenit).

the end of

(Reproduced, by permission, from Plate VI, at Z MG. xxvii, with slight corrections

made

in

accordance with

ZDMG.

xxviii.

161

ff.

revision.)

^//l^
English

/IHv?^

Miles

iMAS

to Beitfn

XIV. 4-9
was fixed firmly, or was a pillar
b superfluous (contrast clause );-and
anticipation of flSSD.
it

I0 7
(2, 8).
is

But the word seems

probably only a corrupt

?1D] in front of

on the same
18, 19 in

side with: Jos. 8,

i.e.

33

in

front of the

two mountains; Ex.

See

front of God,

representing

Him.

A. Wright, in the Journal of Philology, xiii. 117-120. 6 resumes v. i, after the intervening parenthetical particulars.
ntJ>y

W.

nj?jr]

is

used here absolutely, in the

full

and pregnant sense

JVB>yi

which

Jer. 14, 7

and act, sometimes has, esp. in poetry: i Ki. 8, 32 lyo^ njpj?, ^. 22 32 rtBty 37, 5 al. (Lex. 794* 4). Jud. 2,7, which has been compared, is quite different ntJ y there has an ^3. object, referring back to nifT
it
1DK>
,

1EJ>K,

nB>JJB

"llvyE)]

Not
no

as

ivy

9,

but in the sense of constraint,

difficulty :

There

is

difficulty to

Yahweh,

in regard to saving (either) with

many
(cited
7.

or with few.

Cf. for the thought 2

Ch. 14,

10.

Mace.

3,

18

by Th.).
*p nt33]

The

reflexive

*j^,

as elsewhere (e.g. Dt.

i, 7.

40), with

verbs of motion.

difficulty in

MT.

arises
"]i>

however from the use of

HDJ

for in II 2, 21

force of incline,
fc

^y jtaoP ^y IS which here seems not to be

i>3

1W
i

nm

it

preserves

its

usual

suitable.

LXX
(i.e.

express

nol *]xb -WK

cf.
PIJ33

nvy do

all

unto which thine heart

Ki.

mind)

inclineih:
"P273]

with
20, 5

& Jud.
lan^a
jiou, i.e.

9, 3.
11

n,

9.

Cf.

i/r.

"1^

jn

But here

also a phrase,

which in

this

connexion

is

more idiomatic, is suggested by LXX I8ov t yw //.era o-ou,

"^Hp

ws T KapSia
8.

CTOU

KapSia

^npS

(so

Ew. Th. We. Bu.

more
over.

etc.).

Dnay ijmK mn] Notice

the idiom, use of the ptcp.,

delicate
similar

and expressive than the Engl.

we

will pass

Comp.

sentences in Jud. 6, 37 (also followed by DN); Gen. 24, 13 and 43

(followed by PITH).
9.

11D&0 ro DN]
II 15, 26.

The

na, pointing onwards,

is

idiomatic

see Gen.

31, 8.

DOT and IDy

are synonyms, as Jos. 10, 13

DIM

ioy

nn^i tHotpn (cf. 1 2^ trii).

Wnnn]

idiomatically

= in

our place, where

we are :
16 Tn
a.

as Jos. 6, 5

rrnnn -ryn noin nbaai

will fall in its place;

z

Jud. 7,21 vnnn t^x

3,

and they stood each

tremble where

his place ;
Is. 25,

Hab.
Cf.

I stand ;

10.

Lex. io65 b 2

io8
10. 11.

The First Book of Samuel,

DJDJ] will have given them
51
:

20, 22; II 5, 24. Behold Hebrews coming out, etc. a term of contempt (cf. Judith 14, 12 Vulg.) (see Kitt.) the mice was proposed by Hitzig (Gesch. Isr., p. 135), and is favoured by Bu.

nnny

run]

but

it is

not probable.
SJflsn, as
(cf.

12.

msion] Read
1

elsewhere in chs. 13-14

LXX
see

Meo-o-a</>.

13. I^S

LXX
")]

USM
s

Jud. 20, 42).

II
i,

Against

this,

We.
fell

nniDd]

intensive, as 17, 51.

9.

The

Philistines

down,

smitten by Jonathan

sword;

and

his

armour-bearer, as he went
ptcp. represents vividly the

along, despatched them after him.

The

armour-bearer
14.
y\

s activity

on

the occasion.

^roa]
10
l
.

as

it

IDS

as

Is. 5,

If

were within half a furrow, (of) an acre of field. the text be correct, we must imagine the narrator

to be thinking of a

IDS field, of a size such as the expression he says, then, that in a space equal to about half the distance across it, the twenty men were slain, IDS defines in
would suggest
:
rntJ>

rw

effect the length

with

it

hence construed in apposition the principle explained in Tenses, 192 cf. HDN D^T^y !]DD (on
of the n3J?p
}

and

is

a
if

veil,

twenty cubits

).

Nevertheless the
I|

MT.
2
.

excites

suspicion,
3

only by the combination of 3 and 1 in sn33

TOV TreoYou
1 s

LXX

has ev
if

/2oXio-i

= mi?n

Ti

tWQ.

However,

the

words

The area which a of oxen could plough in (presumably) a Which elsewhere occurs only in the expression nJt?N"Q3 (five
"!Di?

day.
times),

and

in

rpnrQ3
rule,

once

(Is. 1,26), in parallelism with

is

nj{J>N"Q3.

|D3 occurs (including

10, 27) three times (the third passage

3in

"ODD3

Lev. 26, 37).

As an
ii8"~

ordinary
).
:

such combinations are avoided in classical

Hebrew (GK.
\p.

Even

/y3

as

upon occurs only

in the latest

Hebrew,
18

119, 14

a different sense, as a strengthened 3, must be corrupt) 63, 7f.

;

Is. 59,

(first

time

Ch. 32, 19 and in the second occurrence

2

Tisch. s text adds

teal

tv irfTpo@u\ois.

But on

this

We.

acute note, written in

with MT., he wrote: The 1871, deserves to be transcribed. Comparing first letter of MT. 3 is not expressed in LXX, the following five agree, but are combined to form one word (D^nS) at the end of the verse agrees also in
:

LXX

LXX

It
i

remains to

refer, if possible,

to a

common

source.

When

IDJf n3V and xal tv irerpo/3oAoty oi tv the six letters on the one side and the six

words on the other are compared, and when further the meanings of the two principal words in the Greek are taken into account, it is natural to suppose
tv TTfTpo06\ots

(= ybp OSK Job

41, 20) to be a gloss explanatory of

KOX^^IV

pebbles (i Mace. 10, 73), which appear here

strangely as a weapon.

We.

XIV.
contain

io-i6

109

some

notice of the weapons used, they are certainly out of

v. 14,

place at the end of

to explain, in view of 13, 22,

and (We.) will be a gloss on v. 13, intended what weapons the armour-bearer could
also, pebbles, at

have had

under the circumstances,

any
the

rate,

do not
(cf.

appear likely to
fy.

have been employed.

On

itJJJD,

furrow

129, 3), at the end of which the

ZDPV.
gloss.

1905, p. 27

ff.

ploughman Dalm. regards rcw 1E

in Palestine
:

turns, see

Dalman,

as

an explanatory

UJLl

still

means a furrow
(p.

the average length of

one seems to be

31) 20-30 yds., so that half a furrow would be

10-15 yds.
15.
all
y\

n:nD2]

in the
i.e.

camp, and (so

LXX) on

the

field,

and among
posted in

the people/

in the

the fields around, and

(13, 23)
Jl

camp (13, 17), among among the people generally even

:

the

men

the garrison

and the ravaging band (13, 17) trembled as well. b i44 ] became a trembling of God/ Tim] and it [GK.
a general panic.

i.e.

the

affair resulted in

DTvX TWin

denotes a terror without

adequate apparent cause, and therefore attributed to the direct in fluence of God. Comp. the later Greek use of TTOVLKOV (from Ilav
see Liddell

and
;

Scott,

s.

v.).

Cf. 1 1, 7

mrr 1MB, Gen.

for

35, 5

tw6n nnn
uncertain

also 2 Ki. 7, 6
T31
is is

Ez. 38, 21

LXX (nw^aji

31H

nn !). Whether
is
:

hyperbolical, or denotes an actual earthquake,

the

word regularly used to express the latter from rnnn the dagesh is abnormal (GK.
:

idea,

956).

16.

hNB9

E^avn]

GK.

i29

Saul

watchmen, or

scouts,

would

follow

what was taking place on the other side of the njQ32] Read y??,3: see 13, 16, and cf. 14, 2. 5.
D^JT,
"j^l

valley.

JttM

penn rum] cfrm

is

untranslateable.

AV. and
to

they
(so

went on beating down

Targ.)
in
:

connects the word with E?n

hammer

but besides the word being unsuitable, and one never used
is

abs.

such a connexion, the construction would be required D ?m ipn

:

an impossible one (the

has KOL iBov
31D3
is
rj

inf.

"jl^l).

LXX
"p^l

Trapf/j-ftoXr]

Tfra.pa.yfj.fvri

ZvOfv Kal ZvOfv,

i.e.

Cpm DpH

nJHOn Him, which

:

yields a thoroughly satisfactory sense,

a corruption of D?n

reasoning was sound Iv TTtrpo&oXois, as is now known (see Nestle s collation of Tisch. s text with A, B, S, published in 1879, or Swete s edition), forms no part of the text of either or B.
:

no

The First Book of Samuel,

and the meaning is that the camp melted away, i.e. was disorganized, and dispersed in alarm 1 hither and thither, i.e. in every direction.
,

17.
1 8.

woyo]

Cf. II

i,

2.

Gen. 26, 16 (Lex.

87**,

768

b
).

DTita }nN ntron]

;

We

must

certainly read, with

LXX,

c f. f. 3,

and

especially 23, 9 nisxn nt^jn. 30, 7

(so also Dr. Weir;

ark,

and now Bu. Sm.

;

etc.).

The

ephod, not the

is

was the organ of divination and, as the passages cited shew, the word properly applied to bringing the ephod into use.
"OHI

QNltan JTIK

iff!

3]

btOB*

"Oil

is

here untrans-

lateable, 1 never having the force of a preposition such as Dy, so as to be capable of forming the predicate to Read, after LXX,
iT>n.

5>8OB

iysb Ninn
"i|n

m3
1

nissin

NEW rrn
in

2^n o.
5

19.
3, 26.

ny]
with

"IS

*ijj

would be

Job
:

7, 19. Jon. 4, 2

(Z^.
TT"!

accordance with Ex. 33, 22. Jud. b 724 b). (Sta. Bu.) is not
*!
"I?

"W

*W we should require possible accent on VW) ly hw? ( c f.

"DM

either

(disregarding the

disj.

18, 9), or,

more

idiomatically

(without
j^l]
9,

W),
1,

"i?1O

137.y

(or

imo my
ni^).

^INK l):

Z<f^r.

7291*.

the subject having preceded, as 17, 24. Gen. 30, 30. Ex.

21
1"U

al.

(Tenses,

127 a;

GK.
1 1

But Klo.
;

^n

is attractive.

T^n
1 8,

l^l]
25-t

Exactly so Gen. 26, 13

Cf.

Jud. 4, 24; II 5, 10

(=i
;

Ch.

11,9);
analogy
20.

GK.

U.

But the

adjectives are peculiar

inf. abs. in
:

and

a (6, i2 )

would strongly support an

l"^n]

each case.
cf.

iny"Q

t^N

viz. in

consequence of the panic

Jud.

7, 22.

Ez. 38, 2i b (especially with the reading noticed above, on

21.

v. 15).

nvr6 non
is

031

TQD] On

this passage,
(

see Tenses,

206

<9fo.

in itself defensible

grammatically

Now the Hebrews had been

~\J>

Unless, indeed, as
;

We.

suggests, 31D3 has here the sense of

;

in

Arabic

(Lane, 2743

Ex. 15, 15 Saad.

Qor. 18, 99 and we shall leave them on that day

part of them

J-W^ M^- upon

the other: 10, 23

24,403!.
;

swaying or surging as the waves of the sea. So Bu. Sm. Now. cf. Moore, Judges, p. 141 and it is true, to shake (lit.) or be agitated, perturbed, would suit nearly all the occurrences of 31E and is often the sense expressed by LXX.
.*

waves\

viz.

avros
;

LXX.
;

emphatic Gen. 3, 20
^. 24, 2;

causa! sentence, the subject of the verb is slightly and hence the explicit pron. is suitable, if not desiderated: see 9, 13 ;
the
Jos. 17, i
;

In

24, 27

25,15;
;

33, 9;

91,3; 103, 14; 148,5;

Jud. 14, 3 she (and not another) ; Jer. l8 J

5, 5

34, 7
>

Jb

5>

">"J

28

3 4J

Hos. 6,1

ii,

10; 13, 153!.

XIV.

IJ-2}

III
went up with them to the
etc.,
i.

to the Philistines as aforetime, in that they

camp round about

accompanied the
to
desert),

but they also were for being ,

e.

they

Philistines into the

this

though

camp, but afterwards prepared would be the one passage in which the inf.

with h would be used of past time in early

Hebrew

and the verse

appears to

describe a fact, rather than an intention (nYTI?).

LXX,

Vulg. for non D31 3*3D have eTreorpa^o-av KOL aurot, reversi sunt ut
essent,
i.e.
i.e.

(Th.

We.

etc.)
cf.

JIBf!

D? J33D; and, for ^IDTltO, (x^s, & ert

>

(as Bu. points out;

10,

n)

P^OriKD

1
:

Now

the Hebrews,

who

had belonged

to the Philistines (viz. as subjects) aforetime, they also

turned to be with Israel,

it

reading

now

generally accepted.

If,

almost necessary to suppose that nt^N has however, fallen out after D nsyni (so Bu. Sm. Now. Ehrl.) the omission in prose
it is
:

be adopted,

of the relative (except indeed by the Chronicler

to himself)
is

2
,

whose

style is peculiar

exceedingly rare

and the few passages

is

in

which
is

it

is

omitted

read so strangely that

it

questionable

if

the omission
vv. 5. 8
;

not
9,

due to textual error (Gen. 39, 4 \?~&r*?3, contrast

Ex.

4 12

^OK
(rd.
31

ya^aD;
1K>N

13, 8;

1 8,

20;

[4, 13
:

is

different;]

Jer. 52,
i

tyn,

or, as 2 Ki. 25, 8,

^O 13J?)
On
is

Ew.
it

333^;

GK.

55 d).
is

^frOty Dy]

The

restriction

makes

probable that Bu.

^NIK".

right in

supposing that B^N has

in Hif.:

fallen out before

22. IpfPI]
close upon, see

GK.
For

53.

the syntax of p Q in to press

Ehrl.

on

31,

2.

mix
This

p Oin

would read

"nntf

p;H

(as 17, 53)

=go
in
is it

hotly after.
i

plausible here and Jud. 20, 45,

find

but

difficult

Ch. 10,

when we

twice

HPIK IpaTI

for
?

HN

IpTPI,
23.

likely that

IpST! would be twice an error for 1p^T1

-|3y with

}iNTP3-nN
29:

may]

passed over B.,

nx, as Dt.

2, 18.
little
it.

Jud.

u,

some MSS., however, have

5), 4 miles

^y.

Beth-aven was a
ft.

E. of Bethel (13,
Luc. reads

NW.

of Michmas, and 1000

above

piTJVQ.

The

natural route from

Michmas

to

Aijalon (v. 31)

(19, 7) is rendered dxrel *x^ e/s s^cut ^vn-.

>

2
3

See

LOT*,

p.

537, No. 30; and add 2 Ch. 1,4.

Conjunctional phrases such as TN10,

^y

= I^S

^y, Di^S II

22,

being

excepted. The relative is also omitted regularly after "pin ilt ^N I Ki. 13, 12. 2 Ki. 3,8. a Ch. 18, 23. Job And comp. below, on ch. 25, 15 C ^). 38, 19. 24t.
1

Comp.

also Jud. 8,

i.

20, i5

b.

ch. 6,9. 26, 14.

ii2

The First Book of Samuel,

;

appears to be first up to Bethel (4 miles), then SW. to Bireh (2 miles) after this, to judge from the map, either due W., by a bridle-path across the mountains (8 miles), straight to Lower Beth-horon (1310 ft.), or, by a better road, first
then 5 miles WNW. to Upper Beth-horon Lower Beth-horon (1310 ft.), and lastly 6 miles down the As both Beth-aven and Beth-horon would valley to the SW. to Aijalon (940 ft.). thus be passed on the way to Aijalon, either reading would suit.

4 miles SSW.
ft.),

to el-Jib (Gibeon),

(2020

miles to

24. Ninn

DV3

K>aa

tOty t^Nl]
1

b>33

will
it

mean had
i?^.

been driven, hard-

pressed by the
dition

enemy
is

(as 13, 6): but

is

not apparent
31

how

this

con

would be

relieved

by Saul

measure

(The rendering of

AV. had
text.

adjured/

contrary to

Hebrew grammar.)
:

LXX

has here

a variant, which, at least to Ephraim, seems original, and

suits the

con
Se/ca

For the words quoted

avBpwv
KOL
rjv

it

reads

KOL Tras 6 Aaos ty ^aera

is

2aouA ws
r<3

X<AtaSes

6 TroAe/xo? StecrTrapyaevos

o\rjv iroXiv ev

opei

TO)

E<pat/A.

Kat SaovA
i.e.

yyvoTjcrev ayvoiav /teyaAr/v ev

T^
Dj?

~f/fJ-fpa

Kal dparat KT\.,

(as

We.

rightly restores)

?*X&
^nni

iTH D

nbna TOG?

nac>

b^t/i

JQ^ss

"in?

n^iaj nDn^an
1
;

^N
2

D^abx
:

Wnn

Di s 3.

Ei? oA^v

Tro Atv is

doubtless a doublet of lv TW opet

2 Ki. 23, 16;

for

in
Is.

confused with
66, 20

TV
1

see Jos. 15, zo

:

Ch. 21,
HXis:
is

(Trommius)
8,

oA^v
:

is

to a battle in II

nat? is

merely amplificatory. found in 26, 21 (LXX ^

<:<$.

applied

Committed a
sequel Saul
error
for
is

great error,

however, agrees poorly with the context

is

in the

in

no way condemned, and Yahweh

ayvtiav,

being unheeded.
rjyviafv

displeased (v. 37) at the curse Klo. conjectured, very cleverly, that fiyvorjaev ayvoiav was an

which (Bu.) would express

2
"V}n
"1J3

(cf.

Nu.

6, 2

a.<pa~(viaaaOai

ayvtlav

=
"I^Hp

T Ta
i.

[?

"1W

"l^n|)],

3 ayvtaOrjaeTai

= *V)

separated
6, 2.

a great (ceremonial) separation,

3. 5. 6. 12)

e.

imposed a great abstinence.

"VfJ ,

and (Nu.

T^n,

are chiefly (Nu. 6) used of the

vow

of separation, or abstinence,
is
"1^3

made by
will

the

Tp

(the

Nazirite

),
;

but at least the Nif.

;

used more generally

7, 3 9, lot) reading the meaning 7. be that Saul, perceiving by Israel s success that Yahweh was with it, laid upon the people, in accordance with the religious ideas of the time, a taboo of

(Lev. 22,2. Ez. 14,

Zech.

Hos.

and with

this

abstinence, hoping thereby to secure His continued assistance. is clever, but rests (Now.) upon a precarious basis "V^n
:

The
,

conjecture

though it might perhaps have borne the meaning supposed, does not actually occur with it.
"I]J

also,

1
2

Though

here

LXX may have

is

paraphrased, treating

D HJP

"If!

as

=
by
8.

T13 ~H3 (Sm. Kenn.)

20.

less

probable

this expression is followed, not

:

a curse, but by a promise dependent on a condition

cA.i, II. II 15,

Gen.

28, 20.

Nu. 21,2. Jud. n,

XIV. 24-26
bV]
Konig,
i.

ii3
76^; more
fully

Hif. of

nfo

(for

!!)

flzaafc to

swear: GK.

578

f.

iTOpJl]

in continuation of
;

myn

iy:

T*WJ,

115,

GK.

ii2 w

similarly Jud. 6, 18
25. 1N2]

Is. 5, 8.

Comp.

II 15,

23 D 313

pxn

i>31;

Gen. 41, 57.

26 a merely repeats 25*, though the verses stand too 25-26*. LXX has /cat closely together for a resumption to be probable. laaA opvp-os ty
eis
yu.eAi(rcr<iivos

Kara

TrpdcrwTrov TOV

TOV p.eXi(T(r)va,
:

/cat

iSou

eTropeueTO

dypoG /cat ctcnJA^ev 6 Aaos We. s restoration is AaAwv.

remarkably clever
to the

Heb.

~iy.

To

laaA and Spu/xos are doublets, each corresponding the same word, however, corresponds in v. 26
in fact a triplet.
rjv}
is

fj.fXia-awv,
/cat
rjv

so that

we have here

Through

v.

26,

fjifXia-a-wv (or Kai /jicXicro-uv

confirmed as the genuine

rendering of

LXX,

laaA was added to ^eAicro-wv, and was afterwards

explained by Spv/Aos, /xcAuro-wv being in consequence changed into the genitive, in order to produce a sentence out of the words /cat

laaA

Spty/,6s

/xeAtcro-w.

The
"?.S

text of
,Tii

LXX,
Jn

as thus restored,
.

would

read in

Hebrew rn&n

^y

Tjq.
for
BO"l.

26*,

LXX

agree with
leads us

MT.,
in

except in expressing
to recognize fo^r,

13"!

The connexion
1

in
left

and (observing the

in pNl) to read n:ni

nn
had

"pn,

vocalizing
2

Vih ]

or more probably topn,

^^

^bn

[its

bees
arose

it

J.

From
"iy,

the text thus presupposed

by

LXX, MT.
E>n

which was ambiguous, was first of all explained by was only 25; afterwards, however, it was forgotten that rendered superfluous by the explana intended to explain iy, and
as follows.
v.

KOT

"iy,

tory EOT,

and understood
original

in

its

common

sense as wood, was detached

from

its

connexion, and united with the fragments of the

variant of 24 end, preserved in

DPI?

LXX

[/cat

Trao-a

rj

yrj

rjpca-ra

^31

In view of the beginning of v. 26, the sentence was thus formed which stands now in MT. as v. 25 a v. 26 {^3T for

DyD psn].

in

is

no doubt an accidental corruption, though the

3

fact that

"QT

as

a collective term

does not occur elsewhere in the OT., might con-

1
"iy

=
1

honeycomb, as Ct.

5, i

The

sense stream postulated by

MT.

for

TjSl
al.

is

unsupported by analogy.

D^lh" !

in ike plural (foes) occurs

Dt. 1,44
I

1365

U4
there was to the

The First Book of Samuel,

Read, therefore,
for vv.

tribute to the mistranscription/

25-26*

And

honeycomb upon the face of the field, and the people came honeycomb, and lo, the bees had left it but no man/ etc. is to overtake, reach, obtain ; with T as VD IT y&Q PNI]
:
!>X

Wl

subject,

it

occurs often in the Priests

Code

(e.g.

Lev. 14, 21) to

express the idea of the means of a person sufficing to

meet some

expense.
ns5
i

Here Klo.
is

is

undoubtedly

right in restoring

ywn: n^n
z>.

the usual

and

Pr. 19, 24.

Heb. phrase for the sense required: see 27 Dr. Weir makes the same suggestion, remarking
as in the next verse
B^ajp.
:

LXX eVio-rpe^xov
(on

so also Targ. 2T1ID.

Hitzig

Am.

9,

10) proposed

27. rirfs]

Read nhte (on

HJSnrn
29),
i.

II 2

1,

i):

nJiOni]

Kt.
z>.

^w</

^z j eyes

nan and nxp are both masc. (Ehrl.). his eyes saw: Qr6 njnNPn
<z^

brightened (as

e.

he was refreshed, revived

:

metaphor from
13, 4;

the eyes brightening after fatigue or faintness

cf.
1

i/r.

19, 9

DTy nTNn
28.
*!*?*!]

(i.e.

reviving spiritually).

The Qre
if

is

here the more

forcible reading,

and preferable

to the Ktib.

so
:

v.

31, Jud. 4, 21. 2 S. 21, 13, as

<

from

*]W.

But the

verb

is

H^

so

no doubt the regular form

cjyi,
v.

*iy?l

should be restored

(GK.

72*).

Dyn

anticipates unduly

however, here interrupts the connexion, and 31^: either it is a gloss, intended to justify

Jonathan
^<?

words

in v. 30, or

we

should, perhaps, read EV^ TJ

;

ac/

straitly

charged

the people (cf.

Ex. 19, 21. 23

in

and see on

8, 9).

29. 13y]

An

ominous word
Israel (Jos. 7,

OT., used of

the trouble brought

no),

by Achan upon

25 nrn

Dm

ni.T

Toy umay
n,
f.).

and

by

the daughter of Jephthah

""nsyn),

upon and retorted by Elijah upon Ahab

:

her father (Jud.

(i Ki. 18, 17

25 n^rt riN1

Troubled
destroy

is

not strong enough

the root signifies to make turbid,

Cf.

fig. for,

the happiness of, bring disaster on, undo.

Gen. 34, 30.

fim

K>m

Dyo] nrn does not belong

art.

could not iu that case have the

little

to Ban (as accents) for it but to the definite can DyD this

cf. 15, 14 nrn fN^.T^p ( this bleating of the sheep construed as z.plur., II 24, 17); Dt. 29,20 nrn minn 1DD this }N book of the law 2 Ki. 6, 32 nm rftnc/rp this son of a murderer.

honey:

is

30.

PJN]

f|N

= indeed

!
.

with
.

reference
(e.g.

to

preceding

sentence, a fortiori, the

more then

.!

Job

4, 19).

In

"G

fjK,

XIV. 26-34
>3

TI 5
.

merely strengthens

P|X,

tis

indeed that

Here

"O

*JX is
:

prefixed

(unusually) to the protasis of a hypothetical sentence

then,
if

The more,

the people
:

had eaten,
(nny = as

[would they have been refreshed

things are, as Job 16, 7) the slaughter

likewise]

for

now

(read naran) hath not been great

clause
b,

among

the Philistines.

In

LXX

however, agrees with the usual type of sentences introduced nny ^ (Gen. 31, 42. 43, 10: Tenses, by 141), X? being omitted, for now; the sentence as due to a misunderstanding, as if nny *3

will

then read

The more,

then,

if

the people

had eaten

would

indeed in that case (nny

this

= as

things might have been, as usually in

connexion) the slaughter have been great.

31. njp^x]

of Lower Beth-horon

Ayyalon (Aijalon), now Yalo (940 ft.), was 6 miles SW. (v. 23), down the Vale (pEy) of Aijalon; so the

route would be substantially the

the Canaanites (Jos. 10)
;

same

as that
6".

see Stanley,

by which Joshua drove and P. 207 ff. H. G. 210 f.

;

The
(see

entire distance

from Michmas to Aijalon would be 20-23 miles

which (or rather BJW: see on
evi

on

v. 23).

32. t^yi]

Qre

By.ll,

15, 19)

is

dently correct.
the present passage shews, regarded with strong disfavour by the Hebrews: forbidden in the Law of Holiness (Lev. 17-26), Lev. 19, 26 Din by l?3xn X? 1 and
*

Din py Dyn pax

!]

practice,

as

censured by Ezekiel (33, 25). by in this connexion is idiomatic, and has the force of together with: so Ex. 12, 8 inp^X^ D HIO by,

Nu.

9,

i.-tax

11

nniDi niso
to

by.

33.

Dmia] seems
(Bu.).

person

be here neither the right verb, nor in the right Sm., very plausibly, B*T!^J so Bu. Ehrl.

D^Xtin]

are sinning,

much more
weak
letter

expressive than
:

form

is

for

^XDh,

the

X quiescing

EVV. sin. The GK. 23, 75.

So above, 71XC ?
:

73X7] in respect of eating, Anglice,

12, 17. 19,

in eating.

and frequently.
96.

For DVn

LXX

has cftn

probably rightly.

34-

^.T] GK.
cf.

Here only: Dt.

pi.

22, i

Wf.
,

From an

orig.

say or si qy:

the Arab.

un un un shiyd (from shat ], shayh

etc.

mn ?x] a clear example of 7X with the force of py. VP2 nu? S^x] Some, however, it is natural to suppose, would only
1

Cf. Gen. 9, 4. Lev. 7, 26.

I

17, jo. Dt. 12, 16. 23.

n6
have a
nb>

The First Book of Samuel,

to bring, in
:

terms of the invitation

accordance with the option permitted by the {^X read accordingly with LXX
"11*3
T<?{<

each that which was in his hand, which

is

altogether preferable.

For

wa
is

cf.

Gen. 32, 14

43, 26

DT2

ic>x

rimon.
:

nWn]
night.

a questionable usage \bh\\ adverbially elsewhere always either by night, or to-night, or once (15, 16) last
night,

that

LXX
The

omits.

Klo. Bu. Sm. would read nVTv

into

(cf.

Am.

5, 25).

35.
slain

stone

was made

an extemporized
at

altar,
it,

and the
flesh

animals being consecrated by presentation

their

could be eaten.

See

W.

R. Smith,

OTJC?

p.

250.

Clause b implies

that Saul built subsequently other altars to

,
, .

Yahweh.
cf.

^nrt

inx]

that of Qrf?

Jud. 10,

For the position of inx, Hos. 13, 2. Job 4.

8.
(cf.

on

15,

comp. also
23,

15, 20;

II

3;

&

Dt. 21, 17
36.

03

Jer. 31,

rmj] from Beth-horon

for

v.

23), or

some other place

in the

hill-country, following the Philistines

Ttfoyi]

down
is

the Vale of Aijalon.

88l>),

np31
like

GK.
smite

67<id.

The 3
(v.

partitive (Lex.
al.),

plunder

among them,
*1NB>3

among

31

i>3N,

etc.

N7i] The jussive is unusual, both in the ist pers. (Tenses, GK. 48s.), and after N^ (cf. Gen. 24, 8; II 17, 12; 18,14: 46.; 3. Read prob. Tenses, 50 a Obs. ; GK. 109*). The repeated question, as in the similar 37. DJnnn TiNn]
1KB>

inquiries^ 38. ^a]

2

2 3,
i.

n
e.

30, 8; II 5, 19.
also,
2,

gdshu : so Ch. 29, 3it (cf. ^3 Ru,

6 5d

anomalously, out of pause, Jos.

3, 9.
al.
:

i4t), for the

normal

W$

Gen. 45, 4

GK.
their

JTlJa] corners,

hence metaph. of princes, the stay and support of people: so Jud. 20, 2. Is. 19, 13, where Gesenius compares

corner-stone or corner-pillar (e.g.

s

Eph.

2,

20),

used Qor. 51, 39

of religion.

of Pharaoh

nobles,

and the
i,

pr. n.

Rokn-eddin,

Pillar

nes] wherein,

as Mai.

6
is

wherein have

we

despised

Thy name ?
etc.,

Vulg. expresses V33, which

certainly

preferred by Th. We. Bu.

and

is

more pointed.

V.

mind.

In the old character

J]

"

39 shews that Saul has a person in might easily be corrupted to n.

his

39. foK b
(

thrice besides, but a

(

form contrary

to analogy:

Stade
fern.,

37

).

and GK.

100

note)

would read 13^.

As DKDn

is

XIV. 14-4 1
we
ought, however, to have n3B^ (or nat^)
;

TI 7
cf.

LXX
1
1

(with n).

Why,
.

in these

and some other forms, as H ? *?,

is

verbal suffix should be used,

uncertain:

cf.

GK.
after

IOOP.
:

DX
is

a]

The

first

a introduces the terms of the oath

first,

the

second

merely resumptive of the

the

intervening

hypothetical clause.
41. DVOn nan]
Keil,

So

often, as II 3, 9.

Gen.

22, i6f. (Lex. 472*).

AV.

Give a perfect

(lot):
i.

RV. Shew
is

the right:

Give innocence (of disposition,

e. truth).

All these suggested

perfect,
i.

renderings of

D^n

are without support.

Q^on
;

e.

in

a physical sense, of an animal, unblemished

cent
*,

in a

moral sense, inno

:

blameless.
is

but this
for

D^ED nan might mean give one who is perfect not the sense which is here required Saul does not ask
:

one who

is
is i

perfect to be
in
;

the one

who
Ti

pHX

(Dt. 25,
:

produced and though he might ask for the right to be declared, this would be expressed by i Ki. 8, LXX has for the two 32), not by nnsn.
;
TU>

words

on
utu>

OVK aTrcKpi^s
/MOD
ST/
rj

SovAw
pie 6

crou crrj/j.epov

17

ev

1/j.ol

rj

tv

IwvaOav TW
ra8e
eiTTij,

ciSt/cta

Ki

eos IcrparjX, Sos S^Aovs

Si)

KOL eav

Sos

TW

Xaai crov

Io-pa^A, 8os
:

oo-tdr^ra,

whence the
nK)b
133

following text
^"j

may be
The

restored

W T^ Di
is

<

D ^D
1|//l1

I^JT^K rwy N^

f l^y?
!

^^

DW onw

nan ^KI^

n&K

mn

|iyn

|n^na
and

D^n

nnn.

text thus obtained

both satisfactory in

itself,

The at once removes the obscurity and abruptness attaching to MT. in the second clause first clause corresponds with LXX exactly:
be followed ; but Sos 817 (omitted in A) 8rj cannot be merely a rhetorical anticipation of the Sos S?) following ; and considering that LXX render IJB* in v. 39 by a verb (duro/cpi&j),
eav raSe etTn; Sos

seems

to

there

is

nothing arbitrary in supposing that raSe

ftiry

may

represent

WB*

here.

For

"STB*

DN

cf.

20, 8.

A^Aoi stands

for

D^N
The

^.

28, 6

and Nu.

27, 21 (as S^Auo-is, in

Ex. 28, 26. Lev.

8, 8).

cause of

the omission in

MT.

lies

evidently in the occurrence of the

same

word htfW before both

N^>

nob and D On nan.

The

restored text

(which is now generally accepted by scholars) shews (what has often been surmised independently) that the D^DDni DHIxn L3Dt^D was a

mode

of casting lots:

cf.

l^an

v.

42,

and note

that

"WfJl,

which

Innocent, that

is,

not of a particular offence, but generally.

n8

The First Book of Samuel,

immediately follows in v. 41 (but which in MT. stands unexplained), is the word regularly used of taking by lot, 10, 20 f. Jos. 7, 14. 16. 42. After iJ3 LXX has an addition, which in Heb. would be
h&2>

pirn rim
P21

-in-in

rw

N^>

bit? ^N

ojjn

IDNI

mo

11

mrr ina^ new

132

}n3V

W2

"6^1

tayno.

But although
its

its

omission could be
doubtful:

readily explained by homoeoteleuton,

originality is very

see

We. and Now.

TieyB DyD] I did ^n] Here I am
taste
;
:

43.

GK.

i3

DION

of the fate to
declaring his
resignation,

Jonathan thus not complaining which he has involuntarily rendered himself liable, but For ^jn as an expression of willingness to meet it.
I will die,

cf.

12, 3,
lo, I

and

esp. II 15,
die,
^>,

26; also Gen. 44,

16. 50, 18.

EVV.,
44.

in
nB>y

And
Pia]

must

neglect the suff. in MJii.

LXX
the

adds
curse

which

at least is a correct explanation

of the phrase;

being invoked naturally upon himself.

at least, the

Possibly, however, this

i

was understood;

phrase recurs
oath followed

Ki. 19, 2 without

"6

(where
i

LXX

similarly /W).

The

by

3, as II 3, 9. 35.

Ki.

2, 23.

19, 2.
:

45. nyw] The passage illustrates the material sense of the word and nyiBTI 1 (the more common word in so Ex. 14, 13; II 10, ii
;

prose), as Jud.

15, 18;

ch.

n,

9. 13. to

19, 5

al.

The

root

ye",

as

Arabic shews, means properly

be

wide, capacious, earth

is

ample (e.g.
7,

Qor. 29, 56 LLJj

(Lagarde)

L^ = irAa-reta
/o

j^-ajl

y\
;

behold,
2

My
6,
1 1

broad ; Matt.

13

Cor.

(Erpenius)

TWTCU; Gen. 26, 22; Ex. 34, 24 Saad.

is
4

xZT = 3*mn)
to
in,

= li^J
:

hence

properly

^/ ^

width and freedom

to

(opp.

I-? !}),
1

and ny\W

is

safety

in the

sense of space
"W?

move

freedom

from

enemies or

constraint (opp.

narrowness, angustiae). Etymologically, then, the idea of the root would be best expressed by deliver, deliverance ; and
in a

passage such as n, 9 be clearly distinguishable.

njWD D3^ nvtn iriD this sense appears to By the Prophets and Psalmists, however,

Formed

as though

from a root jnC* on the ground, probably, of a

false

Similarly HSIpH, rriKKVl, HQnn as though from [C]^, Kltf, fill], though the verbs actually in use are PJp3 ? ilNB , ND"\. Comp. Ol. p. 401;
analogy.
Stade,
266*.

XIV. 4 2 ~45
the idea of deliverance or

XI 9

freedom which

njW,

fiyiBTl

connote,

is

enlarged,

so

as to include spiritual as
if

well as material blessings.

These words seldom,

their

ever,

express a spiritual state exclusively;

in

common

theological

sense

Hebrew
in

is

that

of a material
;

deliverance attended by spiritual blessings (e.g. Is. 12, 2

45, 17).
is

In
very

some passages, the temporal element

evident, e.g.
(cf.
i^.

the

deliverance

7);

28,

see v. 8); 20, 6 3,9 (RV. marg. Or, Victory: 8 (note Ty and nytt); 62,3 (note the parallel figures
etc.:
cf.

nitf,

OJB D); 74, 12,

nyiKTl, ^. 33, 17. 60,

n.

The margins

in

RV. on

historical

quoted (including those in the serve as a clue to the manner in which the Hebrew books)
salvation

several of the passages

words represented by the English a higher and fuller meaning.

1E>Nn

acquired

gradually

rnyt?

b& ON]

If there shall fall

myt5>

even a single hair of his

1

head

to the

ground!
a

is
:

a single hair, see Jud. 20,

the fern, being the so-called

6 nt ^3

NBIV

vb\

myvrrta
Ew.
is
;

p3

ySp

nomen

unitatis,
i, 3).

JB

to

i76 be understood here as

GK.

122*.

So

a
/<?<?/,

nj3K a ship (Jon.

Dt, 15, 7
:

in

T0$ 10^9

lit.

1 even one of thy brethren. starting from one of thy brethren This use of fo is elucidated by Arabic: see Ges. Thes., or Lex. 581*

(where illustrations are cited); Ew. 278**; GK. 119 Ewald, Gr. Arab. 577; Wright, Arab. Gr. ii. 48
--..">

(note):
f b.

also

.A^J"

Qor.

6,

59

l$., L

}M

*
>

Comp.

Ja.ll>j

falleth

not without His knowing

it.

UJ The
i

f^

Jii^/*? &o/"(nom. unit.)

proverbial expression itself

i
}

recurs II 14,

n, and

with

N!? for

DX

Ki.

52.
:

Dy] = in conjunction with,

HE)
iii.
1

aided by

(uncommon)

cf.

Dan. n, 39.

!]

redeemed :

literally,

by the substitution of another (Ew. Hist.

Had the former been 51 [E. T. 36]; We,), or metaphorically? the sense intended, the fact, it is probable, would have been stated
more
circumstantially, instead of its being left to the reader to infer it from a single word, rns is the technical word used of the redemption of a life that is forfeit ; but the redemption may be made by the life of

an animal, or by a money payment, Ex. (all JE); Nu. 18, 15. i6(P).
1

13, 13. 15. 34, 29,

cf.

21, 8.

30

Or, according to others, a rhetorical application of the partitive sense.

I2O
47.

The First Book of Samuel,

a!D3l]

LXX
is

-jtani,

probably rightly: see II

/r<?a/

8,

3-12.
i.

JPBH*]
(Dt. 25,

^ pronounce or ytJnn i); hence MT. has been

and

tfj

wicked,
to

e.

/<?

condemn
in

supposed

mean condemned

fact

(Keil), ptmished ;

in support of this rendering, the

to

analogy

of the Syr.

oUl

prop, to treat as guilty,

T^TTOJ/ io

condemn, but occasionally

i. 325; But such a usage

used in the sense of

ii.

put

to the

worse, overcome (Ephr.

to.

318; ap. PS.

col.

1213), has been appealed

would be

quite isolated in

Hebrew

and the absence of a

it

suffix

or

other object to

jwv
and

is

strongly against

here.

LXX

has eo-w^ero

^r
way
i.

And
28,
1

wherever he turned he was victorious] a reading

suited to the context.
7]bin
;

in every

satisfactory

cf. Pr.
e.

yW
and

Dn?n

Zech.

9,

For the sense of the Nif. lit. 9 Veto just and saved,

pm

successful

victorious.

The

impff. denote reiteration or habit

it

in

the past, just as in Pr. 17, 8 etc. they denote ov av

e(TTpa.<J>r)

in present time.

LXX

CCTW^CTO

On ov av COmp.
\.

17,

34 footnote.

48. 7TI

B jn]

lit.

made might,
\f/.

e.

achieved prowess, performed

118, 15. 16.
plural
:

deeds of valour: Nu. 24, 18.

inot?]

60, 14.

The

ptcp.

seems intended as a

if so,

the

word

affords

an example of the very rare form of the suffix 3 masc. ^H -- after a plural noun: 30, 26 mjn, Nah. 2,4 vntea, Hab. 3, io WT, Job 24, 23 in^y, p r 29, 1 8 VTiK>K: Stade, p. 20 346* (2), and
.

w/<?,

P-

3551 Ew.
49.

258

a
;

GK.

9I

1
;

Wright, Compar.

Gramm.
1
"T^K

p. 158.
,

VfN, or Yahweh/ an intentional alteration of ^ya^X i Ch. name of Ishbosheth, altered, as We. says, when the

W*]

in all probability a corruption of

man of
the real
fell

8, 33,
title

Baal

into disrepute (see

in

on

II 4, 4),

theils in

V^X von Verniinftigen,

3rWN
<I

theils

rma~B*N von Unvernunftigen.

LXX

\taaiov\ (Luc.

Iftrfftov)

presupposes a reading

or

i^X.
,
If<f>0at

Not

names beginning, as pointed by the Massorites, with -^ for K for represented in LXX by It- (as Itpe^/as for }n but several pr. names beginning with X are so represented, as nriD^, etc.),
only are a great

many

pr.

l|

D"1*

Iff<rtu

Ii0off6t for

rm-t^K

II

2,

al.,

lefafcA. regularly for

b?rK, le^^A.

for

Or of VB^N, liT^-N. cannot be derived phonetically from only the reverse change from yi to * being in accordance with analogy (cf. in Syriac, Nold. Syr. Gr. and 40 C). But if was pronounced softly (i, notjz GK.
B>N,
.-

47"

n.\ B

might be written incorrectly

for

K>K.

XIV. 47
Jos. 17,2, Ie0f0aa\ for

XV,
If^P
(cod.

2
f r
"18N

i2i
Neh. 7,61, Ifpo@aa\
i

}y2DN

Ki. 16, 31,

ItaOtpur]

(AQ ) IWeu
in

for

bwiX

Hos.

10, 14,
i

A)

for

ybniPN
for

Ch. 4, 19,
II 3, 8
}i"P-

for

IB^N (elsewhere B*)

Ch.

2,

13,
;

comp.

I<raaA.

riBO B^N

Aq. Symm. Theod., and

in II 23, 8 Luc. 1
I

and
2,

for the term, -lov for

A05e<ot

cf.

VP^N
51.

HAtiov or H\iov, !!JTJ3 Baratoi/,

Ki.

35, }iV*]3JJ

ib. 18,

ff.

^X 3N p] Read

i>K

3K

*33,

though the error

vi. 6,

is

as old as

LXX.

But already Josephus says (Ant.

TraTT/p
dSeA<oi
^<Tav

6) Nrjpos KCU Keto-os 6

Saov Aou

uiol Se
:

A/Str/Aov.

52.

riXTi] frequentative

and Saul would

.

see, etc.,

a</

would take

him

to

him

= and when
120; 148.
i
:

Saul saw
so II 15,

he used to take him to him

(Tenses,

2.

5 etc.).

inSDNM

is

irregular for

iSDNl

see

on

2, 16.

15.

Saul and Amaleq.

to

Second

rejection

of Saul.

(Introduction

history of David.]

15,

T.

P&B>

TIN]
i,

Position

as

14,

35

(see

note).

Gen. 42, 36

DflbaB

TiN.
"HN.

Dt.

38 P5D

^N.

10, 20. ^. 25, 5 ^n^lp -JDN. Jer. 4, 22

1VT K?
24, 14

30, 14; also (not at the beginning of a sentence) Gen.

rina n nriN.
i/,-.

jud.

14, 3

np nniK.

^.

18, 17.

Is.

37,

26

TWV nniN.
cp. (a) after 1,

27,

4 B P^s* nrnx.
etc.
11

For other cases of TIN, IDN^

Gen. 12, 12 ITl
11, 33. Dt. 4, 14. 6, 13

^nNI *HN UTTl.

13,5.
,

rendered emphatic by being prefixed to a verb, Lev. 10, 17 , , , }H3 Pinl.

20, 19
.

-ayn mxi.
i

ni^n xb
2.

inxi.

poy
Is.

*33

mm nnn

2 s. 12,

insi.

KL

i,

6 b . 35

^y n^j nvn^ *nijr inw. n, 37;

58,
Jer. 9, 2 1JTP

57, ii

rrOT N^ TIINI and

PN^n
TltO

N^ niW.
(cf. i

N^ *nw.

16, ii. 46, 28. Ez. 22, 12

nn:iK>

riTTN

D3nST. Dt.4,20. 6,32. Ez. 11,7;

Ki. 14,9). Hos. 2, i 5 b ; Lev. 26, 33 Ez. 12,13. 23,10. 33,31; Job 14, 3:
22, 33
fA.
:

() Gen. 41, 13
7

r6n inNI

"33

^y

n^n
:

TIN. Nu.
N^l, Ti^NI 1H
21, 10;

(0

after DJ1, 2 S. 2, 7

J1

in^D HN

nKTp:
i

2 S. 8, ii DJ1; DJ () after *3, Gen. 7,1 p

(rf)

after

20,9.

Is.

43, 22

"-nN

N^l
S

1*
;

3.
fjer.
5,

37,4

3HN V1N

3.

Ki.

5, 13. Jer. 4,

17

lUTO TIN

"^

^-

22 ItOTl N!? TliNH.

7,

igf.

pronoun

in

an emph. position should always be noted by the student.

-sho- (not -ska-):

2.

GK.
i.e.

V
;

and

for the

metheg

Tinpa]

I will visit,

punish

the pf.

(though unusual in

Hatch and Redpath

See further examples in the Supplement, containing the Proper Names, to s Concordance to the Septuagint (1900), p. 77 ff.

122
prose, except in

The First Book of Samuel,

as Jud. 15, 3, expressing determination (Tenses, io6 m ); and Ipa being construed with an accus. of the as Hos. 8, 13 The sense mark 9, 9 Jer. 14, 10.
"^riS)

13;

GK.

sin visited,

(R.V.), ansehen (Keil),

is

not borne out by usage

Ip3 means to
direct

visit

in fact (Ex. 3, 16. 4, 31), not to observe mentally, or to

one

look at

(Keil).

m
n yn
s

DB>

T^N]

Db>

in a military
int2>

sense, as
Is.
is

Ki. 20, 12 IB

11

^ ID^I

\>y

lO E^i, and

in

i^.

3. 7.

22, 7.

In Dt. 25, 18 (of the

"K^N.

same occurrence)
3.

the expression used

*JTQ

^~ip |T

Dnennni]

LXX,

independently of KOI

lepei/x KOI,

has two transla

KO.I

tions of this word, viz. KOI eoAe$pevo-eis auroi/

and

dva^e/xarieis

auror KCU, both pointing to

the

Hebrew

is

^3 HKI Wtpnnrn (11 for D). Though the combination nevertheless occurs (see on poor,
"it?K

5, 10),

and as the sequel shews

it is

that the nation, as well as

it.

its

belongings,

was banned/
3

best to adopt
22, ipt.
. .

b.

par nyi
. ,

Ww]
.

ntw
i.

nyi

B^ND

/<5.

Jos. 6, 21. 8, 25 al.

1J?1

o] _/row

even unto,
as 23, 8t.

e.

including both, as often.

i

4.

J7BB*l]

The /YW,

So

Ki. 15, 22

al.

the Hif

il.

D Nbt23]
the
5. Ptt?

To
for

be pointed probably BSOC, and identical with D?^ in

Jos. 15, 24.
i.e.
;

Negeb of Judah,
31*1]
for

3nJl,

PTNK Job 32, ii

68i, 1^1 GK. ^n? (as generally

23*1

Kon.

i.

390:

cf.

understood) Ez. 21, 33;

<

ptt? Pr. 17, 4.

The

omission of
28,

rare

even then) in Qal:

somewhat more frequent (though Warn II 6, i ^0*1 (from 5]DN) 24

is
;
;
.

68 h 19, 14 VNOT; 20, 9 Tnni; ^. I0 4, 29 H??^ (from ejDN); GK. 6. On the Qenites, and their former friendly relations with Israel,
see Nu.
10, 29 his
f.

Jud.

i,

16,

where Budde

(ZATW.

1887,

p.

101,

and

in

reading,
^"]]

Commentary on Judges, ad loc.} is certainly after MSS. of LXX, pfoyn fix for Dj?n nN.

right in

so 33

(= Bomberg s
c f.

Ginsb.

rn

Gen.

19,

Rabb. Bible of 1525), 14 1N^ ^iMp; and see GK.

Kitt.
22"

Baer and

(20^), and

the Addenda.

Where, in 1. 6 of p. 73 of the Engl. translation, insert hitherto (i. e. in In 1. 2 also a question would be better than previous editions) after When we. doubtful ; for, though the note reads somewhat obscurely, Kautzsch does mean
to explain the cases quoted in
it

by the principle of

20

XV.
Except here and
v.

2-q

123

15
is

MT.

pby.

As

the determined

noun

has throughout the chapter needed, it is better in both these

passages to read with Luc. pboy.

cate that the punctuators treat the verb as Hif.

^BpN] The metheg, shewing the hireq to be long, appears to indi But the Hif. of ]DK
rests, no doubt, upon a false Read without metheg, it will be with shortened to when the

does not elsewhere occur, and the metheg

theory as to the nature of the word.
the impf.
syllable
is

Qal IDK

(as ^. 104, 29),

rendered toneless by the addition of a

2 Ki. 22,

suffix (so in the ptcp.

*jaDN ^3n
Is.

20 \

1N

ch. 24, 5 al.;

and
i.

in

Pi
f. ;

el

03SDXD
68*.

52, 12.

Q3XS

Job
/r.

16, 5 etc.).

Comp. Konig,

382

GK.

?|DN, as Jud. 18, 25.

26, 9. Ehrl. suggests

^DN

(Gen. 18, 23. 24).

nnKl] Note the emph. pronoun.

^p] Read
v. 6 a , 27, jo.

either pp (as

Nu.

24, 22. Jud. 4,

n), or (LXX) rpn (as

It

30, 29).

7.

"NB>

1W3

n^*1TO]

On

Shur, see

DB.

s.v.

appears to have

denoted the

district

name

to the nit?
2,

on the NE. border of Egypt, which gave its Where n^in was is uncertain. "DID Ex. 15, 22.
25, 18

In Gen.

n.

10, 29.

the

name most probably denotes a

region in the
in

NE.
it

of Arabia, on the

W.

coast of the Persian Gulf;

the African coast,

Gen.
little

10, 7

may

denote the A/SaXircu, on

of

S. of the Straits
is

Bab el-Mandeb

but even a region in the

NE. of Arabia
inflicted

too remote to define the starting-point of the defeat

the

by Saul upon

Amaleqites.

Either Pp^fl

is

here the

name
or

of a place in or near the country of Amaleq, otherwise unknown,

:

we should simply (with We.) restore &?BD (v. 4) the error may have arisen through a reminiscence of Gen. 25, 18, where the phrase
occurs, closely resembling the one here,
>3S

^y

n^N

W^

n^PDD

DHD,
^3

but where n^in,

as has

just

been
is

said,

appears from the

context to denote a place

by] in front
of,

more

distant than

suitable here.

in geographical descriptions,
I.e. i

commonly means
s.v.) in the

to the east

b of (Lex. 8i8 ): so Gen.

Ki.

n,

7.

9.
1

D OE Dn] Explained by Kimchi (Book of Roots,

a

sense

In the parallel passage,

exactly the

same phrase, ^JSDN

Ch. 34, 28 (Baer and Ginsbnrg, but not 93, Kittel), in is pointed as here, with metheg, i. e. as an

impf. Hif.

124
of |t?3O D
11

The First Book of Samuel,

*^

i.

e.

young of a second

birth,

such as had the reputation

of being superior to firstlings (see Tanhum, quoted by Roed. in the So Roed. himself (p. i45i b ), and Keil. But the Thes. p. 1451*).
text reads suspiciously,

and the position of

7JJ

before D nan (instead

of before the pair of similar delicacies Dnsni D^Btsn) suggests error. We. for onan i?yi D^EHDm would read W}3?} CWEf D and the best of
the flocks and the herds, (even) the fat ones (com p. Ez. 34, 16), and the lambs, etc., which undoubtedly forms a better Hebrew sentence,

and nearly agrees with the rendering of Pesh. Targ. (JWDS1 N^D^l), neither of which, at least, appears to have had either D^B lD, or 7JJ
before

a delicacy in

DH^n. D na are mentioned Am. 6, 4 Dt. 32, 14.

;
nr>N

in terms

implying that they were

icnnn
tion

DCOI

nnJ

it3K^on ^3l] roxta

means

business, occupa
is

(Gen. 39, n), and so property

22,
7.

on which a person

occupied,

Ex.

10

here and Gen. 33, 14 specially of property consisting

"^.i?*?).

in cattle (cf.

riDDJ

is

a grammatical monstrum, originating

evidently in the blunder of a scribe.

scribe
IDJ,

The

text

had DDJ1 HDJ

first

the

began by

error with the second word, wrote the

two

letters

then discovered his mistake, but not wishing to

make an

erasure,

simply added the letters nD. (There are similar monstra in Ez. 8, 16. The words present, however, other difficulties. ^N, resuming 9, 8.)
rttKTDTI
i>3,

is

indeed defensible by Dt. 13,

i,

i.

14, 6.

Ps.

101, 5

al.

(Tenses,
parallels

197.

2)

and

for the

change of gender there are

i

at least

which can be adduced (e.g.

Ki. 19,

see

GK.

i32

d
;

1 P^yi iTV plfcO with Hitzig s note ); but the use of DOJ is i/r. melted away =. diseased, consumptive ?). The Ver very strange (lit.

63, 2

sions

all

express a

synonym
1

of HT33
et

LXX

KOL efovSevw/Ae vov, Pesh.

U^axsao, Targ. no reasonable doubt

"VOU !,

reprobum: and there can in fact be that ^9???) must be restored, either for nnx DE31
Vulg.

or for DJM1 alone (retaining nnN 2 ). Indeed, AV. RV. appear both to have adopted implicitly this emendation; for refuse is no rendering
of DCJ, though
it

obviously

expresses

DND3

(Jer. 6,

30 marg.) or

The

fern,

termination of the
is left

adj.,

once used, can in a

way

operate forwards,

so that the second adj.

2

in the simplest,

most immediate form.

(Luc.), Vulg.,

Which

is

expressed by Pesh. Targ.

LXX

and as

stated

above

is

fully defensible.

XV.
DpSDJ.

9-14

125

The
the
:

omission of the
difficulty.

art.

with the ptcp., after a subst. defined

text as
1

by But

it, is

a further

The

it

stands expresses the sense

despised)
;

all
2

mxta,

being

common

(lit.

and

refuse, they

banned

but this contradicts the context

for some of the

HDN7O

was good, and was spared. The sense demanded by the context, viz. but such of the nSK^D as was common and refuse they banned/
requires
in both.

either the presence of the art. in both cases, or

its

absence

11. 12.

<

nriN] Lex.
.
, ,

30*.
>1|

nN"lp$>

D3K

l]

In thorough analogy with

*]^1,

Hebrew usage
to

(see

on

6,

13).

LXX,

Vulg. express
:

which Th. declares

be a

necessary

insertion

but the renderings of these versions are merely

accommodations
Ct.
7,

to the

idiom of a

different language.

See besides
(referred
to

13 t?KT\zb

n3B>3;

and Ges.

Thes.

p.

I4o6

by We.).
7D"On]

The garden-land

(Is. 10,

18

al.),

the word, like other

proper names with the art. (as njOJil), retaining its appellative force. It was a place in the see v. 48), hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 55
;

mentioned also
rU!ti]

in ch. 25, 2

ff.

now

el-Kurmul, 7 miles S. of Hebron.

without the

suffix, as

16, 11.

But the ptcp.

yyo

is

setting
left

up

does not agree with the sequel (which states that Saul had Carmel) and doubtless ^xn hath set up must be read (so
:

LXX

T]

lit.

hand,

i.e. sign,

monument, trophy of

the victory: II 18, 18.

fcahn TVI]
14. ntn]
is

Cf.

on

10, 8.

See on 14, 29.

The

correction njn

(ZAW.

1895, p. 317)

unnecessary.
1

Vile

(EVV.), unless understood

is

in the

old sense of the word (common,

it is

looked down

upon; Lat. vilis), EVV., and in AV. of Job 40,

too strong, as
Phil. 3, 21.

also in Jer. 15, 19.

Lam.

i,

4.

See the writer

s Jeremiah, p.

362;

Minor
a

Prophets, vol.
t//.

ii

(Nahum
D^JHD

to Malachi), in the

Century Bible,
rise

p. 25.

So

18, 18; 92, 12

vV

D DJ93 against those who

up against me

b 143, 10 H31L5 "Jim thy spirit (being) good; Jer. 2, 2i (but Ez. 24,13; Hag. 1,4 (cf. GK. 126 ). The adj. without the art. forms a species of predicate: cf. on 2, 23. (II 6, 3 b is corrupt : but even were it

(as)

evil doers;

rd.

JSJ);

not

so, the

grammatical rendering

drave the cart, being a

new one
is

consistent with the context, which, in the case of the phrase here, is not the case.)

just

would be what

126
15.
1B>S

The First Book of Samuel,

is
"|K*N]

link,

bringing the clause which

:

it

introduces

into relation with

in that,
(cf.

what precedes
20, 42.
"it5>s

here the relation

is

a causal one,

forasmuch as:
II 2, 5)
:

26, 23

b. Gen. 30, 18. 31, 49. 34, 13

resolved into the expression
22,

on

elsewhere,

may be

of a consequence, so
2 Ki. 9, 37.
1 6.

that, as Gen. 13, 16;

14;

Ki. 3, 12. 13;

Ppn] Dr. Weir thus appositely

14

illustrates the

usage of

this

word

Dt.

9,

DTI3BW JDD

Spit.

c<6.

n,

DW

njnt? 1^ *pn.

^ 24

l6

IT

ejin.

^r.

37, 8 t|ND ppn. 46,

n
;

iyii isin.

n?vn]
v 1"lDN

/A<?

night (that

is

just past)

= last night.
30, 15
etc.
:

Elsewhere always

of the coming night, as Gen. 19, 5

i]

comp. on

14, 34.

Qre

11

ION" ),

a necessary correction.

The

opposite of the

variation noted

on

13, 19.

See Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 120 (eleven

s
"|p>

instances of
Jos. 6,
17.

at the

end of a word

N^l 3T)3 cited

among them
head

7;

9,

7;

Ki. 12, 3. 21; 2 Ki. 14, 13).

little

Though
e.

thou art
?

in thine

own

eyes, art thou not

of the tribes of Israel

over Israel
to
<

(i.

hath anointed thee to be king thou art in a position of authority, and oughtest
<

And Yahweh

have restrained the people). 1 8. nnpinn}] but v. 20 ^Oinn.

In the

gutt,,

pf.

whether the tone

Job

14, 19,
Is.

after waw consec., changed thrown forward by the waw or not so T ?*D but Vn?sni Lev. 23, 30 and often; "wSxn Ex. 16, 32, but

of

and
is

ps. is

to -^-

Hif. of verbs primae

fi"!p

*J?!>3Kni

49, 26

*li?|Pin Is.

45,

i,

but

^Tqrq

Ez. 30, 25

Wj

JjJH

Nu. 20,5, but On OS/Til Ex.

of the tone,
33,
i,
;

13, 19: and, with

no change
Jer. 17,

in the place

T9T3J&
Ex.

Is.

43, 23, but

but rpjjgrn Dt. 27, 6;

^^
;

T^l^l
i

4;

n^gn

Ex.
I St

Ez. 16, 19, but

^^3^
And
right.

58, 14

T^l^n
cf.

9,

1 6,
ii.

but WWjgjTI]

Ch. 17, 14.

so often

elsewhere:
DJ1N

Bottcher,

Dnv3

ny]

380 f. GK. 63. Until they consume them cannot be

15

Either
Pesh.

Dnx *jn&3 ny

(Jer. 9,

= 49,

37) must be read (with

LXX,

DriX must be omitted Targ.), or (with the Vulg.), as having arisen by some confusion out of the preceding DJV. Dni;>3"iy until
(one,

people:

strictly

n|3On- see on
i

16, 4)

idiomatic usage:
19. oypil] for

Ki. 22,

Drri;>3~iy

consume them DnsviX nJ3ri; ^.

72";

is

the

more

18, 38.

DJ?rn

from

my: GK.

Stade,

549^.

Cf.

M,

32

XV.
20.
1B>N]

i$-2}

127

stands as the equivalent of 3, after

7.
i

n&n

18, 15; after

yT
II

Ex. n,
jP3B>n

Ez. 20, 26 (unusually in Ezek.

Ki. 22, 16;

see Hitz.).
(2,

Qoh.
as

8,

12;

after
r,

and

^3

recitativum
1
.

16),

here,

(cf. 2, 4).

Neh.

4, 6

(most probably)

Cf.

GK.

157.
Is.

22.
1 1
i]/.

3^pr6] The
8, 8.

inf.
2.

cstr.

with ?, as the subj., as

10, 7

b
;

-an

rvai

9; Qoh. 7, rrano (contr.

5; Pr. 21, 9

DPND

23

fWB ^y H3B6

3113

25, 24).

23.

no]

oftenest in Ezek. (2, 5 etc. iron

no

JV3

a).

Is.

30, 9

Kin

no

oy. Nu. 17, 25

no

^n. Dt. 31, 27 ntppn nsnynsi

apparently what

TIDVIK
and

(Dr. Weir).
f)N]

The fundamental
and
i//-.

idea of fJN

is

is

valueless

disappointing:

it

denotes, according to the context, (i) calamity ,

misfortune (as

55, 4.

Am.

5,

5); (2) naught-y conduct, naughtiness,

a term of disparagement for wickedness, as |1X "6ya i^. 5, 6 and often ; and (3) wordlessness, a thing of nought, esp. an idol, as Is. 66, 3 he
that burneth incense
idol ;
cf.

is

no

better than

J.1.N

"sp^O

he that blesseth an
(see

Zech. 10, 2

the teraphim )1X

;

1*m

speak worthlessness
p.

further Z^jc.

i9^-2o

Parallel Psalter, Glossary,

449^).

Idols

and teraphim,
unequal pair
D^DTTi
this.
}is? ;
;

the general

and the
rj

particular,

form, however, an

Symm.

has

dvo/ua TWV etSwAwv, which points to

right in reading

and Klo. Sm. Bu. Now. Ehrl. are probably

l6

D Qin] 19,
20.

13-

Gen. 31,

19. 34. 35. Jud. 17, 5.

3, 4.

18, 14. 17. 18.

2 Ki. 23, 24.

Ez. 21, 26. Hos.

"l^SH,

Zech. 10, 2f.

nvsn] in pause for

3$J},
7,

as constantly in verbal forms, as

in nouns, as

^*1,
Is.

^pn
for

(Is.

1 8,

5), etc.,

and occasionally
7),

^^f?

!?N3B
5,

c f. (
i

Ezr. 4,

W$
(v. 37,
is

Jer.

22,

14, I^SD Ob. 20, i&K

Zech. 14,
Stade,

:^K
a
,

Ch.

8,

38

out of pause, bxN):

inf.
1

Ew.

93*,

io7

GK.
:

291.
"l^fO

"i?ran

the abs.

Hif. almost with the

force of a subst.

cf.

Is.

14, 23, Bp.^L

32, 17, [Dfa

Job

6, 25,
is

b^pn
in

25, 2

(Ew.

156).
;

The

form, with a substantival force,

l
("

rare
in

Biblical

Hebrew

but one nearly the same

i??L))

is

common

In late

Hebrew
"IB

Qoh. 5, 4 ...

quod with greater frequency Dan. r, 8 bis, and especially in Est. N 31D (contrast Ru. 2, 22 7, 29. 9, i
"IC^X

appears as

"3).

Neh. (passim}.

128
the

The First Book of Samuel,

Mishnah
:

Siegfried

and Strack, Lehrbuch der Neuhebrdischen

Sprache (1884),

55^.

The word
2 Ki. 2, 17.

is,

however, a suspicious one.

9),

"1X3

is

to

push or press
3.

upon (Gen. 19,

5,

or to urge by persuasion (Gen. 19,

in

33,
:

u.
if

6); and does not occur elsewhere

to display

the Hif.
Hif.,

correct,

IVSH can mean only

i-

pushing (the internal

GK.
this

53

d
)

e
->

the

n
f->

forwardness, presumption (not

stubbornness,
;

EVV.).
is

Klo. suggests PI fsn evil desire, which Bu. adopts

but

a poor parallel to

1DN0

1|

l]

in
cf.

HD, and cannot be said to be satisfactory. Hos. 4, 6 edd. (but answer to O, as v. 26.

Baer,

Gi. Kitt. });

Nm

14, 16.

Is.

45, 4.

48, 5

al.

Tenses,

127 y;

GK.

nih
from king

J^OC]
,

from being king

in 8, 7.

cf.

the fuller form in

rn.D
1

26 b and the alternative

D y? J5) *328.
ri ^1
.!

^BO
-

16,

i.

So iTVaSD

Ki.

Is

7>

8 etc (Lex. 583*

irotao]
)

The

usual

word

is

towards the bottom). (3), but the form Htt^DO (from nablpO
:

[TjpDO]

occurs besides II 16,

Cf.

3.

Hos.

i, 4.

Jer. 26, i. Jos.

13, 12.
.

JTONbn Hag. i, 13+ from ^XpO; Stade, 3046 1 We., observing that the form never occurs in the absolute state,
21. 27. 30. 3if.

questions the originality of the pronunciation expressed by the plena

scriptio,

and would

TviJE]
to

from

off thee

restore everywhere : i Ki. 1 1, i i b in the

,

J"DpE>D.

same expression

(applied

Solomon).
29.

For the

figure, cf. 7J? Is. 9, 5,

btOK

n^j] Probably//^ Glory of Israel.

The root
in

only in certain derivatives in

related
is

Hebrew

the

manner
HY3 in

nV3 appears which they are

is

apparent

only in

Aramaic.

Syriac

properly

splenduit,

hence the
Qat),

Pe al

= Heb.

= Aa/wi-pos Apoc. 22, 16; but in the adj. JH1T and more especially in the Ethpa el, it usually
inclaruit,

appears with the derived sense of

victoriam adeptus fuit, triumphavit
\LL-j
(cf.

cehbris evasit,
:

and so

Dan.

6, 4)

similarly the subst.

= victory
n3
On

(e.g.

Jud.

15,
7,

= nyit?n),
T
"no

and

the

corresponding

s:riw in the Targg., as Jud.

the

18 pyi:

by

wnwi

and

victory

by

hands of Gideon;

\\i.

35, 23 iJnw

the lord of

my

victory

In Heb.

has certainly a sense allied to this in the late passages,

forms

in

HV,

see

GK.

86 k , 95*

more

fully

Kon.

ii.

204-6.

XV.
Lam.
3,

21-J2
is

129
doubtless

18

Ch. 29,

u *;

and the expression here used

intended to characterize

Yahweh

as the Glory or Splendour of Israel.

Similarly the Versions, but leaning

somewhat unduly

to the special

(and derived) sense of victory

0r

Pesh.

^.Uaa-i?

_>

<*

the Illustrious
the lord of

Triumphant one of

Israel; Targ.

^NT^H

.TOinVJ

no

Triumphator (no doubt from Aq. or Symm., so Rashi though their renderings have not been here preserved) AV. (from Kimchi Droi Dpm) strength: but this ^-IB" *?W 1J1HV3.
Israel s victory; Vulg.
:

sense rests upon no philological foundation, and is merely conjectured from some of the passages in which n3 occurs, and where such a Ges. Ke. rendering would satisfy a superficial view of the context.

render fiducia, comparing

sincerity

^lo purus,
9,

sincerus, fidelis

fuit (used of
toward men,
is

towards God,

Qor.

92,
if

or

well-wishing

28, ii. 19).

sufficiently

But

it

is

doubtful

this

sense of the Arabic root

the definite

pronounced and
Cf.

original to justify

sense of

confidence being attached to the

DrUfli>

Hebrew n3
23, 19.

2
.

Nin DIN

K^a]

Nu.

Contrast here vv.

n. 35:
is

as

Le

Clerc (quoted by Th.) remarked long ago, the narrative

av$pa>7T07ra0u>s,

expressed

the prophecy #07r/37rws.

32. DJiyD]

An

(implicit) accus.

defining

the
cf.

manner

in

which

Agag advanced,
(12, rial.),

i.e.

an adverbial accusative:
"WO

nt33 in confidence

D Htyo,

in uprightness (poet.): other

examples
(a)

in

Ew.

279, GK.

1 1 85.

The
is

sense, however,
cf.

is

not certain,
voluptuous,
II
i,

The

most obvious rendering

voluptuously:
8.

""lyij?

given to

pleasures/ LXX rpv&pa, Is. 47, LXX xei/xappous r7S T^y

i>m

Tpv(j>rj<;

tnnj| By trov. Neh.

"OB*

24. ^. 36, 9

9,

25

The

sense of the root in

Am.
TW

i, ii. 8, 7. Jer. 3, 5.

D3?3C9 Hab.
vtKoiroty,

3,

Aram, explains LXX t is VIKOS for nX3f in II 2, 26. ?) 20 (cf. Hab. i, 4 RV. m.~), and rov vitcrjacu for 5, 19; and the rend, of Hi Jtp? in the Psalms (4, i etc.) by Aq.

Lam.

and by

Symm.

tirivimos

also of

LXX

Karfiriev 6 Oavaros icrxvo-as for

tls VIKOS,
I

l"l3/

DlJOn

y?3

in Is. 25, 8
tis

(Theod.

KareiroOij o
rofJ

Oavaros

exactly as

Cor.

VIKOS\ and Kanffxtovaiv pov in Jer. 15, 18 for

J
5>

54! Aq. also

LXX

tviaxvaai for ri2?3? in

Ch. 15, 21, and

I"llf3.

Dl?3 in Is. 63, 3. 6 is a different

word altogether (though

to
^j>

identified

by Kimchi,

AV.), being connected with the Arab.

sprinkle; see Ges. Thes.; Lex. 664.

1365

130

The First Book of Samuel,

KOL
.

LXX
(f>)

1 So Targ. 2 Aq. (a-n-o rpix^eptas, i.e. irpv^aav Symm. (a/3pos), We. But this is not probable in view of the

context.

Others compare Job 38,31, which can scarcely be explained otherwise than by metathesis from nnJJTO bands: hence, here, in So Kimchi. (c] LXX render rpi^v, whence Lagarde very fetters.
niinx?p in
cleverly, merely by a change of punctuation, suggests JVinyp (of the same form as rVjnhX backwards, H^lhp mourningly}, totteringly (GK.

IOOK).

So Sm. Now. Dh. Ehrlich, probably

"id
"ID

rightly.

niDn
as

px] pK
D1pD2

in

Gen.

28, 16 ntn

^ W p;
which

an exclamation, with asseverative Ex. 2, 14 "inn JHU pK.

is

force,
It is

a stronger
(see
1 6, 6).

word than

f[X,

also used

somewhat

similarly

ID] a
feeling

subst. bitterness, as Is. 38, 15

^QJ ID
;

by.

ID

is

departed,

gone by, as

Am.
is

6, 7

DTTHD nno
s
!

"1D1

and

Is.

n,

13 of a state of

(nwp).

LXX,
bitter

Pesh. omit ID, expressing merely the platitude,

(In

Surely death

LXX

et

ourw implies the misreading

of

pN
33.

as |3n.)

D^JD] Jud.
Only
Pesh.
nt^S;

5, 24.

5|D^^l]

here.

Aq. Symm. SieWao-ev, Vulg.

in

frusta

concidit,

Targ.

LXX

more generally

eo-^a^ev.

Of
:

the general

sense intended by the narrator there can be no doubt

the

but whether

word used by him has been

Etymologically
in
f)DtJ>

correctly

handed down may be

:

questioned.
fidit

stands

isolated

the Syriac

)l?B

(Roed.

Thes.} does not correspond phonetically.

Should we

read

BB|

(Jud. 14, 6al.)?

cf. v.

34. r6y] from Gilgal:

12 IT.

The D^rij referred to in this chapter, is well explained by Ewald in his 4 The word itself is derived Antiquities of Israel, pp. 101-106 [E. T. 75-78]
.

Comp. DTIJJD dainties Gen. 49, 20. Lam. 4,5 NpJSD (see Dt. 28, 54 Onq.). Hilari animo
is

(Ge.

Ew. Ke.)

gives the

word

a turn which
\et

foreign to the root from

is

which

it

is

derived.

Vulg. pinguissimus

tremens of the Clementine text

a doublet, derived from the

Old Latin, and

^ID D^3

omitted by all the best MSS.] is based probably on Symm. affpos. s Targ. NJT1E THD ij-on iy22 takes it as =lt?; cf. Jer. 6, 28

DmiD

jmo
*
;

l|

fin

a"D-|

^
s

(Aptowitzer, II, p. 28).

See also the

art.

Bann

in

Riehm

s
f.

(1893)

Dillmann

note on Lev. 27, 28

Handworterbuch and EB. BAN

;

des Bibel. Altertumt*

DB. CURSE.

XV.
from a root which
the
in

12-14
shut
off,

I3 1
separate, prohibit

Arabic means

to

whence
("".)>

haram

or sacred territory of the

Temple

the of Mecca, and the harim ( o^.),

.

secluded apartment of the women, applied also to its occupants, i.e. the harem 1 In Israel, as in Moab, the term was used of separation or consecration to a deity. Mesha in his Inscription (11. 14-18 2) states how, on the occasion of his carrying

away the vessels of Yahweh from Nebo, and presenting them before his god Chemosh, he devoted 7000 Israelite prisoners to Ashtor-Chemosh. Among the Hebrews, the usage was utilized so as to harmonize with the principles of their It became a mode of secluding and rendering religion, and to satisfy its needs.
harmless anything which peculiarly imperilled the religious life of either an individual or the community, such objects being withdrawn from society at large

and presented
destruction.

to the sanctuary,

which had power,

if

needful, to authorize their

The term

occurs

first in

the old collection of laws called

The Book
More com

of the Covenant

(Ex. 20, 23

ch. 23),

who was disloyal to Yahweh (H3^ monly we read of its being put in
Israel
:

^ T^S Dim DTI^

Ex. 22, 19 with reference to the Israelite

Hat)
3
.

force against those outside the

community of

repeatedly prescribed in Deuteronomy that the cities and religious symbols of the Canaanites are to be thus devoted to the ban ; and the spoil of a 1 heathen city was similarly treated, the whole or a part being devoted or banned*
thus
it is

according to the gravity of the occasion (Dt. 7, 2. 25f. 20, 16-18). Instances of the Din, as exemplified historically, are recorded in Nu. 21, 2f. (after a vow ). Dt. 2,34. 3,6. Jos. 6, 17-19(1116 whole spoil was here made herem or devoted: a part of this

herem was afterwards secreted by Achan, as it was reserved by Saul on the occasion to which the present chapter refers). 8, 2. 26 al. Here, it is put in force, excep
tionally, against an external political

enemy of
19, 24.

Israel 4 .

1D^
it

&l] But
softens

see
this

AV.

departs from

its

usual
that

fidelity
"

when

absolute

statement,
130).

and

writes

Samuel came no more

to see

Saul"

(OTJC?

Also

lITa.

haram, sanctuary

(as

in the title

Haram
of the

es-Sherif,

or

Noble
on

Sanctuary, applied to the area enclosing the

Dome

Rock

at Jerusalem,
(first)

which the Temple formerly stood)

of the Arabs, in which
2 it

and

l^.sr*

muliarram, the sacred

month

was forbidden
in the

to carry on war.

Quoted and translated

Appendix to the Introduction.

destroy

Comp. Dt. 13, 13-18 (the idolatrous city in Israel). In AV. the verb DHnn is generally rendered utterly
accursed thing;

and the

subst.

but these terms both express secondary ideas, besides in RV. having the disadvantage of being apparently unrelated to each other by the uniform use of devote and devoted thing, in the margin, if not in the text
:

Din

(for

Heb. devote, has been retained in the text utterly destroy, with marg. where the reference was to persons ], the idea attaching to the Hebrew is more clearly expressed, and the connexion between the different passages in which the word occurs is preserved.

K 2

132

The First Book of Samuel,

David
Samuel

16, 1-13.
16,
i.

anointed by

at Bethlehem,

VTIDKD

*JKl]

a circumst.

clause =

when / have

rejected

him

Tenses,

160.
like

onSvn a]

^Btprnvi,
8.

etc.; see

on

6,

14.

h
2.

TPJO] Gen. 22,

\3nni htftr yoan] II 12, 18 would support the construction that

treated these
p. 130),
(ib.

words as under the government of 115, (Tenses, though they might in themselves be construed independently 149 GK. 159-: Gen. 44, 22 n1 yQKTlN ITjn).
"pN

nfcO
Jos. 2,
3.

ra^>]

Note the order: Gen. 42,

;

9.

47, 4.

Nu. 22,

20.

3; Jud. 15, 10

ch. 17, 25.

28 b

H2n] Read rsb,

as

z;.

b
.

*3JX1]

Note the emph. pronoun.

-ICTK]
;

T^N ION
43, 27
4.
;

ION

/<?

aw,

designate, as

Gen. 22,

2b

9.

26, 2

II 6, 22
.

2 Ki. 6, 10.

inKIp?
l]

v "1DN

sc.

"I?

Kn

Ilin^] See on 6, 13; and cf. 21, 4. When the verb appears in Heb. without a subject
.

expressed, the implicit subject

is

not one, as in English or French

but the cognate participle

fact

~>Kn.

The

explanation

is

confirmed by the
is

that

cases

occur in which the cognate participle

expressed, Dt. 17, 6

II 17, 9 y&?n yoBn. non 22, 8 ^ain fa. Is. 28, 4 nnx nxnn run* ne N. Ez. 18, 32 nnn nioa. 33, 4 yoen 7 ai NX* it^x xxvn with an zW^ i?ip nx yoiK n; cf. Jud. n, 31 The idiom is already ptcp. Nu. 6, 9 V^y no mis ^l. Am. 9, i.
">DiK>n

m\
1

actually

rightly explained
e. g.

1 by the mediaeval Jewish grammarians, as Ibn Ezra

on Gen. 48,

i
11

ejDI"

lON O

(the stock example of the idiom)

1

sc.

~?Nn; is. 8, 4 xt? sc. NK an; Am. 6, 12 onpan E nn ON sc. and constantly; Kimchi on i Ki. 22, 38 ! 1C3 PjOlK
11

"IDX

P|Dvi>

Comp. Ew.

294
.

(2); Hitzig

on Am.
thirty

3,

TT)iti

namely,

GK.

i44

However, some

MSS.

read here

Who, however, is apt to extend unduly the principle involved. Comp. Friedlander, Essays on the Writings of Ibn Ezra, p. 134 W. Bacher, Abraham Ibn Esra als Grammatiker (Strassburg, 1882), p. 143".
:

And

similarly with the plural, as Is.

2,

20 1^

J?

T^N

sc.

voice

__
XVI.
i- 7
*]N12 D^C?]
(cf.

133

The

interrogation being indicated

So, with the

on n,
1

12).

(vv. ii. 17.

8.

22

DvB>n).

by the tone of the same word, II 18, 29. 2 Ki. 9, 19 There is no occasion, with Gratz, Die
(as cited in

Psalmen,

p. 116,

and H. G. Mitchell
Is thy

GK.
25, 6

i5o

a
no/e),

to restore Hin

Lit.

preference to the adj.

coming peace So peaceable.

f
i

the subst. peace being used

often,

as

Dl^

nnsi

D1^ inui;

Gen. 43, 27

TUX D1^n;
Tenses,
2).

Ki.

2,

13 Iga D^tiM.

On

the principle involved

see
5,

189,

GK.

141; and comp.

Cf.

Delitzsch s note
5.

on Job

24 (ed.

IBnpnn]

viz.
i, 5.

by lustrations (Ex. 19,

14).

Ex. 19,

10. 22.

Jos. 3, 5.

Job

ran

TIN

Dnwi]

LXX

4 n express Di

onnfci.

MT.

is

regarded
as

by We. Bu. Sm. Now., as an explanation of this, which they prefer, being more original, and less tautologous with the following
6.
"]N]

So

often, in

an exclamation,

to

add force
:

to the expression
;

of a conviction (not necessarily a true one)

20, 39
7.
;

ch. 25,

21

Jer. 10, 19

if/.

58, 12.

Gen. 44, 28 62, 10 al.

Jud. 3, 24.

?2?]

Taken
cf.

usually
P"I3

(GK.

132)

as a neuter adj., with the force

st. c .

of a subst.:

Ex. 15, 16.

But the
c.

of

^a

is

four times

^?3; so

it

is

prob. intended as an inf.

in

doubt

H^ll,

and

Ex.

15,

?~fi,

(Kon. iii. 578; should be read.

Ehrl.).

No

DINn PINT
must have

"lt?N]

LXX

expresses in addition

DT&Nn

HN~1\ which
restored;
i/r.

fallen

out accidentally.

For

"ttJ

~)K>N,

Sa must be
(Jer.

the passages in which

J

I^N may

be rendered aj

48,8.

106,

34

are not parallel in form to the one here.

;

D^y^l py in the sing, means look, appearance, Lev. 13, 55. Nu. n, 7 but the dual seems so unsuitable to express this idea that in Lev. 13, 5. 37 iJ^VS must almost certainly be read for V^JD Klo. ^sk Bu. DTJ? HtHpi) according
.

DTV

which the eyes behold (Is. 11,3. Dt. 28, 34 cf. 1HN1D ^N 1330 i?N just This does seem to be the sense the contrast between inner and outer is before).
to /Afl/
;

expressed not directly (^looketh at the

in

appearance"

*),

but indirectly.

For the pathah

$,

see

GK.

35".

1 Where T^K is properly that which, and may be so rendered. But the writer In cannot have intended here to say that God seeth not that which man seeth
!

Dt. 15, 14 read {O for ~lt?N a 3 has dropped out after the preceding 3. In Is. 54,9. Jer. 33, 22 the construction is doubtful but the sense that which, as b the direct object of a verb, is excluded by the following }3 (cf. Lex. 83 ).
"1

134
9.

The First Book of Samuel,

noc ] So
17, 131-;

nyep

II 13, 3. 321-;

NVDP

Ch.

2, 13.

20, 7

11 21, 21

Qret;

^yttfc?

II 21, 21 Kt.t

11. JBpn] with a superlative force:

GK.

1338.

rum] without the

precedes
:

suffix,

as

the subject referred to immediately

cf.

15, 12.

30, 3. 16.

SCO] usually explained as

Dr. Weir writes
:

meaning
/*./

Gen. 37, 15 and on to sit round the

:

10,

n.

table or divan.

LXX

ov

KaraKXiOw^cv, Vulg. non discumbemus,

is

Targ.
/r.

">nriD3

surround, which

used
rQK>

in the

Targ. of
in the

sitting at
ch.

meat,
20, 5.
Syr.

i,

i.

26, 4. 5.

Gen. 27, 18

=
it

[and

Afel,

24. 25].

In
JJ

all

these passages

corresponds to the Heb. 2C*.

is

.*CL9o/

will not return.

2DD

nowhere

else

used

in the sense

supposed.

the Hif. (3pn) in post-Bibl.

reclining)

However, 23D is used in Perhaps we might read 2Kb. Heb. (e.g. Pesahim 10, i) of sitting (or
table at a

round a

meal
this
:

(cf.

also

3pp Q.
earlier.
is

i,

12); and the

word may
12.

have been used in

1

sense

much

D^y

HD"

Dy] So 17, 42
It is

but the expression

very remarkable

and anomalous.

contrary to usage or analogy for Dy to be used

with an adverbial force (Ew.

text

352;

Keil;

AV.

withal ):
v. 7
:

if

the

be sound, HD^ must be a neuter adj., like D33 in Gratz suggests D^J? (17, 56) with beauty of eyes.

together

for

Dy: so also

Max

Krenkel

in the

ZATW.
S

1882,

p.

309.
end,

Sm. Now. agree.

93
Z.

""lO]

in pause for

N^

GK.

2 9m
:

Elsewhere in
26, 7. II

this
2.

connexion HN*1O (n)210

16, 14-23.

is

said (Sm.)

Gen. 24,

16.

n,

First account of
into attendance
fits

David s
upon

introduction to Saul.

David
made

is

brought

the king for the purpose

of soothing
is

him, during his

armour-bearer.
14. inny2l]

of madness, by

his minstrelsy,

and

his

The
f.

pf.

with

waw
1
,

conv. (not simple

waw)

with a freq.

force (cf. 15 end, the ptcp.).

The word

(which

is

a strong one) occurs

only here and

chiefly the
"

15 in prose
of Job.

being elsewhere confined to poetry

Book

nn]
D^n^N

^
as

nn

as
spirit.

good

nn

evil

nNO nn or spirit is opposed to This distinction is strictly maintained in

is

Except the Nif., which

found

in late

Hebrew

(thrice).

XVI.
MT.
i
1
:

9-20

only

19, 9

would form an exception, but there DM^X HT1

should doubtless be read with

5
.

LXX

for

nn

(We.).

inyatp]
31

GK.

80?.
lord,

6.

IDN^J

Let our
etc.

thee, let

them seek,

now, command, thy servants are before There seems to be some disorder in the
of the

sentence.
concealed in

The roughness and abruptness

RV.)
is

Heb. (which

is

extreme

LXX,

in far better accord with

:

the
1

usual form of a
(so

Hebrew

^ period, express itfjpl T?.?

1

TO2 NrnON
1
"

We. Sm. Now.).

c);

4. i

and

1331X, inserted as

T1DN was probably originally IDN (see Introd. an expression of courtesy which was
to be taken as a vocative
:

desiderated,

was intended
it

but

lew

being

ambiguous,
11

was taken
of

actually as a nom.,
fixed.

and so the pronunciation

"iDN,

"ION

(in

lieu

^^)

became

But as
if

to say, requires to
this,

be followed by the words said,

for

we must,

we adopt

read T13*V

HEN

1
"

(cf.

II 14, 12).

Or, following a suggestion of Ehrlich,

we

might read T3ab IDjn 11333 |33D

31

yT

B>N

T13V

ti?p3* 1331N

WIDK*
(cf.

iTHI (cf.
"11333

Ki.

i, 2).

J33JD

JTP]

knowing, as a player with the harp

case of the
principle

Ew.

285).

particular

by

which, in

Hebrew

syntax, one verb appears as supplementing or completing the sense

of another (on
v.
cf.

2,

3).

18:
i

cf.

Ki.

3, 7.

Is. 7,

But perhaps the inf. J33 should be read, as For JTP, as denoting technical skill, 15.
5,

Ki.
Is.

9,

27

DM T1V, Am.
n.

16 M3 ijnV,

Ch. 12, 32 n3 3
1|

TIV

DTIJ^,

29,

VTQ |33l] To specify in detail the instrument or means by which an action takes place, even though to our mode of thought it may LXX H1333 is anything but appear superfluous, is very Hebraic
:

an improvement.
K

See

v. 23.

18, 10.

19,

9;

also

such phrases as

N3

etc.
epB>,

17.
1 8.

J33^

DB]

Ez. 33, 32

|3J

30ttt; Is. 23,

|33

^Bn.

i^
J133]

}3]

a son of Jesse:

see

GK.

129.

i?Ti
"OT

1133] See

on

g, i.

LXX
5

cro</>os

Xoyw, Vulg. prudentem in verbis,

in speech, fluent,
is

i.

e.

clever,
4, 10.)

capable

in speech.

(Ready

D nai

B"N

Ex.

Cf. Is. 3, 3

1?r6 fi33 clever in enchantment.

If the text

20.

Dr6 lion]

be correct, this

will

mean an

ass laden

136
with bread.

The First Book of Samuel,

But the expression an ass of bread is peculiar ; and Df6 is regularly numbered (by loaves), it is quite that Tien is a corruption of or mc?y LXX yo/j-op, i. e. possible
as

elsewhere

iiB>cn

1
"lEy

favours the

latter.

21.

OB7

"toy]

To

stand before/ said of a single occasion,

is

equiva
:

lent to to

present oneself before

Lex. 763^ bottom): when

force of
note.
22.

(Gen. 41, 46. 43, 15. Ex. 9, loal. used of a constant relation, it acquires the
;

stand before so as to be in attendance on

see the next

^sb in NJ

dance upon one, or, as

i,
1

2;

10, 8

*)& toy is an idiom denoting to be in we should naturally say, to wait upon of Solomon s courtiers (cf. 12, 8. Jer. 52, 12): ib.

Ty]

atten
i

Ki.
i.

17,

8, 15.

2 Ki. 3, 14.

5,

6 of Elijah

and Elisha as the ministers of

FofloXm

See Ex. 16, 36

=-

LXX

so To6oviT)\

N^ny,

Topoppa
14, 2 al.)

moy,
"iyiX,

Zoyopa (Gen. 13, 10), Zoyop

Feu or (Gen. 12,8) Af-fcu

(Jer.

= .TTiy, Fofa = HTy, 48 [31], 34), or ^tjyaip (Gen.

PayovqX = ^Niyi To<ptpa Tl^y (Gen. 4, 18), re(fap 46.47], Is. 60,6) add Gen.
,

"liyB ,

BeX<J>7<up

= ~nyD~^ya,
n,
18.

Xo8oXX<>7o^o/>

iyn (Ai), FcuflaX = ^Ty, and 0X70 = "Idy^TlD and

iyi,

(Gen. 14, i), Pcryav (Gen.

Luke
i

3,

35)

and

27aX =
Tai(f>a)

may

and

^yiE>

(rA. 13, 17), TatSaS

(Taipfp,

= HD^y
i,

(Gen. 25, 4.

Ch.

i,

33

[cf. 2,

36, 2

pynv Zffc-Yw,
(so
I

Ch.

1*7X0^, 23 46), 40 iT^y rcuXa ; Nu.

14

D^y

}$y rwx^, ^n^y rai^x,

i,

35 n^iy
"QJ

"lyw

2^7a/)

33, 35
;

al.

(rafftcor)

TafStp,

Ma7apa)^
[i

19, II

Jos. 15, 59 44.45 (D)^y Tm, 46 flO^y rtX/iaiJ 12 yS 4>a77a, 21, 1 8 pE^y Ta^aXa il^yiD Mapa-ff\8a
;

Ch.

6,

45 (60)
I

n^y raX/xefl]
Asa
i,

16, 28 Fa/Sotifa (of

2

Ki. 5, II (4, 27) f^N TatOav (JH^ or JH^ ?) mother !"Q!Ty in an addition to MT. not with F 22, 42.
;

Ch. 20. 31)

z*.

Ch.

HOy")

Ptyna
;

2,

I7aj8;s (also ws 70/377$ for

3^3)

4, 14

may

47 f\y& 20706 (Al. ^070^) r <^pa; 9, 4 ^Hiy Fw^et

4,
;

42

Fa/teXt^;

rapa.0a.i69i.

HlCiy TafawO (but not so 8,36. 12,3. 27,25); 11,32 In Arabic, the soft and hard sounds of y are distinguished by a in Hebrew, though no such sign has been adopted, it is diacritical point ( ) ,
:

clear,

from the transliteration of

LXX,

that

y had

in

some words a harder and

63). See further on this subject stronger sound than in others (comp. Stade, the studies of Ruzifika in Z. fur Ass. xxi (1908), p. 293 ff., and Flasher in

ZAW.

of all proper names transliterations (but his readings are based in the OT. containing y, with their on the text of Tisch., which sometimes differs from that of Swete 2 , which is based
xxviii (1908), pp.

194 ff., 303

ff.

RfiziCka purports to give

lists

LXX

(for cod.

B) on the photograph published

names occurring in Genesis. happens that 7 represents y

root) in Arabic has

in 1890) ; Flasher s lists are limited to the Neither perhaps explains quite satisfactorily how it

in many words in which the corresponding word C (Ru2i6ka, p. 302, cf. 339 f.). p, and not

(or

XVI.
Yahweh
29, ii
:

2i

XVII. i

137

elsewhere

it

is

dance upon Yahweh, Dt. 10,

;

applied technically to the priest as in atten 8. 18, 7. Jud. 20, 28. Ez. 44, 15. 2 Ch.

and

to the Levite as in attendance

e. g. i Ch. 9, 27-9. See more fully the Ch. 35, n), Nu. 1 6, 9. Ez. 44, n. 1 It is a pity that in passages such writer s note on Dt. 10, 8 (p. I23) Heb. stand wait upon as Nu. 16, 9. Dt. 10, 8 to (with a marg.

the people, to discharge menial duties for

upon them (see

the congregation or

31-2.

before

has not been adopted in

EVV.

it

may

be doubted whether

many English
tion

readers understand what to

stand before the congrega

means.

23. Notice the series of perfects with

waw
\>

conv. expressing what

happened
in

habitually,
;

and represented
Targ. Pesh.
a verb,
to
2

rightly in the
).

Versions

(impflf.

LXX,
"b

Vulg.

ptcpp. in

niTl as
to

Job

32, 2of.
:

31m] In b 110, 21B

is

be good

==

be well with

Nu.

n,

8.

Dt.

5,

30

al.

njpn im] njnn is an adj. (not a (i) from the analogy of 15^. 16k; ( 2 )
used as a qualifying genitive.
conception of the njn ITO,
17,
i

subst. in the gen.) as

from the fact that

appears
is

njnn

not

Comp. above, on

12, 23.

For the

cf.

Jud. 9, 23.
to

18,

5.

Second account of David s introduction

Saul.

David,

a shepherd youth

from

Bethlehem, attracts the king s attention by

his victory in single combat over Goliath.

17,

i.

roi
B>]

One
hills

of the towns in the

Shephelah
ft.),

(Jos.

15, 35),

generally identified with

esh-Shuweikeh (1145

on the N. slope of
of Bethlehem.
It is

a range of low

running E. and W., 14 miles

(v.
it

W.

The

Vale of Elah

2)
is

is

immediately below

it,

on the N.

(Bu.)

and roads leading up to Hebron, Bethlehem, and elsewhere; the large PEF. Map marks a Roman road leading up to Bethlehem. LXX have 2ox w ^ The pi. may be original ;
strategically important, as

close to a

number of

valleys

1 Dr. Orr (Frobl. of the OT. p. 192) seeks to shew that to stand before Yahweh does not denote distinctively priestly functions. But it is idle to argue that to stand before Yahweh means nothing more than to stand ; and in 2 Ch. 29, 1 1 the last word D^ltOpDI shews that the writer has priests (v. 4) in his mind for to
;

burn incense was an exclusively priestly duty. See the thorough examination of the idiom in McNeile, Deuteronomy, its Place in Revelation, 1912, p. 74 ff. 8 Cf. the same versions in i, 3. 7, 16. Ex. 33, 8-10 al. (Tenses, p. 146).

138
for

The First Book of Samuel,

(We.) Eus. (Onom. 292, 32-4) says that there were two villages of this name, an upper and a lower, 9 miles above Eleutheropolis (which agrees fairly with the

NE. of Eleutheropolis). 1900, p. 97 f.) doubts this site, as it shews no signs of pottery earlier than Roman times and suggests Tell Zakariya (so called from a wely
site of

esh-Shuweikeh, 7 miles

Bliss

(PEFS.

dedicated to the father of John the Baptist), 3 miles below esh-Shuweikeh, on the same side of the Wady, where an Isr. fortress has been excavated (ib. 1899, pp. 10-36, 89-98), supposing the old

name

to

have been transferred to esh-

Shuweikeh.
Cf.
T
3>

Ki. 19, 3;
:

Ki. 14,

n
~)

(of Beersheba);
i

Ch.

6 (of Qiryath-ye arim)

ib.

also

DTW^s!?
19, 14

Ki. 15, 27.

16, 15;
4.

17, 9: Jud. 18, 28.

pn\Q^>

T^N

njnjn. 20,

Mentioned next to Sochoh

strong city (Jer. 34,
7.

in Jos.

Ch.

n,

9).

15,35; an important The site is not known: Tell

G. A. Smith
21),
s

Zakariya (confused by Bartholomew village Zakariya opposite: see Rob.

Tell Zakariya), and other
sites,

in
ii.

Maps

with the

Askalun

(i mile S. of

have been conjecturally suggested. D EI DSS] A place, not identified, between Sochoh and Azekah. The name, though peculiar, is supported by i Ch. n, 13 (the parallel
;

to II 23, 9

see note there) D

o-a<ap/Aeu/,

WDS. LXX
etc.,

(B) has E^)p/A/z,, other

MSS.
Aq.

cre</>ep/Ltaei/A,

which, however, lead to nothing.

lv Trepan Ao/^ei/x agrees with

MT.
i

(for

Wpas
13,

D2N

in Aq., see

Is. 5, 8.

52, 10 ah).

In view of

Ch.

n,

and of there being no

support from Aquila, D^IDH 13y3

the

stream running (Kitt.), of the

down

Wady,

is

a very doubtful emendation.

n^NH poy] The Vale of the Terebinth (v. 19. 21, iot), the broad depression between hills (on 6, 13), formed by the junction of two valleys, from the S. and E., which unite on the E. of esh2.

Shuweikeh
of Acacias

the valley then narrows to form W. es-Sant (the

Wady
into the

),

which afterwards runs down westwards, past the shining

6,
1

white rock of Tell es-Safiyeh, very probably Gath (on

Philistine plain (see further

7),

EB.
3.

Cheyne, Devout Study of Criticism, 85 f. ; s. v. ELAH and Photograph No. 443 of the Pal. Expl. Fund). The ravine is DnT3 N^ni] with the ravine between them.
;

probably the deep and narrow gorge cut out by the stream running down the vale on the N. of esh-Shuweikeh, mentioned in the note on
v.

(H. G. 227

f. ;

Conder, Tent Work, 279).

The

ptcpp. describe the continuous position of the parties during

XVII. i-7
the incidents about to be related.

139
would be on one of

The

Israelites

the

hills

NE. of esh-Shuweikeh, on
B^K]
i.

the opposite side of the poy.

4.

D"03n

e.

the

man

of the ^Tai-^Lov,

who came forward

:
1

as

the

fif<riTt]s

to bring the warfare to a close.

Kimchi

NVT nYlB* *s?

n^an B^N JOPJ rnanyen TIB* pa DV nv *. rivJ] The same fern, termination occurs
:

in

other

old

Semitic

rfln*? (m.) Gen. 26, 26 (mostly Canaanitish) names (Philistine) ; rntoa (^. 9 i), ruua (i Ki. n, 20 perhaps (f.), rfep (f.), and in Nabataean, Euting, Edomite), nnj and nn:o Gen. 36, 13. 23
npfe>s

Nabataische Inschriften, pp. 73,

90-2, as
(m.),
.

nmn (=

A/oeras 2 Cor.

n,

32),

man

(m.),

nsna

(f.),

ns

mo

(m.),

rmy

(m.), ai.

2 (several of these similarly in Arabic) In MT. the giant s weapons of defence are of bronze, those 5.

of attack are of iron.

is

Here

there

is

undoubtedly a consistency, which

badly disturbed in

LXX

(We.).

DHJ pb p] of scales (of

i.

fish,

e.

scaled armour.
5, ii.

For the form,

Lev. ir, 9 al. ; of a crocodile, Ez. 29, Is. 18, 5. cf. D Sy?y,
1 D"

4),

?]?!

DY^n

Cant.

Qoh. 12,5 (Kon. ii. 91 f., cf. 181, 452 n.}. 5000 shekels of bronze was probably c. 220 Ibs. av. (Kennedy, DB,
JJinnn

iv.

904
6.
y\

ff.).

nrrcDI]

nhi D^ (We.)

is

preferable.
II.

pT3l] Keil quotes appositely (from Bochart)

(3d\tro
^i<j>os

2.
:

45

al.

d//x/u

ap

<j!>/j.oi(riv

dpyvporjXov.

Jll^a

= javelin

see f. 45

and

Jos. 8,
7.
</

8.

pm] Read, with

the

the Qre,

and the

parallel,

II 21, 19, pjn, i.e.

shaft.

D^riK 1i:]

LXX
or

in II

21, 19.
art.

Ch. ii, 23. 20, 5

in

dvnov;

i.e.

(Kennedy
weaver
s

in his interesting
shaft,

WEAVING

EJ3.,

iv.

5284
for

f.)

the

leash-rod

(Lat. liciatorium), used

holding

Some

parentage
Reuchl.)
:

of the Jews imagined fancifully that the word described Goliath s mixed Lagarde s Prophetae Chaldaice, p. xvi (from the margin of the Cod.

n^a 3N1D
1CB
.

= 7Vos.) The same tradition evidently underlies the (pD*33 pi. of D"03 Vulg. vir spurius. Cf. Aptowitzer, ZAW. 1909, p. 244. 2 And in many names oi places. Comp. Tenses, 181 note.

^JD T ^n N1 (jroX^apxs) fcOTOl^lB {033 D^ll D13in ^3 ;o nim nsny pi p DS^ mm ptrrD^ p JD^J rnn
l

<l

140
the threads of the

The First Book of Samuel,

warp
apart, while the shuttle, carrying the weft,

was

passed between them. 8. ttb 1*n] In all probability this

i

is

an error
II

for
||).

ttb

nra
in

(as

Ki.

8, 25.

Jos. 24, 15:

and

"inn
"jb

24, 12

rm

Heb.

means
for
it

food: and the meaning select, choose, is not substantiated either Arabic or Aramaic. by (So also Dr. Weir.)
to eat

9. 10.

as] Notice the emph. pronoun.

is

10.

nsnn] ^10

to reproach (sc. with taunts), i.e. to defy.

first

12-31.

We

here reach the

of the considerable omissions in

in cod.

LXX

as

compared with

MT.
may

These verses are not

and

though they are supplied in cod. A, they form

no part of the

original

and genuine LXX.

than
is

This

be inferred from the different style of

the translation, which (i) adheres

the case in the

more
;

closely to the existing

MT.
;

book generally

(2) deviates in the rendering

of particular words, as KoiAo.9 T^S 8pvo9 16 against KoiXas of Swaros 4 for D^in B"K, ToXiaO 6 jmeo-aios 23 instead
against FoXta^ 6
dXXd</>i>Xos

HXa

21, 9

<E>iXicrTicuos

ib.

21,

9.

22,

10; comp. also in the

allied

passage VV.

55-8 ap^wvr^s
is

Swa/Acws for

N3VH

1B>

against apxio-Tparriyos
IO, 19.

12, 9. 14, 50.

26, 5: eo-T^Xw^i; 16 against Karfa-rr} (see 3, IO.

23. 12, 7. 16)

of less weight, as

it

may have been chosen on

and recurs
in

account

of the particular sense of

II 23, 12.
12. nTn]

3Tl v

l,

a similar context

Ephraimite of place,

Contrary to grammar, as well as unsuitable. would be ittn THSxn B^xn but the word this
:

This
is

out
(i.e.

for

the paraphrase (Vulg.) de quo supra dictum est

is

Jesse, in ch. 16)

inadmissible.

Still,

as

the verse,

being really

superfluous after ch. 16, only stands here as introducing a narrative originally unconnected with ch. 16, it is possible that iifn is a late and
unskilful insertion

made

with the view of identifying the

THEN

B*X
for

here mentioned with the

iTH (Pesh.
:

of

ch. 16.

Or
4),

it

might be an error
Ehrlich
thinks

so Dr. Weir, comparing II 4,

though
26).

in point of fact
it

no verb

is

required (see

25,

2.

Ki.

u,

a corruption of Kin, and makes the plausible suggestion that 7V3J3 Nin

miff Dr6
Ephraimite

is

a gloss, intended to shew that TTlSK

i

did not

mean

(i,

al.),

but Bethlehemite.

TOQ&

ibl]

Cf.

on

i,

2.

XVII.
The text was already the same, when was made but and the man in the days of
]
:

the translation

of cod.

Saul was aged,

is

entered in
affords

among men no intelligible

which
sense.

is

the only rendering that

justifiable
is

The most
fpT will

obvious correction
then

the

omission of X3 (Hitzig);

0^X3

mean

aged among

men.
(so

Gratz, after Pesh., would read Q

^Q

N3

entered into years

first,

LXX

(Luc.) eA^Autfw? eV

ereo-tv).

Against the

We. argues

that the parallels

Q EWn nSTi,

Am.

2,

16, eV0Aos ev avSpda-iv etc. are

incomplete,

JpT

not expressing a distinction

among

things in other

respects similar, as
is

na

and

e<r$Aos

do.

Against the second proposal

the fact that the phrase in use

i.

is
i

always
i,

Q^a

24,

Jos. 13,
it

i.

23,

(cf.

2).

Ki.

if).

X3 }pT (Gen. 18, n. In face of this constant

usage,
as a

is

extremely questionable whether

D^ca N3 can be regarded

legitimate
:

and idiomatic
JpT,

alternative for

D^a

fcO.

Klo.,

for

oS
was
ing

D tMKa N3

conjectured very cleverly

nr6n

nMN3 ^3O

pT

too old to enter in

TW?&)

among, and Bu. accepts

. .

etc. (with, naturally,

this.

rtthw\ for the follow

It

may

well be right.
is

13. 1D?n

13?

l|

l]
.)

One

of the
is

two verbs

superfluous.

The

theory (Ew.

346

that isbn
is

annexed

for the

purpose of giving
to analogy.

13^1 the force of a plupf.,

artificial

and contrary

No

other example of such a usage occurs in OT., cases of resumption,

after a long intervening clause,

being readily
;

intelligible,
;

upon
last

a different footing

e.g. Dt. 4, 42 D31

18, 6 X31

and resting Jer. 34, 18-20

Tirol, etc. (see

Unless the conjecture mentioned in the note be accepted, 137H here may be due to a copyist s eye having
25, 26).

on

glanced by error at the following verse, where the word occurs (rightly) between the same words.
14. Nin]
15. 3Kh

Gen.
!]>n]

2,

14;

9,

iSetc.

Tenses,

199.

(Dr. Weir).

Speaker s Comm. "was gone," quite arbitrarily Was gone would be expressed, of course, by vH in!
:

3^1

(see 9, 15)

the participles can only be

:

meant

to describe

David
is

custom at the time

doubt an addition

RV. rightly, went to and fro. The made by the compiler of the Book for
s

verse

no

the purpose

of accounting for David

absence from the court of Saul,

after 16,

21

f.

In

fact,

however, according to the narrative embodied in

still

this chapter,

David was

unknown

to Saul (vv. 55-58).

See the note

after 18, 5.

142

The First Book of Samuel,

rom attendance on Saul
:

see Jud.

3, 19.

Gen. 45,

i.

Mr. Deane

(David:

and Times, p. 14) has omitted to notice by. with N otiosum: GK. See on II 17, 28. 17. N^pn] 231. nrn Dr6 rTO yi] nrn cannot belong to mi?y (contrast 18 n^Nn), and
his Life
is

nin DH^

not

Hebrew

(Jer. 40, 3 nin

(cf.

"iai

is

corrected in the Qre).

mtJ>y,

JIM Dr6n must therefore be restored

the Addenda): after

quickly
:

might readily have dropped out. p~in 1 8. a^nn tf nn] lit. cuts of milk,
fresh-milk
cheeses.

/a/i? it

Gen. 41,
iii.

14.

i.e.

probably (EB.

3091),
casei.

Luc.
Tpv<f>a\i8a<;,

soft cheeses ;

Vg. formellas
ibsb
i>KB>

Qlbwb

"ipsn]

variation for the usual tfib&b

is

Another (uncommon) variation

THN

EW

j-)N

npn Dnmy nxi] and take their pledge, i. e. Of the Versions, of their welfare. (Luc.), Targ. Pesh.

(. 22). HNT Gen. 37, 14. bring back some token

hit the

LXX

general sense most nearly

KCU

eicroio-ets
1
.

/xot

T^V ayyeAtav O.VTWV, TVl

Tvn pra
20.
i, 1 4.

D, o^.
Cf.

by]

&z>.

)1^/ yowi^^fioo 22 (TI by)- 28; and ^y

jn: Is. 29, 12

:

(n

^K). Mic.
:

n^ayDTI (n /or.) to the

5. 7t.
aw</

as 26,

N^l]
asses:

/^<f

round enclosure (camp EB. i. 636) ^:yn Some edd. read the fern, form rpjyEH (milra }. the things mentioned in v. 17 f. on to the (viz.
/>

cf.

tfbnsn by

N5^J,

Gen. 31,

17.

42, 26

al.)

but the ellipse

1

is
:

(Gen. 29, if) surprising. but this seems to suggest a longer and more formal journey than
)

Bu. suggests the insertion of

V^n

after Nt?

one of 12 miles or
yD*1 (Gen. 20,
i

so.

The same

objection

may be made

to

Sm.

which also suggests a journey by stages. NT] with the art. must of course be in apposition )} NSVt b*nm] with ^nn as the text stands, therefore, it can only be rendered And
al.),
:

the host that went forth to the battle array

(lyirn, ace. to

they shouted in the war

1

Tenses,

123 a or 129:
is

RV.
;

implies

J?

"!

? for lyini).

The

construction, however,

very strained

and the

fact of the host

going forth is surely intended to form part of the information given, and not to be presupposed. No doubt, therefore, should be read for Ni Tl And he came to the enclosure, and (=as: a circumN>"

p. xvi

oddly of a deed of divorce ; see Lagarde, Jews interpreted Holmes and Parsons (ap. Field) (3i&\lov avoaraaiov Jerome, Quaestiones, ad loc. and Aptow. ZAW. 1909, p. 245.
later
i"Q"iy

The
;

cod. 56,

XVII. 15-29
stantial

143
to

clause) the host

;

was going
ii2 k
)

forth

the battle array,

and

(Tenses, 113. 4 /?

GK.

they were shouting in the war.

1jnn] Read, as elsewhere (e.g. Jud. 15, 14),

Wl l:

the verb

is yin,

not yjn.
21.
"pym]

Cities

inhabitants,

are regularly in

and countries, regarded as the mothers of Heb. construed with a fem. sg.

their

and

occasionally the name, even

similarly

when

it

denotes the people,

12,

is

construed
prnni.

(Ew.

174^;

GK.
i

122^1): Ex.
Ch. 18,
TT"i).

33 oyn by

onso

II 8,

2. 5.

6 (in the parallel

i

2. 5.

6 altered to
21, 2.

24, 9 ^frOE* VUYI (in

Ch. 21, 5

Is. 7, 2.
is

Vm, NTI, 42, n. Job

:

Wl).
i,

15

DPlpni

N2w>

7Bm.
and

By

poets the principle

carried further

and they
:

love to personify the population of a nation or city, as a

Is.

woman
mK>V

e. g.

54,

i ff.

in the frequent fVS D3,

^22

W,

etc., JV

Is. 12,

etc.: cf. Mic. i,

11-13. J er I0
. ,
"m>

Z
>

7 etc -

23.
9, 5
:

n:m
i,

Nini]

A special

case of the idiom noticed on

Ki.

22. 42.
error,

nnj?D] An
ro ijflsp
;

Gen. 29, 9 are closely parallel. LXX, Vulg. Targ. already noted in the Qre.
pi.
J"lb")yi3lp
:

agree with the Qre in expressing the

Pesh. has the sing.

and one of these must be

b \ as 14, i9
,

right.

Gen. 30, 30 (Tenses, See on 10, 24. Drvwn] as Gen. 32, 7; Is. 33, 5 rby~] without subj., GK. 116
24. IDJM]

127 a;

GK.

nib).

25.

Tenses,

135. 6 (2);

s1

JTI

iTiTi]

and

it

shall be,

as regards the

man,

etc.: see

on

2,

36.

For the Hif.

26.
byti]
"D]

UW,

see

GK.
i

531; and
Ki.
2,

cf.

Ipfn

14, 22.

Cf. Jos. 5, 9.

31. II 24, 21. 25 (Lex.

(

758

b
).

Ppn

not that he should reproach

:

HC !), but

//fo/

should have

reproached (as a completed fact)

if/.

44, 20 that thou shouldest have

crushed us in a place of jackals. Gen. 40, 15.

be more usual (18, 18.

Ex.

3,

cf.

rprf would no doubt Lex. 472 b f): but are we

absolutely un-Hebraic
?

entitled to say (Ehrlich) that the pf. here is

D^n DTlta]
28.

the plural of

majesty

GK.

132^.
pi.,

mnn]

JNX

is

construed regularly as a fem.

7.

e.g. 25,

18;

Jer. 33,

13; Zech. 13,

^N] Note the emph. pronoun: cf. II 7, 8. Was it not a word? 29. sin -an K^n]

Jos. 23, 2.
i.e.

2 Ki. 2, 3.

merely asked a

144
question
:

The First Book of Samuel,

that

was
CIK

all.

So Ki.

rightly

m^Nl

Nin DJHS

mo
30.

JN^ a

^>y

r\wy*? wi pi

nan Tv^y u6
back with

Tnm

DN

m
is

ins his
Dyn
to,

^tf]

to the front of another.

lit.
/r<?</

imfc? s l]

&/
3,

(GK.

H7 ff

a word

= replied
32.

answered: see on II

n.
is undoubtedly more pointed, which follows: cf. v. (which

DIN 2^]

LXX, We.

"TI&*

3?, which

and

recommended by
precedes in
"

the

Toy
"

immediately
is

LXX).
lord

It

is

the custom,

when

the king
first

addressed, to say

my

in place

of what would be the

thou

(We.).
\lr.

V^y] as

42, 5. 6. 7.
idea, but

Not

within

an incorrect
is

upon him.
self,

him (=tenp3), which suggests by in this and similar expressions

as the feeling subject, from the

idiomatic

it

separates the

soul
me.

(Delitzsch).

So

ty.

131, Jon.

as a

weaned

child

is

142,
is

4.

Lam.

3, 20.

2, 8.

Jer. 8,

18 Ml

my
"6jJ

soul upon

my

heart

upon me
34.

sick.

See Lex. 753^ d; Parallel Psalter,

p. 464.

il

nTi nyi]

Form
It is

of sentence, as

2,

n^

(see note).

nnrrnNI nsn]
while in
P.

strange that here

HK
it

should be a redundancy,

36

3nn

D:

nxn nx
3,

D3

it

is

rather desiderated before the

is,

same word
to

for the sake of

symmetry.
to

As
a

Ew.

277^ end, Lex. 85*

mark
this

new

DK1 stands according subj. in a sentence

:

but though several instances occur, they are not mostly in passages

belonging to the best

style,
is

nor can

use of the particle be counted

It would seem as though quite superfluous. had actually interchanged 2Hn here with 21in DN in a copyist eye and even a bear (Gratz, Klo. Bu. al.) is v. 36 (so Now.). *1$1 The poet. nriN] but was a bear more dreaded than a lion ? plausible

an elegancy.
s

Here nx

(Perles)

is

not probable.

The

rendering in

GK.

i54

a n. (6) is very

forced.
nb>]

Many
but
is

edd. read ni, with the note

;

*ip HE?:

but the note

is

not

a Massoretic one
at
all,

and

in fact nt is
first

no part of the Massoretic Text

simply an error,

occurring in the Rabbinical Bible

of 1525, edited by Jacob ben Hayyim, and perpetuated in subsequent See De Rossi, Variae Lectiones, ad loc., who states that all editions.

MSS. known

to

him (184 of Kennicott

nb>.

s,

and 64 of

his

own, besides

others) read correctly

XVII. jo-j8

145

b 34 ~35- The series of perfects with 1, instead of the impflf. and waw conv., which is the usual narrative tense, is remarkable. A series

of

pff.

with

waw,

in

an

historical book,

has the presumption of being

;

designed by the writer in a frequentative sense

probability the case
here,

and such

is

in all

though,

as the accentuation

shews, the
If the sense
"TlpSfni

passage was understood otherwise by the punctuators.

suggested be adopted,
Jer. 6,

Tv^m

must, of course, be read

{see

17;

Am.

4, 7),
1

and Vlptnni

though not quite with the same

solitary
I.e.,
11 Dp"
!

absolute necessity

Vlptnni .

The

is

not decisive against

14, 52).

the interpretation proposed (see Jer.

case, further, as the allusion will be incident, the art. in
if
<*ixn

and on

In

this

no longer

to a single particular

and zmn

will

be generic (GK.

i26 r ):

And

I would go and smite him, and rescue it from his mouth and if he rose up against me, I would seize hold of his beard, and smite him, and slay him 2 (So also Dr. Weir.)

a lion or bear came, and took a sheep out of the flock,

out after him,

.35. VBID Tihfrn]

Am.

3, 12.
is

vrrpni]
correct form;

The dagesh
cf.

an indication that
(Bu.).

VJjioni

W ould

be the

GK.

72*

37.
in

TH LXX.

-iDX
It

l]

is

In accordance with Hebrew idiom, though omitted a recapitulation of the substance of a preceding

longer speech, entirely in the manner of popular narrative, and of

repeated occurrence in

Hebrew (We.):
emph.
:

cf. v.

10.
1

Kin] resuming the subj. with

38.

Lex.

b 2.
:

V1D] [*1]

is

used chiefly of the outer garment of a warrior

On
So

(Luc.) the impff. are continued, as logically they should be, to the end of v. 35. (On the frequentative force of orav, fjvitta av, tav, ws av, with the impf. indie., and even with the aorist, in
t\d/jif!av(v
:

LXX

account of the pashta see Jer. in v. 34 orav fjp\tro ical

:

4, 2 (Tenses,

104).
in

LXX

Hellenistic Greek, see Winer,

N.

T. Greek,

63. 7;

Moulton,

Grammar of N. T. Greek, xlii. 5 Grammar of N. T. Greek, 1906,

ib.
;

Blass,
p.
:

Gramm. of
:

168

Gen. 6, 4 [wrongly explained in Winer s note av Tisch. must be read either w? with codd.
with
p.

see the

Hebrew

in 27,

and comp. 30 for ais

AD (so Swete) and 10 cursives, or oaov and 18 cursives (also Philo) see Hatch, Essays in Biblical Greek, 1889, 163 f.; and Brooke-McLean, ad loc.~], Ex. 17, u. 33, 8f. 34, 34. 40, 30. Nu. ai, 9.
E
:

Jud.

6, 3.

II 14, 26 (where Lucian, as here, has also consistently the impf. iara for
;

ev}, etc.

and Mark

3,

in the

Revised Version.)

1365

146
P, as here,

The First Book of Samuel,

v. 39. 4,

12 D jnip 1HD1.

18, 4.

Jud.

3,
;

(from

nn^ or

HE]

but see note) II 10, 4

Ch. 19, 4
P&>p

16; DnT!P VTO II 20, 8

[rd. TTO]:

Lev.

6, 3 (of

a priest), ^. 109, 18
(?)

ft3
Cf.

^1^1; vnftp
1137.

^. 133, 2 (of

Aaron); pTO
6, for

Jud.

5, rot.

EB.

i.

JQlp]

So Ez.

23, 24t; v. 5
3,
1

and elsewhere yaia.

a

39.

Ehud
his

Jud.

purposes of concealment, girds his sword

under

DHO
s

J")3,v

/N

l]

(Viob nnn). On ^ ^yi? (chiefly late), v. Zr. 759 e. The words admit of no rendering consistent at once

with the

HDJ

N^3

meaning of ^Nin, and with the following causal clause for assayed (AV.), which (as HDJ *b \3 shews) must mean 13
:

endeavoured unsuccessfully] is not a sense that is ever possessed by In Targ. Pesh. the difficulty is felt so strongly that the ^Ntfl.
positive clause
y|._>rt\.

is

transformed into a negative one

!

\^.

jJc)

LXX

have
i.

eKOTrtotrev

= K^*!

(^rw And he

!"QN

X?l

wearied

himself to go (with them)/

he exerted himself in vain to go with them, which agrees well with the following clause for he had not tried them. Cf. Gen. 19, nnan NVK& IS^I and they wearied
e.

n
i.

themselves to find the door,

e.

exerted themselves in vain to find

it.

The
on

reading x^l

is

accepted by Luzzatto II
it

Profeta

Isaia [ed.

i.

1855]

i,

14 (who states that

was

first

suggested to him by his pupil

it

Abraham
Dr. Weir.

Meinster), and Geiger (Urschrift, p. 377);

as
it

is

adopted

also (in each case,

would seem, independently) by We. and

in DID
D~lD
l<

"!]

LXX

E?cn.

The

original text
plur.,

had no doubt simply

i,

some of

which was read by some as a the latter TH was added.

by others as a sing.; by

40. D JIX

wn]

smooth ones ofstones

smoothest stones :

Blp^ai]
delete 1^

either read
~i>X

D^jrin

^3

LXX TW OVTI
41. rij

CO>TW

eis

(Ehrl.) Blp^a as an explanatory gloss ; or (Sm. Bu. cf. n ^^ his B p (rvXXoyrjv) read shepherd s
,

(We. Now.), or

132. tapfcl, and

;

GK.

"

"

"

bag which served him

l]bh
.
.

for a (sling-stone) wallet.

f.

a 1^1] Contrast 14, 19. Cf. II 15, 3O 43. \3JN] in pause with zaqef: cf. on i, 15.
.

ni^pCQ] the

plur.

is

the generic plural.

:

LXX

put into David

mouth

the singularly vapid reply

KCU

eTTre

AauetS, Ou^t, dAA ^

XV
46.
"133]

II.

]8-$4
26, 19.

147
But read probably with

collectively, as

T)i>3J

Is.

LXX naai 71:13. pNH ism] pNH

5?3

construed with a plural, as Gen. 41, 57; and,

\f/.

more

frequently, in late poetical style, as

66,

i.

96,

i. 9.

100,

i al.

^S"1^"^

DTita V*

that Israel hath a

"O]

God.

&* asserts existence

with

some emphasis;

cf.

I/A.

58, 12.

47. XTE liT]

The
is

retention of n of the Hifil, after the preformative

of the impf.,
45, 18
ptcp.).
;

rare

and usually

late: Jer. 9, 4; Is. 52, 5

\f/.

28, 7;

116, 6 (as here); Job 13, 9; Neh.

n,

17

Ez. 46, 22 (Hof.

These are

all

the examples of the uncontracted verb that

\j/.

occur in Hebrew:
(38,
i

cf.

the n. pr. HDiiT once

8r, 6

^CP

Jer. 37, 3

?V).
7,

The form

occurs also regularly in Biblical Aramaic, as

294 .* But Klo s. njwn for mrp jPBnrp (so Bu.) both removes the anomalous y& in and yields a better antithesis to what follows ( x:i mrr6 \D).
531; Stade,
113. 2; Konig,
i.
11

Dan.

18. 24.

Comp. GK.

48. irni] See

50.
,

on

i,

12.

2"ini]

the emph.

word before
16, 15.

ptf:

b 21, 2 (see note).

19, i
al.

II 15, 3. Jud. 14, 6 51.

H3
in
57.

pN roxtfl.

18, 7. 28.

innnE vi] See on

N^] The
;
">a

14, 13.

52.

was the ravine which separated the op

:

posing forces
moreover,
if

but

this

could not also be the goal of their flight

a particular

The word must

(cf.

thus represent

N^ were meant, the article would be required. some proper name LXX have 03
:

b\ which

is

accepted by both Keil and Commentators generally.

;

If GathwasTelles-Safiyeh,it was about 10 miles W. of Sochoh, down Wady Sant Ekron was 16 miles NW. of Sochoh Sha araim is mentioned in Jos. 15, 36, next to Sochoh and Azeqah, as a town in the Shephelah, so that it was presumably some
:

place

down

the valley between

Sochoh and Tell es-Safiyeh.

however, only be conjectured.

first satisfy

ourselves that this

:

is

Its actual site can, Tell Zakariya has been suggested but we must not either Sochoh or Azeqah (cf. on v. 2). TV1 is
:

preceded naturally by fO

so

D"ny?Jp ip.
"]T13.

H? (Sm.

Kitt.; Bu. alternatively) is a very

probable correction for D^iytJ

54.
site

D^IT ] An
1

obvious anachronism.

Jerusalem was

still

a Jebu-

stronghold

see II 5, 6-9.
:

Keil (following Th.)

1

an archaism
D DBVO

for dwelling, as 4, 10.

36, 6 (except in

So with

is

nearly always late

the art., the non-syncopated form comp. on II 21, 20.

:

<f>.

D1TD)

148
13, 2 etc.
Ivntfi?

The First Book of Samuel,

But
7P1K has (apparently) this sense only in the phrase

t^N, inherited from a time

when

the nation dwelt actually in

only be that David put the armour in the tent occupied by him, when he was on duty with Saul (18, 2-5 etc.) afterwards, the sword at any rate was removed to Nob, and placed
tents.
:

The meaning can

behind the ephod (21, 10).

55.

Ehrl.

^^

(i Ki. i, 39).

1DX

niN"l3l]

Not a common type of sentence,

Hebrew,

in

early

Hebrew.
temporal

It

is

the tendency of the earlier

clauses,

in the case of

or

causal

which Greek often places early in a

sentence, either (a) to postpone

it is

the later Hebrew, that

(a)
7.

is

them somewhat, or apt to introduce them

34,
7.

(3) to prefix

Wl
8,

at the

beginning.
Jud.

Compare ad
with
2

Gen.
15, 8.

19,

16.

50, 17.

Ex. 31,
.

18.

Ch. 12,

20, 20.

24, 25.
(d)

b 26, 16. i9

Dan.

10, 9. ii. 15.

19;
i

and ad

(D)ni^331

33, 12. 34, 14. b 2 Ch. 7, i. 20, 23

.

24, 14.

29, 29.

31,
1
,

against some fourteen times

i
;

in

earlier

books

with tmi prefixed

parallel, 2
"iyjn

e.g. ch. 18,

9, i.

Ki. 8, 54 (TP1

omitted in the

Ch.

7,

i).

nr D p] Not as AV. RV. Whose son is this youth ? Whose son is the youth? Pit is enclitic, and belongs to V3, as
49, 19;
\f/.

but
Jer.

24, 8 etc.

(GK.

136; Lex. 261* 4b).

In

v.

56

EVV.
God
TJ,

render correctly.
3

T]
1

so always in this expression, and in other oaths not by

(njna Vi; II 15, 21;

"OK

Am.
si. c.

8,

14):

in oaths

by God always

mm
:

TJ.

Either TJ

is
ii.

the
42),

of a subst.^D, an old sing, of the usual D^n

. .

(Thes.,

Ke. Kon.

Targ. of I 20, 3

al.

*JB>B3

= (-By) the life of *$ mm Kin D*g)

TJ.
st.

/ (so the Massorites

cf.

or, in spite of the fern.

B>S3,

we should
nnx

vocalize 1^23

The

explanation of TJ in

GK.

93

aa n.

as a contracted form of the

56.
^NK>]

abs. TJ is

not natural.

Note both the position and the force of nnx

Ask
24;

thou:

Ex. 20, 19 liDy

;

nn&m:n
Jud.
8,

speak thou
21 133
J?3S1

with

us;

Dt.

5,

ch. 20, 8

22, 18
20, 22t.

nnN 3D;

PIJIN

Dip (Tenses,

202).
fern,
is

The
For

masc., of which the corresponding

Is. 7,

14

al.

np^l v. 57, see

on

4, 20.

Quoted from a
Philology.

letter of the writer

by

Prof. Franz Delitzsch in

The Hebrew

New

Testament of the British and Foreign Bible Society.

Leipzig, 1883 [written in English], p. 19.

contribution to

Hebrew

X VII. KX VIII. 5
18,
i.
1

149

nils

Kon.

i.

mppj] Gen. 44, 30 IPBJU iTWp The Kt. is ^nx*1 (a rare form: Ew. !] GK. 60^: Hos. 8, 3 iSTV. 224, 621
y\
;
11

249*; Ol.
^. 35, 8

p.

469;
Jer.

ni&n.

23, 6 iNip

Qoh. 4, 12 tapir; Jos.

the

2,

4 [corrupt]; see also

on

21, 14

and
2.

II 14, 6):

Qr substitutes the more usual *ronN1. 3)e6 un: tfh] The same idiom as Gen. 20, 6.
and Nu.
1

31,

7.

<^.

24, 8 etc.:
3.

20, 21.
is

21, 23 without

7.

TiTl] as fnJiiT

the subj. to the end of the verse,

Sm. Bu. Now.

Kit. read

in^

for

THI.

But
3),
is

m3

n"D,

with the rarest exceptions

(2 Ch. 29, 10.

Ezr. 10,

used only of a superior, especially a

Jud.
2, 2.
Is.

conqueror, prescribing terms to an inferior (n, i. 55, 3 al.), so that it would seem here to be unsuitable.
fore,
1

Unless, there
:

(Ehrl.)

is

the

waw

of

concomitance

(Ex. 21, 4

Lex. 253*;

above, p. 29), b 4 THEl]

.

it is

better to read

in DN

for 11TI.
:

= and also his (warrior s) garment

wherever
Saul sent

cf.

on

6, 1 1.

Without

the usual ID (before ny: Lex. 58i b 5), as Lev.

5.
^3B>]

n, 42. Nu. 8, 4. defines how David fared when he went out And David
:

went

forth,

him he prospered

prospering

wherever Saul sent him.

Jer. 15, 6

^n

TiriN

JIN

nc>BJ

Thou

didst

forsake me, thou wentest ever

backward

= going

ever backward.

Comp.

Tenses,

163 with Obs.

The

impff. have of course a frequenta

tive force.

P OUTl

is to

deal wisely with the implied consequence of success

it

in

other words,

expresses not success alone, but success as the result

of wise provision.

No

single English

word expresses

the

full

idea
i,

conveyed by
Is.

the

Hebrew: hence
is

the margins in
in

RV.

here, Jos.

52, 13.

Success alone
17,
i

denoted
5,

Heb. by
as

nv!"l.

The
fact

narrative

18,

precisely

it

stands,

it

appears

impossible to

harmonize with
taken

16,

14-23.

The two
is

narratives are in
s

two

parallel, and,

strictly,

incompatible accounts of David

introduction to the history.

In 16, 14-23 David

of mature age and

man

of war,

on account of

his skill with the

time of the king s mental In appointed his armour-bearer (vv. 18. 21).
s service

Saul

at the

distress,

harp brought into and quickly

18, 5

17, i

he

is

a shepherd
attention

lad,

inexperienced in warfare,
act of heroism

who

first

attracts the king s

by

his

against Goliath;

and the inquiry

150
1

The First Book of Samuel,

55~58 comes strangely from one who in 16, 14-23 had not merely been told who his father was, but had manifested a marked
7>

affection

for

David, and had

(vv. 21. 23).

The

been repeatedly waited on by him inconsistency arises, not, of course, out of the

double character or

office ascribed to

David (which

is

perfectly

com

patible with historical probability), but out of the different representation

of his first introduction 55

1

to

Saul.

In

LXX

(cod. B), 17, 12-31. 41. 50.

8, 5

are not recognised.

conflict

By
16,

the omission of these verses the

elements which

David

is

14-23 are greatly reduced (e.g. no longer represented as unknown to Saul) but they are not
with
;

removed altogether (comp.

17, 33.

38

fF.

with 16, 18. 2i b ).

is

It

is

doubtful therefore whether the text of

LXX

here to be preferred to

MT.

We.

(in

Bleek

Einleitung, 1878, p. 216

=
,

Comp.

des

Hex.

u.

der hist. Bb., 1889, p. 250),

Dh. hold

that the translators

Kuenen (Onderzoek 2 1887, p. 392), Bu. or, more probably, perhaps the scribe
omitted the verses in question from

of the Heb.
harmonistic
desired
1
.

MS. used by them

motives,
without,

however,

entirely

securing the end

pp.

On
Lohr

the

other

hand,
Cornill,
(p.

W.

R. Smith

(OTJC*
6,

120

ff.,

431

ff.),

(p. xxxiv),

Inlrod.

17.

Stade (EB.

iv.

1276), Sm. Now. Kennedy

121) maintain the superior originality

i

of the shorter

LXX

text.

In either case, however, 17,

18, 5 will,

And

so

Kamphausen,

Theol.

Arbeiten (Elberfeld),

vii.

Bemerkungen

zur

Dr. Weir views the Textkritik, pp. 16-18. accounting in a different manner for the omission in
nlttest.

Hebrew

text similarly,
"

though
this?"

LXX

Whose

son

is

In

6, 21

it is

said that Saul loved David,

and he became

his armour-bearer.

To

reconcile the

has been conjectured (Speaker s Commentary} that 16, 21 records by anticipation what did not really come to pass till after David s victory over Goliath. But how can this be reconciled with 18, 9. 10, and especially
statements,
it

two

with 18,13? Or, again (Keil), that the question Whose son is he not to the name, but to the position of David s father (but see v. 58)
"

"

has relation
s

or that Saul

madness accounts for his having forgotten David. But all these explanations are Are the verses wanting in LXX a later interpolation in the Hebrew insufficient.
text
?

This cannot well be

for

an interpolation would not

insert

anything at

variance with the narrative

interpolated.

conclusion that the verses omitted in

narrative,

seem therefore shut up to the the Vat. MS. belong to an independent

We

which was

in parts

MSS.

existing

when

the

LXX

translated the book.

incorporated with the older account, but not in all The Greek translation of the
later period,

added verses

[in cod.

when the Hebrew

text

A] is very exact and must have proceeded from a was fixed as at present.

XVIII. f-9
more or
(notice
less,

151

have been derived from a different source from 16, 14-23

is

how David

introduced in 17, 12

ff.

as though his

name had

not been mentioned before), and embodies a different tradition as to the manner in which Saul first became acquainted with David.

18, 6-30.

Saul s growing jealousy of David

(in continuation

of 16, 23).
in

6.

JYlprUDm (Qre)

The two words correspond

c f. (

form so im

perfectly that the text

change

is

can scarcely be to read with Bu. niphCQ

in its original form.

The
ira

least

Ex. 15, 20 D^JH bl JNVni

in&op^

nSntxrt D
21, 21
p.
:i

ana

nnn;

jud. 11,34

n^noa Dana
ixr
DK).

nxr

n:m

ni^hea ^r6

nW nm
^,

155) as far as TlB^srrnx, express then

LXX, in njop? rri^ncn

omitting 6*

(see

rUK5?m

which is adopted by Sm. Now. (though ^N1^ ^3D should precede TH n&Opi ), at least as the text of what is regarded by them as the main narrative here (LXX, cod. B). m^nm is obviously the right correction of the Massoretic text, as we have it

D SrD
1

"ny

jntJ

*ny

the question of the relation of the Massoretic text of this verse to the

LXX

is

one belonging to

higher

criticism,

which cannot here be

considered.

jtan 71N{?]
7.

The

order

is late :

see p.

305

n.

rtwym] So Ex.

15, 21

ono

orb

jyni.

nipnt^Dil D^SWn]
II 6, 5,

the

women which made

merry.

Illustrate

from
into

where David and the

Zion, are described as

;

Israelites, as they bring the ark

:

up

^S? D^nb O

also Jer. 30, 19

hpl

mm
liy

31, 4 (in the promise of Israel s restoration)

^30 nyn

inDa flNJn.
section.
8.

On

the omission in

LXX,

see at the

end of the

nmi] Read with LXXni23in

etc.).

to correspond with

n"a^n

(We.

Bu. Sm.

fDlfon 1^
to him.
9.
}1J?]

1^

1W]

and there

is

still

only the kingdom

(sc. to

give)

The correction ^ (Klo. al.) is unnecessary. The Qre $V is right. Wi with the ptcp. expresses
and continuance
so

at

once
of

origination

and

came

into the condition

21,

one eyeing:

Gen.

4,

17

Ty

run

Wl

2o b ;

Jud. 16,21

152
jniD

The First Book of Samuel,

Wl;
:

2 Ki. 15, 5.

The verb

is

a denom. from

f?y,

to eye

(sc.

enviously

LXX,

cod.

{i7ro/2Ae7rd/x.evos),

the ptcp. being perhaps that

of Qal, but perhaps also that of

ID

Po el (Ew.

i25

a
),

with the prefix

omitted (Stade,

229;
s

i69
there

d
;

GK.

52

).

55), as sometimes in Pu al (Ew. The omission of D is no doubt irregular: but

GK.

is

a presumption that for the sense in question, the conjugation

(

which Ew.
of attack
J
\l/.

i25

a
)

has well characterized by the term

in use.
Cf.

Conjugation
e.

would be
,

i^ P

to

be-tongue,

i.

to slander,

101, 4

and GK.

55^.

The

verb, however, does not occur

elsewhere

and Ehrl. would read

iy).

N3J7 (the

N dropped by haplography,

and

B>

then taken as

10. K]33rn] played the prophet,

viz.

by gestures and demeanour,

a circumst. clause.

as 10, 5.
J33O
"irrt]

as (or while} David was playing

16.

1TO] See on 16,

DV2 QV3] only

till

here.
:

See on

3, 10.
i

DV1 DV

itself

does not occur

8,

the latest

Hebrew

Neh.

8, 18.

Ch. 12, 22.

Ch.

13.

24,

n.

30, 21. Ezr. 3, 4. 6, 9 (Aram.)t.

11.

hai]

i.e.

ow/, from blB.

actually cast the javelin

on

this

does not appear that Saul occasion; hence Th. We. Kp. al.
it
$>

But

following
up,

LXX

(^>ev)

and Targ. (onx) would punctuate

smite David and the wall/
to the wall: so 19, 10.

B?1

and took

from 7B3,

Is.

40, 15.
I will
i.

vpai *rna

mx]

e. I will

smite

them
12.

together, I will
"oata]

pin David

Cf. Dt. 15, 17.

elsewhere, to express the source or cause of an act or

earlier

feeling,
ch. 8,
1

mostly late (for the

8.

^Bo)

see

Lex. 8 1 8 a

and

cf.

13.

I. e.

Saul removed him from his circle of immediate attendants,

and gave him duties with the army.

14.
is

Dyo

as 14, 17.

DTT^]

with regard

better; so 18 MSS., and

his ways/ But ^TT^a Rabb. quotations ap. Aptow. I. many

to (7, 7)
all

So ^BEtS Job

9, 15

not

my judge,
The

but he that would assail

is in

me

in judgement,
in Arabic,

i.

e.

my

opponent

in

judgement.

conjugation

more regular use

Ar. Cr.
i.

where
to kill,

its

signification is also distinctly seen (Wright,

to try to kill

Jj lS

43)

thus

Jcj

to fight with

j^M

to

outrun, ^p.L*

to try to

outrun

to run a race with.

XVIII. io-2i
3 (Z^r. 83* 8 a/3). WSO iri] awa? stood in awe (Kp.) of him. than Kill in v. 12 Nu. 22, 3.
i51B>K]

153
Cf.

for the usual

on

15, 20.

stronger expression

Kin va]
.);

Notice the emph.

pron. in

a causal sentence

(p.

no
17.
~f?

and also the

participles in this verse.

Cf. Jud.

14, 3 17

Note the emphatic position of nntf. np nnis; and see on 15, i. 28. Nu. 21, 14 nnnta iBD)t. ] 25,
JDN nns]
(I"*

mentally = thought

so

z>.

21.

25, 21.

2 Ki. 5,

n, and

frequently (Zor. 56
1 8.

a 2).

^H] Punctuate ^n my folk (Kirkpatrick). The word is the a cf. Thes. 47 i ), explained same as the Arabic (so We. Keil, etc. at length by W. R. Smith in his Kinship and Marriage in Early

Arabia, pp. 36-40

by

blood-ties/

a group of families united and acting together, and forming a unity moving
(

41-46), and denoting

smaller than the tribe, but larger than that of a single family.

The

word

perhaps only hence explained here by the gloss QN DnS^B. The punctuation as a pi. ( my life } shews that the meaning of the word had been forgotten. (not no) is used with
Arabic;
dialectical
in

is

in frequent

use

in

but was

rare

Hebrew, and

is

"

reference to the persons of

whom

"

the

H consists:

cf.

II 7,

18 *JV2 D,

Gen. 33, 8 run ndnorHo i? nD.

though the action remains) incomplete: cf. 2 Ki. 2, i. Hos.
19.

nn] of giving,

is

(and, in the present case,

7, i.

For

the omission of
cf.

the suff., sometimes, as here, indefinite, sometimes definite,

19, 29.

Gen.

e Ex. 13, 21. Jer. 41, 6; and GK. ii5 n. 21. ^plD7J is some kind of ^pUD certainly fowling-tmpkment, not a snare (i. e. a noose Germ. Schnur, a string ), but probably

24, 30.

the trigger of a trap with a bait laid

writer s Joel

upon

it

(see the illustration in the

and Amos,

p. 157,

and

p. 158).

Hence

it

is

often used

metaphorically of that which allures a person to destruction, as here, Ex. 23, 33. Dt. 7, 16.

D^nKQ] The expression recurs Job 33, 14; second time (RV.) not, however, excluding the
rendering shews) together with
it.

lit.

with two,
but (as the

i.e.

first,

literal

Hence
David

the phrase, as used here,

s loss

must contain an

ironical allusion to

of Merab.

Still,

the

154

The First Book of Samuel,

Ehrlich conjectures
V"Qy

expression remains strange.

DVn

-6

fnniV

D*n^fi]3

with the help of the Philistines

(z>.

25**)

shall

he make himself to-day

my

son-in-law.
is

derived from Rashi, Kimchi, and ultimately rendering which has to supply the most crucial word in a sentence, it might have been supposed, could have found no defenders : the Jews, however, discover a parallel for it in the OT. Jud. 12, 7 and he was

AV. with

(one of) the twain,

N1I"Q).

from the Targ. (pIDD

buried

ny?3H

"nyU

in

(one of) the

cities

of Gilead

23. ri7p:n] the inf. abs. construed as a fern., as Jer. 2, 17.

is

The

L!

of course the interrogative.

fW3]
Hos.
25.

Cf. Is. 3, 5

where

this

word

is

opposed

to ^233 (cf. 16, 14.

4, 7.

Pr. 3, 35).

ino] The technical word denoting the price paid, according to

1
.

ancient custom, by the suitor to the father or family of the bride

See Gen. 34, 12; Ex. 22, 15. 16 (which speaks of the
i.

nhrQ

"ino,

e.

the
16.

sum

usually paid for a wife).

Suitor)
7ropu>v

Cf. the

Homeric
;

eSva or

oVa,

II.
817

178 (of a

a-n-cpeta-ia

2oVa

Od.

21.

160-2

"AAArjv

nv

7rTa A^auaSwv
r?^a<.$

evTreVXtDi/

Mvacr$co
/cat

ee Svoicrtv Si^/xevos*

17

8c

cTreira

os

ft TrAetora Tropot
II.

p.6p(rt,fjLOS

eA^ot

also as

an

interesting material parallel,

""a,

9.

141-8

(Nestle, Marginalien^ p. 14).

;

so LXX, the more usual expression o] 9 MSS. have ON 3 Rabb. authorities ap. Aptowitzer, I it is also a TOD (on 1 2, 5). 26. DV3V! 1tf!?D tfh] Obscure perhaps (Ke.) alluding to the time
;
:

within which David

in the 27.

exploit

was

to

be performed.

The

clause

is

not

LXX.
DTINE]
II 3, 14,

LXX nx,
and

which both agrees with the express

state

ment,

also (as

We.

observes)

is

alone consistent with the

s following Dlj6lD 1 (or better, as i.

LXX

2
,

e.

completed the tale of

them

to the king.

Aq. Theod. Vulg. D^P?!), The change was no doubt

made

for the purpose of magnifying David s exploit. The clause 26 b have been added with the same object David accomplished in may shorter time than was fixed more than was required of him.
:

Comp. W. R. Smith, Kinship and Marriage

;

in Early Arabia, p. 78 (ed. 2,

1903, p. 96)
2

Noldeke,
:

ZDMG.
in

1886, p. 154.
"pE?

Cod.

A and Luc.

Cod. B

DN?D V

is

not represented.

XVIII. 2i- XIX.

28 b
i.e.
.

155
Lr/oa^A

inrOilN
i>an

tfB>

i^lDl]
?"!:

LXX

/cat

TTOS

ink nnk

^-^3

certainly original.

The

clause in this
v.

form

states the

ground
v.

for Saul s greater dread,

expressed in

29:
its

MT.

merely repeats without need what has been said before in

20.
:

proper place, in
29. sjDN
l]

Written incorrectly, as from SjDN

:

so Ex. 5, 7

(GK.

68 h ).

69"). Nib] Read Nl^ c f. Ni; Jos. 22, 25 (Ron. i. 639 f.; GK. In 1 8, 6-30 there are again considerable omissions in LXX 6 b (And the dancing (cod. B), the text of LXX reading as follows
:

women came
timbrels,

forth to

meet David out of

7.

all

the cities of Israel, with

and with

joy, etc.).

8 a (to but thousands]. 9. i2 a

(And Saul
22-26*
(to
).

was
In

afraid of David).

13-16.
in

2o-2i a
28^

(to against him).

son-in-law].

27-29* (reading
it

and

that all Israel loved

him

this instance,

is

generally admitted that the

LXX
is

text deserves

the preference above

MT.
s
is

the sequence of events

clearer;

and the

gradual growth of Saul

psychological truth
(a)

enmity towards David

in

accordance with

distinctly

marked,
:

observe the three stages,

i2 a

And

Saul was afraid of David

() 15 he stood

in
:

awe of

him/ and endeavoured indirectly to get rid of him, 20-2 i a (c) 29 he was yet more afraid of David, and (19, i) gave direct orders for
his

murder.

The

additions

in

MT.

maturely, the intensity of Saul s enmity.

emphasize unduly, and pre They also harmonize badly

:

with the account of David s betrothal to Michal

if,

for instance,
is

he
to

had already been betrothed to Merab (vv. 17. 19), it understand how he could reject as absurd the idea of
the king s son-in-law as he does in
v.
J

difficult

his

becoming

23

19

22.

David

obliged to flee from Saul.

He

visits

Samuel at
is

Ramah

(19, 18-24), finds through Jonathan that

SauVs enmity

confirmed

towards him (ch. 20), repairs accordingly first to Ahimelech at Nob, then to Achish at Gath (ch. 21), and finally takes refuge in
the cave (or stronghold]

of Adullam

(ch. 22).

19,
1

i.

IVDr6

13T1]

Cf. 2 Ki. 14, 27.

Comp. Wellh.,
u.
T

in Bleek s

Einleitung (1878), p. 218

,

(= Die
;

Hexateachs
patrick, on

der

hist.

Bilcher 1
;

1889, p. 251

f.)

Stade, Gesch.

i.

Composition des 37-40; Kirkp. 131.

Samuel, p. 242

Kamphausen,

I.e.

pp. 18-23

Kennedy,

156
3.
"P

The First Book of Samuel,

^Nl] Notice the emph. pron. (twice).
"OIK]

= about,

as

z>.

4.

Dt.

6, 7. ^.

87, 3.

Respecting another,

more

special sense of 2

"131,

see

on

25, 39.

"ft

no TVNTl] And I shall see somewhat, and I will tell and if I see aught, I will tell thee construction like that of J1E1 V3N 3ryi Gen. 44, 22: HO = n Tenses, 149; GK. 159^. as II 18, 22. 23; Pr. 9, 13; 25, 8 al. Nu. 23, 3** (not TI;), Comp. Ynani ^N^ no ITTI, lit. and he will shew me the matter of aught,

^ VTum

thee

and
4.

I will tell thee

VE>y]

and

//"he

shews

me

.,

I will tell thee.

is

Sing, not plural, the

Cf. vnt?

being due to the fact that nt?y

i,

originally nyyo.

Dan.

5;

-pn

Dt. 23, 15;

*]^p

Is.

30, 23
5.

E\v.

256^; Stade,
;

3450;

GK.

93".

J1

Dt^l] 28, 21
in slaying

Jud. 12, 3; Job 13, 14:

cf.
1 2,
:

cf.

\j/.

119, 109.

rrow6]
9.

7.

^ nn] LXX DM^N nn

in^nn Nini]

see

on

16, 14.

3B>V

The

position of the ptcp. as 24, 4. 25, 9. II

i. 8.

n, n.

The

circumst. clause, as a Gen. 18,

Jud.

3, 20.

Ki. 19, 19, etc.

(Tenses,

160;

GK.

141).
1,

Y3] Read

i"V3

(16, 16. 23), noting the following

unless, indeed,

T3

were purposely chosen,

for the sake of avoiding the

assonance

with the preceding TP3 (comp. on 26, 23).

10.

Tp31
1

im]

Cf.

on

1 8,

ii.

IDS

!]

Only here in the sense of depart, escape.

the Nif. occurs frequently (e.g.
life
:

In post-Biblical
particularly in

Hebrew,

Yoma
i,

i, 5),

the sense of departing from

cf.

Phil,

23

in Delitzsch s

Hebrew

N. T. (published by the British and Foreign Bible Society^ where

"

??? ?P

ft?

TO avaXvaat..
rare variation for the

Nin

pW3] A

normal Ninn nb^2, which should

16.

probably be restored: Gen. 19, 33. 30,

other passages quoted, Ninn
themselves,
is

32, 23!;
1 2,

on

this

and

the

"VZID

(on

5).

On

the

words

Saul

We. remarks, As David no doubt fled immediately after attempt, and there is no ground for supposing that this was
it

made
where
3i

at night,
it

is

better to connect the definition of time with v.

[cf. the following 1p33],

n,
:

is

required

and

to read with
etc.

LXX

n^i

Ninn

n^b

NTI

:^\.

So

KP

Klo. Weir,

XIX.
it.
"lp33

}-i3
it

157
would seem, were not watch the

UVDflh
ntDB>$>]

The
David

messengers,

commissioned to

kill
:

(see vv. 14. 15), but only to

1

house where he was

hence doubtless

must be omitted with LXX,

i/^.

and the words rendered, to watch it (cf. 59, him in the morning. So Th. We. Klo. etc.

i),

that he might slay

n1
9, 2
f.

Pins

"in

"p

N DN] The use of

:

the ptcp., especially in the

protasis, is very idiomatic

Tenses,

137

GK.

I59

V.

Cf.

Ex.

8,

17

(where, as here, the apodosis also

is

expressed by a ptcp.).

13. D^snnrt]

See on 15, 23.

D^yn
is

"V33]

The

exact sense

is

uncertain.

"n33

is

a sieve;

"13310

the coverlet with which

Benhadad was smothered by Hazael,

thus to denote something

2 Ki.
-

8, 15.

The phrase appears

made of

goats

hair in the manner of net- work, probably a quilt. Ew. Hist. iii. 107 (E.T. 77) and Keil suggest a fly -net (KwwTreiov), such as might be spread over the face whilst a person was asleep. (The /cwi/wTretoi/ of

Judith 10, 21. 13, 9 was, however, suspended on a-TvXot

the posts

of the bed.)

ITl^KID does not define whether the D^ryn *V33 was

:

placed above or under or round the head

to the head, see 26, 7.

it

merely expresses proximity

1333]

So

bra

Jos. 2, 15

O^"?

2 Ki. io, 7.
:

To

be explained

on the analogy of what was said on 1,4, and 6, 8 the garment, the cord, the pots, are each not determined by some antecedent reference
or allusion, but are fixed in the writer
s

mind, and defined accordingly

or
is to be,

by

the article, by the purpose

to

which

it is,

put.

50, 26 111X3; Ex. 21, 20

21, 9

B3$3 with a rod: Nu.

O n a pole:

17,

n
n3

Comp. Gen. nnnOiTDN

;

and he put

it

D3.rr?y

Jud. 4, 18

TiNn to a tent; 20, 16 every one able to sling a stone at a hair, and not miss
it;

W3; 7, 13 myW?K J3N3 with

man;
io,

ch.

9,

9 t^sn a

25

(where see note); 21, io ivDBQ; II 17, 13 ^ron. 17 nnatJTi a girl;

N7O; Jud. 38 (see note), etc. The principle alluded to on 6, 8 might possibly account for the art. in some of the passages cited, but it will not account for all : and a difference
"lEyn

23, 21

33^3;

in

compound
ofc.

expressions, Ex. 16, 32

25,

6,

38 ^SBH

Nb;

io,

fWrr"jD-nK.

between Hebrew and English idiom must here be recognised.

Comp.

GK.

i 2

6q-s.

158
17.

The First Book of Samuel,

MJVcn M33 nc&] The position of rG3 as
i

Ki.

i,

cf.

II 13, 4.

Notice afterwards the emph. Kin.

no means

The use of TO^ is thoroughly idiomatic and it is by be corrected (Th.) after the paraphrase of LXX to DN see Gen. 27, 45. 2 Ch. 25, 16 (quoted by Ges. Thes., p. 770). each time in deprecation similarly Qoh. 5, 5. Introducing, II 2, 22
"IrVCK

ntD^]

to

N^>

however, as
it

it

does, the

is

virtually equivalent to
(/XT/
it

ground upon which the deprecation rests, lest, and is so rendered by LXX in the
1
.

passages cited
as in Aramaic,
for the

TTOTC, Iva pff)

And
this

in dialectical or late

Hebrew,

actually

assumes

meaning,

E>

(>)

being prefixed

clause.

purpose of connecting it more distinctly with the principal Dan. i, 10. In See, in OT., Cant, i, 7, and (with
IB>N)

Aram.

^\
:

is

thus the ordinary word for

lest,

JQ

being not in use

2
.

The

punct. nipb (instead of the usual

cf.

""??),

on account of the
ni.T
(i.e.

gutt.
""pN)

(other than n)
\l/.

10,
1 8.

etc.

See Lex. 554 a

28, 9. Jud. 15, 10 etc., GK. io2 n

;

and before
.

JV133]

Qre nV02.

The

origin

and meaning of

this

word, which

occurs six times in the present context, are alike obscure.

Miihlau-Volck
3

derive

it

as follows

(_^vj

in

Arabic

is

to

intend, propose
is

conceive a design,

make an aim for

oneself,

hence the subst.

(_jlj

not merely

intention, project, but also the goal of a journey.

jectiire that the root

Upon
2, 5

this basis,

M.-V. con-

may have come

to signify to reach the goal of a journey, to

rest there, bleiben, bestehen ;

rest after

hence fll^

SO

in

Hab.

shall not abide,

and

ill 3

place of in a different application JV13 dwellings, of the Coenobium of the prophets. The explanation is in the last degree precarious, the process by which a secondary and subordinate sense in Arabic is made the origin of the primary sense in Hebrew

a journey (Ort der Niederlassung, spec, fur den Nomaden), and

being an incredible one, and the number of stages

all

hypothetical

assumed

to

have been passed through before the age of Samuel being most improbable.

All

And
In
lest

so elsewhere in
;

LXX,
7, 23.

as Gen. 47, 19

Ex. 32, 12

Joel

2,

17 (onus

^.79, 10
2

115,

2.

OT.

rlDb"n

Ezr.

In Phoenician D!?
5], 21

(i.e.
1

c6) by

itself

has the force

:

of
in

(CIS.

[= Cooke, NSI.

D^N

DjnjD

D^=

ne tradant eos Dei)

not clear that ilD? alone has acquired this force, for Qoh. 7, 17. 18. Neh. 6, 3 are sentences in which the sense of -why? -wherefore? appears to be
it is

Hebrew

distinctly present to the writers.

3

In the

nth

ed. of Ges.

Handwbrterbuch (1890).
is

In Buhl

editions (1895-

1910) of the same work the explanation

not repeated.

XIX.
that can be said
is that, if
iT13

ij-23
2, 5. $.

i 59
68, 13 be sound,
sit
ill

the text of

Hab.

Hebrew must
con

have possessed a verb

nected with

with some such sense as to

;

qniet (which does not,

3

however, appear in the cognate languages)

it.

and that

may perhaps be
in general, it

}TI3

however, does not signify

habitation

denotes

in particular a pastoral abode (see especially II 7, 8), and is only applied figuratively The to other kinds of abode in poetry Ex. 15, 13, or the higher prose II 15, 25.
is so different that it seems doubtful whether a word closely allied to this would have been chosen to denote a residence of prophets. Ewald, Hist. iii. 70 (E. T. 49 f.), starting from the same root follows a different track, and reaches

application

is to intend, accordingly a different goal. propose, direct the mind upon to study ( for what is here begins the process of conjecture a thing; hence Study but the direction of the mind upon an object? ), and the subst. a place

co

of study, a

college, a school ! Again, not merely is a hypothetical change of but a very special sense, unsupported by analogy, and meaning postulated unheard of afterwards, is assumed to have been acquired by the word at a
:

relatively early period in the history of the

Hebrew language.

The

Kt. should probably be pointed

rq 33

(c

f.

LXX

eV

AvaO

with

the original fern, termination, preserved in

(Tenses,

many
n^3).

old proper

names
is

181

n.

comp. e.g. HDnv,

:

JTiin,

The form TVU

rare (rVH, JTDJ?, rVSX

Ol. p. 412).

It is just possible

(on the ground

of the masc. H13) that the

(although, as Dr.
to
its

word

in itself

might have
of the

signified dwelling

Weir remarks,

the absence

art. is

an objection
:

being supposed to have

it

any such appellative sense here)

locality in

more

probably of which
20.
2, 5.

is

the

name

of

some

Ramah,

the signification

is lost

to us.

33
is

1DJ?]

standing as one appointed over (i Ki.

in

4, 7.

Ruth

6) them.

bination
parallel.

Both ptcpp. are represented peculiar and suspicious, |^

LXX,

but the

com

32E>

26, 7

being not quite

22.

12ti>3

2e
is is

= W3

Omit prob. TOJ? (Sm.). For NTl read 1NT1 (Versions). TVUn 113 iy] LXX os TOV <pearos TOV aAw TOV ev TW -rate jnjn ni3 The article in brun ny, no doubt rightly.
"1B>N

irregular (on 6, 18);

and a
.

at? or bare height (often in

Jeremiah)
a

a natural site for a

p3

22. -O01]
(cf.

$c.

iciNH, as

1 6, 4.

The more

usual

nON^

is

12, 5,

with the note).

23. tap]

LXX

eVei&v

=
for

DBto.

So Th. Klo. Weir, Bu.

comp. Jud.

etc.

1 v

having dropped out in transcription

i, i

16,

4 Iv A\acapr]x

for

T^. Am.

(v

Aape</i

160
K3iJT1

The First Book of Samuel,

Tn
pf.
IViprjl

ll]

Irregular

comp.

II

6,

TJn

tb
a

and
D obn

with the

(as a freq.)

13, 19

n\Wb

"J^n

"pro.

Jos. 6, i3

nina^a

wn.

These four are the only

irregular cases.

The

normal type would be K33nm Y^n 1^1 (on 6, i2 a ); and this should doubtless be restored in each (so Ehrl.) notice the regular type in
:

Jos. 6, i3
24.

(yipni itan
i.e.

-|bin).

D~iy]

as

Is. 20, 2.

Mic.

i,

8 without the upper garment,

and wearing only

the long linen tunic,

which was worn next the

skin.

The

passage records another explanation of the origin of the proverb

i

0^333

lNK

QJil,

which
f.

refers

it

to a different occasion

from the one

described in 10, 10

20, i-io.
cover that
it

David entreats Jonathan

is

to let
kill

him know

if

he can dis

really Saul s

purpose to

him, and suggests to him

a plan by which he
1.

may do
no

this (vv. 5-7).

cf.

Kp3E
ntry
.

^a] with

subj. expressed:

on

17, 25.
^7
i.

2.

The
"6]

Kt. can only be pointed

nfc>y

e.

If

my

father

had done

which, however, yields a sense unsuited to the context.

therefore to be preferred.

The Qre

&v>

is

As

for the verb,

:

nb>y

would

doth not do be grammatical (hath not done Tenses, 12) but the which is expressed by the Versions, is preferable (Am. 3, 7) impf., My father doth not anything great or small, without revealing it to
: :

me

(lit.

uncovering
"liy

my

ear: 9, 15).
:

is no doubt an accidental dittograph of y and T but 3. ya^l] y3K"1 seems sufficiently justified by the mrp Tl which follows David
:

strongly protests
intentions.

that there
is

There

thus

is ground no occasion

for

his

suspicion of Saul

to follow

We.
on

al.

in reading

with

LXX
n)

(/ecu a-H-expiOr))
is

3B1

for y3B*l

a^H

alone for 13T

(see

% 3

BTl

(II 3,

found only in poetry, and

late

Heb.

12, 3).

as Ex. 9, 16 (Lex. 19^). E^INl] a strong adversative: but indeed,

y& Da]
subst.,

a] introducing the fact asserted in the oath, as 14, 44 etc. the like of a, footstep is, etc. 3 is properly an undeveloped
the like
1

of

for instances of a

subst.

compounded

with

it

forming the subj. of a sentence, see Lev. 14, 35 JV33

HK1J

y)33.

Lam.
1

i,

20

rws>3

rpaa.

See Lex. 453*

and especially Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften,

i.

(1885),

PP. 37 6 -38i.

XIX.
only here
:

2jXX.
is Is.

161

the

meaning

clear
27, 4.

from the Aram. Nyo^S,

Comp.
4.

the cognate verb in

that
31

Jonathan offers to David may suggest.

"iBKn

test his father s state of

mind, in any way

TO]

lit.

thee

= whatsoever
:

what doth thy soul say? and I will do it for thy soul saith, I will do it for thee similarly
:

Est. 5, 3. 6
1&?SJ]

Tenses,

62.
in

Cf.

on n,

12.
is

The

emotional impulses
periphrasis for

Hebrew psychology hence ^ 3: (^23, the simple pronoun: Gen.

S3
:

the usual seat of the

is

1K>QJ)

used as a pathetic
19. 25.

27, 4.

31; Nu.
16

23, 10 and Jud. 16, 30 (obliterated in AV., on account of the difference

in the

Hebrew and English conception of

:

the

soul );

ch.

2,

(comp. note)
A- 3, 3",

in

poetry (often
35, 95 Is
like
-

in
*>

parallelism
42,
i.

with

the

pronoun),
29
al.

i.

34, 3-

M-

55, 2;

Jer. 5, 9.

Its

use,

in

passage

the

present,

is

mark of grace and

on
2,

courtesy.

lENTl]
is

LXX

iTTiOvfj.^,

reading perhaps
cTriOvp.c<a,

H)jNri

[cf.

16],

which

usually the
it

Hebrew of

or PtftW, as in Dt. 14, 26, where

is

also

is

connected with
"]B>aa

Only here
all

emO. the translation of

:

nos*
5.

(Dr. Weir).

Bu. Sm. Now.

read

msn
v.

cf.

II 3, 21.

3K N

355*]

David, as appears
daily

from

25

ff.,

was, together with

at

Abner and Jonathan, Saul s

thus the sentence
jl

and regular companion

table:

cannot be so related to the preceding one, as though the new-moon were the occasion of his being a guest
3B*
"3JX1

at the

king

s table

on the contrary, the new-moon

is

rather alleged
"

as the excuse for his absence.

Consequently, the rendering,

To

morrow
excluded

is
;

new-moon, and I must sit with the king at meat" is and the only course remaining open is to read with LXX
"

2*N N? aty
king
at
:

To-morrow

is

the new-moon, and I will not

let

sit

with the

meat

but thou shall

me go

"

etc.

Now.

Bu. dissents.

For the new-moon, as

So Lohr, Sm. (We.). a festival and popular

and
is

holiday, see 2 Ki. 4, 23.

Am.

8, 5.

JVEWn] cannot be
omitted by
is

construed grammatically with liyn,

But on the third LXX. Targ. (Or) on the third day. b and JVB^pt?, when without a noun, is always ^v^D Qi ? always a third part (Dr. Weir). Probably the word is a gloss due
day
;

1365

162
to a scribe

The First Book of Samuel,

who observed
till

that

in point of fact

David remained

in

concealment
6.

the third day (v. 35).

inf.

In this verse we have two idiomatic uses of the

abs.

com

bined: (a) to emphasize the terms of a condition expressed by DX, which has been briefly noticed before (i, n): add Ex. 15, 26. 19, 5.
21, 5.
9.

22, 3. II. 12. l6. 22. 23, 22

:

ch. 12, 25.

14, 30,

below

VV. 7 b

21

(b] at the

beginning of a speech, where a slight emphasis

is

often required: so v. 3.
14, 28. 43.

Gen. 43,

3.

7.

20.

Jud.

9,

8.

ch.

10,

16.

23, 10

II

i,

6; 20, 18.

7NtW] on the force of the Nif. (asked for himself, asked leave ; so

Neh.

13, 6), see

Ew.
i,

123^; Stade,
:

167^;

GK.

516.

D^H
7.

mr]

as

21

cf.

on

i, 3.

noto ro DK] See on

v. 9.

14, 9.

IDyo .... nri73]

Trapa with gen.):
8.
"pay

25, 17. Est. 7, 7

is

accomplished
origination
28, 29.

(=
(

deter

mined) of him or on
i

his part.
2,

DyD expresses

Greek

Ki.

33.

12, 15. Is. 8, 18-

7y] Everywhere else Dy

or 7.

1DH

Plt^y,

or, occasionally

(Lex.

794

a
),

nx

There occur indeed 7K

7, 28.

HDPI HDJ

Gen.

39, 21,

and
it

7y non HBJ Ezr.

alien to
is

9,

but 7y suits as naturally with n&: as

is

DPy.

Doubtless, therefore,

Dy should be restored, which

expressed also by

LXX,

Pesh. Targ.

For the

covenant/ see

18, 3-

Dn] For the emphatic position of nnx,

HT

cf.

on

17, 56.

TO7 T3K

IJfl]

but to thy father wherefore shouldest thou

bring
cf.

me ?
L]

Notice the emphatic position of

72X

ny, before the adv.

before
for

and N?n

Jer. 22, 15.

Neh.

13, 17.

Job 34, 31 7N 7N
i

*3

ICNn
8, 37.

unto

GW

did one ever say? before 13 Gen. 18, 20.

9.

Ki.

Mic.
15.

5, 4. 9,

Ez. 14,

i3al.
i/^.

before

DX

^. 66, 18;

before

HD

Est.
9.
il

i,

i2 a ; before iy
in

141, 10.
in the previous verse
is
;

^ ri7vn]
DX 3]
S

answer to the remark

if

so

v. 2.

for

know

that the evil

determined of

my

father

to

come upon
150*;

thee,
cf.

shall I not tell thee that?

N71 as Ex. 8, 22

(GK.

on

ii, 12.

16, 4):

but very probably N?n should

affirmatively,

be read (so Bu.).

Ke. We. construe

assuming an apo-

XX.
siopesis
: . . .

6-i)
thee that
(sc.

163
so and so

and

do not

tell

may God

do

to
Jl

me

1 !)
.

nnx N^]

nriN

is

very emphatic
l

cf.

on

15,

(d)

10. n{?p

72N

"j:jp-no

IN]

if perchance
is

(?)

thy father

and 21, 10. answer thee

with something harsh.

If the text

correct, IK

must have here the

unusual sense of if perchance (RV.).

indef.

There

is

no

difficulty in the
it

no

(19, 3), or in the

position of TW\) in apposition to

at

the

but IN means as a rule or or or if (Ex. (see and ifperchance is so different from or or or if, that it is 21, 31 al.);

end

on

26, 18):

very doubtful
26, 41.

if

it

is

sufficiently

supported by

this

passage and Lev.

for

Most probably we should read here DN

no

IN,

and

in

WTiN (Bu. Sm. Now.). Lev. 11-17. Jonathan renews his promise to let David know, if he finds his father s evil intentions towards him confirmed (vv. 12-13. 17).
TNI for

In view of David

s future

accession to the throne, he implores David

kindness for himself,

(vv.
:

or, in case

he should not survive, for

his children

14-16 cf. 2 S. 9). It will be noticed that whereas in vv. i-io David entreats the help of Jonathan, the roles are here reversed, and
Jonathan entreats the favour of David. 12-13. This difficult passage is best rendered:

Yahweh, God of
[(or) the
shall I

Israel [be witness]

third (day)],

when

I shall
is

sound

my

father

to-morrow

and behold there

as v. 9, though again
disclose
it

good toward David, N?n would be better) then send unto

not (N^l
thee,
:

and
one
it

to thee

Yahweh do

so to

me

and more also

2
,

if

make
thee

evil

towards thee pleasing to

my

father

will disclose

to

etc. (so

RV., the sentence being merely

to

somewhat more

closely

accommodated

English idiom).
ft
nB>JP

It is true that

commonly
TO"

more
DN

emphatic particle follows

na, and
jll

that the

analogy of other
, .

passages might have led us to expect

(II 3, 9) or
21 rtafct

n^lN

*3

"a

....
y\

TO *
1

"a

&6 DN

(cf.

II 19, 14)

but the types

of sentences with

ntyjp

n3 are not perfectly uniform, and there

It is difficult to

think that

Haupt

is

right in identifying

N?

(/<?)

here with the

Arabic asseverative particle J (AJSL, 2 Or, with Klo. (see p. 164, note on

xxii, 1906, p. 201, cf. p. 206).

30 M ),

inserting

N^n?

after *QN,

if

one

make

it

pleasing to

my

father to bring evil upon thee. 2

164
seems
to

The First Book of Samuel,

be no
necessity for
it.

such a particle to be used,

if

the sense

is

sufficiently plain without

it

is

At the beginning, if mrP is a vocative, with the speech following, in which the second person agrees badly throughout Jonathan, and in this case ^J? has probably fallen out after
(so Pesh.
15.
1

m
9,

RV.)
is

On inn

nj

see

on

9,

16; and on

}TX

rfa,
is

n*BWn
lit.

as perplexing

and

intrusive as in v. 5,

and

no

doubt, as there,

a correction ex eventu
behold,

used similarly in the enunciation of a particular hypothetical alternative, Dt. 13, 15; 17, 4; 19, 18 ; and in Lev.

rum]

and

13

14 frequently.

Comp. above, on

9, 7.

3D

1
"

11

D^cn
see

punctuation (make good or pleasing to) implies as subject 1 6, Perhaps, however, the word ought to be read as (on 4).
(be pleasing to),
s

The

QallW*

construed with

DK

as

IT^.

II

n,

25,

where
this

note (though KIo.

N Oil?

after

3X would remove even

good
to is

irregularity).

But the Heb. idiom

for seem
right.

not ?N 3tp^ but

yj?2

ao
a

so

30^

after all

may be

I4~i5
still

Another

difficult

passage.

And

wilt

thou not,

if

am

alive (sc.

when thou comest

to the throne), wilt thou not

shew

toward
yh"\

me

the kindness of

Yahweh,

that I die not

The second
:
<3

20,

i Ki. must be treated as merely resumptive of the first cf. TV1 Gen. 27, 30; nVT) Dt. 20, n. But most moderns prefer 31
;

to point tfS (II

alive,

8,

12) for

twice
t&>]

And

oh

that,

if

am

still
!

oh that thou wouldest shew toward

me

the kindness of

Yahweh

(on m?DK N71 see the next note). Resumption, however, of either frOI or N?1 would be on 25, 26) ; and what we should very unusual (see
expect
II 9
,

is

simply

Ti

ns?yn *6n ^i

my

DSI
:

non, as

D<nta

non

3-

DICK N^l] This clause does not

in itself cause difficulty

nevertheless

LXX,
S

Vulg. both render as

if it

expressed the opposite alternative to

"Oliy

DK

(KOL lav

6ava.Tu>

airoQavo), si vero

mortuus fuero).

Accepting

this view,

(though such a connexion), or (Bu. Now.) read HICK rfe Q{O, supposing N^I to have come into the text by some

we must

either (Sm.) read niJ2N

in

nto

for

niOX

&}

KP would be unusual

* X niiT as an accus. expressing an oath ( = By Ehrlich, however, regards = By the Temple! cf. in the Talm. D H^SH = By God! !) |iyOH
1
:

HM

{Randglossen,

i.

216).

XX.
error
ni

ij-i6

165

DN1, for instance, having dropped out, DICK being con

v.

nected

with

14,

and

fc<6l

Render then (connecting with

wilt

being needed to complete the sense. v. 1 5), And, if I should die, thou

not cut off thy mercy from

my

house

for

ever

1
.

Or,

with

a slighter change in

MT., but
bl

at the cost

of another

resumption,

we
if

might read
I

31

man
nnan

niCN niB ON *6l

etc.

And

thou wilt not,

should die, thou wilt not cut off/

"pon
si>

But again, what we should

expect is ji b-i6.

niDx

ms

DNI.
V.

I5

y\

mam

N^l]

third difficult passage.

15

will just

admit of the rendering,

And
not

thou

wilt

not cut off thy kindness from

my
and

house

for ever,

and

(=

yea, not)

when Yahweh

cuts off the

enemies of David,
in v.

But the repetition of vh\ is very awkward ; 16 not merely is the covenant concluded with the house
etc.
is

of David strange, but clause b

anacoluthic,
it

not that

Yahweh should

require

and what is expected is from the hand of David s enemies,

fail

but from the hand of David himself, in case he should

conditions of the covenant.
reading, uniting 15^ and 16,

to

fulfil

the

LXX
and

points to another

and preferable
KOL

treating the

whole as a continuation
:

of Jonathan
ev

speech in 15* (as rendered

E^^/DOIJS

in the last note)

et

^
T^S

TW caiptiv Kvpiov TOWS

AaueiS

IKO.O-TOV aTro irpocrwTrov

eap6r]va.L^ TO oVoyua TOU IdivaOav O.TTO rov OLKOV y}s, tvpf.6rjva.i [cod. ns run* mana 2 N^i AauetS i.e. ni|* noiKn 3B ^yn t^ N in
<TN

nn

n^a CyD

inJin"

DK>

And when Yahweh

cutteth off the enemies

of David, each one from the face of the ground, the name of Jonathan
shall not be cut off from the house of David.

The

clause

jl

B>pai,

which was incongruous

in

MT.,

is

now

in

its

appropriate place, in

Jonathan
friend:
cf.

II 4,

by him on behalf of his and may Yahweh require [Gen. 31, 39. 43, 9. Jos. 22, 23; n] it at the hand of David s enemies! (viz. if they presume
s

speech, as a final wish expressed

to

attack or calumniate him).

The

reading

is

also supported

by

24, 22,

where Jonathan says

to David,

Swear

to

me now

that thou wilt not cut off

my

seed after me, nor destroy

by Yahweh my name out

We.

s n"nan fcO

niDN DX V&\
not
.

is

a form of sentence against analogy.

representing NP1 by *ai
Jer.
t! ^77,

We. Bn. K^N^I and may

fcOl
:

LXX,

vocalized

wrongly

see below,

on II

13, 26;

and comp.

11,21 LXX).

166
of

The First Book of Samuel,

father
s

my

house.

Jonathan, being David

brother-in-law,

and
that

prescient that David will succeed Saul

upon the throne, prays

when

his

enemies are destroyed

(cf.
i

especially, in

accordance with the

2 Ki. 10, 6.
s

usual Oriental custom

Ki. 15, 29.

his

16,

n.
s

ir, i),

the family of his predecessor

own
i

relationship with David

house

may
....

not

be forgotten or disowned.
is

David

acknowledgement of

the obligation
DJJD
DK>

recorded II

9,

cf. 21, 7.

The

expression rP33

recurs

Ruth
;

4, 10.

The passage is very difficult And if Thus Smith reads

:

(&O1)>

and other suggestions have been made about it. when Yahweh cutteth off the enemies of David,

etc.,

the

name

will [or

may] Yahweh

of Jonathan should be cut off with the house of Saul (so Luc.), then require it at the hand of David ; i. e. should David forget
will be the avenger.

the covenant,

God

Upon
(cf.

this

view

"Q^X

will be a scribe s

insertion to avoid the imprecation on

David
it

25, 22. II 12, 14).

2,

For the

constr. of
pf.

Np

see Lex. 530,

Ib,

tOv Ib:

occurs once (Mic.

n)
its

with a
it

and

ivaiv consec. in the apodosis.

But with regard to

all these restorations,

fcO"l

must be

remembered

that the separation

of either N71 or
:

from

verb by a long

intervening clause is very un-Hebraic

either
Jl

in

ordinary

Hebrew we should expect

N^l) the resumption
fully

rH3?
118

(or

ON) &6 ......

1
"

maml, or (with IVEm

on
v.
if

of NT] (or N?l) before fTlS

Tenses,
.),

(cf.

14-15*; and see more

on

25, 26

though

it

may

be doubted

there are any cases of this quite

parallel to that of JOl (or N7l) here or in v. 14-15*.

And Jonathan made David swear jrui.T *)DVl] does not agree with the context. The impassioned entreaties addressed by Jonathan, vv. 14-16, to David might with some
17.

in nx
But

jrOPr

again/

this

show of

plausibility

be termed an adjuration of David

,

as,

however,

they are entreaties on behalf of himself they cannot be regarded as any

special token of his love towards David.
in v. 17 agrees only with the reading of
"

It

follows that

LXX ^nb
i.

}n$r

And Jonathan sware

that

to

David

again,"

e.

repeated the oath of

slill

v. 13,

he would inform David

if

his father

meditated

evil

which also has the advantage of admitting of a strict for v. 12 f. (to which the reference will now be) interpretation an actual oath, whereas vv. 14-16 do not properly express express
against him,
:

an adjuration

(We.).

With 17^

cf.

18, 3

Or

(Bu. Sm.)

1H

?&

(Jer. 38, 16).

XX.
18-23.

i6-ig

167

The

sequel to

v. 10.
s

Jonathan unfolds to David his plan

intentions towards him.

for acquainting

him with Saul

nc>tal]

19.

1NO Tin

For Tin

LXX
it

has eVio-Kc^,

i.e.

Ipsn, in
""jnnn,

correctly vocalized

for 1i?2^ thou shall be missed (so Targ.

Pesh. fco/

Ju^k-x>),

which agrees as

should do with

1ND

greatly,

and

is

evidently right.
ii
is

To

(Jud. 19,

different),

go down is an idea which, as used here would not be qualified by greatly: RV.
liberty with the

tjuickly takes
^?E>

an unwarrantable

Hebrew.

is

a denom., to do a thing the third time (i

1
.

KL

18, 34), or, as

here, on the third

Lit. day thou shalt be missed greatly

and thou

shalt act

on the

third day,

and thou

shalt on the third

day

be

missed greatly;

cf.

Is.

29, 4

ninn

pNE

D^S^l

lit.

and thou

shalt

be humbled, thou shalt speak from the earth

= and

thou shalt speak

humbly from the earth, the second verb,

application of the
first.

in
is

The

principle
2,

each case, defining the the same as that which

underlies the idiom explained

the two verbs are in the
^tNVt

on

limn
cf.

mn 7K,
120^
1
end"

though as a rule
}.

same tense (GK.

in

pNH]
a-n-o

LXX

TO epya/3 cKtlvo:

v.

41,

where

32 :n

h?NE>

is

both passages, the translators Clearly, found before them the same word, which they did not understand,
rendered
TOV apyafi.

and

therefore,

as in similar cases (e.g. v.

20

App.aTTa.pfi

14,

al.

Meo-cra/3),

simply transliterated.
the present

And
is

in

as

compared with
is

Hebrew

text,

both passages their reading, has the presumption of

v.

originality in its favour.

the south

Here ^TNn

a vox nihili; in

41

beside

a position which does not admit of being fixed, and from

which, therefore,

no one can be conceived as arising;

at the

same

Expressions not quite identical, but analogous, are cited by Roed. from Arabic

in the TAes., p.
2

i427

b.
Is. 29,

Better here (by the side of

first

4) than in

I2O C where the second verb

,

is

subordinate to the

163 06s., second paragraph). Lagarde (Bildung der Nom., p. 212) illustrates the combination of different thus in Arabic tenses from analogous constructions in other Semitic languages
(Tenses,
:

k1i

Ji.>

=
5*

he

continued looking,

t_>AJ

S^/^

he was nearly melting ;

*jJLT
in

{)&.
-it
is

there shall not have been left (Wright, Ar.

Gramm.
it

ii.

10)

and

Ethiopic J&aDfrX;

OA:

he

is

about to come,

(Dgfa J&MlC:

hath finished

to lie

already laid, Mt. 3, 10 (Dillm. Eth. Or.

89. 2, Eth. Lex. col.

932

f.).

1 68

The First Book of Samuel,

is the presumption that 7K was in both passages followed by some similar word. Restore, therefore, here (* lK?n or) T?n SJHSn and in v. 41 33"i8n 7ND; pn has occurred before in 14, i, and is

time, there

expressed here also by Pesh.

(<*)

3J1K

is

a word which

(cf.

2|!~!)

would naturally
20.

signify a

mound of earth,
the claims of

JNl] Notice the

. .

mix

jtn]

LXX

emphatic pronoun. iTnK [rm] D xro tf|?te

<JKI,

which are well stated by We. B .fB K will be construed as in v. 19, to which Jonathan s promise now forms the counterpart, And I on
the third day will shoot to
that
its

side with arrows.

It is true,

of course,

Jonathan
it ;

in fact shoots but

first

to fetch

but in the

one arrow, and the boy at once runs general description of what Jonathan will
find the arrows that I shoot

do, the expressions

shoot with arrows,

are naturally used.

As

a lyiD, however, must evidently be carried

out in accordance with the terms arranged, the fact that in

no mention

is

made

of the three arrows of

v.

MT.

is

v. 35 ff. an indication that

they were not originally part of

20.

mv, though
(i.e. fa3f,

omitted in

LXX,
:

may
see

be retained, but must be pointed rRX

referring to 3J~iNn
loc.)
is

on

II

21, i).

In MT. n^X

(not

mx,

with n

for FPIX

pxn), the mappiq being omitted, as occasionally happens (about 30 times), e.g. Ex. 9, 18; 2 Ki. 8, 6; Is. 23, 17. 18: Ew.
(referring to

247-1(2); Stade,
\>

3470;

GK.
me

9 ie (under
etc.

yd

fern."),

1038.

n7B>7]

so as to send it for

The

reflexive 7, implying that

the

rbw

is

done with

reference to the speaker,

or for his pleasure,

cannot be properly reproduced in our idiom. Comp. on II 18, 5. 21-22. D^nn] LXX throughout have the sing., i.e. Xnn, an unusual form (see on v. 36^), which might readily be changed errone
"

ously into a
21.
^<VO

pi.,
"]?]

as in

MT.
10x7 (which
is is

Either prefix

required in prose), or

(Sm. Ehrl.) read NVE7.

ilWl Unp]

As

the text stands, 13np

:

addressed to David, the

suffix

relating to the lad

Fetch him and come.

We. reading

with

LXX
boy,

^nn
fetch

(sg.)
it,

makes
and

1Jnp the

end of the words addressed

to the

treats

HN31 as beginning the apodosis.

But though

Like the sporadic CK^, JOT, Dtfb,

EW

(II 12, i):

GK.

7",

23*,

72".

XX.
^Tin

20-2<)

169
1

may

be
is

right, for the

apodosis to be introduced by
if

and the

imperative

most unusual,

indeed

it

occurs at
it

all in

the

OT.

if,

therefore, this view of IJHp

be adopted,
for

will

be necessary

to read

either riNZU O r (Bu.

Sm.) HNb,

nNil; the
pN,
cf.

latter is

favoured by the

corresponding
22.

"p

in v. 22.

With

"D*7

Nu.

20, 19.

-jn^]

will

have sent thee away

(sc.

in the case supposed).

The
ence

pf.
.

as 14, 10; Lev. 19, 8; II 5, 24 (Tenses,

,
,

17;
a
.

23.

~|>N

~Qini] the casus pendens

s

GK.
to

is

to

David

promise to shew kindness

i43 Jonathan and

GK. 106). The refer

his

descendants in the future (yv. 1416).

discovers what his father

25. }D31iT Dp^l]

24-34. Jonathan, adopting the plan suggested by David s intentions towards him are.

(vv. 5-7),

LXX KOL 7r/Doe

11

</>0acrev

TOV Iwvaflav (Luc.

is

more

correctly

aiVov Iwvatfav), implying Dip

position of those at the table

!.

Rose up
described,

out of place: the relative

is

opposite to Saul

the seat opposite to

and Jonathan was in front, Abner was vacant. True, D^p

to come or go in front ; but not perhaps necessarily, and the use of the word here would closely resemble that in 68, 26

commonly denotes

i/r.

D HB M^i? the singers were

26.
"lino

in front.

Tta] The only passage

Is. 14, 6.
e>v

in

which *rp3

an

adj. (as elsewhere

at least in poetry

used to negative It TQ, e.g. Hos. 7, 8).

is

negatives a subst. once,

"lino

See Lex.

n6 b
;

N^a] LXX
As

cm
:

KfKaOdpto-Tat.
is

"^B

N?"

?,

which

relieves

the tautology of
cleansed.

MT.
be

he

not clean

for

he hath not been

thus read, the clause will state the ground

to
still

why Saul
the

supposed David
27.

TinD Tlia.
the

y^n Ennn mnOD Wl] Keil: And on a fact new-moon there was the second (day),
to

morrow of

so patent as hardly

be worth recording.

Better with

LXX

(and substantially RV., for

1

the

word cannot be understood} insert D^ ? before ^JtJTl, on the A slight redundancy of morrow even on the second day.
.

expression

is

not out of

harmony with Hebrew

will
f.

style, especially

when,

as here, the

second day

suggest to the reader a repetition of

the scene described, v. 24

29. TUX ^-nitf

On

rnnDO, see GK.

JV^J?

8o g
Nini

n.

establish

it,

I/A. Kim] even the Most High.

Cf.

87, 5

nj:i3

and

He

will

The unusual form

of expression

170

The First Book

to

of

Samuel,

may have been intended command from one whom

does not read naturally.
Ez.
*n
1 6,

suggest that David had received the he would not willingly disobey. But it
r

We. Bu. w ould

NH).

read NH1 and

lo

(Gen. 47, 23.

43t;
Jn.

cf.

Aram.

^
s

This, or

For the words quoted LXX express * sni, is most probable (note my

brethren

just below).
:

for VW see GK. S 20*. So annn but 3inn. V A nninn nijjj p] Commonly rendered son of a perverse 30. woman The being ptcp. Nif. fem.) in respect of rebelliousness.

nsl in pause

-7

**

(J"l$3

expression
is
it

is,

however, peculiar, and excites suspicion.

to a descriptive adj. for the

The

genitive

attached

commonly

purpose of defining

(Ew.
/"

288c;

GK.
;
(<5)

128*7)
H^JfJ?
0/"

thus (a) :& 12 pure of heart, D

M
;

pa
IB
J

clean
J?B>3

hands

"ON

perishing in
;

regard
J

to

counsels
(Pr.

forgiven /# respect

transgression

(c)

DJ7B

rPD

n,

22) a

woman
tion);

turned aside in respect ^discretion (= turned aside from discre JJPB r^ (Is. 59, 22) those turned back from transgression;
"

nrpnpp

3W
if

(Mic.

2,

8) =

averse from battle,

ri^lp, however, does not

different form.

define niX?3, but repeats the

IO,
b:,

same idea under a

to
rebel,

Further,

derived from
:

HID

nnay

Ol.

219^;

GK.
236

ought by analogy (cf. nttpg, 86k) to be pointed nVT)0 (with

aspirated l).

On
i,

these grounds, Lagarde, in a note on the expression

(Mittheilungen,

1884,

p.

f.)

contends that

IVlTllp is

not derived
)?

from 11D, but corresponds

discipline)
;

to the Syr. Lo?;j

<_$

discipline (from

to

and connecting myj with

to

go

astray, leave the right

path,

discipline]

gone astray from comparing the Arabic expression (Lane, p. 2305^ iCLc jjj son of a woman gone astray, \. e. son of a whore. But though

he renders the phrase

son of a

woman

Lagarde s argument is philologically just, the distinctively Syriac sense 2 is not which it postulates for probable

nm

Used (N.

B.) in

EVV.

not in

its

modern

sense, of contrary, but in the etym.

sense ofperuersus, SitffTpafj.fj.fvos (Prov. n, 20 @5(\vyij,a. Kvpiw Sifarpafj.fj.fvai 6Soi), i.e. twisted, crooked ; of one pursuing crooked and questionable courses (cf. the
writer
2

s Deuteronomy, on 32, 5, p. 353). But Lagarde is unquestionably right in maintaining that in HIV and its deriva tives two roots, distinct in Arabic, have, as in many other cases (see Tensed,

178 (pp. 230-232); and

to

cf.

on

15,

29), been confused in

;

Hebrew,
to err,

viz.
<j^.

bend

(e.g. in Is.

21, 3 J?Et?D

TVIJW

f. 38, 7);

and (Js.

go astray

XX.
The
(vie

2()-)}
is

171
We., to follow
a^
^)>

text

must be

at fault.

It

best, with
1

LXX

Kopa<ri<av

auro/xoXowrcDV =
goes, and to read

^Tl^L )
l"!VT]Sn

^^V?

cast as far as
rebellious girl,

the
i.e.
left

"i

in

myj
girl

rny.3 |3 j^

^/"a

of a
him,
1

who has contumaciously

rebelled against her master,

and

in

other words, of a runaway slave-girl.

KO.I
a>s

We. compares
TraTSas avrop.o-

Judith

6,

12 viol KOpafTitav /caTe/cevr^frav avrovSj

O.VTOVS,
III

\OVVTWV CTLTpUHTKOV

the

Sj riaC

Version

LXX
LXX
good

/xeVo^os,

i.

e.

"I-?!?

art a

companion
is

of,

which agrees with

7.

the following 7 (see Pr. 28, 24).

ICQ

construed with 3, not with

(Dr. Weir).

So Bu. Sm.

etc.

31. ni

p]
;

26, 16. II 12, 5.

II 19,

Cf. the poet,

nrncn ^n
i

(^. 79,

n.

102, 2 it)

and DID tWX

29;

m ^N
n.

Ki.

2,

26.

33

7D>1]

Read probably
.

^1,

as in 18, ri.
is

nW7
cf.

N^n n!?3 ^3] For this use of NTl (which

Jer. 50, 15. 25.

uncommon),

Ki. 18, 36.

51,

6.

n?3

is,

however, else-

(Qor.

2,

257. 7, 143. 19, 60

ji_w
.

and often
to keep

opp. to

to

go straight,

especially, as Lagarde abundantly shews, on the right path), which is found in Hiyn
:

to act erringly, II 24, 17 al.,

and

in the

common
its

subst. |iy iniquity, properly error.

is

The
ness,

idea expressed by H1J?

(=

t/isi)

and

derivatives

thus not that of crooked

perverseness
is still

=
5J>py),

but deviation

from

the light track, error: and this

:

sense

sometimes expressed by the ancient versions

-n-XavT|o-ecos,

as Is. 19, 14 (though

Pr.

here probably wrongly) D^yiy FTP TrreC^a

Dp
(as

n||J?3

)a*J^
lit.

;^\.>

one

deficient in

jl^A^J |uO$; understanding, Vulg. vanus

12,8

et excors

though

one gone astray from understanding).

The conventional rendering

of the frequent fiy by words of general import, such as dSi/cja, aftapria, iniquitas, iniquity, tends to conceal from those to whom the Hebrew term is thus familiarly

represented, the metaphor which originally underlay both nate verb.

1

py

itself,

and the cog

In Lncian

recension of the

LXX

there

is

a second rendering of the phrase in

question, viz. -fwaixoTpafprj, i. e. (as it seems) -woman-nourished, effeminate. Symm. has awatSevrajv airoararovvrfav , Theod y.tra.Kivov^tv<av. Vulg. substitutes

and Aptow.
to stand in

another disparaging comparison, based upon an old Jewish Haggadah (see Rashi ZAW. 1909, p. 245), Fill mulieti&vtrutnu/tro rapientis, which seems
;

some relation to the first part of the paraphrase of Chrysostom (X. 301 D, vl\ iropviSiaiv quoted by Field), as the second does to the rendering of Lucian
:

tTnfj.aivofj,(va}v dvSpdffiv,

fTrtrpf^ovTcuv rots irapiovaiv, \KVtV(VplO(i^Vt Kal

fj.a\a>c(

icai

prjSiv

"

Ix"-

avSpos.

Pesh. JJLo?iJ*3
:

IAQUM ^s

(comp. the rendering of Pr. 12, 8

cited in the last note

hardly

rmy3).

172
where confined
destruction

The First Book of Samuel,

to

poetry,

and expresses the idea of consumption,

as
Is.

(usually
nnp::

with

nc>y,

10, 23),

not that of complete

is

determination,

(LXX, We.

etc.) for KTI

n^O

certainly a

more

idiomatic expression (cf. vv. 7. 9),

34.

and

is

to

be preferred.

fn^n Dy] Cf. 2, 33 (Lex. 769*). 35-39. Jonathan acquaints David with Saul s intentions. 1 36. iyan] See on 9, 5. For the idiomatic fut.
. . .

instans,

mid,

cf.

10, 8.

24, 5.
bis,

Ki.

2,

and on

3,

n.
9,

38 Kt., 21 f. (LXX), and 2 Ki. a genuine alternative form of }TI (Ew. i86 e). xnn] So 37

24

MT.

Probably
the pi. in

Though
is

Hebrew
(liftA
*

is

&%?}, the form in Arabic

(i&L) and
that there

the plural in Eth.

tift&Yi Dillm. col.

is

134) shew

a parallel form,

the root of which

38. ntjnn
i,

a n*^ verb.
before the verb

rnnd] mriD
^. 31, 3

which

it

qualifies,

as 2 Ki.

ii

rm mno,
LXX,
b

O^n mn;
s

and

(for the sake of the

rhythm)

37, 2. Is. 58, 8.

Ehrlich

note

is

arbitrary.
is

NTl]

Pesh. Vulg. K3J1, which

final parting

preferable.

40-42. The
40.
4, 2.

between Jonathan and David.

24, 5. 25, 7. II 3, 8.
2
i

ne*]

17, 40.
15, 20.

21, 8. 22, 31.

Ki.
b
.

i, 8.

33. 49-

10, 28.

Ki. ii, 10.

16,

i3

Not always

with a compound expression.

41. 23:n
i>Han

Cf.

GK.

129^.

^NE>]

See on

v.

19.

in

ny] There seems no occasion to alter this; and

is

P^n

"iy

(with the

unparalleled Hebrew. abs.) z# that, forasmuch as, Gen. IB N] 42.

inf.

30, 18 etc.

cf.

on

15, 15.

uyntJ i]

Though an oath
For
na
aj
ai

is

not expressly mentioned, an agreement

(cf.

such as that of vv. 14-16 would be naturally sealed with one

24, 22).
-|Dfc6,

see v. 23.
cf.
i"i2"n

21,

2.

So

22, 9:
in

Ez. 25, 13;

24, 14,
ty.

also the anomalous

punctuation H-^
impf. ch. 28,

the imper. HJH Pr.

and

and

3 pers.

15 nA-jpKl (but see note),

and

20, 4

n3^T.

See GK.

90 (end); Ew.
Nob,
as
Is. 10,

216;

Stade,

132.

32 shews, was a place between Anathoth (now Anata, 2\ miles NE. of Jerusalem) and Jerusalem, whence the Temple hill could be seen perhaps a spot on the Ras el-Mesharif, I mile N. of Jerusalem, a ridge from the brow of
;

which (2685

^-)

^e
ft.).

holy city (2593

pilgrim along the north road See NOB in DB.

still

catches his

first

view of the

XX. 34-XXL

4
i/r.

173
52,
i
:

lnx] LXX
on
tion occurs in
i

ch. 22. 23, 6. 26, 6. A/Sei/xeAex, as also in

3>

the contrary, A^ct/xeAcx

7-

^>

T 7-

The same

rnistranscrip-

Ch. 18, 16 MT., where

LXX

has rightly A^et/AtAex,

We.

(the readings of
.
, ,

LXX
as
1

as given

by Swete).

vim]

6, 4.
.

PN 5^x1]

nw
3.

ps

sjajn
1

Gen. 4 o, 8 ink px nnbi. j u d. 13, 9 16, 15 r See Lex. 34^ px (but Nu. 20, 5 [ p y ]).
cf.
:rrtne>S>

ow

/<#.

SH"

btf S^tf]

The same

expression, Jer. 36, 19.

38, 24.

noiNO

as regards anything

at

all.

Tljnv] Po

el

from

y~f>,

according to Ew.

i25

a
,

to

make

a person

know
But

a thing in order to determine

him
to

to act accordingly

= to direct.
is

this

explanation requires

more

be supplied than
Jjnyi\

probable.

LXX
iyj

Siafjip.aprvpr]/jiaL,

which points to a reading

in

Po el from
place,

(see

p.

77 bottom],

Qal
8.

to

designate

or

appoint (a

II 20, 5;

a person, Ex. 21,

9):

hence

in

Po el

with a sense in

which

it is difficult to perceive the .characteristic force of the 3rd Arabic conjugation (Wright, Arab. Gr. i. 43 comp. above, p. 152 .), but which is at least that of the corresponding form (from to icj
:

promise) in Arabic, as

sJLelj f
[

Arnold, Chrestom. Arab., p. 197, 10;

w

Qor.

7,

138;

20, 82

.^i\

j^\

^^ L-*J^- ^SlJocljj

and we appointed

you

to the right side of the mountain.

So

here,

the

appointed to the place of such and such a one.

The

young men I have Hif. Tjnn is used

Job
9,

in a similar, but specially forensic, sense Jer. 49, 19

= 50, 44;
comp.

19.

Dr. Weir however writes:

rnjP DP* D H
that
is

Is

it

not rather

^"IJP?

Jer. 47, 7

syin

7N.

The Qal would

it:
in

certainly

seem

to express all

required.

^ta ^a]
of a
real

So Ru.

4,

Dan.

8,

13

"OC^a

the one

example
^Sli

contraction

which the Hebrew language

affords.

(Qor. 25, 30) and ^Xft are used in the same sense, perhaps derived

from the root of

and meaning properly a separate, particular one. "ODPN perhaps signifies one whose name is withheld (from D7K to be dumb}. Ew. 106 renders, ein gewisser verschwiegener.
"172,

4.

31 rift

nnyi] Keil,

RV. and

others

And now what

is

under

thine

hand ?
is

Five loaves of bread give into

my

hand, or whatsoever
Dni>

there

present.

But

this leaves the

emphatic position of

174
unaccounted
for
:

The First Book of Samuel,

and how could David ask
specifically for five loaves,

when

his

previous words had just implied

?

that

he did not

know

whether Ahimelech possessed them

el
tlcrlv

Read,

with

LXX
(

(A, Luc.)

(in

the

first

ei

has dropped out), DX for no

five

And now,
into

if there are under thy hand

loaves of bread, give

) ;

them

my
I

hand, or whatsoever there is present run Dr6 ON 71*. xxon 21

<T2

&

or else (Ehrlich),
that

nnn

?." ""P

lit.

which
15.

is

found,

i.e. that

which

is

here present, as

13,

16.
.

Gen. 19,

Jud.

20, 48.

An
In

idiomatic use of the Ntf. of

1

NVC

5.

H"

nnn
Here

ta]

The

use of ^N here Ez.

10, 2

is

destitute

of analogy.

Jer. 3, 6.

Zech.

3, 10.

nnn ^N
after

of course expresses motion

under.
B"

it is

simply a corrupt repetition of ?n.

position of B

BHp Dnb] The

preceding

BHp

Dni>

is

partly for variety

:

(after the
Is.
J

clause with

ps),

partly

for

emphasis

comp.
2
1B"1

43, 8

&
*3]

&?y\;

and P

similarly,

Lev. 26, 37. Mic.

2, 5.

7,

DTN3.
6.

Pr. 17, 16.

25, 14 (cf.

Gen.
7,

Is.

37, 3

al.).

DN
s.v,

apparently, as Jud. 15,

with the force of an oath: see

Ges.

who

renders hercle.

nB>N]

a good example of a sing, term used collectively.

For other

rather noticeable instances see Gen. 30, 37 ^p

fro).
4,

(note the following

Jud.
b

19, 12

Ty

(followed by nan). 2
Cf.

i,

16 (n^N as here). Jer.

in

29

T
i

J?

(note }n3).

GK.

12^,
certain

Also

^Nl^ ^N,

etc.

(14, 24,

and often);
34
e

and with

numerals (as

BN

D "^^),

GK.

-h

137~msy] kept away

(viz.

by a

religious taboo,
to

on account of war
cf.

being a sacred work) in reference

us, i.e.

(Anglice) from us:

\j/.

7
;

construed with verbs of removing or withholding in

40,

84, 12

Job 12, 20; and in the Syr. and the prohibition of women

>_s>.

War was
455).

regarded as sacred;
in
it

to

men engaged
Sem?

is

wide-spread

(DB.
I

iv.

827^;

W.

R. Smith, Rel.

31 blEn^] as heretofore (i. e. on previous occasions), when have gone forth (viz. on a military expedition), so that the gear (clothes, arms, etc.) of the young men is holy, even though it is
Dc6tJ>

common

(i.

e.

not a sacred) journey

how much more

(their)

so

\_Le.v.
?

5]K 2],

when

to-day they will be consecrated with

gear

a distinction being drawn between expeditions of an ordinary kind,

XXI. j-8

175

and campaigns opened by consecration of warriors (cf. the Heb. war, and warriors: Mic. 3, 5. Jer. 6, 4. expression to consecrate
22, 7. 51, 27. 28.
Is. 13, 3.
is

Joel

4, 9),

present excursion

of the latter kind,

and David hinting that his and that the ceremony of

as

consecration

will

take

place
;

as

soon

he

joins
$>Ero

his

men

(so

W.

R. Smith, Rel. Sem. 2 456

as heretofore (e.g. Gen. 31,

these three days
;

2. 5.

Now.). Ex. 5,

Qvb&
7),

always means

not (as

EVV.)

about

and

for the rend, here

greater break at

gone

forth

),

adopted (which places the we must move the zaqef qaton from
11

tfthw to T1NV2.

Read

also

Itjnp

(LXX,

Pesh.

Kennedy, however, renders the last clause,

will

We. al.) for Pip how much more to-day

11

they be consecrated with (their) gear ? (viz. by the consecrated bread being put into their wallets, and so, according to ancient ideas (Lev. 6, 27 [for be read become], Ez. 44, 19; see DB. ii. 395), conveying the contagion of holiness to them) Lex. ]X 3.
:
"O

7.

D OSn

DPI?]

Presence-bread,

i.

e.

bread

set

out in

Yahweh
s

pre

and designed originally as His food. Ex. 25, 30; and DB. s.v. SHEWBREAD.
sence,

See the writer

note on

DHDIDn]

The

plur. DPI?

separate loaves

(cf.

might be explained as a reference to the mry): but this does not accord well
flB>Bn,

with inp^n at the end of the verse.

It is better, therefore, either to

read there &?!??

w
on

i tri

LXX,

or to suppose that the final D in

first

DHDIQ
and
for

has arisen by error from the

JstaroiD ion
(cf.
i,

O of

the

word

following,

24) to restore ijata nDIDil.

Comp.
na)

Jer. 29, 9

(read D*Dph); 36, 21 (rd. ?y, in accordance with idiom); Jos. 10, 21

(BK);
(rd.

Ch. 28, 23

(rd.

D"3#);

Hab.

i,

i6f. (rd.

Job 27, 13
letter

/KD).

See further instances in

ZAW.
Is.

1886,

211-213 (some
has

doubtful).

On

the

other
17, 17.
al.).

hand,

sometimes a repeated
45,
n.)

dropped

out, as ch.

II 3, 22.

n
;

(read D&KftTl with

i/r.

Hitzig, Weir,

Cheyne,

Dt. 15,14 (p. 133

and probably

42, 2

(nW),
8.

45, 7
i.

(DT6x3 1NDD: Edghill, Evid. Value of Prophecy, 252).

e.,

"ivyj]

probably, detained in the precincts of the sanctuary,

and precluded from entering it, by some ceremonial impurity. Jer. 36, 5 mrp rva NI:& ^IN N^ iivy ^N ; Neh. 6, 10.
D yin
s

Comp.

TIN] "^ is not chief (RV.), but mighty, which, however, does not well agree with D^yin, might or heroism being hardly a

176
quality which
in

The First Book of Samuel,

a shepherd

would be singled out

1

for

distinction.

Read, with Gratz,

^1?

for B^jnn,
s

the mightiest of Saul s runners

E"

or royal escort (so Now.): Saul In a runner, strength and 22, 17.
true,

?"}

are mentioned afterwards,

size,

such as

TIN

elsewhere,

it is

connotes, would be a the narrator might naturally remark upon.

only used in poetry

qualification

which

LXX
p.

45

.)
:

has vkyMv ras TJHIOVOVS SaouX, whence Lagarde (JBildung der Nomina, would restore D^yr! ^IIN manager of Saul s young asses (Jud. 10, 4.
cf.

12, 14)

P OiN, the
I

name

of an Ishmaelite, the overseer of David

camels
is

(DvtD3H ?y)
be skilled in

Ch. 27, 30.

Ibil in

Arabic

is

a herd of ca?nels, abila (denom.)

to

managing camels, and abzl (adj.) is skilled in the management of camels ; hence ?"ON, more generally, manager (of animals). The suggestion is ingenious but the strong Arabism is hardly probable and the n. pr. ^IIK is not
:

Hebrew, but Ishmaelite.

9.
P&tt]

The combination
is.

P&$

occurs

\j/.

135, 17;

hence PK

here
cf.

is commonly regarded nTy Gen. 49, u. irvtf

as an anomalous punctuation for

10, nfo
;

pN

17.
Jf
:

niry p r
ii.

8,
;

28

(for

what,

by analogy, would be fn JJ, fon?, e 286 n Kimchi, Ges. Ew. 2i3

,

Ko.

483

GK.

93*).

So

Stade,

194
to the
(\j/.

(2).

Delitzsch,
?

how
PN

ever (on

ty.

/.

c .), treats

PN as equivalent

Aram. PK num
5 etc.),

occurs in the Palestinian

indirect

Targums = if
DN,

7, 4.

also = n in

questions,

and

where the answer

px.
(e. g.)

No
7

is

expected,
b
:

Job

6,

12

^n
Heb.
a
.

N^nN
tfj
;

7"n

N^n
7

10, 4

n,
t

13, 9
.
. .

and
7,

n^N PN

(=

DK) occurs

simply

= if there

is

if,.

Job 33, 23
b^aB^D.
this,

32

Job
in

b 6, 6

J1

DytD n^N pN or

s there taste in the

white of an egg?

Lam.

i,

12.

an indirect question, i^. 14, 2 JVX PN OHD! But though the punctuators may have thought of

1898, 242 f.) of the in underlying the later ^N, such a pronounced Aramaism is not probable in an early narrative,
origin
;

or (Ko.

ZA W.

clearly of Judaic

and

it

is

better to read

having the
(Klo. Sm.)

same
is

interrog. force as in

Gen. 38, 17.

W and where

simply BX1,

DK
.

.f

not probable.
here.

Ehrl.
is

v^ and perhaps.
mean
institit ursitque

pro] only
so possibly

^^^J

stated to

rogando;

one

in

pn3 may have meant pressed on. But the root is a doubtful Heb. ; and perhaps pNJ urged on, from }^N to urge (Ex. 5, 13),

should be read.

XXL
10.

8-14

177

no]

Is. 25, 7.

Ki. 19, 13

IrmKa wa

DI

II 19, 5
it.

np 1^-npn

FiriirDK] If thou wilt take that for thyself, take

"HflX,

Cf.

for the position of

p.

Ex. 21, 8 Qre

(opp. to Uab,

z>.

7),

and

35; also on 15, i. np] Elsewhere always pointed nn. 11. na] See on 6, 17.
12.
"]^o]

Bu. Sm. Dh. Kenn.

14.

an anachronism, generally explained now as is done by Ehrlich, however, would read n? (18, 27).
1352*1 ]

loyETOK

And

he changed

it,

(even) his understanding

(25, 33).

common
it is

anticipation of the object of a verb by a suffix is Aramaic; but, though cases occur sporadically in Heb., not a genuine Heb. idiom and while there are no doubt instances
in
;

The

in

which

for distinctness the original writers

explained the

suff.

by the

addition of the object, there are others in which the combination

is

open

to the suspicion of being

due

to a faulty or glossed text, or, in

late

Heb., to Aramaic influence.

2,

Comp. Ex.
***
1

6 "PTTnX
ip (?rd.

lilfcTini

and

she

saw him,

the child,

35, 5 (P)

norm nx ns

tw),

Lev. 13,

57"

yjjn

-K?K

n
the

Ki. 19, 21

ijpan

D^3
but

(LXX om.
regard

"Man).

ai,

I3ni33~n
his children see
it,

Ki. 16, 15 Kt.

Is. 29,
;

23 (render, with Hitzig,

when

work

of

my

hands,

etc.

many

s
V"v

as a gloss). Jer. 9, 14

D?*3SD

^H

ruy

ntn oyn

nx (LXX
(om.
is

om.

mn
with
etc.

nyn ns).
LXX). p r
1
.
.

EZ

3,

21 (read nvnrt). 44, 7

^. 83, 12 105*13

Tva-nx i^ni?
make them,

wa
is

nx

5, 22.

oyp
where

(even) their nobles,

Here the emphatic

anticipation of an
rare even in strong

object such as 1DJ?t3

not probable, and the form of the suffix

verbs (see on 18, i)

found only once besides with a verb

H v,

II 14, 6,

No doubt 1355^* there are independent grounds for questioning its correctness. is an error of transcription for niJBty. So Ol. p. 547 Stade, Kon. i. 546, 143";
;

crnpQ

Comp. Ew. 309; GK. 131) nut? aNin n^s tons ^.

^>N

There are also other types, as

51, 56

Jer. 48,

44

-nip ^nn by n^y xn

;

(so often

in Syr., as II n, 3. 12, 5 Pesh. genitive, as Ez. 10, 3. 42, 14.

comp. above, on 5, 3) and with the suffix in the 131) and in Cn., in a form Job 29, 3 (GK.
;

recalling strongly Syriac usage,

Ch.

5,

26

D/M.
p.

23, 6.

Ch. 25, 10. 28, 15.

Is. 19,
"J^D

For the Mishnic usage,

the interrog.
""N,

see Segal, Alfinaic

Hebrew,

82

ff.

Only with one word,

12

does the apparent pleonasm appear to be idiomatic:

are they, then, thy wise
Is.

f O3n
1365

K12X !TN Where

DI
(in the
||,

men?

Ki. 19, 13

HCH

VN

37, 13 n^N). Mic. 7, 10

fn^N

7\\\P V-N.

178

The First Book of Samuel,

Read Dn^j
and
:

a Wyi, as Ehrlich rightly observes,

is

used

always idiomatically to denote in the opinion

bbnrvi]

of (so even Pr.

i,

17).

he behaved himself madly.

2, 5.
i.

The word

recurs, applied

metaphorically, Nah.
in their

Jer. 25, 16.

e.

51, 7.

hands,
nifi,

as they sought to restrain

him (Th. Ke.).

i.

Pi

el

from

with anomalous qamez, for

irpl,
i.e.

e.

scratched,
<

made meaningless marks. drummed on the doors of

raving
1 6.

But

LXX

cTv/t7ravtev

*]! and

he

the gates,

more

madman
jl

(Kp.).

So moderns generally:
of

suitable gesture for a bb cf. GK.

75

ion]

Am

I in lack
:

cated

by

the tone of the voice

mad men? The question b Cf. on n, 12 see GK. i5o

.

is

indi

and

22, 7. 15.
nrritf]
*6y]
lit.

See on 10, 27.

upon me,
D^iy

i.

e.

to

my

trouble

Gen. 48,
i

^y i?m nn.
It is

22,

i.

my]
is i

So

II 23, 13

Ch.

n,

i5t.
5,

remark

able that the

my

afterwards, both here, vv. 4.

and

in the other

passage, II 23, 14

be also

= Ch. u, 16, spoken of as a miv. Can a myo termed a mi0 A miE a mountain-stronghold 18, 3)
?

is

(fi.

and

in Jud. 6, 2. Ez. 33, side

27

rmyo and
;

at least

miSD

(Is.

33, 16) are

named

by

side as different kinds of hiding-place.

We. answers
and
for

the above question in the negative

in II 23, 13

and
is

believes that both here

Ch.

n,

15 oiny

my

an old error
Kitt.

D^iy HITO
Buhl,

the stronghold of Adullam (so Bu.

Now. Sm.

Kennedy \

Geogr. 97, Ehrlich).

Adullam
the
cities

is

mentioned

in Jos. 15, 35, next before

Sochoh and Azekah, among

of the Shephelah. This at once shews that it cannot be Khareitun, about 4 miles SE. of Bethlehem, with which, since the twelfth century, tradition has iden
tified
it. Clermont-Ganneau identified it in 1871 with Id el-miyeh, i\ miles SE. of esh-Shuweikeh (see on 17, i), supposing the ancient name to have been trans formed by a popular etymology into one of similar sound, significant in the vernacular (PEQS. 1877, p. 177). Id el-miyeh is a steep hill, on which are ruins

of indeterminate date, with an ancient well at the foot, and, near the top. caves of moderate size* (EB. s.v.). The site is suitable, but not certain (H.G. 229^).

As regards
it

the

meaning of Adullam, Lagarde (Bildung der Noniina, 54) ~

>

derives

plausibly from
1

U^

__

to

turn aside

(if

19,

157

Lane, p. 1973), with the formative

is

The expression cave of Adullam, which has passed into a proverb among us, due to a corruption of the similar Heb. word for stronghold in v. 4 (Century Bible, ad loc.).
"
"

XXL
affix

14

XXII. j

179

ai6 Stade, (Ol. 293; Earth, Nominalbildung, 352 f.; cf. GK. 85*), found frequently in proper names (DVi 3, CP^O, &c.), so that the word
:

D_

would

Heb. proper signify originally a retreat. served roots not otherwise found in the OT.

names have

in

many

cases pre

Adullam being in the Shephelah, and David s brethren, presumably, on the high ground of Bethlehem (2550 ft.), 12 miles to
ITVl]
the

ENE.

So Gen.

38,

i.

II 23, 13.

2.

XKO l^iK K

B"K-^3]

Cf. Is. 24, 2 12 Nt^J

1^N3

as (one)

who

has

a lender (creditor).
t?B3
3.

ID] Jud. 1 8, 25 ; cf. Job 3, 20 and on i, 10. 3N1O nsvo] There are several places in Palestine, both E. and
;

W.

of Jordan, called HSSfan, or nSJTBn,

the outlook-point;

and the

situation of this

one

is

not known.
text

NV] If the rendered come forth (to

,
,
,

CDDX

be

sound, these words can only be

be) with you.

But the case

is

not one in

which such a strongly-marked pregnant construction would be expected.

LXX

ytve o-0o>o-av, Pesh. ofco,

Vg. maneat.

Read

probably, not 3K7.

(Bu. al.), but y*\ (Ehrl.), which is closer to NV, and is used specifically of being left behind a place, Gen. 33, 15. Ex. 10, 24. For D3DN

LXX
4.

has

Trapo, o-oi

= I^N

so

Sm. Bu.

(cf. v.

a
).

BPI3M]

led

them

(so as to be) in the presence of the king of

Moab.
last,

Another pregnant construction, hardly

ya nK
1 8,

is

less expected than the not used in conjunction with verbs of motion ; and in

Pr.

16

wna:

BVM

Wfcfo

the prep,

is

different.
(

Targ. juntJW,

Pesh.
II
1 6,

>ftaj>o

point to the punctuation

left

Driji*!

see j OSt 6, 23 Targ.;

21 Pesh.) and he
KCU 7rapKaXeo-c
i.

them, which

is

altogether to be preferred.

(LXX
5.

= Qn^l.)
of Adullam: see on
v. i.

rvmEQ]

e.

the

hold

rrmm]

Pesh. naxsn

c f. v. 3), which, as the (

hold

was

in the

land of Judah, seems to be correct.

The site of Hereth is not known. LXX has tv 7roX 2ap. Conder s Khards, a village on a wooded mountain, 4 miles SE. of Id el-miyeh ( Tent Work, The suggestion that is an Aramaism for 243), does not agree phonetically.

mn

Ehh wood

is

very precarious

in

Targ.

NEHin

corresponds to tjnh (14, 27 al.);

and the rare NHVin (Levy,

ChWB.
*?

286 b ) does not mean

wood.

The

reflexive

(Lex.

5^
2

bottom;

GK.

119").

Cf.

180

The First Book of Samuel,

;

"jb

TYOBI i Ki. 17, 3

2,

and often

in the imper., as Dt.

Is. 40,

i,

Dab WD.

40.

13 Dab nay.

5,

27 Dab nn?:
cf.

by..

6.

ynw] known

= discovered:
LXX

Ex.

2, 14.

Jud. 16,

9.

II 17, 19.

D SWNl] Read with

nyaja]
i.e. in

D^Jtfni

Gibeah of Saul: see on

Gen.
in

9, i.

31, 13.
J

21, 33t.
is

RV.

Ramah, which
:

inconsistent with

in

Gibeah.

RV. m.
(Ez.
1 6,

in the height

but

f!D"l

is

not used of a

height

in general

25 forms hardly an exception); and it is better to read with Saul held his ev Ba/ia (= n 9?2) in the high-place (cf. 9, 12). court under a sacred tree (cf. Jud. 4, 5 of Deborah administering justice under a "^), and in a sacred place.

LXX

Ivy D aVJ] stationed by him,

i.

e.

standing in attendance on him,

by 3XJ (and similarly by *ly) is said idiomatically of one standing by over: Lex. 756*0) another (Gen. 18, 2. 28, 13), esp. of servants, (lit.
or courtiers, in attendance on their master (vv.
cf.

7.

17.

with

sat to

loy Jud. 3, 19), or the people standing about Moses, b cf. by lE y judge them (Ex. 18, i4 13^).
:

Gen. 45, i; as he

In clause b the
i

series of ptcpp.
;

describe the situation, as (e.g.)

Ki.
7.

i,

40; 22, 10
is

2 Ki. 6,

32.
it

most probably an error for Dabai; otherwise be an example of b marking the accus., on which see 23, 10.
Dabab (2)]
r

will

8.

y\

maa]
is

18, 3.

20, 8. 16

without

ma,

as 20,

6.

nbh]
poetical

sick

because of me.

This can hardly be

right.

In the
of

passage
is

Am.

6,

6 the apathy of the boisterous

revellers
fc6l

Samaria

well described

by the words

*)DV
:

"OS?

by vn3

and
is

feel no sickness
different.

LXX TTOVWV,

by reason of Joseph s breach which represents bon

by Dnbon
""a.

but the passage here

in the passage of similar

al.

import 23, 21

Hence

Gratz, Klo. Bu.

bch

and

none of you hath compassion on me. Is it H7D n ? and there suggestion

:
["

Dr. Weir
is

makes a

similar

no compassion on your

part

upon

me:"

cf.

Ge

i.

19, 16]

comp. 23, 21

LXX.
to rise

aisb

D pn]
or

Cf. 13

aiNb VN Dlpb
s

up against

me

into

(=

so as to become) one lying in wait;

,

Mic.

2,8

(reading, for
eis

D01p, Dip

3 Mpri)

u6 Dip

?y.

LXX

(in both verses)

lyQpw,

XXII. 6-i8
which Dr. Weir
but
is

181
is

prefers,

remarking that

D pn

not suitable to

so to a K.

So Sm. Now. Ehrl.

9.
1 8,

by 3X3] by 2V3
2),

may mean

or
li?

(v. 6) standing in attendance

JJ1J

here either merely standing by (Gen. on Saul s D"n2y (courtiers).

is

10.

iTTXl]

the variation in order

pleasing in
b 7, i .

itself,

and
16.

also gives a slight emphasis

32, i7
13. b
.

on nTX.

Cf. 6, 14^.

Gen. 27,

43, 12. 13.

Ki.

n,

Ew.
32, 6.
14.

hx^l] the 351, Kon. iii.

ti>

inf.

abs.,

1DK Dnh, etc. according to GK. 113

8
c.,

(cf.
;

H3 Z
cf.

),

218.

After an inf.

as 25, 26. 33

Ex.

inyK>n

i>N

lOl]

RV. w

taken into thy council, following Ges.

(qui devertere solet ad colloquium tuum, qui interioris

sionis est),

apud

te

admis-

and
is

Keil.

This, however, assumes an unusual sense for

2.

TiD, which

hardly justified by the parallels quoted, Gen. 19,

turn aside
to visit a person).
"W

3.

Jud. 4,

8.

19, 12 (to

Probably for

ID we should read with LXX, Targ. (apx^v, 21) captain over thy body-guard (btf for by; see on 13, 13), which would imply a posi
tion of responsibility,

and

close attendance

sense of njJD5?D
cf.

(lit.

obedience, i.e. a

upon the king. For this body of men bound to obedience),

II 23, 23
is

(=

Ch.

n,
Ch.

25)

inyt?n (Ch. by) bx

Is.

in -innw

the

word

also used in a concrete sense in

i
/.

u,

14

DnjJDE>D

f1By ^31.

So Ew. Bertheau (on

15.

c.\

Then.

etc.

Yl^nn]

Have
&K
11

begun?
3 D
1

The
lit.

question

is

indicated

by the

tone (n, 12).

in
Job
4,

Vinjn

fo]

/0

lay in,

\.

e.

to attribute to, as

18: so b D

UN nu
(emended

^31]

^ Dt. 22, 8. LXX, Pesh. Jl

i

i>ani,

which

is

required.
the

17. D^STl]

the

runners, or royal
Ki. 14, 27. 28
cf.

escort of

king:

so

21, 8

text),

ii, 4. 6. ii. 13. 19:

Visb

(= 2 Ch. 12, 10. n). 2 Ki. 10, 25. D^l II 15, i. i Ki. i, 5; and ch. 8, n
is

inamrD ^sb 1T1.

If the

emendation on 21, 8
s

correct,

Doeg

will

have been the most stalwart of Saul

runners.
Jer. 26,

Dy DT]
1

Ch.

4,

10: II 14, 19

(n);

24 (n).
the

8.

m]

Ew.

45

Kt. uses

in the Syriac fashion:

Qr6

warns the reader to pronounce it softly, and not differently from v. 9. 21, 8. Cf. p. 120 n.; and D^JHB beside D^NHB (GK. 93*).

182

The First Book of Samuel,

3D] For the emph. nnx,
cf.

on

17, 56.
:

Nin y33l] Note the emphasis expressed by the pronoun

1

as Ex.

8, 19. 22. 26 etc. (Tenses,

160
<?/<?).

13 YI2K] So
by the

2, 1 8.

II 6,
:

14

(=

Ch. 15, 27)t.

is

LXX,

however,
borne,

omits 13, probably rightly

priests (cf.

for this

ephod

not worn, but

on

2, 28).

20. ltaTft6] 22.

i

GK.
cy
(i.

i29

and 1296.

TOD]

i"l3D

in Biblical

Hebrew

is

Ki. 12, 15

**

[2 Ch.
e.

10, 15 nap?]

used somewhat peculiarly in nao nrrn a lit. for there

:

was a turning about

a /wrw or change of affairs

his
it

LXX
etc.
:

//.erao-i-po^T/)

from Yahweh that he might establish

sophical

word,

in the philo

Hebrew of
all

the middle ages,

acquires the sense of cause.

I

Hence
of
this

this

passage has been rendered,

have been the cause in

(the death of)

the persons of thy father s house/

is

The
it

legitimacy

rendering

questionable.

There

is

no evidence that rQD

probable,
;

nor is possessed the sense cause in Biblical times that 33D (in Qal) would be a denominative of did,
;

if it

it

and

thirdly,

even though there were a verb 33D to be the cause, of the crucial word death is more than is credible.
to read,

its

use with ellipse

It is best for

TQD
the

with Th.
etc.
:

We.,

fan / am

guilty

in

respect

of

all

persons,
19, 5,

cf.

Pesh. J^*-*!/.

The

construction with 3 as

3 NDn

where Targ. has the same word construction, viz. 3 TTinx.

23.
"JK>D3

in the Ethp. with the

same

transposed

(Th. We. Bu. etc.). For thou art a keeping with me, i. e. shalt nay nnx mottfO be jealously guarded with me. The abstract for the concrete, according to a usage of which there are many other examples in
:
"jE>aj

.... ^23] ^23 ....

The

suffixes

must have been accidentally

"a]

Hebrew

(Tenses,
7Tt<t>v\aai

189. 2):
crv Trap

comp.
e>ot

Is.

n,

14

D^VP^p poy

331

J
.

LXX
two
to

on

*1Dy nnK nnpfS

(3 for D, the

letters

being very similar in the old character),

it.

which has nothing

recommend
1

And

the remarkable parallel in Moabitic

Mesha,

line 28

JiyD^ D

pH

3 3

lit.

for all

Dibon was

obedience.

XXII. i8 XXIII. ;
23
26.

183

David

as an outlaw, in the Shephelah, the Hill-country,

and
23,
i.

the Wilderness

ofJudah.

n? yp] In the Shephelah (Jos. 15, 44; see v. 33); now a ruined village on a hill, on the E. side of W. es-Sur, 3 miles S. of Id the terraced sides of which are even to-day el-miyeh,
Qttct,

covered with corn/ so that

raiders

we can understand why

the Philistine

should have swarmed up the Vale of Elah and the

past

Wady

es-Sur,
(cf.

Sochoh and

id el-miyeh, to rob the threshing-floors

230).

Cheyne,
S
DK>

EB.
1

s.v.;

H. G.

noni] robbing (without

8,

Gen.

15, 2.

8 etc. (Tenses,

160),

and they are ), a circ. clause, like and following another ptcp., as

28, 14. II 15, 30.

2 Ki. 2, 12. Jer. 38, 22.

2. TVSni] There is considerable irregularity in the punctuation of the i and 2 pers. of the conjugations (other than Qal) of n 7 verbs but the following points may be usefully noted
. . .
: :
>

rvani

is

found always in Pu. Hof. (as

*
;

Gen. 24, 8 rpjpil)

2 sing. Pi.
;

J^N"!^

Ex. 26, 30), and Nif. (except once,

is

found always in

pi.
l

03__), and before

suffixes,

and

in

and almost always

DJV|"in

in 2 pi. (as DJD inriB n),

probably the only excep

tions being

Ez. 11, 6, and

i

Dn^nn
and

Jer. 42,

20 Qre (Kt. DTiynn).

The
in Pi.;

irregularity is greatest in
*

but here

_
A

2 sing.

is

very

common
thus

in the first

and Hithp. and in i sing. Pi. * in the second (as always person, and
f.

see above):

we

find

"JTSH

15 times, but

nVDH

17 times;

WinFIB>n

(3 times), but

H^nriB n (4
4f);

times)

wbjtfl

(10 times), but

JT^yn

(6 times; also
2

n\byn Ex.
n^2"in).

32, 7. 40,

W2HH
is

(12 times), but

5 times, but

r^n
"flMX

(4 times; but

fern.

notable exception

""MX

30 times

comp. also
See Bo.
clearly.
i.

TV

1
;>3

4 times, but
f.,

W^S Nu. 25,

GK.
r

iif:

VVD3

twice, but

WB?

4 times.

pp. 410

429;

in

75

ee
!

the usage might have been stated

more

3.

""3

f|Xl]

= and how much more,

;

when, as

2 Ki. 5, 13.
;

niaiyo]
4.

Cf. 4, 2. 12. 16

10 times in

ch. 17

and

II 23, 3.
at

n^yp *n] Not from Adullam,

at least if this

was

Id el-miyeh

(1468 ft.), which is lower than from the forest of Hdreth (22,
in the higher, central part of
JH3] they#/. ins tans
5.
:

Qe
5),

(1520 ft.), which will have been somewhere

ilah

but presumably

Judah.
3,

see

on

11.
2.

jrwi]

The word used

as 30,

20, like the

Greek a

184
6.

The First Book of Samuel,

There
is

some

disorder in this verse

;

Abiathar fled to David,

before

he reached

Qe ilah
in his

and clause
it

b cannot be construed so as to
it

yield

an

intelligible sense (as

stands
1

can only be rendered

simplest course
is

(the)

ephod came down

after

hand

The

to read
DJ?

TH

i>N

either, with

LXX

(B),

1T2 TlDK(n)l

TV

n^jjp

in
;

(so Bu.
this

alt.),

or

(cf.

2 Now., but not Luc. ) 1T3 TJDX(n)i n^yp TV.

Kim Even

change does not entirely

is
.

relieve the verse of difficulty

for the

sense required

after Abiathar fled,

which

is

not strictly expressed

in his

by

"WV2K

m32

AV. R V.

that he

came down with an ephod

(irrespectively of the difficulty in clause a) yields an excellent sense only it should be clearly understood that it is no the Massoretic text (ITS TV TlQN). AV. (and occasionally rendering of

hand.

This

even RV.) sometimes conceals a

difficulty

by giving a sense

that is

agreeable with the context, regardless of the fact that the

:

Hebrew

words used do not actually express it i. e. they implicitly adopt an emendation of the text. Comp. on 17, 20: 24, 20; 25, 30: and
see Jer. 19, 13.

Ez. 45, 21

RV.

48, 29

(r6m:i for r6n3).

Ley

proposal to read

DK

for

i>K

(ZATW.

1888, p.

222) does not touch the

real difficulty of the verse.

7.
is
"O3]

LXX

TTfTrpaKev

"129

here scarcely suitable.

If the text

(comp. Jud. 4, 9). Sold, however, be correct, the sense will be to

DIpDH
in

treat as strange

= to alienate,

reject (cf. Jer. 19, 4 HTil

HK

OV}),
is

construed here pregnantly with T3.

not parallel;

But the context

rather

Jeremiah
forced

and the

figure

here would be

one.

Ch. 26,

8,

in a similar context,
rise

we have

">?D,

which, however, would

here give

to an
is

inelegant alliteration with the following 13D3.

right in suggesting
"I3D,

Perhaps Krochmal
with

which
is

is

construed

T3

in Is. 19, 4 in exactly the sense that

"133

here required, and

by one letter. only differs from render only by a general term deliver

The

Versions, other than

LXX,
from

("1DO,

^t^S-v/,

tradidii],

which nothing can be inferred as translators had before them.

1

to the reading of the text

which the

It is

moreover out of connexion with clause a

for according to all but uniform

usage TV1 would be resumed by either TlBN uot by TV "PEN (Tenses, 78 end}.
*

TV

or

TV

TlQNI or TlDX TV}, but

Luc. omits xal avros //era AaveiS, but otherwise agrees with B.

XXIII. 6-13

185
*

mm DTI^T]
8.

13D3] ^a/// shut himself in (Ez. 3, 24)

2

(by) entering etc.

nil!

Dt. 3, 5. 8, 5; presumably from Gibeah of Saul (22,

cf.

Ch.

14, 6.

6),

z\ miles N. of

Jerusalem (on
9.

9, i).

Apparently a metaphor derived E"in] from the working of metal: cf. H5?nj tjhh Gen. 4, 22. i Ki. 7, 14. Elsewhere in this figurative sense only in Proverbs, and only there in

was fabricating, forging.

Qal

(3,

29 njn

in
n,

7y

tnnn
it

/x. 6, 14. 18. 12, 20. 14, 22t).

The

position of
else): 10.

V7y makes
Jer.

comp.

19,

emphatic, against him (and not some one and on II 15, 4.

6.

y{?

yt>]

See on 20,
7,

Ty7

nnB>7]

So, with

Nu.

32, 15.
is

nntS>

is

construed so constantly
el,

with an accus. that, though there

especially
for

a tendency in Heb. for Pi

7,

and

Hif.

1
,

to

be construed with
is

expressing the dativus

probably an instance of the use of 7 to mark the accusative, such as is regular in Syriac, and occurs in Hebrew, rarely in the early and middle periods of the language, and

commodi

(or incommodi), this

with greater frequency in exilic and post-exilic writings.

II 3, 30 -wan?

See 22,
1

7.

inn

(see note)

Jer. 40, 2
al.
:

[TOT ?
1

np

i/r.

V171N7 njTP

nnx;

73, 18

107

nwi

Ew.

277^;

GK.

ii7

69, 6 n
;

Lex. 5i2 a
1 1
f.

ri^yp ^yn] This use of

is

D^ya
4

to denote the lords or citizens

if.

of a town

rare: Jos. 24,

(of Jericho). Jud. 9, 22

2,

(Shechem).
2
.

20, 5 (Gibeah). II 21, 12

and

LXX
8,

(Jabesh of Gilead)
i

13.
"J71H

i^nn

11

-)^N2 Dpnrvi] Cf.

?y
"J7in

Ki.

nun
3,

"H?N:I

nwi;
4,

II 15,
16,

20
23.

-"JN

"i^N

^Xl; comp. also Ex.

14.

13.

33, 19.

Ezek. 12, 25.

Semitic idiom, copiously illustrated

his Psalterium

by

Lagarde, in a note
p. i56f., especially

Hieronymi (1874), from Arabic authors, and employed where either

at the

end of

E. g. p nTin
ii
7,

to

give
7

life to,

Gen. 45, 7
10, i;

2Tnn

to

give width
53,

to,

\f/.

4, 2 al.

6 mn
tion,
2

i;
;

rain HOS.
;

pnxn

is.

u ^ ^^

to.

Comp. Ew. Comp.

Lex. 5ii b 3 a Die Hebraische Praeposition

282
in

and Giesebrecht

Lamed
1

s careful study on this preposi (Halle, 1876), p. 80 f.

Phoenician CIS.
Epijj/?;

i.

20
;

TUTS D7y3 HJin

and Cooke, A.57.

Irene citizen of Byzan

tium

(in the

Greek

Bi;cwTi a)

p. 50.

i86

The First Book of Samuel,

more
explicit does not exist.
:

the means, or the desire, to be

And

they went about where they went about

in

the present case, no

doubt, the vagueness of the expression corresponds with the reality.

From Lagarde
render
AJL>

instances
20, 13,

may

be quoted
fuit =

DinriBrno Djnn DvpilS

as he does
;

(Rashi on Gen.
;

and elsewhere) Onqelos renders

L* ^jlSJ

ool age quod

agendi ut volueris

L *:^lj missa haec faciam quod non euro quid facturus sis, et liberam agis ^1L emersit potestatem tibi concede
fuit

xM>

>

[ex undis] qui emersit

= non

^^-

attinet

exponere qui
ij

et

quot emerserint

ad regem Persarum Parest

wezum
Arabica,
mutavit

profectus

est

eo consilio

quo profectus
fuit
:

= nil

attinet

explicare

quaenam
p.

itineris

causa ac ratio

Arnold, Chrestomathia

143, 7 nisi forte

forte

= nisi
1

*-A^C mutaverit eos quod eos Sm. quotes also nescio quae res eos mutaverit.

*A/^ L

Qor. 53,
14.

6. i.e.

"121O2]

in

some

part of the rocky

(Jos.

called the

wilderness of Judah
it

15,
i,

and desolate region 61-62, where six cities

belonging to
Ps.

are enumerated;

63

title),

bearing

down

16 [text very doubtful]; by steep and rough descents to the Dead

Jud.

and extending some 15 miles from W. to E., and some 35 miles from N. to S. (H. G. 312, followed by a vivid description of its wild
Sea,

and barren scenery). Carmel (23, 24. 25,

It
i),

begins in about the longitude of

Ma on

and
it

but becomes wilder and more desolate as

descends towards the Dead Sea.

nmC2]
~ira]
spf

(mountain-) fastnesses; 2; and

cf.

Is.
i

33,

D^D
9.

JlVttflD.

So
16].

vv. 19. 29. Jud. 6,

(in the sing.)

Ch. 12,

17

[al.

8.

the elevated central

hill-country

of Judah (Jos. 15, 48-60).

v. 1 5.

"131O2]

probably an intrusive anticipation of

Here,
in spite
N"J*1,

15.

N"Vl]

of 26,

3,

we must

with Ew. Hist.

iii.

with

not only in order to secure a connexion 127 (E.T. 92) vocalize what precedes, but especially to obtain a motive for what
cf.

follows:

v.

6 "strengthened his

hand,"

and

z>.

17

"fear

not"

(We.).

And
now

so Dr. Weir:

Rather, was afraid ; see next verse.

fp]

Tell ez-Zif, a conspicuous

mound, 2882

ft.

above the

sea,

4 miles S. by E. of Hebron, on a plateau of

red rolling ground,

XXIII. 14-19
mostly bare, partly wheat and barley, broken by limestone scalps partly covered by scrub, and honey-combed by caves/ which begins

This plateau is the 306 .). mentions Zif as in the mirp Jos. 15, 55 nBHrn] The prep, 3 and the n locale combined. So v 19; 31, 13 2 o, 15 n^wa; j er 52, 10 nni>ru. np:ra; jos. 15, 21 ram;
soon
after

Hebron

is

left

(H. G.

wilderness

of Ziph.

"in.

even with p, as Jud. 21, 19 ? roiSSD; Jos. 15, 10 njifiSfO ; Here the n was already read by LXX (though Jer. 27, 16 n?32.

And

wrongly understood)
The word
tive ( in the
is

ev rrj KcuvirJ

=
nCHnn,
in v. 16)

pretty clearly (notice ntJHn, not

),

not an appella

wood

Conder (T.W. 243) observes that

trees could never

have

grown on the dry porous formation of the plateau of Zif, but the name of a place, Horesh. or Ho^shah [on H loc. in names of places, see Tenses, 132 Ob s.~\, perhaps the ruin Huresa (or Khoreisa), i miles S. of Tell ez-Zif (Conder; Buhl, 97;
II.

G. 30 7*.)-

16.

IT

JIN

pinM]

fig.

for encouraged;
2, 18. 6, 9
al.,

so Jud.

9,

24. Jer. 23, 14. Is.

pi.

35, 3. Ezr. 6, 22. Neh.

always with the

hands (so
does not

LXX

here)

cf.

with the Qal II

2, 7 al.

17. INtfon]

Cf. with

Is.

10, to.

i/f.

21, 9.

But

ND

correspond phonetically with Aramaic N^ 1?? with which Miihlau-Volck, in the loth edition of Gesenius Lexicon, compare it
:

ffDjfrft;

advenire:

ND = emmo);
ZDMG.
v.

ND = J^so =

in

conj.

(=

jPz V/) porrigere,

praebere.

See Noldeke,
in in

1886, p. 736.
Cf.
i^.

p]
l

.w,

accordance with what has just been stated. accordance with

3.

90, 1 2

so
1 8.

i.e.

teach us/

etc.

Cf.

1 8,

19

24, 22.

doublet to ch. 26, beginning with almost the same

words, and containing a different version of the same occurrences.

19.
li

in]

Tell el-Ful (2754

ft.)
;

ft.)

Gibeah (see on

9, i)

is

lower

than Ziph (2882

but the road from Ziph to the N. would ascend

3040 ft., Halhul, N. of Hebron, 3270 ft.); and though it descends again to Jerusalem (2593 ft.), it rises again to Gibeah (2754 ft.), so that there would be considerable ascents
considerably (Hebron,

between Ziph and Gibeah.

for -6jn.

The
i.

parallel,

26,

i,

has, however,

D^ar]

Read cmn,

as 26,

88
PD^TI
. . .

The First Book of Samuel,

nenra] These
definite
localities

are inconsistent both

with the preceding indefinite nVTCO, and with the need of searching
for David, expressed in the verses

which

follow.
26,
i,

The words from

and nenra added

nyan seem
on
26, i.

to have

been inserted here from

to agree with vv. 15. 16. 18 (Sm.).

On

Hachilah and Jeshimon, see

elsewhere

20.

:n

niK
i>3i>]

= tn
1 8,

accordance with (Lex. 5i6 b ):

2,

(Dt.

12, 15. 20. 21.

6f;

with 3:

comp. on

2,

16.

is used comp. Jer. With the rhythm or run of clause a, cf.

24) the phrase

Qoh.

9,

10 (accents and RV. margin).

\fci\

nMDn common
26, 18.
22.

and ours

(will

it

be)

to deliver

him/
;

etc.

Not a

use of b.
inf.)

Cf. Jer. 10,

3,
i
;

23 (reading |3H1 ^pn)

and (with ?
5.

before the

Mic.
>^y

and, in late Hebrew, 2 Ch. 13,

20, 17.

Comp.
Tiy

in II 18,

u.
not
is

wan]
if

certainly

make

yet

more sure
;

(RV.), but
cf.,

most probably,
military
attention
is

the text
2,

correct,

Prepare further
Ez.
7,

in

sense,
still,

Nah.

4.

Jer.

46, 14.
is

14.

38,

7.
:

Give
not only

with ellipse of 27,

a very doubtful rend.

the

ellipse uncertain elsewhere

(see

Moore on

Jud.

12, 6),

but

pan elsewhere has only the sense of fixing the heart firmly in a given direction, esp. towards Yahweh (ch. 7, 3), or to seek Him
27
(2 Ch. 12, 14
DS?
lilX"!

al.),

cf.

(absol.)

i/r.

78, 8.

Job n, 13 (Lex. 466^).

2,

1HN1
""D]

The Hebrew

is

abrupt (comp. on
al.

35).

LXX

for

has eV ra^ei, whence Th. We.

a doubtful form

consider his place where his

however,

is

know and TJ^on 1HD as an adj., fleeting foot may be. it occurs only Zeph. i, 14, where it is
restore

explained questionably (see esp. Schwally, ZAW. 1890, p. 176) as s a Pi. ptcp. pnPJp) 52 ); and it is better aphaeresis of ID (GK.

^h

to read in Zeph.

lOP? and
4).

here, with Ehrl., TjriGn (from

^09).
also 27, 2

ION]
xin
28, 8; 23.

sc.

1D1NH (16,
Ex.
15.

ony ony]
Qoh.
iyn
9,
lN"l]

4,

14 NIH

-in

ch. 22,

i8 b

cf.

For the

inf.

Qal, see

GK.
i

113*.
5, i.
7.
i

In this order, only here and Jer.

(v.
-

Elsewhere
2 Ki. 5, 7),

regularly
-n

1&m

Ijn

22.
.

12, 17.

14, 38.

Ki. 20,

Ti

(25, 17- J er 2

:
9)>

nni

yn (24, 12. II 24, 13.

Ki. 20, 22).

25 MSS. have here 1JO1

lyni.

XXIII. iq-24
Very hard.
a neg. or
,

189
24), esp. with
:

i?3O
;

may mean any of (Lev. n,

ON (Lex. 58o b )

but this does not suit here

it

cannot

mean
to }D

take knowledge of (EVV., Dh.) gives everyone (Now.); and 3 yT does, however, occur a sense which it does not possess.
the

with
i/r.

31,

meaning know about (Jer. 38, 24. Job 37, 16, perhaps 8; cf. ch. 22, 15); and as E and 3 are often confused in the
(Introd.
p.
Ixvii),

old

characters

we may,

in

default

of anything

better,

read ^33, and then

we may

rightly render

take knowledge

of

Drutri]
Kit.)

and

return.

Neither this (We.) nor DJTQB

(B U- Now.
which

can mean bring back word: see on 12, 3. must here be used as the equivalent of p3J Stf]
i>N

f>y,

is
;

joined sometimes with substantives to express an adverbial relation

if/.

31,

24

"irp

py

z^>0fl

(the basis of)

Is.

abundance

abundantly;

Jer.

6,

14

n;>j?3

Sj?

= lightly;
not

60, 7

JW1 Sy

= acceptably.

Here on

a certainty

= assuredly (Lex.
thousands

754

b
).

mirp
10, 19.

^N]

(EVV.), but dans of Judah ;

see

on

Ma on, in the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 55, 24. pyD mentioned beside Carmel and Ziph), was identified by Robinson with Tell Ma in (2887 ft.), on a great hump of rock (Conder, Tent
"I3"1O]

Work, 244), 4^ miles

S. of

Ziph.

The

wilderness of

Ma on

is

an

waste pasture-land, rough rocks with that dry vegetation on which goats and even sheep seem to
extensive steppe, E. of the Tell, consisting of
thrive

(EB.

s.

v.).

H31V3] The Arabah (or Steppe) is the alluvial floor of the deep depression through which the Jordan runs, and in which the Dead Sea lies. It is difficult to understand how any part of the wilderness of Ma on (2887 ft.) could be described as
being
Sea).
in

the

Arabah

(in

If the text is in order,

which the Dead Sea is 1292 ft. below the Medit. we must suppose that the wilderness of Ma on

extended sufficiently far in the E. to reach a point which could be reckoned as in the Arabah.

pa*

on the South of the Desolation

(AV. Jeshimon ;
it

RV.

the desert is too vague).

pD^T!

(notice the article), though

Is. 43,

is

used as a general term (Dt. 32, 10;

26,
i.

19

al.), is

here and

v.

19,

(cf.

Nu.

21, 20. 23, 28) used specifically of

some

part of the
if
s

vild and desolate

wilderness of Judah

(see

on

v. 14),

*?$

190
is

The First Book of Samuel,

i

correct (26,

has ^a

i>y),

of the part South of about the latitude

of

Ma on.
25.
B>p2^]

Read

tt?pai>

with

LXX

(We.).

has dropped out before

the

""I

following.

So Klo. Bu. Sm.

illustration

etc.
fact,

ytan TTl] In
D^tnn:
crag

of *the
2t^i;

Dr. Weir refers appositely to

Jud. 15, 8 Dtry ybo

ppyw

20, 45.

47

nyms pen
it

y^on

12^
The
in

D^y^D are also mentioned

as hiding-places in ch. 13, 6.

here meant cannot be identified; but

part of the

must have been

v. 24.

some
This

pyo
:

"121D

lower than that meant in

to the crag

2^1]
is

LXX

"IB>$

and came down

which

is

in,

etc.

probably
"DID]

right,

y?Dn not being a proper name (We.).

;

py

into the wilderness, etc.

not

in,

as

EVV.

26. hxt?]

LXX

VIW&0

i>1NB>:

probably rightly.
and narrow gorge, with el-Malaqy, which runs to the E.
s
:

About 4 miles SE. of Tell

rocky
sides, called first

ez-Zif there begins a deep

W.

el-

War and
and
it is

then

W.

for a distance of

some 6

miles;

a plausible suggestion of Conder

(Tent

Work, 245) that this may have been the scene of the incident here recorded there v. 28), is, Conder says, no other place near Ma on, where cliffs, or crags (Sela can be found. But it is precarious to support the identification by the phonetically
,

imperfect resemblance of

Malaqy

to fllp/HD (v. 28).

9) hurrying in alarm, David and his men to surrounding the ptcpp. describe the situation, into the midst of which take them/ the message, v. 27, came. For the idea expressed by TSn3, cf. \Tl]
to
1 8,

... and Saul and his

And David came men were

be (on

II 4, 4 (Qal), 2 Ki. 7, 15 (Nif.).

itsy

is,

however, a very rare word,

found otherwise only once in poetry (ty. 5, I3t, of surrounding protectingly with a shield); and Klo. proposes E^V (14, 32. 15, 19) were flying at David (so Bu. Sm.). This, however, cannot be said to

be probable.
over to the

Ehrlich,

more probably, suggests D

l|

"l2y

were crossing

other side of the mountain to take David,

when

the

message
28.

arrived.

^P"!*?]

with dag.

f.

implicitum (GK.
-

22

end) in the 1, as in

11?

Is -

J
4>

3 Baer and Ginsb

"no
:

( GK

229 end \

So

and Kit

Baer and Ginsb. read ^

cf. i, 6.
*,

10, 24 (see the Addenda).

prob. of divisions
1

Saul and David there parting from

Though np/TID

is

elsewhere used only in a concrete sense, of the divisions

XXIII. 2J-XXIV. 4
the

neighbourhood of one another:

14, 15.

cf.

the Nif. in

Ki. 16, 21.

Gen.

A
De

popular explanation of the meaning of the name.

Wette,
"rock

Dathe, Ges.,
that

of

escapes;"

but Th. objects rightly

(Dr. Weir)
*.

the sense of escaping

TreVpa
rj

is

not established for p?n

JJpD
.

LXX
this

= n|#non p.fpur6et(ra.
that.

Targ. has the characteristic

paraphrase,

the place where the heart of the king

was divided

to

go

way and

I. 7JW] Very surprising, in the present context. En-gedi, in the wilder of Judah (Jos. 15, 62), the modern Ain-jidi, is a spring, bursting out from under a great boulder on the rocky precipitous descent to the W. shore of the Dead

24,

ness

Sea, and 612

and the writer s note on (cf. G. A. Smith, EB. s.v. below the Medit. Sea, and consequently some 3560 ft. below Ziph (2882 ft.), and considerably below any place which could reasonably be included in the wilderness of Ma on (v. 25); David could not therefore have
ft.

above

it

Gen.

14, 7)

it is

680

ft.

come up to En-gedi from any of the places mentioned before. Either something has been omitted (so that DET3 does not refer to JTlpbTOn y?D in the wilderness
of

Ma on,
3.
S

v. 35), or

the verse

is

due to some redactional confusion.

is

3S
$>y]

The

expression

either (i) on the surface of,

Gen.

n,

by may denote ambiguous. 8. Ex. 32, 20. II 18, 8 ; or (2)

"OB

on the front of (usually in the sense of on the East of; see on 15, 7). In sense (i) ^S ?y is commonly used with words of scattering or
casting

appear why here the surface of the rocks of the chamois-goats should be so particularly specified. Probably, therefore,
:

nor does

it

(2)

is

preferable

though, as Ges. remarks, there

front
definitely

is

nothing here to
the East.

guide us as to whether the

goats
still

means

Wild

abound

in

the

neighbourhood of

D^yn niv must

4.
(

have designated some locality

En-gedi; and the in which they were

particularly apt to congregate.

JNVn

nmj]
1

Cf.
6),

Nu. 32,

16. 24. 36. Zeph. 2, 6.

Low

stone-walls

build/ Nu. 32,

Qi2B>i]

forming enclosures for sheep.

6, 10.
Is.

were in the recesses (Am.

14, 15.

37, 24

al.)

of the cave, sitting down.

of a people (Jos. n, 23. 12, 7. 18, 10), or (especially in Ch.) of the divisions e. courses ) of priests and Levites. (i. 1 It is assumed (though very questionably) by the Rabbis, and even favoured by
Gesenius, for the Hif. in Jer. 37, 12.

192
~>K

The First Book of Samuel,

the allusion ItJ N] Do these words mean of which he said 5. being to some previous assurance of deliverance from Saul, which

David
says,

followers apply to the present occasion (Kp.)

or on which he
indication
?

the occasion itself

being interpreted

by them as an

of

Yahweh s purpose

to deliver Saul into his

hands (Th. Ke. We.)

"itJ>K

In order to answer

this question properly, the nature of

detail.

and

its

use in parallel cases must be considered in some

is properly not a relative pronoun, but a relative sign, indicating generally and indeterminately the idea of relation = as to which : it is followed in strictness

by a pronominal or adverbial (DB*) supplement, defining more

of the relation which
it

closely the nature

is

used to express

IvS?

~m

"l^N

B^NH

the

man

as to
are,

whom

he spake concerning him = the

man

concerning

whom

he spake.

There

which the pronominal supple ment is the direct object of the verb in which the pron. or adv. supplement is dispensed with, (a) with llpN ^S, followed by the words used, where, however, its place is really taken by a pronoun in the speech which follows, as Gen. 3, 17
however, certain cases
besides the familiar one, in

the tree as to which I

commanded

thee, saying,

Thou

shalt not eat

from

it,

Dt. 28, 68. i Ki. 8, 29. Jer. 32, 43; ch. 9, 23 b : ib, 17 the man as to whom I said unto thee, This one (fit) shall rule my people Israel Jud. 7, 4 (exactly similar) and (where the noun repeated takes the place of the pronoun) Jud. 8, 15 Behold
;

Zebah and Zalmunna

as to

whom
"IC

and Zalmunna now

in thine

hand?

equivalent to the antecedent of adv. supplement is dispensed with (3) when a word denoting time or place or manner has immediately preceded thus (a) Dt. 4, 10 HIDV 1B>N DV the day on which thou stoodest, Gen. 45, 6. i Ki. 9, 10. 22, 25 and frequently : (/3) Gen. 39, 20.
")E>K
:

ye reproached me, saying, Is the hand of Zebah In 2 Ki. 17, 12. 21, 4 a term nearly etc. X follows similarly in the speech. The pron. or

Dt. 8, 15. Is. 64, 10 . (or, account how)

.

al.
.

1
:

(7) in

I^K
n,

"Din
.

HT this

is

the matter as to which

Jos. 5, 4;
it is

Ki.

extreme instances,

in

which

left 7,

2 It is dispensed with (c) in a few 27 to the reader s intelligence to define the relation

intended: as Nu. 21, 16; Dt.

n,

19;

Is. 8,

12

-TON"

"IB>K

*?

1&P
;

where

ICX would
11

normally be followed by ib

31,6

Turn ye

to (him, as to)

whom

they have deeply rebelled.

Applying the principles that have been thus determined

passage before us,

to

the

we

shall see that

(a).

presumption favours
the

its

being

regarded as analogous to b

Had

sense intended by the

And
2, al.

regularly after ~I2 X3,

"IB>N

>33

(ch. 14,

\j)

= wherever,
(?N)
7J?

~IB>Nn

(Ex.

5, 11.

Ru.
20
-

o^from the place where = whencesoever,

the use of
"13T

"IK

whithersoever, II 15,
Ki. 9, 15;

Comp.

in the

phrase

"OH

HT1 Dt. 15, 2.

19, 4.

and

in the first line of the

Siloam Inscription.

xxiv.
narrator been,
I
ai

r-8
to

193

Behold the day, as

which Yahweh said to thee,

run
the

will
jriK

etc.,

we should have expected (on the analogy of a} DIM As it is, -itrs has V3JK Ninn ova T^N niiT IDN I^N.
1 :

Behold presumption of being determined by the preceding DVn I am about to the day on which Yahweh saith unto thee, Behold,
deliver etc.

Compare
Qre
is

the very similar passage, Jud.

Cf.

4, 14.

TT IK] The
5
b
.

right (notice *6).

on

II 24, 13.
.

6.

To
nx]

produce a logical sequence

to follow 8 a
PJ33
.

in the narrative 5 h

6 should

be transposed so as
6.
5)33

After

eight MSS.,

and

LXX,

Pesh. Vulg. insert

T^tsn,
7.

necessarily, as the art. is

"6

wanting
sit

(Dr. Weir).

So We.
the usual

mifO

nW>n]

Ad profanum
s

mihi a Domino*

i"6vn

(12, 23) being strengthened

deprecated on

Yahweh
rM>n

part:

cf.

by the act being represented as Ki. 21, 3; and see on II 23, 17.
:

ON]

After

with the force of an oath, as II 20, 20

nW>n

more

impassioned than the more ordinary constr. of

act deprecated (e.g. 26,
rrfiT
(<3-JN)

with }O of the

n).

See

GK.
So

149
?7.

Lex. 321*.
26, 9
al.

n
.
,

STDa]
.

See

8.
is /0

tf-iTil

yD^l]

GK. i6h. And David

n.

tare his

men

with words.

yD2>

cleave: in
;

Qal only
el,

ptcp., of the cloven hoof, Lev.

i,

n,

3. 7.

26.

Dt. 14, 6. 7

in Pi

Lev.

17. Jud. 14, 6

nan VDC 3 inyo^l and

It follows that the

he rent

it

(the lion) as

one would rend a

kid.

Heb.
the

text here yields

no sense

(Dr. Weir).
(cf.

We. defends MT. on

32, 4) implies that the

ground
is

that the addition

;

DH212
if

Job

verb

to judge from such knowledge of the Heb. word used as we possess must have expressed himself with singular violence, and in terms which

a figurative one

but

MT.

be correct, David

would be

suitable rather to

an abusive and malicious attack by words

(comp. the Lat. proscindere

rebuke or

= to

satirize,

defame), than to a simple

check (so RV., but not fully representing yDE>). None of the emendations that have been proposed is, however, satisfactory

(Th. rmBh; Dr. Weir,

agrees.
(cf.

Perhaps JO?!_ or DpB!;

Klo. I DNJl).

Bu.

^OM
1 8, 1

is

a word that would be appropriate to the context

II

6);

but

J?DK"1

could scarcely have arisen out of this by

the ordinary processes of transcriptional corruption. of the Versions are cTretcre, Pesh. wot* made
:

The
to

renderings

LXX

repent,

Targ.

1365

194

^e
Theod.
z
B>p2]

First

Book of Samuel,
Symm.

D*S persuaded, pacified, Aq. onW/cAacrev (hence Vulg. confregif),

Trepiecnracrev,
rjirdrrjcrev.

10.

seeding,

much more
is

expressive

than

seeketh

(EVV.).

n.

*H3Nl]
:

The

tense

irregular:

the pf.
is

with

simple waz#

is

improbable

the pf. with

waw

conv.
is

out of place, the idea of

reiteration being evidently not

what

here intended to be expressed.

te),

Jerome
Either

"ipxj

(et

cogitavi ut occiderem

of course, cannot be right.

"lOWi

and

one said

Kai OVK fjfiovXridrjv

must be restored, or we must follow and read I^OSl and I refused (We. etc.).

LXX

142

cf

on

DPini]

Elsewhere followed always by py (Dt.

considering
the

7,

16 and frequently).

The

ellipse,

standing usage
first

probable.

Sept. Targ. Pesh. express the

word, is not Dnxi onm may person

of the
;

have been

written in error by a scribe,

who expected Ty

to follow

(We. Sm. Now.).

it is

Or

(Bu.)

yy may

have dropped out

after

Dnni

expressed by Vulg.

n&O D3 nxn] The repetition of the imper. after 03 is certainly as Hupfeld did long ago very un-Hebraic: and Ehrl. would read
12.

(Comm.
inf.

abs.

quosdam lobeidos (see on i, 6).

in

locos,

1853, P- V

n ^l D -

"

the
>

TTinn
fTIS]

K^l] carrying

on VYIM

GK.
:

ii4

r
;

Tenses,
;

118.
also

/? ,?,$/ z

z&az / (not huntest,

Secr/xeveis

"U2?)

see Ex. 21, 13

Nu. 35,

20. 22.

LXX
Cf.
,
,
,

(=

TJ*), translating

from an

indistinct text

(Dr. Weir).
13*.
1

Gen.
rvni]

16, 5

31, 53.

For

\JDp3i, see

GK.

112^.
:

6.

The

pf.

and

w aw

conv. with the force of a wish

cf.

Tenses,
"JTD

1198.

""JOBB"!]

and judge me (and

by thy action
Gen.

free

me) from
me.

thy hand: see on

25>

39a
.

i9

mjn]

viz.
(cf.

in sparing

But Klo.

n^Tin
(as)

hast magnified

19, 19) that

which thou hast done to

me

good

^K]
I9
b
.

yields a better sense; so Sm. Bu. 6b cf. with as II after

Now.

Kitt. Ehrlich.
al.

m?y,

2,

1DH, Gen. 24, 49

15?N

of place,

nx] IK S alone = forasmuch as (15, 15): and is doubtless a scribal error, due to N fix
"IB

the

DX

is

out

just before.

XXIV.
20.

io

XXV.
GK.

i 95

in^l]
cf.

will

he send him away?

:

For the question thus

150*.

intro

duced,

Ez. 15, 5 b
.),

Tenses,

123/3;

Klo.

W
it

(GK.
would

112^
e"K,

with

the general subject limited afterwards to the specific

is

highly improbable,

though of course without B^K

have been quite suitable.

l

31

nnn]

in return for this

v.

day

the sense being explained by what

follows

wherein (on

5) thou hast wrought for me!

is

But as Klo.

remarks, such a use of DVH

un-Hebraic.

Klo. reads 3teri this

good

(Nu. io, 32) for Divi; and we must either do the same, or adopt the
transposition

followed
nt^N

tacitly

(cf.

on

23, 6)

nrn

nvn

nrpB>y

nnn.

Against

LXX
;

by EVV., and read and iv (d7nm<7, aurw,

6Xfyfi)

and Th. see We.

21. niDpl]
23.

= and be confirmed,
J>y

as 13, 14

Gen. 23, 30. Nu. 30,

5.

the Medit. from En-gedi (23, 29), 680 ft. Sea, up past Hebron (3040 ft.) and Halhul (3270 ft.) over the high backbone of central Judah, and then down into the Shephelah to the

mittDn

ii)y]

Mw

hold
25,

(22, 4) of
i.

Adullam

(if

Id el-miyeh, 1160

ft.).

TVl] The place from which David came down does not appear. The intention of the note seems to be to state that David, on hearing of Samuel s death, came down from some unnamed higher
spot in the

min in
1

to the wilderness of

Ma on

(c.

2500

ft.).

pNB] Read
requires.
to the south.
2.

pyo (23, 24. 25. 26), with

LXX,

as the context (vv.

is

2.

4)

The

wilderness of Paran (Nu. 12, 16)

much

too far

B iNl] without a verb

of

see

on
cf.

17, 12

and

cf.

Ki.
I|
"i

n,
l32.

26.

work

in the fields:
i

Ex. 23, 16

TK>y

now el-Kurmul,

mile N. of

Ma on,
is

wilderness of Judah, but to the west the land

on the edge of the broad and fertile, not

unlike scenes of upland agriculture in Scotland.

("

garden-land

is
")

therefore suitable

(G. A. Smith,

The name Carmel EB. s. v. cf. on

;

ch. 15, 12).

h*M]

So

II

19,

33 of Barzillai;

Ki. 4, 8 of the

Shunammite

woman.
tEQ TVl] apparently
sheep,

= and he was (engaged)

o 2

in the shearing of his

a most unusual type of sentence.

Tp VP1, or rather TM

196
is

The First Book

of

Samuel,
For the unusual form of
38, 13 Ti6), see
D"PI

what would be expected

inf. (in
y"y

in that sense.
:

the

verbs),

Ha

(so Gen. 31, 19

GK.

67.

Tlp. 3. 735?] insight, shrewdness: Pr. 16, 22 V7y3 735? Dv7yo] elsewhere only in poetry, and in prose written in the
elevated style of Dt. (Jud.
in Is.
i,
1

2,

19.

Neh.

9, 35).

(Di"l)D3

77yo SH occurs

6,

Dt. 28, 20, and often in Jer. (as

<l

4, 4).

1373]

Qre

?f 3,

Calebite,

the

being the usual patronymic

(de genere Caleb],

termination.

So Targ. (373 rV3*T) Vulg.

iTnt? D7
.on:j

Rashi,

Kimchi (p top 273 nnsKToo

Nabal belonged
(see
i

vvn).
in the country

to the Caleb-clan, a clan originally distinct

it,

afterwards incorporated in

which had settlements

from Judah, but about Hebron

Ch.

2,

Ma on, Beth-zur
and also
in the

42-49, where Ziph, Hebron, Tappuah, Joqde am [so read toTjorqo ant], [4! miles N. of Hebron], are specified as some of its settlements),

CALEB
5-

and Kittel

Negeb (see ch. 30, 14 the 373 333). See further DB. and EB. s Die Biicher der Chronik, pp. 13 f., 19 f.
ft.)

s.v.

17y]

Carmel (2887
2i6c

is

considerably above most of the sur

rounding plateau.

ri7l3] Cf. Ew.

wiT-Ken]
6.

GK.

90

GK.

44*, 6 4 f.

W] A most

perplexing and uncertain word,

(a)
liveth

The
(GK.

text

can
V
).

only be the pausal form of *np

= to
hence

him that

29

But the rendering,

thou,
etc.,

And

ye

shall say thus to

;

him

that liveth,

Both

affords a poor sense

it

is

thought by some to be

a form of salutation, of which no other instance occurs,

say thus,

And

ye shall
1

To him
God

that liveth

Both thou,

etc.

So

substantially Ges.

Ke., the former comparing the

si)
1

common

Arabic formula of salutation

islll*

keep

you

in life

= grant

you good

health.

() Vulg.

renders fratribus meis OfjKp), following which We., admitting the difficulty of the passage, thinks that relatively the best explanation

of

it is

to punctuate ^n?
(cf.

2
,

and

to render

And

ye

shall say thus to

my

brother

II 20, 9 TlX itriN

D17^n, where Joab uses the same term

1 The rendering In vitam is, however, doubtful, the sing. Thes. 469 f. occurring otherwise, at most, in a particular form of oath (p. 148). 2 In this case, however, it is almost necessary to read (so Bu.). It is cases of the elision of N occur (GK. 23 ), but none after a prep, with __.
""HNp

""H

life

true,

XXV.
in addressing

Amasa, and
<

Ki. 9, 13

Hiram addressing Solomon)

1
.

This seems the most probable (so Bu.). (c) Sm. would read DmiDNI s 31 nnx np IP And ye shall say to him and to his clan, Be thou (at)
i
;
i

peace/

etc. (so

Now.)

but a reference to Nabal s clan does not seem

called for.

The

other Versions evidently presuppose nothing different

2

from the
Pesh. gw

MT. LXX eis wpas (=

JOHJ>

fvn J1JD Gen. 18, 14); Targ.

see

"pr6;

^\
On
v.
}

For

^ = clan,
(rare), see

on

18, 18.

D1^
see

nriNl] Lit.
ch. 16, 4.

Both thou (be) peace :

cf.

II 20, 9 iins

DvE^n

and

on

= loth
cf.

Lex, 253* h.

7.

"1^

D^n

3] Cf. II 13, 23. 24.

D13D?3n
cf.

tfb]

So

15;
al.,

Ruth

2,

15 end.

For the
53?.

irregular n,

nN]n Gen. 41, 28

nb}n

2 Ki. 17,

GK.
:

a Dr6] ^ after the pass, verb, as Ex. 12, 16 al. Zor. 5i4 8. 310 DV recurs in Esther of time is most unusual. 21LD i?y] i?V
.
1

Di"

(8, 17.
"|T

9, 19. 22).

fcWDn It^N P.N]

8.

Cf. (though in different

connexions)

ch. 10, 7.

Lev. 12,
10.

Jud.

9, 33.

Qoh.

9, 10.

im]

irregular: see

GK.

67^.
of a ptcp. with the
art.

D^ ISDOn

D nay]
it

The combination

and

occurs sporadically in OT., often (but not invariably) where the subst. is definite in itself or defined by the context. Thus
a subst. without

Gen.

i,

21. 28.

7,

21 (with

rTTri>3

and IBQ

^)

Dt.
2,

2,
s

23. Jud. 14, 3

.

(with a n. pr.):
26, 18.
</r.

16, 27. Jer. 27, 3. 46, 16.

Ez.

14, 22*.
5
.

Pr.

62, 4 (read

rwn
to

nvui).

119, 21

(accents)

Here

the

Dr. Weir

Or

is it

T1&O

my

brother?

But see

v. 8

thy son David.

D3

may

follow the verb, as Ex.

as

5, 15,
is

TV

commencing
:

the speech
is

though rarely. Against the view that treats the extreme abruptness which attaches then to

H3 DJTIDKl

regularly said is (plENn) IIOND H3, e.g. ch. n, 9. The for both brother objection derived from v. 8 against my brother is not conclusive and son being used metaphorically, the terms may be interchanged (especially when

what

not addressed to the same person). 8 I.e. next year : comp. Theocr. 15. 74 (quoted by Liddell Field here) KTJS wpas KTjtretra, t irjs. avSpwv, Ic
KO.\>
<pi\

&

Scott,

and also by

Where, however,

0^13

7N

Where

Cornill

is

probably right

should probably be omitted with LXX. in vocalizing with LXX, Pesh. Symm. Vulg.

Some

other instances are noted in Tenses,

209

(2).

198
idea
slaves
is

The First Book

virtually limited

of

Samuel,

by the words

DVH, which shew

in view.
of, for
.

that the speaker has only a particular class of

"JSD]

them

JSO
cf.

is

more than }, and

9,

usually suggests on account

19, 10. 23, 26:

fear of:
is

Jud.

2i b

ch. 18,

n.
cf.

Lex. 8i8 a

It

used especially with verbs of fleeing.

ii.
I|

rinp7l]

and

shall

take P

Nu.
:

b 16, 10. Is. 66, 9 (tone mitel

on account of Tifha,
^E>]

Tenses,
is

104)

GK.

ii2 cc

LXX

<I

*,

which

generally preferred by moderns.

CO

is

probably, as

Abu

lwalid (Riqmah, ed.

Goldberg,

p.

175) suggested

long ago, due

in

to a lapsus calami.

It is true, in

a district (Jos. 15, 19)

which it was scarce, water might have been a commodity which would not readily be given away still, among the viands provided for the D W3 some more special beverage than water might not unnaturally
;
,

find a place (cf. v. 18),

and the change

to

DB

is

readily explained as

a consequence of the frequent collocation of D^EI Dr6.

For other
8.

instances of error due to lapsus calami, see ch. 12, 15. II 21,
27, i
;

Jer.

and no doubt

also

Ki.

2,

28.

13. 17JT)] See

14.

on

v. 5.

Bjn] from

my

(14, 32 Qr6. 15, 19),

here pointed regularly.

(but with dir
;

The

Versions mostly guess.

LXX
;

efe /cAtvev

avrutv:

DJTD for DPD), as

14, 32 e/cXi^
;

Aq. wrpvvOr}
ppl
;

Symm.
^0*00

Theod. eovSe vwo-ev

Vulg.
(after

Targ.

pm
\j/.

Pesh.

oi
that

Symm.) aversatus
Pesh.
etc.

est

eos.

Th. considers

these

renderings
1

point to tJp^l (cf.

if

95, 10);

on which We. remarks:

:

Dp"

!,

even

read
s

it,

on the expression of Nabal

probable.
15.

would be of no help all turns here But BSp*l (We. al.) is hardly feeling.

14,

46 \

1337nnn V?^:^] So (in the st. cs/r.) with a finite verb Lev. 90, 15 (nto*): with n^N, Lev. 13, 46. Nu. 9, 18 (GK. /r.

130*!).

Elsewhere the
20,
:

inf.,

as vv. 7. 16. 22, 4. in

17.

nrta]
clause

7.

7J?

and 7N here interchange

28, 8.

one and the

same
see

for other

remarkable instances of the same variation,

:

v. 25. II 2,

3,

29

Jer. 26, 15.

But some

treat

I^DH

here as an inf.

(GK.

53

),

though

in that case

it

should no doubt be pointed

T SDH

(see Driver on Dt. 3, 3. 4, 15. 7, 24. 28, 55).

XXV.
GK.
18.
i.e.

io-2)
is
:

199
.

133.
asuwoth.

The
RV.

implicit subj.

"O"lpn

see

on

16, 4.

733] jfowj (so

w.), as 10, 4 etc.

the dcr/on of the

NT.
i89
d
;

nil^i?]

So Kt.
24
b
,

On
75
V
:

the farm,

see

Ew.

Stade,

iipb,

319; GK.
o-aTov,

and comp.

rrilBa

Is. 3, 16.

The Qre

substitutes the

normal ni B J?

dsiiyolh.
-

D^ND] the

HXD (~

Mt. 13, 33) was

II 17, 28.

of an ephah,

or

2f gallons.

On

^p, see

on

DVCtt] dried grapes, or clusters of raisins (30, 12. II 16, i. Ch. 12, 4 it). The root signifies to be dry or shrivelled: in OT.
9,

only Hos.
grapes,
etc.

14 (D pOif

DHB>)

in the
!

Talm.
33j;
ii.

In Ps.-Jon.
Cf.

D^?"

O^n? D

Levy) of dried figs, (Nu. 3) is rendered by

(v.
6,

PJVOX}

P^UI pn^y.

Kennedy,

.E1Z?.

1568.
i

Dv3T] pressed fig-cakes {EB. ii. 1570): 30, 12. D^plDV, as a present to David s warriors). 2 Ki. 20,
20. iYTVi]

Ch. 12, 41 (with

Is. 38,

2 if.

The
2,

tense

is

incorrect (on
KO.I

i,

12).

Either

read

TH

(constr. as 2 Ki.

ii), or (though

e-yevrjOrj

stands in the

LXX)
(comp.

delete

it

as

then, for

an early corrupt anticipation of the following the form of the sentence, 9, 14 Tenses, 169).
:

KM

nTV] to meet David, on his way up (vv. 6. 21. ION Tfil] Note the plupf. (on 9, 15).
David
"jx]

13).

The

clause expresses

thoughts as he went along before he met Abigail.

;

as Jer. 5, 4

see

on

16, 6.

22.
(cf.

in

*3wh~\

LXX
The

TW AaveiS

*JY13, certainly rightly.

e.g. 20, 13) requires the imprecation to be uttered

Analogy by the speaker

against himself.

insertion of

^N

is

probably intentional, to

avoid the appearance, as the threat in b was not carried out, of the
1 imprecation recoiling upon David himself .

23.
19,
i

.TOB

y 111
(2)

and often;
;

^$~] We have the types, Gen. 48, 12. 28. N VBNb

")

(i)

nn
;

D SK innB1 Gen.

18, 28f, and 1*BN^ alone, Nu.

(4)

22,

sit
;

(3)

K VS
11
"!

^J?

2 S.

14, 4. 33.

Ki. i, 23f
2

V3N
^J?

S. 24,
2,

2of
(6)

also (5)

(HX1N) VJ3 (^N)^y !?B1

i

Jos. 5, 14.

S. 9, 6. 14, 22. Ru.

10

rttlK

V3N^ ^D

S. 20, 41

would

therefore here be

more

in

f but never DN^ another. iTDN accordance with usage (We. al.).
:

in ^D^

Comp.

similar

instances

in

the

Talm.,

Dalman,

Gramm.

des

Jiid.-Pal.

Aramaisch (1894),

p. 78; ed. 2 (1905), p. 109.

2Oo

The First Book of Samuel,

7

MSS. have

the

more usual

rreiN,

which

is

also a

T3D

(on 12,
24.

5).

vhn

OK a]

Cf.

^y beni] Cf. i Ki. i, 26

2 Ki. 4,
;

37 (Bu.).
135^; Ew.
31
1&.

and see GK.

an inadequate rendering. The word in Hebrew 25. bu] one who was insensible to the claims of either God or man, suggested and who was consequently at once irreligious and churlish see esp.
Fool
is
-

(where v. 6 unfolds the character of the 723 in terms which recall at once the conduct of Nabal described in this chapter J ). See further Lex. s. v. Parallel Psalter, Glossary, p. 457. Here the
Is.

32, 5 f

best rendering would be churl

Churl
is

is

his

name, and churlishness

is

with him,
26. nnjn
clause.
.

or, as
, .

we might say, nnyi] The word

his nature.

repeated after the long intervening

Resumption

is

a frequent characteristic of Heb. prose style.

14,

The

case of

"O

<

."O

has been noticed on

Lex. 472*) see also on 17, 13. The following are other examples, derived partly from my own observation, partly from Kon. Stilistik b "ICWI). 4, 9 . 12, 41 (TH . , . TM). (1900), p. 129!". Ex. i, 15-16 C-IDSOI
39
(cf.
: :

Lev. 13, 3
10, 32

onmi
1

nNTi). 17, 5
ii.

(warn
n,

wa*
14,

jxaob).

27, 3

NU.

5 , 19-21.
4,

(nTIl:
,

so Dt. 20,
8,

Jud.

31).

36-37 (D^JXH). Dt.

42

(Oil

Db;.
Is. 7,

Opaa Dnoaern). n
Din).
21,

6 (Kai . . , i, 1-2 (TIM).

v

W).
i

a a Jud. 9, i6 -i 9 ( Jl HENa OS), ch. 29, 10 Ki. s, 41-42 (sai). 12, 10 (na , . .icxn na
. .

22 (.TiT). 49, 5-6

"irDNM

."ION).

Jer.

with most moderns). 20, 5

(JflN).

29, 25 -3i

p^N

b 3,7 -8 (reading in 8 JOTTl, 34, 2. 10. 18-20. Ez. Jj;

1

").

29 (fjp). 24, 25-26* (wnn Dia . . . wa). 28, 2-6 (jy). Hag. 2, i3 -i5 For some examples from later books, see Kon. I.e. Comp. also the Zech. 8, 23. cases of the resumption of a noun by NTl, etc. (Tenses, 123 Qbs., 199; 198),
a a
.

N1i"l,

and of a casus pendens by a

suffix

1230, 197, with Obs.

"

2).

^
v.

"]y3D

l^s] The antecedent

separated from
*1C?K

t|

is

repeated in the relative clause,

"J^D3

because
34-

it is

by

the addition

Til

contrast

1
"P

y^

n<

!]
;

The

inf. abs., in

continuation of an

inf. c.,
it

as 22, i3 b

(see the note)

1

and followed by a
is

subst. standing to

in the relation

In

EVV.
:

p23

Render
gentle

(5)

The

churl will be no

here rendered unfortunately vile person, and (v3) v*3 churl. more called noble, nor the knave said to be

(6) For the churl speaketh (i.e., in modern English, a gentleman). churlishness, and his heart worketh naughtiness, to do profaneness, and to utter defection (lit. going astray) against Yahweh, to make empty the soul of the

hungry, and to cause the drink of the thirsty to

fail

and knave

for

churl in

v. 7-

XXV.
of subject (rare), as
the end;
v.

2}-2()
17, 5

2OI
328 towards implying an exploit or
(Ew.
force, recurs vv. 31.
to

33, Lev. 6, 7.

\j/.

GK.
7, 2.

113^).

The phrase
11

itself,

success, achieved against opposing obstacles

33.
Is.

by

Jud.
59, 16.

Job 40, 14
i
j

("j^E

),

and with reference

4-

Yahweh,

63, 5. ^. 98,
i.e.
it

cf.,

with ynr, 44,

27.
will,

rDin]

a present, called a blessing from the feelings of good

is

of which

the expression:

30, 26.

Gen. 33, n. Jud.

i,

14.

Ki. 5, 15.

An
As

error for

nx ttn, as

v.

35.

So 26 MSS.

in II 14, 10. Is. 9, 4, the

waw
123;

conv. with the pf. intro

143**):

duces the direct predicate (Tenses,

20, 5. Jud.
let it be

n,

8,

with a precative force,

GK. And now

here,
.
.

as
.
.

this present,

given,

etc.

TIN ^Jia]
28.
1

at the feet

of

my
17

lord
al.
1

=
i

following him, Ex.

n,

8.

Dt.

ii, 6. Jud. 4, 10. II 15, 16.

jew

rV2] Cf.

2,

25. II 7,
Cf.

6.

Ki.

n,

38.

nvt niDnta] As 18, 17.

Nu.

21, 14.
all the days that thou hast lived,

T^D] An
"Ipl

idiomatic expression
i
<

since thy birth:

Ki.

i,

6 VCHD

V3X

my

N^

having this sense, the pf. tense naturally used with it: probably NVDD yh is chosen with the view of generalising the statement as much as possible, so as to allow

nmv.

pD

Job 38, 12 ^OWI HNXDJ N^ would be the

;

it

to include a possible future,

is

not to be found in thee, etc.

. .
.
:

has (as a fact) risen up, etc. 29. Dp but the soul of my lord shall be, etc. If it be thought that the sense,
1

nnTn

And man

*"!]

and should a man

is

required, D^l

rise up ... then may the soul of my lord must be read (Is. 21, 7 ; Tenses, 149 ; GK.

be,

etc.

159^):

so Sm. Bu.
31

Now. Dh.
bound up
for safe

mnv]

custody in the bundle of life.

of,

JIN] with
Is.

=
.

in the care

and custody

as Lev.

5,

23

Dt. 15, 3

49, 4.
1

n^ypp"

DNl]

The
suffix

object resumed, and connected directly with

;

the verb

by the
21,

a frequent elegance of
197.
i,

Hebrew

style,

as

Gen.

13, 15.

13: Tenses,

6;

GK.

143.

Cf.

.oovOOd- ^j,

Wright, Apocr. Acts of the Apostles,

p. 88,

11.

15-16.

202

The First Book of Samuel,

y\
^>33]

30.

EVV.

according to
in

all
1

concerning thee,
p^y.
24, 19
text
is

which
TIK

Hebrew
ntrN

the good would be

cited

that he hath
"in
~itJ>X

spoken rniBn ^33

miu

nrwy
some

n,

by Bu.,
it

is

not parallel.

The
is

evidently in

disorder, though

is

not certain
^3

how

it

to be corrected.

Either this or -p^y 121

:

"IB>K

mion
is

be the original reading

H31 tan

but in either case

its

it

not

nx might apparent how

DK would assume

present place.

Perhaps H31t3n nx was

originally a marginal gloss.

31.

Then
etc.

let

not

this

be

to

thee a (cause of)

tottering

(or

staggering), or a stumbling of heart,

have (viz.) to
:

shed innocent

blood/
to be,

Let David avoid the

Both expressions are peculiar but the meaning appears difficulties which shedding innocent blood
in,

might hereafter involve him

will inevitably follow
it.

and the qualms of conscience which

of
tottering

The kind

expressed by the
;

root pIQ

may
2,

be learnt from a comparison of

(0*3*13 p^D).

Is. 28, 7

Jer. 10,

4;

and Nah.

n
:

The
2

ancient translations seem merely

or less agreeable with

to have conjectured for nplD a

meaning more
;

the context
in

LXX
et

singultum

Aq. Symm. Airy/xds, whence Vulg. 1 scrupulum cordis: Targ. XQV (solicitude), Pesh.
/3SeAvy/Aos

Jfco^ol (terror).

curious Midrashic exposition of

\j/.

np1D^>

may be

seen in the Midrash Tillin on

s. v.

53 (quoted by Levy,
and.

NHWB.,
seems
1

pDpS).
.
, ,

yPir6l

*J3^l]

et

et

both
;

But no

stress
first

to rest here

upon

the combination

and no doubt the

After

is

to
*r

be omitted, with

LXX,
their
:

Vulg. Pesh.

pw6l LXX
as

express

(which the translators are most unlikely to have done, had not the

word stood

in

text)
it

and the

insertion,

We. remarks,

is

a necessary one
of force
33.
(v.

for

just gives to the expression

used the sense

26) which

is

required.

*pyD]

discretion, tact.

Dyo
7551.

as Pr.

n,

22.

from vbl: GK.

See on
34. TJ
1
,
. .

Cf. 6, 10.

v.

26.
:

^ib a] as 14, 39

the

first

^3

introduces the assertion

In Ethiopia a different construction

is
:

frequently introduced into the relative clause

2

there possible, the antecedent being 201. i (). Dillmann, Aeth. Gr.

Possibly (but not certainly) a corruption of the unusual Avy/toy.

XXV.
sworn
to,

jo-jg
Thenius, following

203

the second

is

resumptive.

LXX literally,

gravely proposes, for the second a, to read

THEN

TN

By
7, 7
:

error for **pft\, through the influence of the following

(so Dr. Weir).

Otherwise

GK.
.
.

76^.

For

the tense,

cf.

Jos.

and
DX]

Tenses,
if
pf.,

140.

"iniJ

there

had been

left

= surely

there had not been

left.

The
inx

after the oath, as II 3,

27 (though not there intro

Ki. 17, i3 b

duced by DN).
35.
nbl]

The

pron.

is

emphatic

cf. i

Jud. 12,

i.

14, 16.
vj?]

She had

come down
For
i,

(v.

20) to meet David.

1^, cf.
,

36.
10.

nn^O

ib iTjm]

the position of

ih

z>.

Ki. 4,

13;

and on
ynr.
nriB>a]

ch.

2.

Comp.

also Jud. 17, 5.

Job 22, 8 K^Nl

Cf. II 13, 27

LXX.
aj

31D of the heart =^/aa?, merry: II 13, 28: Pr. 15, 15 3101

TOD

nnfc>O

ab.

So the

subst.

MO

Dt. 28, 47.

Is.

65,

14; and

3j *3^
V7J?]

Ki. 8, 66.

lit.

upon him, in accordance with

is

Hebrew idiom
live

see

on

17, 32.

Within
37.
\j/.
13/>

(E VV.)

a paraphrase.
is

TWl] opp.

D33^5

TV may your heart

= take courage,

22, 27.
Nini]

and he himself (opp. to 13^). And there was the 38. D DTJ ni^yn ^n^] D^NT n^t^ya is subject like often days, and, etc., 3 the like of being an undeveloped substan
:

tive
i

(Lex. 453
9,

a
).

For the
8.

art.,

Dr. Weir compares

is

9, 20.

Is.

30, 26.

Ch.

25. Ezr. 10,

But Q^i

certainly better in accordance with

analogy (so GK. of course, be QD

,

i34

m
).

mtW
is
.

Jp

And it came to pass after ten days, would, Wl (Jer. 42, 7). Comp. i Ki. 18, i Q^O ni
11

where Q^O

similarly the subject ol

cf.
i//-.

NT>1

(for the
i

,., see on
i\so

i, 2).

39. ^33

and

TD TO

31] pregnantly:

43,

TDH yh

an nan;

BBC2>

24, 16. II 18, 19. 31.

subj. repeated, the

3"{^n]

The

n^N
2,

at

the beginning of the

sentence having been forgotten.

1^X13
19
al.,

aw]

as Jud. 9, 57.
in
i

Ki.

44

cf.

1^N13 1O1
1CJ>N13

Jos. 2,

and the phrase

Ki. 8, 32

and often

in Ez.

204
"DTl]

The First Book of Samuel,

and spake concerning Abigail/
to
i.

e.

(as the phrase

was understood

mean) asked her in marriage. Cf. Cant. 8, 8. the word 42. ro?nn] Read rbbn (the n dittographed from irmyj) must be the predicate she rode, and they walked in attendance
:

behind her.

npn?]
of norm,

is

not quite the same as vJia

to

v.

27

the 7

is

the so-called ^

going according

her foot,

i.e.

guided by her foot= attending

upon
*73">7

her.

Comp.

for this sense of 7317

I

at

my foot = whithersoever
nDNPnn 7J17 according
is

turned (RV.)

Gen. 30, 30 hath blessed thee ; 33, 14 and I will lead

cattle

on

softly

to the

pace of the

(Lex. 5i6
was

b
).

43- Ahino am mother of David s

mentioned before Abigail

in 27, 3. 30, 5; she

also the

firstborn,

Amnon

(II 3, 2)

so probably he married her shortly

1

before Abigail, as the Heb. here permits (not T ... Hp7 !, but V. 44 hints at the reason why David took now these two wives
np"

DWTJK
;

OKI).

he had been

deprived of Michal (18, 27).

Not

the

7NJHP

in the

N. of Palestine, but one

in the hill-

country of Judah, Jos. 15, 56, evidently not far from

Ma on

and

Carmel (mentioned
inTlt? DJ]

there in v. 55, as in v. 2 here).

is I,

The

DJ

idiomatic in this phrase,

5. Pr. 17, 15.

both alike:

Dt.

22, 22. 23, 13.

Ru.

2O, IO. 12.

9, 15.

44. }nJ hstBf]

"U7S]

had given:

see

on

abridged from 7K U7S, II

3, 15.
is

DvJ]
26.

The
i.

situation
little

of Gallim

not

known

but

it

was

plainly

a (Is. 10, 3of)

N. of Jerusalem.
with 23, 19 (where see the note);

The

v. is largely identical

and

the narrative following in ch. 24 exhibits such

ch.

numerous points of

resemblance with
to

be in

reality different versions

26 that the two have been held by many scholars of the same incident. If this opinion
will

be correct, the more original version

present chapter.

be that contained in the

nnjD3n] Gibeah of Saul, 2\ miles N. of Jerusalem (see on

9,

i).

n^ann nyn:n] Perhaps

E.
of Ziph,

the long ridge called

Dahr el-Kold, $\
i

miles

N. of Wady Malaky (on 23, 26), running out of the Ziph plateau (see on 23, 14) towards the Dead Sea desert, or Jeshimon (Conder, T. W. 244;
of

10 miles

W.

En-gedi, and

mile

Buhl, 97).

XXV.
^3
looking
do.
it,

wXXVI.

205

by]

in
if

which,

front of the Desolation (see on 23, 24), i.e. over the hill of Hachilah is rightly identified, it would

The

passage

is

mean East of (comp. on

2.

one which shews that ^D by does not always b 15, 7): cf. Lex. 8i8
.

el-Ful Ziph 23, TV)] on 23, 19); but there is a descent from Tell el-Ful (2754 ft.) (see from Hebron (3040 ft.) to Ziph to Jerusalem (2593 ft.), and (2882 ft.); so no doubt came down is used with reference to one
Cf.

20.

is

actually

higher than Tell

of these.

On
3.
hill

the

e^r

"QIC,

see

on

23, 15. route,

Saul
of

encamped, Hachilah; David

near the ordinary

on the

particular

remained somewhere in the wilderness

around
3C>V]

it.

and

So v. 5 b was (EVV.) but was abiding. v. 7 was lying asleep, and were were encamping
not

abode

lying, lying.

The
by a
4.

reader of the English versions,

till

he

refers to the

Hebrew, does
participle

not realize

how much

is lost

by the frequent rendering of the

in

finite verb.

fG3~^x]

The same somewhat

singular expression

23,

23.
is

Here, however, immediately following N3, the

expected,
to

name

of a place

and the more

so, since the text, as

it

stands, adds nothing

that

what has been already stated in 3^, unless indeed it can be argued jm marks any more certain knowledge than NT1. It is probable
is

therefore that fO3 here

the corruption of the

it is

name

of

some

locality,

though what that

e* KetAa, as
5.
6.
5>JJ?D3]

may have been

points out,
is

impossible to conjecture.

LXX

We.

too vague.

See on 17, 20.

This Ahimelech
is

Tinn

"J^OTIK]

not mentioned elsewhere.

For

his nationality, cf.

Tinn FTniK.
in

TV
">]

David must therefore have been

some

part of the wilder

ness that was higher than nb Onn.

"3N]

For the pron.

in

such a sentence,

cf.

on

II 21, 6 (p. 352).

7.

inB>N"io]

prop, the parts at or about the head, hence construed in

the accus. adverbially

(GK.

118^), like
28,

niTUD and
vntrtOO

the corresponding
lit.

vm^iO, Ru.
(it)

3, 8. 14.

So Gen.

DB"1

and placed

at the parts about his head.

2o6
8.

The First Book of Samuel,

We

have had before

18,

Tp31

TH3 rax

19, 10 rp:ri3
into the wall, i.e. to

Tp31 TH3

to smite with the spear into

to the

David and

pin htm with the spear

wall.

The analogy

of these passages
suff.

shews that here

in

pfcOl

is

co-ordinate not with n^rO, but with the

suffix are,

133X

(We.),
it

pX3
is

and the

however, very unequally

coupled; and
f"iK3

better to read with

Krenkel

{ZAW.
(so

1882, 310)

W3n3
With
. . .

with his spear

(v. 7) to the earth

Sm. Now. Dh.

and

Ehrl.).
9.

ib fl3t?N N^1 cf. II 20, 10.

r&B>

npil

"]

npJI
pf.

is

the

pf.

with
\}/.

waw
n,
and
3.

conv.,

r&B>

has

a modal force

(cf.

the

in

Gen.

21, 7.

60,

11 = 108,
?

who
Job
in

ts

to
is

have put forth his hand,

etc.,

be

guiltless

n): The

sentence
9,

of a type that must be carefully distinguished from that of

?l

D^

vto nPpn

<n

Who

(ever) hardened himself [as a fact]

5,

against Him, and escaped sound? Dt.

23

(it

is

cited

wrongly
Still,

GK.

ii2 h ).

Comp.
it is

Tenses,

19.

2; 115
^

(p.

115).

in

spite of the parallels,

probable that a
VD.

has fallen out after

^D,

and

that

we should read rbw

DN O]
is
"O

10.

here cannot, as often, introduce the terms of the oath

following) would

for this (with

DK

yield a sense the very opposite

of what

required, viz. Surely Y. will not smite

him

DN

"a

must

therefore be construed together, though not in the

manner adopted

by Th. Ke. ( Except Y. smite him, or his day come, etc., far be it from me to put forth my hand against him ) for this both implies an un-Hebraic inversion of principal and subordinate clause, and
;

yields
if

an improbable sense David cannot have meant to imply that one of these contingencies happened to Saul, he would then be must be under ready to put forth his hand against him. Either ON
:
"O

stood to have the force of surely (as above, 21,

the negative (such as usually precedes
:

6),

or (Ges. Dr. Weir)

to be
:

it)

may be supposed

suppressed (minime ego Saulum caedam,) sed Deus caedat eum cf. II 13, 33 Kt. (minime,) sed solus Amnon mortuus est. 1JD3 ] by some sudden stroke, cutting him off prematurely
11

(25, 38.

II 12, 15. 2 Ch. 13,

20

al.),

iov denoting what would be

considered a natural close to his

HDD:] not
cf.

life.

perish

(EVV.), but

be

swept away; see on 12, 25, and

27,

i.

XXVI.
TV nr6l] The
and
force, to the

8-i 6

207

position of

HOni>B3

gives freshness of expression,

new
on

alternative.

In

TV David
on

has in his mind

a combat with the Philistines.

11.

For

niiTD, see

24, 7

and

for rpBto,

12, 23. 17, 14

it,
1B>K

The
:

accus. of place (v. 7), after

I^N, as Dt.
round about

cf.

Qor. 42, 5 l^Jj-*

whoever
<Ir

is

19, 5. b

M^TD^Jl]
12.

others.

away : so 12 DfT? 13^1 (Lex. 5i5 ). Read nfefcltpo a has fallen out between the two rtwn] The at the end, if correct, would be the one instance in OT.,
let \i&

and

get us

"

parallel to

rtojl
,

of that letter attached to the

st.

c.

of the fern. pi.

:

before an independent word (otherwise only before suffixes] Stade, b has avroO: so We. may be right in 33o ; GK. 87*. But

LXX

arguing that

the

instead of ^ixt? the

end confirms the reading In this Ti^NIC?:) (so Sm. Bu. Dh.).
*

at the

Vn55>K"U3D

of

LXX,

case, of course,

^ niSTin]
13.

anomaly

will disappear.

a slumber so profound and unusual that

it

was regarded

as sent directly from

Yahweh.

Cf.

DTlta

rmn

in 14, 15.
i.e.

-Oyn]

to the side across (cf. 14,

i. 4.

40);

to the opposite

side of the valley at the foot of the hill (v. 3).

ai

m]

circ.
itriK

clause (Tenses,
>]

161

GK.

156).
Is. 50,

Cf.

Gen.

12, 8.
;

14.

ntOp

In the third ps. comp.

(Tenses,

9 -oy^-V

Nimo

Job

13, 19

Toy TV- Nimio

201. 2): unless I

am

mistaken,

no
is

parallel in the second^ps. occurs in the

differently).
mOE>]

OT.

(the sentence Is. 51, 12

framed
15.

bx
"p^y

In

v. 1

6 ^y.

An

unusual construction: yet see Pr.

6,

22

(In

j/r.

59, 10 niDtN*
f

IDt^n 133^3, and (of watching in a hostile sense) II u, 16. T^K ny, as in z. 18, must certainly be read.)
II
2,

1 6.

y\

xb nK Nj See on
the plur. of

5.

excellence
is

(GK.

1241);

cf.

Gen. 42, 30.

either as

DNl] If the text

correct,

DX must be explained
is

marking the

fresh subject (see

on

17, 34), or

(Sm.) as an accus. under

unsatis
the time

the governing force of

factory.
is

but the last expl. especially

.

We
HN

expect either nNl

is

DN

or

"M

*N.

As

night,

to regard DK1 as
tarily

improbable (We.) after nsi; it seems best, therefore, an error for *$}, due to a scribe influenced involun
at the

by the recollection of nxi

beginning of the sentence.

208
So GK.
to

The First Book of Samuel,

ii7

(the citation of the verse in

117! must be due

an
17.

oversight).

vip] In Hebrew, the repetition of a word

:

is

mode

of signifying
is

assent (i Ki. 21, 20)

LXX,

for ^Ip, express yi3y,

cf. v.
:

which

used for
is

the

same purpose,

as II 9, 2,

"]H3y

run.

15, 15.

The one
that of

thus just a
[cf.

synonym of

the other

the

more

courtly

LXX

27, 5 in lieu of the pron.]

is

the less original idiomatic

2.
:

(We.).
20, 10.

18.
24,

Hjn
i

TirnO l] The
Ki. 12, 16. Jer.
rTV] Cf. Gen.

order
2,

is

cf.

II 19, 29.

13;

5.

Qoh. n,
*"">

Est.

6,

3 (Lex.

552

b
).

19.

nm
i, ifr

8,

21

nTI, followed however by

JIN

nrton.

Dr. Weir writes:

10.

HTJ, perhaps YT. as

cf.

Am.

5, 22. Jer. 14, 12.

Mai.
:rt

On

nanon,

on

2,

36.

ideas,

For the god of the country, according to ancient could be properly worshipped only in his own land hence
"lsi>]
:

banishment was equivalent Cf. Hos. 9, 3.

D""inx

to

being told to

go and serve foreign gods.

DTi^s] With the possible exception of Ex. 23, 13, probably

the earliest occurrence of this afterwards

common Deuteronomic
or Deut.
\f/.

expres

sion (see

LOT.

p. 92, edd. 6-8, p. 99

p. Ixxviii).

20. ^i -os

THE]

Cf.

7^y

nji
cf.

Am.
on

9, 3.

31, 23.

inN
to

E>yna

ns] For nx,

be derived here from

24,

nnx J^yiB appears, however, no doubt 15: LXX express ^33

9, 3.
,

rightly: for (i) the

comparison within a comparison (to seek a

a partridge)
a,
is

flea,

as

when one hunts

not probable

and
for

(2)

MT.
OH

agrees
*?&

but imperfectly with clause

the

ground

n"lX

("a)

ta

being only fully expressed in the reading of

Israel
is

LXX,
is

for the king of

come out
sc.
f

to seek
1 6,

my
4).

life.

P1TV]

lT1 ? (on

The

art. in

Nlpn

generic, such as

is

often found in comparisons, where a class, not a particular individual,

naturally referred b Jud. 8, i8 -]tan 133
is

to

(GK.
14, 6

I26 1

):

so II 17, 10
i

.TINH 3^3:

"INro;

^an yB^p;

Ki. 14, 15 11
etc.

mpn; Nu. n,
Klo. for
"1^X3

12 prn

nx |xn

x^ T^W,

would read

"15f33,

like a griffon-vulture (see

on II

i, 23),

which is adopted by Sm. Bu. (which) pursues a partridge on the mountains, The construction is common in poetry (e. g. Dt. 32, n. ^. 42, 2 Lex. 454*) ; but in prose comparisons are expressed either by 3 with the inf. (as Jud. 14, 6, cited
:

XXVI.
above), or by ItJ

17

XXVII
NlpiTTlN
by Klo.,

209

XD

(see #.),

i.e. in

the present case,

~li"Q.

LXX

KO.OUS KaraSiuKei 6 vvKTiKopaf kv TOIS optaiv, cited

is

not

evidence that
sents

DO

not the
it,

~lB>a.

corresponds here to X"pn, and repre (owl} in Lev. n, 17. i//. 107, 6; and in Dt. 14, i7f some other bird, but It is also a question, though it must be left to a naturalist to answer
read
"1JJOD
:

LXX

vvKTutopa

J, or griffon-vulture, being a carrion-feeding bird, would pursue a partridge on the mountains Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 172 ff., speaks of its keen sight, and of its swooping down from afar upon a carcase (Job 39, 29 f.),
"ItJ

whether the

but says nothing of

its

pursuit of the living animal.

21.

ai

mp ]
11

Cf. 2 Ki.

i,

13. 14; also

if/.

72, 14.

116, 15.
al.

Cf. 14, 24

LXX.

Lev.

4, 13.

Ez. 45, 20
treat

rain naBW

TWDn] The accents

nmn

as qualifying both

the preceding words.

22.

the spear of the king,

ital rvann nan] Kt. behold the spear, which is better adapted
distributive

king

Qre behold
n being

to the context,

repeated accidentally from nan.

23. B*&O] The art. has a b 41, 48 .

force:

Ki.

8,

39.

18, 4.

Gen.

^T?]
19, 9)
:

^T? would be more agreeable with general custom (comp. on

for the cases in

which
is

T3
as

occurs without a suffix are mostly

6.
Is.

those in which the reference

similarly

general (II 23,

here,

28, 2.

Pr.

6,

5),

not,

specific.

Job 34, 20 However, it is

:

have been here written intentionally, for the purpose of avoiding the assonance (which is here an awkward one)
possible that

T2 may
-"T.

with the following

Ki. 20, 42; Ez. 12, 7 (though here

LXX,

Pesh. omit T2); 2 Ch. 25, 20 would support the text.

But some

50 MSS. have
read
this.

T2

and

it

is better,

with Weir and most moderns, to

25. nt?y] used with a pregnant force, such as is

more common

in

poetry: ^3in

Is. 10,

13. $. 22, 32. 37, 5. Ez. 20, 9. 14. 22 (Lex.

i

794* 4).

by

nai] Cf.

Ki. 22, 22 i?3in nai.

27

31.

David

seeks

refuge in the country of the Philistines with

to

Ac his h.
advances

The
to

Philistines resolve

attack Israel ;

their

army
of

Apheq.

David

is

released

from

the

necessity

fighting against his countrymen through the opporttme suspicions

of the Philistine lords : his vengeance on

1365

the Amaleqiles

who had

2io

The First Book of Samuel,

smitten Ziqlag.

Saul

consults the witch

.

of En-dor.

Death of

Saul and Jonathan on Mount Gilbod

27,
i.

^
12,

^K] Gen.

8, 21.

24,

45; and with by

!>N

ch. i, 13.

25 (see note); 26, 10.

"IHK

DV]
ch. 9, 15.
y\
"O

unemphatic as Gen.
Is. 9,
al.

33,

13;

and (of the past)

(Not as

I have no good: for must escape into, etc. The first clause is, however, (=but) LXX have OVK ecm ftoi ayaOov harshly and abruptly expressed

21D
I

px]

13 can only be rendered,

a single day.)

lav

/IT]

o-wfla), i.e. is

have no good B?BN QK

except I escape/ etc.,

which

preferable.

yDO
2.

K>N13l]

a pregnant construction, occurring with this verb only

7, 8.

here, but analogous to that of t^inn, noticed on

NW.
3.

nj] of the presumable

n^D"Gn]
11

If

Gath was

at Tell es-Sdfiyeh (see

site

on on

6, 17),

some 28 miles

of Hachilah (see
in

26, i).
5. II 2, 2.

LXX ^"On,
So

agreement with 30,

4.

PjOi

K7I]
i, 7).

Kt., the impf. having a frequentative force, as 2, 25

substitutes the
:

(see
T
5>

on
>

The QrS
21
i3>

more usual

tense

*)PJ

K?\

comp. a similar case in Jos. 15, 63. 35 al.) ( 5. NJ] SJ belongs logically to urv ; but it is thrown back into the protasis and attached to DX, as regularly in this formula (Gen. 18, 3;
33, 10
al.),

J u d-

for the

purpose of indicating as early as possible that the

speech
6.

is

of the nature of an entreaty.

J^pv] Supposed

Tell

es-Safiyeh: but the consonants, except

is

by Conder to be Zuheliqeh, 22 miles SW. of do not correspond

i>,

phonetically, so that the identification

pi?]
is is
p"i>X>

very uncertain.

regularly used,

when
:

the origin of a

name

or custom

assigned (Gen. 10, 9.

n,

etc.

Lex. 487); hence the

by

TOD

(see
is

though not supported, so far as appears, by any MS., prompted by a sound literary instinct, and may be correct. nymNl D"^] D^ by usage, suggesting a year : see i, 3, 7.
12, 5),

on

OWn
Py*
1
"!]

11

and, more
8.

distinctly, Jud. 17,

10

Q^v

*1D3

mEty; Lev.

25, 29.

lived (which

Either into the higher ground on which the tribes raided by David would suit Gezer) or, in the uncertainty whether this ground was higher than Ziqlag, in a military sense (Now.), of an attack in general, as Jud. 20, 18.
;

Is.

21, 2.

Nah.

2, 2.

XX VI7.
(Qre

1-8
TravTo.

2ii
TOV Teo-eipt,
reading,

num)

P3ni

m^:n]

LXX

have

therefore, only one name (viz. "HltMn; see Jos. 13, n. 13 LXX), so that the two are presumably doublets. As the better-known Geshur,

on

East of the upper Jordan, is evidently out of the question, the here and Jos. 13, 2, if the text is correct, is probably that of a small tribe between the Philistines and Egypt (Bu. Dhorme, Kenn.).
the

name

We. Now., preferring the other doublet, read *1t3n, i.e. the Canaanites who till the time of Solomon occupied Gezer (Jud. i, 29 i Ki. 9, 16),
;

12

miles

ENE.

of Tell es-Safiyeh

but

this

appears to be too

far

to the

N.
(Anc. Heb. Trad. 242
:

Hommel
(cf.

f.)

would read both here and

Jos. 13, 2

corresponding to the T)>XX mentioned in two Minaean inscriptions as living apparently near Egypt (p. 249 f.), and Gaza but that X should have become corrupted into 3 in two passages is (p. 252)

Gen.

25, 3

Homm.

238-240

D"1K*K),

hardly likely.
31

ni2E

run
"a]

Very

difficult.

In the

first

place,

the fern,

is

extremely anomalous.

If the text

be sound,
1 7,

this
1,

on the analogy of the usage noticed on

must be explained by which sometimes

:

a country, or the population of a country, is construed as a fern. but no case occurs so extreme as the present, in which the fern, is used
with immediate reference to a gentile name, expressed in the masc.

And

even the poetical use of

n^i"

(noticed ibid?)

is

not extended to

the plural.

Nevertheless, as the

text stands,

nothing remains but

to explain the passage in

accordance with

this poetical usage,

and

to

render (with We.)

For those were the populations of the land

But
:

from
the

etc.,

the gender of nan being naturally determined by that of

(niajj*)
is

predicate

following.

this

extension

of a

purely

poetical usage
is
31

extremely improbable

simply

31

pxn IW

non

"a.

and what we should expect In the words which follow, IPX

*]X13 is

D71JJD, there is

a further

difficulty.

used regularly to denote

al.
;

the direction in which a land or tract of country extends (15, 7

similarly in
"JN13

1J7

Jud.

6,

4 al.);

hence (since

as thou comest to
it

the land which

is

of old

yields

no
lie

suitable sense)

follows almost

of necessity that in D^iyo must

limit in the opposite direction.

concealed the definition of the

in Cod.

LXX
p 2

exhibits a doublet
17

twice

over (aTro

dvr/KovTwv

= [apparently

O/iM?]

d?

TeXa/ju(/ovp

212

The First Book of Samuel,

D^y again
wall\)

[=
TIE

+ Tit?]

TTt^io-)u.vwv [clearly a second representative of

TtXaju,,

but the reading

found in

many

cursives

in place

were the populations the land which is from Telam as thou goest to Shur, even inhabiting unto the land of Egypt/ From Jos. 15, 24 it appears that Telam
of FeXa/A, points to

E^O

for D?X?O

for those

(pointed there E.?^) was a place in the

Negeb
:

of Judah (see

on

v. 10),

seemingly towards the border of Edom in ch. 15, 4 it is named as the spot where Saul assembled his forces before attacking the Amaleqites
;

so that

it

would seem to

satisfy sufficiently all the conditions

required of the present verse.

will

In form, the sentence, as thus restored,

;

almost exactly resemble Gen. 10, 19

7.

comp.

25, 18,

Respecting

TIE , see on 15,

9.

In a frequentative sense, describing David s custom whenever he engaged in one of these raids. Notice the impff.
np?1
, . .

rom]

interchanging here (nTY N7) and in

1

v.

n.

EVV.

(smote, saved, etc.)

fail

to bring this out, either here or in v,

:

n.
that a

NTl] Ehrl. K?;|

10.
out,
DnD>D
t|

cf.

D3 Jttir6.

b$] Either

we must suppose

word has dropped

is

and read P~bs with

LXX

(e?ri

riva

;),

Vulg., or, which

perhaps
[a*/).

better,

we must read
is

|N (see

10, 14) with

Targ. Pesh.

(|Np,

The

text

untranslateable.
pr) in

It is

a singular fallacy to argue that because

Greek may ask a question,

in the least

therefore
parallel.

bx

in
is

Hebrew may do

the

same

for the

two words are not

which
dead,

its

a particle expressing generally the idea of subjective negation, from = he is not interrogative force is at once readily deduced (pi) rtBvijuev ;
M?)

implying that a satisfying answer is expected). /X has no such In other general signification, but is simply a particle of dissuasion or prohibition. words, the interrogative use of pi) is dependent upon an element in its signification,

I suppose ?

which does not attach to the

333]

particle

?X

at all.

3133 prop, the dry country, the root (^33,

a^)

to be

dry

is

in use in

8, 13 Onq. N D 12133). Hence, from the (e.g. KO.T C^QX^V being on the South of Palestine, the word dry country acquired generally the sense of South, and geographically was applied

Aramaic

Gen.

in particular to a district in the S. of

Judah

(see

Gen. 12, 9 RV.

T(\ap$ovp XI. 44, 55, 71, 106, 120, 134, 144, 158, 245; Tf\cuf/ovp 29; re rt \aptyovv 74 (from Holmes and Parsons). aptyovp 64, 119, 244
;

Section of

NORTHERN PALESTINE

Scale
Roads

of

Miles

L
-

Heights in English feet.By permission of

Railways
the Palestine Exploration

Fund

and of Messrs. John Bartholomew

& Co.

XXV
marg.
;

II.

XXVIIL
cities in
it

j
are enumerated.
:

213
In
e. g.
ff.

Jos. 15, 21-32,

where the

RV.
Jos.

in this special geographical sense,

always with a capital S

15, 19.

Is.

21,

i).

See NEGEB in

EB.

and H.G.

p.

278

Here other
of the

districts in the
elite,

same neighbourhood are

called the

Negeb

Yerahme

of the clans settled

and the Negeb of the Qenite, from the names upon them (cf. 30, 29 the cities of the Yerah

me elite and

of the Qenite ): in 30, 14 also

we have

the

Negeb

of

and the Negeb of Caleb; and in Jud. i, 16 (MT.) the Negeb of Arad (9 miles S. of Ma on). Yerahme el was the name of a clan allied to that of the Calebites (cf. on 25, 3) both were
the Cherethites,
:

afterwards absorbed into the tribe of Judah

Caleb~\.

see

Ch.

2,

9 [read

25-33. 4 2
1

The Qenites were connected

on
ch. 15, 6):
cf.

with the Amaleqites,

130.

15, 6; Jud. i,
1 1 ( J1
.

6 (see

EB.

i.

The athnah would be

better

placed

at

in, what follows

IDa& E nai) being obviously no part of the speech, but the remark of the narrator (so Now.). It must be admitted, however, that

in
it

Wy

na, and

:i

IDStt D nai, naturally

"JEN?

go together:

it

is

better,

therefore, either to omit

(Vulg. Sm. Dh. Ehrl.) or to read for

narrator,

t^ax^ (Klo. Bu.): y\ nt?J? na will then be all the words of the na with a subst., as Is. 20, 6. Jer. 23, 29. 12. ^Nan] lit. putforth an ill odour (i/r. 38, 6 GK. 53 d ) against be in ill odour with (cf. 13, 4). With a transitive force Gen. 34,30.
:

n6iy *ny^] Dt. 15, 17. Job 40, 28; cf. Ex. 21, TIN has some emphasis: TIN 28, i.

6.

D.TD3
2.

cf. II 19, 39 TIN Gen. 43, 16 QnrW3 D tWNn TIN ^. p^] in answer to the remark made by another, as Gen. 4, 15.
"0]

Nn

W.

lbaN>

30, 15

[where

LXX,

not perceiving the idiom, render ov^ OVTWS:

comp. on

3, 14].

Jud. 8, 7.

n,

8: Lex. 487 a

LXX, Vulg. nny

CC ]
Studies, s.v.

rightly.

Comp.

II

8,

3;
title

Ki.

i,

18. 20.

LXX

the
apxLo-<afj<,aTo<j>vXa,

of the

chief of

the royal body-guard under the Ptolemies.

See Deissmann, Bible

325. Saul consults the witch of En-dor. This section (which forms an independent narrative) appears to be out of its proper place. In 28, 4 the Philistines are at Shunem (3^ miles N. of Jezreel) in 29, i
;

they are

still

at

Apheq

(in the Sharon, Jos. 12, 18),

and only reach

214
Jezreel in
29,

The First Book of Samuel,

n.
The
narrative will be in
V. 3
is

its

right order, if the

section be read after ch. 29-30.

3.

evidently introductory.

riSD^l] wailed,

with loud demonstrations of grief, in the

manner
nt?yK,

of Oriental mourners.

So 1SDD;

cf.

Mic.

i,

OrjrD

nBDD
rend,

with

allusion to the
for

doleful cry of the jackal.

is

The
:

mourn,
are

mourning

HSD,

"IQDO,

altogether inadequate

the words
s

never used of merely

silent grief.

See further the writer

note on

Am.
in

5,

6 (in the

Camb.
if

Bible].

1Ty3l]

The waw,

correct,

Ramah, and

that in his city.

1

must be explicative (GK. 154* note}: But such a construction is very

/.

unusual, and probably

is

has been introduced by error (GK.

!TO"Q
1"PJJ3

r.)

it

However, rvyn would be the usual order, i, 3 LXX. II Both the perfects (ib. 20, 6 is rather different).
a pluperfect sense (see

not expressed by

LXX.

rather than
12.

fiD"Q

15,

Jud.

8,

27

in this verse

have

on

9, 15).

TDH

i>1KB>l]

had removed;

see

on

9, 15.

D^ayr] See Lev. 20, 27 ( a man or a woman when there is in them ^ayTI 31N ), which shews that the term properly denotes not a wizard, but the spirit whether the term means the knower, i. e. the wise spirit

(Ew.

viehvisserisch),
spirit, at

or

familiar

the beck

to inhabit the persons in Dt.

1

(W. R. Smith) the acquaintance, i.e. the and call of a particular person supposed See further the writer s note on question.

8, ii (p. 226).

4.

Now
Da"i>]

Solem, near the E. end of the Plain of Esdraelon,

ft. up the sloping S. side of Jelel Nabl Dahl (also called Little Hermon), 3^ miles N. of Jezreel. The Philistines had thus penetrated into the heart of Northern Palestine, more than 60 miles from the

448

northernmost of their
,

cities,

Eqron.

y3732] Gilboa now Jebel Fuqua, is the ridge running to the SE. on the S. side of the Vale of Jezreel (see on 31, 7), 5-12 miles S. and

SE. of Shunem.
7.

31K D/y3

nc>N]

An

instance of what

may

be termed a suspended

construct state

nt?K, not less than ri7y3, being determined

it

by
held

31 K,

but

the

genitive which determines

being

deferred,

or

in

suspense, by

the introduction of the parallel r6y3.

Is. 23,

So

in the

common

phrase

H3 nWl3

12

37, 22

al.

and

in poetry occasionally

XXVIII.
besides, as Dt. 33, 19

}-i4
Job
20, 17

215
Ban

WDD

JEjb>;

^m

nru

Ew.

2890;
"ill

GK.

30 e.

pyn]
*Diop]
fy-

Now
The
46.

End&r, a small
in

village,

3^ miles NE. of Shunem.

8.
"9^

Kt. has the fuller form of the imperative, as Jud. 9, 8

;

"P.

26, 2 naiix

each case the Qre substitutes the ordinary

io h
.

form,

GK.

For *Dj?, see GK.

On

the probable
s.v.,

method

of divination originally expressed by DDp, see Lex. Deut. p. 223 f.

9.

or the writer s

\3JJTn]

Twenty-three MSS. have D jyTn

fallen out before the

and

it is

true that the

D may have

of

JD.

The
(cf.

plural

would have
al.),

the advantage of greater

symmetry with

ni3tfn

v. 3.

Lev. 19, 31

and

is

probable, though not perhaps absolutely necessary, as

jyTH

may be
i\rh~\

taken in a collective sense.

See on
1

19, 17.

With dagesh dirimens. It must have become the custom, as the OT. was read, to pronounce the same word or form, in different
10.
"PP"

passages,

with

a slightly different

articulation,

which

is

reflected

accurately in the

varying punctuation.

Here the dagesh dirimens

has the effect of causing the P to be pronounced with peculiar dis

cf. Hos. 3, 2 tinctness vQ3X1; Ex. 2, 3 iJ SJfn, 15, 17 BHpO (in which etc. cases the dagesh involves the softening of the following Q and
:

"H),

GK.
12.
13.

zoh.

bwOB ]

Six

^l DVT^K]

MSS. of LXX, Perles, Bu. Now. Ehrl. The position of DTl^N before ^ Nl shews
in the sentence.

^KB>.

that

it

is

the emphatic

word

D^y] with
(i.e.

the plur. partic.

DT&X seems

naturally to

mean gods
though the

here superhuman beings, spirits): in this case, therefore, as Saul

in v. 14 asks

What

is

his

form?

we must suppose
is

that

woman

says she

saw more than one

figure, Saul in his anxiety inquires

only about the one in

whom
GK,

he
is

interested.

Sm. Bu. Now. Dh.,

less probably, think that

DTI^N

a honorific plural
note],

(GK.

1248-1),

and denotes

a god

(so

132^

the pi.

a grammatical plural, like D Tl in D^n DVlbtt

(17, a6al.).
14.
b

D^y being merely h (GK. i32 ) of Yahweh

yo] such as was worn by Samuel,

ti?.t),

15, 27.

On LXX
f.

opQiov

(HPt for

see Wellh. p. 13;

Aptow.

ZAW.

1909, p. 246

216
15. TOp]

The First Book of Samuel,

Before a guttural (other than n)
"ID?

is

usual (see on

noted by the Massorah (Lex. 554 a ). ^niJin] Cf. the same word, of disturbing a tomb, in the Tabnith ntn nnPip ^W?. Inscr. 1. 7 (Introd. i): also Is. 14, 9 \N> T\^\h
19, 17): but Ht|b occurs so 5 times

^yD ^D]

Cf. v.

1 6.

DVD

is,

however, more natural in

this

con

nexion (16, 14. 18, 12): for in Jud. 16, 19. 20 the use of ^J?D is evidently determined by the fact that Samson s strength was regarded
as resting upon him in his hair, in Nu. 14, 19 (cf. Neh. determined similarly by the figure of the shade, and in
9,

19)

it

is

ch.

16,

23
16).
(cf.

by the common thought of a spirit coming on a person (see v. Here probably by denotes the idea of protecting accompaniment
^.

no,

l^D ^y;
11

121, 5

pD T
1

by);

and ^yD

"ID

expresses the

cessation of
is

this.

used in several idiomatic applications not only as signifying from byD attendance on (comp. on 13, 8. 17, 15), but also from attachment to (Jer. 2, 5
;

6yn ipm;
56, 3
;

32, 40

^yc
-with

-no

from companionship
Hos.
9, i
;

EZ. 6, 9 ^JJQ -ID n:6 8,6; 14, 5 (Job 19, 13) from adhesion to (2 Ki. 17, 21
<ni>3$>;

44, 10); 17
;

Is. 7,

and twice,
;

2 Ki. 10, 31.

42, 24)

15, 1 8) from from being a burden upon

JD, in the phrase standing over or beside (Gen. 17, 22. 35, 13

for the

more usual
on

mNDH
:

7j?D

"ID

cf. 18, 3.

(see

6, 5. 20), esp. 2

of an

army

retiring

from

a country, or raising a siege (see the passages from 20; and add II 10, 14. Jer. 21, 2. 37, 5. 9. n).

Sam. 1-2 Ki.

cited on ch. 6,

Very anomalous: Ew.

Konig,
i.

2280; Stade,

608,

who

suggests that the

may

4 132; GK. be due to dissimilation,

8<3;

after the
1 6.

preceding unusual -^-; cf. on 21, 2. *py Wl] Is there a Hebrew word

Read nxipSl
"W

1
.

with the signification

(root
">15f)

adversary or enemy ?
to Arabic

The common Heb.

2,

"IS

corresponds

JJ

/0

/fom (Qor.

96. 3, 107, etc.):

and

this (according
4, 16.

to rule

2 )

corresponds to the (isolated) Aramaic

\j/.

">V

Dan.

The

same word may also possibly be found in the Psalm 139, 20 is a late one, and is marked by several other Aramaisms but this
cannot be affirmed with certainty, the verse being a
difficult

one, and

The

supposition that the form

is

conflate,

from NIpNl, and rnpKI,

N"lp

is

not

probable : to meet.
3

and

met

does not suit the context, nor does

in

Qal mean

See on

i,

6 (p. 9 footnote).

XXVIII.
probably corrupt.

is-i7

2I 7

At any rate, philology forbids imperatively the l assumption of a Hebrew word adversary, the equivalent of

">

any other source ?

from Can, however, a sense, suitable to the context, be rendered probable for (a) Symm. renders avrifakos aov, and in Arabic ,Ufr (med. i)
"iy,

means

actually to be jealous or a rival

i

i-^c

= ^3|5

Ex. 20, 5 Saad.

I. .j\_i.J

=
:

Cor. 12, 31 Erpen.). Still there is no other trace of this root in Hebrew fykovrt nor would the idea of Yahweh s becoming Saul s rival be probable or suitable.
(3) Ges. Keil seek to explain ~iy

by a reference

to

Arabic .Li (med. \)ferbuit (one

fuit

of

many

meanings), impetum fecit, spec, excursione hostili adortus

,Lcl to

(aliquem),
13, 17

IV

(Lane) .JLc
:

make a raid

or predatory incttrsion
:

upon (comp.
it is

note)

A.c a raid or hostile incursion

hence, the cognate subst.,

supposed,

would properly have the sense of aestus (sc. in Hebrew Hos. n, 9 aestus irae ; Jer.
*Y>y

doloris, curae, sollicitudinis),

whence

15, 8 aestus doloris [this explanation

;

b and ray Jeremiah, p. 360 f.]. is, however, very uncertain: see Lex. 735 But the sense of hostility expressed by the Arabic root is, it will be observed, a special and derived one is it likely, or indeed credible, that from a root meaning

of *Vy

ferbnit a simple participial formation should have acquired the definite sense of enemy ? The etymology proposed is well intended : but it cannot be said to have
probability in
its

favour.

It follows that if

"py

has here the sense of thy enemy,

it

must be an
as,

example of a strong and pronounced Aramaism, such

sumably early Hebrew, two alternatives are open
tion for
or,
is

in

pre

in the highest

degree improbable.
is

Only

to us.

Either

"py

an error of transcrip
2,

^X-

(cf. in

that case, for the thought,

"

and Pesh., and is become on the side !]p of thy neighbour must be read (cf. JH with reference to David, v. 17, and 15, 28, and for the thought 18, 12 ID ^Nt? Dyoi toy nin? n;n ra).
f
"Dy

with

LXX

Lam.

Is.

63, 10),

ny"l

Dy

is

Reinke,

accepted by most moderns (Th. Hitzig, Noldeke, Gratz, Now. Dh. seems to be right Kp., Dr. Weir [

LXX

]),

Klo. Sm. Bu. prefer

17-

"pv.

Wi]
if

And Y.
-jyn

as

etc.

Or,

hath wrought for himself, according oy be adopted in v. 16, the suffix may be

referred naturally

to

-jyi

(for him).

However, the point of the

Nor can

this

be the meaning of iy

It is possible that this in the

in Mic. 5, 13 (AV.) was read by Symmachus. At

:

or Is. 14, 21.

least di/n ^Aos as

used

elsewhere

LXX

Greek Versions expresses the root Tl (Luc.). 2, 32 Aq. (but ^. 139, 20 Aq.

Lev. 18, 18

LXX

ch. I,

218
sentence
lies

The First Book of Samuel,

in

what

is

done

to Saul, rather than

what

is

done
,

to

David
Vulg.,

so, in all probability,

is

to thee,

expressed by 5

MSS LXX,
With i7 b
v.

the original

reading (so Sm. Bu.

Now.

Dh.).

comp.
i8 b
.

15, 28.

19. In
is

For the order of words, MT. clauses a and

see Tenses,
c are

208

(i).

So

t9

almost identical; and the verse

decidedly improved by the omission of one of them, and by the ^By T?? n adoption in b of the reading of LXX, viz. D
f>Bb

">C"?

31

DJ,

i.e.

(immediately after

v.

18)

with thee will be fallen

give into the

; yea, also,

To-morrow thou and thy sons the camp of Israel will Yahweh
As We. remarks, a
is

hand of
it

the Philistines.

out of

place where
until after
it
l

"py being properly understood, has been said that Saul himself has fallen.

stands, neither D3 nor

20.

"irtB

i]

LXX

eo-Trewev, not

only here, but also in

in

v.

21 for ?rO3

so doubtless they read the

(actively) j ,
TnB.il (Klo.

same
:

both verses.
is

A man

would not
11

hasten

to fall

down

?n3>l[

thus

more

suitable than

"inn
..

- .. }.
(

Sm. Dh.) does not seem

B>M

to express the right nuance.

21.

M3

DWl]
is

19, 5.

23. WlD*l]

^"IQ

translated pressed in II 13, 25. 27

and urged

in 2 Ki. 5, 23, but elsewhere break forth, burst forth, etc.

not to read

->S

(Dr. Weir).
so, or

Ought we So 20 MSS. (de Rossi, App. p. 39),

pis a

Sm. Now. Dh.

Bu. (either

Nebenstamm

to

1D).

24. ... nm6l] Cf. on

II 3, 7.
ijjy:
is

pm]
6,

four times, always connected with

"pn

Jer. 46, 21.

Am.

pn

D^y.
in
:

Mai.

3,

20.

The

root

not found elsewhere

in

Hebrew, but
inani] for

Arabic
cf.

insum

on

JjJ firmiter altigavit (Dr. Weir). and GK. 68 h 15, 5

;
.

29,

i.

pax]

Probably (see

on

4,

i)

some place

in

the

Plain of

Sharon,

commanding

the entrance to the Plain of Dothan(f. 32

24 N.),

and so the route up

D^n]
Contrast
4, i

to Jezreel
;

and Shunem
pitched

(28, 4).

were encamping
(WH).

not

(EVV.), which would be

be Ainjdlud,
at the foot

t^N PJQ] Generally

supposed

to

of Mt. Gilboa

on

the N.,

if miles

ESE.

of Jezreel, and looking

4),

across the Vale of Jezreel to Solam, the Philistine position (28,

4 miles

N.

by W., and 568

ft.

above

it.

Jezreel

will

denote

XXVIIL iSXXIX. /
here, not the town, but the Vale (31, 7).

219
if

As

Ehrl. remarks, however,

7,
i

py means a
not 3,

spring, Heb. idiom requires hy (Gen. 16, 7. Jud. so that a genitive would seem to have fallen out (cf.

al.),

bp

pya

II 17, 17).

En-dor, however
J.

(LXX,

cod.

and other MSS.), on

Philistine

the

NW.

slope of
is

Nabi Dahi, and 4 miles behind the

were passing by.
by hundreds:

position,
2.

too far off to be probable.

(twice)]

DH^y

The
?

participles

suggest the

picture of a muster or review of troops taking place.

according
5
-

to,

as

II.

18, 4.

Ki. 20, 10

Jos.

7,

14 on:i:6.
not
these

3.

JIT]

days

here, as in

many
is,
it

similar phrases,

(EVV.), except as a paraphrase fit is DVpy.S nt, D^DyS iby, HT, etc. an
:

adverb,
HI.

meaning properly here

D^5J>

(cf.

H]3 )

see

Lex. 26 i b

So

in

however, strangely indefinite;

is

and as D^D^ suggests

(on
with

i,

3),

probable that

0^3^

two years should be read,

LXX (Sevrepov ITOS), Bu. Sm. = 1^B3] LXX adds TT/SOS /xe
"vX
:

Now.
or

Kitt. Ehrl.

vV>

which

is

needed.

Falling

gives no sense falling

to

me agrees with
al.)

the usage of (?y) ?N ?S3

elsewhere (Jer. 21,

nearer
context.
4.

9.

37, 13 as

definition

cannot,

The to desert to. to fall over to Keil supposes, be supplied from the
v. 9

(Dr.
It

Weir

agrees.)

TV]

is

remarkable that in
It

ruy

is

used for exactly the

same movement.
Philistines to

seems that the narrator must here allow the

(cf. v. 6,

speak from the Israelite point of view

where

Achish

is

represented as swearing

by Yahweti),

who would go down

quite generally

from the mountainous country of Judah to

in their plains,
3>

fight against the Philistines

and so might say nDr6o3

viz.
i

TV

(cf.

2 4).

\\Sth~\
cf.

as a thwarter or opposer,

of another

man
the

purposes
also

the

same word
i

in

II

19,

23;

Ki.

n,

14. 23.

25;

Nu.
the

22, 22. 32.

Ki.

5, 18.
it is

So JDbn
to oppose

is

in the

OT.

name of

angel,

whose function

men

in their pretensions to
s

a right

standing with

God

(see

A. B. Davidson
s

note on Job
3,
i

i,

6 in the

Camb. Bible
Bible}.
5.

and the writer

note on Zech.

in

the

Century

See

1 8,

7; and

cf.

21,

n.

22O
6. 7.

The First Book of Samuel,

^J
after the oath, as 14, 39.
"J7J

DW1

as II 15, 27.

The

usual expression

is

8.

VPE y no
it

13]

a states the reason for a suppressed

(Why do you
i

say this?):
2 Ki. 8, 13.

recurs in a similarly worded expostulation,

Ki.

u,

22.

TVn Wjn Di

1B>N

rp

(Jer. 36, 2

DVD] As We. remarks, we should expect naturally either Dt. 4, 15), or, as would be more cf. II 22, i.
:

usual, Vri\n

DiC

fA. 7, 2. (z,. 6,
i

8, 8.
1 6.

II 13,

32

etc.),

or (Dto

ft?)

Dino

rrVM IPi*

(II 19, 25.

Ki. 8,

Ki. 21, 15).

However, DV may
before
^B>K

have been conceived as being d I3o ), and so defined. (GK.

Jer.

in

the construct state

least
"it?N

At

DV recurs

similarly,

38,

28,

and

(in

late

Hebrew) Neh.

5,

14.

But DVHD would

certainly be better.

TlDn^Jl]

The

zvazv being consecutive, the tone should properly

be

milra

TlDrpJI

but

it

is

held back by the distinctive accent zdqef, as

Tenses,
sufficient

happens occasionally (Dt. 2, 28: Ez. 3, 26: a rule, only athnah and soph-pasuq imply a
to hold
9.

104).

As

pause thus

back the tone of

"JK7O3]

and

2 sing. pf. with zvazv consec.

Dv6tf

The same comparison,

in popular speech, II 14,

17. 19, 27.

H7JP]

Here

(contrast v. 4) the Philistines speak from the point of

view which would be natural to them, when they were invading the
high central ground of Canaan
10.
:i
-"nayi

(e. g.

Jud. 15,

9. 10), cf. v.

nb

np:n

MEM

nnjn]

morning, and also the servants, be defended by 25, 42. Gen. 41, 27.

And now, rise up early in the The text may in a measure etc.
Nu.
16,
2a.

i8 b

but the

sentence halts considerably, and the omission of the pronoun before

""nyi

is

contrary to standing

Hebrew
8.

usage,

when

the verb

is

in the

imperative (e.g. 7, nriK before Hlljn. rightly

Gen.

i.

Ex. u,

24, i).

LXX,

Vulg. express

The

only parallel to the present passage

it

would be

i Jer. 19,

but there also

the reading of
J1

LXX

is

can scarcely be doubted that what Hebrew idiom requires, viz. JpTD "??]
a and b are nearly identical
:

Dyn.
as

In

this verse, further, clauses

but,

We.

observes, the
if

repetition of the

same thought would

in

become

perfectly natural,

only words of different import separated

the two similar clauses.

Such words are expressed

LXX

(after

XXIX.
),

XXX.

)
Ket-

221
KCU Xoyov

viz. Kal 7ropfve(r6e eis

fjir)

TOV roirov ov
crou,

/cetrecrT^o-a v/xas
crv

\oi/j.ov

$779

ev

KapSta,

ort
"I3T!

dya0os
DB?

evcuTrtov

/xou
1B>N

^^??Lll

3iB
"OB?

3 133JJ3
HPIK.

DB>rr^K

*>J?j}3

D2nK VnpBPI

DlpBrT^K

The

sentence

is

in style

and form thoroughly Hebraic,

fallen
(e. g.

and may
AGINGS
tion of
is

well be

assumed

to

have

out accidentally in
25, 25): for the

MT.

often the rendering of

hybl
15, 9

combina

"131

and i?y^3 see Dt.

T?3n iy
3K>

(where they occur in apposition).

nntf)
for

Ehrlich proposes

(followed by

np33

(keeping otherwise MT.).

13^ l] Unusual.

The normal

construction would be

(on the analogy of Gen. 33, 13 inoi 1HN DV DpBTl, 44, 22 3ryi HD^ V3N, etc.: Tenses, is, of course, 149); but cf. 2 Ki. 9, 2.
~>iN

the verb: Gen. 44, 3

ii. 1^1?] Viz.

"iix

"ij?3i"i

and, of the eyes, ch. 14, 29.

(v.

from Apheq in the Sharon not the town, but the Vale (as v. i).
30,
i.

n).

Jezreel

is

here,

J^pv] David goes back to the city which Achish had given

him;

see 27, 6.

pfojn]

Read with

LXX

p^ny:

cf. v.

18; and the note on 15,

6.

3JJ] Unless (Now.) vnan or (Ehrl.) 3^3 has fallen out (v. 14), we must read 3JJH (Bu.), in conformity with usage, except when 333

denotes merely the southern quarter of the compass.

2.

H3 I^N D twn
:

n]
;

Read with
see also v. 3

LXX

(cf.

RV.) -HN1

DmTTlK

n3

"i^N~^3

we

thus obtain a suitable idea to which to refer the

|L2pD

following

i>Vtf-ljn

(DHTmi anmi).
<l

B^S in^OH
the

x!?]

circumstantial clause, connected dcrwSercos with

l

clause

(Anglice)
;

was and defining how 13&? without slaying any/ Cf. Gen. 44, 4 vh
preceding,

effected,

viz.

T yn
GK.
cf.

flK

1X^

Jer. 7,

26^;

2 o,

15^(366 RV.): T^JW,

Is. 20, 4.

162;

156*".

of leading captives, as
3.

runi] without suffix (Tenses,

135.

6, 2),

as

z/.

16:

on

10,

n.

135^3]

were taken captive.

H73
is

H3t^ is to take captive,

H3^3
into

to

be taken

captive

to

go

into exile,

H^JH

to carry

exile.

The
they

distinction between the

two words should be noticed.

Though

may

be often applied to the same transaction, they denote different n?3 migration from one s own country, exile, rnt? aspects of it
:

capture by another, captivity.

The

rendering of ni^3 in Jud. 18, 30

222
by
captivity

The First Book of Samuel,

(EVV.), instead of exile/ has led to strange misunder
as though, for instance, the

standings of the meaning,

to the Philistine domination!
6.

word

referred

Tr6
^>y;

-wni]
Mic.
:

The

fern,

as Jud. 10, 9:

cf.

Jer. 7,

31
;

nn^y M^l
<A-

3,

6 ro&?n;

IKE myfeu

Ew.

295

a
;

Am. GK.

4,

(unusual)

TEion

144^

This use of the

is

fern.,

especially with

words denoting a mental condition,

:

particularly

common
-Syr.

in

Syriac

"^

fcJU>,

"^

kJ^L,

"^

i^/

(Noldeke,

Gr.
,
,

254).
.

^pD?
of
i

VIEN]
(25,
:

spake of (AV.) stoning him:

21),

or with the sense

thought
Ki.
5,

as

Ex.

2,

14.

II 21,

16
i/r.

Tn mar
106, 23.
i>

19. 8, 12

comp. Ez.
in

20, 8. 13. 21. II

i,

in the sense of

command occurs

18.

2,

26

but

more

frequently
;

in later books, especially

i,

Chronicles, as

I 13,

4;

15, 16

Est.

17, etc.

(comp. Ew.
el

338*).
f
.,

nib] mt l
not
i,

(GK.

I5

p. 60),

and consequently

perf.

fern,
;

of the adj.

"}D.

For the use of the root with

Job
7,

from Tin, t?D3, cf. on

10

and add II

17, 8.

n.
4, 9.

10, i.

21, 25.

ptnrv l] i.e. look courage:

(Jos.
8.
i, 6.

cf.

II 10, 12;

and

similarly in

Qal

7 al),

and Pi

el,

23, 16 (see note).

12),
cf.

*TnN] Though n can be dispensed with (n,

supports the reading ?|*nxn (so
]

the parallel

many MSS.)
:

14, 37. 23,

6,

n.

of a

marauding or plundering band: see 2 Ki.

18, 32), or /xovo^wvot (2 Ki. 5, 2. 6, 23
:

23. Hos.

6, 9.

LXX

here (mis-reading) yeSSou/a

;

elsewhere rightly Tm/aaxT/piov

al.).

(Gen. 49, 19

\j/.

Tlb SH bfl3] The name has not been preserved and as the site of Ziqlag is 9. uncertain, and we do not know what the point was which David desired to reach, any identification is very precarious. If Ziqlag was at Zuheliqeh (on 27, 6), W. esh-Sheria, 4 or 5 miles to the S., would no doubt suit but that is all that we can say.
:

10. 11is] only here

12.

and

v. 21.
1 8.

D^pDV

r6:n] See on 25,

spirit

inn

2E711]
i.e.

The

(of

life),

which seemed to have

15, 19.

left

him,

returned,

he revived.

So Jud.

13. *? Tiy] See on 16, 18. Here T\vhw DVn] See on 9, 20.
14. 333

D^

11

must be understood, or

read.
acci-

UD^S] ^y, which

is

expressed by

LXX,

must have

XXX.
dentally

6-1 J
object
follows,
is

223
always

dropped
*?y

out.

t3K>S,

when an

construed with
is still

(or the alternative ^x);

the

and here the restoration

more commended by
lUJ]

two hy following.
south of Palestine (see on 27, 10)
b

man
to

district in the

v. i6 , appear have been closely connected with, if not a sub-tribe of, the Philistines. In poetry the name is used synonymously with Philistine

inhabited by the

TPD, who, from a comparison of

Ez. 25,
part

1 6.

Zeph.
s

2, 5.

contingent of
8,

Tnan formed
1 8.

afterwards

of David

body-guard, II

18.

15,

20,

(cf.

OTJC?
with

p. 262).

It is quite

possible that the

name may be connected

9, 7

Crete:

the Philistines themselves are expressly stated to have

i.e.

been

immigrants from Caphtor, where in accordance with

Crete,

Am.

(see also Gen. 10, 14,

J"IN1

this

passage

DHHSa
IN*
1
"

should no doubt

be transposed so as to precede DTlB^a

DK>

1PN).

.mrr^ I^N] i.e. the mur 3 of 27, 10. A district of the Negeb, occupied 233] mentioned only here. a detachment of the Caleb-clan (see on 25, 3). by 16. 15. ^minn] So
ai>3
.

1 6.

D aam]

Ki. nraoBa

pna-DDi PTTBOI pnpno iota.

is

however, the sense of dancing

doubtful.

really expressed

Whether, by the word is very

Modern

lexicographers only defend

that Jjn

it

by means of the

questionable assumption
to
a^n,

may

have had a similar signification

itself

which, however, by no

means

expresses the sense of

to dance,

but

to

make a

circumivit, especially,
reveritus est, cavit. different word.
It

circle Job 26, 10: in Syriac (PS. col. 1217) and commonly, with circumivit ut vitaret The Aram. JJH to dance is of course an altogether

^>,

is

best to acquiesce in the cautious

judgement

of Noldeke

(ZDMG.

1887,

p. 719),

who

declares that he cannot with

certainty get behind the idea of a festal gathering for the

common
at

Semitic JH.

Here then the meaning

i.e.

will

be

behaving as

a Jn

or gathering of pilgrims/
17.

enjoying themselves merrily.

expression
or (Ehrl.)
is

DmnD?] of their following day. The

i,

unexampled.

Read probably noiqnjj (We. Bu. Now.

is

etc.),
it

DOIM, which
h.

better (after D^l, as Jud.

~iyj

17),

though
the

does not explain the

& N]
(1|

used collectively

after

numeral.

So

r&tftt

myj

Jud. 21, 12;

1$

T)b

Ki. 20, 16; Jud. 18,

n.

17^.

Cf.

on

21, 6.

224
19.
SJ^l]
is

The First Book of Samuel, The zdqef should

and
stand rather on

nvnv

But probably

the

word

displaced,

should follow ^njn, as in

b,

LXX.
Am.
5i5
6, 13!;

Di"6
inp^>]

The

reflexive

as Gen. 15, 10. Lev. 23, 40.

6, 21.

and often
20.
31

in the imper.

*^Tlp Gen.
is

14, 21 etc. (Lex.

b
).

um] The

text

evidently in disorder.

The

least
is

change
to read

that will suffice for the requirements of style

for

and sense

ijsb

um
But

with Vulg.

VJai>

13n3

cattle
spoil.

(the cattle viz.

named

in

and they drave before him that clause a), and said, This is David s
l<

Kinn
that

LXX

LXX, Vulg. do not express in after npM, and for rupon have TJ/ o-KvAwv i.e. the variation seeming to shew
^>U>n,

both are alternative

I

(false) explicita,
is

added

after

V3S7 had been

corrupted into

0&.

It

quite possible, therefore, that

entire

we should
thus
:

go

further,
PIT

and with We. Now. Dh. read the

verse

in y?w
at the

noNM
all

V3ai>

i3n:n *ipnm

fNvrr^-nx

inp^.

This text

states
it

undoubtedly

that the verse is intended

to express,

and

states

same time more

naturally

and simply than the reading pre

b

supposed by the Vulg.

21.

D^JKH DTlNO]

the

200 men;

cf.

Jud. 18, i7

GK.

134!.

toB>*i]

It is better to vocalize,

Sm. Now. Dh. Dl

J1

with 6 MSS.,

LXX,

Pesh. Vulg. Bu.

(the subject being David).

tWl] nK can only mean with (on 9, 18), and DJ?n can be only the a On the other people just mentioned (cl. ) as being with David. the men left behind would be the ones to ask for the welfare of hand,
those
22,

who had gone into where the men who

the battle (We. Sm.);

and

this agrees with

reply are those with David.

The

context

requires imperatively

Q1^
false
is

Dr6

liwi

DJ?n i?N

1WI

(Ehrl., with

We.

Bu.

al.).

in
5.

is

the

explicitum

of an original

W) =

(Introd.
for riN

i): 1tW1

the natural sequel of 2i b

in

nN"ip^

LXX

have

2ws,

and 7 MSS. ^N:

LXX

have also

for ^W?t\.

22.

^DJ?]

in

adj. + subst. (GK. 1310), c Dt. 25, 15. The group regarded as a unity, and spoken of accordingly The usage is thoroughly idiomatic; and there is no ps. sing.

by^31 jn] For the

f.

occasion, with Gratz, Die Psalmen, p. 134, to substitute

5,

1JE>y.

See on
"O

10

and add Gen. 34, 30 nBD TlD his neighbours). (of Micah and

3Nl;

Jud. 18, 23

TD

XXX.
23.

19-27

225

IPK

n]

would

treat the

Ewald ( 329 a comp. Aft/, iii. 145 [E. T. 105]) words introduced by ns as an exclamation, explaining
:

nx

as

an accus. with reference

. .

to a suppressed verb,
2,

(Think

of) that

which
Zech.

and comparing Hag.

the text
is

5,

where, however, as also in

for
"|K>K

7, 7,

very uncertain.

LXX

nx
shall

TIN express

T^$ ^nK, which is no doubt right (We. Bu.): ye after what Yahweh hath given unto us, and (Tenses,
us,

not do so,

76 a) preserved

etc.

24. run

-imb] Cf. on

8, 7*.

...

31

... 3]

A.

variation

for

the
29.

more common

type, 3

Jos. 14, ii. Ez. 18, 4.

Dan. n,

Ez. 42,

f.

(Smend)f.

25. r6yBi] as
E2K>E71

1 6,

13.

pr6] Cf.Ex. 15, 25. Jos. 24, 25; andpn alone, Gen. 47, 26.

Jud.

n,

39.
to

26. injn?]

his/n ends.
inDfc>

in_l_

(for
;

W_L GK.
:

9i

k
)

attached

to zplur. as 14,

48

(Stade, p. 355

GK.

pi

).

In
1

this order,

however, the double 7

with the

is

scarcely Hebrew, though

first,

mVT

OpT?

more general category

but the correction
see

would be possible.

LXX
#.27
ff.);

followed by Sm.
so Bu.

Klo. conjectured
is

E^Vp

by their cities (see

Dh.

rather violent.

n3"O]

= a present ;
i.e.

on

25, 27.

27. 7N~TV3]
the place in the

not the better

known Beth

el,

10 miles N. of Jerusalem, but

Negeb

of Judah, called EaiOrj\ in Jos. 15, 30

i

LXX

(MT.

corruptly

7*D3), 7irO in Jos. 19, 4 MT., and 7NV13, Ba0ov7;X in

Ch.

4, 30,

in a list of

cities belonging originally to Simeon (Jos. 19, 2-8, I Ch. 4, 38-33), but afterwards incorporated in Judah (Jos. 15, 26-32). The name has not been preserved; and the approximate site can only be inferred from the known places with which it is the see EB. s.v. associated in this list, Eeersheba, Moladah (very possibly

Malatha of Euseb. Onom., 4 miles from Arad, now Tell Arad, 17 miles S. of Hebron, and 20 miles E. of Beersheba), Hormah (also near Arad; see on . 30), Ziqlag, and En-Rimmon (now, probably, Umm er-Rumamin, 10 miles NNE. of
Beersheba).

LXX have here ~BaiQavp

is less

but the situation of

"Yl5?~rYQ

(Jos. 15, 58 al.),

4} miles N. of Hebron,
333

suitable than that of

7N~JV2 (We.).
Simeonite
cities
site is
voTot>

mEI] Ramoth

of the South: see Jos. 19,

:

8, in the list of

(233 DEO).

LXX
iv.

here also read the sing.

198";

Pa/xa

= 233

nCH.

The

unknown (DB.

Buhl, 184).

in

11

in

the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 48), mentioned also by

P as a priestly

city (Jos. 21,

14=1 Ch.

6,

58 [EVV. 73])f.

According to Euseb. Onom. 266,43,

It is

a large village 20 miles from Eleutheropolis.

1365

now

generally identified with

226

The First Book of Samuel,

Attir, a village situated on two knolls,

*

miles

SW.

of Ziph.

The change from

s.v.)
:

to

is

explicable (Kampffmeyer,

ZDPV.

xvi. 45, cited

(

by Cheyne, EB.

LXX

have remarkably here (but not elsewhere) TeOOop 28. "Cny2] LXX have here a double rendering:
It is clear

see p. 136 .). ai rots tv ApoTjp teal rots

"ini? ;

AppaSci.
viz.

that

LXX
is

after

"iy~iy

= A^a5)

read

still

another

letter,

n.

The form mjny, now,

be sure, Ar drah

LXX

confirmed not only by Jos. 15, 22 l where, to omit the H but also by the present pronunciation conversely miles (We.), the name of a place in the Negeb of Judah (Jos. /. c.~),

SE. of Beersheba: see Robinson, Bibl. Res., ii. 199 3 Only mentioned here. Site unknown.

In the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 50 [MT. here nbnt?Kt]), men tioned by P as a priestly city (Jos. 21, 14=1 Ch. 6, 42 [EVV. 57]), mentioned Now probably the large village es-Semu , 10 miles S. by W. also I Ch. 4, 17. ipf of Hebron, and 4 miles W. by S* of Ma on. The form of the name is noticeable ;
.

the inf. of the Arabic 8th conjug. and it seems therefore to shew that the place must have been originally an Arab settlement. Eshta ol is another name of the same form. See further Burney in the Journ. of Theol. Studies, 1911, p. 83f., who supposes plausibly that the names suggested originally the ideas of being heard, and
it is
;

askingfor

oneself,

29. ?D~Q]
of Ziph.

LXX

and that they marked the seats of ancient oracles. no doubt, rightly. Carmel, now el-Kurmul, was 7"1D2
;

in the hill-country of

Judah (Jos. See further on 25, 2.

~iy] cities

15, 55),

4 miles NE. of es-Semu

and

3 miles S.

vKDffi*n
see

belonging to the Yerahme

elites settled in the

Negeb

on 27,

10.

^pH ny]

See on 27, 10.

In the Negeb of Judah (Jos. 15, 30), but originally Simeonite 30. niOin] = Dt. i, 44; Nu. 21, 3. Jud. (19, 4. I Ch. 4, 30): mentioned also in Nu. 14, 45
In i, 17 (two divergent traditions of the origin of the name); Jos. 12, i4f. The site is Jud. 1,17 the original name of Hormah is said to have been Zephath. unknown but Nu. 21, i. 3 appear to shew that it was not far from Arad (see on
;

v. 27).
is

precarious, the
|K>y~"in2]

is

Zephath with Sebaita, 27 miles SSW. of Beersheba, names not agreeing phonetically. y~~Vl32, found in many edd., is the Mass, reading: the 3 This, not recognised both in the Erjpffapte of Cod. B, and the ~Baipaaa.v of Cod. A. The

The

identification of

>

|fcJ

MT. myiy.

But 1 and 1

in the old Phoenician

characters are seldom

In proper distinguishable, and the context alone decides which is to be read. names, unless the orthography is certain upon independent grounds, either letter

may
8

often be read indiscriminately.

The

identifications given here in the

RV. with marginal

;

references (taken over

from edd. of AV. with marginal references) are extraordinary. Beth-el in v. 27 is identified with the Beth-el N. of Jerusalem and Aro er with the Aro er N. of the

Arnon, on the E. of the Dead Sea! Those responsible for these references might have learnt better from the Speaker s Commentary on Samuel, published as long

ago as 1872.

XXX.
place
If this
"]Dy

28

XXXI.

22 7

may
is

the case,

be the same as \W$ of Jos. 15, 42 (in the Shephelah). 19, 7 (Simeonite). it will have been situated approximately in the same region as

(see the next note).

"jny]

Libnah

(site

In the Shephelah (Jos. 15, 42); and mentioned in the same group with unknown), Ashan (see the last note), Nezib, now Beit Nasib, 2 miles
ilah (see

SW.

of

Qe

on

23, i),
;

Qe
see

ilah,

of esh-Shuweikeh

= Sochoh

on

17, i),

Achzib (perhaps Ain el-Kezbeh, 2 miles NE. and Mare shah (Merdsh, 6 miles W. of

Nezib).

Its site cannot

MT. iny,

but in

LXX

be more closely determined. It is called in Jos. 15, 42 In 19, 7 on the contrary both have inV. ( Wax}. "]nV

decision between the

two variants
;

MSS. name

No/xjSe (Luc. NcryejS)

is not possible (We.). LXX (B) Noo, other hence Klo. would read 23V (Jos. 11, 21), still the

NW.

of a place 14 miles SW. of Hebron, while GueVin thinks of Nuba, 8 miles of Hebron, near Qe ilah (I 23, i). See Cheyne s art. ATHACH in EB.
}Y"Un]

31.

In the hill-country (Jos. 15, 54).

The most important town

first

of the
5, 3).

entire district,

where David, shortly afterwards, was

proclaimed king (II

31.

The

chapter

is

excerpted, with slight variations, by the compiler

of the Chronicles (i Ch. 10).

The

variations are partly,

it

seems, due

an intentional change on the part of the compiler of Chronicles, partly they have preserved the original text of the passage in a purer form than it has been
to accident, partly they are to be attributed to

transmitted to us in Samuel.
C. inrfa. C.

BN

W1.

yain]
2.

C. jn^a.

1p2"W]

See on 14, 22.

!>INB>

v:n nxi

occurs here, II occurs

in

i,

ns] C. van nnxi hsp 6. Gen. 31, 23. Jud. 18,

i

"inx.

pTin
22.

sq.

accus.
p Qin

22.

20,

42^; nnN
Jud.
20,

the

parallel,

Ch. 10,
to

2.

ch.

14,

45f.

p^Tin sq. accus. means undoubtedly

for both p^inn

overtake (so p^aiN often in Targ.

and S^n,

as

Gen. 44,

4.

6)

but

overtake

is

a relative

term; and

in II i, 6, vv.

come up

to Saul.

We

7-10 shew that the archers had not actually can hardly therefore say (Bu.) that HP1X must

be here the original reading.

jnaiiT]
I

C. jnjy.
i

21J 2N] wrongly identified in RV.wz. here, and on

14,
:

Ch.

8,

33, with

*W,

49 in i Ch. 8, 33 9, 39 Saul s four sons are given as Jonathan, Malchishua Abinadab, and Eshba al ; and there can be no doubt (see
,

on

14, 49) that

11
""It?

corresponds to Eshba

al.

Eshba al

(cf.

II 2, 8)

was pretty

clearly not present at the battle.

228
3.

The First Book of Samuel,

nonbon naani]
C.
Cf. Jud. 20,

34 rnas non^oni;

i s . 2 i,

15 -nbi

not
Bu.,

overtook
i

(EVV.), but found him in the

fight

(Now.;
might

comparing

Ki. 22, 30-34).

NO

to

y?</

= to hit (Ehrl.),
rendering of

be said of the weapon (Dt.

19, 5), but hardly of the archers.

n^pa D
however
though, as
the

tJ

JK onion]

C.

n^pn onion.
construe

The
D^JN

(ol

aKovrurrai, ai/Spes To^orai), appears to presuppose

difficult to
nK>p2

it is

together
the

LXX, D^JX men with

;

bow

being hardly a Hebrew construction

word must be
DB>3X

misplaced.

Probably the order nt?p3 (Bu.

onio) onion

men,

bow = some shooters with the bow, should be restored. Comp. D ano D lMK Gen. 37, 28; ^y^3 33 D8MK Dt. 13, 14; and for the art. 25, 10. Sm. Now. Dh. would omit n^p3 D^3N, as a gloss explanatory of onion Bu. (alt.) would read as C. C. onvn-|o ^rw. oniono IKD
shooters with the
:
5>rm]

in^] from ^n(hn),

28, 7
:

waj
archers.
;
"OSO

anguish

from (Ru.
is

i,

13.

Is. 6, 4.

Z<or.

580*) the

But
for }O

^n

confined elsewhere to

poetry or elevated prose

tion
:

would be the regular construc

with

LXX

and the sense does not seem strong enough. Read probably, with (erpavfjuiTLcrOr]), ^0*1 and was wounded by the archers (}O

the passive verb, as Gen. 9,

n. Nah.

i, 6.

Job 24,
is

Lex. 580*).
:

LXX eis TO, viroxovBpia presupposes rendered in LXX (II 2, 23. 3, 27. 20, 10)
What
4.

uncertain

K Oh

is

i/^oa.

Nwb]

C.

tffi>HK.

^^T]

C. omits,
is

as

it

seems, rightly (We. Bu. Ehrl.

alive,

etc.).

What

Saul dreads

mockery while

not mutilation after death, which,

indeed, would not be prevented by his armour-bearer killing him.

v7j?nm] and wreak their caprice upon Tx\& mock or abuse me. on this word Fleischer ap. Delitzsch on Is. 3, 4, who compares in See
*2

particular the

entertain, divert,

a toy of
,

to

jJjo prop, to engage oneself with, then to amuse oneself with, in Heb. in a bad sense, to make abuse or mock. See Nu. 22, 29 ; Jud. 19, 25 and (where it
i_>

Arab.

is

applied anthropomorphically to
10, 2,

Yahweh

treatment of the Egyptians)

Ex.
5.

and above
C.

6, 6.

mrr^y]

3inrri>y.

loy] C. omits.

XXXI.
6.
a.

}-q
NKOI]
C.
in

229
HIT

nit Ninn DTQ

1

vtwi>3

na

v>3

generalizing abridgement of the text of Samuel.

^>3

LXX
the
1

in

Samuel

do not express VtWN

second time).
7.

D3.

VtWN

will

mean

men

specially
o. 7

about Saul (23, 25. 26), not the whole army (the 7N~)

^tWN,

nw]

C.

Btri>3.

PINT naya

The
is

py

poyn najn ntw] C. PDJB IPX (for the six words). a wide avenue running up between hills (see on 6, 13)
nsj Ki

7KJHP pcy (Hos. i, 5), i.e. the broad vale running down from Jezreel, on the N. of Mt. Gilboa, in a SE. direction, past Bethshe an
the

(12 miles from Jezreel), into the Jordan valley (H. G. 384

f.,

357

f.

EB.
N. of

s. v.

JEZREEL).

The

sense of the text appears therefore to be

that the Israelites dwelling on the other side

it),

of the

pfty

(i.

e.

on the

and (more than

this,

even) on the other side of Jordan, fled

is

through the panic.

be exaggerated

piTH 13J?2

used regularly to denote the

p"vn

territory east of Jordan.

The
and

statement respecting

13y3

"Iti

may

but we are hardly in a position to question the

correctness of the text;

^3

(twice) for

")3yi

(Klo.

al.)

is

somewhat
ai
,

violent emendation.

.
""3]

So, whether in the sense of that or because, Gen. 29, 12.

3, ii.
4,

33, ii.

Ex.

31.

Jos. 2, 9.
i

7,

15.

8, 21.

10,

i.

Jud. 6, 30.
;

ch. 19, 4.

22, 17. II 5, 12.

this

Ki.

2,

26.

ii, 21.

18, 27 al.

and even

(though

can hardly be reputed an elegancy) 131 ... -|EN^ The remark of Stade, p. 14, that ^31 is Gen. 45, 26. Jud. 10, 10.
unhebraisch/ can be due only to an oversight.
5>mt5*

HMK] C.

omits.

onyn-nx] C.

nmy.

jm] C. cm.

8. VJD,

DB^enwi]

C.
57.

mrnNi.
i).

yn^n] C. yu^i
always with the
9
.

(as

Except

in these

two passages of Ch.,

article.

v^3-nx

3Etei

lEwnx mis

11

)]

c.

^np^] The
for

object can be only the head and

armour of Saul
It
is

(cf.,

the sense of the

Pi

el,

ii, 7.

Jud. 19, 29).

a question

the

whether the word should not be pointed Qal Vy^l, in which case meaning would be that they sent messengers throughout the land

230

The First and Second Book of Samuel,

of the Philistines.
to tell the tidings

And

this

("It?^)

to

would agree with the aim of their gods and people.

in" !,

viz.

DiTavy JT3] C. D!T3XjrnK.

ns

to acquaint their idols with the

(

news

is

(We.) much more original than JT2

to

announce the

tidings in the house

of

their idols

),

is

supported by

LXX

here,

and

agrees with the OKI following.

10.
pi.

So Bu. Sm. Now.

iva.
nVw?>y

nnnpy
JTWB>

rpa] C.

Dn^K

rvn will hardly be the

of

jTTP:i,

as Keil suggests,

on

the

analogy of JTON JV3

(Ew.

270; GK.

i24 r ):

in all probability the frequency of the

7, 3. 4.

plural in other
mnt5>y

connexions (e.g.

12, 10)

led

to

the

sing.

here being incorrectly read as JTnnt^y.

It
is,

LXX
(i.

ek TO Aorap-

retov.

no doubt,

this

temple of the Phoenician goddess Ashtart

(see
j-rjs

on

7,

3)

in Ashqelon,

which Herodotus

105) mentions as

ovpavit]^

shewed him

A^poSiVqs TO tepoV, and which, as he tells us, his inquiries to be the most ancient foundation of the goddess the
:

one in Cyprus (probably at Kition), he adds, was reported by the Cyprians themselves to have been founded from Ashqelon, and that
in Cythera [Paus.
iii.

23.

i]

was

built

by the Phoenicians.

The

proper name
the Greek

of

a native of Ashqelon,
I.
i.

compounded

with

occurs in an Inscription (CIS.

in
parallel
text

115):

^pwt mnPSTOy p
Ac^poSio-ibu

AvTiVorpos

The head
i.

of Astarte also appears on certain coins of Ashqelon

169,

7*.t).

Here,

Ashtart seems

to

have had the character of

a martial goddess, of which there are other indications ; see ASHTART in Encycl. of Rel. and Eth. ii. 116 ASHTORETH in DB. i. p. i7o a .
;

\v rpn

noim

iypn

irnmxi]

C. }in

nu

typn irta^rnsi.

On

the originality of the text of Samuel,

Bertheau that the original text

convincing note of We.
or
nail,

and against the view of Ew. and embraced both readings, see the
to strike

2 ypn

is

or fix

in,
it

as a tent-peg
also have

Jud. 4, 21.
to,

Is. 22, 25,

a dart, II 18, 14:

may

denoted to fasten
actually
J

struck

in.

even though the object fastened was not itself We. Gratz (i. 439), Bu. and most follow
;

Lagarde

in reading Wj?n

but as

it

is

uncertain what exactly

this

In his

instructive
iv.

Anmerkungen zur

Griech. Uebersetzung der Proverbien

(1863), page

XXXI. 91.
denotes (see on II 21,
6),

231

which

it is

used,

it

refers to the living

it

and as on the only two other occasions on body (Ehrl.), it may be doubted
here.

whether

it is

safe to restore
v.

iBHTa] So

12.

II 21, 12:

elsewhere |KP TV3

in the
2

Greek
Mace.

period called Scythopolis (2/cu$tov

12, 29),

WAis; Jud.

i,

27

LXX,

now

Beisdn.

mound,
the

artificially

important fortress, standing on a natural strengthened by scarping the side, and commanding

An

entrance from the E. up the Vale of Jezreel, and so into N.

Palestine generally

(H. G. 357

f.

EB.

i.

566

f.).

For long

after the
this time,

entry of the Israelites into Canaan, and no doubt even at

it

was held by
11. ny^l

the Canaanites
1

(cf.

Jud.

i,

27. Jos. 17,

u).
very intrusive.

t$T 3B*
C.

ta]

C.

nyb

W?

ba.

vi>K

is

it^x JIN]
12.

iB>tr$>3

nN.
mp^i] C. iKt^i.

rW.vb
. , .

13^1]

C. omits.
. . .

n*w

nu]
to

c.

nb

new.
later

(new only here in

OT.

word

belonging
te>

Aramaic and the

C. omits.

Hebrew,)
1NT1
here

rva noino]
tol]
^a>l

ntJQ

C.
(so

HB3
LXX,

D*3)l.
Pesh.)
:

Probably

should

be

vocalized

the suffix, though added by the

Chronicler,

is

not needed (see e.g. 16, 17).

C. omits.
inp^i]

DP DDK IS^l]
13.

nap^i nn -novy-nK

C.

DiTniDXjmK nap^i.
see

^ xn]
marks of

c.

P3 3 nbxn.
<|

On npan,

on

1 23, 15.

C. 1O1^T1.

(Fz;.

13-14

in Chronicles are

an

addition,

made

by the compiler of Chronicles himself,

his style
:

and exhibiting throughout the

535
ff.,

cf,

LOT?

pp. 526,

Nos.

3, 40.)

II 1

5,

6.

king at

Lament of David over Saul and Jonathan. David made Hebron over Judah, and subsequently, after the murder

of Ishbosheth, over all Israel. Capture by Joab of the stronghold ofjebus, which David henceforth makes his residence.
1,
i.

at^l
cf. i

3P
i,

11*11]

circ. clause,

=
cf.

when David had

etc. (as

RV.);
v.

Ki.

41 (Tenses,

j6o;

GK.

1416

though here
I 25,

the cases quoted are of a ptcp.).

2

W1
is

is

resumed (see on

26) by

VM, and

the

main sentence

continued by ^1 rum.

232
is

The Second Book of Samuel,

altogether isolated, the art. being used only with the

gentile

name.
;

According
i note.
:

to

usage elsewhere, either ptay (LXX,

Vulg.
(We.).
2.
4.

cf.

30,

18) or ptayn (6
Is
it

MSS.
?

Pesh.) should be restored

So Dr. Weir

not

pteyn

^IKB nyo] cyo as

I 14, 17.

IB>KI

i?y

ncnxi as

I 4,

i2 b

iTrrno] C^in. rain] Almost

nmn

I 4,

i6 b

On
/* /.

itrs, see

on

I 15, 20.
rQ"in

Strictly,
,

of course,

is

an

inf.
fell.

abs.

in the accus., qualifying ^Q3

6.
n"^>

with a

much-making
6.
N")p.3

there

WlpJ
and

N"lp3]

The

inf.

abs. as I 20,

is

for nip.3,

verbs

iO
ptcp.

being not unfrequently confused (GK.

:

75

rr
).

was
i?ya

in the condition

ya]
so D^BHEn

means

<WH<r,

was leaning. of one leaning JV^D ^y3, TIBTI /ya) possessor (as

vy3 would mean owners of the horsemen

(but not captains,

or generals, of the horsemen [= C^B-HEn "Tl^); and D^Bnsn vy2 would

LXX

which would be wnropx mean owners of the (war-)horses

"]

(on the confusion

(for text
it

in

MT.
])
z>.

between B^B ^or^

pi.

[pi.

D^KHB], and

!^"JS

Bng [GK.
is

84

3b

horseman,
18),

correct (see

on

D Bhs, see Z^. s. v.). If the we must point D^Bnan */ja, and suppose
for horsemen.

to be

an unusual expression
11

8b
7,

IDX

!]

Qre

"^Pi^,

evidently rightly.

So Zech.

4, 2.

Neh.

5, 9.

3 (Ochlah

Ochlah, No. 133).

^JN] mil
9.

el in

pause; see on

i,

15. 17, 51).

"OnTOl]

and despatch me
here.

(I 14, 13.
is

JOBTI]

Only

What

exactly

denoted cannot be ascertained.

28, 39)
:

The

root denotes

some kind of interweaving (Ex.

It
is

^^-ij
of

is

quoted by Freytag, apparently as a rare word,

plexus
fuit (de

in the sense

per-

arboribus}.

not apparent what meaning, suitable

to the present passage, a derivative

from such a root might express.

The
cited

Versions

afford

no

real

help.

LXX
Pesh.

O-KOTOS

8vov

(perh. a

corruption of o-KoroSivos, dizziness;

Trendelenburg, ap. Schleusner,

U^o!"

by Sm.)

Targ.

NJVm

terror;
I.e.

dizziness (PS.
cf.

s.

v.};

Aq. (who renders the root Ex.

6
<r<yKr>}/3as)

by

o-uo-<iyyo>,

28, 13

HMBTD

(T<f>iyKTr)p

Vulg. anguslfae.

Moderns

generally suppose
(as
;

the

word

to denote either the

cramp (Ew. Th. Ke.) or giddiness

though properly a confusion of the senses), so Ges. Klo. RV. marg. the exact meaning cannot be determined.

/.

iit

2 33
would
was

*Tiy~^3

^J

singular expression, an inversion, as

QJ ?2 liy, which, to judge
"Q

seem, for the

in

normal

from

its

recurrence
in

almost exactly the same form Job 27, 3

TlOfcW

"njrv3"^,

use in

Hebrew

in this particular expression,

i?3.

being intended probably

if

to emphasize the

Hos.

14, 3
:

P^

Nt5>JV7|,

the text be sound,

must be
constr.
st.

similarly explained

but the separation of a word in the

to

from

its

genitive

by a verb must be admitted

be wholly
its

without analogy in Hebrew, and to be less defensible than

tion

separa

by a word

like liy.

10. innrott] The i anomalously with pathah

ps.
:

impf.

Pi

el,

with

waw

conv.,

pointed

so Jud.

6, 9.

20, 6 (see Tenses,

66 note;

GK.

49

).

1?D3]

Elsewhere vBJ.

The

peculiar punctuation

is
.

attested

and

secured by the Massoretic note

myXKl] myXN,
tolerated (I 24, 6).
(Is. 3, 20),

as

Nu. 31, 50.

is,

pTTO {13; The omission

cf.

GK.

6i b

of the

art. in

such

a case as the present

however, very unusual, and hardly to be

No

doubt, substituting the other form of the word

"TJV^l-

we should read with We.

TV2 ^yi
for
nirv,

12. ^xit^i

niif

Dy

i>y]

Tautologous.

Either read with

/c

LXX mim
supposing
nirv

or

(We. Bu. Now.

Ehrl.) omit

n!
1

^yi,

this

to have

been added, as necessary

to

for the sense, after

had been corrupted

ptay
like
"1J

miiT

13.
-3

tys]

an Amalekite ger (or protected foreigner):

|H3 B^N, etc.
a (Z^. s6
/<?/>;

BK
48
:

N^J B^N,
Z>./9.

GK.

I3i

b
).

On

the ger, see

12,

s. v.,

or the writer s note

on Dt.

10, 19,

or Ex.

stranger

is

both an insufficient and a misleading rendering.

See also STRANGE, STRANGER, in

14.
16.
2
>

DB.
(i Ki.

!W]
T91]
37)-

See on

I 24, 7.

r^

TprJ

accordance with predominant usage

32

However, the correction seems a needless one; for the

;

plural also occurs, as Hos. 12, 15

Lev. 20,

9.

^3N] Notice the emph. pronoun. 1 8. was formerly supposed

nK>p]

to

be the name given to the

following Song, from the

fact that the

word occurs

in

it

somewhat
Judah

prominently in v. 2 2
the

and he bade them teach

is

the children of

Bowl

But there

no analogy or

parallel for

such a usage in

234
Hebrew;
ntJ

The Second Book of Samuel,

and n&?p
is

standing

nakedly

not

ntJ

pn

rcVE?,

or

even

prrDK
to

not a probable designation of a song.

Ew. supposed
cf.

T\V\>

to stand as in

Aram,

for

t?

p (Prov. 22, 21

Dan.

4, 34),

and
is

be used adverbially But the word correctly, accurately. rare in Hebrew, and however written appears to be an Ara:

maism, such as would not probably have been used here moreover, the word in Aramaic means always truth, truthfully, not accurately.

We.
to

holds the word to be an intruder

for
it
:

and

offers

an ingenious theory
v. 6,

account

Perhaps, as a correction on D^KHS) in

text, in

there

may
to

have been attached to the

ntJ>p

agreement with

I 31, 3,

the

words

may may have found its way into v. 6 before D EHS, and into v. 1 8. By the adoption of this explanation, both verses at once would be relieved of an encum
v.

vJQ, of which, as
in

6 and v. 18

have stood opposite

one another

two

parallel

columns, ^jn

ntJ>p

brance

(so

Now.).

With

"jo^>

cf.

Dt.

31,22;

^.

60

title

-ien]
original

Cf.

Jos.

10, 13

(iBn ISD

^y

mim KM

yhr\);

and the

text

of

Ki. 8, 13 (see

LXX

of v. 53,

and recent

Com

mentators).

The
22, 2),

text of v.

8,

as Klo. remarks,

"1OK 1

and i8 b/31

however, excites suspicion. Not only is DK p intrusive, but, ought to be immediately followed by v. 1 9 (cf. 3, 33 ; rOlfD run (on run without a pron. suff., see on I 16, n)

would form the natural sequel to 17. Upon the assumption that i8 b is misplaced, and was intended originally to follow 17, mi!"P *32 will immediately precede and it has been supposed that these words really conceal the first words of v. 19
T\W\>

the dirge.

Thus Klo. Bu. would read

for

them
al.,

T\V\>

miiT ^i (the/w., Judah

Judah, cruel tidings
:

being personified as a

woman,
for

Jer. 3,

called to lament, Jer. 9, 16. 19 al.)

Vernimm,
though

Juda, Grausames,

Hear

(or Learn),

but,

hard things (Gen. 43, 7. 30), f2 does not mean hear or learn, but consider (Dt. 32, 7. ^. 50, 22. 94, 8), and the thought itself is prosaic. Sm., better, omitting fltJ p, proposes milT *D3 Weep, O Judah (for the sequel,
is

nb p

good Heb.

in either case, see the next note).

"lD,v

remains, however, as an

awkward and

inexplicable residuum.

19.

*2n] Ew. and

Stade, following Pesh.,

Le

Clerc,

Mich. Dathe,

De

Wette,

The

gazelle,

supposing

this

to

be a name by which

Jonathan was popularly known among the warriors, on account of But his fleetness (cf. 2, 18; i Ch. 12, 8 nnob Dnnn i?y D<K3).
there
is

no

trace of such a

name

in connection with

Jonathan

and

i8-2i
throughout the
five times),

235

poem

the two heroes are consistently spoken of

only

in vv.

2^. 26
so that

the singer s thoughts turning

it

more
must

particularly to Jonathan,

is

unlikely that

he would begin

with a word that was applicable to only one of them.

therefore be rendered,
is slain.

The

text

upon thy high-places Saul and Jonathan, the two heroes who formed the crown
beauty,
Israel,

The

and glory of the nation, are called its beauty. The expression The beauty (not Thy beauty] is singular, and Ehrlich hardly goes too far when he says it is not possible but LXX must have already found
:

the

same consonantal

text.

By

their rendering orr/Awo-ov

(=

"^H),

which agrees with the reading *pnD (see the next note but one), they appear to have understood the passage as an injunction to erect
a pillar in commemoration of the two departed heroes;
cf.

18, 18

(where 2V1
"Q5?n

is

rendered KCU

<TTTJ\way)

*.

being thus unsatisfactory, Klo., followed by Bu. Sm. Now., conjectures

^ifljn

Be grieved

(I 20, 3.

34; and esp. II 19,

:

3),

Israel,

to

which mifT V?3

1

excellent parallel the fern, (though not elsewhere used in poetry of Israel], as in miiT 3.3. If this conjecture be accepted, 3 must of
1

(above) would form an

course be pointed
(lie)

7pniD3

and the clause must be rendered, Upon thy high places

collectively (Klo.

?pn being construed however, somewhat abruptly: and b/Tl

natural.

the slain,

Bu. Sm.).

It

reads,

as a predicate, as v. 25,

omitting P^n, would read,

is

Now., following the genuine rendering of LXX (see Be grieved, O Israel, for thy dead:
25*"

would be more the next note), and

but

7?n 3 ?y
would both

strongly supported by v. (as indeed Now. owns). On the whole, though, in themselves, iTttrP 33 and jJjnB^
it

^^H

be suitable,
text.

Some

impossible to feel satisfied that they really express the original corruption seems to underlie *3Jfn for the rest, it seems best, with
is
:

our present knowledge, to leave vv. 18-19 substantially as they are, merely, with LXX, omitting nS^p in v. 18, and, with Luc., prefixing "IDfcOl to v. 19.

^n
TDO)
their

TniO3 by]
cVi
TO,
vifrr)

LXX

has a doublet:

vnep TWV
:

TC^KOTW (=
is

^y

o-ov

(= MT.)

following genitive TpavpxTuoi/,

shewn by the Tpaufwrriwv and by the divergence from MT., to be

the
first

genuine rendering

21. V3733

nn]

(We.). V3?an was the

name

of the range, extending in the

1 Aq. and MSS. of same text cf. ditpipeia

:

LXX
for

cueplfSaaai

(whence Vulg. considera) presupposes the

7,

W^P

Dan.

16

LXX

Theod., and iaKpi!3ajaaaGai for

n3Jri>

Dan.

7,

19

LXX,

cited by Field.

236

The Second Book of Samuel,

some
8 miles,

arc of a circle for

and containing

several independent

peaks and heights (EB. 1723 ; cf. DB. s. v.): hence the pi. nn, and the 33, which there is no reason to change (Bu. Sm. Now.) to 3H.
Klo., cleverly, but needlessly, SQ7J

Qin
as

(Is.

44, 27 in pause)

Dry

up,
is

Gilboa"

(Is.

42, 15).

So

far

the

form

goes,

J73733

nn

a fusion of two constructions

J737J3

D^n and

J/373H f|n,

combining

the greater definiteness of the former with the superior compactness

and elegancy of the

latter.

In such an expression as V37J3 Dnn,

in the

Dnn

is

virtually qualified

by y37J3

same degree as

if it

were

an actual

genitive,

and

is

expressed accordingly in the construct state

:

(cf. Is. 9, 2

T3TJ33 IincfeG
is

GK.

3o

a
).

something taken off from a larger mass, and set apart for sacred purposes ; and it seems to have been first used (Dt. 12, 6. ii. 17) of gifts taken from the produce of the soil,
lit.

ninnn Hen] nonn

esp. first-fruits (see

art.
is

more

fully the writer s

note on Dt. 12,

;

6, or his

OFFER,

OFFERING,

in

DB.,
mean,

p.

588*)

and

fields

of

offerings

commonly

interpreted to
offered.
,

fields

bearing produce from which

is

first-fruits

are

But the expression

its

somewhat strange

the ridge of Gilboa

except on

S. side, is

bleak and bare (EB.

ii.

1723); and, as the text stands, the verb, such as come, which we must understand with lt2O 7N1 70 7K, must be carried on to fields, which
it

does not

suit.

It

is

a great improvement (with Klo.

1

Now.

al.)

to insert

TP

in a,

and

to omit (with Luc.)

before HI?

we then

get

a well-balanced distich

bo

TV

bs

j?2733

nn
bxi

rncnn

nb

oa^y noo
those

The
niDnn
nierj

principal suggestions
HB>

made by
nilf

who

are dissatisfied with

oprj

are rnsn
alt.);

^n (Now.

Bu., after Luc.

(Klo.),

(Sm. Bu.
ye

nn

Oavdrov)
<n

nil s?
Jer.

or n3-)n

(Dh.:

14, 14!),

fields

of deceit!

the fields

on which

the

two heroes
;

being represented as having deceitfully betrayed them G. A. Smith (H. G. 404) ntoVltp ye fields of discomfitures I
lost their lives
nfc>

7jnj]

7VJ

is

to

reject

with loathing, Jer, 14, 19.

Ez. 16, 5
differently.)

45

for.

Lev. 26, ii. 15. 30. 43. 44t.

(Job 21, 10 Hif.

LXX

here TT/DOO-WX^ O"^ (as Lev. 26, 15. 30. 43. 44: Ez. 16,45

/.

21-22
probable
:

237
for this sense is
(Is.

The meaning
only borne by i?W
1,6.
6, 5.

defiled is less

28,

Aramaic, and is not common even there 8 Targ. Not in Syriac).

in
oil.

rWE v3]

not anointed with

The

shield of Saul

is

pictured

by David as lying upon the mountains, no longer polished and ready to be worn in action, but cast aside as worthless, and neglected.
Shields,

whether made of leather or metal, were oiled

21, 5
]?

in antiquity, to

keep them in good condition. Cf. Is. action; and Verg. Aen. 7. 626 Pars
tergunt Arvina pingui.

intPtp i.e.

prepare for

laeves clypeos et spicula lucida

v2] Used alone (except Gen.

8,

31, 20)

exclusively

in

poetry;

especially to negative a subst. or adj., as

Hos.

7, 8 raiQH *?3;

Job

II DI3

^3.
expresses a permanent
is

rWo] The form

130-133):
23

state

(GK.
the

84 a 1 ; Kon.
ptcp.
nH5>

ii.

what

required
ntPD

here
(i.

is

rather

(so

MSS.).

An

original

e.

incorrectly as
22.
il

D^?>

which ultimately

D^E) has probably been read became D^O.

tyj]

Exceptionally for tfDJ (so some 50 MSS.).

Dt. 33,

19;
9,

3^
12

Ki.

18,

11^ Hos.
28, 2
5J*lpy
;

(MT.);
BH3

nW
/<?

27;

My

Comp.
ch.

flBB>

Is.

17, ii

?J3>

18,

9;
ib.

(/V*/ of notf)

ls.
;

10,

13;

~W
3,

b>ya

always (four times) in Job for DJD

ii
;

Q^b Lam.

Neh.
Is.

4,

/o if/Vz

D^D

58, 7

(=

Arab.

^TJ

(bread) Lam. 4, 4. Mic. 3, 1 fear ), and occasionally besides.

for

The
for

Massorah contains a mechanical enumeration of eighteen instances

(including

some questionable ones) of words

2,

written once with

b>

D (Mass, on Hos.
is

8; above, p. 52 note].

The

converse substitution

rarer

(spDD Am.
21CT)
N$>]

6,

10

HD3 ^.

4, 7

13D

Ezr. 4, 5).

Dp

11
")

w^</

not to return empty.

The

figure underlying
slain,

the passage

is

that of the

arrow drinking the blood of the

cf.

and

of the sword devouring their flesh:

46, 10
(Keil).

Dt. 32, 42.

Is. 34,

sf. Jer.

But

bna

to

spread out

=
\J^>

(according to the rule

D = flo =

=
1886,

j).
p.

Cf. (on

DID, and

D"1Q,

fDIg Dan.

5, 25.

28) Nold. Z.

/>

Assyr.
f.

414

ff.

and, on the phonetic rule, Wright, Compar. Gramm., p. 59

238
23.

The Second Book of Samuel,

DE
l|

j?:ni

KK>,

D Qnton] (with the art.) are plainly in apposition with and cannot (EW.) form the predicate. The Mass.
evidently at fault
:

accentuation

is

we must

take back the zdqef in a to

m^yan, and render: Saul and Jonathan, the beloved and the
In their
lives

pleasant,

and

in their death

were not divided ;

They were
"1B>3

swifter than eagles, stronger than lions.

is,

of course,
1

strictly

not the Eagle, but the Griffon-Vulture (see

Mic.

i,

24. btf]

and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 173 f.). for *?y (see on I 13, 13), as some 10 MSS. read.

D3Boi>n]

The

suffix

being conceived as the

object,

and not as the

genitive (in
in
iff.

accordance with the

common

construction of the ptcp.),

:

which case, of course, the

18,

article

could not be employed

cf

33

in TUNEH,

where

this is clear
suff.

from

tine

form

of the

suffix.

See

GK.

n6 f
in

and on the masc.

135.
(comp. on
(cf.

vny 1D fena
:

34 Gen. 49, 20 D*|1J|P also, in a fig. sense, ^. 36, 9 For Dy cf. Cant, i, n. 4, 13. 14. 5, i; and DpKTi spang bnai).
particular
delightful food,
;

D Ony Dy] 32), if not

together with pleasures or luxuries

dainties

15,

Jer.

51,

K;>D.

Lex. 767 a

It is

against the usage of this prep, to understand the

phrase adverbially
as

= in

DTiy

are not articles of dress, they

a pleasurable manner (Keil) ; and in so must be associated with

violent:
linen

far
*at5>

The zeugma is, however, somewhat Gr atz, Klo. Sm. Dhorme, Ehrl. O antp Dy with fine
zeugmatically.
(Jud. 14, 12. 13 (see

hence

garments

Moore, pp. 355, 377).

Is. 3,

23. Prov. 31, 241-);

G. A. Smith (H. G. 405) D^njj Dy with jewels, to which 2nr HJ7 in the /WTO. /cooytou following line would form an excellent climax.

LXX

Cf.

the use of

nyn

in

Am.
is

8,

10;

and the opposite

Ez. 44, 17.

Tny nmn Ex.

2 5 b-

33, 5: also n^y in Lev. 19, 19.

slain
!

Jonathan upon thy high places

David turns again

but the case

to address Israel, as in v. 19.

26.

nnsbw] The normal form would be

the
is

n5>B3;

is

Where

baldness

alluded to

is

the

down

(in

and head, that

characteristic of the Griffon-Vulture, but not found

place of feathers) on the neck on the Eagle.

/.

2}

II.

239
r\"h,

one of those

in

which a

N"b

verb follows the analogy of a verb

the termination of the

i.

614:

comp. pp.

being attached to it externally (Konig, 6iof., 625): cf. nriN2nn jos. 6, 17; iJ"ik:i3n
n"^>

Zech. 13, 4;
20.

also niiop Jud.

8..

i;

nu6tp
7500.
me;"

Jer. 25,

12; nrNSBR 50,

to be connected

Comp.

Stade,

143; GK.

6]

"inanN

alone

=
i.

"thy

love to

and

^
to

is

with the verb

27.

(Ehrl.),
"62]

e.

thy love is

HDnta

i.e.

(figuratively)

wonderful Saul and Jonathan themselves,

me.

conceived poetically as the instruments of war (Ew. Th. Ke.). On this Lament, Ewald, Die Dichter des alten Bundes, i. i
pp.

(1866),

148-151, should be compared.

of generous admiration for Saul,
:

spirit

There breathes throughout a and of deep and pure affection

possessed by Jonathan, are

for

Jonathan

the bravery of both heroes, the benefits conferred by

gifts

Saul upon his people, the personal

commemorated by the poet in beautiful and pathetic language. It is remarkable that no religious thought of any kind appears in the

poem
2.

the feeling expressed by

.~6yNn]

it is

purely human.

i.

with reference to the higher elevation of Judah, as

(i, i
f.)
:

compared with Ziqlag

3. 4.

so vv.

2.

3.

VBONl]
~IB>N]

LXX
is

D^BONm, agreeing better with

!y

"1B*N.

Difficult.

The men

of Jabesh-Gilead are they that have

sentence,
"IB>N,

buried

Saul

an unnaturally worded
(DnS-pP^ not
1"i3p

besides

being
in

questionable as

Hebrew

would be the form

which the subject should be expressed see on I 4, 16). We cannot be sure where the fault lies. (which is not really wanted) may have crept into the text by some error ; or it may be taken as that,
:
"1B>N

as in

i,

4,

and,

as there
1

position of iy!?3

B^"

no apparent reason for the emphatic before it (see on I 20, 8), as having been *BON
is

accidentally misplaced from following

i

IDN^

(cf.

LXX
(cf.

and Gen.

"3

"IBN^

Ki.

i,

13).

Klo. would read rnir^y for

"iDNi>

26, 32);
to

Ehrl. supposes words such as

fallen out after ij^X.
5.

Oinyn t^HJ

TD

iwt? DyPin

have

nwx]

LXX

^yov/xeVoDs

ably rightly,
especially

vyu might

as 21, 12. I 23, ii. 12; prob be changed to the more usual BON, easily
"6y2,

under the influence of

v.

b.

niriv] for 7 with the passive see

GK.

i2i f ; Lex. 5i4 a d.

240
~it?tt]

The Second Book of Samuel,

ye who
in
. . .

implying, however, a reason

= omves),
16.

and so

equivalent to
*ff.

that
.

ye
.

71, 19
ich
.

Thou who
.

.!

139, 15

Comp. / who

6b
.

I
. . !

26,

Gen. 42, 21. ., (Germ. Der du

.
.

Der

.).

nn ^nn] LXX
TO eAcos TOV Ofov

(Cod.

A: B
cf. I
:

is

here, for

two

verses,

defective)

mrv non:

20,

14

MT.
124*.

W3*1N]
6. DNfri]

the plur. of

majesty
nothing
i1B>yx,

GK.
in

There

is

the context for this

word

to

be

referred to.
after
31

The

impf.

not less than the position of the clause

niiV t?JP,

postulates

an allusion

to

something future; and

of greeting sent

does not permit the reference, assumed by Th. Ke., to the message at the time by David. The proposal of We. to read

nnn

for

nNfn removes

all

difficulty:

also will

shew you good,

because ye have
7.

done

this thing.
fig.

WT

HJpTnn]

for,

Be encouraged:
1

so 16, 21.

Jud.

7,

n.

Zech.

8, 9. 13.

^n
8.

Cf. S

P?n I 23.

6,

with note.

Vm]

13,

28 end.

I 18, 17.
,

TIX D3l] For the emphatic position of TlX

cf.
31

on

I 15,

... IPX xnv

1B>]

Usage

requires

axn

It?

(ch. i,

10;

I 24, 6).

n^rrfc^N] Cod. 93

Holmes
;

Eio-/3aaX

so 01 Xoarol

(i.

e.

Aq. Symm.
See
i

Theod.)
33

9,

Hexapla 39 syztytf, which leaves no doubt

s

in the

comp. Isbalem of the Itala.

that this

Ch.

8,

was the

true

name

changed at a later period into Ish-bosheth for the purpose of avoiding what was interpreted then as a compound of the name of the Phoenician deity Baal, The change, however, was
son,

of Saul

not carried

through
title

consistently

the

original Ish-baal

(i.

e.

man

of Baal

of

Yahweh

(see

on

4, 4):

comp.

at

Carthage rUOK N
i

man of Tanith x ) remained in the two 2 in particular MSS. or recensions

.

genealogies in

Ch.,

and here

on

the border between

Gad and Manasseh

(Jos. 13, 26. 30):

Euting, Punische Steine (1871), No. 227 = CIS. I. ii. 542 has in ch. 3-4 the strange error Me^<jo<j0e for J"IBG~{J tt S.

LXX

So Lucian

recension throughout, except 4, 4, where the form

M/*</x/3aaA

occurs.

/-9
19.

241
33.

see also vv. 12. 29.

17,

24.

27.
4,

Gen. 32,

3.

Jos.

21,

38

(=

Ch.

6,

65).

i.Ki.

2, 8.

i4t.

narrative of Jacob s route from Haran to Shechem (Gen. 32-33) points to a site near the ford ed-Damiyeh, such as Deir alia, 7 miles more fully the Exp. Times, to the NE. of it (see the writer s Genesis, p. 301 f.
site is

The

uncertain.

The

N. Thus Buhl (257 perhaps ), Budde (but admitting that the site seems too far from the Jabbok for Gen. 32), and others, think the name is echoed in Mahnd, 13 miles N. of the Jabbok, and 6 miles E. of Jordan, at the top of W. el-Himar (but comp.
July, 1902, p. 457
ff.)
:

the notices in

Sam. seem

to suggest a site further to the

v. 29) Merrill (East ofJordan, 436 f.) points out objections to this, and pro poses Suleikhat, a large ruin 7 miles SW. of Mahna, and i mile E. of the road N. and S. through the Ghor [not marked in G. A. Smith s Map, but just under the

on

figure
iii.

2i3

may

though it would agree with 2 Sam. 18 (DB. Further exploration route (see my Genesis, 301). discover the site of Mahanaim for the present, as Gen. 32 and 2 Sam. point
500
b
),

in this position]
suit

this,

does not

Jacob

to different sites for

it,

it is

better,

with Dillmann, to leave

it

undetermined.

9.

HICi

Nn]

The name
Assyrians

is

recognised even by

Keil

as

corrupt:
D"WK

for

neither

the

("W$N)

nor the Arabian tribe of

nificant as not to

(Gen. 25, 3) can be intended; and the name of a tribe so insig be mentioned elsewhere is not in this connexion
probable.
situation, in

Pesh. Vulg.

express

"H^an

(so

Th. Ew. We.).

The

agreement with the position of the

b
)

name

next to that

of Gilead, would suit excellently (see Jos. 12, 5.

objects that Geshur at this time (see
3,

13, 13): but Keil

possessed an independent

king, so that Ishbosheth could have exercised

no

jurisdiction over

it.

Kohler, Kp. Klo. read neton (Jud.

i,

32):

cf.

Targ. nt^N

rpm

iy.

So Nold. Bu. Sm. Now.

n?3]
this

etc.

The

original

form of the
(Is.

suffix of 3 sg.

masc.
2,
-

is

retained in
8, 6.

word eighteen times

15, 3.

16, 7.
>

Jer.
1
>

21.
-

10
T 5-

bis.

15, 10

MT.

[but read

*$>bj?

DON]- 20
2, i.

7- 4 8 3
i, 9.

38
1
;

Ez

"

2O

>

40. 36, 10. Hos. 13,

(see

2.

Nah.

Hab.

.is)

and sporadically
i?3

on

21, i) in other cases.

For the position of

it

with a suffix

after the subst. to

which
i

it

refers, giving

greater independence
Is. 9, 8.

and

emphasis, comp.

Ki. 22, 28

= Mic. (

i, 2).

Jer. 13, 19. Mai.

The orthography i?3

13. Is.
i,

seventeen times:

Gen.

25, 25.
.

Ex. 14,

7.

19, 18.

Nu.

23, 13. Lev. 13,

23. 9, 8. 16. Jer. 6, 13

Ma!.

3, 9. f. 29, 9.

53, 4.

Pr. 24, 31. 30, 27.

Job

21, 23. Cant. 5, 16.

13C5

242
3, 9.
i/f.

The Second Book of Samuel,

8, 8.

67, 4. 6;

and

especially in Ezekiel, Ez.

u,

15.

14, 5.

20, 40.

29,

2.

32, 12. 30.

35, 15.

36, 5

(N);

and

in the second

person,

Is. 14,

29. 31. Mic. 2, 12.

*?y

Notice here ^N thrice, followed by

sentence: comp.
10.
3, 29.

thrice, in

one and the same

I 13, 13.
is

Jer. 26, 15.

28, 8;

and on

b Vn] See on I 12, 14. As We. points out, v. io natural sequel of v. 9, and ought not to be separated from it.

nnx

the

The

chronological statements of

v.

io a agree so indifferently with the data

stated, or implied, in other parts of these books, that the entire clause
is

probably a
12.

late

and unauthoritative insertion

el-Jib,

in the text.

rwjna]

Now

13. IKtf]

LXX
11

of Jerusalem. adds froniD: so Th. We. Klo. Bu.

5 miles
and,
indeed,

NNW.

HIT ]
1

superfluous,
!

hardly

possible,

after

DltMBM.

met each other] was originally written; and (i.e. a scribe, not noticing the following HIT, read it H?3a*! and added the

Perhaps l^iS

^G1

suffix,
ai

which remained

in spite of its inconsistency with

HIT

TO nmnn

i>y

rhvi]

Cf.

on

I 14, 4.

For the

pool

of Gibeon,

TB D3"n D On. cf. Jer. 41, 12 pj?3 Robinson (i. 455) mentions remains of a large open reservoir, some 120 ft. in length by 100 ft. in breadth, a little below el- Jib, which may be the m"Q referred to.
15.

nSDon nayi]

and passed over by number,

"py

of the

individuals passing in order before the teller.

Cf. Jer. 33,

13: also

Lev. 27, 32. Ez. 20, 37.

nt?:rty^i]
passage
1

The
a

is

not represented in
its

LXX,
with

Pesh.

and the

is

improved by

omission.
clause

6.

jl

mm]

circumstantial

his

sword in

his

fellow s side.

LXX,

however,

after
:

the two clauses will be parallel

And

t^X express Vr, in which case they fastened each his hand

upon [Gen.
fellow s side.

21, 18] the

head of

his fellow,

and

his

sword

in

his

So Bu. Now. Sm.

4): so elsewhere with this verb, as Gen.

Nip
1 6,

11

!]

sc. NTlpn (1 1 6,
al.

n,

9.

14. 19, 22

Dnsn np^n]
Lex.

i.e.

the Field ofFlints (Ez. 3, 9

(i/^.

cf.

Dnx
:

Dlrin

Jos. 5, 2

866 a

),

or,

perhaps, of (Svford-]edges

89,

44t

but

Duhm
Ew.

"M?

here for
Hi.

"H).

114, We.)

LXX Mepts TWV E^D f^H, or rather

7ri/3cwA.a>v,

i.e.

(Schleusner,
<"ny

Hist.

(the root being

I 24, 12.

Ex.

77 9-24
21, 13) DHJfn

243
Zz
<?r.r

n the
(

./%/</

0/~/>fo

Plotters or

3a* /, or (Now.
&) the Field of
in

Dnjrn Sm.) the Enemies.

c f. Est. 7, 6

Heb. and
</,

LXX cod.

W-*

But

Q^O

<?/"

proposed by Ehrl.
:

1900, and

independently by Bu. in 1902, seems evidently right called on account of injn TX3 "Din B*N.
1

the place

was so

8.
2,

Qi^vn 1HN3] intf in a comparison as

10.
riT]
i/r.

6, 20. 13, 13.

Jud. 16,

7.

n.
so

Job
Gen.

82, 7.
:

20.

imparting directness and force, in the question, to nJIN

i

27, 21.

Ki. 17,

7.

17.
"TID;

See Z&ar. 26i b

21.

^
7

Dt.

i,

HBJ] p. 22 iS D3^ IJ?D. 40 szb us.

Gen. 22, 5 03^

2,

OB>.

27,

43 I^TTO;

13 03^ ray.

Cf.

on

I 22, 5.

22.
r

no?]

LXX

explicitly fva //.

See on I 19, 17.

:i

TTWS

apCi)

TNI] As both We. and Dr. Weir remark, the text of xat TTOU ecrnv TaCra TO Trpocrwirov p.ov Trpos
Io>a/3j

LXX

(/ecu

eTricrrpe^e

contains a double rendering of these words, the second for

expressing H3S n^N, and being evidently the original

rendering,

LXX

though made from

"nnxn]

a corrupt text.

23. rpJnn

It is

doubtful both whether

nnN

(everywhere else

a prep, or con/.) can

mean

the hinder part of a spear, and also whether

the butt end of a spear would be sharp

man

(i.e.

enough to pierce through hence Klo. conjectured JVairiN (Gen. 9, 23 al.) backwards driving the reversed spear backwards as he ran): so Sm. Now.
:

Bu.
in

Ehrlich sees the difficulty

but objects that adverbs of this form

Heb. (rpnnx, JVmp, and perhaps JYOiyo; see on 15, 32) describe elsewhere only the manner or direction of movement, and therefore
conjectures JVJrD with the spear, supposing
""iriN

to
;

be a dittograph.

However, we have
would imply here a

in

9, 23^ rvnnN backward movement

Gen.

Dlfjai

and the smiting

with the

arm

(cf.

I 4,

18

so that the objection seems hypercritical.

3, 27.

4,

6 (but see note). 20, iof.

idiomatically
. .

= m his place,

where he stood (on

I 14, 9).

K3H ^3 Tm] N2H ^3

1 1
6".

is

a ptcp. absol., exactly as I 10,

ua

cf.

J"lb*V]

GK. The

pausal form, in accordance with the sense

cf. p.

306.

24. ... riEm HN3,

19,

23.

44, 3

BWm] A D^3m T1K

sentence of the same type as Gen.

in^>

np3H R
2

Tenses,

166, 169;

cf.

on

244
I 9, 5.

The Second Book of Samuel,

Theod.
for

nsx, from a sense acquired by

it

in post-Bibl.

Hebr.

on
the

8,

vSpaywyos (hence Vulg. aquaedtictus : cf. Aq. i): but were the word used as an appellative we should expect
(nosn).

(as in Syr.), has

art.

Neither this place nor ITU is mentioned elsewhere. The wilderness of presumably have been the country E. of Gibeon but it is remarkable that, though there was a hot pursuit, neither pursued nor pursuers had by sunset got beyond land named after Gibeon, or, indeed, if sq. gen. is to be taken in its

Gibeon

will

"JT1

normal sense (Gen. 3, 24. Ex. 13, 17. I 6, 9. 12 etc.), the road to it, though very soon after The dis 29) Abner began his all-night march through the Ghor. tance from Gibeon to Jericho, in a straight line, is 17 miles. Geba for Gibeon
(z>.

(see the opposite error in (see on I 13, 2)

is

Geba 5, 25) would be much more probable (so Bu.) 5 miles E. of Gibeon, and a route leads from it through W. Farah It is very possible that there is some further (p. 103) directly down to Jericho. error in the text though it cannot be restored with certainty. IT J is a place as
:

unknown
expects
Feu),
it

as

nCX, though from

known.
in its turn to

its

to be better

We. supposes
in

being used to define the position of HDX, one it to have arisen out of H 3 (LXX
^J in
"OD

and

be a dittograph of

supplying a

2 he

thus gets
I 15, 7)

(V33) the road in the wilderness of Gibeon

.

pV23 -OlCa -pin MS ^y

front

of

= East (
).

(or, better,
:

Geba

of?; see on So Now.

b 25 nns] hardly more than a cf. i Ki. 19, 4; and see on I i, i. We. Sm. Bu. al. read, however, Hfttf ny^H (as v. 24). Is it, however,

certain that the

hill

was

the

same one?

notice tOp M, implying

some

distance, in v. 26.
26. n^] LXX eis VIKOS: see p. 129 n. N^ TID ny] So Hos. 8, 5. Zech. i, i2-f. 27. D r^Nri Ti] LXX mry (as always elsewhere,

in this oath).

As

God
the

liveth, (I say) that, unless thou hadst spoken, that then only after

morning had the people gotten themselves up, each from after his brother, i.e. if thou hadst not suggested to them v. 26 to cease from
arms, they would have continued the pursuit

RV. interprets
39.
TN as 19,

the passage falsely.

7.
"ipano

For the

to-morrow morning. see on I 14, repetition of

till
"O,

lit.

after the

morning:

as in

D^ O,

etc.

used idiomatically, of getting away from so as Nif. r6yj] to abandon (Nu. 16, 24. 27), especially of an army raising a siege,
is

The

Jer. 37, 5.

1 1.

Cf.

28.

Lex. 749* 1
I i, 7

2.
bl
:

t&fj

See on

^>3Nn

cf. I 2,

25 iyo&

h.

29. na~iyi] the broad,

and

relatively barren Steppe, or floor of the

(cf.

deep depression (el-Ghor\ through which the Jordan flows

on

//.

24-32

245
to

23,

24).

It

would be reached from Gibeon by going down

Jericho.

3] accus. after 13^1 (unusual): Dt.

here.

i,

19. 2, 7 (Sm.).
;

divide in parts, Gen. 15, 10 (twice) f "irQ Only and "IfQ is a divided part (Gen. 15, 10. Jer. 34, 18. 19 f), each time, of halves of animals cut in two in making covenants. Ges. and other moderns have accord
is to

The verb

ingly generally taken fnJ"G to mean properly a division or cleft ; and pirurt (with the art.) to have been in particular the Gorge leading up to Mahanaim, as (Buhl, 121) W. Ajlun (6 miles N. of the Jabbok% or (Budde) W. el-Himar (12 miles N. of the Jabbok), by either of which Mahanaim, if Mahna, could or (H. G. 586) the narrow central portion of the Jordan It is not, however, stated whether any of these routes traverses valley itself.

apparently be reached

a pass or valley of a character in some way or other so marked as to be dis W. R. Arnold {Essays published as a Testimonial tinctively called p*in3.i"l.
.

to C.

A. Briggs, 1911, p.

isff.) argues,
1

on the contrary,

that, as

fnrQn ?3

cannot
"|bn,

be the direct object of 13?

Dt.
I,

(for the accus., as a direct obj. is very rare after

and, flTTD 73 being definite, the absence of DN shews that it is not a direct obj.), it must be an adverbial accus. , and that, not of place, but like v. 32
19.
2, 7,

^3 13^1, of time (GK. n8 k ),and denote all the half (sc. of the day); he then by a careful examination of vv. 24-32, and comparison with 4, 5-8, makes it probable that Abner would reach Mahanaim at about noon, so that the half of the
day denoted by fpfQ would be the fore-noon.
cannot be said to be established. with a direct accus.
;

rWn

The

case

is

ably argued

but

it

Dt.

i, 19.

2, 7

shew that

"pn

may

be construed

and

DK

is

often omitted before a direct determined object.

(Arnold

paper

is

reprinted in

AJSL.

1912, 274

ff.)

31. itWND,!] the

Read JMN3
is

or (with
:

LXX)
,

"tWKD

c f. v. 15.

at

end of the verse

is

superfluous

obj. (which
italics
is

required) to I3n.

a sufficient indication

EN vhw The insertion in RV. of how anomalous the verse

,
,

being evidently the

so that in
is

in the

Hebrew.

Th. Ke. would understand

in

1K>N

before
is

ino:

but the

omission of the relative pronoun

to the late

Hebrew

prose

almost confined
I 14, 21.

and unclassical

style of the Chronicler; see on

LXX
13H to

Trap

avrov^nXQ. mean only wounded.

;

distinctions

and

in

B^P, taking But Heb. historians rarely draw such accounts of battles H3H practically means always

Ehrlich iriD D

WI BN

niN

to smite fatally (Lex. 646*), exceptions being very rare (2 Ki. 8, 28 b ib.
9,

15:

645

e).

Dr&TYa] 9 MSS. Dr6~rV3:i: but see p. ^footnote 2. DH7 1K*1] The expression seems a natural one ; but it occurs only liN (the verb} I 29, iof here. Cf. litf "ipan Gen. 44, 3f.
32.
1

D3^>

246
3,
i.

The Second Book of Samuel,

rDitf]
;

Job

ii, 9 OTTO).

Jer.

29,

28.

The
ktn

masc. (which
-n-oXv,

would be =pN

GK.
prni

93

kk
)

does not occur.

LXX

reading

ra-iK (nann)/ Dr. Weir.

D^TI
2-5]
2.

D^n
=i
l]

i^n]

See on

1 2, 26.
s

Ch.

3,

1-3.
as

List of

David

wives and sons.

s
1"tp

n^

The
el

Kt.,

We.

suggests, might be pointed

(for

T^)

on l ^ e analgy of the contracted forms which now and then

(Nah.
i,

occur in Pi

*ne>3l.

Lam.

3,

33 njM. 53

W.
is

Ch. 32, 30.

in all cases
clerical

Qre W$*\:
error

GK.

69").

However, the contraction

any instance of

against analogy, and therefore probably nothing

;

more than a
at
all.

nor, in
is

Pual,

is

there

it

No

doubt, the

Qre

n^l
c).

here right.
to,

DyJTlN^] belonging

the dat. of reference:

I 25, 43.

cf. i

Ki. 14, 13 (Lex.

512^ 5
3.

On

Ahino am, see on

in

3tfb] Ch. btPH; LXX here AaAovia, Aq. Symm. Theod. AySia; Ch. 3, i B Aa/xnijA, A and Luc. AoAovia. Klo. al. regard
as a corruption of

AAAOYIA

AAAOYIA=nn
:

<!

l J

and ta*n of Jjgn" ,

1

two alternative forms of the same name.

the original form of the

It is
3tfi>

impossible to say what

in 3fc^3
is

name was

but

open

to the

suspicion of being a dittograph of 3N^ in

h3&6.
the E. of Jordan, N. of

See on

I 25, 2.

A
Gilead;
5.
cf.

petty

Aramaean kingdom on

on

I 27, 8.

TH

nt?N]

By analogy

(see v.

a
)

the

name

of

Eglah
is

first

husband would be expected: doubtless,

to a lapsus
6.

therefore,

in

due

either

calami or to some transcriptional corruption. V. 6 b is the continuation of v. i. Vv. 25 have been inserted
(We.).
[notyfrr]

a subsequently, and v. 6 conceals the juncture

X

3 pTnno

iT*n]

was making

or shewing himself strong in

in

etc., i.e.

was gaining power and importance

connexion with the

house of Saul.
(cf. 2

The

verb

is

not

used elsewhere in a bad sense

Ch.
8
ff.

i,
it

i.
is

12, 13 etc.), except sq. ^y (ib. 17, i); but in the light

of

v.

probable that

it

is

used here to suggest the idea of

acquiring undue power, and presuming too much. 7. 5W?S ? iNtJ9 i] For the form of sentence, cf.
<

D>23

4, 4.

13, 3.

14, 6

"jniTW^l.

I 28,

24 etc.

cf.

on

I i, 2.

///.

I-I2
hitherto

247
named
is

As Ishbosheth has not been

connexion, the insertion
7lNB>~p

in the present

(7y3t?X) JltfO t^N

n. 2)
vlo<s

necessary

cf.

LXX

/cat

*7rev

Meju.<t/2(xr0e

(p.

240

%aov\.

The point lies in the refer 8. minv belonging to Judah. ence to tlnefudaean 3^3 B Kl (cf. Ewald, iii. 116 .). LXX, however, do not express the words ; and many moderns omit them, on the
"|>N]

doubtful supposition that they are a gloss added by a scribe

vocalized 2.?3,
in

who

order to explain that

I 25, 3).

this

was the name of the

Judahite clan (see on

DVil] with emphasis, to-day, at this time.

Abner

protests that at the

very time at which Ishbosheth

is

is

bringing his charge against him, he

doing

his best for the

house of Saul.
Klo. Bu. nbtyn,

n^yx] I do,

the impf. expressing present habit.

putting the segolta on DVTl.

A plural form
So, sq.
to

cf.

on

I 30, 26.
6.

TQ, Zech. n,
to,

ND
etc.

or ntt

to

arrive,

come
over

to,

cause

to

come

with

T3 place

into the

hand

of,

hand

to.

=and
m?Nn
py]

(yet) thou in
1, cf.

visitest,

For the adversative sense,

:

sometimes implied

19, 28.

Gen. 32, 31

Tenses,

74)8.

LXX
13]

n&?N py

a fault
etc.

concerning

woman

(and

nothing more).
9.

So We. Klo. Bu.

^3

The second
ntf
)

is
x

resumptive of the

first (I

14, 39).

11.

n31

"03N

ywfc]

"in

n^n
lit.

is

properly to turn one back

to,

with

(GK.
:

H7 ff

a word; hence, in a weakened sense, reply

If the

answer

so I 17, 30 and often.

meaning were

bring back

word

to,

we

should,

by

all

analogy, require 7N or 7 for

nx

(cf.

the

Arab, idiom, cited in Thes. 1374^).

12. innn]

Generally explained as=where he

:

was

(2,

23).

But
but
ei?

the use

is

singular of

for the suffix

I

would
;

refer naturally not to

I 14, 9).

1H

to the subject

PI7CP

(see 2, 23

and on

Lucian has

Xe/Jpwv

(=p2n),

of which

mm

is

prob. a corruption; see below.

pN

iB? 1EN7]

At

least

pNrPW
is

were meant to express Whose

the

would be required, if the words land? but even so, they are
"JIVO

incompatible as they stand with what follows, TIN

nmD

"1EN7,

which

is

also the purport of the message,

and which according to

248

The Second Book of Samuel,

to follow

Hebrew usage ought

that will suffice to

innn immediately.

The

least

change
,

produce an

intelligible sentence, is to

read
it

pxn^ D,

and

to

omit the

following ncx^.
:i

At the same
<r

time,

must be

admitted that the proposal

TtX

"]n

a nn~O

is

complete without
""C^

any prefatory introduction

aiAa/A ov

and probably nox? piX

is

merely
eis

a double dittograph of the preceding IDX^.

TJV Trapa^prj/j-a
a<Aa^i

LXX

-n-pos

AauaS

Xeycov Aia0ou KT\.,

where

7rapa^(/3^/u,a=innri,

so that

tts

ov

rjv

(s

r)Xa(j.ov y-qv

Cod. A) must be a subse

quent

insertion, in the
n^>
"l!Dxi>

wrong

place, representing

and

pX

[pX

(yofyvh

= Aa/Aov
shew

innn again (=cis hence Xap ov yrjv,

ai)
T/V].

Hapa-xprjua. Ae ywv Ata$ou appears to

that in the
:

Hebrew

text

used by

nn~D 1E&6 innn stood together if with Luc. pan be read for innn, this would yield an excellent sense (so Now.). Bu., a suggestion of Klo. s, would read (after *in) V?nri 110X7 simplifying

LXX

X nn-D nriS
a person
5,
i

^
Q

nnj>

pxn
I

saying,

The

land

is

under

me

(at

my

disposal) to give to
s

whom
nnn
S

please
is

but the Heb. idiom for under

authority or control

not a
5. 9.

nnn (except of
Jud.
3, 30.

a wife, Nu.

pal.), but

(I

21, 4.

Is. 3,

6: Lex.

1065 b; notice also

J"innD

2 Ki. 8, 20.

13, 5

al., ib.

io66 a ).

lay

Cf. Jer. 26,

24 (nK); rather

differently, ch. 14, 19.

I

13. 310] i.e.

Good!

(=1

agree):

cf.

20, 7.

Ki.

2, 18.

Note

the

JN (see on
*JS^

I 26, 6). ^3]

"JN^n

DN
DX
jN On

except before thy bringing

an

unintelligible

construction.

and

"OB?

exclude one another;

(cf.

and we must
*3

read either

^3?

before thy bringing, or

Gen. 32, 27) DX

nxiin except thou bring.

aydyys).
14. 15.

The

latter is

expressed by

LXX

(lav

See

I 18, 27.

K ^X

Dj?a]

from a man!
1 8,

Read, of course, with

LXX

n^X.

For

DJJE, cf. I 10, 9.

13.

e4
1 6.

(Qr6)]

See

I 25, 44-

Dnn^]

On

the

17, 18), not improbably (Buhl,

way between Jerusalem and Jericho (16, 5. 175; EB. s. v.), at either Bukedan

i^ miles, or Ras ez-Zambi z\ miles,

ENE.

of Jerusalem, near the old

Roman

road, leading

down

to Jericho.

Targ. nio^y

(?py

Ch.

///.

72-2J

249

n c P$? Jos. 21, 18, now Almit 3^ miles NE. of Jerusalem), 45 no doubt from nD?y having apparently a similar meaning to DHPO and O^S|, D^na, }x&\ youthful age}. (cf. ty youth;
6,

17. nvi
i

-QT)]

&zrf been,

a plup.

for DJ?

"an

cf.

Jud. 18,

7.

Ki.

i, 7.

D: 71DH D3]

Cf.

Ex.

4, 10.

c^. 5, 2.

DIVVl]
22. 24:

yfos^

been
;

(continuously) seeking

Cf. Dt.

9, 7.

7fj,
is

135. 5

GK.

n6r.

18. ytt in]

Evidently a clerical error for JWIK, which

many MSS.

have, and which

expressed by
1B>K,

all

versions

(Keil).

19. 31D] 21D, after

will

be the verb (Lex. 373 a ).

20.
fc^N

D tWN
is

Dnpy]
correct
:

Ehrlich

would read

TJB>y :

(Jud.

20,
is

10).

Dnpy

(GK.
2 Ki. 2,

134)

but the type D tWN

Dn^y

very
:

rare

and anomalous

16 (perhaps due to the following ^TI Ja

al.
J"lEv^)t.

Herner, Syntax der Zahlw. 106). Jer. 38, 10 (Ew.

DnWt&] The men being

definite

(2o

a
),

&&:&

is

certainly

what

would be expected: comp. i, n. nntJ Ci] For the position, see on

i^

17, 12.
14, 12.

21.

^l?.?^ !]

Notice the pausal form with the small distinctive accent,

pazer (Tenses,
22. N2]

103 with
doubt,

n. 2).
is

On

"]K>D3

niKD, see on I

2, 16.

No

Joab

the principal person for the narrator

(Keil)

but, with
plural.

2NV1

ought to be
a

in H3y preceding, N2 by Hebrew idiom Read 0^2 (i. e. in the older orthography DN2)
:

O has dropped out before IHJnD.

24.

1N1 1^30 (see on

I 12, 5).

T^n l^l]

and he

is

gone (with) a going

offered

and he

is

gone

off,

very idiomatic and forcible, not to be abandoned in favour of

the
31

more ordinary expression here

(ev
fip^vrj
is

by

LXX

^V"^

fcOH
.

?!!

manifestly derived merely from vv.

2i b

22 b 23^:
"17*1,

but while the narrator, and reporters, use the

common
greater

DW2
energy

Joab
7l?n).

characteristically

expresses

himself

with

]7>1

At the same
;

time,

#.25 would doubtless be more

is

forcible

as an interrogative
after -p^n.

and

it

very probable that

NvH

has fallen out

25.

N2 inins?
9.

^a]

The

regular order in such constructions:

cf.

Gen. 42,

47, 4. Jos. 2, 3.

Jud. 15, 10. 12. I 16, 2. 5.

Why

the abnormal (and incorrect) form

^^^O

should be

250

The Second Book of Samuel,

substituted as Qre, unless for the sake of the assonance with

is

not apparent.
26. JVVDn
~>12]

The

cistern of Sirah.

There

is

an

Am

Sarah,

about a mile N. of Hebron, on the road to Jerusalem, which

the place
27.

may be

meant (DB. and EB.

Tin

s.

v.).

"Wn

bx] The

middle of the gate would scarcely be the

place in which Joab could converse with

Abner

quietly.

LXX
3, 29.

TrAaytW

TT/S

irvXfjs

"\Wi\

^TJ PN (see Lev.

I, II.

Nu.

35

Hebrew and LXX)

by the verb
^tJO]
int3
l

to the side of the gate/

which

is

favoured also

led aside.
:

I^SA-^ in quietude,

usage approximating curiously to the Aramaic n quietly, in the Pesh. I 12, 1 1 al.
(

comp.
Is. 8,

9?)-

(=

BtO). Job

4,

13 (of the quiet of night).

^"ONI
;

Ehrlich, however, for

in:n

^ea

conjectures inf n

cf.

z>.

30.

BW1
28.

DS? ini^l]

Probably bx should be restored before fconn, in

(2, 23.
4, 6.

conformity with the construction elsewhere

20, 10).

p nnKD] Dyo] Dy,

15, i.

Ch. 32, 23t.

being conceived as proceeding

the

acquittal

from
?J?

Yahweh: comp. Nu.

29. 1?rv]

32, 22 btOB^Dl miTD D^pJ Drvni.

Comp.
6.

Jer. 23,

19

= 30,

23 (of a tempest)

DWi

B Nn

bin

11

Hos. n,
bjn
11

!?Nl]

T2D

(see

on

I 12, 5);

so 10

MSS.

JO

n-D

PNl] Cf. Jos. 9, 23.

is to
+*

"J7S3

P^Tno] ddJ
>s

be globular or r0#fl^ (especially of a the sphere in

woman s
21, 34.

breasts): hence
36, 40),

eLU

is

which a

star

moves (Qor.

and

x_Lj the

whorl of a

spindle, Lat. verticillus, as

^3

in

Hebrew, Prov.

31, 19 (see
;

EB.

iv.

5277

f.).

Here

~f?Q

was formerly

(LXX
staff:

o-KVTaXri

Rabb.

but

(a) other

EVV.) commonly supposed to denote a words are elsewhere used in Hebrew to express
;

this idea (see 2 Ki. 4, 29. 31,

and

especially Zech. 8, 4 ifl?yipD

K"N1

11

^ mo

VP3),

((5)

there

is

no

trace of such a

meaning

in the

cognate

languages (see Levy, Freytag, Lane), (c) the transference of the term to denote an object lacking the characteristic feature (the whorl)

which

it

properly denotes,
spindle

is

improbable, and

(d),

even

if it

were so

transferred, as the
it is

was not more than some

1 2

inches long,

not likely to have been applied to a walking-stick.

Aq. Symm.

251
),

Jer.

and philo (fusum), Pesh. (JJjL^a^o) render spindle ;

:

logy and usage agree in supporting this rendering

properly

the word,

meaning

whorl/

will
s

have come naturally to suggest the spindle as

not brave warriors, but

a whole. count
for

David

words are an imprecation that Joab may always

among

his descendants

men

fit

only
the

the

distaff

occupations Comp. how Hercules with was the type of unmanly feebleness among the Greeks.
of women.
^ as I 23, 10 (see note),
5, 2.

30. -U2xi) lain]

later
*?

and with

nn

itself (in

Hebrew) Job
be due
Klo.,

The

verse interrupts the narrative;

and the

may

to its

being

in fact

(We. Bu.

Now. Sm.)

a late gloss.

Ew.
3"!f?

on the ground of LXX SiaTrapeT^powro, prefer to read laid ambush for : but this would scarcely be a just description
nor does the

of the manner in which Joab actually slew Abner:

preceding narrative imply that Joab and Abishai had done previously anything that could be so described.
31. 11SD] wail ; see
"U3N

on

I 28, 3.

*yfe\

i.

e.

preceding the bier in the funeral procession.

the
cf.
}

nicon] not Did Abner die? (non) but Was Abner on way to die? was this the end reserved for him? For the impf.
33.
2 Ki. 3,

27 his firstborn

11

"jta

~\WK

who.

Mm

to
to

reign after
die

him:
Tenses,

13,

14 the illness

DIE

"IB>N

which he was
in 3, see

of:

39/3;
34.

GK.

107^*.

For the dagesh

ptcp.
i/r.

GK.

loo 1

JTnDN N?] N^ with the

comp.
Jer.
4, 22.
:

is

unusual, and to be imitated with

caution:

Ez. 22, 24. Dt. 28, 61

Job 12, 3 (Ew. 320^). Lex. 519* b c. e DVIWU] a. pair of bronze fetters Jud. 16, 2 if (GK. 88 ). I 2, 13 (^33). see on I 25, 25. On ^, blS33] sc. bawn; comp. Abner, David laments, has experienced a death that was un
38, 15.
Tenses,

162
:

n.

deserved:

he has died the death of a

i>33,

a reprobate,

godless

an untimely end might be expected to overtake. person, There was nothing to prevent Abner from defending himself, had he
suspected Joab
s

whom

treachery (34*); as

it

was (34 b ), he had succumbed

5. 6.

to the treacherous

blow of an

assassin.

35.

m"

10): so
\{f.

Qr6] The verb is confined to this book (12, 17. 13, ? occurs Lam. 4, 10; and rvafood 13, 5. 7. iof.
rti"

69, 22f.

252
DK
ated,
"o]

The Second Book of Samuel,

not

= except,

as

v.

13

the two particles are to be separ

I

^3
.

introducing the oath,

as
:

14, 44,

and DX expressing

it

(if

.. ji

= surely not}.
i?33]

noiNO ^3

Gen. 39, 231.

all the people never having the force of (3

36.

as whatsoever the king did pleased

i?3
"l*N3

(EVV.

would require

for

^>33

a conjunction).

The

text

king did,
people

it

(viz. his conduct

can only be rendered, Like all that the on the present occasion) pleased all the
v. 19).

(310 being the verb, as

^3 for ^33

(LXX, Bu. Now.)

Heb.
style.

yields a very abrupt sentence, not in accordance with

37.

i^ono] So
b

1^5

nrvn

mn D

Ki.

2,

15:

cf.

Jud.

14, 4

**&
20

^
al.

KM

(Zfjr.

579 d);

and nso, as

nJVn

mrp JIXE

Jos.

n,

(Z^r. 86^ 4 b).

39.
"jta

TI]

tender, weak, opp. to

D^p.

niBTSl]

The
it,

contrast which, in virtue of the contrasted ideas

implicit in the copula 1, would be expressed in English distinctly by and at the same time, and yet, or though (cf.

connected by

is

Cant,

i, 5).

Ew.

rendered,
etc.

And

this

day

live

delicately
is
"|"l

and

am

anointed as king/
(Dt. 28, 54 Jjyni

The
Is.

sense thus attached to

47, i)
:

defensible

"p

Tin.

but the rendering labours under

nevertheless,

the disadvantage of obliterating the antithesis, which,

seems

be designed, between consonants go) is presupposed by

to

"p

and D^p.

MT.

(so far as the

1"!

LXX

(o-vyyevT/s

misread as
/SacrtXecos

*n,

see

Lev.

18,

14.

2O, 2O:

/cat

Ka^eorra/xevos

VTTO

4, i. bttSerp] p: the rightly inserts nBQT^N before omission in the Hebrew may perhaps be explained by the resemblance
i>!NB>

LXX

between (i?y3PN)

n^3^N
6,

and

JW1

(Dr. Weir).
for lost heart: the masc.

VT

IDT !] as Jer.
1

24.

Is. 13, 7 al., fig.

as Zeph.

3, 16. 2 Ch. 15, 7

by GK.

145?.

\f/.

lbn33] a strong word, more than were troubled/ were alarmed, elsewhere in early prose only I 28, 21. 48, 6. Jer. 51, 32 al.
:

Gen. 45,
2.

3.

Jud. 20, 41.

;

D HlTl] guerilla lands; cf. 2 Ki. 5, 2 also I 30, 8. i Ki. 1 1, 24 ; and Gen. 49, 19 As for Gad, a troop may troop upon him; But he
will troop

upon

their heel.

///.

x-IV.
it

4
not translateable.

253
Read

Vn] The
with

text,

as

stands, is

LXX

hxK>-p

C ya^) n^n-t^

vn.

Wells; mentioned as closely associated with Gibeon, Chephlrah, and Qiryath-ye arim in Jos. 9, 17, as Canaanite towns which long maintained their independence in Israel, and with Qiryath-ye arim and Chephirah in Ezr. 2, 25 = Neh. 7, 29); and after Gibeon and Ramah, and before Mizpeh (Nebi Samwil) (

nnN3]

i.e.

and Chephirah, in the list of Benjaminite cities in Jos. 18, 25 f.f. It is generally identified with el-Bireh^ a village with several springs or wells, 4 miles NNE. of
Gibeon, and 9 miles N. of Jerusalem, on the great northern road Buhl (Geogr. 173), however, and Now., on the strength of Eusebius statement (Onom. 233, 83 f.)
:

that
this

it was 7 miles from Jerusalem on the road to Nicopolis (Amwds), which, if were the present Jaffa road, would be at a point about 3 miles S W. of Gibeon, prefer this site (which would also bring Be eroth nearer to the cities with which

it is

associated in Jos. 9, 17. Ezr.

2,

25).

Robinson

(i.

452), however, placing the

road to Nicopolis
description.
*?y

more

to the north, thinks el-Bireh compatible with Eusebius

atrnn]

Cf. Lev. 25, 31

n^rr

pn
:

mt?

i?y

and with

^,

Jos.

3.

Dna DP nna vrPI]

viz.

the ptcp.
"}?.,

and they continued (on

foreigners

18, 9)

sojourning there,

as

D1

or protected

(on

i,

13).

The
towns

Gibeonites, with no doubt the inhabitants of their dependent

(Jos. 9, 17), Chephirah,

Be

eroth,

and Qiryath-ye arim, were

not Israelite, but Amorile

(ch. 21,

some
Neh.

reason, fled to Gittaim,

2); and the Beerothites had, for presumably the Gittaim mentioned

n, 33t

in a

list

of Benjaminite cities, next after

Ramah,

where

they sought and obtained protection as gerim. ii Nna ifn &yy B on 4. p] rw s^nn p Nim (without

rvn)

would
:

be excellent Hebrew

but

it is

not supported by

LXX,

as Bu. claims
fiTTi

LXX

connects

0*05?

t?En
cf.

p
2

with what precedes, and then for

14, 2. 15, 2. 33.
n.),

has

KCU OUTOS.

With

MT.

Ki. 8, 17.

Htaro ntaro] Ehrlich would point

that the

rVjanna ( se e p. 37
116,

Qal (Dt. hurry and alarm

i/r.

20, 3.

if/.

31, 23.

n. Job

40, 231*)

remarking is used of
15 Kt.

in general, but the Nif. (I 23, 26.

2 Ki. 7,

104, 7f) of hurry and alarm in flight.

nea BD] In i Ch. 8, 34 (bis). 9, 40* ano, in 9 40^ bya^nip. One of these forms is certainly the original name. There was a time when the name ^ya owner or master (of the place or district) 1 was
,

See

art.

BAAL
ii.

in
ff.

DB., EB., and (most

Cf. also above, p.

fully) in

Hastings Encycl. of

ReL

and

Ethics,

283

63

f.

254

The Second Book of Samuel,

Yahweh 1
,

applied innocently to
in

as

Owner of

the soil of

Canaan

but,

consequence no doubt of the confusion which arose on the part of the unspiritual Israelites between Yahweh and the Phoenician god
Baal/ the habit was discountenanced by the prophets, especially by

Hosea
in

(2, 18),
^>JD

which

and ultimately fell out of use. Proper names, therefore, originally formed part had to be disguised, or otherwise
This was generally done by substituting
fttJd

rendered harmless.

shame*

for byi, as in the case of Ishbaal (above,

on

2,

8),

and of Meribbaal
sons by Rizpah

the
in

name
21, 8.

of Saul

grandson here, and of one of

latter

his

In the case of the

name

the change to
;

JicaaHO
and the

(or riS^no) appears not to have been thought sufficient

name was
DrVNBX,
(Gideon),

further disguised

by

being altered to

nE^SO, which was

(cf.

probably taken to

mean One who

this

scatters or disperses

Dt. 32, 26

though certainly corrupt) the Master contends? being interpreted

(Jud.
6,

word

is

Shame
to

Jerubbaal

mean

One

that contends with Baal

in ch.

32),

was suffered

to remain, except
less

n,

21,

where

it

was altered

to Jerub&eske/h.

In
:

read books,
^yat2>N

however, the
s
i>yaa
"i

names remained sometimes unchanged

1

thus

and
the

are preserved in Ch., as also yT^JQ,

the Master

knows

the
27,

name name
28
5
.

of a son of David, called in ch.

of David
It will
s

5,

yT^N

God knows *, and

his officer pr6j?3

hero rr^ja

Ch.

1 2,

5,

and of

be observed that these names are particularly frequent

1 2

See

DB.

i.

2iob

EB,
18,

i.

403
19.

EncycL of Rel. and Ethics,

ot
irpotyTjrai

ii.

291
13.

f.

For ntJQ shame

in

as a designation of Baal, see Jer. 3, 24.

n,

Hos.

9,

10;

T^J alffxtinpDillmann, in an elaborate essay devoted to the subject in the Morwtsberichte der Kon.-Preuss. Academic der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1881, June 16, observing the strong

comp.

LXX

Ki.

25

tendency shewn not only in LXX, but in other ancient versions as well, to obscure or remove the name of Baal, thinks that the habit of substituting alffx^vrj for it is the explanation of the strange 77 Baa\ of certain parts of (e.g. Jeremiah

LXX

constantly,

2, 23.

7,9.

n,

13. 17.

19, sal.

Hos.

2, 10.

13, i:

so

Rom. 11,4):

BoaA was left in the text, but the fern, of the art. was an indication that aia\vvj\ was intended to be read. No traces of an androgynous Baal have been found in
Phoenician Inscriptions. 8 Lucian has throughout (except 21, 8) the intermediate form Perhaps this is a survival of the first stage in the transforming process.
4

Comp. Jud. Comp.

9,

46

m3 ^N

for

TVO ^3
n., i

8, 33. 9, 4. 8,

also i?ya

itself,

as a pr.

Ch.

5, 5.

30

= 9,

36).

IV. 4-10
in the families of Saul

255

and David, both zealous worshippers of Yahweh (comp. among other things in the case of Saul the name of his son byaaniD will be a name of the same form (a rare one in jroirv).

Hebrew: above on

I i,

20) as the Nabataean talD pD (Cooke,

note).

NSI.

78, 2), and bfcaWB, ^NOBWJ (above, p. 18 5. D1V1 Dm] Gen. 18, i; I n, 9 Qref.

Dnrran 32^O nx]

of reclining
(

The

cogn. accus. 33^10

is

here not the place

= couch],

but the act of reclining (as in the expression

13t nac^n Jud. 21, ii

al.,

and

ch. 17,

28 [see note]), in the present

was taking his noon-tide rest/ 6. Branrrta D^DH ^np^ rvan limy ixn rum] nan thither redundant 1X3 and irD both anticipate prematurely 7 a ; D^DH Tlpi
context =stesta:

ww

is is

inappropriate,

Read with We.

and behold

and the rendering as though fetching wheat after LXX }vn Darn Q^n nbpb rvirj

illegitimate.
rqj;e>

nam

the portress of the house

cf. Is.

(LXX

lKa.Ba.ipev:

she slumbered and

slept,
it

was cleaning wheat from stones 57, 14 Ka.6apia-a.Te for ^b, read as ^ipp), and and Rechab and Ba anah slipt in/ etc. The
that

words explain how

slipt in or
slipt

happened
s

Rechab and Ba anah obtained

word

entrance to Ishbosheth
ID!?DJ]

house.

through

(LXX

SieAafloi/,

joining the

closely

with

v. 7

through, and entered

into the house/ etc.), in accordance

(cf.
B.;"?

with the primary

meaning of the root

Is.

34, 15

1
;

toy<?

66, 7

),

and not
i.e.

in the special sense of slipping

through or away from pursuers,

of escaping.
ratjjn] See
}1"i3n]

7.

on

2,

29. see p. 37 n.
, ,

8.

to

Hebron:
. .

2.

. niDpj jm] So 22, 48 (=^. 18, 48) fnun i?xn iND mcpj nin -j^ n^y nnx Jud. 1 1, 36. For comp. cf. also Jer. 20, 10. 12 ; I 14, 24. 24, 13. \Qfrom (in Old Engl. So i Ki. i, 29. On ma, see the writer s note on 9. y\ H1E5

ijnTDi

biKPD

h nip3

11

"pi

"JB>

o/"),

-|E>x]

Dt. 6,
10.

8.
f

y\

HTI Kim] a circumst. clause.

after

13

nffiNI]

I^JDn treated as a casus penden s ; so

Ki. 9, 20

f.

12,17. 15,13: Tenses,

1

127 a;

GK.
(Ges.).

39

let

Of laying eggs, properly (as it seems) elabi fecit me get away (without the idea of escaping).

Cf. the Nif. in I 20,

256

The Second Book of Samuel,

to

whom

ought, forsooth, to have given

a reward for his good tidings

(so Bu. Dh.).

T\pb

to

whom

it

was

for my giving } must be explained on the analogy of 2 Ki. 13, 19 iron? percutiendum erat quinquies aut sexies, an extension of a
usage more

common

in present time,

Hos.
s

9,

13

etc. (Tenses,

204).
:

The

clause can hardly express

David

view of the transaction

he

could not think that the Amaleqite really deserved a reward for his what David ought to have done in the it must express tidings
:

judgment of the Amaleqite himself, or of men in general unable to Keil that forsooth ). appreciate David s regard for Saul (hence
:

might give him a reward

:

for his

good

tidings

(ironically), treating

It^K zs=na?nely (Ew. 338 b )

of
"itPN

so substantially
:

RV.
this

But such a sense

be
felt

cannot be substantiated
of the
-1K>X,

so that,

if

to

be the
of

meaning
to
its

passage,

we must

follow the suggestion

"6

We.
in

omit

as due to a false interpretation of

^nn^, which
mB>3.

turn arose from a mistaking of the ironical sense of

;

So
gave
is

Now. Sm.
him

cf.

GK.

n^w.
good

Ehrl. TiHJ for Tir6:

!

which

as a reward for his

tidings

This, remarkably enough,

the exact sense expressed by

RV. (=AV. marg.\

.
.

which was the

!

reward
1 1.

I
^3

gave him for his

fjS]

presumably without emendation how much more (should I do so), when as Ez. 15,
tidings,
.

5.

Job

9,

14; and a
nt<]

f|Nl I

23, 3. 2 Ki. 5, 13.

;

pHV B^N
D3T19
3
1
.

B>p3N]

DN followed by an undefined subst. The same idiomatic use of TD

Ez.
3,

comp. on

I 9, 3.

in I 20, 16.

Gen.

39-

43. 99,

Is. i, 12.

18.

20 (wi). 33, 8 (ion);

and with

trn Gen.
vnyai]
i

5 (m). Ez. 34, 10. Cf. i Ki. 22, 47 pta-p -IJD

;

Ki. 14, 10. 21, 21

"pipe
l

2 Ki. 23, 24; nnw ijn and the frequent Deuteronomic phrase FHSP
;
<

(bsne*D)
12.

jnn Dt.

13, 6.

17, 7. 12

ai.

jud. 20, 13.

1p

5, 1-3.

The word is used 6-10=1 Ch. n, 1-9.

l]

similarly in Jud. i, 6. 7.

The
will

parallel passages in Chronicles

should be compared, and the variations noted, in the manner exhibited

above, on I 31.

The

reader

who

consistently (especially in the parts of Chronicles

be at the pains of doing this which are parallel to

the variations which

1-2 Kings),
to

will,

when he has eliminated

seem

be due to accident, understand better than from any description in

IV. io

V. 2

257

his

books the method followed by the Chronicler in the compilation of work, and the manner in which he dealt with his sources in the

process.
5,
i.
-)EN^>

llO^l]
20,

Thus, immediately together,

rarely,

20, 18.

Ex. 15,
33, io.

i.

Nu.
2,

3
;

Zech.

*]

[add Jer. 29, 24. Ez. 12, 27 LXX, Cornill. Ges. Thes., p. 119^: on the contrary, very
Jud. 15, 13, separated by a pronoun or other
article

frequently as in

v. 6.

word

(We.).

Geiger in an
later

mark

of the

regards it as a of the language, and seeks to shew that period

this

on

idiom

most of the passages

class noticed

in

which

it

occurs

even those of the second

by We.

are redactional additions.

But

"IEK?

was

in
its

such frequent use for the purpose of introducing a speech, that

proper force must have been early forgotten ; and the habit must soon have grown up of using it instinctively, irrespectively of the
fact

that the

same verb might have been already employed

Behold us

in the

sentence.
,

iJJn]

we
the

are,
||,

&c.
i

Ch.

1 1, i

has run alone.

similarly ch.

19, 13
2.

pB DHN

31

TOW]

So

in

Ch.

n,

i;

and

nc?21

M3VJ?. 14.

Gen. 29,

14. Jud.

9, 2.

nnN] Notice

(thrice) the

emph. pronoun.

fcOSIE

nrvn]

acm

(with the art.} following shews that the words

are wrongly divided,

and

that the

Massorah

is

right in correcting

rvn.

N dropped
i

as
i,

Ki. 21, 21 -J^N

<

a
i

Jan. Jer. 19, 15.

39, 16

Ki. 21, 29.

Mic.

15

(both *aN)

Ki. 12,

12

DJDT

121

al.,

sometimes (but not always) before another X (as though the omission were due to the juxtaposition of the two identical letters): see Ol.
p.

69;

GK.

74 k. Note the emphatic pron. (twice). Here first in the metaph. sense.

So

7, 7.

Mic.

5,

and,
2, 8.

with the figure usually developed explicitly, often in Jeremiah, as

3,

15.

io, 21.

22, 22.

23,

1-4; Ez. 34 (throughout),

al.

Ttti?]

See on 19, 16.

Cf. Cornill,

ZATW.

1891, p. 22.
iv.

Jiidische Zeitschrift,

1866, pp. 27-35

s

comp.

v. p.

188

vi. p.

159.

1365

258
3.
Di"6

The Second Book of Samuel,

m^l] On
see

the force of

b,

see

on

I 18, 3.

For the position

of

JV"O,

on

ch. 14, 12.

4.

D^XDis] Read, with 14 MSS., and Versions, and parallel passages

Ki. 14, 21),

(as

D^mNIi.e.

6.

pNH
1]

3KT]

the native inhabitants of the land: Gen. 34, 30.

Ex. 34,
~1ON

12. Jud.
sc.

n,

21

al.

"Oxn,

of course,
if
lit.,

among
2,

the Jebusites.

LXX

tpptOr),

either a paraphrase, or,

presupposing 1ONM, which,

2,

standing In Chr.

alone,
(I
i r,

is

not idiomatic
.

(only Jos.
is
11

sq.
(:

irrni

"fi^b).

b
11

5) the
OB"

whole sentence
1

altered
!

pn
:

TH^ on
31

riDN
3]

for

iv6 lOK
I 8,

pxn
:

aer

TTPH DX
will
;

but (on

19

ZM:. 475 a ) the blind and the

RV. m. the sing, by Ew. io6 m though the impf. and the pf. by GK. 3i6 145; would be better (We. al.). But it is better to read T^ ?-Their
lame
turn thee aside/ substantially as
a

GK.

fortress, they

mean

to say, is so strong that even the blind

it.

and the

lame

in

it

are sufficient to keep David from entering

Except thou

take away

(AV. RV.) would require (ITPH? o r ) ^^H Chronicler (I n, 5) omits everything from DK ^ to

The

the end of

the verse.

Dmynj GK.
7.

35^.

On

the forms KV, DD9, see

GK.

84 b*.
City of

On

the

site

of the old Jebusite stronghold, Zion

;

= the

David/ see Stade, Gesch. Isr., i. 315 f. DB.Ziox; EB. ii. 241720; most fully G. A. Smith, Jerusalem (1908), i. 154-169. The part
of Jerusalem which
is

now

called Zion,
;

and

is

so

marked on many
hill

maps,

is

the South- West Hill

but the tradition identifying this

with the Biblical Zion does not reach back beyond the 4th century

A. D.;

and there are the strongest reasons, based on the usage of the OT. Zion of ancient times was the Southitself, for believing that the
East
Hill of Jerusalem,

on the North, and

highest, part

of which

stood the Temple, and on the South (contiguous to the Temple) the Royal Palace, built by Solomon. The author of i Mace, expressly
identifies

Zion
4,

with the
7,

hill

on which the Temple was

site

situate

(i

Mace.

37

f.

33).

The
city,

of the old stronghold, Zion, was

hill,

entirely outside the

modern

on a narrow elongated
esh-Sherif
:

stretching

out to the south of the present

Haram

see the

Map

facing

V. ]-S

259

EB. 2419-20
op.
cit. ii.,

Ophel

),

or,

still

better, the

Maps

in

G. A. Smith,

facing pp. 39, 51.

8.

31

H3

^3]

The
in

passage

is

very

difficult,

and the
-a.

text certainly
pipe, spout, or
(cf.
"6yri

to

some extent

corrupt.

113V in the
i/r.

Mishnah means

water-channel ;

and

42, 8t

it

denotes the channels

Job 38, 25), from heaven.

by which the

Hebrews conceived

rain to pour

down

In other respects the renderings that have been generally adopted, both implying, however, a deviation from the existing MT., besides being highly questionable
philologically, are (a)

Whosoever smiteth the

to

Jebusites, let

him

(the

by Tenses,

125
etc.

GK.
RV.).
(J"IN

143

d
)

S et U P

(so

Upon

watercourse, and (smite) the blind and the lame, this interpretation, HDH is supposed to have fallen out in
]"IN1).
"2

^e

for i?33, however, elsewhere means simply to touch : be represented by the English word reach it is applied not to a person arriving at a spot, but to some object extending to if, so as to touch it, as i Ki. 6, 27 the wing of the one cherub touched the wall, Hos. 4, 2 and blood toucheth, reacheth

clause b

HSni

where

it

may

to

blood (forming a continuous stream)

more

often with 7]}, ?X, or ?y,

meta

phorically of misfortune, the sword, etc., Jud. 20, 34. 41. Mic. i, 9. Jer. 4, 10 al. Touch, the legitimate rendering of 2 V33, is weak: get up to is an unjustifiable Whosoever smiteth paraphrase, (b] The words are rendered, with yj l for ya
1
"!,

the Jebusites, let

lame,
(Is.

etc. (so

him hurl down the water-channel both the blind and the Ew. Ke.). But yan means merely to make to touch = to join
"3,

5,8): even with

?,

?S, or iy,

it is

only used of a building (or collection of

buildings)

made

to

touch the ground

2, 2
;

(viz.

by being levelled

to

it), Is.

25, 12.

26, 5.

Ez. 13, 14.

to, Is. 6, 7.

Lam.

(comp. py yjn
with

to
:

make
with

to touch

(and rest) upon

= io

apply
;

Jer. i, 9

?X

Ex. 12, 22

? Ex. 4, 25

= ^0

cast to the foot)

or (intransitively) simply to reach, arrive at (I 14, 9al.). Thus though 2N y^ l llJVn (or *1JJ) might mean level to the water-channel (so as to rest upon it), there
is

no analogy

for interpreting

"113X3

V:

to

mean

hurl

down

the water-channel.

Both these renderings of

"113V,

y3

must therefore be abandoned.

Of
it

recent excavation in Jerusalem has given an attractive and, as

seems, probable

explanation.

From

the

Virgin

Spring

Ain

Sitti e. Sidli, My [i. Lady] Mariam, also called Ain Umm el-Deraj, from the steps leading down to it), the ancient Gihon (i Ki. i, 33. 38. 45. 2 Ch. 30, 30. 33, 141), the one natural spring which

Jerusalem possesses, on the E. of Ophel, and just opposite to the village of Siloam (Si/wan), there are carried through the rock two
tunnels,

one (1757
i),

ft.

long) leading

down

to the

the Introd.

the other running

W.

of the Spring for 50

Pool of Siloam (see ft., where

s 2

260
the rock
is

The Second Book of Samuel,

cut out so as to form a pool
ft.
:

above

this

there

is

perpendicular shaft, 6

by 4

ft.,

called,
s

from

Sir C.

Warren, who

discovered

it

in

1867,

Warren
ft.,

shaft/

which runs straight up

ft.

through the rock for 44

ascent, rising at
for

then there follows for 45

a sloping

an angle of 45, the tunnel then becomes horizontal

another ascent of 50
ft.

40

ft.,

till

finally after

it

ends

at the

top

of the

hill,

on which

the original fortress of Zion

shaft

must have been

through which

situated.

At

the top of the

there

is

an iron

ring,

a rope might have been passed for hauling up water from the pool below. The purpose of this tunnel is clear it was to enable the
:

garrison to draw

upon

the Spring from within the fortress, especially

i.

in the event of a siege (G. A. Smith, Jerusalem,

92

f.

more

fully

Warren

Survey of West Pal., Jerusalem volume, p. 367 f. with section of tunnel facing p. 368). Could this tunnel have been the
in the
?

TU

It

was

certainly a

water-channel
;

from the spring

to the pool

at the

bottom of the

shaft

and on

it

is

possible, at least with the help

shaft, as

of a rough wooden scaffolding, to get up the perpendicular

Warren

did,

and so

to pass

to the

mouth of

the tunnel at the top.

Did some adventurous

fortress of Zion,

Israelites make their way up thus into the and surprise the garrison ? Pere Vincent thinks so (Underground Jerusalem, 1911, p. 34); and it seems very probable. As however has been shewn, no sense suitable to TU can be extracted

out

of
(cf.

yj"

! ;

and we must,

if

we

accept this

view,

write bravely

^5n

i
:

Ch. ii, 6 3NV

this is at least

channel
with

him go up in (or by) the waterfe) both more scholarly, and more honest, than,
let

AV. RV., to force upon yj* the impossible meaning get up. The following words, jl DTIDSH DN1, as they do not make a and we may either, with sentence, must in some way be emended read H3rn and smite the lame and the blind who are hated AV.,
:

(Qre) of David

(on account viz. of what is said of them in or (though the connexion is then poor) read for
s

soul

v.

6),
i.e.

nK3B>

1fcWE>,

and

(=

for) the
v.

lame and the blind David

soul hateth.

The

last

words of the
(i.

e.

can only mean (RV. m.) The blind and the lame mendicants) shall not [or do not] come into the house/ i. e. into
(so

the
22,

Temple
14;
I 19,

LXX):

the origin of a

common

saying

(cf.

Gen.

24) about mendicants being excluded from the

Temple

V. 8-g
is

261

thus explained.
;

and obvious sense

But the saying is unrelated to v. 6 in its natural and in fact v. 8 b seems to be an old gloss, added

by one who supposed 6 b to mean Except thou remove the blind and the lame (in the Israelite army) who say, David will not enter in
here
:

comp. the Targ., which paraphrases

Thou

wilt not enter in

here except thou remove the sinners and the guilty,

will

who

say,

David

not enter in here

s

and

in 8,

And

the sinners and the guilty

David

soul abhorreth

therefore they say,

The

sinners and the guilty

enter not into the house.

Dhorme takes the same view of TlJJf, though he restores the text differently And David said in that day, Whoso smiteth the Jebusites, and reacheth b [And the son of Zeruiah went up (cf. i Ch. n, 6 )] by the water-channel
.

(Gloss on v. 6

As

for

[GK.

117

David

soul

therefore they say,

The

the lame and the blind, they are hated of blind and the lame shall not enter into the

Temple).
Budde, regarding the words in v. 8 as spoken after the capture of Zion, and observing that we have a right to expect some thought worthy of a king (which hatred of enemies is not), and that David actually (24, 18) spared some of the
Jebusites, conjectures:

Whoso
;

brings his
(TIN

own

life

into danger)

smiteth a Jebusite, toucheth his own neck (i.e. the lame and the blind David s soul hateth not

n(N)^3
ii.

for

nXI 11310
conjecture
fine

and
is

nWS?
it

fc6 for

IWt?)
J?3J

cf.

G. A. Smith, Jeru

salem,

32.

The

clever:

gives O
;

its

attributes to

David a

and chivalrous thought

for

but

it is

proper sense; and it too bold to command

acceptance.

The Chronicler

(I

u,

6)

the

whole of

v. 8

has HIDE) bl
11

TH

1DX

1|>

:Kw6 Tn
1

rpny

p aw

n:iE>N"D

bsn

1^1 A

t?sr6 n^n

mitr&ca
K>N~),>

on
["PiT

Whether, however, this interpretation

~l2v1 have fallen out in Sam.,
(cf. 2, 23.

is correct,

and words such as

Nu.

21, 8.

is very doubtful. H3O p.3 is every one who smites Jud. 19, 30. I 2, 13. 36. 10, n), not, as would be needed

if

N rPi"P were Gen. promised, any one who smites hardly proves the contrary; and where, in such sentences, an individual is in view, the wording is different (as Jud. i, 12 , , , "IDDVPTp JIN
such a reward as 15JO1
:

4, 16

!"

n,

31. 1 17, 25 -j^ron

tri^y
ii, 8

1::^

ntrs

cNn

rvnv NU.

16, 6. 17, 20).

9.
(/cat

"in

pM]

Ch.

"Pyn

pi, which
"??.?!!,

is

supported by
the

LXX

here

a>Ko8o/r7o-ev

avrrjv 7roA.iv

"VJ?

Bu.,

words being

differ

ently divided),

and may be the

in the
||,

original reading.
8.
i

Nltan]
32,

So

Ch. ii,

Ki.

9,

15. 24.

ii, 27.

Ch.

5f

Nl^D

nu

Targ.

for this

20; and also 2 Ki. 12, 2ifMillo has always NJVta, the word which also represents
near Shechem, Jud.
9, 6.

262
nppb, the

The Second Book of Samuel,

mound
of earth cast up by the besiegers of a town.

The

word Nl^D means apparently Filling ;

or rampart of earth.
<

and probably denotes a mound

ii.

Cf.

G. A. Smith, Jerusalem,

40
al.

f.

iirTQl]

"Ifi/?

homewards

= inwards,
^H:

as Ex. 28, 26

10.
5>njl]

for the construction, see

on

14, 19.

11.

H?hn] the form being for

GK.

84

11-25=1
13.

Ch. 14, 1-16.

i

D^n*]
in
1

Ch. 14, 3
12, 14.

D$>B>W3,

the

more probable
Jos. 5, 5.

reading.

14. E l^D] *tfy

Ex.

i,

22.

Jer. 16, tf.

The

punctuation

TvJOj E^lc^L
cf.

is

Ew.

i55

d
;

irregular: by what would be required by the syntax. On the form, Stade, 224; Kon. ii. 148 f. GK. 84^. 24: the
;

all

these

cases

is

analogy the ptcp.

parallels have

all

a substantival force

(113?,
/.

~>i3$,

1133, etc.).

It

is

not clear with what right Hitzig (on Jer.

c.} says that

in virtue of

14 the punctuation TOJ is correct; and the explanation adopted (apparently) by Dillmann on Jos. /. c that the form is meant to express in contradistinction to tP\P. the idea of
passages such as
2 S. 12,
.

succession
is

soil

das

"

fort

und

fort,

nach und nach

In

"

ausdriicken
i

incompatible with ch. 12, 14 (of a single child).

in the parallel
i

Ki.

3, 26. 27,

and even

Ch.

14, 4, in

each of which passages (notice

in Ch. the following 1^ ITl

"itJ>x)

the substantival form would have

been

in place, the

word

is

pointed as a ptcp. (IvJD, t^l^n).

The

explanation in GK. /. c. is artificial. b I4 -i6. The list of David s sons, born in Jerusalem,
i

is

repeated,

Ch.

3,

5-8, and

also 14, 4-7, with the following variations:

i 5b

2
I.
14b

Sam.
yiDfc?

5.

Ch.

3.

Ch. 14.

NyDE>

2-5
:

(3215?, |D3, fflD^e*,

"IPD

without variation.

6. 7-

9-11.
12.
16

(3B3,

yas

yiDK

^)

without variation.

13.
is

perhaps

an
ii.

abbreviated,

caritative

form,

for

(Lidzbarski, JEphemeris,

21

Pratorius, ZDMG. Ivii. (1903), p.

774).

V. 9 -.20
Cf.

263
is

above, p.

19.

In No. 12 jn^ys

evidently the true name,

4, 4).

changed
in
i

for the sake of avoiding

7

^jn to JTpta (comp. on

(Swete,
i.e.

LXX
Sin.,

Ch. 14,

read with

MT. yT^jn
;

Codd.

B and

BaAeySae; Cod. In the existing

list
;

A BaAAiaSa Lucian BaaAiaSa LXX text of 2 Sam. there are

Other

MS S. BaAiaSa).

two renderings of the

and

in the second,
is

form with ^JD

which appears to be derived from Ch., the likewise expressed (BaaAei/x,a0 so Luc. BaaAtAa$).
:

5, 17.

David and

the Philistines.
cf.

17.

vJM] from

the low-lying Philistine plain;

on

I 29, 9.

miron b$ TVl] The

verb

TV shews

that the iYTiVD referred to

v.

cannot be identified with the n*TlD of Zion,

for that lay

on an

elevation, and the phrase used in connexion with it is always rby. This miB is no doubt the one in the wilderness of Judah, which

David held

(I 22, 4),

probably, in fact (see on I 22,

14,

i)

the

hold

of

Adullam
5,

(cf.
i

II

23,

comparing

13).

The
v. 6,
it

natural position of
s

17-6,
at

is

immediately after the account of David

(v. 3)
;

being anointed
originally

king

Hebron

and

here, or before

no doubt

stood (Kennedy, pp. 215, 218).

David would of course both

(v.

down
8.

from Hebron
to the

to

Adullam, and also

to

19)

go up

go from

Adullam
1

Vale of Rephaim, close

Jerusalem on the

SW.
I 9, 15). I 30, 16.

1N2 DTIB^BI] Now the Philistines had were let go, spread abroad, as Jud. 15, It?^]

come
9.

(cf.

on

Cf.

D^t23

D^NDI poy]
cornfields

Probably the broad upland

(Is. 17, 5
f.),

plain,

el-Baqa, rich
hills

in

and olive-gardens which extended from a hill

(Jos. 15, 8) for

with low

on each

side,

at the

west end of the valley of

Hinnom

some

3 miles

SW.

of Jerusalem.

r6yxn] from the rnivn of v. 17. D^ IS ^JO] Perhaps originally (Paton, Encycl. of Rel. and a Ethics, ii. 286 ) Ba al of the breakings forth/ the name of a fountain
19. 20.

bursting forth out of the hill-side, so called from the local

was supposed
trees,

to inhabit

it

(see on the
etc.,
cf.

local

Ba al, who Ba als supposed to inhabit

s.v.,
.

mountains, springs,
art. just

DB.

or

EB.

and
;

esp.

Paton

learned
places
etc.).

referred to;

also above, p. 63 f

many names of

embody this belief, as Baal-Hermon, Baal-Meon, Baal-Tamar, As the name of the place is explained here, however, Ba al

264

The Second Book of Samuel,

is

does not denote the Canaanite or Phoenician god of that name, but
a
title

of

Yahweh

(cf.

on

4, 4)

and

O^a

^JQ, in the sense of

Master

(upon the foe), is understood as commemorating The the victory (comp. DJ mrf Ex. 17, 15; D1^ iTirV Jud. 6, 24).
of breakings forth
explanation,

Place of breaches

(Keil

RV. marg.\

is

not probable

in the sense of not only are the analogies quoted against it, but 7]!2 often used of human beings (e.g. owner, possessor, though
^>yi

"TSK?

2 Ki. i, 8)

is

very rarely applied to inanimate objects

(Is.

41, 15

Lex. 127^).
y\
|*"13]

hath broken down

my enemies
Cf. of
(

before me, like the breaking

of waters

through a dam.

mis

n^ns no^; and a

pa

breaking down make a breach in

a wall,
),

ty.

80, 13

Ex. 19, 22. 24;

2 jna

pa

ch. 6, 8.

21. DiTasy]

LXX

TOVS 0eous avrwr, and Ch. (I 14, 12) BiTflTM,

doubtless the original reading.

VtWNl in DX{}1] See -7?. ii. 1918 an illustration of an Ass. warrior bearing in his hand a captured idol. The Chronicler, in
order to leave no doubt as to what David did with the idols, sub
stitutes
B>Nn

IB-It?

1
!

TH

>nN

vl.

23. n^yn N^] Add DniOpi> LXX, which is required by the sequel. 3DH] The Hif. is anomalous. Either n has arisen by dittography from rvyn, and the Qal 3D (cf. LXX aTroo-T/ac^ov) should be restored
;

or (Bu.) the word

cf.

used in a military sense, Lead round (thy men) the seemingly intrans. D ^ and rvt? (on I 15, 2), and Jud. 4, 6.
is
:
1
"

"JB>D

20, 37,

and perhaps 5, 14. nrrnriN ^x] So 2 Ki. 9, 18.

al.
;

Dt. 23, ii
y\

Cf. JTSD ^K 2 Ki. n, 15 19. nnn ^N i Ki. 8, 6. Zech. 3, 10. nS3l] and come to them off the front of (in our idiom
.:

pno
:

^N

in front

of}

cf.

Nu.

22, 5

bt30 3t?V

Kim.
Ch. 14, 14 D^iOnn.

D\S3n] Read, with

24. TPl]

LXX
be
.
.

and
.

and
I i o,

let it

a permissive

command
hp may
i

Tenses,

121

Obs.

and

5 note.

my blp DN] the sound of a stepping. denned by the gen. mys (cf. Lev. 7, 8): but
(cf.GK.ii7
d
).

be

sufficiently

Ch. 14, 15 has

mysn
In

pnn

TN]

look sharp

is

our colloquial equivalent

(Sm.).

V. 20
Ch. paraphrased, with

VI. 2 and
vigour, by

265
NVn
TN

much

loss of originality

N]

will have gone forth

1

(GK.
to

106).

a JTOn^ ] The 3

is partitive,

make

a smiting in

b (Lex. 88 ).

duo ra/3a<w, Ch. pJD3. This is better than J?33 (on I 13, 2), 25. J?33n] which, being 5 miles NN2?. of Jerusalem, is in the wrong direction altogether ; but Gibeon (el-Jib, 5 miles of Jerusalem: on 2, 12) is not much better: as Sm.

LXX

NNF.

remarks,

Both Geba and Gibeon

are too far

from the Vale of Rephaim

for the
is

To judge from the large maps, also, there pursuit to begin at either one. natural route down from el-Jib to Gezer. were the If, however, Geba
;

no

name of a place, not otherwise mentioned, near Jerusalem, on the road to Qaryet el- Enab (Qiryath-ye arim), the site would suit excellently for this road leads straight down to Gezer. 3 The allusion in the second clause of Is. 28, 2i a (Dip D^JHS
1
"

"1113

T3T psn33 pJ?3 mrV) may be not

1T3]

to this event, but to Jos. 10.

Now

Tell Jezer, 19 miles

el-

WNW.
as
is

of Jerusalem, and 12 miles

recently

known, has been most successfully excavated: see, for some account. of the principal results, the writer s Schweich Lectures on Modern Research
below Qaryet

Enab.

The

site,

now

well

as illustrating the Bible (1909), pp. 46-80, 88-98.

6.

Removal of the Ark

1,

to the

City of David

6,

i.

fjO^] for S)DN

as

^Dh

^. 104,

29 (GK.
"liy,

68 b ):

cf.

on

I 15, 5.

Whether

this verse (with the

scribe,

omission of

which

may
It

have been
11

added by a
is

who

inadvertently supposed CjDM to

v.

come from

fjO )

really the
5,
i

introduction to

ff.,

is

uncertain.
:

may form
5,

the

sequel to
at the

7-24

(in

its

original position
"jiy)

see

on

5, 17),

and perhaps
6-10.

same time (without

the introduction to

See

Kennedy, p. 218.
2-i2 a =i Ch.
inserts 14,
i

13,

15,

a 5-14; between i2 and I2 b the Chronicler b 24; I2 -i4 is expanded and varied in i Ch. 15,

25-27; i5-i9a=i Ch.

15,

28

16,

3 (with variations);

Ch. 16,

4-42

is

another insertion; i9 b 2O a =i Ch. 16, 43 (vv. 2o b 23 being

omitted in Ch.).

The

variations

between the two narratives are here

In particular the earlier narrative remarkably striking makes no mention of the Levites ; the later authority is careful to
instructive.

and

supply the omission.

2.

miiT ^jno] In
this is

Ch. 13, 6 miri^

is

new nny nnp ^N nnbp:

:

and

the sense which

required

Qiryath

Ye arim

is

called

266
"p

The Second Book of Samuel,

Jos. 15, 9. 10,

doubtless, therefore,
stored, the

and jnTinp ib. 60. 18, 14 (and 15 LXX): mirv ^jn to Baal of Judah must here be re
of Judah

description

being added to distinguish this

Ba al from
in

other places of the same

:
l

name

(in

Simeon, Jos. 19,

8,

Dan, ib. 44 cf. mirf Dr6lT 3). mirv byz seems first to have been miswritten milT *?JO; and then, this being interpreted as=
1

citizens

of Judah,

the partitive

*?

was

prefixed, in order to produce

some

sort of

connexion with the preceding clause.

The

place must

have been originally sacred to Ba al. On its site, see on I 6, 21. over which is called a name, (even) the name of Ivy etc. The phrase used betokens ownership: see on 12, 28. Omit
. , ,

IB>N]

one

DB>

with
is

LXX.
glossed:

The
is

distance of ivy from TtfN suggests that

the clause
i

read probably Ivy

i
DB>

K"ipJ

"IPX.

In

Ch. 13, 6
b 3 -4.

D{>

top:

^B>K

misplaced
end-tf-

strangely to the

end of the
!

verse.

The words
v. 3 a

v.

-|{J>K

ny332 (which
repeated from
r6:yn
"pin

are not expressed

:

in

mJUN JTOE IHKB ^ ntjnn LXX) have been accidentally

(p.

hence the questionable njnn

125

note) with

JIN.

Probably DTl^Nn

fnx Dy was preceded

beside the

originally

by

Ntyi

as thus corrected the verse will explain

the cart
:

how Uzzah and

and
a

Ahio
before

led
it.

Uzzah going
(

ark,

his brother
4,

The

VflK pr. n.
l^nx

in>n

cf.

^f

11

^), in

both 3

and

seems
.

more probable than So Sm. Bu. Now.

5-

(We.), or

vnK (LXX, with

D^n

in

4).

D^prtt^J
^1"I2
""Vy

were playing or making merry.

See on I 18,

7.

^3]
(see
z;.

The
8, viz.

true reading of these

words has been pre

served in

Ch. 13,

Dn

Ba*

rH>M.

So

LXX
D
>

here, ev opyavoi?

17/3/Aooyze vois

14) and lv

io-^vt

being a double rendering of

t
">

(*^3) ?33,

and

/cat

cv wSais evidently representing

tJO1.

^yjyaoai]

Ch. nnrcrai o^n^oaij

i>rQ1

LXX
is

here K al

eV

KOI eV avAois =Dv"

D ni SD31.
l|

MT.

doubtless original.

For D^yjyJD Aq. Symm. have appropriately a-fia-Tpa (hence Vg. sislra) from o-etw: see Z^^r. 63i b EB. iii. 3227-8 (illustr.). D^^V recurs
; {j/.

50,

5f

elsewhere (but only in Chr. Ezr. Neh.) always DTI^VE.

"

6.

p3J pj]

"A

fixed threshing-floor
"

does not satisfy the re

"

quirements of the sense

in the

the fixed threshing-floor

is

not expressed

Hebrew

to say

nothing of the questionable use of the epithet

VI. .2-7
pjj
;

267
rightly seen,

hence

JlDJ,

as

LXX

and the Chronicler have

or,

must

conceal a pr.

name
I

(We.),

at

least

attached to p3,
"1DNH

would constitute a
19, 22).

pr.

some designation which, name (cf. Gen. 50, 16. 17

or designation was must,

p3

and

What

this

name

however, remain uncertain.

LXX

here have NwSa/3, Ch. p*3.

n?^]
1BE>]

Versions and

Ch. 13, 9 add rightly IT nx.

The
Ki.

ellipse is

not according to usage.

Of

uncertain meaning.

fi

is

io

let fall, 2

9,

33

(of

Jezebel, ffiBDBl niBDC?). i/r. 141, 6; fig. io remit, hence ntSE^n T\y? the year of the remittance (or rather inter mittence] of claims for debt,

Dt. 15,

i.

in
(

Aram,

to

pull
;

away

or loosen, Lev. 14, 40. 43 Pesh.

and Ps.-Jon.
often in

= Heb. pbn)

to

pull out or
c

draw a sword,
in

in Syr. also
be pulled out

other connexions for cKcnrav;

ii

Ethpa

el

to

Ezr.

6,
(

(=Aram. nwrp);
bt?J).

in

Ethpe

al avelli (PS.),
is

as Dt.

19, 5

Pesh.

= Heb.

Let
:

ii

fall (so Th.)

the rendering best sup

ported by
sitive

Hebrew usage
either,

but

many have

given the word an intran

sense,

after

Pesh.

(JolT ypo*^.

a^-vs&W

i-e.

[see

PS. 4207] se a iugo extraxe runt : in i Ch. 13, 9 \poX ooe o^o), ran away (Maurer, Roed. in Thes.\ or (by conjecture) slipped (Keil,
Klo.
:

RV.

stumbled]

these

renderings

are,

however, philologically
i

questionable.
1

LXX
O.VTTJV)
;

on

TrtpieWacrcv avrr)v (iBElp) 6 fido-xos (in

i

Ch.
it

c^e/cAivcv
:

Targ. both here and

9,

Ch. TilJiD

(?

threw

down

TmjE

as 2 Ki.

33)

1 Vulg. calcitrabant (probably based on

:

Aq. or Symm., whose renderings here have not been preserved)

in
i

Ch. bos quippe lasciviens paullulum indinaverat

i>K>n

earn.

7-

by]

rbw
to

is

a very rare root in

Hebrew

in

Aramaic

it

has
rut?

the sense of
(cf.

act in error or neglect

;

Job
to

19, 4

Targ. = Heb.

the Nif. in 2 Ch. 29, 11)

12, 16

in

Af el,
Ki.

cause to act in error, mislead

Job

*bt?D=Heb. nJK p

(cf. 2

4,

28 Heb. do not mislead me):

6, 9.

the subst. vt?

in the Targ. 24. 25
al.

means

error, neglect Ezr. 4, 22.

Dan.

3,

29. 6, 5

= H51prD

O r rujlp Gen. 43, 12; Lev.

is

4, 2.

5, 18.

Nu.

15,

7B71 here

commonly

(since Targ.

"bn^NT

by) explained

from

this root

because of the error :

but (i) rb&

is

scarcely a pure

best

The Clementine text adds MSS. of the Vulgate.

et declinaverunt earn

but this

is

not found in the

268
Hebrew word
:

The Second Book of Samuel,

where
its
it

occurs,

it is

either dialectical (2 Ki. 4) or late

appearance in early Hebrew is unexpected; (2) 1 the unusual apocopated form (b& for Ewald excites suspicion
(2 Ch.); so that
.

^E>)

explained 7&rr?y

in the sense of the Syriac [*^ii

;

suddenly (e.g.

Nu.

6, 9.

8,

19 Pesh.)

but this

is

open

in

even a greater degree

to the

same objection as
on
I

the explanation error ;

and though by

is

used in Hebrew
p"i

in the expression of certain adverbial ideas (as ipt? ?$,

by

23,
is

23),

the

word

associated with

it

is

expressed
"it?N

generally,

and

not provided with the article.

Ch. has

by

jnxn by IT nbw
here used
to
is
it

and when the strangeness of the Hebrew expression considered, it will hardly be deemed too venturesome
;

regard

as a mutilated fragment of the words cited from Ch.,

still

which were either

or (as the sense
is

read here in their integrity by the Chronicler, sufficiently plain without them) were introduced

here as a gloss from the parallel text of Ch., and afterwards became
corrupted.
fliN

vis^

Dy] Dy as Jud. 19, netc. LXX add CVWTTIOV TOV which in i Ch. 13, 10 (Heb. and LXX) stands in
DJ?. 1 6.

place of DYlbttn fnx

8.

Perhaps that was the original reading.

N-ip -i]

As

2,

LXX

/ecu

iK\riBrj,

reading

"?.?!

(or para

phrasing).
10.
1 8,

TDr6]

Cf. TiD of turning aside into a

house in Jud.

4, 18.

3.

19, ii. 12. 15.

by]

Read b,
l

as

Ch. 13, 13
it

cf.

on

I 13, 13.

JTa ino
22, 23

l]

and turned

aside

to

the house, etc.

Exactly

so,

Nu.

"pin

antonb piwrrnK nybn

TV
i

D-IK -ny]

The

analogy of i.Tnny, nnajj,

N^ny, bs nay

(cf.

^5.

iii. 3284), and of the numerous Phoenician, Aramaic, and Arabic 2 names compounded with 12y and ^& and the name of a deity create
,

LXX (Cod.

Jerome
2

snper temeritate.

B) omits the word Cod. But rashness

:

A and Luc. have

is

ITTI ry npoirfreia, whence not the idea expressed by the root.

Cf. the Phoen.

I.

rnfWny, mp^tmy, IDPimy,

p.

hOT3JJ
:

(see further
;

instances in CIS.

For Aram, Wellh., Reste Arab. Heidentums* pp. 2-4. The pr. n. DnN13y occurs at Carthage for (CIS. I. 295. 4) ; but without any further clues to its meaning than we possess

NSI.

373).

Cooke, Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigraphik, 332-5 names, see Lidzb. and Cooke, as cited for Arabic names,
365
;

VI. j-ij
a somewhat strong present

269
at in

known
is

presumption that, though nothing more is definitely about a god bearing this name, DIN
of a deity
l
:

Obed-edom, it will also be remem was not an Israelite, but a Philistine. It is true, there are bered, some names of this form, in which 12]}, +e is compounded into DIN
"I2JJ

the

name

the

name

of a king 2 (as

nmmay
men

servant of Aretas/ Cooke,

likely

82. 5, cf. p. 224):

for a

ms

does not, however, seem to be a

is

1VSL name

king; and

servant of

not a likely explanation of the

name.
the

In a few cases the second element in such of a tribe

3
;

names

is

perhaps
is

name

so there remains the possibility that this

the case with

ii. JTO]

D1X

"13JJ.

iron

"V3D

(see

on
p.

I 12, 5);

and so

II 13, 20;

but in

each case unnecessarily: see

13.

37

n. 2.

As both We. and

was

Keil rightly observe, the

Hebrew

states

only

that a sacrifice
six steps
:

offered,

when

those bearing the ark had advanced

as soon, namely, as it appeared that it could be moved from the resting-place with impunity, the sacrifice was offered, partly as a thanksgiving that God s anger had been appeased, and partly

as an inauguration of the ceremony that

to express that a sacrifice

was

to follow.

In order

was

offered at every six steps, the

or)

Hebrew

would have read mtt

21, 9:
14.

(nyx
v.

nj?^ DN

.Till

(Gen. 31, 8; Nu.

Tenses,

136

Obs.\
16
:

here and 13"I3] Only 12 TBK] See on I 2, 18.

15.

was

circling about.

D^yD] were bringing up: note the

Cf.

ptcp.

isi^ hpni nynro]

of victory)
:

Amos

2, 2

nan? hpn nynna (of the shout

\l/.

also Jos. 6, 5 for a similar combination.

itself
:

47, 6 (though

the Psalm

belongs to a

much

later date)

appears to be based

on

nan? ^pn mrf nynm DTI^N rhy. The nait? was not a metal trumpet/ but a horn: see the writer s Joel and Amos (in the
this verse

Cambr. Bible\ pp. 144-6.

the

Heb.

D1X

13}?.

The

title
it.

DIN

"]O,

applied to a king (CIS.

I.

p. 365), does

not throw any light upon

1

Comp. W. R. Smith,
Noldeke, Wellh. /.
in
c.
;

2 3

Euting
cf.

Rel. Sent? 42 f. EB. iii. 3462 n. Nabat. Inschriften (1885), p. 32 f.; Wellh.
;

I.e. p. 4.

Cooke,

p. 224.

270
1

The Second Book of Samuel,

riYll]
i

6.

Ch. 15, 29, correctly, VPl.

"ty

Cf.

on

I i, 12.

vy] Prefix
"O"GO1

with

LXX
(lit.

(!<os),

and

Ch. 15, 29.

TTBO] leaping
:

uncommon words
be active or agile,

TTQ

shewing agility) and circling about. Both Gen. 49, 24t in Qal ; as Arabic shews, to

Ch. 15, 30 substitutes more ordinary words, Tpno

114,
4.

pHEW
cf.

skipping

(i/r.

Job

21,

n)

and playing
;

(v. 5).

18. r6iyn] Collectively

(comp. D^Qn

Ez. 33, 21

23nn

often, etc.):

the plural,
19.

v.

17.

... B*KD^]

In the
al.)
is

||

Ch.

16,

the

more ordinary
JD^
is,

CNE
fully

nt?X iyi (I 22, 19

justified,

substituted.

The idiom
the
;

however,
its

not only by Ex.

n,

7.

Ch. 15, 13, but also by

use

in

other

analogous expressions,

for

purpose
s. v.

of denoting the
jo
;

terminus a quo in space or time

(7, 6)

see Thes.

Lex. 583 b

Elsewhere only in P, Ex.

]
II

29, 2 etc.

(13 times).
1
,

The meaning
1 6, 3, is

of

this

word, which occurs besides only in the

Ch.

quite

unknown.

As Lagarde

points out
itself

so-called

tradition

is

here remarkably at variance with

2
,

(a)

LXX

in

Ch. (aprov Iva) aproKOTTixov (Lucian KoXXvpirrjv 3 ) ; eo-^aptV^v * (b) Aq. Symm. d/tupiV^v (c) Vulg. Sam. assaturam bubulae carnis Ch. partem assae carnis bubulae ; (d) Pesh. Sam. J.auaj (frus unam,
in
;

Sam.

tum carnis
Ch. (late)

5
},

Ch. )*. J^Juao (portio una);

(e)

Targ. Sam.

*in

J^D
6

tnm
l

Nn^N

|D

in

>S>

(=

a sixth part of a bullock)

-j

Walid, col. 742 (Rouen gloss) *l A (/") Rashi (in agreement with Targ. Ch.) nD2 (g)
"1^20

Abu

U (segmentum carnis] ilBW inx (-^) Kimchi

; ;

*THX p?n, but mentioning also as a possible explanation the view of the Rabbis (Pesahim 36 b ), also found in Targ. Ch. and Rashi,
that
It is
it

is

compound word (roinid

n?jp) signifying

1D3 n^BO 1HN.

evident that these renderings are either conjectures based

i.

upon

1 2

Mittheilungen,
"IDC

S probably
al., etc.

(1884), read as

p. 214.
13E>K
:

cf.

Sptnavov for

p"!T

I 13, 21

TOKOS for ^ri

vj;.

72, 14
3

(comp.

p. 78

.).
"12^

Or

Aa-yai oi T-rjjavov.

But the renderings of

aTro rrjjavov

K and
l

HtJ

^JJ

N have apparently

been transposed: for Aa-ycwoi/

4

= H{J

l|

k^N in Samuel.

Vox

aliunde incognita, cuius loco d/uoptV^j

est
<re/u

(quod Hesychio
ftevov ) fortasse
5
6

5aA.jy

f<pOri

aw /A.m,
s.v.).

= n5i ^ N i Ch. LXX) ex afaopa ( Athenaeo autem fjte\irca^a ircirffit

=1103 Ez.

reponendum (Dr. Field). 24, 4 (Payne Smith, Thes.

Cf. the marg. of the Reuchl. Cod. (Lagarde, p. xix, 3)

KIITD

MVP

|0 1H.

VI. 1 6-20
the context, or depend

271

were

in

upon an absurd etymology, as though some way compounded of tJ B and HS and meant the
!

sixth

part of a bullock ings of Seb.

Upon Kimchi
;

explanation are based the render

Miinster (1534-5),

frustum

carnis

Geneva Bible (1560),

piece (of flesh)
"ISt?

a piece of flesh;

and of RV.

unum; AV.

of

the

good
ques
to

depends evidently on a combination of

IDtJ K with
is

but the application of the root, in such a connexion,

;

tionable

granting that
a

1Dt^X= something
is

fair/

its

employment

denote in particular
tion of
its

piece of flesh Lud. de Dieu, perceiving the impossibility of the Rabbinical etymology, endeavoured to reach the same general sense

fair

not a probable specializa

meaning.

by a derivation from the Ethiopic safara, to measure, ff0ft(Mr: measure (Matth. 7, 2 al.), supposing to have thus masfart, denoted dimensam sacrificii partem unam, quantum nempe unius
rt<J.<J;

*1BE>N

sextae partis, in quas sacrificium aequaliter dividi solebat, mensura

continebat.
Tfies.) adopt the same derivation, measure/ as was done by De Dieu, to a particular fraction of the sacrifice. But irrespectively of the fact out by Lagarde that Eth. Heb. ISO (not the pointed

Ges. and Roed. (in

though not limiting the

ft&<S:

1BB>),

sense obtained
distinctly

between two words denoting two kinds of food, the narrator would have placed a word
is

insufficient

and lame

denoting simply
of raisins

a measure
the

a cake of bread, a measure,

and a cake

amount, and the nature, of the substance Under such circumstances, it is measured being left undefined. wisest to acknowledge that we do not know what the word means,
both

and cannot propose for it a plausible etymology 2 Hos. 3, i. Cant. 2, 5f. Either raisin-cakes ntWtf]
.

II,

(Thes.), or

(Kennedy, EB.
20. 1?23

ii.

1569) cakes of dough kneaded with grapes,

the king hath got
.
. . .

him honour to-day (Not which would be the ptcp. 1223. Glorious / of EVV. destroys the point of David s reply at the end of v. 23, where For the medial sense of the same verb is rendered had in honour!}
no]
. !

How
was

How honourable

1 2

Cf. in the

Michlol Yophi (Dan. 4, 24) -J^V

IBB"

"Q^E

HD pbn
11

i?"~l

IX.

Ewald

roast

meat (Hist.
>,

iii.

127),

from
Sp{J>

"TBB^Sp^,
is

is

very improbable,

both on account of the {? =

and because

not to roast, but to burn up.

272
3,

to get oneself
al.

honour (GK.

5i

e
),

cf.

Ex.

14, 4.

17. 18. Ez.

28, 22

nines] HE?

is

the one

noun

in Heb., in

which the

plur. is

enlarged

n by the addition of (ntaOK). In the cognate languages we have

Jl

ia^

J*aft

Nnna2

(
>

^\

fathers.

JL oi^o/, *

in^BX, vlA+H mothers.

2

jioW*
Jo) vi..

nriro* (but Arab. il]^l) bondmaids.

husbands mothers.
(in fig. sense, supports],

Jl

owf hands

J?K foam (from PP f JJ aus ..... Elephantine (1911), i, n. Papyrus

fnpy (and fpy)

p. 9),
3, 10.
3

Sachau, Aram.

Hand. nnNiTSDy (from

(and
eLlJ-^-1)

sing.

Nna^D

= )fcla)

lips

years.
iJLc).
cf.
if/.

lc (and il>i^l*), sllc thorn-trees (from Phoen. nn^n (A^/. 9, 3; from i?n 20, A, 5,

141, 3) doors.

analogy of the construction with the finite verb, this would be the inf. abs., which is written four times with n probably, if

mi^] Upon

the forms are correct, for the sake of the assonance (Kon. i. 536 ; n 75 ; cf. Maurer, ap. Th. here) Hin^ Is. 22, 13: nitf") 42, 20
(Kt.

GK.
Qr6
form

rmo); ni^K Hos.

inf. abs.

10,

4; rrny Hab.

3,

13 (?rinj?)

for the
etc.

of the

with

3, cf.

tflp? (i, 6),

^Nf 3

(I 20, 6),

S)33,

Ewald,
inf. c.

however,

240, supposes the

inf. abs. to

have passed into the

by a species of attraction, under the influence of the preceding 3 ; and this is not, perhaps, impossible. No other case of the inf. c.
being strengthened by the inf. abs. seems to occur so we are not in a position to say whether nbM rivSHS or Hv33 nibsns is more in
:

accordance with usage.

of mban.

GK.

75y treats n^33 as a faulty repetition

D pin] So Jud.
s, see
1
a

9, 4.

ii, 3.

(LXX

rwv

ili

6/Jxof/xVwv=Q"!t?

7.)

For

on

2, 18.

Cf. Noldeke,

SBAk.

1882, p. 1178

f.

Comp.
Cf.

<rl2N

my fathers,

Cooke, NSI. 63, 16 (from

Zenjirli).

Noldeke, Mandaische Gramm., pp. 171, 172.

VI. 20-22
21.

273

JUT
H).

>JS]

LXX
lp~iN
is
<

after

mn

expresses

mm
MT.
;

Tjra IJTIN

(Luc.

mrp

The words
etc.).

will

have fallen out of

for the sense

(Th. We.

needed
"J112

genuine

but neither

nor

Tl

by o/toioreAevTOK and the whole may be seems required and the

;

variation
that

between them rather suggests (Klo. Bu. Kit.

later addition,

ap.
:

Kautzsch)
the scribe

each was a

made

in different

MSS.
s

of the archetype of

MT. and

the other versions passed from

to

and omitted both the genuine lp"!N and the addition * ( n) "jn2. TJJ] Some 30 MSS. and LXX (eis) TH^, which is better;
I 25, 30.

cf.

22.

(a)
I

The verse is difficult. It is best Ew. We. Now.: And if (Jer. 20, 9

to begin
:

it

with 2i b
cf.

TlpnK>1.

Tenses,

148;

on

19, 3)

Yahweh, 22 I count myself still too small for this before Him), and am abased in mine own eyes ; and with (to play the bondmaids (slave-girls) whom thou hast spoken of, with them
play before

David says that he is unworthy to play and dance before Yahweh, and the opinion which the slavegirls entertain of him is of no consequence, (b) Th. Sm. Bu. Dh.,
should
I

seek

(?)

to get

me honour ?

and

substantially

EVV.

And
in

I will

play before Yahweh, 22 and

this

will

be yet more looked

to-day),

down upon than

(more than

have been

and

will
"

be abased

more

pointedly,

in thine eyes

")

mine eyes (LXX, Th. Sm. Bu. Dh., but with the bondmaids of whom
;

thou hast spoken, with them

shall

be had

in

honour.

Michal

taunt that he had degraded himself in the eyes of the bondmaids,

he might be still more despised by her, says, is unfounded and they would nevertheless, he feels sure, continue to honour him. Both renderings require "Q|N for iTU2K: the (b) is preferable.

David

cohortative
it

is

out of place

in (a),

though retained by Ew. We. Now.,

of Now.) with the question, in (b) it is inconsistent with the fact that not a wish, but a conviction, is what
is

inconsistent (in

spite

the context requires.

For T^p3,

cf.

^p

in

Qal

to be looked

down

upon (Gen. 16, 4. 5 ; I 2, 30, opp. 12?N, to contemn (Is. 23, 9 jnxn naM-bs

cf.

here m23K), and in Hif.

b%&

bgn|>).

is

abased,

brought

low;

cf.

Job on

5,

n, and

the verb in Ez. 21, 31(36).

cy wi//i=
~IB>X

before, in the sight of, almost

,

= in
.
.

the

judgement of

(I 2, 26).

cf.

I 24, 5.

Dy

Dy, the resumption for the sake of

1365

274

The Second Book of Samuel,

DX
Dt. 13,
i. Is. 8,

emphasis, exactly as with

b 13; JD Lev. 25, 44

3 Ez.
N.B.

1 8,

24

al.

(Tenses,

123 0fo.).
do not mean morally
125
.).

EVV. by

vile in this verse

detestable, but

simply

common, looked down upon: see on

15, 9 (p.

In the same

way

base does
:

not mean ignoble in character, but merely low in position, as often in Old English so e.g. in Ez. 17, 14. 29, 14. Mai. 2, 9. 2 Cor. 10, i AV. (RV. lowly}. See
further

BASE and VILE

fiTl

in

DB.

23. rh
in
z>.

N^.

i^nh]
:

rh resumes

^O^l,
and
is

as DOJ? resumes Dy

22, but in an wwemphatic position, and merely for the purpose

of lightening the sentence

l^i]

see

on

I 9,

20

cf.

Lev. 25, 46^.

The Oriental text has Western MSS. and edd., and is

If in either of these

"yj,

which

also

found

in

some
3Ot.
1

the general reading in Gen.

is correct,

n,

passages

it

the primitive form with

(U^

O72V.C

;)

will

have not entirely fallen out of use in Hebrew.

7.

Nathan

prophecy

to

David.

David

thanksgiving

and prayer.
Ch. 7
7,
i.

Ch.

17.

VG^S ^313 3^3D

i

12, 10. 25, 19. Jos. 23,

I^TTOn] A Deuteronomic expression: Dt. (in a section of Joshua belonging to the

Deuteronomic editor):
2. 3.

cf.

TGDQ
n^yn

? iTJn Jos. 21, 42.

6,

i i

Ki.

5, 18.

nyTn]
133^3

collectively, as
-iBtt
{53]

18

in
;

Ch. 17,

nij?n>

(We.).
2,

I 9, 19.

14, 7

(MT.

see note):

cf.

also

35

(>33^3

"IB>N3),

and

2 Ki. 10, 30.

.

5.

... nnxn] shouldest thou

Pesh. here.
mn^>]

Chron., explicitly,

nnN N?
DVH

so

LXX,
6. w.

So, with infin., Jud. 19, 30.

9, 7. Jer.
7,

Is. 7,

17!.
2,

"I^K

}O^

n.

Dt. 4, 32.

25. 32, 31.

Hag.

i8f.

Comp. on

19,

b 25; and see Z^AT. 583 9 b.

pcj>e3i

^nxn i^rmo nviNi]

in

Ch. 17, 5 ptraoi bns ^N

cv aK-rjvfj KOL ev

bnD

HMNI.
nVlXl

But

LXX
<I

Ch. has only

/<ai

^r;v

KaXv^art.

l^nno expresses forcibly D3C ] Read, with 7.

ing that, had 03B
1|

the idea of continuance.

i

Ch. 17,

6,

*$&&.

There

is

no

indication

of any tribe having been commissioned to govern Israel.

>

Keil, object

stood originally in this passage, the substitution

inexplicable, does

of

^D2B>

would be

not sufficiently allow for the

VI. 22
accidental confusion of letters,

VII. 12

275

a confusion against which even the

I

best-preserved text
is

is

not invariably proof:

"OS?

14,

18 Keil himself

not unwilling to accept

8.

instead of

MT.

^31.
"ON.

nun] See on

15, 25.

Notice the separate pron.

~>DKD

The
is

very rare

(instead of nriKID,

cf.

Ch. 17,

remarkably

confirmed, just for the present passage,

by

^. 78, 71 in^ra ^osyai b TlC The

ioy apjpa

mjnb wan

rr6y

inso

(We.).

y l]

prophet here turns to the future.

absent rightly in

^Via after

DB>

is

LXX, and

Ch.
it

17,

8; for

it

weakens the force of the following words, out of which

have arisen
10.

might

easily

(We.).
its

vnnn]=z>z

place: see on

I 14,

9; and

cf. Is.

25, 10. 46, 7;

Zech. 12, 6 (Klo.).

Be moved (RV.) suggests a wrong sense, which tJT] A? disquieted. has misled the author of the note in the RV. with marginal references
to refer to 2 Ki. 21,

8 (where the verb

in the citation

is

T3n).
89, 23

nSy

>J3]

3,
1

34,

and

(w
As

N^>

n^iy pi).

11. JD^l]

is

not expressed in
its

LXX;
:

both the sentence and the

sense are improved by

omission

shall

no more
etc.

afflict it

as afore

time from the day

when

appointed judges/

the text stands,

this is

the reference in io b will be to the sufferings of

Egypt; but

a thought alien to the context, in which rather the blessings secured

government of David are contrasted with the attacks to was exposed during the period of the Judges. fanrblD Tirwm] Ew. We. etc. Wtri>a b, and I will give it rest from all its enemies, in better agreement with the context.

by

the settled
Israel

which

1$>

1 1

Here Nathan comes

to the

main subject of

his

the promise relating not to David himself, but to his posterity, declaration that
it

prophecy and the

is

not David

who
(i.e.

will build a

house for Yahweh, but

Yahweh who
mn>
"p

will build

a house
pf.

a family)

Tam]
i

The

with simple
"p

waw

for David. is not what would be

would be
(Kit.)

expected,

Ch. 17, 10 has

*l?S1;

a slighter change

12.

70*

iN

-a]

Prefix nMI, reading either

:

(LXX)

or (i Ch. 17,

u) ,Tm
16,

niiT

n^y.
15, 4 f.

n. Gen.

276

The Second Book of Samuel,

v.

by Solomon, the terms are even in this verse Nin points back not to *]33 but to general and the reference is to the line of David s descendants, of which

1315. Though

13 was

fulfilled

"1JPT

it

is

said that

if,

in the
it

commits
but
it

iniquity
s

will

person of any of its individual members, it be punished, as men in general are punished,
it

Yahweh

favour will not be withdrawn from

Saul.

permanently, as

was withdrawn from

conferred upon
it.

Hence
i

v.

16 the promise of perpetuity

i/^.

is

Comp.
s

where the terms of Nathan

David
14.
s

Ki. 2, 4. 89, 31-38. 132, 12, prophecy are expressly interpreted of

sons
:i

l
.

D^JN DnEO]
sin,

i.e.

with punishments such as

will

all

men

incur

when

they

and from which the seed of David

if/.

not be exempted.

Comp.

the poetical paraphrase,

11

89, 31-34.

15. IID

vh]

LXX
:

and
^NB>

Ch. 17, 13, more pointedly:

TDK

N$>.

won IPK nyo Tnon -PN3] LXX here Trvon -itwo The repetition won vsbn won ntrsD Ch. ^sb rpn
pasta
IB>NO

-itpxa.

of TrVDri

is

not an elegancy, and the non-mention of Saul

certainly to

name

would seem
Bu.

be original

on these grounds Berth. We.

b 29; and ^. 89, 37

etc. prefer

the reading of Chronicles.

better,
to,

16. 19.

TOSb]
7NJ
zf/

LXX,

*JK;
as

cf.

vv. 26.
12.

reference
q/Jzr,

13,

pirnc^]

_/r07

i.e.

long before the history of

It

"]*ny

JV2 was

in

completed: comp. Thine eyes to honour

in

2 Ki. 19,

me

25 (=Is. 37, 26). Thy regard extends also to

:

was not enough

my

house,

and even
D*ixn

view of the distant future.

pb
is

as v. 6.
is

mm

nxn] As the
:

text stands, the best explanation

that to

of Hengstenberg and Keil

evince such regard for
1

and
is in

this

the law for men,

i.e.

me

accordance with the law prescribed

is in any case parenthetic, even if it be not, as We. supposes (Comp. des Elsewhere in the promise 257), a subsequent insertion in the prophecy. house has the sense of family (vv. n. 16: and on w. 18. 19. 25. 26. 27. 29),

F. 13

Hex?

and the point of the whole prophecy

is

not that Solomon rather than David

is

to

be the builder of the house for Yahweh, but (as stated above) that it is not David who is to build a house for Yahweh, but Yahweh who will build a house for David. V. 14 ff. describe how David s descendants will be dealt with in such a manner as to give effect to this promise and the reference to the material
;

temple

in v.

13 interferes with the just sequence of the thought.

VII. I}~2} by God

affection.

277
;

to regulate

men
is

dealings with one another (not as Kp.)

it

displayed by God, therefore,

(

This

argues unwonted condescension and the manner mos, consuetudo of men, Ges.
it

Th., gives to

min

a sense which

never has, and which would rather

s

be expressed by DSJK O.)

But Hengst.
is

explanation

is

artificial

and

there

is

no doubt
is

that the text

incorrect.

Ch. has lina ^JVXTl

HPyon DINn, which

cannot
be
s,

more obscure than

the text here,

and indeed

intelligibly construed.
iii.

We., following
D"jxn

Ewald
hast

Hist.

180 (E. T. 132), would read

generations of

suggestion of niin 3NTril and

a glimpse into

let

me

see the

men/
But
if

i.e.

given

me

the fortunes of

my

descendants.

descendants had been meant,

would not the idea have been expressed distinctly?

No

satisfactory

emendation of the passage has been proposed. 21. *p?31 "pin TQJD] The combination of two such disparate ideas is very un-Hebraic. LXX here, and i Ch. 17, 19 have l^y
This is certainly an improvement. We. would also drop remarking that the fact that in LXX (8ia TOV 8ov\6v aov 7re7rot7/Kas [_Kal Kara Tt]v KOfBtov (Tov CTroi ^cras ] KT\.) TTfTroirjKas has no
for

*]in.

"p/31,

obj.,

is

an indication

that the bracketed

words are a

later addition,

so that the original

retaining
"J3731,

LXX
"j^X

did not read fhs\.

i

Nestle (Marg. p. 16),

1

points out that in

Ch. 17,

jy.

20 here) there
"li^Dp

are found between

and HXl the words TnirriN

:

(which,
;

as thus read, cannot be construed

RV.

is

a resort of desperation)
utilizes

and, supposing them

to

beginning

for v. 21, viz.

rw -p^i
T12J?:

be misplaced in Ch.,

them as a

being a corruption of

mm
71.
is

RTFt -pny-nx na^, -pin -nam so Sm. Bu. This reads excellently;
text
:

and may well have been the original

n^ina]
(i

The word does

\j/.

not occur besides except in late

145).

we can hardly say more. Hebrew

of the expression 23) obscure; and the verse

Ch. 29, Esther,

The meaning
v.

done
is

all this greatness

here (unlike

greatly

improved by the transposition proposed by Reifmann:

nwn
22.

rfrrarr^a

nx
11

"pay

DN yTir6
it

(ntry absol., as Is. 48,

al.).

D^n^x

mn

This stands in Ch. everywhere for m.T TlX of

v.

our text: here and

in

25
T

has found

its

way

into this as well, as

16,

IT. 17

Dnno (W e.).
p.

23. Geiger (Urschri/t,

288) and We., partly following

LXX

278
and
i

The Second Book of Samuel,

Ch. 17, 21, suppose the original text to have been:
rms!>
(vn!>K

"JEJD

b
1

DIB^I syb ib

or)

D nbx ^bn

*IB>N

psa

ins ^

vri^i

u toy yso Bh^ rotnui r6na nnb rwybi DB.

"pn

On

the one

hand, the reference being to heathen gods, the sing,

to the pi.
tt?fl;

supposing that
a nation, and
in

was changed on the other hand, a difficulty was found even in another god had chosen and done great things for

all

was

referred

Ch. while Sam. has preserved

back again to the true God, hence 17, hence also 03^ and
1B>N
("]!>)

in Sam.,

on

l!?

nnisi?

JTHQ -py with the addition nnXDO [based just above] in both, and finally, as not one nation merely
D^lJ for *)),

but several were driven out before Israel,

is

which, however,

not certain in the case of Sam. [on account of the surf, in vrptf] Bu. Sm. Now. agree. It will be observed that while the (Geig.).

question
it

itself

implies a reference to false gods, the terms in which

is

put allude covertly to what has been done by the true

to

God

hence the endeavour

accommodate them
"pn

to

it,

if is

possible, explicitly.

As regards the changes in detail, 2 on! and BHj! by the h following

:

for

"DPn

strongly supported
the former,

are both imperative

is

because a word addressed to Israel

(as Chr.) in order to restore
to
"

here out of place, the latter

right [before in

JSO to

its

AV. RV.

gives

JDn

the sense of 3E& or ^ry^!],

rnN"nJ1

r6vufl

is

a combination

as indifferent in style as

m^rom
21:

"NBv

in I 18, 6 (in

support of the

restored text see

Dt.

10,
in

also
is

\f/.

71,

19.

106, 21), and the

enallage of
prose.

numbers

PPPMI D^J
other

alien to the practice of

in
DB>

Hebrew
the

As regards

the

expressions

the

verse,

with

1^ DIB ! opening question, comp. Dt. 4, 7. 34; with with Is. 63, i2 b i4 b ; Neh. 9, 10; Dan. 9, 15 (all
.

Jer. 32, 20;

for
D1B>

ne>y:

cf.

ch. 14, 7);

and with

"JSO

cnj Ex. 34,

n.

Jos. 24, 18.

\j/.

78, 55.

Or DTl^NI DM3,

after

LXX

tOvrj

KOI

o-K^v^ara

(i.e.

DTlbx, misread

LXX
In

wSrj-frjfffv

avToi/

= i3p n
is

has nothing to recommend

it,

and does not

not merely

harmonize with the following

3
"OSD

DnS?.
never lost
:

the sense of JE

Lev. 19, 32 Dlpn

H^B* *3DD

to rise
it,

up in the presence of ("OS/) the hoary head, but to rise up from before out of respect for it Is. 26, 17 "J^DD not in, but through }3 so were we
;

WH

Thy

presence.

VII. 2}
27. 127
cf.

VIII. i

279
took courage (RV. m.):

DK

NG>]

found

his heart, i.e.

Lex. 27 and 227 10, and phrases in

Jer. 30, 21. Est. 7,

5; and

for

NXB
</f.

76, 6.
Is. 37, 16.
:

28.

... Nin nnx]

]

43, 25. ^. 44, 5

is

al.

(Tenses,

200).

vn

11

#r* habitually
in

but a verb

not here needed; and Ehrl.

may
:

be right

reading ninv
the abstract
Dt. 22, 20. 119, 142. 151
i

DON]
"Uin

truthfulness,

subst.

instead

of the
.Tit,

adj.
i

so

(was) riM
i/r.

nN

Ki. 10, 6;
al.

without

Ki. 17,

24; also

19, 10.

(z#.

189. 2;

GK.

141).

29. 7Kin] &? willing.

^Ntn

is

to zw7/ (I 12, 22),

2, 21), to resolve,
i,

with different
undertake (Gen.
5,

nuances, as to be willing, agree (Ex.

18, 27. Dt.
i,

to be determined (Jud. 5),

p.

27. 35. Hos.

n).

Comp.

Moore, Judges,
"|rD"OD]

47

Lex. 384*.
Ges. Thes. 803^;

\G-= through, from, in consequence of:

Cf. Is. 28, 7

Lex. 580*.
8.

pvrp

iy72J.

Summary of David s wars ; and

list
;

of his ministers.

(Close of
Saul.)

the history of David s public doings

comp.

I 14,

47-51 of

Ch.S = i
8,
if

Ch. 18.

i.

nctfn and JIX]

is

The

expression
is,

is

peculiar: but apparently,

the text

correct, the

meaning

the bridle of the mother-city

(so Ges.

DN

in

Ke. Stade), i.e. the authority of the metropolis or capital. Phoenician has the sense of mother-city or capital ; see the coin
1
"13&

figured in Ges.fesat a,

Q:T* DN

i. p. 755 (=Monum. Phoen., Tab. 34 N p. 262) Cooke, NSI. pp. 350, 352 B 15; Lidzbarski, Nord;

sem. Epigr. p. 219.

has the same meaning in Syriac (PS. 222).

DX

in ch. 20,

19

may

also be

compared: and

it

may be remembered
cities

how

ni32

is

often used
al.).

in the sense of

dependent
15

or villages
T>V

(Nu. 21, 25

Comp.
15,
13.
:

also Jos.
21,

14,

EvaKetyu. (similarly

n),

i.e.

pJJ?n

^rpoVoAts DX (regarded by some

LXX

as the original reading

to

be the

fern,

Moore, fudges, p. 25). H13N appears here of &$, and to be used in the same metaph. sense.
;

3J1D bridle,

metaph. of authority, jurisdiction

cf.

in

Arabic the use

In |JJ332

OS KmN? (Man.

Phoen., Tab. 35), also cited in the

(

first

edition,

the true reading appears to be B^X

349.

which

for

DN: Cooke,

op. cit. pp.

46

n, y

35-

280

The Second Book of Samuel,

1 1

of ll*j a nose-rein, bridle : Schultens, on Job 30,

s.v.

(quoted by Ges.

HCN),

cites

from Hist. Tarn.

[II

228 Manger]
;

14*^

^^^>

holding the bridle of those (countries), with other exx.

see also Lane,

iTJIuai
H3,

Arab. Lex.

p.

1249.

Ch. 18,

for

nNn

3HO has

Gath and her daughters (dependent villages), apparently reading, or interpreting, 3nO as n3, and supposing Gath the mother to include
her dependencies.
(?
ifl#"}3

The Versions
TO.

render no help.
l|

LXX
al.)

TTJV
;

a<j><api-

JTD ;

d<topio-ju,eva=D

En?>?

Jos. 14, 4

Aq. TOV
30
:

TOV iiSpaywyiov (from the Syr. sense of

HEN

Sir. 24,

cf.

Theod.

in
i>8payu>yov

ch.

2,

24)

Symm.
13;

TT/V
;

lovo-iav TOV

<f>opov,

whence Vulg.frenum
2.

tributi ;

Targ. NflCN ppn

Pesh. ^ao^fcoc*.
fern. Tini (cf.

P3H3]

On

the

art.,

see

on

I 19,

and on the

TV. 5. 6),

on Ew.
Cf.

I 17, 21.
inf.

33t?n]

The
i

abs.,
;

defining
.

how David

measured

them, as

13, 12

28o a
Ki. 5,

nn3]
present,

GK. ii3 h i. The word

denotes properly a complimentary

sacrificial term,

in different applications.

As a
:

of the parti

cular gift

known

as the

meal-offering

in

a connexion such as the

present, of gifts offered to a prince or other person,

it is

whose good-will
2 Ki.

desired to secure, whether voluntarily (Gen. 32, 14. 43, 15.

8, 8),

or as something expected or exacted (as here), so that

it

nearly

= tribute.
3.

-iTimn]

Some 50 MSS., many

That
"ifjmn

edd.,

LXX
in

(Ao>aaap),

Pesh.,

Vulg., read

^Ty"l*^^.

is

right

appears from a recently

found Aramaic seal with the inscription

1

"iTjmnp,

which 1 and

"i

are

clearly distinguished

Comp.
446)

also the Assyrian equivalent (Schrader,

idri,

KAT?
n.
pr.

p.

201;

cf.

p.

Dad
the

pcnTin Zech.
the

12,

n, and

the

"HiTp.

Hadad was

name of

chief deity

of the

identified by the Assyrians with Ramman, and hence probably the god of storm and thunder (Cooke, NSI. pp. 164, 360). This name, therefore, as pointed, will signify Hadad is help : cf.

Aramaeans,

"1$"!

Yah

is

help,

and
(

"*$V$?.

The
] :

vocalization of

LXX

would suggest

the form

IVI^H

like

^f ^
;

etc.)

Hadad helpeth.

Baethgen, Beitrdge

etc., p.

Epigr. Miscellen,

p.

n).

67 Euting, Berichte der Berl. Akad. 1885, p. 679 See CIS. II. i. No. 124. Cf. PRE? vii. 288-291.

VIII. 2-g
here and
23, 36.
I 14, 47.
i

2 8i
12. 10,
i

v.

[=i
8,

Ch.

18, 3. 5].

Ki.
2

n, 23

(naiv ita -irynn).

6 and 8 (N31X). Ch. 18, 9. 19, 6

[=K31V ^.
3 VP 3
sense.
I|

10, 6].
1

Ch.

3 (Pl3fr non). ^. 60, 2 (from rA. 8, 12)+.

is

CJV

6]

The

phrase

difficult,

and affords no

satisfactory

?y

T 3^n

15

Ez. 38, 12),

one hand against (\m. i, S.\f/. Si, and though 3 T 3H?fl might have a similar sense,
to turn

means

this

would not

suit

with the object 1HJ3.

3*fc?n

And though
with

in itself

might be used meteph.= dominion, IT the idea recover his dominion for
:

certainly could not express

ywn

would suggest not

the idea of regaining, restoring, but simply of bringing back, with

which the metaphorical sense of

best to read with
fig.
i

T>

would not harmonize.

i.e. either to

Hence

it is

Ch. 18, 3

3^i"6,

stabh sh his hand,

;

for his dominion, or,

perhaps

(cf.

I 15,

12

*6 3Vft3
:

f^. 18, 18),

/0

w/

ZAW.
nrtJ3]

monument of victory (Symm. rpojraiov) / 1906, 277 fT. (where numerous examples are
his

so Gottheil,

cited of such

j/f/fw set

up by the Assyrian
(Kt. 1H33)

kings).

The
sc.
K<ZT

subject will be
e^ox^v,
i.e.

Hadad ezer.

(see 10, 16; so e.g.

by the River, Gen. 31, 31.

the Euphrates

\j/.

72, 8
nri33

always in this sense with

agrees with

a capital

in
1 8,

RV.).
3.

The Qre rna

LXX

here and

with
4.
5-

Ch.

33in]
7 iTy?]

collective,

here, unusually, denoting fat chariot-horses.

as 21, 17; and frequently with the same verb in late

books (especially Chronicles). 6. DU^J] See on I 13, 3.

7.

3nrn *Dhp]

On o^,
cf. p.

see

esp.

W.

E. Barnes, Z!^. TZJWM,

x.

42-5 (Oct. 1898),

?K]=^jj (on

188.
i^y

I 13,

13); for
f>N

n\n,

of things worn,
^.

cf.

Ex. 28, 43.

Not
7

that belonged to:

is

not used in the sense of

8t>.

On

the additions here in

i

LXX,
and

see
this

We.
order of consonants
is

8.

nt33l]

Ch.

8,

npDDDI
TT/S

supported by

LXX
i

here e*

Mao-paK.

Cf.

Gen. 22, 24

?9).

*ni3l]
9. io.

Ch., strangely,

p3W.
10 iyn, as also

^yn]

Ch.

8, 9.

LXX
v

(<wou),

the

more

probable form philologically.

The

termination

characterizes

many

Semitic proper names, especially of the tribes bordering on

Canaan

282
(e.g. in
cf.

The Second Book of Samuel,

Nabataean, uya, VU,
the

lnb, D^D,
It is

etc.;

Cooke,

NSL

p.

214):

in

OT. 1kW

Arabian.

the Arabic nominative termina

tion
9.

1 (cf. p. 8).

now (Hama), on
10.

Don] a large and important town in ancient times, and the Orontes, some 120 miles N. of Damascus.
DiV]
i

also

Ch.

r 8,

10 Dinn, supported, at least in part, by

LXX
a
).

here (leSSou/aav).
ia-Q.>l]

Originally,

no doubt, him:

CH"nn.

i.e.

to congratulate

I 25, 14.

Ki.

i,

47 (Lex. i39

in

a man engaged often yn Dionta B^N] a man-of-battles of Toi conflict with Toi: for the construction, comp. Gen. 14, 13 7JJ3

nna;
rVQ;
1350.

Dt.

i,

41 innr6o
b&ne"

ba;

Is.

41, 12

incrta IWK;
29i
a
;

56, 7

ch. 23, i

LXX
K

appears to
42, 13.
i

m-nor D yj; and see Ew. express ntjmnb n n ntorfco

Ch. 28, 3)
is

GK.
but

EX

3;

JV.onta
antagonist.

(Is.

merely a warrior, not an

12. D-iND] 13.

DB>

9 MSS.,
.

LXX,

Pesh. Ch. ChVSO, probably rightly.

DE>

Wl]

Cf.

Gen. n, 4

1^

n2>yJ1,

where Delitzsch

argues that
than

DK*,

from the context, requires a more concrete sense

in

name,

and would render

DK>,

accordance with the supposed

lofty,

primary meaning of

something

conspicuous

monument,

comparing sense. But whatever the primitive meaning of DC*, it is in actual usage so largely and constantly name, even in conjunction with ni?y (see
the references

the present passage (as also Is. 56, 5. 55, 13) for a similar

on

7,

23), that
It
is

it

is

difficult to

think that

it

can have
gat

different

sense here.

safest,

therefore,

to render

him

a name,
It

comparing the similar phrase ?*n ETP! used of Saul, I 14, 48.
be observed that
in the text

will

as

emended
s

(see the following

note)

DtJ>

^yi

is

connected with David

victory (either over

or over Syria), not as in

his

MT.

with his return after the victory,

Edom, when

fame

a
to

monument
r6

would have been already made, and the erection of to commemorate it might have been rather supposed
to.

be referred

N^n D-INVIN
;

umno
\f/.

12^:1]
title

Ch. 18, 12 nan

mix p
at^i.

ntan ton DI-INTIK

(supported also

60

r6o twa nns~nx 71 axv

is

by

LXX,
&OJ
:

Pesh. here)

unquestionably the

true

reading before n^Dil

for this valley

was near Edom

(see 2 Ki. 14, 7),

VIII. 9-/J
and
far

283
Even, however, with

from the scene of the Syrians

is still

defeat.

DIN

for DIN, the text

defective

for v. 14 presupposes a positive

statement of the victory over

of what David did

Edom

in v. 13,

and not merely a notice

rbv

iP33
to

when he returned from smiting it. Keil would read D-INTIK VYOno UBa, supposing the three words Dltf-nN
T>1

added

Now.

have dropped out through the (virtual) homoioteleuton Bu. OIK-JIN nan onx-nx roano utpi; We., with LXX (iv
:

ava.Kap.wTuv

O.VTOV

eVara&v), nTOTl

N^l DINTIS n3n

13^31,

which

does not, however, account so well for the existing text (ini3riD for
nan)
(
;

Sm., deviating least from

his returning,
is

on

in

that

MT., H^D JW3 DIK-m inirm ntfa In any case, as We. he smote, etc.).
Joab
(i^.)

observes, *rn here

more

original than either

this

or Abishai

(Ch.)

for
is

throughout the summary which

chapter contains every

"in

thing

ascribed to David personally, and

DB>

W)

immediately

precedes.

For

rues?, here and Ch.,

s ministers.
i

\\i.

60, 2

has D

JB>.

15-18. List o/ David

15.
1 6.
HB>y

TM]

Cf.

Ki. 5,

i.

24,

and on

I 2,

nb
s

18, 9.

T"3TD]

Probably not the recorder, but the king

remembrancer

(cf.

the verb in Is. 62, 6),

who brought
it.

state-business to the king s

in

notice,
17.
is

and advised him upon

"UTaN

Cf.

RECORDER

DB.
is

or

EB.
Abiathar

^DTix] Read with Pesh. itaTi&rp

s

-|JV3N.

mentioned before David during David s reign and

priest
for
;

accession as priest
at the

he

mentioned also

and though

it

is

beginning of Solomon s reign as no doubt possible, as Keil suggests, that

as sickness, his place might have been taken by his son, it is not likely that in a formal and official list of David s ministers, his name should be superseded by that of
his

some temporary cause, such

son.

It is,

indeed, not impossible that the transposition in the

intentionally:
is

text

was made

see

We.

note,

Ch. 24,
are

3.

6.

31

(where

Ahimelech

named by

the

side

of Zadoq)

probably

dependent upon
corrupted.

this

passage, after the original reading had

scholars accept the correction.

become

Most modern
Ao-a.

nnp]
Souo-a),
I

LXX
mi?

In 20, 25 Kt.

x^, Qre
fyo-ovs),
all
:

NJS7
I

(LXX

fyrow, Sou?,

Ch. 18, 16
is

X&V (LXX

2a/3a).

the form least attested of

KB*? (LXX some such word as

Ki. 4, 3

284
seems
certain
to be the
;

The Second Book of Samuel,

most
is

original.

The

vocalization

must remain un

but shu

best attested.

~IBD] scribe,
1

i.e.,

as

we should

say, secretary ;

so

RV. m.
passage
ch.

8.

20,

Trom] For 1, read as in Ch. and the parallel The body-guard of Ti^am Tnan (who are 23 hy.
this
title,

mentioned,
20,
7.

under
1

only during the reign of David

i is

ch. 15, 18.

23

Qre
I 30,

[see

note],

Ki.
in

foreigners.

TTOn

must have been composed of i, 38. 44) form a gentile noun, and occurs as such in

14 (see note), so that even

with

gentile
that

JVOn to name

cut off
;

ground alone a connexion would be doubtful. Tl^B can only be another

this

on

it

does not, however, occur except in

is

this phrase,

so

what

nationality
it

denoted by

it

must remain uncertain.

The

supposition that

is

contracted from

some support from modern

philological analogy.

nt^B, though it has found scholars, is not in accordance with

Qijna]
priests
"j^Dn

The

Chronicler, unable to understand

how any

could be

T7; but

except sons of Aaron, paraphrases (i Ch. 18, 17) D OK ton the sense of jrD is so uniform in Hebrew, that it is
it

impossible to think that

can have expressed, to those who heard

it,

any idea but that which priest would convey to us.

of the

There
:

is

no

trace

word having connoted any merely secular office Aramaic, and Ethiopic it has the same meaning as

in Phoenician,

in

Arabic the corresponding word means a soothsayer. of I[}3 is uncertain. To say that it is derived from a root meaning
to

Hebrew in The etymology

:

serve or minister

(Kp.) suggests an incorrect idea

1
;

in

Heb. the root

does not occur

the verb
JH3
is

at all
to

means

Arabic kdhin (=fH3) is a soothsayer, and It has been thought possible that oracles 1 give
in
.

derived from a by-form of H3

(cf.

?L"?

beside

7^!D

Aram.

J"in3

beside ^3), and hence

may mean

properly one

who

stands up with an

1 2

The Pi

el

H3

is

a denominative from JH3.

ji"O

of
7
f.

have a meeting-point in the early function The Arab, and Heb. senses of the Hebrew priest to give answers by the D^DHl D HIN, or the 11DN (I 30,
etc.
;

also Jud. 18, 4-6), as well as to pronounce authoritative decisions

(i"l"fin)

on cases submitted to him.

Comp. Kuenen, Hibbert

.

Lectures, 1882, pp. 67, 81-87

2

Wellhausen, Reste Arab. Heidentums, 130-134, 167 in and Encyd. Brit xxii. 3i9 b-32o b .,

i3i-i38, 143)

art.

PRIEST

VIII.
affair,

ijIX
on
Is.

285
61, 10),

manages, administers

it

(Fleischer, ap. Delitzsch

in

or one
i.

who

stands before
iv.

Yahweh
is

serving

Him

(Stade,

Gesch.

471

DB.
1
.

67

b
).

But there

no evidence

that fi3 ever

meant

Whatever be the ultimate etymology of fH3, it was so limited by usage as to denote one who exercised certain sacred
to

stand

offices,

whom we

should term a
i

pries/.
5.

The word
to the

recurs,

in the

same

application, 20, 26.

Ki. 4,

What relation, however, did From 20, 26 (vrb fro flM),

inferred that they stood in

these
i

D^na bear
4,

D oro of
fro),
it

v.

17

Ki.

("J^On

njn

may
It

be

some

special relation to the king.

iii.

seems

not improbable that they were domestic priests (Ew. Hist.

367 [E.T.

268]), appointed specially to perform religious offices for the king.

the king s responsible advisers were In Egypt, we are told (Diod. Sic. i. 2 chosen from among the priests; and Delitzsch supposed that the office here referred to was one to which members of the priesthood had the first claim, but which was sometimes conferred upon others, of good family, but not of priestly
73)>

descent.

But

in

establishing his court,

Egypt the king s advisers were priests is it likely that David, in would have adopted a title denoting a minister by a qualifi
:

cation which he did not possess? It has also been supposed (DB. iv. 73 b ) that the title was adopted in imitation of the Phoenicians, among whom members of the royal
i, the Inscription of Tabnith). family often filled priestly offices (cf. Introd. Hut these members of the royal house, so far as appears, were priests. Neither the Egyptian nor the Phoenician parallel thus makes it probable that the Heb.

fH3 should have been used to denote persons

who were

not really

priests

20

[with the sequel in 1 Ki. 1

life,

court

turn
19,

to

History of events in David s 2]. shewing how Amnon, Absalom, and Adonijah failed in secure the succession: viz. 9 Mephibosheth (see 16, 1-5;

25-31); 1O 12 the war with Ammon (shewing how David became acquainted with Baihsheba, and narrating the birth of
1

To

judge from

its

derivatives, f^3

must have meant

to be established firmly, to

subsist: in Phoen. Arab. Ethiop., in a

these languages

it is

the term in

weaker sense, to exist, be (for which in ordinary use, as fPn, N1H are in Heb. and Aram.).
la.l*or>

In Syr. the adj.

opulence, etc.
(

*oj>

and

subst.

have the sense of prosperous prosperity

,

tvnpayia ) which Fleischer seeks, with questionable success, to connect with the supposed Wolstand ). root-meaning to stand (as though properly wolbestellt,
;

= (vQrjvwv,

KartvOtivoiv Jer. 15, II

tvQrjvia,

fvrjf^epia,

Zeitschr.fiir kirchl. Wissenschaft und kirchl. Leben, 1880, p. 63. Notice in 20, 26 the words and also, which likewise imply that priest, stood on no different footing from the D*3PO of v. 25.
1
J

Ira, as

286

The Second Book of Samuel,

Solomon); 13 circumstances which led
to the

murder of Amnon
revolt
1
.

14

19

rebellion

and

death of Absalom ;

20

of Sheba (an

incident springing out of the revolt of

9,
2.
i.
31

Absalom)

^n] Gen.
ht*B>

29, 15.

Comp. on
the

ch. 23, 19.

JTaijl]

And

house of Saul had a servant,

etc.:

not as

EVV.
I 26, 17. in the

pay] See on
3.

DSNH] except
Cf.

sense of save that only (Lex. 67 a ),

DDK

occurs in prose only here, 2 Ki. 14, 26.

Am.

6, 10.

Dn.

8, 25.

Dv6x non]
4.
"V3B

non

I 20, 14.
:

rP2]
17, 27
far

in the
("\21

house of M.
Kb), Jos. 13,

see p. 37 n.

"im

ib]

26

("13,1^),

on the E. of Jordan,

probably not
7.

from Mahanaim, Ish-bosheth

Cf.
"prrK

s capital.

T3K

i>1KK]

J3 0.

f.,

^KB>

ntja

BD

19, 25.

IlaT/aos

n-arpos trov of

LXX

here has the same value as their vtos viov 2aovA

it

19, 25.

WB *3S ^3K does not occur, though naturally

(We.).
2 Ki. 8, 13.

would be no

impossible combination
8.
.
.

"pay

no]

non 3^3n]
01E3 itys]
Jer. 5, 9

I 24, 15.
"IK

II 16, 91.
:

in a phrase of this sort is idiomatic

Gen. 44, 15

(=5,

29. 9, 8).

^103 alone would read badly.

shalt bring in (the
is

10.

nN3ni]

and thou

produce)
in.

cf.

Hag.

i,

6,

and nN13n, of crops, properly what

r6 731K pi?

brought

mm] Read

prob. with Luc. Bu. Sm. Ehrl.

nnb
:

IT:

TnK n^b mm.

are unsuited to the

nb
will

The words
etc.

mouth of Ziba: and

the ptcp.

not permit the rendering of EVV.,

shall eat,

he

to say

nothing of the

As for M., said the king, awkward and improbable

"in

on the part of David, after Ziba in 1 1 a position for such a remark for has signified his assent. express iDpK and render

LXX

3nSB>

?3N
1

fja-Otev.

With

this reading,

which

is

adopted by Keil, We. Bu. Sm.

The sequel to this group of chapters is i Ki. i 2, which has every appearance must have been added by the Deuteronomic except in the verses 2. 3-4 which of being by the same hand, and which narrates the of the Book of Kings compiler
failure of

David

third son Adonijah to secure the throne, and the confirmation of

s

Solomon

as his father

successor.

IX.

iX.

6
:

287

And M. ate at the Now., the words are a remark of the narrator We. indeed observes king s table, as one of the sons of the king.
that they are
states the

even then out of place, anticipating #.13: however, #.13

fact that

new

Mephibosheth dwelt

at Jerusalem, his eating at

the king
there.

table being merely referred to as the

ground of

his residence

12.

n^D] See

Ch.

8,

34

ff.,

where

his

descendants through

many

generations are enumerated.

Ch. 10
10,
3.
i.

Ch. 19.
*32 T.ta] i.e.

fiy

Nahash
18, 17
.

(v. 2):
. .

see

n,

i.

...

in naaon] Gen.
:

DPI-OND ^:N nD?on

Nu. n,

29

nnN N320n

Tenses,
J"Q"i

135.

4.

nin (12, 26 al.), or vyn] i.e. fioy ^1 (n, i); called by the Greeks (from Ptolemy Philadelphus, 285-2473.0.) Philadelphia, now Amman, with extensive Roman remains of the age of the Antonines,

on the

left

(N.)

bank of

Jordan near Jericho.

p.
1

the Jabbok, 25 miles E. of the fords of the See the description in the Survey of East Pal.,

if.

4.

DiTHD] So

Ch. 19, 4
X
)

but the form

(in the sing.

from
[^""?]>

/"HO,

GK.
"HE.

93

is

very unusual, and the only root otherwise

known

is

Read probably
in pause for
.

E^D;
(GK.
.

and see on
93V),

I 17, 38.

SfPja]
cf.

srn is

srn
.
.

on account of

the Tifha ;

5tm Ex. 25, 10 Jfm The Jmj; and see on I i, 15. 18. half is not half in length, but half in breadth, one entire side, to
.
.

make them look

ridiculous.
Cf. Is. 20, 4

Dnwnt?

ny]

(rd.

^Vtrn)

Bi&n.

^T
r

5- I^T] So always, according to the Massorah, in Nu. Dt. Sam. Ezr. Neh. Chr. and once in Kings (2 Ki. 25, 5; but in the Jer. 52, 8, or 1^ in Jos. Jer. and six times in Kings ( + once nhT). !)
||,
;
*"!?

:i

ny]
1

See on

I i, 22. el

n^"

In Qal of plants growing; in Pi

;

only of hair (Jud. 16, 22.

Ez.
6.

6, 7

and

the

||,

Ch. 19,
I

7t).
i

im
oy.

1PN23]

See on

13, 4.

Ch. 19, 6 substitutes

n^n

JT3]

Jud.

8,

28t;

cf.

mni

&. 8.

Nu.

13, 2 if.

See on

8, 3.

288
ruyo]
v. 8. i

The Second Book of Samuel,

Ch. 19, 6 (nayo DIK).
7
[il

to this

.].

Gen. 22, i4t

naj?p jos. 13, i3t;

2 Ki. 25, 23.
i

najn

Dt. 3, 14. Jos. 12, 5. 13,

n. 13.^.
:

23, 34.

Ch.

4, 19. Jer. 40, 8t.

On nayo nu

?2K, see on 20, 14.

B^N

^N]

These words

are out of construction

they cannot be
&)biO (the
]

rendered legitimately (EVV.)

of

with 1,000 men.

Read B^K
i

concomitance:

p.

29).

The 32,000

of

Ch. 19, 6 have been

&|$>x

here, supposed to shew (We. al.) that the Chr. did not read C*s and they have hence been regarded as coming in by error from the end of the verse; but their omission leads to fresh difficulties and

improbabilities in connexion with 2lt3

KN.

For

2.1D,

see Jud.

n,

3.

and
7.

cf.

Tou/3u>v

Mace.

5, 13.
o/"(!)

On-Girt

3H1.

X3n] EVV. the host The X3V was the army in general,
6.

the mighty

men.

Read

the

DnUJ

a corps of select

warriors (16,
8.
9.
"iytJ>n

20, 7. 23, 8

ff.).

nns] at the opening of the gate

(p.

37

#.).

nivn]

ner6n
1 6,
1

"OS

being treated as a

collective

(GK.

i45 ):

comp. Job
ta~>K"2

6 Kt. iTJO7?n
(Kt.)]

^B
i,

and see on 14,

15.
is,

mro

See on
8,

21.

The combination
^la&Tl
is
it

however,
True,
:

unusual

in prose:
it

Jud.
is

D^HN3

very strange.

as Th. remarks,

more admissible here than

would be

in I 26, 2
~rtl"B

but no doubt

Ch. 19, 10 preserves the original reading

is is
i>K"iB

P3D

^JOB2.
50 MSS.
11.
;

The Qr6

nina

^>3O,

which

is

read also by
:

some
6, i.

but the 3

supported by the text of Ch.

r

see also ch.

pmn]

Cf. I 17, 21.

fljfl&fy/or deliverance (I 14, 45).

ji

12. p?nnJi]

GK.

5 4 k.

mm;

cf.

I 3, 18.
lyD^l
;

14. byo] from attacking: See on I 28, 15.

1

z Ki. 3,

27 l^yD

18, 14

^yo

niB

6.

-irynn] Both here and in ch. 8 there

"ityTin

is

much

variation in

MSS.

between

and

"irjmn.

Here MS.

authority preponderates in

favour of lTy~nn, as in ch. 8

The name must

it preponderated in favour of "fynn. be the same throughout. Both in Inscrip evidently tions (Phoen. and Hebrew) and in MSS. 1 and 1 are often not distin guishable, and only the context enables the reader to know which is

intended.

For
v. 17

the reason stated

on

8, 3, the

correct form

is

irjmn.
n.

ON^D. Taken rightly by LXX, Pesh. Targ. as a pr. Perhaps to be read in Ez. 47, 1 6 after nnao (where LXX add

D^n]

X. 6
1

XL
is

IT

289

8.

D Bna]

Probably a lapsus calami for

of horsemen
i

eK
is

cf.

Ch. 19, 18

Wl

t^N.
11, 1
i.

The number

disproportionately large.
12, 25

Ch.
11,

Ch. 20,

a
(<r^.

u,
is

passed by in Ch.).

sions,
3.

and

QiDN^Dn] i Ch. 20,

i

=D
i
:

oi>Dn,

as

read by

some 40 MSS., Qre, Ver

;

comp.
5

10, 17 beside 16

and

p.

168 footnote.

JDK>~ra]

Ch.

3,

jwm,

no doubt

to

be pronounced yi^ TO,

and probably merely an error

in

for

jnB>~rn.

LXX

has everywhere

the strange corruption B^po-a/Jee.

nyta]

Ch.
lEN^l

3,

btPDJJ,

which (We.) supports

MT.

against

LXX
4.

EA.ta/3.

sc.

-IDIKH (on I 16, 4).

s

Tinn
31

nms]

one of David
KTTi]

famous D Hina (23, 39).

nunpno

circumstantial clause, defining the state of

Bath-sheba at the time of noy saB*!

her uncleanness
consistent \vith
etc.,

0J

J/fo

purified herself

from

(cf. 13, 8).

This

is

the only rendering of the words

grammar.
. .

To
pn
.

express,

and when she was purified

2K>rn

she returned
1

.,

the

Hebrew would have been

. .

BNBnFn,

or (Jud.

8,

3 etc.)

ra& N

nBHp_nn XTj

in

other words, to

express anything subsequent to HS^ 22B *1, a

finite verb,
is

not the ptcp.,

its

would have been employed. 1 Comp. (against Th. We.)

.

The afhnah
Tenses,

thus in

right place

6.

r6a>

3NV ^N
(We.).

n^l]

169 note. Without ICN!?, as

19, 15,

cf.

Nu.

23, 7

before HD^
8.

l^cn nxt^D] Comp. Gen. 43,

34.
"pltt
:

TilO Nl^n] Notice n. TPn ^S NUK JNl]= and

10.
<l

N3 nn

the position of
shall

cf.

Gen. 16,

8.

/enter

into

my

house?

etc.,

the juxtaposition of two incongruous ideas, aided by the tone in which

the

a question.

words are pronounced, betokening surprise, and so suggesting So not unfrequently, as Jer. 25, 29 IpSH npsn DJ1N1. 45, 5. Ez. 20, 31 oinx N^ 49, 12 npsn npj sin rum Jon. 4,

"ONI.

D3^

tmN

^Nl. 35, 25 b
I

b Jud. 14, i6

T3X

!jh.

Zech.

8, 6.

r/j.

15, 20.

Comp. on

n,

12 and ch. 18, 29.

22v

by

GK.

45.

is

explained rightly by Lucian Jf d(pfSpov

avrrjs,

Pesh.

(see Lev. 15, 19. 20. 25

shew why

and Pesh.) Rashi nmJO. The remark is added to conception followed: the time indicated was favourable for it. Cf.
:

LXX

W.

R. Smith, Marriage
1365

and Kinship

in Early Arabia, p. 276, ed.

2,

p. 133.

290
Til
-]Tl]

The Second Book of Samuel,

This form of the oath does not occur elsewhere, and

the tautology implied

makes
it

it

improbable.

LXX
is

for *]Tl 7rois=T??at least

But thus absolutely, as

that
is

seems,

^K

could at most stand

the case in Arabic

when what here

placed before at the

].

beginning of the verse followed as a circumstantial clause with

Either, therefore, read for
3. 25,

Tn, mrv
Til

Tl [followed

by

"]E>D3

Til,

as I 20,

26

al.],
7>n

or omit
"|

as

common
12.

(We.).

For

T^ S3 TJ1, see

an explanatory gloss on the un on I 17, 55.

(not as Th.
:

mnODl]

and on the morrow

is,

see Lev. 7, 16).

specification of time

however, desiderated in
*]r6B>N
"ITO1

v.

13 for

r?

N"ip^i

and

as even in
it is

MT.

the promise

is

not carried out by

David,

better to
(-1

end

v.

12 at Kinn DIU

JOi^l
:

mnl
LXX

will

then

begin #.13
Pesh.
easily

as I 4, 20).

So We. Bu. Now.

also

(Luc.) and

mnD
if

TP1 (Ehrlich) would, however, be better;

lost after
1

TT might

have been

Sinn.

15. 13n]

correct,

Un

give,=set (like fD3)

;

but the case goes

b beyond other usages of an, ian (Lex. 3Q6 )

icrayaye) should be read (Klo. Bu.
1

and perhaps N?n

I 26, 15.

(LXX

al.).

6.

^N
31

*ilKO] Comp.

(in

a friendly sense)
(v.

17. 19.

DJjn
]

}]

_/rtf/

the people some of

its

24.

Ex. 16, 27),

etc.

"O"!;

preceded by

object: comp. Dt. 28, 56. Lev.

in Tenses,
7,
i

19,

9,

and

the

21.

Aramaic examples cited ntiQT ] For ^yrv (Jud.

208. 3 Obs.

al.).

Unlike Ishbosheth and

Mephibosheth, however, the alteration in this case has been

only
22.
in a single passage.

made

aKv

irtar

i^N^a ns]
^N DntrjJ

LXX

continues
i?s

nn^cn niv^a nx
i

Tyn

noi>

^n

nos

2x11

^JDUN ns nan *D :noinn ^yo 121-1 no^j pnn nc noinn ^y nan r6a i^y na^t^n

nnb in I^N nx Dnyi

11
i>y

!
1

11

nc>N

(v.

23)

ai

in detail

:ninn: how what Joab

lOK" !
1

in other

words, the text of

LXX

describes

anticipated vv.
:

21-2 took place.

The

addition

is

a necessary one

for

as the text stands, the terms in

which the messenger speaks

his

in v. 23 a are
etc.,

opening words, Because have been asked).

unexplained (notice especially which presuppose a question to

23. 113J *a] as the text stands,

""a

is

the

""3

recitativum (on I

2,

16);

XL n
with the insertion from

XII. 8
it

291
will

LXX (see on v. 22),

s

be

Because, intro

ducing the answer to David

DiT^y rvnjl]
with
tion,

question.

appears to be correct.
14.

Comp.

e.g.

the use of

rpfl

nnx

12,

Ex. 23, 2:
it

the stress rests

upon the

preposi

the idea of which

is

simply the purpose of DTJ to render

verbal
24.

(We.).

D\sion

IH-VI

(Kt.)]

as

if

from Nnj

(cf.

N^b
rnj:

for

rtrh

Ch.

26,

Bnten Vft, the regular form, from 15); Qre

nin
"mn

GK.
Comp.
277
d

75".

25.

nx

jnH N]
17
;

nin

"Din,

though grammatically a
I 20,

nominative,
(if
30"

is

construed Kara a-vveanv as an accusative.

Jos. 22,

13

be read);

Neh.

9,

32

Ew.

end;

GK.

a 117!; Lex. 8s c.

mai

nfs]

So Jud.

18, 4

Ki. 14, st.

inptni]

strengthen

i.e.

27. naDN^i]

spx
for

as Jos.

encourage (Dt. i, 38 al.) him (Joab). nrvan "j^x ^c^|D, Dt. 22, 2; 2, 1 8 Jud.

19,

5 (Pi.)i.

12,
2.

Bfc-J]

Bh

(as

57.

3); see

GK.

23?, 72?.

"f^ypj

3.

njD)!]

would be expected, and should prob. be read. and kept alive: Ex. i, 17. 18. i Ki. 18, 5.
"PB>y

^1 b-Nn]
4.

The
tJ^Np]

impff. expressing significantly its habit.

TC yn
1

The

punctuation (for
;

E"&O)

is

anomalous.
t6).

Comp.

on

I 6,
5. 6.

and Ew.
See on

293*

GK.

126* (read

tf

nin p]
DinyniN]

I 20, 31.

LXX

eTrTaTrAatrun assDVljaB

in

all

probability the

original

reading.

As Th. remarks, David speaking

impulsively

is

more

have used the proverbial sevenfold (cf. Prov. 6, 31), than to have thought of the law Ex. 21, 37: DTiyTlK will be due
likely to

to a corrector

who

noticed the discrepancy.

Schill

bon tb 1BN
attractively,

i>jn]

(ZAW.

1891,
i?

p.

318),

Ehrlich, Bu.,
that

though

not

necessarily,

for

vh

and spared

which was his own

7

Observe the emphatic ^D3X

2, 9.

compare

likewise in a reproach

Amos
8.

10.
JIN]

TOTS rvn

Possibly

be read (Sm. Bu.), with allusion to Michal not harmonize with the following 1PTQ. u
2

TJIK nn nx (p es h. K nwa n) should $ JV2 DN certainly does

:

292
nxi]

The Second Book of Samuel,

Not elsewhere recorded of David, though
i
it

would
cf.

be
f*>

in
3,

accordance with Oriental custom (16, 22.

7)^tf-iCJ

Ki.

2,

17;

* nfoa OK, perhaps rightly (Sm. Bu.) the meaning of course would be not that they were given to him actually, but that he could choose his wives from them as he
rniiTl
:

IT !
1

nx]

Pesh.

"!

pleased

(3,

2-5).

nDDXl]
is

then would

add (not would have added AV.).

of
ty.

There

a similar mistake in

AV.
is

81, 15. 16.

The

1,

as thus used,

rare:

but see Gen. 13, 9 (Tenses,

cf.

136/3*).

ruro]

i.e.

other similar marks of favour:

HT31

iiTZi

(11,25).

riXT3 (17, 15), said

9. v.
"Ql]

where

details

need not be

specified.
:

io b
11.

Probably Notice the emph. position of

to

be omitted with Luc. and Theod.

cf.

esp.

nmx
:

nx,

iriK>X

nxi,

and
is

inx.

fjn^]
JH
is

The yod
PPfcty Is.

is

not the

yod
(cf.

of the plural, but

H^PiSO

due to the

fact that

properly njn re ay
22, ii
of,

Hos.

2,

16

12. *UJ]

in

front

93^). expressing more strongly than ^D7 the idea of

;

(Ew.

injn comp. 256^; Ol. p. 250;

alluring her

GK.

being conspicuous before

13.
I i,

niiT
.

comp. Nu. 25, 4 i Ki. 21, 13. Qj] Yahweh, also, on His part: the DJ correlativum;
:

cf.

on

28 a

T2yn] The same

Zech.
14.
3,
i" 11

figure,

lit.

to

make
7,

to
1

pass away, in 24, 10: comp.

"oiy

4 -piy

T^yo wuyn. Job

J*XJ
is

^X

nx]

does not elsewhere

right

ns Tayni. mean to cause

p.
cf.

to

blaspheme :

so doubtless Geiger

(Urschrift,
"
<|

267)

in

supposing the

original reading here to have been

I 25, 22.

DN

the insertion of

U^X

in

For

"rt^O,

see

on

5, 14.

15.

03tn]

for this pausal

form of

Bfo-,

see

GK.

291,

51^; and

cf.

on

I 15, 23.
1 6.
jl

JOl]

series

of perfects with

waw

conv., indicating that

David acted as here described repeatedly.

]

LXX

(B) omits 23^1

Luc. omits

l,

and expresses
e*ca-

(i Ki. 21, 27),

not (Sm. Bu. Now.) ppn fh, for xai

6ev&ev represents
17. K~in]
1 8.

235}>i,

not pi.

Read, wiih
ntrjn
.

njn

-|XJ 7X]

many MSS. and edd. The two verbs

H"13;

see

on

3,

35.

are coupled together

XII. 8-2j
under the government of 7K, exactly as Gen. 39, 9 (Tenses,
s. v.

293
115

7N), though the

change of subject

makes a

literal

rendering hardly

intelligible in English.

RV.

paraphrases, designed to
20. l]D|]
21. in

text and margin are merely two different meet the exigencies of English idiom.
cf.

The

Hif. only here;

GK.

73^
child

Read

?JD1 (Ehrl.).

l^n TOjn]

for the sake of the

(when) alive:
(as &.

LXX
")3jn

rightly

?ve/<a

rov Trai8apiov trt

WVTOS.

But 1JO

22)

for

We. conjectured in 1871, and Pesh. Targ., is much more probable (so Sm. as is confirmed by Luc. Win noiNn H3$f for Bu. Ehrl. etc.). (In Jer. 14, 4 read, with Duhm,
(l=1, and 3 repeated by
error), as

nnn nonsn
22.

"DJQ.)

Mm

yry

"O

Kt.

Mm
is

jnv D Qre] aw&o &t;f/=peradventure.

unnecessary
4,
:

The
2,

correction of the

QrS
nr

the Kt.
, , ,

is

exactly like Joel

O.

14. Jon. 3, 9.

In Esther
TO!>]

14

we have

DN yTP

23. D 25, 22

"OX

nr

r^x

nr

adds point to nob (on I 10, nob to what purpose should I yet be ?
=ino^>i

n):

cf.

Gen.

25. nbtJ*i]

We. Bu.
viz.
is

him
to

into,

etc.,

for

his education.

(Now. obfjl) and he (Dw\$) delivered But to make wholly over to,

deliver

up,

an Aram, sense of
n
;

D^n

(e.g. Dt.

32,

30 Onk.

Jiro^N
found

for

D7?9

and
y>\/

constantly for TrapaSowai), in Heb.

;

at most in late poetry (Is. 38, 12. 13 LXX, Duhm, al. Is. 42, 19 Dpipo by conjecture for D?K D) so it is not a very likely word to have
;

been used here.

verse with

With nb^l,
niiTI.

it

is

an improvement to begin the

nnx

^
12,

TQjn] Luc.

^
i

-|2"13,

26=1

Ch. 20,
T>j;]

perhaps rightly (Sm. Now. Dh.). 1 Ch. 20, 2-3. (abridged); 12, 30-31

26. naibon

The

royal city

would be Rabbah

itself,

whereas

(27) Joab had taken only what

invited
v. 27,

was
itself.

called the Water-city,

and (28)
as

David to take Rabbah

Read

therefore, probably,

D on *vy (Bu. Sm. Now. Dh.).

~PJJ]

27. D^On

No

doubt a

fortification, or part of the city,

which protected

the water-supply.

Antiochus III

in

Polybius (v. 71) relates that when Rabbah was besieged by B.C. 218, he was unable to enter the city till a prisoner revealed

the underground passage by which the besieged used to descend to fetch water. The remains of a citadel are on a hill about \ mile N. of the Jabbok, 200-300 ft.

above the valley, and connecting by a saddle with hills further to N. on this saddle there is a fine rock-cut tank, 20 ft. by 90 ft. and just inside the entrance
;
;

to this tank there begins an underground passage leading in the direction of the
citadel,

which

it

has been supposed was the one mentioned by Polybius (see

.

xxvii. (1908), p. 147 ff., esp. 149 f ; and Conder, Survey of The fortification surrounding Palestine, p. 34, with the Plan facing p. 34). men either this or some other water-supply was doubtless the Water-city

G. A. Barton,

JBL.

E.

tioned here.

28.

^K na
15

|B]

Lest
2

18, 19. Jud. 8, 23.

ch. 17,
"ON

Ki. 10, 4.

(emph.) take the city/ etc.: comp. Ex. Is. 20, 6. Jer. 17, 18. ^. 109, 28 al.
I 17, 56.

Trey; and comp. on

23, 22.

iT^y

""DC?

NipJl]

of

its

conquest

in token viz. And my name fo called over it by me. The passage shews the genuine sense of the

phrase, often occurring (especially in Dt. and dependent books) with

reference to the nation, the city, or the Temple,

over which

Yahweh

name
by

is

called/ in

token

viz.

of the right of possession or ownership

Him
).

(generally paraphrased

obscurely in
<

AV.

called

by

My

name 1

See
*

Am.
a

9,

12 DiT^y

nations embraced by David in

NIpJ -PN the dominion of

OB>

(in allusion to the

Israel).

Dt. 28, 10
i>y).

T^y snpj
7, 10. ii.

DP

pxn

voy

*?z

1x11.

Ki. 8, 43 (ivan
25, 29
al.

Jer.

14, 9.

15, 16 (of the prophet).

Is.

63, 19
(i.

we

are

become

as those over

whom Thy name

n, made
5

has not been called

e.

whom
In the

Thou
30.

hast never owned).

D^B]

LXX

bbpip (i Ki.
is

al.)

probably

rightly.
;

whole context, no allusion

to the king of

Rabbah

nor has

there been any mention of the people, but only of the city, so that,

with the Massoretic punctuation, the suffix D

is

without an antecedent.
i

mp
1

pNl]

Read, with Pesh. Targ. here, and

of gold weighed 65,
if

Ch. 20,
Ibs. av.

IW*

mp"

A
iv.

talent

not 130,

(Kennedy,

DB.

903*").
$>run

Cf. Am. i, 3 nisnn. which Th. following Kimchi defends, supposing Kt., pta^J the meaning to be the place in which victims were sacrificed to

31.

bnan nn]
So

Molech (punctuating either 03^3 in their Molech/ or D3pJ33 in the Molech-image). But such a sense for either :jVo or D3/D is highly improbable and the Qre |3??2a must be adopted. The meaning of
;

P?D, however, has only recently been cleared up.

Which
really expresses a different phrase,

From

its

form

^>KO

JOpJ

Is. 43, 7

cl.

48,

XII. 28-}i

295

(with o prefixed),, it would naturally be supposed to denote either a place (like &W?>?) or instrument (like D^?? ) of making bricks, but not the one rather than the other. It has, indeed, been commonly
1

rendered as

though

it

meant the former,

viz.

brickkiln:

but this

rendering lacks support either in the use of the word elsewhere or In an elaborate study in the renderings of the ancient Versions.

on the word

1
,

Hebrew,
of a

it

is

used

Georg Hoffmann has shewn that in post-Biblical firstly of a brickmould, and then metaphorically
same rectangular shape, such
as the

of different objects of the

door, sofa,

frame

a brick/z7.
similarly
:

window, or again, of a garden-bed, but not of In Arabic and Syriac the corresponding wxirds are used

Saadyah

denotes a brickmould (Freytag), and occurs also in ,^-io version of Is. 6, 4 of the framework of a door ; UaN.io

signifies a

brickmould (PS.
p.

col.

1887), as also a quadrangle or square

is

(Hoffmann,
quoted.

65)
is

but for neither language

the

meaning

brickkiln

Nor

this

meaning required

for either of the

two other

passages in the
the rendering

OT.

in

which pta occurs.

In Nah.

3,

14

pta ip^nn
is

lay hold of the brickmould

(in preparation for a siege,

immediately following
suitable as
kiln

go into the
s

clay,
;

and tread and

the mortar

as

make strong
Pharaoh

the brickkiln

in Jer. 43, 9 a

brick

in front of

palace would be by no means so suitable

deposit
in
it

a spot for the prophet to a square,

or

his

symbolical stones, as
position, especially
if,

open
s

quadrangle, in

the

same

as appears from v. 10, the stones were to

mark

the site upon

which

Nebuchadrezzar

throne was to be erected.

Nor

again,

is

the

mean

ing brickkiln recognized by any of the ancient Versions.

Here,

LXX
ei/

have Stiyyayev avrovs 8ia TOV irXwOiov

Maoc/3/3a,
1

2
,

Luc. Trepi^yayei

avroiis
Jinn*

Pesh.

]^&AXLd

<W

*s^lo, Targ. KpiEO

VUI

ZATW.

Led them through

Jerome
s

See also Levy, Neuhebr. Worterbuch, s. v. 1882, pp. 53-72. the brickmould, the sense being, at least, not worse than

that of

LXX
sense
3

Version.
is

traduxit in typo laterum, or of countless other passages in the HKivOiov has been supposed to mean brick/z7 : but no such recognized in the last edition of Liddell and Scott s Lexicon.

pass through the measure, meaning, perhaps (PS. 2237), some arrangement for allotting them to different forms of punishment (ch. 8, 2); cf. Nestle, Margin. 17. Comp. also ;.^.N/ Jl^*.ciA^a k-*-ll in a Mace. 4, 12
(cited

Made them

PS.

ib.~).

296

The Second Book of Samuel,

laterum

and he dragged them through the streets, Vulg. et traduxit in typo ...la MO : in Nah. 3, 14 LXX KaraKpar-i/jarov {nrep TrXivOov, Pesh.

IA^V^Q (brickmould), Targ. Tyj>:: ^priX (thy building), Vulg. tene 1 tv laterem: in Jer. 43, 9 p^M ui?3 LXX probably omit ot Xoaroi
,
TU>
Kpv<J>t<a

iv

TW

7rA.iv0to>,

Pesh.

U->\

v>->

j^N^aa

(in the quadrangle),

Targ.
quae

WJ3
sub

i?SDa

in

the mortar of the building, Vulg. in crypta

est

muro

latericio.

Thus

usage, whether of

Hebrew

or of

the cognate languages, or as interpreted by ancient authority, offers

no support

to the

meaning

brickkiln for

pi>D.

Hence Hoffmann,
render,

in

the article referred to, holds the

to be incorrect,

common
for

interpretation of this passage

and reading

"l^.V.D

Tayn would

And

he

brought forth the people that were therein, and set them to saws, and to harrows of iron, and to axes of iron, and made them labour at the
brickmould:
in

other words, instead of torturing them, employed

them

in different public
i.

works
278),
is

2
.

This view of the passage

is

accepted
1891,

by Stade (Gesch. Isr.

p. 667, Nestle,
al.,

We. Bu. Now. Sm. Konig,

among
D^l.
i

NKZ.

and

represented on the margin of the Revised

to
3 employ about

Version.

DE>

in the sense of to set

I 8,
1

may

be illustrated from
~lb^_

n
:

irnaiDl

1^

Ch. 20, 3 has indeed

and sawed

for

D^"

but this

may

be either a textual corruption,

Certainly,
if

or a mistaken interpretation of the compiler.

we could
text
:

honestly relieve

David of the act of

cruelty,

which the Hebrew

here appears to attribute to him,

we

should be glad to do so

no

doubt,

it

may be shewn
i,

to

be in harmony with the manners of the

it

age (Am.

3 of the Syrians of Damascus), but

is

alien to

all

that
s

we know
view
is

of the personal character and temper of David.

;

Hoffmann

unquestionably an attractive one

and the only ground which

is

may
the

occasion hesitation in accepting

it,

the circumstantiality in

and saws mention of three separate kinds of instruments, harrows and axes, and the character of the instruments themselves,

Or express by kv irpoffvpois. But tv TipoOvpois kv TTV\TI are more probably a double rendering of ODEO, the former in accordance with the rendering elsewhere in Jer. of nflQ (i, 15. 19, 2. 26, 10. 36, 10), and kv irv\r] a correction.
1 2 3

Cf.

how Mesha employed his Israelite prisoners (Inscr. 11. 25-6). Under (AV.) is a paraphrase of 2 in no way necessitated by the Hebrew.

XIL IIXIIL
both
of which
general,

297

might have been expected to be somewhat more had the narrator merely intended to state that the Ammonites

that the
in

were put to forced work by David. On the other hand, it is true sense brickkiln cannot be shewn to be expressed by p?O

any other passage where it occurs in either Biblical or post-Biblical Hebrew, or even in the cognate languages. The correction of "V2j?n
is,

into TQJJH
in the

of course, no source of difficulty.

The terms employed

interpretation of
it

first

part of the verse favour the

:

common

the passage

the term

p?D
is

so far as our knowledge of

goes

favours as decidedly
state

not to say

more

so

Hoffmann

view.

The

of our knowledge

not sufficient to enable us to arrive at

a decision with entire confidence.

the

But those who refuse to allow

at least

meaning

brickkiln for

p?o may
Comp.

claim to have a sound

philological basis for their opinion.

na>jp]

Luc. rightly

ciroiei.

the

same tense
3,

in the description

of the behaviour of an invading army, 2 Ki.

13,
2.

25.
distressed (Josephus

n-6nnr6 jWDttb
cf. I

"Wl]

And Amnon was

28, 15), so that he

XaAeTrcos SttKfiTo:
etc.

13, 6.

made

himself sick,
al.),

stand better at innx (Th. Ke. We. follows stating the reason why Amnon felt such distress
:

The athnah would

what

Because

she was a virgin, and (this being so)

3.
njJSK>]

See on
to

16, 9.

was hard/ etc. Jonadab was cousin both

it

to

Absalom

and Tamar and

D3n]
says that
4.

Amnon.
:

(AV. RV.) is scarcely a fair paraphrase Jonadab was wise. (Su&til= Qr\y Gen. 3, i.)
subtil

the text

3HN

3X

"lEn

ns]

The

regular order with the ptcp.

(Tenses,

and
I42
f

pronoun:
(d) note).
5.

Gen. 37,

16.

41, 9

etc.

208. 3;

GK.

?rfflffi]

546), v. 2 in reality.
9.
mtJ>D]

and make thyself sick On rnONl

.

here and
, .

v.

6 in pretence
I 19, 3.
:

(GK.

738

N31 see on
is

Only

here.

The etymology

not apparent

but the

be established by the Aram. ItnDD, which clearly meaning appears LXX for or pan (Lev. 2, 5 Ez. 4, 3 al. Targ. signifies Kon. ii. 184 thinks it may be an old rr/yavov, as always for ron?2.
to
/>/#/

f"Qn>?).

corruption of D3TO, and, as such, the source of the Targ.

For

psrrn,

see

GK.

71.

298
hyo
10.
B"X

The Second Book of Samuel,

ba IX^ in]

So Gen. 45,

i.

yyo

from
nn"inn

attendance on.
in pause involves

"

"

[10]

The
in

lengthening of the D of
\j,

the change of the preceding n to

the collocation

nn being avoided.
29
V.

So

""nx

becomes

pause not HX, but \HS; see

GK.
cf.

12.

iTJT X? 13]

The

impf. as Gen. 34. 7;

20, 9.

nsj>yrri>K]

GK.

75^; Ew.
i.

224;
fix

Stade,

143^ (3); Delitzsch

on

Is.

64, 3;

Konig,

p.

531.
1>yn

rfaj] Jud. 19, 23 nxrn r62:n

bx; and comp. the phrase

itnB^a

ni>23

nE>y

Gen.

34, 7; Dt. 22, 21 (nnsry3); Jer. 29, 23 (each

time of a sexual offence) ; Jos. 7, 15 (of Achan s impiety). The word expresses more than folly. Just as (2, 33: see more fully on
^>23

I 25, 25)

denotes one

who

lacks
It
is

all

regard for

God

or

man, so n?23

means

godlessness, impiety.
it

applied,

both here and elsewhere,

to immorality, but

does not specifically denote immorality.

associated with the

The

ideas which the

Hebrews

distinctness in Isaiah s description of the

13.

word appear with especial see on I 25, 25. ^23 (32, 6)

;

Dv23H
n3DD
>l|

*inX3]

14.

plffl]
l]

For the form of the comparison, comp. and overpowered her. Cf. I 17, 50.
is

2,

18.

nnx 23
with

When 22^
in

used of

illicit

intercourse, the

DN

is

regularly pointed by the Massorites as though

pronoun it were

the object of the verb

the accus.
It
is

Nu.

5,

13.

19.

Ez. 23,

8).

(Gen. 34, 2. Lev. 15, 18. 24. doubtful whether this is not an

arbitrary distinction
all

(i)

on the part of the punctuators, and whether in cases the word was not originally intended to be the prep. BPIK There is no other indication of being construed with an
.
23E>

accus.

the Qre in Dt. 28,

30

n3D3tJ* obviously proving nothing as

;

to the usage of the living language

in
if

(2)

Dy 235?

is

used constantly

same sense (n, 4; Lev. 15, 33; Dt. 22, 22-29, etc.), and Dy and DN being closely synonymous, there is a strong pre was understood in a similar sense. sumption that DX
the
so,
33B>

15.

nbna

ntB>

mnXD] Read
1

1171. HNJ^I] GK. rnntfrUD, which is needed.

.
, .

6.

31

nriN bx

The
is

text is untranslateable

neither

RV. nor

In Ez. the form

indeed nnitf

but in this book (as

3,

in Jer.) the prep, is

constantly written -JT,N instead of -fiN (e.g.

22)

see on ch. 24, 24.

XIII. 9 -i 8
RV. m.
is

299

a rendering of

it.

The

text of
is

LXX

has been corrected

to agree with the

Hebrew

but what

evidently the fragment of

its
1

a genuine rendering has been preserved out of

viz. /Aet^oov
rj

place in
~
il *?

v.

15,
>

KOLKIO.

-fj

eo-xarr;

77

Lucian

recension of

LXX
^v

irpwrrj=^^~l^ ^HC ^? on /xeyaAr; has Miy,

f}
a.SeA.</>e

in

^3
f)
yu.e ;

17

KaKLa

ecr^aTr/ uTre/3 rr/v Trpwr^v

TreTrotr/Kas )U.er

e/xoi),

TOU e^aTrocTTetAat

and
erit

similarly the

Old

Latin,

Noli frater expellere me, quoniam maior

haec

malitia
i.e.

novissima
BJJ

quam

prior

quam

fecisti
ni>ttJi

mecum,
*3
ntf

ut
^>N

dimittas me,

TVPV

155>K

rqnn

nwn

njnn

yn^?.

This substantially must be adopted, the only question being whether in the middle clause we accept mnsno nSTH (Luc.) or mnxn
rutftono (as in Cod. B). The former deviates least from MT., and is Sm. but We. Now. prefer the latter, arguing that MT. adopted by
:

n ?.^9 (without the attests indirectly the reading of Cod. B niHNH, art.) and considering that the corruption of mnxn into mnNE necessitated its transposition, and the alteration of iWNTno to nNin. Bu. expresses
no preference.
Either form,
it

is

evident, expresses substantially the

same
i7-

sense.

For ^x

in deprecation,
I 10, 27.
"hyo,

comp. Jud.

19, 23.

fisrnN] vpo] not

(v. 9),

See on
but

""JjiND,

the

word used

of dismissing a menial
10,

or one

whose presence was obnoxious, Ex.

28 vJ7D

"]?

18. 19.

Q^DD njna]

meaning, the earliest be established beyond reach of doubt.

(so Pesh. here), here

Elsewhere only Gen. 37, 3. 23. 32. As to the authorities are divided ; and it cannot be said to

LXX

in

Gen. ^ITWV

TrouciXos
to the

^mov
;

/capTrooros (i.e.

with sleeves reaching

(i.e.
;

wrist: so Pesh. in Gen.)

to the

Luc. here ^ITWV do-TpayaAwros

^.

reaching

ankles)

Aq.

in

Gen.

do-rpayaAwv, here ^. Ka/oTrwro?

sleeved:

Symm.

in both places ^.

xeipuWos

(i.e.

Hdt.

7.

61); Jerome in Gen.

(following

LXX)

tunica polymita, here (as Aq. in Gen.) tunica talaris.

1 D3 in Aram, Targ. Onk. and Jon. *?"] N3UV3, transliterating. means the palm of the hand (Dan. 5, 5. 24 cf. the fern. I 5, 4 al. Thus both alternative Targ.), or sole of the foot (Dt. 2, 5 Pesh.).
;

On the whole, renderings have ancient authority in their favour. as the explanation parti-coloured tunic implies a sense of however,
1

Targ. Jerus. and Ps.-Jon. on Gen.

O^VD

or)

V^JfD TlJIS a variegated tunic.

300
(patches),

The Second Book of Samuel,

which has no
sufficient

philological

basis,
(

the other

explanation
tunic,

a tunic reaching to the hands and feet

;

a long-sleeved

Sm.

a long garment with sleeves,

standing that wrists or ankles

rather than D^DS
is

(if

RV. marg.) notwith have been expected to be named, might the word be rightly explained as Aram. DD)

the
1 8.

more probable.
ruB>ai>n

D wte p 3. Gen. 50, 3 The ^yo was dii/mrf D^JttD] We. Bu. Now. Sm. Ehrl. obiyo. from the n:n3 i. MANTLE: cf. Ex. 28, 4). 62^, 3 a

a]

Cf.

own

(Z>^.

_"/?.

5>yjl]

so Jud. 3, 23.

Cf.

on

I i,

12; and

GK.

112".

19.

""^H

nT] Read n*V with The TWl

LXX;

and see

Jer. 2,
pf.

37

(Ehrl.).

K]
,

z#<zz#

conv. and the

indicating reiteration,

Jos. 6, 13.

1899,
20.

p.

199]

But read probably PJW [so Stade, Akad. Reden u. Abhandl. 1 the normal construction: see on I 19, 23.
J13CN
is

I^EN]

not a compound pr.

n.,

and hence

flJiON

can

be no alternative form (as 1J3K and "i^nx, ^3N and DI^SK and DvB*3N). In Arabic, the ^ is used to form diminutives (as kalb dog, kulaib little dog: Wright, i. 269), even in pr. names; and it
""^IN,

has accordingly been

Aminon

here

is

167*, Bo.) that the form supposed (Ew. a diminutive used intentionally by Absalom, for the
.

2 It purpose of expressing his contempt for Amnon remarks, that the Arabic inner diminutive-formation

is

true, as

We.

is
:
.

akin to ten
nevertheless,
in isolation

dencies in that language which are foreign to

there are examples of forms
in

Hebrew

and constructions occurring

of p^nx
is

Hebrew, which are idiomatic only in Arabic ; so that this explanation must not be pronounced altogether impossible. The alternative
*

to treat

as a clerical error.

Dj? rvn,

as Gen. 39, 10. 14 (Th. Ke.).

Not

(Bu.)

npJWj which would

require a preceding
:

!"!3pn

(I

17,

41):

*at

npaovaa is no proof that LXX iM?npJjfl see 15, 30. Jud. 14, 9. a So also Wright, I.e., who adds, with Ew., as another example from Hebrew pB^Bt?, remarking that the __ in these two words must be regarded as a weaken
"

ing of _n_ (orig. 1-=-), as in

H y3.

"VJJ

in

Heb., and
|

\.

^ -^ ^

are almost certainly diminutives; perhaps flD^lD* T

dove, from Arab,

Job -

42, 14 (for

a youth, in Syr., a little HD

"^

yemamah, a dove) is another. See further GK. (Engl. transl.) 86* footnote; Lagarde, Bildung der A om. 87-89; and on diminutives in the
p. 64.

Mishnah, Sega), Mttnaic Hebrew,

XIII. i8-2j
See on
ntJ>]

301

I 4, 20.

and

that desolate.

The

is

peculiar,

though just defen

a b (GK. i54 note (A); Lex. 252 ): but probably it should be deleted. Or an adj. may have fallen out before it; but not 3&* (Bu.),
sible

for

an

adj.

only follows ^pn (see on

14, 19).

In form

nDDB>

is

b WB.; Lex. iO3O ), or Po el (Kon. ii. 106) with the 10 dropped, as happens sometimes, esp. where i6o a cf. \T (beside the ptcp. becomes a mere adj. or subst. (Ew. a ptcp., either Qal (Siegfr.-Stade, Heb.
:

fjrftfO),

bbty (beside
;

^X),
/.

the Psalms

and Kon.

Q*T)^ (from The fern, c.).

and

W) insidious eyers, often

with pre-tonic sere
disj.
is

in

found

both in an ordinary ptcp. in pause, even with a minor

as here
Tj)i;,

accent,

and

Is. 33,

14

"V?iX

B>X,

in a ptcp.

used as a

subst., as

rnnb a

buckler, ^. 91,

4 (Stade,
Is.

2140;

GK.
26

840*).
i

The
D>in

forms nooii?, DT?i?iE> etc. recur nooi V.f Lam. i, 4. 13 noi2>

B>

49, 8 rtofe
16.

n&nj. 54)
(all

tfaro.

Dan.

9,

with

disj.

accents).

DW3N
p.

JV3]

rva3

TUD

(see

on

12,

5),

quite

needlessly:

see

37
21.

note.

wn

ISO nn !] ^ian 3 tanK

11
li>

Bu.
Is.

etc.

words express nrrnK Ztfy X^l j^OK which are accepted by Ew. Th. We. as part of the original text. For 2^y see i Ki. i, 6; and
after these
^3 iJ3

LXX

54,

nn

nnttj? (Th.).

The

words,

if

a gloss, are at any rate

an

instructive one.
22. niu nyi jnol?
.
,

"in

N^]

i.e.

anything at
i,

all.

Cf.

Gen. 31,
41, 23.

24. 29

and

also

T^ N

"*

^Ei"

tfb

Zeph.

12

similarly

Is.

Jer. 10, 5.

]d? in yiE^, as 6, 19

n M nn-i
23. D 28, 3.
late
11

by]

Dt. 22, 24. 23,

(Z^. 583^). 5: GK. 130

So
D
:
11

n.

D^nJC ]

two years, days.

14, 28.

Gen. 41,
D^"
1
1

i.

Jer.

iif:

for the pleonastic

10, 2. 3)

&V,

cf.

BHn,

HT and
,

(in

Hebrew, Dan.

DW
.

D^13^

and see Ges.

7%.

p.

585^;

Tenses,

Gen.

7,

d The p, to denote the 192.1; GK. i3i a 4. 10. Ex. 19, 15 (rare): Lex. 5i7 b.

wzrf of

a period, as

Dnr:]

Gen. 38,

12.

elevated height 4^ miles

Ba al Hazor is probably Tell Asur, on an NE. of Bethel (Buhl, 177; EB. ii. 1979).
is

For Baal, see on

Dy]

5, 20.

Dy = beside

used to denote proximity to a town or

302
other spot, as DIT

The Second Book of Samuel,

DJ?
:

DH Jud. 19, n. i Ki. i, 9, but not to a large area were the tribe intended, as Th. rightly observes, Ephraim the phrase used would be DnSN^ (I 17, i etc.), not DnaN DJ? itfN.
such as
"ifc?K

Either
text
is
is

DHDX
false.

is

the

name

of some place not otherwise named, or the

The

supposition (Bo. Th. Ke.) that the place

meant
(Luc.)

?i"isy

Ch. 13, 19

(n?y Qr)
it

derives support from

LXX
is

To<f>paifji

(Klo.), though

is

true that the y in 2 Ch.

not repre

sented by F. Ephron
is

mentioned close

after

Bethel and Yeshanah

(I 13, 17
;

(cf.

on

I 7, 12)

and has

been thought to be the same as Ophrah

et-Taiyibeh, 4 miles

LXX

NE. of Bethel, and 2\ miles SE. below it. Whether this distance is too great to be denoted by DJ?, will depend on whether Ba al-Hazor was so much less important than Ephron that it was necessary
its position to be thus denned. But it is odd that the site of a conspicuous hill, such as that on which Ba al-Hazor was (3318 ft.), should have to be denned by its nearness to a place (2850 ft.) nearly 500 ft. in the valley below it.

Totypa ), prob. (see note) of Tell Asur, in the valley

for

25. pa^i]

ira-lTl]

= bade
1

Read IVS him

):

see

on

I 28, 23.

So

v. 27.

fare-well/ as Gen. 24, 60.

47,

10.

ch.

19,

40

al.

26.

N3"p

fcvl]

Precisely analogous examples of the

same con

struction are Jud. 6, 13. 2 Ki. 5, 17. 10, 15: the latter demonstrates

incontrovertibly the correctness of the punctuation, and obliges us

to

render: And if not, let Amnon go with us, We., excellently. Observe the disjunctive accent at K71 1 Cf. Tenses, 149 end. The nne>3 nnt^D DI^BGN 27. -jtan ^3-i?3] LXX adds
.

"jijon

B>JM.

words may, indeed, be an addition, suggested by a reminiscence of I 25, 36 at the same time an express notice of the feast prepared
:

by Absalom
homoioteleuton.

is

quite

suitable,

and

their

omission

may be due
infin.

to

28. VHIDXI

31B3]

210 with 3
i,

is

of course the

of the verb

TID

(I

16,
i

16.

23 etc.; Est.
2,

10, as here).

The
r

tense V11DN1 as

I 10, 8.

Ki.

37

etc.

(Tenses,

118;

GK.

to the heart, as in Jud. 16, 25 Dni? 31U

ii4 ). 21D, applied CO^ 3iB3); 19, 22 DH (Qre

0:6

J")N

D O^D; and comp. on

I 25, 36.

And

so in 2 Ki.

5.

In

Ki. 10, however, the accentuation expresses a false

interpretation
is,

anJ

is

misleading.

Render,

And Jehonadab

said, It

is.

And if it

give thine hand.

XIII. 2}-M
^3
31

33
emphatic.

N^n]

Cf. ISH 9,

i.

Observe that /

is

1pm]
1

30.
3i*>.

m
.

Cf. 2, 7.

nen]
with
l|

See on

I 9, 5.
iy-ip
^>y

Read
riE
11

LXX onnn
. ,

v^y D3v:n viay

5>ai.

32.
(i.e.

*S

B"i>y~*3]

may

denote according

to the
i

mouth
or

M
the

appointment, commandment} of
:

(AV.
i/r.

see Ex. 17,

B>

etc.),

mouth of (Ges. cf. upon here be the ptcp. pass, of

settled.

Ex. 23, 13.

BK>

50, 16): nip

21), with

(Kt.) will

(cf.
is

Nu. 24,

the

sense of

The

sense thus obtained

not unsuitable, though

a ^y
to

is

not, perhaps, quite the phrase that

might have been expected

be

used with

riD"

^,

and some clearer statement of the nature of the

intention then harboured

addition rPJDn?
iii.

3,

37).

by Absalom is certainly desiderated (cf. the Ewald s suggestion respecting the word, Hist.
* ,

234 (E.T. 172), deserves mention.

fuit
alicui,

Comparing

the Arabic

"U,

sinister et infaustus

lt

inauspiciousness, ill-luck, he sup

an inauspicious expression, an expression boding misfortune (Anglice, a scowt), For upon the mouth of Absalom
poses
it

to signify

there hath
sister

Tamar.

been a scowl since the day when Amnon humbled his The suggestion is an exceedingly clever one the
:

only doubt
(Lane, p.

is whether a word meaning in itself simply unluckiness 1490) could be used absolutely to signify a token of tin-

luckiness (ein Ungliickszeichen) for others.

It

is

accepted by We.,

W.
p.

R. Smith (Encycl. Brit., ed.

858

b
),

Now. Sm.
ta

p. 840^ note, cf. ed. 10, Bu. does not decide between this and Ewald s
9, art.

DAVID,

alternative suggestion
33.

H3CB (Ezr.
.
DtJ"

4, 6t).

12T

in!?

^N]
saying

let

not

my
ab

lord the king take aught

btf

(-in, not

nmn)

to

heart,

etc.:

Dt? as

19,

20.

In

form, as well as in the use of 121, the sentence resembles I 22, 15

DK

^3]

So Kt.

Qre.

is

sufficient (cf. 32)

and DX may have

*3 is defensible,

arisen by dittography from the following

word

but DN
:

the context suggesting the negative to be understood sed solus

34.

Ges. (minime,)

Amnon

mortuus

est.

Comp. on

I 26, ro.

DW3N

miri]

awkward

anticipation of 37*.

The words interrupt the narrative, and are an We. Bu. Now., unable to suggest

anything better, excise them: Ehrlich, very cleverly, suggests 3~irQ

34
(forming the end of v. 33). No doubt, the narrator might have written the words there; but they seem somewhat superfluous.
Klo.

DW

1*n

"irn

(constr. as I 16, 4), text

V"inK
"p"lE>]

The
from
the

cannot be

which Bu. accepts. cannot be in the right.

"p*i

st. c.

and

of the hill-side

way would need the art. EVV, by the way behind him is no translation of the Heb. LXX has
TrapeyeVero 6 CTKOTTOS KOL aTTTTyyeiAev

an insertion
eiTrev "AvSpas

(/cat

TW

(3acriX(.l

Kal

ecopaKa
to

-njs

o8ov

rrjs

fipwv^v CK

//.epous

TOV opous), which

itself,

enables

We. both
to

restore a text satisfactory in

difficulties
:

and

at the

same time

remove the

attaching

to

MT.

The

text

as thus restored reads as follows

"inn

"nil33

D pnh TjTia D abn

m
s^.

DP H3H1
i"no

1*0 D?3ih TJTTO vyja

n^x
*.

-ICNI Tjbsb nsi nskn

;

is

now provided
s

with the desiderated genitive

and Vins

is

seen

to

be a corruption of D O in

The

omission in

MT.
Tno.
of,
it

arose from

a copyist

eye passing from DTin Till to D^^n

in

The
is

</wa/

form D^~in does not occur elsewhere

MT.

but from the fact of

an Upper and Lower Beth-horon being spoken in itself, and it actually occurs in LXX of Josh.
for pin-jra).

probable

10, 10.

(fipwvw

On
it

the two Beth-horons, see

on

I 13, 18.

Upper Beth-horon
flies.

is

just 10 miles

NW.

of Jerusalem, as the crow

The road from

of Jerusalem.

would pass Gibeon, and enter the great North road 4^ miles N. What particular descent and hill are meant, can
Notice D^3?n coming.
;

hardly, however, be determined.

35. 1N3]

D^NS are arriving would be an improvement

1N2 are

arrived follows in 36 (Ehrl.,

who compares
his

aptly Gen. 29, 6 n&3,

and

9 nto).

37.

Absalom takes refuge with

Qre
38
a

mother

father (3, 3).

TllTOy]

ll.TEy, which
is

is

supported by the Versions.

:

37-38*.

a tautologous after 37

at the

same

time, 37

We.

restoration
it

was based on Codd. BA, which do not express the

(

first

D^n,

but have for

omcrOfv aiirov
r-fjs

= V1HN) We.

had

(TT)I/

o5w)

flpaiji [so
;

but he found afterwards (p. 222} that Luc. quotes but Lag., with MSS. ap. Holmes and
; ;

Parsons, has TTJV 2a-paip.] and other MSS. ap. H. and P., after \v rfi 6Sy, have all with the same forms in b, the doublet TTJ flpafx (Hpav. Opap.) omaOtv avrov,

and

all

evidently representing

XIII. 34
as the subject of ?3Xrvi

XIV.

2
v.

shews

connects closely with

36.

In

all

probability a transposition has taken place, and the original order was 37 b 37 a 38^, 39 38* being no part of the original text, but
,

due to a scribe who, having accidentally in the

over

first

instance passed
37*,

37

b
,

discovered his

mistake, inserted

it

after

and then
render 38 b

repeated as

much

of 37* as
intelligible.

was necessary

in order to

&W
37
39.

vfa&
b
.

H? *m
in

bnsrPl]
"jtan

Insert after this

word

in

"J/Dn,

with

LXX.
with 14,
i

bani]

Untranslateable.

The connexion

shews that the verse must describe the preparatory or initial stage in the desire which Joab soon afterwards perceived to be stirring
in

David

mind towards
"PDH

his absent son.

Ewald, Hist.

iii.

234 (E.T.

173), conjectured

TH npn

barrt

and David

anger ceased to

manifest

itself
it

towards Absalom.

On

this conjecture,

We. observed
it

Though
and
that

satisfies

the conditions imposed

by

the context,
is

is

open

to the objection that the sense

"in

assumed

for riNV

not substantiated,

DEn ought
2,

not to be combined.
2

For the unusual order

1

"jtan

be in

in in

(i Ki.

17.

12, 2.

Ki. 8, 29

= 9,

I5

shews that

it

must
con

that the feminine required as the subject of

bam

lies

cealed.

It

follows that instead of

if

have been changed into non,

combining in non, in should no other feminine subst. is to be

and

found which more closely resembles Tfl graphically. The acuteness of this criticism were brilliantly confirmed, when We. justice
(p.

discovered subsequently

223) that Codd. 19, 82, 93, 108

(i.e.

the

recension of Lucian), as well as

substantive

many
31

others, actually expressed the

nn

Read, therefore,
1

"I^n

rvn bani

And

the spirit

of the king
14,
2.
i.

longed"

to

go forth unto Absalom.

to

JJTl]

came

/0z#= perceived
home
of

I 18, 28.

Jer. 32, 8.
i, i),

njnpn]

Teqoa

(JPpn), the

Amos (Am.
S.
cf.

now Tekua,

was

in the hill-country of

"taxnn]

Judah, just feign thyself to be a mourner:

nt]

10 miles

of Jerusalem.
13, 5.

n?nnn

D 31

D^

The

nt is very idiomatic: I 29, 3 (Lex. 261^).

And

in late

as regularly in
a

Hebrew, as I Ch. 24, 31. 29, Aramaic (NS^D WT1, etc.).

.

i. 9.

24. 29.

Ch.

26, 18. 21, etc.

Lit.

failed with longing to

comp.

if/.

84, 3. 119, 81. 82. 123.

1365

306
3.

The Second Book of Samuel,

jvaa
.

tr-mrrnK
Clearly

aw

IDsm]

2PI1

DKI] Ex. must be

4,

15.

Nu. 22, 38. Ezr.

8,

lyal.

read, with

LXX,

Pesh. Targ.

Vulg., as well as

many MSS.
express ny^in a second time, after *]tan,

itan]
rightly,

LXX
The

repetition

would be

in

perhaps thorough harmony with the

in

affected

emotion which the

woman

displays

speaking

to

the

king
5.

(Th.).

3$]

verity,

fa
i

truth: Gen. 42, 21.

:

i
.

Ki.

i,

43.

2 Ki. 4, 14.

(In late

Heb. with an adversative force

Ki. 7, 14.
nB>;

Lex

6 a .)

njo^N new] So
i

17,

9: comp. ch. 15, 16 D*OT^B Dnw.

jna
"x

Ki.

3,

nw

ttsw

Ka3 BN,

etc.

OK] Observe the pausal form with Tifha, where a pause in the vo ce is appropriate to the sense. So 18, 22 cf. Gen. 15, 14 Hbj?*j
:

Dt- 13, 5
etc.
;

n ).

Hos.
in

8,

UHP;

below innat?, and

103.

mtM

(perf.),

and regularly

^N"n.

Cf. Tenses,

6.

nnxn-HN inxn
1

i3l]

And

he smote him

the one (namely)

the other.

altogether

Such an anticipation of the object by the pronoun, rare (see on I 21, 14), produces here, however, an intolerable
Read, with Luc. (xai eTrarafev
1J*1
:

sentence.

6 ets Toy

dSeX^oy auroo),

VnNTiK
from a
another
7.

"in^n

probably inn

was meant
jl
"inNH

to be read 13*1,

and arose

false
*).

interpretation of

(as

though

this

meant

one

5?a:3]

the2/>r^/H.-

cf.

Dt. 19, 21 C a:2 ^3J.

Lam.

i,

n;

and

see

GK.
de
iis

119?; Lex.

90**

3b.

*n?ftl]
v. c.

Ges. compares {WTTV/WV *de spe generis ad paucos redacta,

qui diluvio erepti erant, Lucian, Timon,
(nrepfjia.TO<;,

(w-n-vp6v

TOV avOpwTTLVov
n>"iN^i

from Plato, Lfgg- 677 B).

is.

cat?]

Cf.

iN5^

na>

14, 22.

8.

3Xl]

Note the emphatic pronoun.

addressed, infcqni should
exactly as Ex. 4, 21.
12,

10. injqni

be read
1

I^K imon] As a woman is (We. Bu. etc.). The construction is

to
2

From Gen.

I 21, 14.
it

The usage

is

Sam. the only examples are the few quoted in the note on somewhat more frequent in later books; in genuine Hebrew
in the

was never idiomatic except

2

one expression
a5t\(f>oi>

i4

D K

(see ib.\
aSt\<j>6v

Cod.

has the doublet ^bv tva TOV

avrov,

TOV

avrov being

the original rendering, rdv tva a correction after

MT.

XIV.
44. Is. 56, 6-7, etc. (Tenses,

3 -ij

307

123 a; GK.
is

n6 w

).

Against

(LXX,

Pesh. Th. Bu.) there

(in addition to the

"!?"!*?,

ground urged by

We., that the king thinks of a definite

syntactical objection that
, , ,

viz.

the

Go el,

v.

n)

the

would not be followed by insini 10 is doubtful), but by Wan (or ^X^): comp. on I u, 12, (Zech. 4, and Lex. 567 a GK. 137, cited by Bu., does not shew that this
V3
.

objection

is

unfounded.
Qr6"

n. JTmnD]
word
e

ns iriO:

the punctuators apparently treating the

inf. HZl in

as the cstr. form of the abs.

Gen.
b
;

3, 16.

16, 10.
is

22,

24O note). iyt (Ew. an error for the normal

In

fact,

however, the Kt.

(so Ol.

n^inD
1 1,

merely
i.

J"li3"]nD

258

Keil; Konig,

537

GK.
|D in

75

ff ).

For the construction of

has
its

r\r\vh

nmri, see on

1 2.

The

nmnD

frequent negative force (Lex. 583*).

is

Destroy any more* (EVV.), however,

certainly
is

wrong;

for the

Din 75W

had not
I s55>

as yet destroyed at all.

The meaning
so as not to
nS"in

destroy greatly (2 Ki. 21,6.

?)

Klo. Sm. Bu. niEirO

let

him destroy:
3 (13? T

but this seems

hardly in line with the ordinary uses of

abandon, Dt.
from.
4,

sq. ace. to let go,

Cant.

3,

4,

31

al., sq.

.7

to let alone, as I
for to allow is ?

n,
|J"13,

^P.n), sq. JD to desist

etc.

The idiomatic Hebrew

See on

Gen. 20, 6

(Lex. 679*).

133 mjflJ O]
12.

I 14,

45.

inns^ wain] Let thy handmaid, I pray l^on a word unto my lord, the king. Observe the difference thee, speak between the Hebrew and English order of words the Hebrew order
:

-m

n^K

would, in English, be
is

stiff

and

artificial

the order which in English

feeble sentence in

idiomatic would give rise to a

weak and

Hebrew
ear,

(itail

VHN^N

131).

The
trixn

object at the

end,

to

the

Hebrew

completes and rounds

off the sentence.

So

regularly, as

Gen. 42, 30

mtrp

unK pxn
orix

"ons

ian (not IDDN

on!?

JWP
hub;

poyn-nN
I

JD^

NTI; 32
b
;

onnjjn-nN
;

asinEngl.); 43, 16 Ex. 23, 32 rron b

rvn Dn^x^i
^<//

on!?;

Lev. 26, i6 b
c^. 3,

Jud.
;

i,

24 ion

iy
b
;

u^yi;
b
;

8,

15
17,

i6,i.end; 20, 34
b
;

2o b
b

10, 2;

12, i7

13,33%
I i, 4.

13.

i4
2,
.

iff.

15, 3;

24, 4;
J.

25,

is

26,

6.

9;

33, 7

105, 14;

Mic.
13

3 (not
-13101]

abnormal/

M. P. Smith),
54*5),

etc.
7,

Comp. on
89. Ez.

=T3iinw (GK.
one guilty

as

Nu.

2, 2.

43, 6f,

according to the punctuators.

as
in thus speaking the

king condemns himself.

308
Ttab] not

The Second Book of Samuel,

in not bringing

back

(Keil), but in order not to

...

The

clause

is

epexegetical, not of D$?KD, but of DNT3

the explanatory

inf. at

the end, as 13, 16. 19, 20 (We.).

irrn]

at

See GK. 92^^. The application of the truth is to Absalom. Life may end 14. any moment when it is past it cannot be recalled thou mayest
:
:

find this to

be too true in the case of thy son, if thou leavest him in banishment. And God doth not take away life, but deviseth plans
in order not to banish (further)

from him one that

is

banished,

i.e.

and even God

acts
is

more

mercifully than thou art acting.

But the

text of clause b
fake

doubtful.
recalls

The

antithesis

is

imperfect (doth not

away

life,

but

from
s

banishment}
*)

and the expression

easy (SB in for
will

thinketh thoughts (in this

connexion

is

of doubtful propriety (We.),

(iii.
:

as applied to God.

Ewald

emendation

2K Prt

);

and

yields a decidedly better sense

174) but

is

God

not take

away
that
to

the

life

of

him

that deviseth plans not to banish

from him one

is

banished,
to take

the words being understood as an encouragement

steps for
recalling

David

Absalom.

So We. Now. Bu.

from him
to refer

Kennedy,
lo

the last two, however, understanding

will visit

Yahweh, who
banished from
n"P

with His favour the

man who

exerts himself

to restore to
is

Yahweh and His worship one who,

it

while in exile,

(see I 26, 19).

Tl^]

TlW>

with the impf. (virtually, of course, a

c.,
4

relative
3
.

clause), instead of the usual inf.

Cf.

as once besides, Ex. 20, 20

JlOlp^p once, Dt. 33,

15.
"1K>N

u,

in place of the
(it

normal

Dlptp
etc.

nnyi]

and now

is)

that I

am
in

come,

The con
See,

struction

is

very
8,

however, Zech.

unusual, being 20 ... nt?s ny. 23 ...

"IPX

fact

superfluous.

-iB>6?

nonn D D Q.

1
2

Jer. 18,

is

evidently different
cf.

so also are Mic. 4, 12

Is.

55, 8. 9.

For the misplacement of 1,

Either
UIB",

Jer. 2, 25 Kt.

17, 23 Kt. 32, 23

Kt.

al.

12K>,

1XT, vblb. D^GG, Targ. &OD3 NH, which

1X3, after

or

31^, 603, must also be read in Jer. 23, 14. 27, 18, for

illustrates

Dan.

4,

43 fc^HD

H3
:

SH.

The

Gen. 49, 4 pleonastic use of SH behold in comparisons is frequent in the Targums Nil Dt. 32, 33 NH. ch. 23, 4. Is. 5, 28. 9, 4. 18, i. 21, 3. 10. 29, 16. 32, 6. 35, 6. 59, 5. 6. 60, 8. Nah. 2, 12 etc.

6CM

N^n m?M

XIV.
1

i} -26
that

309
would destroy

6b

TDBw] The
:

Heb. cannot be rendered

B>j53tpn

me (EVV.)
17.

restore
"]X73]

DWKfl
iO33
b

(LXX) The comparison

z

before
as
i

fib.

v. 20.

19, 28. I 29, 9.

1 1
:

yB6]
Z<?.r.

to understand, or discern ;

cf.

Ki. 3, 9 yOB* 3p.

cf.

g, h.

The 7 =

regard
26,

to :

see
2

on

I 12,

and

cf. v.

25.
DJ7,

19.
1

"jnx

3KV Tn]
DN]
B>N

Cf. Jer.

24.

Ki. 15, 19;

and with

Ch.

4, 10.

pDf&
dub.
:

t?N

softened from B*: comp. Mic.

6,

10

B>Kn

f (text

nE

Xn) for
X
)
:

B>V1.

middle of a word in

There are analogies Hebrew (e.g. D^tp, D N3*

:

for the softening in the

for

Do, D3X
is

Stade,

122;

GK. 93
really

but the softening at the beginning

very anomalous,
itself

and has

no analogy
Ch.

except in Syriac (as k-./

=
z>.

B^

^JiW,
a parallel

^.vv;*./;
B^N
i

Hold. Syr. Gr.

2,

40 C).

Ew.
is

53

cites as

13 for

""B/J

(as the

name

written in

12).

Probably both there and here the N is not original, but due to a 2 The construction of f s late transcriber Cf. p. izon. B N, as
.

(li")

2 Ki. 4,

13 (Tenses,
for

202).

pon^]

r^nj): c f. Gen. 13, 9; and see

:

GK.

70^,0.

^^n^]
N1H1
20.
21.
.

for
.

^Ntpfc>r6
:

GK.
cf.

53?,

23^

Nin] emph.
17, 14.

23, 18. 20. Dt. 3, 28. 9, 3.

TQja^j

Ex. 20, 2of.

VWy] I have done=l

TND
??n?]
lit.

do (GK.
:

io6 ni ).

25.

in

respect

defines the tertium comparationis

the clause of praising greatly: Gen. 3, 22 ye shall be as one of

Is.

us njn? in respect of knowing,

etc.

21,

as whirlwinds in the

South

^nb
jl

in respect

^HP?
26.

(Tenses,

of sweeping up, i Ch. 12, 8 Dnnn ^y 0^3X3 205; Z^r. 514* e ^). ppn, as Gen. 12, 15 (Ehrl.).

head
it

now

in^3l] The constr. is involved: And when he shaved his it used to be from time to time when he shaved it, because
that he

was heavy upon him,

shaved

it

he would weigh/
is

etc.

nVTl after

an intervening temporal or other clause,

always resumed

N According to Kimchi, however, 7up was pronounced

iktol

(and therefore, to
24"

avoid confusion, the

1st pers.

was vocalized ?t2pX)

.

GK.

end,

47"

end.

are in all probability textual But the examples (including B N) cited 47 b 2 The Massorah has here the note B^ "V3D above, p. 90.
:

errors.

310
either

The Second Book of Samuel,

by the bare
impf., or

by the

pf.

and
it

waw

conv., so that

n H1
>

n^r

"1B>K

cannot be rendered
it
:

And

used to be from time to time

in!>J1.

that he shaved
either

rpffi
1

can only be resumed by

is

It

is
is

true,

niT

"lt?X

or in?}

logically superfluous
:

but the case

cf.

one in

which the tautology would not be un-Hebraic

Lev. 16,

i.

=
"J^CH

every year.

So only here:

cf.

myiy

D^O

I i, 3 al.

=
*]^O

c.

sf

Ibs. av.

(EB.
cf.

iv.

904

a
).

pN3J For the T3 (so many) minas

standard,

the Ass.

manu

sha-sharri ; pjo

by that of the king on the lion-weights from

Nineveh (8-7

cent. B.C.),

Cooke,

NSL

66; CIS.

II

i.

1-14; and

almost the actual corresponding words in Aramaic (N3^O ^3X3) found

often in the Jewish Papyri from Elephantine

(Sayce and Cowley,

15
al.),

Aram. Papyri from Assuan,

to the Persian king,

7.

14, 15.

with reference

\m=^ve^ght, as Dt. 15, 13. Pr. cf. p. 108 n. 27. nnvi NTi] as Gen. 4, 20. 10, 8 28. ^ DTUB>] as Gen. 41, i al. See on 13, 23.
:
1
D"

16,

al.

30.

11

btii]
DB>

See on 14, 13.

DHyB>

*6l]

See on I

i,

and

cf.

17, 18.

31. *b

"IB>K

npbnn]

See on
31 B]
it

I 20,

40:

GK.
for

i29

32.
there.

DB^X
Dt?

iy
*iy

were well

me

(that)

were

still

"OK

defines that in
338*5.

respect of which

Absalom says
"W

31B.

in early
fly

Comp. Ew. Hebrew (Lex.

t?

But

iny would be better than

(iii.

Ij?

728^).

Kon.

558) would read JK

"iy.

^3

DNl]

Cf. I 14, 41

LXX.
11

20, 8.

33.

v]
i.

insert with

LXX

7S

!.

15,

t?yl]

Cf.,

of Adonijah,

Ki.

i,

See on

12,

6;

22, 17.
2.
"lEyi
,

D^BVTl]

Notice the

pff.

with
to
4,

waw

conv.,

indicating

what Absalom used to do.

From

2b

however, the narrator

lapses into the tense of simple description, only again bringing the

custom into prominence in

v. 5,

and 6 a

(1X3^).
2,

Nip
and

11

! .

"IB>S

B^xn

^>3

Tm]

Exactly as

23

b
,

except that a subst.

article.

rel.

clause takes here the place of the ptcp. and

B^Nfl ^3]

The

collective singular, as Dt. 4, 3;

ch. 2, 23.

pn

^3 Ex.

i,

22

Dipnn ^3 20, 24; N3n bi

3.
i.e.
*]H3"l]

20, 12;

n&nn ^3

Jud. 19, 30.

thy statements, arguments =thy case: Jos. 20, 4.

XIV. 26
170n nxo]
excellently,

XV.

ii

thou hast none to hear on the part of the king.

AV.

deputed of the king.

Comp. nXD
. .

of a grant from, or due

rendered by, a person; Gen. 47, 22. Lev.

4.
"ODE*

7, 34.

Nu.

3, 9.

8, ii.

Who

will

make me
11

.?=O
>l

that

one would make

me

.!

so 23, 15 D^D

"Opt?

*O

=O

that

one would give

:

water, etc.!

XT
i

Ki.

and constantly in the phrase J^ ? GK. i5i that to me might come etc. Note the position of vy ^yi] WJP XX* ^X that 2, 15; 2 Ki. 5, ii behold, I thought noin
.
:

me to a ~d

drink

he would come out to me, and stand, etc.; Gen. 30, 16. 43, 16.

vnpTfni]
s

The

pf.

and

waw

conv. in continuation of an impf. with

the force of a Latin imperf. subjunctive; exactly so

5.

Amos
5, 21.

9, 3.

17

mn] Read
.

11

pnnn with some 30 MSS.

stole the

6.

17

riX

333M]

understanding (Jer.

Hos.

4, ii.

7, ri etc.) of,

i.e.

duped: so Gen. 31, 20 f37 37

(B3>)

HX

3pJP 133?1.

7. D^yiix] LXX (Luc.), Pesh. cannot be right. The accentuation in

yiinx,7

/ftr/y

years evidently

b
,

placing the greatest break

J1"Oni

after

"j/rDH

at niJY ?
1

rather than at

""H^,

connects

rightly with

D7B>X1

X3 H37X, not with

11

Tnii
1
l"

(see v. 8).
if

8.

^It?

yw* DX]
will

Kt.

an

utterly un-Hebraic sentence.

he brings back, brings me back, Qre 3itJ* from 3B* to dwell, unsuit
;

able beside *33K

bring back.

LXX

lav

7rto-Tp<^wv

eTricrrpei/T/ fie,

Targ.
entire

WTJV

Xinx DX, Pesh.

..no>op

0^30*^ v^

i.e.

*33B"

3Bn DX

in

accordance wilh idiom

(e.g. I i, ii).

nw
i

o.

nx ^miyi] add probably Pv^l] The sending out

rvt^l
it

with

LXX

(Luc.) fliini (see

is

v.

7).

of the spies

to

be regarded as

taking place simultaneously with the departure of Absalom for Hebron,

so that
is

used quite regularly, and

there

is

no ground

for

[as Th. had proposed to do] as a pluperfect, Keil, render by a plup. would be indeed contrary to grammar the plup. (see on 19, 15) would have been expressed by rDK D WIXI.

rendering
rightly.

To

ii. D^X^ip] as guests to the sacrificial feast at

Hebron:

cf. I 9,

13.

22. 24. 16,

3. 5.

Ki.

i,

9.
1&5>O.

Dsnp]
is

expressive of
1|

The 7The same idiom in i Ki. 22, 34 1or6 nt?p3 norm or standard (Ew. 2i7 d Lex. 516!): comp.
;

lin B7

etc.

13T73 iyT x?l]= and knew nothing

at all.

312
12.
y\

The Second Book of Samuel,

ni^l]
It
is

clear that

Absalom did

not, as he

would do

MT., send Ahitophel out of Giloh, but that he sent for him from Giloh. nx rbw, however, cannot be rendered sent for
according to

(EVV.); and a word must have dropped out after N2M (cf. I 1 6, 12 Bo.) or, better, iOjW (We. with
cKaXco-e).

DW3N,

either

LXX
:

(Luc.) Kai

top

11

is

more common than nx

Nip"

but

HK

is

per

fectly admissible: see the similar passage I 22,

n.
3),

Bathsheba

grandfather

(cf.

23, 24 with

n,

Ahitophel was which no doubt

explains his hostility to David.

nbo
for

w jn]

The form

of the gentile adj. shews that

!"6a

stands

an original pa, and that the root, therefore, is (from which fi^a, fVpf, or f6a might be formed, but not

or ha, not r6a

r6a).

So

"O^t?

from

ifytf, root TIB or ?*&, not

r6a>.

Giloh

is

mentioned

in Jos. 15, 51

among

the cities of the hill-country of Judah,

perhaps Jdla, 5 miles

NNW.
13.

of Hebron.

3TI -|hn]
"HriX

See on
, ,

I 2, 26.
is

nvi]

come

to

be

(Jud.

17,

13: here

is

gone]

after
14.

cf.

on

I 12, 14.

rD^ nno] GK.

J^/
/ nn"01.

n^n.
upon us
:

nHni]

motion, drive, impel evil

comp. the Nif.

in

Dt. 19, 5 jnJ2 IT

Usually the Hif. signifies to ^.rpel (especially

of Israel expelled from their country).

1

6.

v6m]
(cf.

as I 25, 27.

JIN] out of place before an indef. obj., and no doubt introduced by d GK. some error

H7

).

17

f.

We.

points out

how
in

17^-18 stands

wedged

genuine LXX rendering of between the two halves of another Greek

here the

translation agreeing closely with

first

MT.,

the concluding words of the

:

half being repeated at the beginning of the second

TO>

[KO.I

Icm/o-av

v OLKW

Ma/cpezv.

8.

KOI TravTcs ot TraiSes avrov dva X**-P a a ^ TO ^

(TTrjcrav CTTI

Trapfjyov Kal Tras XCTTCI Kat ?ras 6 ^eXer^et,] KO!

Iv TV)
epr/fJiti),

T^S eXaias

8.

KCU Tras 6 Xaos TrapfTropevero e^oynevos avrov, nal Travres

01

01 Trepi
*cai

avrov KCU Travre?

eVt

aSpoi KOL
[

TTCIVTCS 01 /xa^r/rat, e^aKocriot avSpes,

Trapf)<rav

X^P 61 a

^"^-

Ka

^Ss

6 Xepe$$ei

/cat

Tras 6

^eXe^^ei
tv

Kai Travres 01 re^^aioi, ot

is

eaK<xrtot

avSpcs ot eX^ovres rots Troo

avrwv

Fe^,

/cat

Tropevo/xevot

CTTI

Trp6<ra)Trov

rov ^ao-t Xetos].

The unbracketed

XV.
words
in

12-20
version

3 T3
of

the middle are the genuine

v.

LXX,

in

which,
x**-P

however, the close of

avrov
is

18 has dropped out, for Kal irapfjo-av

t-rrl

variation, however, with a claim to

a Djjn in i7
,

merely a doublet to TrapeiropeveTo e^d/Aevos avrov. be preferred to MT.,

The
is

only

1H3J? for

and Dyn

for

VnjJ

in i8 a

The

"J^CH

-nay are influential

persons, in

immediate attendance upon the king, and distinguished

generally
(cf.

from

the people
is

e.g. 16, 6).

Hence

the reading of

LXX

right.

The

king and

his attendants (V12J? ^3)

remain

at the

last house of Jerusalem, in order to let the people (Dyn 73) and the body-guard pass. Only in v. 23 does David with his attendants resume his progress.

17. pmon JTQ] the Far House (R V. m.}, probably the of Jerusalem in the direction of the Mt. of Olives.
1 8.

last

house

Notice the ptcp.

prefix

Dnny

(twice).

DTlJn 731]

(Ehrl.)

^Xl.

As We. pointed
Ittai
is

out,

after

him

from Gath,

as the text stands, can refer only to David, which can

scarcely be right,

whereas a notice of

needed here, as an

introduction to 19.
will naturally

With

TIKI, the

sf.

in 17213 (rd.

V&H3
12.
:

as 16. 17)

apply

to Ittai.

19.

^33]

a foreigner; as

always, e.g.

Jud.

19,

Of

course

(from Lat. extraneus) meant this formerly but it is a great pity that this now misleading archaism has been retained so often
stranger
in

RV.

Similarly

"133

133 (22, 45. 46),

ri7K

(I 7, 3), etc.,

should

be

always

rendered
in

foreigner/

foreign
in the

gods.

See

STRANGE,

STRANGER
314.

DB.

or
is

my Nah.-MaL

Century Bible, pp. 313,

strange gods, the

The

archaism

particularly obscuring in

point being that they are foreign gods.

"JC1pE7

nnx

n7a Dai]

going

in

exile

to

thy place,

Keil as meaning in search of a resting-place,

explained by an improbable idea,

if
"jDlpoi?

and

also unnaturally expressed.

;

AV.

renders as

followed
is

Sit? (!)

RV.

supplies

return

in italics.

In fact

"p1pe6

simply

a copyist s error for

20.

"pIpCB

(LXX,

Vulg.).

iy3N DVni]

and to-day

shall I

make

thee

wander with us

in

For yi3 in the sense of wandering up and down (properly, going ? with an unsteady, uncertain gait see my note on Am. 4, 8) with no
:

settled

home,

cf.

Nu. 32, 13

nmca

Dy\n.

Am.

8, 12. ^. 59,

12

314
"jm

The Second Book of Samuel,

(where Gen.
4,

12 1J1 yj
p. xlviii)

makes Lagarde
I

s lOTJiTl for

(Proph. Chald., 1872,

"jbin
"OK

highly plausible).

1t?K by ibin ^Nl]

am

going whither

know

not.

See

on

I 23, 13.

nENI ion] Explicable grammatically as an adverbial accusative, but such and take back thy brethren in mercy and faithfulness:
a use of the accus., except in two or three familiar expressions (as
IXIp, ttyrp,

nB:3

Ew.

2790;

GK.

1181), scarcely occurs in prose.

:

Keil and

RV. (neglecting

the Tifha at I^V) render

with thee be mercy

and

faithfulness.
this

Though

not impossible, however, the construction

is

which
"priX

rendering implies
its

harsh

"joy

is

almost demanded by

DN

as

complement, and \T
nirn

is

desiderated with DENl 1DCI.

The
not

difficulty of the verse is at

once solved by

LXX: nN

25JM1

31C>

1y -priX Return, and take back thy ^jey brethren with thee; and Yahweh shew toward thee mercy and faith fulness comp. 2, 6. The three words supplied have simply dropped
1DH
nbj?:
:

out of
21.

MT.
f y\

by homoioteleuton.
*3]

DN

EX

"O

by a scribe,

The Qre is here right: 3 has been changed into who omitted to notice how the sentence ended.
is

Without DK, the sentence following the oath

J1

in

form

(,

DlpQ3

DP

like 3, 9. 13) exactly

23. 0^13]

/cara o-wecriv, as Dt. 9,

28 (/a^, as here):
.

cf.

on

17,

46

-mm
We.
in

1 1 7f see GK. For the syntax of ^na (earth}. DN nm Ja by] naion nN 111 is an unparalleled and un^>1p,

translateable expression;
his note
It
is

^a

by, also,

does not

mean toward (EW.).

"pi

added

on the passage suggested HTlDn VJ3 and the probable that between the st. c. *]*n
stood, of which
to

by, but

genitive

nrion another word once

his conjecture

was found afterwards

TrpocrcoTrou

recension, which reads ?rp6

TTJS Iv rfl

Again, be confirmed by Lucian s avrov Kara rrjv 68ov TYJS eXaias

Vja-by, or, with less deviation

DN

is

a fragment.

^/{, =13103
n\7

1^

n^n

zjl-j

from MT., 131DH

accepted.

(Sm. Bu.).

This reading may be unreservedly

The

route must have lain across the Qidron valley, up

the N. part of the Mt. of Olives, by the then usual road to the Jordan
(cf.

on

2,

24); and the

131DH

JVT

must have been some conspicuous

I3y ibdni just

tree near the spot

where the uncultivated land began.

xv.
before,

20-2 r
T? y
I^Dni.

315
This
is

should,

however, in

all

probability be
*?y,

required, not merely by the restoration VJD

especially vv. 24-29.

but by the con/ex/,

David stood
:

in the valley

of Qidron, while the

people

passed on before him

amongst them came

Zadoq and

Abiathar,

who

set

down

the ark while the rest of the people passed

on; there followed the conversation with David, vv. 25-28. All this presupposes that David was stationary at the time. (On the inter
change of 3 and
24.
first
,

see the Introduction, p.

Ixvii.)

Zadoq

is

mentioned here (except

in

the

list

8,

17) for the

time.

1DN
first

D^n

^3l]

mention of Abiathar
is

is

greatly desiderated the

in v.

time that Zadoq

mentioned

Zadoq and Abiathar

29
^31

suggest strongly that

1J1N

~i;V3tO originally stood here, but that

later scribe,

D^n

was substituted by a

whose point of view was

that

of the Chronicler (Bu. Sm.

Now.

Kit. Dh.).
:

TVO] Prob.
and also Dh.
etc.

a later insertion
;

notice

DM^X fnx
So Bu.

just afterwards,

in 25.

29

and comp. on

I 4,

3-5.
<

Kit. (ap. Kautzsch),

Ipyi]

and poured out

7,

(!).

Read

VX*\,
cf.

and
2

set

down

(6, 17. I 5, 2).

In Jos.

23 Qi??!

may

be correct;

T^n

Ki. 22, 9.

went up whither?), and bjn] The words are obscure ( where they stand interrupt the connexion ( they set down the ark
"IJT3N

until all the people,

etc.):

Luc. does not express them.

Unless

it

might be supposed that rivS? (6, 17. i Ki. 3, 15) had fallen out after the text would seem to be imperfect "inUK, perhaps the name of Abiathar was once more prominent than it now is, and the words
:

quoted are a misplaced fragment. We. and others suppose its present imperfection to be due to an attempt, made in post-exilic times, to
eliminate the
25.
23, 22.
1JTO

name
.
.

of Abiathar from
Tenses,

it.

U3BTH. Nu.
fiNl]
Is.

NVDN DN]

13601.

So Gen.

18,

26. Ex.

21, 2 etc.
i"

}?,

as 7, 8 shews, properly denotes an abode of flocks ;

comp.
is,

65, TO

itfx

mab IHBTI rvm

EZ. 34, 14 ato

nwa nann.
ni3 of

it
:

however, of frequent use in poetry in the sense of abode generally

thus Ex. 15, 13 ^Bni?

ny of Canaan,

Is.

33, 20 JJSB

Jerusalem,

Job

5,

3 of the abode of an individual person.

In prose, the word

316
occurs only in
is

The Second Book of Samuel,

7,

Ch. 17, 7) and in the present passage, where

is

it

used in the same general sense that

26.
27.

otherwise confined to poetry.

\j:n, cf.

nos na DKl] See on I 14, nnx nxVin] thou?

11

9.

For
8,

on

I 14, 43.

<Seest

(Ez.

6)

i.e.

dost thou see

how

matters are

But the

text excites
it.

have been

made

to correct
is

suspicion ; and many attempts Keil would read I^Tin, and render
is

seer: but the priest

never identified with the prophet; nor

the term seer ever applied to him.

LXX

has

"Sere,

which may either

Gen. 41, 41
etc.);

represent INT, or be a misreading of nan (15,

3.

and as the plural pronouns at the end of the verse and in v. 28, shewthat Abiathar and Zadoq are both present, either HtO (Bu.) or 1N~)

(Now. Dh.
otherwise
thou:

Kit.)

may have been

stands,

used here, according as David began

by addressing Zadoq
as
it

in particular, or both together.

With the
follows,

text

nriN

must go with what

return
it

but in view of the plural following and esp. of v. 29*, nJVaNi flHK we should read highly probable that for
nn>
*3B>

is

nns

(Bu.

Now.

Ehrl. Kit. Dh.).

at the fords
of.

28.

nnaya]

So

Kt.,

which

ch. 17, 1 6
<2/~(Qre

shews to be

more probable than JiUljn in the steppes (Jos. 4, 13) and Verss.), and which is preferred, after Bottcher, by most moderns (Th. Ke. The word occurs only here, 17, 16, and 19, 19 (see note), We., etc.).
the usual term being
"Hyo,

maj?O.

Machadat (t\\e

ford

el-Hajlah,

meant are probably and Machadat el-Hend, 4 and 3 miles

fords
387*1, referring to the ark.

The

respectively from the

29. 13B\]

mouth of

the Jordan (Kennedy).

LXX,

Bu. Now. Sm.

30. David here commences the ascent of the Mount of Olives. The ptcpp, serve to the scene vividly, as well as state what

represent

was happening
related in v. 31.

at

the time

when David

received

the

intelligence

naaJ r6j?

rky]

Cf. I 17, 41.

is

isn

*ian]

The word
3. 4.

an

uncommon
I 6,

one.

It recurs, joinec

with BWi, Jer. 14, nbai rhy tan]

31.

Est. 6, 12.
113";

GK.

and on
(sc.

i.
or,

TJH
:

TVtt]
is

Read Tjn

TnS

T3EH),

following
to

-un

*mh TJn whom a thing is

never construed with an accus. of the person

told.

XV.
32.
DE>

26-^7
;

3r7
i

N2

in

TVl]
"IB>N]

Cf.

on 17, 10
subj.

and add
either

Ki. 20, 39. 40.

to the
:

mrw
is

The

may be

mnnt^on or in

place where men were wont (or he was wonf) to worship

God

the

former
the

more probable.

The
i

reference

is

to

some spot
i

at the top

of

Mount

of Olives, which was frequented as a sanctuary, or place

IJlNIp/ ilMI as I
6 apxieTaiipos
o, I

of worship.

ch.

6,

^INn]
no doubt
of the

LXX

AauiS = in nyVDIXn

(cf.v.

37;

6, 16),

rightly, the title

name.
by

In

LXX

being added naturally on the first occurrence the gentile name has been strangely Graecized

either

the original translators, or

improve

his author s text (cf. p.

78

.)

by a scribe, too anxious and combined with

to

so as to produce the

compound
to his

Chief companion.
2).

The

was a

little

W.

of Bethel (Jos. 16,

torn as
rvni]

inana
33.

grig]

tunic;

GK.
^y
vn.

116^,

I2i<l

(d\

Ntroi>

by
"Vyn

Is. i,

14

rnt^>

Job
cf.

7,

20.
ch. 17, 13.

34. 21BTI
il
"]12y]

DNl]

For the position of Tyn,

"

on

The
be

accents must be disregarded.

to

If

thou returnest to
lord,

the city,

and sayest
will I
:

Absalom,

Thy

servant,

my

king [see
I will

below],

was thy

father s servant formerly,

and now

be thy

servant,"

thou

wilt defeat for

me

Read
d

for

^JO

(i),

introducing the

subj.,

probably

also, in spite

of Gen. 40,

9.

(Bu. 16 (Tenses,

the counsel of Ahitophel. on 6 b and *:x

Job

4,

),

125 Obs.

GK.

143
I.e.,

),

f r

^Nl

(2).

The

construction of

Ew.

348",

adopted in Tenses,
verb makes

and

ed.

i, is

hard.

rtMX
a very
35.
Tenses,

"]tan

^N

liny]
;

The

separation of
s

"OK

from

its

awkward sentence

and Ehrlich
Similarly I
2,

OIK
36.

for

^N

is i

highly probable.
Ki. 20, 6 b
.

TJn ... ^3 rvm]

121 Obs.
i
.

17, 25.

See

njn] The same anomalous punctuation (for njn in st. c.}, according to Norzi, is found also in the best MSS. 16, 16 (where Hahn has njn.) and i Ki. 4, 5 cf. ch. 24, nth; and GK.93U.
37.
:

in

m
i

Elsewhere the form in use

is

always jn, except in Prov. 27, 10 Kt.

(cf.

(Qre VI), the form njn being only presupposed in ^njn

12,

7jn?

n).

The term
and

of Hushai also 16, 16.

(cf. i

probably a court-title
early period,

Ki.

4, 5),

as

it

Ch. 27, 33 (jn) was was also in Egypt from an

at the

courts of the Ptolemies

and Seleucidae

(cf.

318
i

The Second Book of Samuel,

2, 18.
:

Mace.

10, 16. 19. 20. 65.

s.v.,

Mace,
p. 272.

i,

14. 7, 14. 8, 9. 10, 13.

14,

n)
i.

see jZ?.

and Kennedy,
to enter
:

NID^ DlbBONl]

went on

Tenses,

27 y

Davidson, p. 69.

16,

Dyo]

only here of space.

but
fruits
7, i

D^ploV, as I 25, 18.

pp] summer-fruits,
time of vintage
2.
"]b

belonging to the
:

late

summer, the
figs.

(Is. 16, 9.

Mic.

cf.

Jer. 40, 10, 12), probably

to

nbtf

no]

what are these

excellently,
5. 8

to

thee,with reference

thee?
?

idiomatically
37, 18 end.

and

What

meanest thou by these

ba
"|b

AV., So Ez.

Gen. 33,

nin

mnon

^O; and similarly Ex. 12,

26 aab nsrn

mayn

no. Jos. 4, 6 nab

nbsn D^ann no.

an example of the accidental repetition of Dnbnbl] a preceding word, such as has taken place a letter from though it is in Is. 32, i b not there corrected by the Massorah
b affords
.

The

onyan bissb] (GK.

3.

Cf. Ex. 17,

oyn

mwb:
n.

is.

51, 10 n bito

-nyb

n5
ac"

f
)-

nan]

without Nin;
I 15, 28.

cf.

on

I 16,

nisboo]
5.

See on

Nil]

Irregular.

Read probably Restore N3*l cf. on I

;

i,

12.

Dnnn]
N12]
Jud.
3,

See on

3,

6.

Probably the Benj. clan of

15 N1J

this

name (Gen.
l^n
Tjb n.

46,

21);

cf.

1VW.

^pOl Nir Nr]

unusual:
P.ppJ

Comp.
;

Jer.

41, 6

H3>

The
Is.
iii.

type

is

N1if ^?f

would be the ordinary one: see on 16,

.

12.

For the

inf.

abs. after the ptcp., see also v. 13. Jos. 6, I3 a b

Jer.

22, 17^

nby ^DVl.
8. 9.

23, 17 IIOS

nno (GK.

ii3

r
^</y

Kon.

22O a ).

iny")2

"J3ni]

and behold, thou

Cf. 1 24, 15
*3

art in thy calamity. II 9, 8.

nrn

non a^an]
*ai
let

no aba;

10. Kt.

fe
him

^?;

Qr6

fe

sense

So

curse, for, etc.

na] The Qr6 gives the best The Kt. is, If he curseth, and if
124), shall

Yahweh
say
KO.I
.

hath said to him, Curse David, who, then (Tenses,

?

so

We. Now.

But
(cf.

this is

not very natural.

icvpios
.

LXX
.
. .

have

a<ere

avrov KOI OVTWS

Qre) Karapacr^w on

Luc. Kai

a</>T

avrov, SLOTL (Kt.) Karaparai poi,

">

on

KvpLos

whence Klo. Sm.

ai

Bu.
If

mn

he curseth

nb) b^l ib wan. Yahweh hath said to him, me,

<?

(as

Ehrl.
etc.

mn*
"3.b^

12. Kt. Oiya]

i.e.

^y.?

<?

<?

iniquity, i.e. the iniquity

done

to

me.

319
But
this

would be rather

Don; and the sense expressed by LXX,

"^V^,

Pesh. Vulg. upon

my

affliction, i.e.

is

altogether preferable.

The

expression
2
9>

B
("OjrnS)
""^J??

3JH

nO
eye,

is

common
is

one:

I i,

n. Gen.
Jews

32

(Q

upon mine

which

interpreted by the

see
s

AV. marg.
n?7p]
i.e. the

to

mean my
however

tears!}

curse uttered

upon me

cf.

(Ehrl.)

Gen.

27, 13

"|Iwp.

According
reading.
13.

to Baer,

(p. 113), the

Qr6

iri77p is the true

Mass.

77P1

"Jlbn

Tj^h]

should doubtless be restored.

the
inf.

Another irregular type. The normal See on I 19, 23; and ch. 13, 19. For
7.;>j^

abs. after the ptcp., see

on

v. 5.
:

UIDy?]

over against him

i,
i,

AV. RV.
20. 21.

more

exactly, parallel with

him: alongside him: Ez.

nayi]
(Ehrl.),

frequentative (I

3).

Either 7 jam for 7PD

!,

or

"ISyi

7gD1

carrying on

7.?P_,

would make the sequence more

of a place

regular,

and

be an improvement.
14.

D^y] The name

place

is
DB>

imperatively
in clause b}.

demanded
Either

in

clause a (on account of both

is this

NT1 and

D^y

though

it

has not the appearance of a prop, name, and

would naturally signify weary (LXX e/cXeXD/teVoi) or the name has disappeared from the text, having either been corrupted into D^y, or
fallen out beside
after E^D
it,

owing

to its graphical similarity with

it,

Lucian

Klo., ingeniously, suggests -n-apa jny. (Jos. 1 8, 24); but though Ophni was a Benjaminite town, we do not know that it was in a suitable position,

y has

TOV Iop8dvriv=] :r^.

psyi] Ex. 23, 12. 31, iff. and 15. ^KIB^ B*N Dyn bai]
Israel.

all
is

the people,

even the

men

of

But Dyn
to

is

superfluous and

not expressed in

LXX.

It is

further

be observed that throughout the narrative Dyn 73 are

regularly with David: the

1

^Xl^

B"N

^D are with Absalom.

No

doubt

word has come

8.
N^>]

into the text

by error from the

17
is

line above.
(cf.

Here, of course, the Qre

necessarily right
17

on

I 2, 3).

Notice the emphatic position of both

13.
13,
5.

and inx
will
5,

so e.g.
be,

Dt.

6,

nMN
will
I

17

may mean
;

either,

His

or
\ty.

(Ehrl.)

For him
al.

be

cf.

Gen. 31, 42. Jos.

13

end.

118, 6

320
19.

The Second Book of Samuel,

cb]
b -iny, as I 4, 9; Jud. 2, 13.
s

Perhaps
TlX
20. rrcy

rny

should be read (Ehrl.)

cf.

Ki. 12, 6. 8

al.

p] ^sb
1

iTH, as 19, 14 (see note): cf.

jab

1y I

16, 22.

nab inn] Jud.

8, 4.

20, 7

nbn

rrcyi

-m

DDb ian: nab inn also

b
).

Dt.

i,

13. Jos.

The

reflexive b (Lex.
I 13, 4.

5i5

21.

TQXTIN
bnsn]

nt?K33]

See on

22.

/fo bridal lent of the Semites,

which has survived,

in the

canopy of the Jewish wedding ceremony, to the present day (Sm.). The nsn of Joel 2, 16. f. 19, 6. Cf. W. R. Smith, Kinship and
Marriage,
bx-IK"

p.

168

f.,

ba

^yb]
ns to]

ed. 2, p. 199 ; b i2 b Cf. 12,

Z>.5.

iii.

272

n
b

23.

biW
i.

sc.

?U$n.

The Qre t^x

is

not needed.
reflexive b
s
is

17,

wmms] LXX
verb,

wmnnN. The

idiomatic

with

this

especially

where one person

choice

is

opposed,

expressly or
24, 22.
2.
i

by

implication, to that of another:

Gen.

13,

u.
e
).

Jos.

Ki. 18, 23 etc.

Nini]

ytf
11

a circumst. clause (Tenses,

160

GK.
is

i4i

DH
3.

nan] 3^ ban

Cf.

on

4,

i.

For

"rrnnrri,

see on

I 15, 18.

315^3]
all

as the return of the whole,

the

man whom
substantially

thou seekest;

the people shall be at peace

(Keil,

and

in the clause at ban).

RV., disregarding the accentuation, which places the greatest break This is explained to mean that if the person
s

of David be secured by Absalom

adherents,

it

will

be tantamount
unnecessary
is

to securing the return of the people generally.

to

But

it is

point out

expressed,

how awkwardly, and and how little consonant

is

inaccurately, the

comparison
is

with

Hebrew

style

the abrupt

ness with which the last clause

attached to the one containing the

comparison.

The

difficulty
full
;

is

which exhibits the

mutilated fragment

text,

removed by the reading of LXX, of which MT. has preserved only a

rj
vv/j,(j>r)

ov rpoirov tTrto-T/ae^ti

777)09

TOV av8pa

avrjjs*

TrXrjv ^VXTJV evos avSpos crv ^rtis,

:i

/cat TTO.VTL

TW Xaw

Icrrat ev eipr)vjj

Dyrrbai

trjjnD nrix
all

ins

^N

tysa

pn Pie^wrbM

nb?n aiB J

And

I will

bring back

the people unlo thee as a bride returneth to her

husband : thou
be
at peace.

letters

of one man, and all the people will and the eye passed from riB^N bx to copyist which remained were re-grouped (BNn ban for B*K nban) and
seekest but the life
s

B>*N;

XVL
altered, for the

19

XVII.

321

purpose of extracting from them the best sense possible under the circumstances.
Dvt?]
a
(virtual) accus., the predicate to

nTT

The

substantive

verb,

as Arabic

shews,

is

construed

in

pointed opposition to the

principles of
D1?B>

Greek and Latin syntax

with an accusative^-.
:

Elsewhere

itself

often constitutes the predicate

see

on

16, 4.

5.

xnp] Better, with

LXX, %qp.
135^.
<

xin D: van]
6.

GK.

nnx pX DX] MSS. have pX DX]) 30

Jud. 9, 15. 20.
8.
,

in

if

not,

speak thou
i
"3JN

pN DX

(for

which some
Ex. 32, 32.

as Gen. 30,

nno pX

DX1.

2 Ki. 2,

10

2
.

his

ji 3 nx nyT nnx] i.e. 7%0# knowest that thy father and men were mighty men; as Gen. i, 4 31D = TXH FIX And he saw that the light was good/ and frequently (GK. n^end). K DJ no] Cf. Jud. 18, 25. Rather differently from I i, 10. 22, 2.
,
,
"O

X"m

DJ?n

nx

1*7"

X7i]

will not

experienced

man

of war, will

pass the night with the people/ but, as an place himself somewhere where he

cannot be surprised.
9. r,rX3]

Read

-into:

HHD

is

masc. (18, 17), the n being radical;

nnx arose probably from

cf.

the following D finsn.

int<3.

With D^nnsn inxn,

2

12.

Gen. 37, 20
1

mi nn

Jud. 19, 13.

Ki.

2,

16; comp.

also r^. 2,

8 D

3Xn nnS 3 (see note).

Strictly an accus. of limitation

will subsist as peacef the accus. defining the

ii.

manner in which the subsisting takes place (Wright, Arab. Gr. with Rem. c h 74).
, ;

41

cf.

44,

The athnah appears

meaning
Shall

to be right (against

We.).

Had

it

been a disjunctive

not? speak thou (i.e. had a verb to be supplied mentally after DN), N? DK, not pN ON, would have been in
question,

we do

after his saying, or

accordance with usage

see

Gen. 24, 21 K^

DN UTt

niif rivJfnn. 37,32. Ex.

"jip^n.

16, 4 vb DN Tnira -pTi. NU. u, 23 tb DK N^ DX imXO. Jud. 2, 22: we have also N^5 DN

N? DX. But in a disjunctive question and where, therefore, a subst., not a verb, has to be mentally supplied: Ex. 17, 7 i ^n, Nu. 13, 20 px DX py na K^n (in Gen. 24, 49 PX DX

io nn in Gen. 27, 21 ^3 HT nnSH pX ON is only used where W* DX precedes,

Dt.
8, 2
(

nm

imp
after

"

DX1 Absalom
X^>

D^bty

02^

DX).

la" !

is

to

be taken in a pregnant sense:

s
full.

invites

Hushai not merely

to say

whether he agrees with Ahitophel

advice or not, but, ?yhe disagrees, to state his views in

1365

322
Era ^233]
there
fall

The Second Book of Samuel,

D!13 has

no antecedent
the people ;

read with Luc. DJD,

first

when
s

(some) among
See on

the

reverse

among Absalom

followers will create a panic (v. 10).

yocvi yotri]
10.
z,
.

16, 4.

^n p
And
DJ
(

03 Nini]

Whether

xini be taken as referring to

yo$n.

he, even (though) a

man

of valour

),

or (Sm.) forwards to

ivn

And

he, (I

mean) even

the valiant

man

),

the sense

is

forced,

more
Now.).

natural

and Nin seems superfluous. Luc. rvrn sentence, and is probably the

for N1H1 yields a

much

original
4,

reading (Bu.
i

n*m

will

then be introductory, as Ex.

n.

Ki. 17,

4.

19, 17.

20, 6 (Tenses,

121 Obs.

i).

EVV. do

not translate Kin.

i/r.

DO

11

DOIT] DDE, except in the poetical passages, Is. 10, 18.

).

58, 8

(1DKO
(Jos.

11

112,
ii.
5,

10,
i.

is

always,
Is.

when used
19,
i

figuratively, joined with

:

3^

2,

7, 5.

13, 7.

al.)

no doubt

in the thought
is suffi

of the speaker, though not in grammatical construction, 13?

ciently near to indicate what part of the ?*n

the

words

DJD

11

DEH

referred to.
11.

Tivy

13]

For

does not seem

in place:

reason for anything that has preceded.

EVV.

TiVy cannot give the but 13 only But

:

means but

after a negative.

Keil, better,
"O,

Surely;

and there are

places (Lex, 47 2 the cases noted

e) in

which

even standing alone, and so unlike

;

but they are ib. d, appears to have this meaning and many also are doubtful certainly, for instance, the meaning rare, If any conjunction were is not needed in I 17, 25. 20, 26 EVV. needed here, it would be i??, not 3 this, however, has no support
:
:

from the Versions, and

is

is

not a probable corruption of

3.
3
""rf

^f3 ?]
?
f??]
5ri OVTWS

the best

suggestion that has

still.

been made

would be

better

VW
3"Jip

(Ehrl.)

and

pjr

nb 3 (We. Bu.),

after
S

LXX
3,

a-vp.(3ov\fv(av

eyw

o-vvefiovXfvo-a, retains the unsuitable

besides being

rather a heavy sentence, esp. before ^IPN^ ^DNn.

3,nj53

DWn
if

T JBl]
9.

<fa///<?

is

an

Aramaic word,
(if/.
?

in

Hebrew
should

mostly,

not entirely, confined to late writers

55. 68. 78. 144.

wzzi/y/

Job 38. Qoh.

be read with

Zech. i4t).
Pesh. Vulg.

No

doubt D2^i?3

/^ r

LXX,

70B]=thy presence: comp. Ex. forth VJB3 with His presence.

33, 14.

Dt. 4, 37 brought thee

XVII.
12.

9-1 6
must be
right.

3 23
Dlpo
is

nblpEn nnNU]
In Gen. 18, 24

The Qre

*iriK21

so

constantly masc., that in the three exceptions the text can hardly be
right.
"I3"!p2

may
:

well be the original reading, or the

in

suff. in fiS^P.3

an error

might Job 20, 9 UTiKTl might easily be due to the preceding s^Din and nnxs here, and in iJTie", many MSS. (v. Kitt.) in v. 9, is probably due to the following fem.
refer to

T yn

for

termination of ntolpD.
i:njl]

and we will

light

(as
is

Gen. 42, n. Ex.

16, 7. 8.

upon him/ Others take 13H3 as=13n3X Nu. 32, 32. Lam. 3, 42t) but a verb
;

desiderated.
it

with dew:

is

chosen on account of the comparison used also of locusts (Ex. 10, 14) and flies (Is. 7, 19).
verb nii
is

The

hs

11

"1BW3

the impf. in a comparison, expressing what

i,

is

usual, as

regularly, e.g. 19, 4. Dt.

i3~"irn3

44. Is. 29, 8 etc.

NT)]

__

for

_,

on account
is

of the tone leaving

it

(GK.

29

"

h
).

The

jussive form

unusual: I 14, 36 (Tenses,

50 Obs.;

GK.
13.

109*).
. . .
"Vy

Read probably
i>K

ft info.

^K immediately after DK for emphasis. Cf. I 2, 25 (mrvb DXl); Ex. 21, 9. vpW = wtihdraw himself: cf. Ex. 9, 19; and fpX of withdrawing or receiving into a house (Dt. 22, 2;
DNl]
Jos. 2,
1

TV

ch. ii, 27).

IN^m] The Hif.only

py DD1X

Lev. 22, 16 besides, in a different application

/o

IN^m

<ra?i-^

them

bear guilt.

Here

<:<7.sv?

(men)

to

bring

ropes = cause ropes to be

brought.
ny, as after

NEO] The
DN
ib.

fut. perf. after

EX ny Gen.

24,

19; nc X iy

28, i5al. 14, 20.

14. TOyai?]

Ex. 20, 20t.

Jos. 7, 20.
2 Ki. 5, 4.
9,

15.
"OK

nNTm HNTD] So
<i

i2f.

Cf.

n,

25.

Is. 20,
1 6.

nvy] /(emph.) counsel: 6 i3ms ata) 7x1. Ez. 1 6,

12, 28.

2 Ki. 10, 4

IJmN icy: TNI.

I 9, 20.

60. 62.
:

J^PrvK]

The

tone

is

drawn back by ^S
swallowed up
to

see

on

nnnyn]
pn^ fD]

See on 15, 28.

lest
it be

the king =lest the king

be swallowed up (\.e.Jig. undone, destroyed: 20, 19. 20, and often

in poetry).

Nu.

1 6,

29

on^y

Impersonal passives occur, though nps? onxn hi rnpB DK if #

.

rarely,

in

Hebrew

with (cogn. accus.)

Dt. 21, 3

/o nn 13y N7 IK N wherewith
w^</

them
//

had

Y 2

324
not been worked.
^""isy

The Second Book of Samuel,

4 12

12^ N7

"lt?N.

Is.

14, 3 the hard labour

16, 10.

wherewith (accus.) it was worked with thee. XB~)3. Ez. 1 6, 34 H311 X7 "plHKI. Lam. 5, 5
//

53, 5

wTWTK?

uya*

we
the

are wearied,

is

not respited to
7

us=\ve
(as

are not respited.

7 y?2*

would be the passive of

y?2

rein in

Lam. of? D^O),

7 being the wo/a accusativi, as I 23, 10. 17.

31

H37m

D^Dy]

used

to

go and

tell

them, and

were staying at En-rogel, and a maid they (emph.) would go and tell the king
;

and express how communication was regularly maintained between David and his defined in the narrator s mind friends in the city. nnQBTl the maid
for they could not, etc.

The

tenses are

all

frequentative,

by her being chosen (comp. on I 19, 13).

for this office

from our point of view, a maid

i6t as on the boundary
line

73~rpy] mentioned in Jos. 15,

7.

18,

between Benjamin and Judah, and evidently

of Ben-Hinnom.
of Job
for

at the foot of the valley

In

all

probability the present

Bir Eyyub, the Well

Joab ), S. of Jerusalem, at the junction of the Valley (? of Kidron from the N., and the Valley (t^a) of Ben-Hinnom (7H3) from the W. See G. A. Smith, Jerusalem (1907), i. 108 ff.

XTl] On this particular occasion, however, a lad saw them and told Absalom. The tense used, unlike those in v. 17, describes
1 8.

a single act.

Comp.
171]

the similar

change

to n22ni in I i, 7 b .

VlXPQ

"IN2

Cf.

on

I i, 2.
:

19. TjDEin]

GK.

i26 r

cf.

on

I 19, 13.

niann]

Prov. 27, 22

xb rriann -pro t^roca y-isn nx cnnsn DN

is

?i D TlDn.+

The meaning
is

uncertain.
apa.<f><aO

No
;

\/e)n or

P|"i

with

a suitable meaning

known.

LXX
//.e

Luc. Theod. TraAaflas

pearl-

(cakes of compressed fruit);

barley); Aq. Theod.
in

Aq. Symm. Tmcravas (peeled or

o-w
e/A7TTtcrcro/x.eVa)v

Prov. ev

(things peeled

or brayed:

see

TrnWw
)^o>

in Liddell

and Scott);

Vulg. (both times)

ptisanas ; Pesh.
in Prov.

(hordeum decorticatum, PS.); Targ. jvpT dates:

ev /neo-w trweSptov (cf. Tg. Pesh.). Something pounded (or be the result of pounding) in a mortar, and be dried in the sun, must be intended but that is about all that the word can be said. Kimchi bruised corn: so RV. Pointed

LXX

oddly

that could both be

rr>B"),

might=iL>li,

(from

o^J)

broken or crumbled pieces (Lane,

1118):

XVII.
but the sense Abfdlle (Schulthess,

11-2}

325
1905, p. 357
f.)

ZAW.
as

does not

seem probable.
OS]

^ TOD
MSS.
73*0]

(see

on

12, 5),

Nu. 33, 8 rwnn

SO

(so
:

Sam.

Onq. Pesh. Vulg.) for

other
20.

mTin
is

OSO.

So Tg. Vg. and 10 MSS.

several

also have

a on the margin.
doubtful.
J&>,

The word

even supposing that 73^?

well,
is

were a legitimate formation from

to

it,

is

word used of a

meaning
73

contain black

and muddy water: not

1

only, however,

D not

a legitimate formation from a root P? ?, but the sense obtained would

be questionable and unsatisfactory: Ges. rivulus

is

parum aquae

continens

arbitrary.

Assyrian

a Friediich Delitzsch (Ass. 7i8 ) compares the mekaltu, a word not hitherto found in a connected text,

HWB.

but explained in a syllabary as meaning a water-trough or waterchannel: but such a derivation is precarious. The Versions render

no

help.

Sovres;

LXX TraprjXOav fJLtKpov TOV Targ. MTV ray naa; Pesh.

continuing
Luc.)

v8aro<s

Luc. 8i\-r)Xv@a(ri
(

<nrev-

kx*s

^oo^ o;^-X

they have

passed on hence,

because they sought water and found

none
aqua.
is

) ;

Vulg.
If the

(cf.

Transierunt festinanter, gustata paululum

corrupt,
to
it

word be not

is

one of which the meaning

is

unknown.

PX VPfofrom here

(Ehrlich)

a plausible emendation.

Bu. suggests rnnp.

22.

ins nyj Anomalously

for

^HX

so Gen. 48, 22.

Is.

27,

12.

Zech.
si. c.,

Obviously the form, though in appearance that of the cannot be so really though why in these four instances the

n,

7.

vowel of the ultima should remain against custom unlengthened in the st. abs. (and so the pathah of the penultima be preserved) it is
impossible to say: the passages do not resemble each other in any
other

common

feature

and the form

"IHK

occurs
cf.

elsewhere

too

frequently in

the flow of speech

it

on

"ins,

130^), for

to

(Ew. be reasonably attributed

267^;

GK.

96 Rem.

to that cause, as

Ew.

suggests, in these four passages.

is

As

in

many

other cases, the

anomalous form
in the tradition

due in

all

probability to

an accidental corruption

which the punctuation represents.

~ny3.

JO]

the pf. in pause.

The

case

is

not one in which N7 might,

exceptionally, be construed with a ptcp. (Tenses,

23. irpa

162

.).

^N 1^1]

i.e.

gave his

last

directions to his family:

cf.

326
2 Ki. 20,
is
i

The Second Book of Samuel,

(=

Is.

38, i) -]rV3^

IV.

In

New

Heb. nxjx

is

a zw //.

It

a pity that the obscure

set his

house in order

has been retained

in

RV.
pJ.n l]

In pause for

P?.H !:

cf.

on

I 15, 23.

The word

exemplifies

well the reflexive sense often expressed by the Nifal.

24. riD ono]

On Mahanaim,
Ki.
2, 5.

see pp. 241, 245.

is

25. Nt?j; nKl]

Notice the order: NS^DJ?

32.
i

put

first

for emphasis.

In

Ch.

2,

17 in*.

The
with
i

Israelite!

^NJJOB jn /&? Ishmaelite must be read,

for a notice of 27, 30.

2, 17 and LXX (Cod. A) here; Ishmaelite among David s subjects, see i Ch.

Ch.

another

KTU]

In

Ch.

2, 1

6 Abigail is said to be the daughter of Jesse,

and

sister

how
of

the

It is uncertain of Zeruiah (mother of Joab) and David. two statements are to be reconciled. Luc. and other MSS.
leo-o-at

LXX

have

here (so Now.)

but that

may

be a harmonizing

in According to (formerly), here by error from p just below. Now, however (Isr. u. Jild. Gesch? 56 n.}, We. considers that greater weight should be attached
alteration.
B>nj

We.

and Bu. t?m ra came

to this passage than to

Ch.

perhaps,

if

the

word

is

correct,

Nahash
sure

was
that

either the first

husband of David

mother, or

(if

we were

Nahash was

woman s name)

a second wife of Jesse.

:

26. Tj^an
27.
"at?]

px]

in the land of Gilead

cf. p.

37 n.

whom
"121

son of Nahash, and consequently brother of Hanun ( i o, i ), David, after his capture of Kabbah (12, 29-31), had pre

sumably made governor of the Ammonites. See on 9, 4, where also hvf O S p

xi>]

T3D

is

mentioned as

the

protector of Mephibosheth.

this

vfia] no doubt, Nestle is right (AJSL. 1897, p. 173) in regarding name not as connected with ?n^) but as a compound of the
"I?

Aram.

son with ^f, the

pr.

n.

of

some person,
(21, 8);
this

place, or

God.

Another
CilDD,

7na comes from Meholah

^n3
19),

has a son

other

name presumably derived from o.xio to be has a son ^"Hy, who married Merab (I 18,
a

blind,

and

the

i.e.

(from

*x)

Help of God/ or

My

help

is

God

= Heb.

^15?),

both

likewise suggesting

D 9:n]

19, 32t.

Aramaean surroundings The site is unknown.

(Nestle).

XVII.
27 -29
b
a.

2)
,

XVIII. )
(i) for 3D5TO

327

IN an

33B>D

UB>1]

LXX

have

Kotras *ai

d/x</>tra7roi;s,

i.e.

(Se*a,

as Klo.

acutely saw, being

miswritten, or misread,

^1^)
is

D ^?"!P
31,

3 |^*? nbny
cf.

couches for lying

9, 25).

down and
(2)

rugs

(Pr. 7, 16.

32f:

*m,
2

restored in I

For the

order,

which

unusual, but adds emph. to the subj.

d),

(Tenses,

208. 3; GK. 142* however, an incongruity in the

comp.
as

Ch. 31,

6.

There

is,

text,

among

the things brought

at the beginning are obviously unsuitable. ^31 (Sm. Now. Bu.), and the difficulty dis . brought couches for lying down, and get viz. and basons, and earthen vessels and offered wheat, and barley, rugs, B^n is rightly used of offering etc., to David and to his people to eat.

to

David ^ON^ those

"W

IN^n after appears we then

Insert
:

food: Gen. 27, 25. Jud.

6, 19.
:

I 28, 25.

28. riiap] bowls or basons

^P Ex.
7,

12, 22. Zech. 12, 2.

Hab.

2,

15
b

(read

^^n

PI|); nisp

Ki.

50.

2 Ki. 12,

14; Q SD

Jer. 52,

igf.

a common food in the East 6p1 (i)] parched corn, cf. Lev. 2, 14 17, 17. 25, 1 8. Lev. 23, 14. Ru. 2, i4t
;

(DB.

ii.

27

):

N2 ^J3 TUN.

Jos. 5, n(<%

blB] foa/w (Ez. 4, Qt);

4, 9t): see

and D Bny

lentils (23,

n. Gen.

25, 34. Ez.

DB.

iii.

28.

^pl (2)]

not expressed in

LXX,
:

Pesh.

and evidently repeated

/3ow, Luc. yaXaftyva ofkme s milk ;

by

error.

29.

1P2

niDEJ

tJ>

only here

LXX

o-a</></>w0

/xoaxapia sucking calves; Targ. plin

3?m

P3313 cheeses

Pesh.

jol?
:

UaoL^f& Mf
but

unsuitable

how

ni2B>

Cheeses would be not of kine (so EVV.). would come to mean this, is not apparent.

Wetzstein

(ZAW.

1883, p. 276), upon doubtful grounds, would render

iii.

3091) emends riiDNB (from e]N? crush}, which he conjectures to have meant dried curds, which, down and mixed with water, form a refreshing beverage.
cream
;

Kennedy (EB.

PpK>

to

rubbed

18,

2.
is

rvt^l] Luc. erpicr(Ti;cre=^.?^l

the

which, as the less

common

word,
3.
y\

more

likely to
vh~\

be original (Sm.).
Cf.

So Klo. Bu.

Ehrl., etc.

3^

}yh$,

1!W

on

19, 20.

which nny ^J for now there are ten thousand such as we, Read with LXX, Symm. yields no sense agreeable to the context.
Vulg. nr,K for nriy;
for thou art the like of us (being) ten

thousand

328

The Second Book of Samuel,

thou
art
i

= for

worth ten thousand of

Ki.
i, 18. is

us.

nny and

nnt<

are elsewhere

confused,

cf.

20

MT.

and Versions.
either
1

~py]

the art.

needed.
or *tij.

Read

I"

?? ?, or
1

"^V?

(LXX),

followed by either
VTy^>

13.J?S>

But a Hif. of iry is Kt.] i.e. "V]J&:=Tffini> (as I 2, 28). doubtful (on 2 Ch. 28, 23, cf. on I 21, 7), and the yod may have
readily found
its

preceding Ty.
4.

way into the word through Read with the Qre the Qal

the

influence of the

">il$.

niXE^]

Cf. I 29, 2.

5. ^~L5N^] *? in vd?=gentfy, as in Pltt:^ (on c//. 15, n). /or me=.\ pray: comp. 2 Ki. 4,2423*6 ^""ivyn ^N slacken

6
/<?

lit.

not

the riding, except I

6.

tell

thee

and above, on

I 20, 20.

"iy,

Maatvav=D^nip, which Klo. adopts. However, DnStf] even on the E. of Jordan, might, from some circumstance
to us,
DK>

Luc.

unknown
7.
. . ,

have been called the D 13K

<-

">y*

(cf.

H. G. 335.).
:

And the slaughter was there great on that day, And there was a great slaughter there that day etc. (not, as RV., notice the art.; and cf. I 4, 10). The however (together with Ninn DV2), overweights the clause, and is not expressed by LXX.
Vim]
DE>,

Probably
is

it

was introduced here by error from the

After ?)^N D Hiry add, with

line

below where

it

in place.
8.

LXX,
1

B>"K.

niVSJ]

The
Qre

punctuation ri3D3
ri3?iS3,

is

hardly probable:

it

is

better
:

to follow the
cf.

and

to

suppose that

has become misplaced

on
9.

ch. 14, 14.

^27

.
N"ijj>n]

And Absalom happened by chance

.

(i,

with

"jab,

Dt. 22, 6) before

.,

i.e.

came

in front of
cf.

them

accidentally.

33"i

DvC ax i]

a circumst. clause:
set or put.

on

19, 9.

fJVl]

and he was

LXX

/ecu

eKpe/Aacr^, Pesh.

Targ.

w^Ulo^^^l
least iHin

(cf. 10), perhaps rightly (so Bu. Sm. Now. Dh.). does not occur elsewhere in a similar connexion.
i, i.
.
. .

At

10. nns* B^N] I

1 1.

ynE1
and

expressing

n:m] and lo, thou sawest and if thou sawest comp. on

JVN~>
:

more

vivid

I 9, 7

N^ n1

"1^

way of Him

fn]

Ex.

4, i
it

vyi]
devolved upon

and

me

to
;

would have been incumbent on me, would have as Neh. 13, 13 DHTlNi? pbrb DiT^yi; give:
!>y

^y

n>n

Ki. 4, 7 b

cf.

^. 56, 13

T"ru

^y,

etc.

(Lex. 753

c).

XVIII. 3-14
a girdle part of a soldier
s

329
;

would be a welcome present

accoutrement.

for
2,

it

Comp.
3,

Ki.

was a necessary and notice the

"tin

phrase for doing military service, 2 Ki. i Ki. 20, it nrisoa iah i6nrv ^N.
12.

21 r6yB! rnbn

?3D, and

n^ N

N^

.i^y ^JK K^l]

And though I were

fy.

weighing
3,

etc.

The sequence
<

of tenses exactly as
145.

81,

14-17;
the

Ki.

14 (with

fyf?)

Tenses,

We. Bu. Now., on

the

ground

that the payer,

not the receiver,

subj.,

weighs

money, would read

/PJ? (fp2

^N

the

forced,

and ^3JK cams pendens, GK. 145*): but the construction is and (Sm.) the meaning seems to be, If I were to feel the

weight of the

money

paid into

my

hand/

LXX

umy/ii (=/|^).

is

used as in

v.

n,

to subjoin

an emphatic exclamation: see on 24,

3, as the

3.

immediately follows

emph. word

in the sentence.

Such,
of

if
<7.

of the young man. the text be correct, must be the sense of P, on the analogy

TTDB ]

Have a

care, whosoever

ye

be,

TO

22. I 19, 3,

though no example occurs even of TO entirely

pjoi,

parallel.
v. 5,

LXX

<iAadTe

Pesh.

oo?>/,

i.e.

rv!CW

as

probably rightly (so Bu. Now. Sm.).

npB>

13.

1B>BJ3

JVBT? IK]

Or

if

(GK.

159)

had
his

dealt against
soul)

his

life

falsely
is

(lit.

had wrought falsehood against

then (Tenses,

and

nothing

hid from the king

124) thou wouldst stand

aloof

(i.e.

wouldst do nothing to shield me).

v.

LXX
"W

joins the

first

three words to

12^, reading /n) Troujo-cu KT\.

i.e.

I^SJa nVt?y

Have
follows

a care, I pray you, of the young man, even of Absalom, so as

life falsely.

not to deal against his

:

for (l)njJD

:wnn

does not agree with what nnsi cannot mean and thou wouldst have

But

this

to stand before
of,

him

(the king)

HJJJD

never means simply in the presence

but either

from

the presence
2
]

of

(Is. i,

16) or (absolutely) at

a distance (Gen. 21, 16.

14.

Ki.

3, 22. 4, 25), aloof.

yisb n^HK
i.e. I will

tfi5

Not

so would I fain wait (I 10, 8) before

thee,

not delay here in your presence

while you are

allege.

making

up your mind

on any such pretexts as you

N? must be

regarded as negativing p, not joined with the cohort, (which svould The sense thus obtained is not, however, very good. require ^K).

LXX,

in the

first

of

its

second being ov\ ovrws

Targ. express
"^nK

two renderings (8ta TOVTO l-yw /xevco), which is the only one
feb

ap^o/j-ai

the

in Luc.,

and
will

""^K

Therefore (see on

28,

2)

33
begin before thee

The Second Book of Samuel,

;

so Bu.

Now.

Kit.

Dh.
s

Ehrlich

conjecture yields
:

a thought more in accordance with Joab

sturdy independence
!

}3

N^>

V33 n|HN

Not

so will I court his (the king s) favour

I/A.

D Oat?] rods or clubs (II 23, 21 ; 23, 4), which, however, would not be thrust into the heart. darts Read, with LXX fitX-rj,

&$$

(so
s

Th. We. Bu. Now.

etc.).
t

n wny] Cf. 12, 21; i Ch. 12, i: Tenses 161 0fa. 2; GK. Bu. rightly objects to beginning ^.15 with ^n I3*1iy (Th. Now. To express the sense While he was yet alive, ten young men al.).

156.

surrounded him,

Heb. idiom would require (though

construction, Try
is

in the

examples

we have
f

of the
, .

usually followed by a ptcp.)

y\

3D

onw

m-?yi (not
1|
"
<1

-ny
. ,

mm,
.

Sm.)

*n

imy

(not ttb;i)
,/,.

see

Dmt? pa irny npan, Nu. u, 33 cjn mn PJNI f. cf. on I 14, 19 and see Lex. 729*; Tenses, 30 169.
:

78,

nfatn nbn]

nb as in the phrases D^aba, Ex.

1 5,

al.

in the heart of

the sea;
1

D"

!^

3^3

^. 46, 3

al.

OBM

ni?"ny

Dt.

4,

n.

6.

Pj

Tip]
l]

See on

I 23, 28.

17.
18.

in^
np^ ]
:
1

IB^I would be
For
this

better (Bu.): see Jos. 7, 26. 8, 29.

cf.

use of

np^>,

17, 19.

(In Nu. 16,

DgJ!

must

be read

so Bo.

We.

Dillm. etc.)
Is.

rD
abs.
I 24,

nx]
form
is

Elsewhere, except

6,

13 (in a different sense), the of the

art. is irregular

always n23TO.
i,

The absence

(on
in

6; ch.

10); and no doubt

roxon should be
Gen. 35, 20
;

read.

rux

the sense of a sepulchral stele occurs

and the corres

ponding Phoen. form

rQD
NJta
i.
11

occurs often in this sense, as Cooke,

18,
i
(

NSI.
inter

15,

(see the note).

16, i.

= CIS.
among

i.

58) K K

DTU nnXO

Wmx^

^vh IDXiny
also, in

The

pillar

the living (the cippus

m vos,

CIS.
(all

59) which

Abd-osir set up to his father,

to Archetha,

19,

from Kition
s,

in Cyprus),

No.

is

an instance

of a
it

pillar, like

Absalom

set

up

by the person himself whose grave

(this) pillar in

marks.

Abd-osir ... set up

my

life-time over

my

resting-couch for ever.

l^nn poyn] Gen.

1DB>

14, 171-.
to his

by]

according

DvK>3K

T]

"V

as I

(Lex. 754 ). 15, 12 in the sense of sign, monument.

:

name

Ex. 28, 21

al.

Cf.

is.

D n :56, 5 ^J
19.

VTN TD

HliT IDStT

a]

Cf. 0. 31,

and on

I 24, 1 6.

XVIII. 14-23
20.

33
b
)

by
:

"o]

the

Qre
.

p by (Gen. 18, 5 al. Lex. 475 has fallen out before the following p.
"a

must be read with

2i b
32.

Bna]

No

doubt
is

^E lan

should be read, as zw. 2i a

particular Cushite (i.e.
s

22. 23. 31.

slave,

The

reference

to

some

Nubian)

or negro (Jer. 13, 23),

22.

among David

attendants.

-m
nnK

1
")

,
fp>l]

GK.

I2I d

no wi] no as Job 13, 13 no by -nyi JK mmKi and let come upon me z#^a/ will (Lex. 553 b c).

"ODC

i^nnn=

p
i.e.

m nob] 12, 23 ns jx nr nob. see on I i, 26. Merely an orthographic variation for HNifb Probably no message finding or attaining (aught)/ PNJ
napl]

mB>2

no message that will secure you a reward (cf. LXX ets w^eAtW). But the expression is peculiar and other suggestions have been made RV. m., Ehrl. no sufficient message with regard to it. but it is
:

doubtful whether

NO
n,
is

itself

means

to

suffice,

and whether

in
is

the

three passages (Nu.

22

bis.

Jud. 21, 14) in

which Dnb (l)NO

lit.

so
one

rendered, the rend,

(or they)
10, 10
:

not a paraphrase, the

(cf.

rend, being

found
the

for

them

the Nif.,

lit.

be

found, Jos. 17, 16. Zech.

ib.

emend. DvBTP

^^iy

HXifOX

12, 5

is

very doubtful).

We. Bu. Now. punctuate

Ki. 12, 13. 12,

J"1NO

(Hof.)

no reward
out] to thee

for
:

good
cf.

tidings

(as 4, 10) will be brought forth

2

{paid
"|N

NXJ,

lrtn

and

ja3<^

tOfiL V", frequently.

HO Wi] ~D3n "pi]

23.

Prefix, with
<5y

LXX,

V
I,

as

Hebrew idiom

requires.

The

^(i.e. here through} the Oval, viz. of Jordan. word bears a specific geographical sense, and denotes the broad,
ze;^y

/^

and somewhat elongated plain N. of the Dead Sea Gen.

1
:

into

which the Jordan-valley expands

13, 12 132.1 ny. 19, 17. 25. 29. Dt.

34, 3;

"imn

PN
be

Gen.

19,

28;

pn n 133 Gen.

13, 10.

n.

Ki. 7,46.

133 means properly a round ; but as

this plain is

not circular, perhaps

we might
passage
tains

represent the

word by the term Oval.

The meaning

of the

will

that, while the Cushite went straight across the

from the

a detour,
the high

wood of Ephraim to coming down into the Jordan-valley, and

road through
it,

moun Ahima az made Mahanaim,

then following
it

and up whatever wady

might be (see

In Genesis
iii.

it

seems indeed to include more: see

iv. s.v.

my

note on 13, 10; and

(pp.

ct.

DB.

s.v.

PLAIN, 4;

VALE OF SIDDIM, and ZOAR

986 -987

a
).

332

The Second Book of Samuel,

route, though longer, and quicker than the one taken by the negro. *)& pi] i.e. in the space between the outer and inner DHJJC>n

pp. 241, 245), which led to

Mahanaim.

The

was

easier

24.

gates of the city gateway.

25.
26.
"iyj?ri )

npl
"WH

*]-6n

iW]

See on

I 14, 19.

i>K]

which

is

LXX, Pesh. Vulg. vocalized ^N even by Keil as preferable to MT. the king accepted
to the porter!
:

was

sitting within the gateway,

v.

24, the

watchman

called out directly

to him, v. 25,

and

here, v. 26^, receives

from him an immediate reply:

he

called,

therefore, not to the porter, but into ike gale, addressing

himself directly to David.

E^x

mn noN i]
1

Add, with
cleverly

LXX,

"ins.

28. N^p *!]

We.

2~1\>*\,

evidently unaware that his con

/cat

jecture was supported by Lucian

TrpocrrjX.Oei

Ax^aas.

In 27,

Ahima az
a
the king.
vasfj]
23),

is still at

a distance

his

drawing near

is

just a point which

Hebrew

narrator would mention, before stating that he addressed

In spite of Gen. 48, 12. Nu. 22, 31.

read, the
ib
).
*?

I 20,

41 (see on I 25,

VSN should probably be

(cf. Is.

being repeated by error from

the preceding Jttb

29.

32,

DvB ]

The Massorah
pTOD
So
1

(see Norzi,

Minhath Shot, ad

loc.)
4,

has

a note Dvfc n
2 Ki. 9, 19.

(above,

on

12, 5), viz. here, I

16,

and
in

MSS.
I

(see de Rossi).

And we

have

DvtJ>n

#.32.
y\

But see note on

WN"i]

I 16, 4.

saw the great commotion at Joab s sending the servant of the king and thy servant. But the position of 1NV
Keil
:

makes
is

this

rendering impossible.

In

all

probability

"pon

11J?

J"IN

a correction, intended as a substitute for the less courtly second

"ply

person

nx.

The

correction found

its

way

into the text, in a

the conjunction 1 wrong place, by was added, for the purpose of producing the semblance of a coherent 3KV (PlVa) rblth hun ponn Wfcn sentence. Read, therefore,
J"IN

the side of the original reading,

and

ply.

So We. Kp. Stade, Klo.

with the

etc.

For no,
N^5.

cf.

Pr. 9, 13. I 19, 3.

Bu. Sm., however, suggest Xin^np TlSrv

Though

i>

inf. is

used in certain phrases, as

XVIII. 24
my,
to denote time

XIX. 8
;

333
in a case

(GK.

ii4

f n.

like this

analogy strongly requires 3 or l.

M-I^I]
TJ~
is
:

Lex. 517* 6 a end], So Bu. etc.

19,

i.

to shake or be agitated with

it is

some

force, e.g. of

mountains,

Is. 5,

25

also often used of strong mental agitation,

sometimes

in

anger
X>

(Is.

28, 21),

more often

fear

(Is.

32, 10.

n:

comp. the tt!

of Dt. 28, 65).

Here, not so

much

definitely in

grief, as through the shock

"iyK>n

the

flat

which paralysed and unnerved the king. JT^y] The nvy, or roof-chamber, was a chamber built on roof of an Oriental house (see illustr. in Moore, fudges, SHOT.
i,

Engl. ed., p. 59), Jud. 3, 20. i Ki. 17, 19. 2 Ki. a similar chamber on the top of the gateway.
31

2 al.

Here of

inrta

nX

roi]
its

The

entire narrative is

remarkable for both

its

minuteness and
Hex.,

vividness;

but especially so just here.

graphic inrta.

We.
Luc.

(Compos, des

p.

262)

calls attention to the

and other MSS. of

prefer.

LXX,

read, however, tab33,

which Bu. Sm. Ehrl.

Observe in what follows the feeling which David throws into

the expression of his sorrow

03

33 Ditaax
b
;

Tnnn ^

by

the addition of the

pronoun TllD
11

fJT

*D

(GK.
80.

i35

f
).

On

IJTID

jri

ns,

see

GK.

isi
2. 4.
cf.

Lex. 678bf.
H23]
, ,

J>3Nn;i

Tenses,

Nub

a^m]
The

Very idiomatic

see

GK.

i4

(with n.)

and

Gen. 31, 27.

DVD^n
(GK.
5.

Dyn]

art.

is

generic, as constantly after 3

and 155^3

126).

BK?]

Only here: comp. Bv, Bvn

I 21, 10.
cf. p.

Ki. 19, 13.

n.

Is.

25, 7t.
6.
7.

Prob. csb should be pointed (We.):

B>13:

168

n^ain] from N?
""3

GK.

78

The second
"^J

13 is

""I]

resumptive of the

first

(on I 14,

39).
8.

For 1B^
3^>

the verb

must certainly be read (Ehrlich).

al. cf.

^y

-m]

as

Is.

40, 2

3]
"V3D

as the text stands,

a will^z/^Zor. 473 a
that,

I 20, 13): but the

(on

I 12, 5)

OX
in

if

is

more

in

accordance with analogy:

DX and
Ex.
8,

the ptcp.
al.

the protasis, as I 19,

137).

n. Gen.

20, 7.

24, 49.

17

(Tenses,

nyn]

the 3 pf. fem. of the verb yy~i (as Dt. 15, 9)

h,

as

\j/.

106, 32.

334
9.
*p>n

The Second Book of Samuel,

3B?]

The

verse

should end here.

With the following

words the scene changes, and a

10.
strife!
its
f1"!3

different subject is introduced.

TPt]

And
is

all

the people were in a state of mutual

:

The

Nif. of jn
5i ):
!|

not found elsewhere

nrriJ

but such would be

force

(GK.

comp.
:

Job

23,

7,

and BE^3 p r

29, 9.

Luc. yoyyvovTs=f so Klo. and Sm. ( perhaps ), but only because the Nif. J113 does not occur elsewhere. TVl and the ptcp., as explained
-!

on

I 23, 26.

D1^2X
Gen.
is

^JJD]

The
25, 6;

people

picture

Absalom, as from one

13, 9. ii
;

whom

his presence

David as having encumbered

:

fled
cf.

from

?yft in
It

Ex. 10, 28; Neh. 13, 28 ^JJ

i?y

iniVOXl.

a strange remark of Bu. that

before the personal

name

schlecht

passt.

11.

At the end of

this verse,

LXX,

Pesh. express the clause which

stands

now

in

MT.

(with the addition of

"DTI.

im

as v.
^>tf)

i2 b

viz.
it is

jtan ^N N2

i>K"i5J

^3

Evidently
s

v. ii is its right
1

place
2a
:

required here to explain David

contrary, as

action described in
close

on the

i2 b

it

interrupts the
.

connexion which subsists

11

between i2 a and i3 a (It is followed in 12^ by the words in ! ^N repeated by error from the middle of the verse observe, "]i?n precedes each time.)
:

14. ntpn]

See on
"OS?

I 15, 5.

For Amasa, see

17, 25.
:

OS? iTnn] n\1 suggests the idea of being in a person s service cf. vsb "toy; and 2 Ki. 5, 2 b }yj nt^K vsb ^nm; and ch. 16, 19 end.
15.
?>

n
B>|]

So
r
),

Kit.:

but Gi. Baer Ol, with

;

many MSS.,
if

LXX,
(cf.
i

Pesh.
Ki.

(u^o^
3).

Vulg.

and

this

with

DN

is

obviously right

ii,

Targ.

"oariX,

as Jud. 9, 3,

which,

an exact

translation, implies the omission of JIN.

16. rfatan] 17.

See on

I 10, 8.

TVl] through which the Jordan runs,

1

viz.

from the hill-country of Judah

v.

to

the depression

25.

Cf.

Luke

10, 30.

8.

The

first

four words of this verse, describing

v.

who accompanied

Shimei, belong to

17: the rest of

v.

18 relates to Ziba, forming

with ip a (which ought to belong to 18) a sort of parenthesis: the

b purport of the allusion to Shimei appears in i9
ft.

n^on] GK.

97^.

XIX.
irvSl]
in

9 -i9

335
not otherwise occur
in

Of

uncertain meaning.
;

The word does

elsewhere,
it

a sense appropriate here

spirit, I 10,

means

Qal

to come
is

forcibly (of a

6
to

al.),

sometimes (though the Hif.

more
45, 5.

common
Is.

in

this

sense)

advance unchecked, to prosper

(i//-.

53, 10

al.).

Here, the rendering in closest accordance with the

is to

general meaning of the root

rush down

to,

dash into (comp.

LXX

KaTfvOwav came straight down

to :

word

excites suspicion

but

if

Vulg. irrumpentes Jordanem). The correct, it must be intended to indicate

the zeal with which Ziba and his the Jordan

in

men
N^VI
1

exerted themselves to reach

.

time to conduct the king across

v. 17,
jl

The

first

four words

of

v.

8 being joined to

is

left

without a predicate:

and
i

as the pred. introduced

:

by simple

is

barely defensible (2 Ki.

}

n,

Kt.

Tenses,

129),

it

is

better to suppose the

in/>.

to

have arisen by

dittography from inx, and to read simply

Render, therefore,

And

sped down to Jordan before the king, and crossed over the ford($Qz on v. 19) in order to bring the king s household over, etc.

Ziba

etc.

19.

miyn mnyi]
fro.

And
But

the

ferry-boat
is

crossed to and

mayn

kept passing over, not found elsewhere with

i.e.

the

meaning ferry-boat ; and probably we should

restore with We., after

LXX

(which here has a doublet, the

first

rend, being KCU IXeirovp-yrjo-av

n]v AeiToiy>yiav=rTnyn

myi)

n-nj?n

^iw,

or better yn rayi (freq.),

and they passed

the king
s

to

and

fro over the ford (15, 28) in order to bring

words
ants,

will
v.

household over, and to do what he thought good. The then describe the purpose with which Ziba and his attend
,

i8 b came

down

to the Jordan.

On

T2y?,

for

"V3yr6,

see

I 2, 28.

^Dt?l]

V. 19 should begin here (see above).

1"l3yn]

|TV2
marg.}:

as

he was about
It is

to

pass over Jordan

(so

RV.
shall

cf.

on

I 18, 19.

plain from vv. 34, 39

(Kimham

pass over with me), 40 that David did not cross until after the con
versation with Shimei.

"Qy

as

Is.

43,

2.

\j/.

66, 6.

In Arab, rvi?
T
;

is

rede

se

habuit : in Aram, to cleave (I 6, 14 Targ. Pesh.

whence Ges. (after Abu- lWalid) fiderunt transeundo (RV. 3 Targ.) 3^ went through). But such a sense would be isolated in Heb., and imply a rather
1

violent metaphor.

Had gone

over (Keil) would have been

336
20.
cf.
31

The Second Book of Samuel,

yyrv
i?s]

Cf.

^.

32,

2.

For niyn, see

p.

170;*.,

and

7,
\>

14.

24, 17.
, , .

ta

mb6]

Cf.

8,

3.

9,

20

(sq.

i>).

25, 25

(^

524*)

3c, 523^ 3c. 21. :] Note the emphatic pronoun.

^KTB*3
K"K.

rn~6] to the Jordan.

23.

BK

run

QV3

DOV DITl] Comp. Saul s The question indicated by the

reply, I

n,

13

voice: I 16, 4.

Tiy-p]
25.

Luc. Bu. Sm. Dh. D?yT.

71XB>

p] a good case of
Jerusalem,
21,
i2i>.

p =grandson
ft.

cf.

^DJ p

KVT.

TV] from
1DS5J*]
"pon

r.

3760

above the ford el-Hajlah.

n^y] as Dt.
his

moustache

Lev. 13, 45. Ez. 24, 17. 22. Mic.

3, yt.

rD? DViTfO?]

being

in

from the day, the going of the king, n^ An unusual construction but another apposition with DIM.
:

instance,

exactly

similar,
:

occurs Ex.
cf.

9,

18
;

(where, however,

the
f.
is

Samaritan text has

26.

Db^T ]
1

Q^p) D7BWD (LXX) must

also 2 Ch. 8, 16

and see GK.

i27

obviously be read.

Not only

RV. m.
after

when Jerusalem was come very forced and unnatural, but a 25 some statement about Mephibosheth is desiderated in 26*.
,

27.

"OEl]

nen

here=fo/r<y:

cf. i

Ch. 12, 18.

Pesh. Vulg.
i^j

iTtfnns

-jnny

ncx

n]

LXX,

^ny IDN ^

might express merely what Mephibosheth thought: the reading of the Versions makes it clear that the command was actually given to Ziba, and affords a more substantial ground for
text

HE an.

The

TUy3 xJT

in
is

28.

n^y] lion
properly priN
28. DTi^Nn 29. np1
,
:

here used exceptionally of the female ass, which

is

cf.

GK.

I22 f

"ix^na]
. .

Cf. 14, 17. 20. I 29, 9.

noi]
I3"rn]

See on

I 26, 18.

30.

THTI

speakest thy words, with a touch of contempt,

go on talking
Luc. for

(not, as

EVV.,

speakest any

otherwise, of course, in the first person, Gen. 24, 33,

"Din

more of thy matters ) and in Jud. 1 1, 1 1.

expresses

na"|n,

though not exactly a necessary change,

which Klo. Bu. Dh. adopt, and which, may well be original.

XIX.
I

20-37

337
106*): this
is

have said

(viz. this

moment) =/ jay (GK.

is
it

my

decision.

32-41.

The

interpretation of this passage

:

uncertain

on account

of the ambiguity in the force of lay

river),

does

mean

pass over (the

or only pass on ? and the uncertainty

v.

reading in

40, which leaves a

is increased by a various doubt as to whether David took

leave of Barzillai before, or after, crossing the Jordan.

32.

p"Vn]

passed on

to

Jordan

(Jos.

16,

7),

not (EVV.)

went

over Jordan.

Sm. Bu. Dh., however, thinking

him

(see

on

v.

40) that the

sequel will not permit B. to have yet reached the Jordan, delete pTil.

in/Bv]

to escort

(irpoirtp.TT(.iv),

as Gen. 12, 20. 18, i6al.

P~P3V)N]

A
all

mixture of two readings

pT3
33.

(v. 19).

Probably the less

pTivnN (as vv. 37. 40) and common 3 is original. The Kt. is

destitute of

philological analogy, and, in fact, meaningless.

in3*K>3]

Obviously an error for iFOB a.

(

n3^

implies a most

anomalous aphaeresis from na^ a form, in an abstract sense, itself and the * may have been intro most improbable in early Hebrew
;

duced accidentally into the word through the influence of

it

^J ?
1

while

still

stood in

v.

34 (We.).

On
:

hli, see on

I 25, 2.

34. *l3y nntf]

The emph.

pron., as 20, 6. Ex. 5,

n. Gen.

24, 60.

More commonly after the imper. see on I 17, 56. jns] LXX. Ew. We. Bu. Now. Dh. ins/BTiK
:

see Ru. 4, 15.

35. n?yN] 36.

i>1p3

from the deep Jordan-valley.

. ,

yK>tf]

listen to the voice,

ynB>

with satisfaction or enjoy

Cf.

ment

more than ^p

hear the voice/

cf. 8, 7.

3 n&n.

i>]

= ^y
y\

see 15, 33

and
like

37.

Dyoa] Dyoa,
little

lit.

little,

often occurs with the sense of

within a

of,

almost, but not elsewhere with the sense of with but

If this rend,
is

little

more, just (RV.).

legitimate, the verse occasions

no

difficulty.

Modern

scholars, however, generally suppose

Dyo

to

be

intended, either reading

ByD

(the a dittographed from

"jtan),

or (Luc.)
\j/.

DyD
1

3,

or (Kimchi,
tsyoa).
little

AV.)

treating a as pleonastic (cf.

Is.

i, 9.
it

105,

na QHai

The
way

sense in this case, however, cannot,

over
(i.

seems,

be (AV.) go a
analogy of 16,

e.

beyond) Jordan,

for this,

by the

i,

would be

p~iVJ |D

Dyo:

those, accordingly,

who

take this view, delete

1365

pTH

fix as a gloss,

due to the supposition that

338

The Second Book of Samuel,

pass over, whereas,
if oyoa means a little way, it must way with the king, i.e., as B., v. 32, is

lay meant
mean,
will

pass on a

little
it,

already at Jordan, across

Dh.), so that B.
is

or, if piTTi in

32 be omitted (Sm. Bu.

it,

not yet at the Jordan, towards

it.

or (retaining pTfl,

with
f y\

!>N

for

ns)

to

ti^D3\]

recompense

me

with this reward,

i.e.

reward
it,

me

for

my

former hospitality to him (17, 27-9; not, as over Jordan), with this invitation (v. 34).
38. Dy]

EVV.

the crossing

near or by
JIN]
,

cf. I

10, 2.

2VJ

1K>K

21L3 is the

verb ; see

on

3, 19.
:

39. *3N1

YIN] Both words are emph.

cf.

for TIN cf.

on
"6y

15, 4.
"pat?

by Iran] ^<WH* (and lay) upon me: ^y in. 34, 12 jnoi ire nx
40. ptJl lay]

Gen. 30, 28

mp:.

implying clearly that David took leave of Barzillai

after crossing the river.

Luc. here expresses *1OV for "Oy (cf. 15, 23), implying that David halted while the people passed over Jordan, and that he took leave of Barzillai before crossing himself. TIN in 37 (to This, with the omission of JTVn in 32, and of

pTH

enable B. to go some

(37) with David, before parting from him (40) at the Jordan;, is adopted by Sm. Bu. Dh., on the ground that the king s crossing is and certainly i6 b 42 b do support the view that Dy 721 first narrated in v. 41

way

"pDH

DN ITOyn

rniiT in 4i b

refer not, as

they must do,

if

the king crosses in

40, to the people escorting him from the Jordan to Gilgal, but to their escorting him across the Jordan. This argument, however, can hardly be termed decisive

and, as just explained, the adoption of

32 and 37, though, it is true, from a misinterpretation of ~Oyi and

data

40 involves the rejection of words in these are glosses which might readily have arisen
"JtDy

in

we

possess, each
y\

~Oy. It seems that, to judge from the view of the passage must be allowed to be possible.
"Uy

41.

"Dyi]

If

in

40

is

right,

Jordan) to Gilgal.
to Gilgal.

Or, with

IDy

in 40,

And passed on (from the And passed over (the Jordan)

rvayV]
bable
:

Kt.

H,

defensible in the abstract (I 14, 19), but impro

read either

Qr
(viz.

^^.V.jl, or, better

(LXX), D^l^y

were passing

on with the king

from Jordan
I 5, 10.

to Gilgal).

Or, as before, with

loy

in 40,

were passing over (the Jordan) with the king.

Cf. v. 44,
i.e.

43.
Jl

9M]
?13Nn]

and on

have we obtained any advantage from our

tribal

connexion with David?

side-glance

at

the

Benjaminites,

who,

XIX.
it

37-43
their

339
connexion

may
u!>

be inferred from

I 22, 7,

had been benefited by

Three

with Saul (Th. from Michaelis).

NSW J1NCW DX]

(i)

Difficult.

main

views

have

been
i.e.

suggested,

Or has anything been carried away by us?

riN&3
inf.
is

gained, acquired by us (Th. Keil).

inf.

then regarded as an

abs.,

formed on the analogy of the

:

abs. in D,
is

which occurs

occasionally in verbs rr? (on 6, 20)

verbs
N"?

but the form

abs.
is

unparalleled in

(Kon.

i.

632

f.);

and

if

an

inf.

thought to be needed

b N&3 (so GK. 76 ). (2) Bu. Now. render (reading N&3), Or has he been carried away by us? (appropriated by us), Bu. also suggesting, as perhaps better, Klo. s NtM ^NiW, or

we must simply

correct to

simply
(3)

Nfe

J
(i.

NBO,

Or
f.;

are
cf.
ii.

we

at all taking
.,

him away

for ourselves?

Kon.

633

578

iii.

p.

n6.),
:

following Kimchi,
5, 7.
i

treats

J"INfe>3

as a ptcp. Nif. (which

(cf.

it

might be
Is
.

Zech.
al.
;

Ch. 14,
i,

2),

with the force of a subst.

f

ninna

10,

23

n^PQ3 Zeph.

i8t)

Or has anything been carried away by used of carrying away a portion of food
:

us as a portion ?
(flXipD,
lit.

NBO being

something carried)

from the table of a superior as a compliment to a guest or other And one carried NfrJI person see Gen. 43, 34 DnpN VJS DND rtiN
&J>p

= There were carried ;

s
"jtan

see on 1 16, 4

LXX
2

ypav) portions

messes

from Joseph

presence to his brethren;

Sam. n,
:

8.

This idea
adopted,

suits the parallel

it is

13^2N i?13Nn excellently

but, if

it is

far better to

read

nNE>p

or

nN p
fc/

(Gratz, Dh.) than to have recourse

to the precarious expl. of riNiW as a subst. GK. i2i a be construed with nst^D
,

NBO, as pf. Nif., might then

NB>3

hath been brought:

cf.

or, better, by (sc. ^^,-=. there Gen. 43, 34) might be read: Or hath any

portion (from his table) been

clause,
fig.

brought to us

like

the

preceding

for,

Have we derived any advantage from what we have

?

done

for the king

The Versions mostly

the second literal
:

paraphrase.
tScanev
rj

LXX

has a double rend., the

; ?

fj

Sufjta

dpcriv rjptv f||iiv

(cf.

a.

first being free, pa is for TlK SJ D in ch.

11,8); Pesh.

Or has a

gift

been given us from him

Targ. N3? ^SO NOT!?

DK

Or has he apportioned us a gift? Vulg. Aut munera nobis data sunt? Cf. AV. RV. Or hath he given us any gift ? which must be understood also as a paraphrase, not as a lit. rendering; for Xt^3 (Pi el), though it means to lift up
t

support, assist a person (with wood, money, etc.), means to give, nor does 71X5^3 ever mean a gift.

Ki. 9,

n.

Ezr.

I,

al.,

never

Z 2

34
44. niT]

The Second Book of Samuel,

Metaph. (note the fern. p\.)=parts : so Gen. 43, 34. and also in David I am (more) than thou. D3l]

1DO
D31,

JK

*im

however, points to something additional ; whereas the sentence as

thus understood adds nothing to what has been just said

niT

"i5J>y

PEG:
"pen

for

it

is

evidently impossible to

draw a

distinction

between
the

and in, as though

David
17

expressed or meant more than

a~v

king.

LXX
for 1113

KCU irpo^TOKOs cyw

o-e

(the following words

/cat

ye ev

TW
i.e.

et/u vTrep

are a doublet representing the existing

I

MT.),
see
i

3
5,
2.

and

am

also the firstborn rather than thou

Ch.
is

So Th. Ew. We.

Stade, Klo.

It is

not true that JD

"1133

"1133

a phrase incompatible with the meaning of

(Keil)
:

for

it

does

not imply that Judah was in

some measure a

firstborn

JD

may be

used to express the idea of rather than, and not : \f/. 52, 5 y~i rQHK 31DO; Hab. 2, 16 TI33D Jl^p njO5? thou art filled with disgrace rather
than glory.
HVJ N^l]
I 1 6,

Either read
(text),

&>\\,

4).

AV. RV.

or render, And was not .? (on should not be/ would require imperatively
.
.

*]
20,
46, 21.
31

After

nm

this

seems superfluous.

It

may have

arisen

by error
Gen.

from the following

i.
i

r6.
="13.3,

H33J perhaps
Ch.
7, 6. 8, 8.
i.e.

the

name

of the

Benj.

clan,

Cf. S^TJ

jJDtr (16, 5).

cf.

V^riN^ B^K]
6.
is

Resume your
in

old tribal independence;

Ki.

12,

This
a

one of the 18 passages

PJ3.JJI.

which, according to the Jews, there has been

D HSb

or

correction of the scribes, intended to remove

derogatory to
is

Yahweh,

alleged to have been the original reading.

some expression Here 1 vHN^

stated to have been altered for this reason from

VrONP

to his gods.

The other

passages (the alleged original reading, where not stated here, is given by Kittel) are Gen. 18, 22. Nu. 11,15. 12,12. I S. 3, 13 (v f I?). 2 S. 16, 12 (originally, it is
alleged, i^JQ).
4, 7 (orig.
i

Ki. 12, 16

Ch.

10, 16 (as here). Jer. 2,

i, 12.

n.
i,

Ez. 8, 17. Hos.

13. f. 106, 20.

VVDn f6p3 HUD).

32,
3.

Hab.

Zech.

2, 12.

Mai.

Job

20 (orig. *]5^DJ). The probability of the alleged original reading must be decided in each case on its own merits in some it may be con siderable, here it is quite out of the question. See more fully Ginsburg, Introd. to
7, 20.

Lam.

3,

the Heb, Bible, p. 347

2.
i

ff.

Geiger, Urschrift, p. 308

:

ff.

7jTl]

Idiom.
al.

= withdrew

cf.

23,

9;
27

and

esp.

from a siege,

Ki. 15, 19

(Lex.

n&

e).

Cf.

on

2,

nno

nbj.

XIX. 44
3motJ>

XX.

6
:

JV3]
;

in this sense only here

elsewhere

""?$,

Gen.

40,

3.

al.

42, 19
<

D31B>

1V3.

the English is not widowhood of livingness niJD^N] more singular than the Hebrew. The punctuation can hardly express the sense intended by the writer. The application of the adverbial
(?>?)

nvn

accus.,

which

it

implies,
is

is

unusually harsh; and the idea which the

is difficult, if

entire expression to seize

J
.

supposed to convey
al.

not impossible,

We. Bu. Now.

point

J"li*n

niJEpN

supposing that being

treated as widows, although their husbands were alive, they are called

by a figure of speech, not without widows (so LXX xw ai wo-at).

4.

parallels in other languages,

living

&W

ntj6tJ>]

As
is

the text stands, this can only

mean for

three
is

days ;

and there

nothing to shew, or suggest, that 1EJ?

H3 nnNI

only to

come

at the

end of the three days.

As We.
1

observes, tVthw

Dnr and noy iiQ nn&tt belong together, and fix the njno of v. 5. we then get, spoken in The athnah must thus be transposed to the tone of a command, Three days, and then stand thou (present
"TiliT

thyself) here

For
31

}
fl

cf.

Ex.

16, 6 DnjJVI

:ny

At even,

then ye shall

know,

etc. 7

DrPK

ijphl (Tenses,

123/3, 124).

tion (Kit. Bibl^) to the end of the v. would yield a

wrong

(The transposi sense, and

must be an oversight
5.
,
<

it is

not followed in the transl. in Kautzsch.)

in^l] Qre

">nil,

which

may
2
,

be either Qal (so Ol.

2410;
lit.

cf.

tnrn v. 9 from iriN)

from ^D^

or Hif. (not elsewhere)

;

shewed,
3

exhibited delay (so Ges.

Lg.
*

p.

The

Kt., unless

(Kon.) the
(

377 Stade, 498; Konig, i. 397 ). is a mere error for 1, is probably to be

read in^l, for

nnl

c f. SWIM for

KHSM

Dt. 33, 21)

Stade,

112",

cf.

GK.

68*.

lyiDH

}]

}D before a
:

noun with the

iO2 b

art. is

much commoner
in Chr.

in all

books than HO
ii.

before other words

;

it is

most frequent

(Kon.

b 292; Lex. 577

6.

GK.
is

w.).

W?

jn.1]

? VI

not used in the sense of

be

harmful

to

read

1 EVV. living in widowhood yields an excellent sense ; but unfortunately neither a rendering, nor a legitimate paraphrase, of the Hebrew.

is

This

is

indeed 1HN1 in Gen. 32,

"IHIN
,

5,
is

but both

UHNJ and 3HSI occur from

this view.

In Aram, the Afel

Jlo(

in use,

which might support

342
with

EVV.
fa]

(though the change of text

is

not admitted by them

openly) yi).

NO
Obs.

lest

he have found

cf. 2

Ki.

2,

16,

and

Tenses,

41

But the following

b^ffl (perf. with

waw
io7<i

conv., which regularly

f.)

follows fa with the impf., e.g. 12, 28. Ex. 34, 15

is

suggests that

NE

simply a clerical error for X

is

(GK.
Kal CTKiacm

.).

In

Ki.

2,

16 the

past tense
"Wy

defended by the following in3v?^l.

Difficult.

^m]
and

LXX
(///.
:

TOI>S

6<0aAyum>s

f)fj.uv

Pesh.

U^JLo
p^yi

and pluck

dig) out our eyes: Targ. (paraphrasing)

et effugiat nos.

distress us

Vulg.
:

7^\\

is

properly to

or take

away

(see Ges.

oculo, dentem), Gen. 31, 9.

oneself,

JJlo exemit, eduxit rem, v.c. festucam ex 10, Hithp. Ex. 33, 6 to pull or j/r//

0^"

mostly used in the sense of pulling away, i.e. Hence the text can only be rescuing, delivering, from an enemy. rendered either and deliver our eye, which here yields no sense ; or

though

it is

pull out our

eye,

either

lit.

(Bo. Th.

cf.

Pesh.),

as

an expression
Singulare
se

meaning harm us
est

irretrievably, or metaphorically, as Ges.

Ty ^vn
eius

auferre

oculum

alicuius, i.e.

eum fallere, subtrahere

Heb.

oculis

(cf.

RV.).

AV.
(cf.

escape us, with marg.,

deliver

himself from our eyes

Rashi tt^yo

stand

a couple of words in this

iii.

way

is

1Dy 7*Xn?)j but to under of course quite illegitimate.

Ewald, Hist.
deriving

262 (E. T. 193), Keil, We. Bu. Dh. follow

or
rather

LXX,

b^n,

^Q,

from ??

to

be

shadowy or dark

(Neh. 13, 19),

us anxiety.

i.e.

be-shadow or becloud our eye, metaph. for occasion

eye,

For the

as the organ in which the

Hebrew saw

changes of emotion, or mental states, expressed, comp. I 14, 27.

\l/.

6, 8.

88, 10.

Job n,

20.

17, 7 etc.

Sm., following Luc.

:

(cr/ceTrao-flfJ

d<}>

TJHUV), reads

^Btp ?S31 and escape (Nif.

Dt. 23, 16

al.)

from

us,

obtaining legitimate means, exactly the sense which AV. obtained by illegitimate means. Now., retaining T^n, and take them as Gen. 31, 9. i6)/rom us. Bu., though adopting ^n, makes (^VH,
thus,

by

a clever suggestion, to read

defiantly (Dt. 28, 31).
7.

viz.

WJ^Jf? P3H]

and

escape before our eyes,

8.

&WN y-inN] Read aw ^as nnx. Na NKWi Dy Dn] exactly as Jud. 19,

asv

cf.

on

I 9, 5.

XX.
Came
Ni] came meet them

6-8

343

/ _/h?/ o/~ them (accidentally). would be DHNIp^ N3. (RV.) 31 iBtob tap nun 2NV and Joab was girt with his warrior s )] his clothing, and upon it was the girdle of a sword fastened dress,

(= appeared)
1

to

(i.e.

the sword)
:

upon

his loins in its sheath.

fact
is
is

The sentence

is

involved

and obscure
rendering of

though the

effectually concealed in the free

;
K>37,

RV.

iBnsb V1D

a strange combination

not

"Oft,

would be the verb naturally used with VIC (read prob., also (the warrior s dress, "HO; see on I 17, 38);
"fan

in the sense
fern.

mD
text
:

referring only to the sword] appears to be superfluous.

The
tfttb

must be
inn

in

some

disorder.

Lohr, Now. (improving on We.)

"!?

2N1M

(LXX
V3n

irepi6luff|i6 os)

(cf.

17,

38.

39) vbjn

HD
:

mym
f

^y

rnS

this deviates

but

little

from

MT. Dhorme

y\

moxD

Tin vbyi

but see I 17, 39).

tions,

3NVi (Dh. writes i^iai? ^yo: to the view expressed in these restora According
te*ai>j

^y

"fan

Joab had one sword only, which afterwards

(v.

8 end )

fell

to the

ground, and was then (though this is not mentioned) picked up by Joab with his left hand, in such a way as not to arouse Amasa s
Klo. Bu. Sm. Kitt., on the other hand, think that Joab suspicions. had two swords, an outside one in its usual place, which fell to the ground, and was left there, and another concealed under his dress on
his
left,

the existence of which

Amasa had no
to have

reason to suspect.

Klo., accordingly, supposing

two words
l^>yi

and one omitted, reads

31

(insert Kin)

\V\h
it

become corrupted, nrwtp iT3 mn 3Kn

outside) he

mcjftt

3"in

-fljn

and

as for Joab,
3,

a sword was in his hand

(i.e.

underneath his dress

girt,

(cf.

Jud.

16),

and upon

was

would hardly have kept his left hand, holding the concealed sword, under his dress, nn 2NV1 as he approached Amasa, would read 1*^ As Joab s right hand was iBnab bjn (Jud. 3, 16). 31 niDSB
etc. (so

Sm.

Kit.).

Bu., thinking that Joab

J"inn

"HJPI

mn

otherwise employed

(v. 9),

the 2NY

of 10 must have been his

left

hand: and Klo.

W2

for

n
s,

explains, as

how

the sword

came

to be in this hand.
differs

MT. On the

does not explain,

other hand, Klo. s

emend.,
also, in

and

still

more Bu.

considerably from

MT.

v.

10,
:

saying not that

Amasa

did not see the sword in Joab

it,

hand

but that he did not

guard himself Against

rather implies that he

saw

344
it
;

The Second Book of Samuel,

if so, this will

and

have been the one sword which he had, which

It

had

fallen to the

ground, and been picked up by him.

seems

best,

on

the whole, to follow

Lohr and Now.

^am
came
Sin,
:

Ntf Kim] Read, with

LXX, ito nWF

is
(K"rn

ry\

and

it

(the sword)

out,

and fell.

The

text

contrary to idiom.
or)

With the emph.

Snnni NJf
Nini

the

form of the sentence would be

I 9, 5).

nbsJ (see on
10.
ib
1 1

a
PWIP

~OJ>3]

reflexively,
I 26, 8.

guarded himself: so
by Amasa.
]

Ki.

6, 10.

V^y]

K^] 0zw

or
.

<5y

him,
.

i.

e.

:aw nns nnb

u,
12. 12.

IPS
cf.

in

form as Ex. 32, 26:

cf.

on

For the exclam.,

.
,
.

also 2 Ki.

mt?n
and

3DM]

into the field:

"K?N3]

3, 23 2X1D 7Wr) } Jud. cf. on 6, 10.

7, 18.

tyi
by him,

l^y N3n ^3 n&O

stopped?
).

"!E>yi

is

when he saw every one who came the pf. with waw conv., carrying on
ptcp.

(GK.

n6 x

as

a frequentative, the
it

N3n~73 (=whosoever

does in present time (e.g.) Jer. 21,9 came) 7Qai NJflV! whoso goeth out and falleth to the Chaldaeans. etc. (Tenses, But T?y for ntsyi (Now.) would be an improvement: When 117).
in past time, just as

he saw every one who came to him slopping! stood still (EVV.) would require every one
.

When
"IPP

he saw that
i, 4).

? (Gen.

The

clause stating the reason for the

man

acting as he did, would,

however, stand naturally before N"V1; and perhaps, with iTm (freq.) And it came to pass, prefixed, it should be transposed there:

when every one who came by him saw him

still
1

Amasa), that he stood

to

(cf.

Jud. 19, 30).

Hof., for njin
:

nan]

GK.

69^.

But the root (Syr.

;

^o/"

drive away, remove) occurs in Heb. only here

read prob. either ntsn

or nan (Bu.), as 3, 27,

14. najno

(i

n Qal, Pr. 25,

4. 5

Isa. 27, 8t).

<to

rvni

n^ns]

Read nayo

nn nbs
hill

Abel of Bethi

Ma achah

with

Ew. Th. We. Klo.

z\ miles

etc.,

as vv. 15. 18.

Ki. 15, 20.

2 Ki. 15, 29.

Now

Abil, a village on a

(1074

ft.),

overlooking

the Jordan-valley,

W.

of the river, and 4 miles

10, 6.
is

W.

of Tell

el-Kadi (Dan).

For nayo,

cf.

on

<l

"13iT,

2l]

No

place or people

named DH2n

known

and
s

after the

mention of Abel of Beth-Ma achah as the goal of Sheba

movements,

XX.
the

8-if

345
coupled to them, yield no
to
*|

words and

all the Berites, if treated as

intelligible sense.

athnah, then, must be moved back The sense of what follows turns upon the meaning of vnnx

The

s*

N3

is

not a mere synonym of either

it

nnx

"J^ri

or (to follow],

f)Tl (to pursue],:

means

to enter

as after some one into a place,

Ex. 14, 17
1 26, 3 2

onnnx INm
so
-iriN

viz. into the

sea (as vv. 23. 28, explicitly);

2

Saul came in after him into the wilderness;

;

Ki.

n,

15

Ch. 26, 17

K3 Nu.
as
is

25, 8.

Hence

jl

1NT1

will

mean,

and

went in after him,

viz.

required by the context, into Abel of

Beth-Ma achah.
object in Vintf,
to

is

This shews that the subject of "QJP1, as well as the Sheba; and lends at the same time plausibility
l|

Klo.

proposal to read, instead of the obscure D

Iv Xappei,
1
.

"13n

73,

after

LXX
the

Kai Trai/res
-I

Dn33n~731 and
is

all
v.

the
i

Bichrites
as
1|

(the

following

as I 14, ip)

Sheba

described in

"133~J3;

and

meaning of

the verse will then be that the

members

of his family

or clan took part with him and went in after him into the city in which

he had taken refuge

in v.
P]N]

2
.

The

narrative reverts to

Sheba

pursuers

15.
PjN

simply=;DJ (not as

= how

much more: on

I 14, 30) is very

unusual in plain narrative, being confined chiefly to poetry, and

where

it
it

occurs in prose having generally some rhetorical

force

5
.

does not in fact appear to be required, and perhaps arose error out of the first two letters of IHHN it is not by expressed by LXX. Bu., followed by Kenn. Dh., supposes that a transposition has
:

Here

taken place, and suggests, very cleverly and plausibly

inriK INI
}n?j^1_

^33

"oy

onssn

^>3i

nayo rvo n^3N tan

6, 22.

(Kt.)

in^i

btntJ

= treated him with contempt (see

r3y

19, 44).
(adj.)

15.
1

nu

nb?K]

^3N meadow, unlike ^3N

mourning

Though it does not usually follow the subject immediately (Jer. 44, 25). The reading (Th. al., after Vulg. omnesque viriekcti} D "in3n~,531 and all the young men (viz. followed after him [Joab] or pursued after him [Sheba]) is
2
s
;

inconsistent with the

8

meaning of
:

"HPIX

X3.

PjNn Gen. 18, 13. 23. 24 with a pron. JN P|N Gen. 40, 16 and with singular 16. 24. 28. 41, and K^H P(K frequency in Lev. 26 P|X1 w. 39. 40. 42. 44) ; Dil
(m>.

^K,

Dt.

2, ii. 20,

Nin

5JK 2 Ki. 2, 14: alone,

(i.

Nu.

16, 14. Dt. 15, 17

and
""3

here.

These

are all the occurrences of P|N alone from Gen. to 2 Kings.

e.

not in the combination

f]N) in prose

346
(<A-

The Second Book of Samuel,

35
M)>

does not change

285^): so DnjfO

its

form in

st.
*>2K

c.

(Kon.
Ki.

ii.

438;
:

iii.

Gen. 50, n,
:

n^TO

4, 12

cf.

BOJ

The

n-

loc.

in

j/. c.

GK.

90.
poured
out of baskets, of which the
as
2

alluding to the earth,

npPD was constructed.

threw up.

So

regularly,

Ki.

19,

32.

Anglice,

outer wall

ITQ *JEyni] The 1 is difficult. i?n is explained to mean the smaller or outwork, as the Jews define it TOin p or N"^
"13,

surrounding a city, rampart (RV.) is not sufficiently distinctive, between which and the principal wall there would be a space, con
sisting, at least partly,

of a moat.
this

It

has been supposed (Ges. Keil)

that
(the

the

word included
stood in

n^D)

space; and so Keil renders, the moat. But this is hardly likely.
other, to

And

it

$>PO

must belong, somehow or

}

HlMn
:

ilB>K

in v. 16.

f>ra

rrosn

HB>N

aopni might suffice

is

but i^yn

neon new
it

*IEJ?ni

more what we should

expect, though
it.

is

not

apparent
flDinn
i.e.

how

the present text

Drvnc>B]

would be derived from

^Sr6

were destroying, to cause the wall to

Cf. Ez. 26, 4

fall/

were battering

it.

is HlOin inncn

the ptcp. here

of course implying that the action was

only in process,

and not

The expression is, however, a little peculiar; and Ew. completed. Bo. Th. Dh. treat the word as a denom. of mit? pit were making
a pit to cause the wall to fall, i.e. were undermining it (RV. marg.). LXX have Ivoova-av, and Targ. pn^yno, which no doubt represent

D^

ntD

Prov. 24, 8 (We.)

were devising to bring the wall down.

:

Perhaps

this is the true reading

jl

it is

adopted by Klo. Bu. Sm. Now.

to speak aforetime, saying,

18-19.

TUT in]

They were wont

at

Let them but enquire

Abel, and so they

finished

(a matter).
i.e.

I (consist of) the peaceable (and) faithful

ones of Israel/ etc.;

its

Abel was famed from of old

for the

wisdom of

inhabitants, hence

a proverb arose advising people to consult them in any difficult under In 19* the woman, in saying aJN, speaks in the name of taking.
the

community
is

hence she uses

ps. sg.

(as I

5,

10),

though the
of
it
:

predicate

in the plural (referring to the individual

1|

members

is a suspended st. c., comp. Gen. 34, 30 1SDO DO *Jt). to be explained on the principle of 21K JvJQ n&?N I 28, 7 where see
"ODN

XX.
the note.
e^eAiTTOV

i$-22
rjptarrjOr]

347
Iv 777

LXX
a WfVTO
OUTU>S,

have

^po)T>///.evo9

AySeA

KO.I

ev

Aav

et
ei>

ol TTKTToi

rov Icrpo^A

[epa>VTe?

CTrepcuTr^crovcrtv eva

A/3cA
(TV 8e

/cat

et

eeAt7rov.

eyai ei/u eiprjvuca

TWV

crr^piy/AaTtov loyxx^Ajy

77x615,

KrA.

Here

the bracketed words are evidently a correction

made

to express a text resembling the existing

MT.

and introduced

already into
precedes.
follows
:

Cod.

B by

the side of the original

The

^^
in

text presupposed

by the

LXX version, which original LXX would read as

NPBN ^BtP
in

TB>K

3Hn fTM ^nK3

that
!

lW

H
blKB>

Let

them ask

Abel and
faithful

Dan whether

had ever come to an

which is adopted by T. 195), We. Bu. Now.; i.e. if one desired iii. 264 (E. to find a place in which old Israelitish institutions were most strictly preserved, he was told to apply to Abel and to Dan : why should

end which the

of Israel had established

Ew.

Hist.

Joab seek to destroy a city that was thus true character and nationality?
1

to

its

hereditary

8.

g^
2
;

^X^J

The

inf.

abs. in Qal, while the principal verb

is

in

a derived conjugation,
Jos. 24, io

as happens sometimes:
4.

with Pi

el,

as here,

with Hif. I 23, 22. Gen. 46,

el Is. 24,

Is.

31, 5; with HithNif., ch. 23, 7.

po

lel

and Hithpo

19; most frequently with

12.
Is.

Ex. 19, 13. 21, 20. 22. 22, II.

40, 30. Jer. IO, 5. 34, 3. 49,

12 (contrast 25, 29). Mic. 2, 4. Nah. 3, 13. Zech. 12, 3. Job 6, 2, and with Hof. in JlDV nio Ex. 19, 12 (and often). Cf. GK. 113^.
19.

rPDr6]

Unsuitable to a

city.

Read

nriB b

c f. 20

nTi^K

ON),

Nestle,

Sm. Now.

JVDn cannot be rendered

destroy

(EVV.).

DN]
called

in
i.

an important and venerable city with dependent villages, Heb. idiom its "daughters," Nu. 21, 25 al. (Kenn.). Cf.

on

8,

21. ~frwo
ii.

run]

The
In

fut. instans.

with a passive ptcp.

cf. I

19,

On

^yo, here and

,
,

v. 22,

see

on

I 28, 15.
is

22. DJjn
7rai/Ta

Ninni]

LXX

there

a doublet:

*<u

eioT?A0e

Ti-pos
is

TOV Aaov

and

KCU eAaA^cre Trpos Tracrav r^v TroAiv

the latter

We. lEWn.

But a Hif.

D^n

is

so rare

and doubtful (Ez.

14, 8. 21, 21),

except at most in the participle (Is. 41, 20. Job 4, 2of), that forms of it cannot legitimately be introduced by conjecture into the MT. (Noldeke, ZDMG., 1883,
p.

^Q^Beitrdge zur Sem. Sprachwissenschaft,

might indeed be
inf. abs.

Pi

el (as

NS3T)

1904, p. 37). but this is elsewhere -pa.

;

348
genuine, and the
preferable to

The Second Book of Samuel,

Hebrew
Kit. text to

which

it

points

(Tyn~;>3~,>fc<

~i?nrn)

is

MT.

Cf. the interchange

of N2H1 and lONni 14, 4

"Vyn
i>N]

(We.).

So Now.
bx [-aim.
8,

Klo. Bu. Dh. prefer

nt?sn

oyn

23-26. See
23. 7X]
b&nt5
it

16-18.

^N=^y: contrast 23 b and 8, 16. Of course ksi^ cannot be a genitive after KTBGr^a]
a strong case of
11

must therefore be
however,

in apposition with
all

it.

struction,

the

host,

Israel

is

This appositional con harsh, and, since no

relation of identity subsists

between

the host

and
:

Israel,
1

unsuitable.

Grammar
K3Xn.

will

only admit one of two alternatives

the latter Ki.
2,
is

?NT^ &Q1T73, or
iT>nX

simply JOtfrr^:
17, 25.
"Han

preferable

(cf. 8,

16 ^y

3NV1

35

al.).

nan]
probably

(Kt.) recurs 2

signifies

Carians.

consisted of foreigners.
VP"!3n
}

19 (D tfim n3H), where it body-guard appears to have But here no doubt the Qr is right in reading
Ki.

n,

4.
s

The

king

as 8,

8,

where see the note.

ASwi/eipo^, as
i

24.

D-ntt]

LXX

Ki. 4, 6.

5,

28 DTT1N.
Apa/j.,

The

form D~nx occurs also

ASowpaju,
;

Ki. 12,18 where

LXX Cod. B
D"nn

Cod.

in the parallel passage 2

Ch. 10, 18

(LXX

ASum/aa/*).

The variation is not when they occur in (RV. marg\ The

1

greater than attaches to

parallel texts: see e.g.

many
Nu.

less familiar

names,

26, or

Ezra
(cf.

passim

D11"

);

QTin
^y]

is

name here is probably niTlX Hamathite name (see on 8, 10).

true

tnN&D,

gangs of men doing forced labour, such as an Eastern monarch is wont to exact from his subjects. The DID appears first as an institution in Israel

DCn

over the labour-gangs (or the corvee),

at the

end of David
it

reign

it

was more

fully

organized by Solomon,
:

who needed
was the

for the

purpose of carrying on his buildings

superintended
it
:

Adoniram

officer

who
his

how unpopular
wreaked
their

it

be inferred from the

refusal
to

fact that the

populace, disappointed at

was, may Rehoboam s

relax

father s imposts,

vengeance on

Adoniram and stoned him

with
i it

(i Ki. 12, 18).

to bring

Phrases used in connexion

are
5,

?*WD
(cf. 9,
i

DO rpyn
15);
"l?y

Ki.

27

up (=to levy) a DO out of Israel DO? r6yn to levy (them) for a toiling
rpfl

labour-band

Ki. 9, 21

DO?

Dt. 20,

al.

to

become a

labour-

XX.
band;
"1?JJ

2]

XXL

349

Dp
1

iTn Gen. 49, 15. Jos. 16,

10 to become a toiling

In Jud. i, 28. 30. 33. 35 certain Canaanites are described as reduced to labour-gangs by their Israelitish conquerors.
labour-band.
overseers of labour-gangs (or gang-masters). See The rend, tribute depends on a baseless Rabb. derivation Lex. 586 f. from D3D (Lex. 493 b ): it suggests a totally incorrect idea; and it

Ex.

1 1

D^BD

nb>

is

greatly to be regretted that

26.
""iKTl]

it

should have been retained in

RV.
al.

i.e.

of

Jair, a Gileadite family, Nu. 32, 41

But

Pesh.

i-.]^.

^jso? (cf.

Luc. 6 leOtp), whence Th. Now. Dh. would restore

njvn of

Yattir, in the hill-country of

Judah

(see

on

I 30, 27).

It is

observed that in notices of this kind the home, not the family, is usually mentioned; and I 30, 27 shews that David had friends in Yattir.
Yattir

may

also have been

this

an old

priestly settlement (cf. Jos. 21, 14).

In any case

Ira will not be Ira the warrior of 23, 38.

Klo. Bu.

Sm.

retain

nwn.
Appendix
to the

21-24.

An

main narrative of the Book, of miscellaneous

contents: (a) 21,

sacrifice

1-14

of

the sons

the famine in Israel stopped through the Saul by the Gibeonites ; () 21, 15-22 ex of
(c)
s

ploits against the Philistines ;

(

22 David s
and

Hymn

of Triumph
23, 8-39
s heroes;

/r.

8);

(d) 23,

1-7 David

Last Words;
list

(e)

further exploits against the Philistines,

of David

(f) 24 David s
(a) 21,
i.

census

of the people^.
s sons sacrificed by the Gibeonites.

1-14. Saul

31

K>pTl]

Vulg., interpreting rightly,

Cf.

Et consuluit David orais

culum Domini.
(I 22,

Ex. 33,

7.

The

technical expression

^a

i?NB>

10

al.).

D^Din TVl ^Kl]

tively
"6

and

for his
:

bloody house

would require impera

"it^K

nVDin rca ^N1

the pron. could not in a case like the

xal
l-rrl

present be dispensed with.

LXX
style

TOV OLKOV aurou dSi/aa Sia TO

In this Appendix, a and

e.

f in

and manner are closely

related, as also

b
i

and

Further, as the Appendix interrupts the continuous narrative ch. 9-20. Ki. 1-2 (p. 286 note], it may be inferred that it was placed where it now stands

after the separation

had been

effected bet-ween the

Books of Samuel and Kings.

Its

than the compiler of the main compiler, presumably, thus lived at a later date narrative of Samuel.

350
O.VTOV Oavdria
(rests) blood

The Second Book of Samuel,

l

aifjuiT<av=&ft

nh*3"74W*

upon Saul and upon

his house

8. (cf. 16,

Dt. 19, 10), because he slew the Gibeonites.

;

The words
nrP2
in
is

in

MT.

the old orthography for 1JV2,

have simply been wrongly divided (cf. v. 12 5, 2): no doubt once written uniformly

Hebrew
z.

(as in Moabitic), but afterwards, except in a few sporadic

instances, modernized.

See the Introd.,

p. xxxii

f.

a b 198. K?] Lex. 2i6 3b, 24i 3b; Tenses, In 13121, the imper. is used Cf. Mic. 6, 6 mm Dips nS3. 3. HB2] instead of the more normal voluntative, for the purpose of expressing

non

with somewhat greater force the intention of the previous verb

i

cf.

Ki.
4.

i,

12;

Ew.

347

a
;

Tenses,

65;

GK.

no

Kt. v] Qre, assimilating to the next clause, W?.

30, 22.

But see on

I 5, 10.
f y\

137~fNl]

(against the accents)

and

any man

to death in Israel.
9, 15.

? px, as
al.
:

it is not open to us to put more frequently in the later

language, Ezra
ck. 14, 19-

Ch. 22, 9

Tenses,

202.

i.

Cf.

(w)

t5>N

D37

ntPJfK

ones Dnx no]

So Ew.
(

What
b
;

say (think) ye (that) I should

do

for

you?

336

(unusually) omitted.

The

constr.

GK. What do
cf.

120), Keil,
ye say ? I
will

*a

being
it

do

for

you

= whatsoever ye
in that case

say I will do for you (so in effect

EVV.)

yields

is actually expressed by LXX) be more in accordance with usage (cf. on I 20, 4). What itpy wro TWJ? DJVNn no (lit.) See, however, Jud. 9, 48 seen (that) I have done ? hasten and do like me. have ye (no must

a better sense:

but n^yxi (which

would

^3

not be treated as
5.
IJ

if it

were equivalent to the

late

^~np

that which.)

IDipa]

that

of a perfect tense:

we should be destroyed (EVV.) is no rendering (so that) we have been destroyed (RV. marg.)
ly
to

would require

"1E>N

be expressed: moreover

mean

devised against us.

Read with Ew. We.

us that

HEH does not TOlpnb HOI 1PN1

137
etc.

and who meditated

to destroy

we should not/

So

LXX

(one rendering) o? TrapeXoyio-aro

viz.
d<aj/urw/Aej>

e^oXeflpeuo-ai rjfids.

(What

follows,

avrov, merely expresses

MT.

differently vocalized, viz.

^ntplpD,
1

contrary to the sense.)

is

nsi
:

as Jud. 20, 5.
Sta TO avrov

aSiKia alfMTtuv
7T6/H

a paraphrase of

D^DT

Oavary

is

a partial

doublet to

o5 tQavaraiafv in the following clause.

XXL
6.
Ijb

2-6

351

ffW ]

Kt.
is

use: the Hof.

5, 17).

Qre M?")^. Both conjugations are in perhaps somewhat more elegant (i Ki. 2, 21. 2 Ki.
w"[ri3?;

The

construction as below,

v.

n.
9.

miri?
jyiDBTl

maypim] ypin only here,

(cf.

w.

13.

Nu.

25,

4 Dnis ypjn
is

TU mrr^

on

31,

10).

The

exact sense

uncertain.

J.

is
2

to fall (Qor. 15, 29. 22, 64): hence

W.

R. Smith, Rel. Sem.

398

4i9), comparing yplfl with

:

/*5jl,

thought that precipitation

z>.

this would suit l^l 9, but hardly Ch. 25, 12, where that form of punishment is mentioned, $. ; CD^O: (rare) is to beat (Dillm., the expressions used are different.

from a rock was intended

"IH3

and

Lex. 913).

Elsewhere in Heb. yp^ means to be separated,

fig.

dislocated,

of a joint (Gen. 32, 26f),

;

to be severed, alienated (Jer. 6, 8. Ez. 23,

hence Ges. to impale (cf. Aq. dvaTTT/yiaWt), because in this 17. i8f) form of punishment the limbs were dislocated. Other versions express
the idea of expose

(LXX

here ef^Aia^eu

in

Nu.

TrapaSeiy/AaTt^eiv

Pesh. in Nu. aoi9); or render crucify (Targ. here 2^X; Vulg. crucifigere, affigere ;

Saad. in Nu. c_U-), or hang

(Symm.

Kpf^d^fLv
kill ;

Vulg.

in

Nu.

suspendere],

Targ. in Nu. has merely 7Dp

and Pesh.

here
least

y*a>

Perhaps crucify (in late Heb. sacrifice. an unnatural extension of the limbs (cf. yp
:

27V), implying at
11

as probable a rend, as any

for

in this case, however,

it

Gen. 32, would be

26), is
better,

vS^

v. 9, to

with Luc.).

read with Klo. Wi?l and they were hung (and D^ there, Expose/ though a natural consequence of either impale

ment or
is

crucifixion,

weak, and has no philological

x,

can hardly be the actual meaning of ypin it justification. Cheyne remarks justly
:

(Exp. Times,
a religious

Aug. 1899,
:

p.

522) that the word

it

seems to be

synonym of n?n

but

must

also,

it

seems, have denoted

some
"

special form, or
"VCD
hxc>

method, of hanging.

ny3:a]

the sons of Saul were

The hill pnn) on which according to v. g hung can hardly be any other than the hill
5,
>"

by Gibeon

itself.

If

however }y:m
25),

restored for
i""

nynn
9)

(cf.

(LXX Tra

<fv

TaySawv)
falls

is

thus to be
itself.

hB>

ira
i"*

(cf.

and

"inn

(We.).

became corrupted into im (E. Castle ap. Then.), nynan }ym was understood in the sense of Read accordingly mn^ iri3 |y33a ( so Bu. Now, Dh. etc.).
v.

through of

"VrO

h{<^

352

The Second Book of Samuel,

"in

The mrp

will

have been the sacred

(i Ki.
3, 4) lay.

hill

on which the

great high-

place of Gibeon

is

(DS ^tf] With the pron. expressed, as in a reply a slight emphasis not unsuitable: cf. ch. 3, 13. I 26, 6. Jud. 6, 18. n, 9. i Ki.
2 Ki. 6, 3.

2, 18.
7.
i

Comp.
I 20,

Tenses,

160 Obs.
1

n.

i"*

ny25?]

See

42. 23,

8.

The

expression as Ex. 22, 10.

Ki. 2, 43.
8.

n K

ra navi] Saul
Pesh.

concubine, ch.

3, 7.

^tt] a lapsus calami for 21O (so Luc., as well as other

of
for

MSS.

LXX, and
21]):
nin<

[*-,
1
.

which, however, stands regularly in Pesh.

see I 18, ip

9.

^sb]

Cf. I 15, 33.

Kt. B^y^KJ]

they

fell

seven times together/ which

fell

is

defended by

Bo. Keil, and interpreted to mean they the thought would be expressed most

by seven similarly.
:

But

men

fell

together, this

falling seven times,

subject of
1

for though seven illogically by no means tantamount to a group of seven which is what the Hebrew would signify, the
is

I^S"

being the seven men.

fell

Read with Qr6 D^V??

cf.
Dr)KOB>

and

the seven of

them

together

and

the three of
al.

them

Nu.

12, 4 al.;

D^V?^

the four of

them

Ez.

i,

D^lTXia] So already LXX e v Trpomns, but D^Nin is what would be expected. No doubt the 2 is a lapsus calami. On the sing,
"jru,

see

on

I i, 2.

11.

UK

13*1]

So Gen.

27, 42.
xi.

See

GK.

121*; Ew.

295^

and

227-229. 12. Dl^n] Kt. Dvri the regular form: Qre D^pn, as though from xbn (GK. cf. D N^n Dt. 28, 66. Hos. 75"; Konig, i. 539, 544)
:

the Journal of Philology,

11,7;
D

also
?Nt5>J!

Yoma
DB Kt.]

3, 9,

Pe dh

2,

1W3 Abodah zarah

3, 7.

D^Dn

DW>B

n&

Qre.
is

D^n^Q

occurs

much more
7, 13).

frequently than
13.

BVOT&n:

but the latter

found (e.g.!
25, 33

4, 7.
al.

ISDN^]

In the same connexion,

Jer. 8, 2.

D ygten ntexjrnsi. VPX] presumably =^1^1^ 5?^ mentioned in Jos.

14. 133]

add with

LXX

18,

28

among

the

But Targ. explains characteristically B (brought up} 21D b so [Jer.] Quaestiones, ad loc. ; 5a^. I9 (see Aptow. 1909, p. 251).
1

n^aTl

ZAW.

XXL
cities
Its site is
"injn]

6-16

353

of Benjamin, next before Jerusalem, Gibeah, and Kiriath-ye arim.

unknown.
and
let

himself be entreated

(sc.
al.

successfully)

the Nifal
is

tolerativum

(GK.

51).

So Gen.

25, 21

The Arab. ^s.

cf.

to

slaughter

for

sacrifice (Wellh.

Heid? 118
I.e.
to,
;

n.,

142 n.; Rel. Sem.

apparently
to

227

f.)

so (?)

^ (Tnyn) iny (Gen.

sacrifice

Ex.

8, 4. 5al.) will

have meant originally to

entreaty
to.

weakened afterwards

make

(6)

15-22. Exploits against the Philistines.

vv. 18, 19 [333

i5f.
.

From

15 also speaks of a battle in

nr&Ofl Try Tini] it is probable that Gob: observe in those two verses the
v.

article

norpsn, which

is

absent, so soon as the scene changes, in

20.

one, now, would read the words 333 ttB M v. 1 6, regarded by them 323 ^Bty and it will be granted that 33 and selves, otherwise than as
;

No

33 are readily interchangeable.

As, however, a notice of the place at

13K"1

which the contest occurred

abode in

is

here required, the reading 333

and

Gob

is

in fact the correct

and stood
31
*"pi>*3

originally after toy v. 15.

:

one; the words are misplaced, in fjy 1 By their removal

"ltJ>K

stand in juxtaposition

in

in

ejjH is

concealed the
1

name of
i|

the Philistine, and perhaps a verb as well, such as !, of which inx i i6 b would be the sequel. It is no loss to be rid of the name YishboDp"

David grew wearied ; and, as has been remarked, the scene of the battle can least of all at the begin ning remain unmentioned (We.). Read, therefore (after DTlfc^S)
benob,

and of the statement

that

nsin

*"lv*3

Ep J1, the name of the Philistine being no longer T

of
v.

recoverable.
1

The

site

Gob
18

is
i

unknown.
Ch. 20, 4 D Nsnn

6.

nsnn

n^n]
i

So

(in

T^D).

n ?17,

not of an individual, but, as the

(cf.

article

shews, collectively, of the race

the plur. in
sing,
is

Ch. 20, 4): so vv. 20. 22

The
the

found only in these passages.

Dt.

(=KEnn i Ch. The pi. D^SH

20. 3, 13;

20, 6. 8).

occurs in

names of

certain parts of Palestine reputed to have

2,

been the abode

3,

of a pre-historic giant population:

n.

Og
of

D^NQin
12, 4.
isfi.i

"irTO

so in the Deuteronomizing sections of Joshua, Jos.

Jos. 15, 8 al. (see

13, 12);

on

5,

18) the D^Efi pDy

SW.

A a

354

The Second Book of Samuel,

With the

Jerusalem; 17, 15; Gen. 14, 5 (E. of Jordan). 15, 20. unusual T^ cf. the p:yn H iv Nu. 13, 22. 28. Jos. 15, 14.
l^p]

from

p.P,

only here, explained as meaning spear (so

/br^<?

LXX),
spear
).

from Arab.

Jjls

to

r0,

^3

an iron-smith (but no/ a

p.

Klo. conjectured IjDIp

^w

helmet (I 17, 38; in

5 SOia): so Bu.

Sm.

Now.
(cf.

(not Dh.).
I 17, 5).

300 shekels of bronze would weigh about 13

(AV. RV. are obliged
to

Ibs. av.

on

nt^m bpt?c] Read JlBTU b%y.

shekels in italics
!)
. . .
:

supply

ntJHn]

new

either a subst. with

is

which nann would agree

is

has dropped out,

the

or,

which

more probable, n^nn

a corruption of

name

of
club.

some

rare weapon, which the Philistine wore.

LXX

Kopvvrjv a

17.

^X-lti"

"13T1N]

The lamp burning

"13

in a

tent

or house being

a figure of the continued prosperity of its owner (fy. 18, 29. Pr. 13, 9. promised to the house of David, Job 1 8, 6) or of his family (cf. the
i

Ki.

n,

36.
1

15, 4.

Ki. 8, 19

=2

Ch. 21, 7t).

18-22 =
1 8.

Ch. 20, 4-8. Ch.

1T3.3.
""3D.

333]

f]D]

In

Ch. 20, 4

On

the varying terminations of

one and

the

same

pr. n. in parallel texts,

comp.

p. 4,

and Wellh. De Gentibus,

etc. (cited ib.\ pp.

37-39.
rp3

19]

Ton

n"b

nx Dr6n

Dn ny p
x

pni>

71.

Ch. *n:n n^j

ms

icni?

ns

my p
its

pn^x 71.
into the text here

It is evident that

D^HN has found

must be read

way

accident from the line below, though

the error

by must be older than

LXX
i

2
;

and

that

Ty

for

ny,

with

LXX,
Is

Pesh. and JV3

Ch. 20, 5 Qre.

But what of the other variants?

nx iDH^n
this,

the original reading,

rection

and TIN

*fcrb

ON

a corruption of
I 17

or cor
it

made

for the

purpose of harmonizing with

(where

is

Qre

"Vy

as
i.e.

LXX,
"iy,

Pesh.

(Jerome

filius

saltus

[cf.

Aptowitzer,

ZAW.

1909, p. 252],
a

without the plena scriptio).

Or, at least, than Codd. BA (Apiupyftn). Some twenty others, however, have and Lucian reads /cat (Trara^tv E\\avav vios Ia8Siv viow rov EX/ rov Apaipi
;

To\iaO.

XXL
David who
slays Goliath), or
is

16-20

355
the original text,

TIN

^r DN

and

nx
that

*DrPfl JTa a corruption?

is
is

When
it

the character of the two alter

difficult to resist

native readings
the former

considered,
the

is

the conclusion

a scribe having before

more probable. It is scarcely credible that him a text identical with that of Ch., even
it

supposing that some

letters in

had become
17 that
as to

obliterated or obscure,

could, with the knowledge

of
it

he must have possessed,

it

have so altered or emended

the son of

make

state that

Elhanan
It is

Ya ir

the Beth-khcmile slew Goliath of

Gath

not

merely the case of a word TIN

brother

of
DN

having dropped out of

the original text (which could readily be imagined), which the latter

supposition involves, but the substitution of

for TIN,

and the
for

still

more remarkable one of nDn^rrm

Lahmi.
text of

the Beth-lehemite

er6viK

On

the other hand, a motive for the correction of the

Chronicles

Samuel by the Chronicler or even by a copyist of the is So even Bertheau (on Ch.), as well as obvious.
iii.

Ewald

(Hist.

70), Thenius, Wellh. (Hist,

21.

of Israel,

p. 266),

Kuenen

(Onderzoek,
volved,
if

10;

23. 4)*.

Upon
p. 122. I 17, 7.

the historical

question in

the reading of

Samuel be accepted as
See on

original, this is not

the place to enter.

D>nx

See Kennedy,

nwoa
p*ld]
:

irvon pjn]
i.e.

20. Kt.

probably p^O vir mensurarum:

cf.
i

rilTO

"^JN

Nu.
This

13, 32
J,

the

of the pi. might be defended by

is

pnv

Ki.

n,

33.

however,

rare (25 times, including fpt?

13 times in Job),
the
pi.
TJV

and

chiefly late

(GK.

87

);

and the masc. form of

does
avyp
with

not occur elsewhere.

Qre |il, so read already by

signification.
It
.

LXX

(KO!

MaoW), but of uncertain

i

is

best to read rn

Ch. 20, 6;
vv.

cf.

!TTO
is

C JN I s .

45,

I4

Observe that here ncr^D,

agreement with the fresh

unlike

18.

19,

without the

art., in

scene of battle D2 (We.).

"ISDO]

adv. accus.

in

number
in
i

cf.

on
6.

I 6, 4.

nS"ir6]

So

v.

22,

and

Ch. 20,

(Nnn!>).

The

unusual

Griitz (Gesch.

i.

427) would explain the divergent readings by assuming as the

original text

TUn D^J

TIN

Dn!>

HN ^rhf] JTQ ~\^

A a
2

}3

pn^N

71.

356
retention of the

The Second Book of Samuel,

art. after

the prep. 1

may

arise

from HDin being treated

as a proper name.

2i a

epm]
}"Jp?

Cf. I 17, 25, of Goliath.

2ib Kt.
>yct2>]

So
.riK]
it

LXX

(2^et)
d

Qr6

Kyotf.

See on

I 16, 9.
:

22.

Ew.

277

compares Jud.

20, 44. 46. Jer. 45, 4

(

DS

having nearly, as
four, they

seems, the force of as regards

as regards these
in the transition

were/

etc.),

and being used sometimes

and see
also

to something new,

sometimes, as here,
;

in the brief repetition

of

a thought:

comp. Lex. 85* 3 a

Kon.

iii.

108-110.

But probably

1^ (GK.
(c)

i2i b ) should be restored;

cf. v.

n,

above.

22.

David s Hymn of Triumph.

This recurs (with textual variations) as ty. 18, and has been so adequately dealt with in Commentaries on the Psalms accessible to
the English student, that a fresh series of explanatory notes does not

appear to the writer to be required.

(d) 23, 1-7.
i.

David

Last Words
is

DNJ]

The
name

genitive which follows

Is. i,

usually

!TliT

(occasionally
is

a synonym, as pnxn
with the

24.

19,

4):

except here, DNJ

3.

joined
"i33n

of a

human

speaker only Nu. 24,

15 (with
i

in the parallel clause, as here). 4. 16 (of Balaam).

\[/.

Pr. 30,

("OJn):

36, 2 the gen.

is

ytj>3

personified.

&2] The

tone

is

thrown back from the ultima on account of

:

the tone-syllable immediately following

takes place, as a rule, only
as here

the

retrocession,
is

however,
syllable,

when

the penultima

an open
i.

(GK.

29;
edd.,

for exceptions, see

is

298; Kon.

475).

The

P,

found
^y]

in

many
is

contrary to the Massorah.

al.),

?y

here a substantive (as in ?yo Gen. 27, 39

construed
"QltJ*

in the accus. after

Dpn
not

raised

up on high

as Hos.

7,

16 ^y $b

they return,

(but)

/>wards;

u,

inxip
is

11

?y~7N they

call

it

Awards,

if

the text of these two passages

correct.

Elsewhere (except
;

in

D1TD)
l

rare,

error)
a
2

I 13, 21

mtDTIpn.
;

(also probably
\f/.

and mostly an error

36, 6;

late
:

ch. 16, 2 Kt. (the

7 an
;

notice the following Tlbl)

8, i;

Ki.

7,

12 Kt.

Ez. 40, 25; 47, 22;

all

Qoh.

Neh.

9,

19; 12, 38;

Ch. 10, 7; 25, 10; 29, 27 being

the examples that occur.

Cf.

GK.

35.

XXL
jn]
is

21

XXIII. 2
of
(the) jo/z^j
J.),
0/"

357
Israel.
i,

Lit.

/&? pleasant one

(cf.
I,

pleasant,

agreeable
i,

23 (of Saul and

;

Cant,

16,

and

the verb ch.

26 1ND
),

noyj)

and niTBT means songs (not

necessarily

psalms

Is. 24, 16.

25, 5 (rwy

D^ny

TOT),

i^.

95,

2.

119, 54. Job 35, iof.

Does, now, the whole expression

(

mean

(a),

The pleasant one of songs like 2918) niTDT

D>yJ,

= The
25, 3

pleasant singer] of Israel (so

Ew.

0^0

JTJ,

Jer. 32,
iii.

19 MSJjn i?H3,

i/r.

119,

-pi

B- En etc.

(GK.

128*; Kon.

336^),

and
T

^JOB"

limiting,

not niTBT alone, but the

compound

idea

nn

D^yJ, like

Dt.

i,

41 iriDHprp *p3f not

Is.

war ;

50, 8

DB2>D

the weapons of his war, ~bo\.hisweapons-qf~ ^y3; 28, i DnBK ntaB? TUK3 JY1BJ[ the croivn of

pride (=-the proud crown) of the drunkards of

parallels cited

Ephraim ; and

the

on

ch. 8,

10

yn ninrta BN), and GK.

135?

Or
"

does

it

mean (), The

pleasant object of the songs of Israel, the

"joy

If (a)

(Sm.) or the "darling" (Klo. Bu. Kenn. Kit.) of the songs of Israel? be right, David will be alluded to as the writer of graceful and
attractive

poetry

(cf.

Am.

6,

b
),

not necessarily either including,

the sweet psalmist of

or excluding, religious poetry, though the rend.

Israel

suggests

much

too strongly the unhistorical David

of the

Chronicles and the

to

titles

of the Psalms

if

(b)

be

right,

it

will allude

him

as

a popular favourite, whose achievements in war were

celebrated

by

the poets of his people

;

(cf.

18, 7

= 21,

12

= 29,

5).

284) supports (a), and it is, grammatically, a perfectly legitimate rendering but most moderns prefer (3). The

Konig (iii.

28 i h

Stilistik,

explanation of D^yj from

^.ij,

as

meaning singer (Now. Dh. ; Lex.6^4

perhaps
2.

),

is

precarious.

131]

in

is

used similarly, of
2.

God
Zech.

(never

of

men

)
.

speaking with a person, Nu. 12,

6. 8 a

Ki. 22, 28.

i, 9.

Hos.
13.

a i, 2

Hab.
4,

2, i

and

in the phrase
6, 4.

"mri

"]K7On

2, 2. 7.

i. 4. 5. is
is

5, 5. 10.

The
(e.g.
is

usual

expression, even when

4.

the
2
;

subject

God,

is

i?K

131

Ex. 33, n. Nu. 12,

the exact force of
in or through*
X

Hos.

b i, 2 )

and

it

a question what

"131.

In some
;

of the passages the

1

meaning

would be admissible
25, 39).
i.

Except in other senses, as against, about (I Or sometimes OX as Gen. 17, 3. 22.

"131,

19, 3;

23. Ex. 25, 22. Ez. 2,

:

3, 23. 24.

Though through would be more properly

T3

Is. 20, 2.

Hos.

12,

n b al.

358
but these
will

The Second Book of Samuel,

not suit the phrase in Zech.
pntJ>

Ew.

iff) understood
*T3y to

the phrase

on the analogy of a

to play with,

labour
speak

wz /A (=to use as a labourer, Ex.

with,
inferior as his minister

i,

14

al.),

in the sense

of

to

but with the collateral idea of a superior speaking with an

(Now. Hosea (1880),

2 as

p. 3

cf.

C.

H. H. Wright
force
1
:

on Zech.

i, 9). to

strengthened
again,
(A/
2

Others regard the 3 3 D^n (cf.

PIK"),

having

the

of a
others,

to look at:

3 yot?)

suppose
.

it

to

express the

idea

of speaking into a person

<?mreden)

On

the whole, the explanation of

But,

Ewald appears

to

be the most probable.

131.
is

however

it

be explained, the phrase

certainly appears to imply closer

and more intimate converse than

the ordinary intal]

poetry,
3.
\j/.

i>K

r6o

properly an Aramaic word, in Heb. used only in

139, 4. Pr. 23, 9 and thirty-four times in Job.

19, 5.

bx^W

Tita]

as

b compared with 3

Luc. Sm. Bu. Now. Dh. 3py M^N. is an improvement cf. v. i

, :
.

The

variation,

hvTW 1W]
18.
f

Is.

30,

29:

cf.

ofc.

22,

3.

32.

47;

Dt. 32,

4.

15.

31. 37y\

^D] When
(v.

one ruleth over men, as a

one ruleth

just one,

When
4)

(in) the fear of

God,

Then

is it

as the light, etc.

cf.

b&\Q

is

a ptcp. absolute;

on

2,

13; and Jud.

for
r^.
1,

7,

17.

9,

33

(Tenses,

126; 135. 6;
4,

GK.

u6 w ):
25;

marking the
34 (Tenses,
the

pred.,

comp. Job
Obs.
;

6 (Delitzsch);

Pr. 10,

15,

125
chief

GK.

143

d
).

The

accents must be disregarded:

p"iv.
"

break in clause

<5

should be at

For nNT

as adv. accus.,

GK.

n8i.
4.

20 MSS., however, read

is it

J1KT3.

Then

as the light of morning,

when

the sun ariseth,

[earth.

morning without clouds,

young grass to shoot after rain out of the The beneficent operation of a just and gracious rule is compared to the influence of the sun, on a cloudless morning after rain, in
the refreshing

That maketh

and invigorating the growing verdure of the

earth.

1
a

Konig, Offenbarungsbegriff des AT.s, ii. (1882), p. 179. Riehm, Messianic Prophecy (ed. a), 1891, p. 41.

XXIII. 2-s
1P3 niiOl]
We.), in the

359
is

LXX
i.

KCU eV 0eoo
:

<WTI,

which

adopted by Th. We.

and Stade (Gesch.

Then is it 297) when the sun morning

Heb.
;

as the light of ariseth/ etc.

it

God
But
if

(of
"11N

Yahweh, and np3

is

are often conjoined in

and

is

doubtful

the addition

an improvement. ni2y vh~\ vh and

case

^2

in poetry,

and px

in prose as well, are

con

strued with a following subst. as a circumstantial clause, in which

they become equivalent to the English without: Ex. 21, out free, without money; Job 24, 10 PJD3 ptf D3n nsyi she shall go

naked, they walk up and

*]-n
"y\

down W\y? vl without

(Tenses,

covering ;

12,

24.

fc^

inna^in a pathless waste

naJlo]

164).
after rain

1BEO

Through brightness

the

young grass
1

fiJJ of a brightly shining light, as (springeth) out of the earth. of the cause, as Job 4, 9. 14, 19 D ? Is. 62, i. Pr. 4, 18; and }
"!

rnc^ DVD
is

(cf.

on

7, 29).

But there must be some error here. and the two nouns with
1 **

verb

imperatively required;

are not an elegance.

P
is

??^J
:

c f-

J oe l 2

>

22 )
al.

|1D

(iDDO naao)
in

earth springeth
right

might be a

sufficient

change

but Klo. Bu.

may be

thinking that a ptcp.

(fy.

concealed under naa.

-3

Klo. suggests D^ifO

104, 14),
to

n*.?? or even

? (Zech. 9, 17);

Sm. proposes H^D

gleam (viz. in the sunlight after the rain). 3313D, to judge from the Qal, and ^, suggests the idea of fruit too much to be

making

suitable for
differs
5.

KEH.

ITnVD would be the best

but the ductus litterarum

a good deal from that of H3JD.

For

is

not

my

house thus with

For he hath appointed for Set forth in all things and secured.
For
a
,

God ? me an everlasting
pleasure,
?

covenant,

all

my

welfare,

and
it

all

my
is

Will he not cause

to spring forth
"O

In

v.

as the text stands,

explicative (Lex.

473

c), intro

ducing an example of the general truth expressed

in v. 3 b -4
v.

blessings of a righteous rule, described in general terms in

the b 3 ~4,
:

David ground

in

v. 5

anticipates in particular for his

own

dynasty,

on the
his

of the covenant established with

him by Yahweh, and of

assurance that the welfare which he desires himself for his house and
people
will

be promoted by God.

points backwards to the descrip-

360
tion in v. 3^-4.

The Second Book of Samuel,

In
31

N^
is,

*3

the question

is

indicated by the tone

(on I
ttb
"O

u,

12).

The

case

however, an extreme one; and &On for

Still 13

(Bu.) would be an improvement.

was read by LXX.

fi33 for

D^iy
7,

fVO
Now.
etc.

is

an allusion to
J133

7,

12-16.
JV3l),

Nestle (Marg. 21), comparing

26 b (fish

rr?V

in TOy

would indeed read

e)

i6

(so

Dh.),

Surely (Lex. 472

is

my

house

is

established with

an expression borrowed probably from legal terminology, and intended to describe the TVD as one of which the terms are fully and duly set forth (comp. the forensic use God,
of
"py

mot^l 723 nany

in
is

Job 13,

al.

to state

in order or set forth pleadings),

and

which

secured by proper precautions against surreptitious alteration

or injury,

y^
suff.

welfare, as

Job

5, 4.

n.

Psalms, as 12,

6. 18, 3.

36. 20, 7 etc.

in spite of

and often in the For pan read ^ Sn to under

Is. 17, 10,
:

stand the

from yE%
n"}D7

Ex. 15,

2= Is.
read

12, 2=/r. 118, 14

is

(where either render

to idiom.
a
.);

a song,

or, better,

^"IBT),

contrary

For the following N^ 3 read probably Npn (We., GK.

as the text stands,
is
"O

i5o

will

be resumptive of the

a just

before.

ub
by

used figuratively: comp. II Isaiah 45, 8. 58, 8. 61, But HvJP cause it to prosper would be a good emendation.

HDV

In vv. 6-7 the poet contrasts the

fate of the wicked,

whom men

spurn and extirpate by force, with the love and honour awarded
his people to the righteous rulers described in vv. 3-4.
6.

But worthlessness

as thorns chased away are For not with hand do men take them.

all

of

them

^y6n
often:
in

is

a cas. pendens (as

197.

Is.

32, 7
suff.

D
in

Jp

1^>3

^31, ^. 89, 3 and

Tenses,

whom
L

Qr&3 refers to the persons 2), The form the by6l is conceived implicitly to inhere.
< <

and the

Dn?3 (GK.
etc. (Stade,

9i

to be explained on the analogy of OD?5?, ^^~^, b 350*. 3; io7 . i): this uncontracted form of the suffix
f
)

is

of 3

pi.

does not occur elsewhere with sing, substantives

in

MT.

(except

in \hzfem.

^L ^
1

Ki7>

37

>

n5

?^ ri ? Ez.

16,

53

and

in a few forms

a b such as j$W3pGen.3i,a8. fn^DEz. 13,17: Stade, 353 ia,y, 2,353 ), but it must be assumed in Jer. 15, 10 [see p. xxviii]; cf. Dn3D once,

Job n,

20, for En*?, also Ei ^? (5 times),

1

Dney

often,
is

both in and out

of pause [the sign f in Stade,

350*. 4; 377^

an oversight], D\v
18, 18

always.

"1JP

is

the passive either of 1?.n /o

r^a^ away (Job

XXIII.
20, 8
r

/,

WI
the

pnro -pn), O r of Tin

:

put

to

flight (^. 3 6,
T:ni>).

-n

2 Ki. 21,
:

8
it

nmxn
is

i?tns

i>n

But

word

excites suspicion

for

not one that would naturally

be applied to thorns. Klo. proposes "CHO f^P (cf. Jud. 8, 7. 16); so Sm. Bu. (alt.) Now. Dh. For T3 see on I 26, 23. The subj. of inp
11

is,

of course, DTIp &n (on I 16,

*

4).

7.

But the

man
with

(who) touches them arms himself with iron and

s shaft
;

a spear

And
K.^, on
viz. in

fire

are they burned utterly.

the analogy of n0|93

iT

K<?D

2 Ki. 9, 24,
is

lit.

so far as the hand using the

weapon

concerned.
in (their) place/ or

in the sitting,

which

is

interpreted to
is

mean

on

the spot.

But the expression

is

a very singular one; and the sup

posed meaning
for expressing

destitute of analogy, QfinPi

being the idiomatic word

cf.

it

(Job 40, 12

Dnnn

DW1

Tin 1.:

I 14, 9).

Nor

is

cessation, annihilation

(from ^1?^), proposed by Delitzsch on Pr. 20,

3,

a more probable rendering.

IDIE"

The word

is

in fact otiose after 5?KT)

error

cjn^; and, it cannot be doubted, has arisen in the text by from mtja in the line below.
:

C Conjectural restorations of 5 ~7

Now.

(agreeing with Sm., except in the part

left

vacant) -)31

pp3
J1
is

bjJb WDtf N^

||

13
|

^DH
g^

<?3\

.................
||
f)1"lt^

Dm
<&M

j?a

N^ t^w

n*3 N^

Wb o
||

^3

nn^3
Now.

;iai^

{yN31
it

N^

^ For they are not picked up by hand, neither

any man
labour upon them, 13
||

omits the JO, but

worthless).

needed

i.

e.

they are

Bu., though not very confidently, suggests:

(or

H^J

pD3)
(or

"1310

pin
t^
J1

^13
^3

i>^*)

o.
ar<?

For not by {human} hand (Job 34, 20) ( away, nor doth man touch them ; iron and the shaft of a spear doth not
K?
profit] them, but, etc.).

//z^ taken
deliver (or

poem, comp. Ewald, Die Dichler des Alien Bundes, i. i The 20. (1866), pp. 143-145; Orelli, Old Testament Prophecy, central idea is the prophetic thought, expressed by David in the
this

On

near prospect of death, that

if his

successors

upon

the throne are

guided by righteous principles of government, his dynasty ( house, as 7, 1 6), under the blessing of God, will be established and prosper.

362

The Second Book of Samuel,

b

This thought is developed in the three strophes (vv. 3 -4, 5, 6-7) which form the body of the poem. Observe the finished parallelism of the exordium (vv. 13*, forming a strophe of eight lines).
(e)

23, 8-39. Further exploits against

15-22), and
list

the Philistines

(comp. 21,

of David s

heroes.

23,
i

839 = 1
s

Ch.

n,

ii

4i

twelve of the

names

recur also in

Ch. 27, 2-15, as those of the captains of the twelve divisions of

David

army.
lists,

Here are the three

as they
is
it

stand in

MT.,

the

names

in

several instances vary, nor

always possible to determine

which

form
2

is

original, or

whether both
i

may
Ch.

not be corrupt

Sam.

23.

n.

Ch. 27.

naea 3B*
9
ii.

n.

wean p
4.

iwnr p
rnnxn

xa.vnrMnnrTpinri>M

mn
2O.

8.

HK
1

20.

yTirf

irraa

22.

iT33

5.

24.

axv TIN bxn^y

26.

asv

ns

7.

3KV

25-

nn p mnn mnn
ypnn
t^py

nn p
27.

26.

10.

28. yipnn t^py

9.

yipnn
TVinayn nryax

27.

12. 29.
II.

28. 30. 29.

nno
naya

13.
15.

nnta

^nataan

mya p a an p PI
onyns

n^n
"rrN

31.

^an

3o

a.

Taa

14.

ainynan

XXIII. 8
2

363
i

Sam.

23.

Ch. ii.

nn
nsrnan niciy

32.

mn
nsnmn rmy
"wan

33

32j>i

133

34.

Dpn

"oa

33-

nnnn

niop

33

mn TIP p
p
-GDI-IN

:jniin^

DNTIN

35.

ninn N:P p fnjv mnn nap p o^ns

TIN

34. ^nsytDn

p
36-

^B^K
nan

35.

n
i"0">an

nsn
""Tya

37-

TDK nxn

unxn
36.

nav

jn:

p
nan

^Na s
in T

38-

nan
39.

-inao

37-

aiEyn pbx

nnsan nna
38.

nn\n

40.

39First

41

nnn

come
(vv.

the

Shammah
two
others,

Three/ Ishba al, Eleazar son of Dodo, and 8-17), whose exploits are specially recorded, then
(vv.

Abishai and Jehoiada

18-23), whose bravery did

not place them on an equality with the

Three,
24-39).

but

who ranked

above the

Thirty 8-12. Exploits of the Three.

8.

Thirty/ lastly the

(vv.

na^a 3B]

LXX
;

le^oo-^e
cf.

(i.e.

ntPa BXN, as

2,

8 etc.);

Luc.

Ieo-/3aaX (i.e.

^ya^N

on

14, 49);

LXX
1 ;

Ch. II

Ire/3aAa,

(no doubt for

original

Ie<re/3aAa),

Luc.

leo-cre/JaaA

Ch. 27 2o/3aA.
first

The

name was

thus evidently

Py.?^

(so

Geiger,
will

ZDMG.
then have

1862, p. 730; and then

been

first

altered to

We. n^a^N

Klo. Bu. etc.);

^ya^N

(on

4,

2),

whence

LXX
;

lefioo-Qf, this

Also Codd. 44, 74, 120, 134, 144, 236, 243, leue/SaaX

56, 119, 121, lovSaaA.

364

The Second Book of Samuel,

(cf.
i

next became T\V2W

into

p. 120),

which

in its turn
rid of

was corrupted
by a
different
still

meo w.
:

In

Ch.

n,

27

i?y3

was got

but in each of the three passages the original name existed uncorrected in the MSS. by which some texts of the

change

LXX
32.
22.

were

revised.

Read *?bann
Explained to
2 Ki. 10, 25 al.):

with

mean

We. Kp. etc. cf. i Ch. n, n. 27, knights B^hs? (Ex. 14, 7. i Ki. 9,
:
""

but this leaves the gentile or patronymic

the sequel,
it

un

accounted

for.

From
i
i

is

tolerably clear that

we must

read either (with

Ch.

n,

Kt.) ENPlhffl t?K1,

(so We.).

or (with Lucian,
latter is

both here and

better (Bu.

Ch.)
:

nf&ffa Btn
Ishba

The
1

probably

Now. Dh.)
i

al is styled

Chief oi the
.

Three.

13yn 13Hy Nin]

read, with
^z>

The words
But

Ch.
z>.

n, n,
18.

Most moderns are meaningless ftVJrrnK -niy Kin he brandished (Is. 10, 26)
this is rather
;

spear

cf.

not supported by the

tcnrd(j-a.To TTJV

LXX

for e^yetpe TO 86pv avrov, v. 18,

is

an easy emendation; and it is shews that

po^atav avrov here

i

derived from the

LXX translation
which Klo.

of Chronicles (We.).
thinks points to

Luc. ouros SiKooy/,ei

"ny

rrjv Siao-Kev^v,

Ch. 12, 38), improved by Marquart &3"J5JP (cf. into n5?J?O Tiy brandished his axe (Jer. 10, 3. Is. 44, I2f): so Bu.

Dh.

i^tfn

l"iy

also brandished his

axe (Ass. hasinnu, axe

;
l|

Eth.

pvn z row

(the

common word
Is.

for it: Dillm.

HVyo

Jer. 10, 3.

44, 12,

and

in

Lex. 623); Targ. N3 3fD= Talm.: Syr. U*l axe (rare): cf.
p.

Frankel, Die Aram. Fremdworter im Arab., 1886,

86

f.).

Either
possible

nVi?D or ljsn resembles IJVyn more than IJVJn does

that

and

it is

one of these corrections

n:DB>
i>y]

is

right.

niNE

over

800
Ch.

slain
1 1,

ones/
has

i.e.

in triumph, after

he had
is

slain them.

For
all

rt?

r i

BW.

But

the text here

;

has ewaKoo-tous] and is by also more probable independently, as otherwise Ishba al would have
attested

Versions [except Luc.,

who

no

superiority over Abishai, v. 18

<I

(Thenius).
i"n

9.

5:

I]

so Kt. and

Ch. 27, 4:

Qre,

LXX

(TOV

Tra.Tpa8eX<t>ov

1 On the curious rend, of the Vulg. ( ipse est quasi tenerrimus ligni vermiculus ), based on a Haggadic interpretation of 13"ny and IJifyn, see Aptowitzer, ZAW.

1909, P. 252

(Njn^ ny^ni ny^ina iD^y nyrp

nM rmro PDW

aw

ys ii*y

XXIII. 8-1}
avrov),
is

365

and

Ch.

1 1,

12.

I|

seems best
njZlN,

my

uncle (or friend):

//<?.

cf.

probably short for n*"n fl*?^ etc.; .7?. 3289 f., and
:

Yah
52

end; Gray,
^nriN
1

p]

No

/Vc^. Names, 60 ff. ; and also above, p. xc (on mn). and 27 in doubt an error for Tinsn, as in i Ch.

Ch.

8, 4

words

mnK is the name of a Benjaminite clan. In i Ch. 27 the 1TJ&N appear to have accidentally fallen out before nil.
after

Dsnra in oy] Read I 17, i D Oi (cf. D2N):

remarks,
is

Ch. D Di Dan

m ny

rpn Kin
as

the mention of the //a^,

Th.

is

required by the following DC?.

That

the text of

Samuel

imperfect appears independently (i) from the construction of spn with 3, which is not found elsewhere, and not substantiated by 5 Ppn
2

Ch. 32, 17; (2) by the omission of 1C?X (implied in

is

MT.)
i

before

1SDN3, which

suspicious in prose (on I 14, 21).

i.e.

IPyi] were gone up,

Jer. 21,

had retreated
in

(cf.,

from a

siege,

Ki. 15, 19.

2; and on

ch. 20, 2):

io b they return.

10. Nin]

Read,

after the

preceding

in

Dy

rvri

Nin (see the last note

but one), Kim (Luc. Pesh. Sm. Bu. etc.). 31 p3ini] The muscles became so

stiff

that he could not relax

them.
ii.

Cf. the parallel cited

:

by Sm. from Doughty, Arabia Deserta,

28

my

perished before me until the evening, could not be loosed from the handle of the sword. fingers

The Kusman

when

ncy] More picturesque

than.

HW:

ch. 2, 28.

IN] Position as I 21, 5. Ex. 10, 17 al. Dysn *]. b 11. MJN] Luc. HAa, whence Klo. Dh. (i Ki.

4, 18).

mn]
^JD?]

Read T^ri,
i"

as

v.

!"

(v.

13) yields
(iii.

33 and i Ch. ii, 34. here no suitable sense.

Keil,

Read
etc.

with Bochart,
njnj) to

Kennicott,
(Jud. 15, 9

Ew.
:

141),

Th. Bo. We.

Kp. Bu.

Lehi

Luc. eVt o-iayova); and note the following DC?. ii-i2. r6l13 nyiB>n ... DC? Mni] In i Ch. ii, 13-14 these words

(slightly varied) are referred to the exploit of Eleazar, the words b a nvb to omitted. been

from

accidentally (incl.) having Ch. has D^ly t? barley. D^iy and took his stand 12. ayrvi] similarly I 17, 16.
lenfiles
:

l^yi

For

13-17.
1

An

exploit of three of the Thirty.

3.

Kt.

D^C?] An

evident error

read with Qre HC?^E? for

These

three of the Thirty chief are not those just

mentioned (Ishba al,

366
Eleazar, and

The Second Book of Samuel,

Shammah), but
ff.

three others, belonging to the

named

v.

24

mentioned; so

The (Keil). We. perhaps

Thirty
is

Thirty have not, however, yet been right in treating vv. 13- 17* as not

standing here in their original connexion, and regarding 17^ as the

original close of vv.

8-12 (notice i7 b H7X, which

not expressed by

suits

8-12 much

better than
B>S1

I4~i7

a
).

DHphsnt)] Ch. ii, 15 has

is

pression
leader (v.

the
;

18

cf.

LXX, Pesh. (though seems out of place: the standing ex it), where it is used, denotes their Thirty/ and also is peculiar: we should expect The Heb. 8).
t?N*l
is

and

it

tJ>N1,

D^ JOn
i

D*B^Bt3

(GK.

134.

for the place of the art.,

see Gen.

18, 28. Jos. 6, 8. 22. I 17, 14); but, as exceptions occur (Jud. 11, 33.

Ki. 9, ii
his

esp.
xviii.

Kon Nu. 1 6, 35. Jos. 4, 4 3*3 and TV? D luminous synopsis of constructions of numerals in AJSL.
[
:
"*

>

(1902), p. isSff. ; Herner, Syntax der Zahlworter, 1893, pp. See the next note. 93-119), this ought not perhaps to be pressed.

Tp
to

thus of time.

^N] cannot mean in or during harvest Luc. has ei? rrjv irerpav and so
}
:

for
i

7X

is

not used
"^D

Ch. 11,15

the rock (omitting IXTl)

but the
"in

fact that the place to

which the
this

three heroes

went

is

stated after

^X

is

an objection both to

reading,

KcuW)
that
),

is

Tp

any place-name (LXX cis Perhaps Bu. is right in the suggestion should be read (before at the beginning of harvest t?N1 t?N1 as Jud. 7, 19. Nu. 10, 10.
also to the supposition that
"VXp.

and

concealed under

D^iy

mj?] Read
cf. 5,
1 7

probably

ffiHJJ

n"TC:

see v . 13; and on I 22,

i.

With nTI

1886, JTn] the fern, of D I 18, 18 according to Noldeke, i.e. a clan, or company of related families, making a raid together 176, (Lex. 312^).
D^NS"!

ZDMG.

Explained in Ch. by iuniD. pOV3] in 5, 1 8. 22 also the scene of a Philistine attack.

24, 23. II 5, 17.
p.

No

doubt the occasion also was the same.

14.

mrooa] miron
in or at

I 22, 4. 5.
:

Dn? JV3]
15.
cistern.

Bethlehem

37

note.

1N3D] Kt. 1600 from the well;

Qre

">N2O

(Ch. 112O) from the

The Qr6 may be due

at

to the fact that there

:

was no
none

well
there

known

Bethlehem

in later times

there seems to be

XXIII. ij-i8
now (Rob.
1

367
Id el-miyeh (on I 22,
i),

i.

470, 473).

If

Adullam was

at

Bethlehem would be about 13 miles from it. 17. niiT ] Read, with many MSS., Lucian (napa Kvptov), Pesh. Targ. and Ch., miTD, in accordance with usage (e.g. I 26, n).
.
,

Din]
is,

On

the aposiopesis,
:

cf.

Ew.
it is

303*;

GK.

i67

a.

The
true

aposiopesis

however, extreme

and

better to insert
:

nn^X (LXX)
it is

after DntPajn.

Bu. objects indeed to the position

}yoi>,

but though

that

L],

like ON, ]y\

etc., is,

as a rule, followed immediately

quite correctly follow

by the
it

verb, the object, or

some other word, may

cf.

for

emphasis (pp. 35, 323):

6,

Nu.

16,
n3B>

14 Tjan Dnn DGWKn TOi.

-B>Kn.

2 Ki.

22

nan nnN
3,

inB>p:n

-pirn

Am.

5,

25;
2 Ki.

with other
i,

words, Gen.

n. Nu.

20, 10. Dt. 32, 6. ch. 3, 33.

6.

Job
12.

15, 8. Is. 36, 12. Jer. 5, 9.

Ez. 20, 30.

Cf. after N7H,

Nu. 23,

Jud.

n,
Ki.

24. Dt. 31, 17. Jer. 44, 21. Ez. 34, 2 D^jnn

iyv jsvn
of their

Nibn.
lives
:

Dni5J>2J3]

The 2
23.

is

the Bethpretii: at the cost or r

cf.

2,

18-23.
1

Th e

Thirty.

8.

Kt.

*J?hwi]
l
,

The

sense requires that

i

we should

read,

with

Pesh.
;

We. Gratz
in

Berth, (on
(see 23
a
).

Ch.

n,

20

f.)

DB^fn
:

the Thirty, with

DKO^ n-|Jp
to the

i9

Abishai was chief of the

Thirty,

and

but he was not equal of the Thirty ih (similarly of Benaiah, in v. 22 b ) occasions difficulty. In spite of i Ch. n, 21 (RV. marg.) it does not appear that a second triad of worthies, to which Abishai and
distinguished

beyond the
ne6tJ>3

rest
DB>

Three.

Benaiah might have belonged, is here really indicated ; and yet, as Three (Ishba al, Eleazar, it seems, the reference cannot be to the

Shammah):
equal them.

for

it

is

expressly said of these two that they did not

The

majority

of

modern Commentators read (both

here and, mutatis mutandis, in 22^) either (Bu. Sm.)

n^7^3

like the

Three

they had a name

like that

of the Three, though they did not

actually belong to
ap. Kautzsch),

them;

or,

with Pesh.

We.

Berth.

Now.

Kit. (in 22,

Dh. D^tp?
the

in spite of the tautology (Bu.) with 19*

and 23

among

Thirty,

Abishai

and Benaiah attained fame

In a note on the

lists

of David

heroes, Gesch. der Juden,

i.

(1874), pp.

419-428.

368
(emph.)
others
;

The Second Book of Samuel,

among
the

Thirty, and were

more
J.

distinguished than the

S. Stopford,

but they did not equal the Three.

viii.

T.

however,
DtJ>

suggests very plausibly (Hermathena,

223)

nt!O$3
10, 10.

i?

N?1.

For Abishai, see

26, 6-9. ch. 2, 18. 24. 3, 30.

14. 16, 9.

n,

etc.;

21, 17.
l|

19.

^n]

3n=A

it

that

..?

9,

(in a

simple interrogation).

Gen. 27, 36 (expressing surprise 1 ).

a negative answer) t: for
affirmative answer
is

29,
I

15.
8,

Job
9.

6,

22 (expecting

*3,

comp. on

Here, however, an

required, which does not seem to be compatible The word does with the usage of ^n (AV. R V. interpolate not ). not stand in i Ch. n, 21, or in the similarly worded sentence below,

v.

23* (though there

Ch.

n,

25 has Kin 1233 inn

it

D^tPH

}D);

and can scarcely be

fan,

right.

It is easiest to

preserved in
I 20, 8.

Ch.

n,

25.

suppose For the position of n^KTrjE), comp.

a corruption of

on

20.

jm.T

(Qre)
^Tl,
i?Tl

p in33] 8, 18. i Ki. i, 82, 46. 4, 4. t^N p] p is not expressed in LXX. Read either t^K having been accidentally repeated from jjTIiT p; or p BK
^n

(the sing, of
etc.)
:

^n

"OS

D {?3K Jud. 18,

is

cf.

^n

1133

B"N

Ru.

2, i,

N Oi B*N

the former

preferable.
||,

D^yB Jl] The expression has a poetical tinge. 7J?3, except in the /s Ch. n, 22, and Ru. 2, 12 (^].?J!Q .?^), occurs only in poetry.

Cf. I 25, 3

B^S
i
11

VI.
in the direction of

Ch. n, 22. Jos. 15, 21 (in the Negeb, ^NV3p] Edom.)t; ^XXap Neh. n, 2^. Not identified.
B>

(cf.

1K 33 ^3^ ns with LXX ; and then either HN] Read above ^NV3pD), or, as }D is not usual with the name of
i>K

a country, ^Nter^ for 3N1D.

Klo., however, observing that

is

against a lion follows, which, as the text stands,

wedged

in

an exploit between

two exploits against warriors, conjectures, very cleverly, and almost "nxn smote USmK, which Bu. accepts convincingly, BN3np-i>S
"OS
:

(and pursued) the two young lions (the cubs of the lion mentioned in v. 2O b OS, as in N^^ Job 4, 1 1) into their hiding-place (I 23, 23). PN1N (except Is. 29, i, as apparently a cryptic name of Zion) does
:
"OS

not occur elsewhere as a pr. n.

1

but

this

is

not a

fatal objection to

Can

it

be that he

is

called Jacob,

and has hence overreached

me

twice

XXIII. 79-27
its

being a pr.

n.

we might
see
is

also punctuate

*?"!$f.

For another view

(*

of the

meaning of ^NIX,

W.
narn

R. Smith, Rel. Sent. 469

488).

run! Tl*] the sequence

unusual, though instances occur (Tenses,

f 133; GK.
IfcOn] the well
21.

ii2VP-uu).
is

TV

here would be unsuitable:

for

obviously a single exploit

referred to.

here
(cf.
1

"W3n

(=

"tarty

the cistern,

is

evidently better than

"W3H

5).

nVD
is

B*N TIN] Cf.

4, ii

pnv B*K

n;
n,

and GK.

n7 d

Read,
:

with Bu., either

nXD

CJK, or (i Ch.

23)

nvon BNn HX

the

former
Kt.

better.

njOO IPS] LXX ZvSpa oparoi/=QrS nSIO B*K. But, as We. remarks, HN1O K^N would mean a handsome man (Is. 53, 2 cf. Gen. 39, 6 etc.), not, like the German ein ansehnlicher Mann (Th. Keil),
:

a considerable or large

man
fTTO

so that the true reading

is

no doubt

preserved in

Ch.

u, 23

B^N (see on
"I2

ch. 21, 20).

Klo., cleverly,
ze/fo

and

at the

same time retaining the Kt.

N,

n
B"]n

")C5>K

had

defied

him (21,
22.
^

21).

nnaan

n^e l
.

DE>

1^1]

Read

(see

on

z.

8) either
3, 7.
<r^.

or D DJn D^K K a
see

(cf.

for the plur.

noun Cant.

9,

10; and

on

v.

13), or (see p. 368 top)

Oman nt^a ^

DC?
i

K^.
Ch. n, 25

23. 1333]

wn 1333,a

p f.), or 133? Kin. mixture of 133J isn and wn 1333.

(

Read

either 13D3

^H

inyot^D ?K]
24. fontpy]

o^r
2,

^zir

body-guard.

See on

I 22, 14.

i8ff.; 3, 27. 30.

utos AouSei
(

nil p]

LXX

= ^111;
n,

cf. V.

9) TOTJ

7ra.Tpa.8e\<f>ov

avrov

(=nn
25 25
a
.

cf. v. 9,

Jud. 10,

i),
i

a doublet.

Cf.

on

v. 9,

and

3, 3.

Dr6 rV3] Luc. (c), and

Ch.
:

26,

Qrh n*3D,

rightly.
7,
i.

Hinn]

LXX
Np
i>N]

PouScuos

perhaps of Harod, Jud.

mnn
l|

Not
Ch.

in

LXX.

Omitted,
i

o/AotoWAein-ov, in I

n, and

not recognized in

probably through Ch. 27.

D^Bn] From Beth-pelet, in the Negeb of Judah, Jos. 15, 27. Neh. n, 26t. Teqoa* was 10 miles S. of Jerusalem: see on 14, 2. 27. "ypnn] 27. Tinayn] Anathoth, now Andtd, was 2 miles N. of Jerusalem
26.
(cf. Is.

10, 30).

1365

37

The Second Book of Samuel,

SO] ^^p (Ch.)
is

probably correct

so ch. 21, 18.

BA have

CK TWV

(=MT.)
28. pctaf]

but

many MSS.
EAA.W1/,

LXX

Luc. 2a/3evi. 3a/2ot>xai, Luc. AAi/mi/: cf. Ch. ^y.

See on

v. 9.

Netophah
of Sochoh (on I 17,
29. 2^n]

(Ezr.

2,

present Beit Neitif, 12 miles

i).

22=Neh. 7, 26t) was probably the W. of Bethlehem, and if miles NE.

Probably

li?n or
:

^n

(cf.

Zech.

6,

10)

is

correct.

In

Cod.

this
s

name

is

omitted

Luc. has AAAav, other MSS. EAa.

pM3
30*.

:3 nynaio]

See on

I 9, i.

jnjna irPJ2] Read, with Ch., onjnan.

LXX

corruptly,
cf.

}O^2O

THSSn.

On

Pir athon, in

Not improbably
(Shechem).

the

Ephraim (near Shechem), modern Far atd, 6 miles NNW. of Nablous

Jud. 12, 15.
in

3O^-3i
3O
S.

a.

Transposed

tJ>y3

^ruo] B yj

is

end of the chapter. the name of a mountain in Ephraim, a

to the

LXX

little

[DIPTJUDn], probably (Buhl, 101, 170) Tibneh, 10 miles NW. of Bethel). a Cod. 3i supported here by |iaijn3K] Ch.
.

of Timnath-serah (Jos. 19, 50. 24,

3O=Jud.

2,

^""nx,

LXX

(raSapiTjX wos (TOV

(6 2apai/3al9i), for

Apa(3o>6aiov)
B>W
:

= 11

^N^2N

x
B>y:)
,

and Luc. (TaXo-apiTjs

TAAC prob. an error for TAAC), Jl^y aN Klo. would restore perhaps originally (We. Bu. Now. Dh.) ?JQ*3N. ? 7W3*t supposing p^yax to be a corruption of rTQ ^N^K, ^^ly"^
1

due

to

a copyist
Either

eye catching

^^>ytJ>n

in

v.

32.

This

is

very

plausible.
"

vmynvpn

or TQ-iyn will be the gentile adj. ot

ri
?"W?~

?,

a place near the Jordan, in the

called

wilderness of Judah
in

(Jos.

15, 5. 61,
1

nrnyn (but naiyn

Probably

nn

LXX;

v.

Kittel)

ib. 1 8,

8).

is

3 ib. ^orPDn] Ch. meant.

^nnan.
D3^JW

^n^rt

f Bahurim
(Jos. 19, 42,

(3, 16)

32
it is

a.

i33i>S^n]

of

(i Ki. 4, 9), in
city,

Dan

where

a Canaanite called D^py.^), reduced to forced labour by the

the inhabitants of which were

(Jud.
i,

House of Joseph

35)t-

See on

I 9, 4.

Twelve Codd.,

also,

have actually

(for

TaSapujty

A^X,

eleven others Aptij\.

XXIII. 2 7 -]6
32 ~33
b
a. If

371

32^ be compared with

in the

Ch.
11

n,

34,

it

will

become
,

evident (as

shewn

Table) that jrmn

belongs to v.

33

that

jtjO

corresponds to DCTI, and that the gentile

it

name
DB>n

has fallen out after

in the text

of Samuel.

Either

\W

"03

and

^3

are both corrup

tions of
leara-aL 6

one and the same name, now

lost,

or,

as Luc. has here

Towi 1 and
,

in

some

plausibility that

"OS

from the preceding known Lucian s 6 Towi points

03$>ytJ>.

Ch. Eipao-ai 6 Towi, it may be supposed with (in both texts) has arisen by dittography The name Gizon (Ch.) is not otherwise
to

^L

which, as Klo. observes,

46, 24.
will

was the name of a Naphtalite family (Gen.

Read, then,
in

Nu.

26, 48).

mnn
here

nt?

32^ "O^n fB. Ch. has 4WC?

The name
for
n{J>

in

33*

now

be fDJIfV

n{>,

but Luc. there has 2a/*aia, and

LXX

and

MT.

agree

has thus the presumption of being

a son

correct.

Hararite

The Jonathan mentioned was of v. n.

:TIN.

of

Shammah

the

34

a.

b a TOyon-p ^DHK-p Dta&Mjesi Ch. n, 35 -36 p

b&fyx

Tnann nan

nayon-p
i

is

the gentile adj. of

rnyB

(ch. 10, 6. 8)

or nayCTl^n (20, 14. 15.

Ki. 15, 20.

2 Ki. 15, 29), as 2 Ki. 25,

1

23

(=Jer. 40, 8); perhaps, however, TDyorrrra (like nsni mn 3) should be read (Klo. Sm. Dh.). 3DnN 11X (Ch.) are probably both corruptions of the name of Eliphelet s father: 13DHK is a
1|

"l3n

suspicious form.

34
"^>S>r\

b.

""J/jn

iTTlX.

>j^3H

^anTlN-p Dy^N] Evidently mutilated ^an^nN is mentioned in 15, 12.

in

Ch.

n, 36^
Luc.

35

a
.

nxn]

Qre

"l?n

(but not in

Ch.);

so

LXX

Acmpai,

See on

I 25, i.

Hys] LXX corruptly TOV Ovpaioepxtt.. 6 ep^a here and to Tjxn (Klo.): cf. Jos. 16, 2 A place i^in. in the Negeb of Judah, 6 miles W. of possibly er-Rabiyeh, Some twenty MSS. have is, however, named Jos. 15, 52. Carmel,
35 would point
.

""lINn

>ansn

2")^

TOV Qvpai (Oupe) vfos TOU Ao-^i

cf.

Ch.

36

a
.

H3VD] Attested
nnif as
8, 3.

substantially
If this

by

LXX

a-n-o

Swa/^ews (as though

be

original,

"imo

(which corresponds

Twenty-one other Codd. Baacu

6 Twvvi (Yowi,

Towt).

B b 2

37 2

The Second Book of Samuel,

it,

in position in Ch.) will be a corruption of

and

*"t3n

"33

here

will

deserve the preference above n3n~p in Ch. 1

37. vnattfl]
38.

See on

4, 2.
i

nrvn]

family of Qiryath-ye arim

Ch.

we should read

^n (Th.
^3]

2, 53,
:

unless indeed
6 Atfecpolbs) 21,

Klo. Bu.

Now. Dh.

LXX
48.

of Yattir, in the hill-country of Judah, Jos. on I 30, 27; also the note on II 20, 26.
39.

15,

14;

see

Jnpn
13, 2
is
J

D"Bfo?

be better (2 Ki. 24,

cf.

16.

Nu.

DH3 iWJ

would (The) whole, thirty-seven. b 2 Ch. 25, 17. Ezr. 2,42. 8, 35 28, 6); but 73. i Ch. n, 4i b -47 adds sixteen other names.
$>3n

How
numbers

the

number
the

thirty-seven to

be computed?

The

actual

are

18-23) + 31 need occasion no

(w>

for the Thirty, 2 (vv. (vv. 8-12), and, That the names are more than 30 24-39)= 33. surprise, as
in

Three

kept

full

after

losses

we may suppose the corps to have been we know that Asahel, for war (Sm.)
:

instance, died early in

David

reign (2, 23).

the People.

(/) 24. David s Census of

Ch. 24,

24=i
i.

Ch. 21, 1-27.

narrative
is

The
21,

evidently the sequel of 21, 1-14 (cornp.

31

especially the opening

words

fjX

vp^ with the representation

it

implied in
of contact:
11

i.

i4

b
),

with which also

has linguistically points

"injn).

cf. v.

b b 25 with 21, i4

(pN^ DV^X
i

nD"

!]

moved,
15, 8.

incited.

The meaning
19 (of Yahweh).
:

of the word

may be

illustrated

from Jos.
n:

I 26,

Ki. 21, 25 (of Jezebel in

fluencing or inciting
i
"J^

Ahab)
Ch. 21,
is

Job
i b,

2, 3.

"nCN^]

accommodating

to the later historic-

graphical style (which

the words), Tftxb. 8 a.

apt to state the fact, instead

17, 25 as

of narrating
7,

Cf. ib.

compared with ch.

27; and

Ew.
2.

33

ins
!

IPS ^nn
to

iu>

3S1

11

bs]

For of

ne>

read with Luc. and Ch.

r ? ?.?

Joab and
v.

to the
:

captains
s

the force, that were with

title

him

with which
1J-IN

4 agrees

Joab

natural

would be not IB X PTin

it?

but joxn -|t?(i Ki.

i, 19).

Some twenty Codd., however, have

here Ma/Jaai

(al.

Ma\a/,

MaajBap,

etc.) vlos Afapi(v, ft).

XXIII.
Rare
in

v-XXIV.
n,
8
;

5
Job
i, 7.

373
With the

prose

but see Nu.

;

also

emended
3.

text
1

^K>

must be read

so Luc.
(like ei in Latin) to
cf. ch.

*|DV1J

is

used sometimes in Heb.

subjoin
12, 14.

an impassioned question or exclamation:

20,
3.

18,

n. Nu.

2
;

Ki.

i,

10.

7,

13.

19.

Comp.

Tenses,

ngyno/e/ GK.
11

i54

Z^:. 25 4 bd.

HMD oral DHD] Dt. i, n ovoya SN DSD DD^y ep ^ryi] The same idiomatic usage as nifcn T^yi Dt.
. .

28, 32.

Ki.
, .

i,
.

48. Jer. 20, 4 (a circumstantial clause).

"OIKl]

HD^ *f?Bn
crt
"oaij]

On
for

the position of the subj., see

c/c

on

I 20, 8.

4.

"ji

Vulg. Pesh. [and Lucian

:

Trpoo-wTrou] *]^cn

JBO

[rather,

"pon

"OBpQ]

according
(Bo.).

to

MT.

David himself would

(ch. 5,

have gone forth as well

^E&=before

24):
2

3fi^D=
5,

from before (Gen.

6
,

41,

46

nyiD ^ai?O ^DV N^l;

Ki.

27.

3 2 )5.
ji

Tyn po
33.

nynya
2,

um]
3,

Read

3i

Tyn

JCT

-ijmso ^n;i in
13, 9. 16.

agreement with Dt.

2 Ki. 10,

36.

12. 16.

4,

48.

Jos. 12, 2.

The

starting-point

must here be named, from which

they began to

number

the people.

As

such, the

southern border

(Nu. 22, 36) was the most natural, as it lay nearest to Jerusalem This acute and felicitous conjecture was found afterwards (We.).

be confirmed by the same four MSS. of Holmes, 19, 82, 93, 108 Lucian s recension 1 which had so remarkably supported the emendations in 13, 34. 39. 15, 23. 18, 28. In the passages cited,
to
i.e.

the city that

is

in the midst of the

note on Dt.

2,

36)

is

wady (perhaps Ar see the writer s repeatedly named side by side with Aro er.
;

Aro er, now Ara t r, was on the N. edge of the deep gorge through which the Arnon flows from the E. into the Dead Sea.
"un]

In

MT.

this

word

is

out of construction

TJH

^mn

cannot

be rendered

the

wady

of Gad,

and the case

3

is

not one in which

254).

apposition would be

admissible

(cf.

Tenses,

p.

Read with

Lucian (TOV FaSSci) ^3[? (Bu.), which, with the text as emended, will be construed as an accus. of direction, And they began from Aro er

Kcu

St(@T]ffav

TOV lopSdvrjv Kal fjpavTO diro Aporjp KCU iiro

TJJS

ir6\fus TTJS

ptffy TOV \tipappov KT\.

374
and from the

The Second Book of Samuel,

city that is in the

midst of the wady, towards the Gadiie.s

and on unto Ja zer.

the land/ etc.
["\1V!

Cf. v. 6 a

And

they

came

to Gil ad,

and on unto

Ja zer

was a border-town of Gad (Nu.

">.

21, 24

LXX

for IP], Jos. 13, 25 [read

cf.
$*>?],

vv. 16. 30), in the direction of

Rabbath-

Ammon

Sar, 7 miles
ff.),

W.

of

Amman, would

suit

Eusebius

though of course there is no philolo connexion between Sar and *itj?\ See the writer s art. in the gical Expos. Times, xxi. (Sept. 1910), p. 562 f. (the second of two articles,
description

(Onom. 264, 98

criticizing

the

many

doubtful

identifications

of ancient sites to be

found in modern maps of Palestine). 6. DTinn px] Evidently corrupt.

B>*in

d.

Volkes Isr. p. 29) suggested

D^nH; and

For Qinnn Hitzig (Gesch. for Th. suggested

""Knn

HBnp,
(cts JYJV

both strikingly confirmed subsequently by Lucian s recension to the land of the Hittites, towards Qedesh! XeTTtet/x KaS-^s)
:

The Qedesh
name on

or Qadesh

in

which case the word would be more

is

correctly vocalized ntJhj?

meant,
little

the important Hittite city of that

the Orontes, a

S.

of the Lake of Horns (Maspero,

f.),

Struggle of the Nations, pp. 137, 141

and 100 miles N. of Dan.

Qinnn may be confidently accepted; but ntJHp, attractive as it is, A place 100 miles N. of Dan is very remote occasions difficulty.
to

be mentioned as the N. limit of

further

Isr. territory,

it is,

for instance,

much
in

N. than the region probably meant by the entering of Hamath, mentioned Am. 6, 14 and elsewhere as marking the
(see

same point
if

H. G. 177
to

my

note on

Am.

6, 2

RIBLAH

in

D.}\

Kedesh must be understood as embodying hence, accepted, a highly idealistic conception of the N. limit of Isr. territory. Ewald for ^in; and this, whether we read (Hist. iii. 162) conjectured
|fo"in

(EB.

iv.

4889) jcnn nnn DTinn

i"i:to"in

px
:

bx (see Jos.
yields

n,

3, cited

below),

or (Sm.)
locality,

DTinn
little

px

78,

certainly

a more

probable

viz.

E. of

Dan

for the Hittites

bordering here on
for

the Israelites, see Jud. 3, 3 (where

;

^H^

must evidently be read

^nn) and esp. Jos. n, 3 (where read with

LXX

in a

^nn

for

"Finn,

and
fD"in

in b

Vinm

for

*Vini_pDin nnn

nnrq).

Buhl (94) also prefers

to ntJHp.
;

Klo. and Guthe (Gesch. 94) would read

^nS3

px

nKhp..

this

would be quite suitable topographically, the cnp meant

XXIV. 6-n
being the Kedesh of Naphtali, 4 miles
as an emendation of DTinn,

375
of

NW.

Lake Huleh

but,

^DDJ cannot come

into competition with

DTinn.
J1TV
i>N

n^Dl

\y>

n:i

wy\]

No

place

Dan of Yaan
/cat
2i8u>va

is

known.
5t8ava
:

LXX
Luc.

/cat /cat

Trapeyei/oj/TO ets

Aav EtSav

/cat

OuSav,

/cu/cAcocrav cts

ep^ovTat etos Aav, Kat e/cv/cAcocrav TT/V

the sense requires
is

TT/V //.eyaA^v.
:

As

We. remarks, what

the text of

LXX,

corrupt as the

pT Jf ?K HID flEfl and from proper names in it are, it at least

fl twice,

appears that the translators found

of

and had a verb

fl

MDV

Dh.).

Read accordingly JH** Klo. emends differently

:

in place

?D JTO
ttbM
4 Ji

1K3^1

(We. Now.
:

yi

nn

1K2M (so Bu.)

for )Vy, see

Ki. 15, 20 (mentioned immediately before

Dan and Abel

}Vy

of Beth-ma achah). 2 Ki. 15, 29.

doubtless
a
fertile

For Dan, see on

20, 18.

was
),

some

place

in

the

Merj

Ayun

Meadow

of

Ayun

oval plain,

stretching out immediately to the N. of Abel

of Beth-ma achah.

|1T]
19, 28.
7.
~l

LXX

(A, Luc., and

many

other

MSS.) + n3n

so Jos.

n,

8.

IOD] The/or/rmofTyre, on the

i, 9.

Cf.

Harper on Am.
inn]

The

original
3),

mainland. 80)08.19,291. Tyre would be just 27 miles W. of Dan. inhabitants of Shechem (Gen. 34, 2), and Gibeon

(Jos. 9, 7,
9. Yini]

cf. v.

in Central
I 17, 21.

Canaan.

See on

*[$ ] For
cession
10.

the retarding metheg, producing an

incomplete retro

of the tone, see

GK.
I 2
4>

29^.

inn

TH
:

n^ Tl]

DyrrnK IBD
apLO/jirja-ai)

p nn]

Read oyn nx IDD nn

Now.
Dh.).

(cf.

construction as I 5, 9 (so

LXX ^cra ^plK must have

been written in error by a scribe who did not notice the sentence that

was

following.

Klo. Bu. Sm. prefer, with Luc. (/xera ravra, cm),

to insert

after p.

12yn as
in

12, 13.

11.

rrn]

had
rr

been,

before David arose in the morning.

j/.

in
(GK.
ch.

njh]

The -^
for

r.

(so

Ginsb. Kit.)
note
is

is

most anomalous
in

93 ); merely an error

no doubt Ew.
rnn

2136

right

treating

it

as

(so Baer, p.

117, with Kimchi).

Comp.

15,37

r-

376
12.
"]^y

The Second Book of Samuel,

*?W 33N] do
is

I lift

up

(LXX
3,

aipw), or hold, over thee.

The

root

rare (Is. 40, 15.

Lam.

28);

and Ch. nei

is

more

probable.
13.

toann]

T\\zfem., the subject being conceived

collectively: see

on

I 4, 15.
y3K>]

and Ch., VTVV probably the original number: notice the three months and the three days following. 1Em Nini] The words form a circ. clause, as v. 3. With regard
here,
to the sing. Nin

LXX

immediately

after
"]"),

no doubt a group or body

either
2
5>

of

men may be spoken

17, I3

of in

Heb.
:

in
-

the sing. 1 or the

:

pi.

(cf. Is.

31

13 (after

12-13*)

m ^s

*
*>

should probably be

read)
the

but in a passage like the present, in which the sing, follows

so closely, the incongruity
is

pi.

inelegant,

and

it

is

better to read

*n* [notice before ispsa], as in Dt. 21, 10 ^fc.

6,

2 8,

48 1?$.
5

Jer.

23 Nin [in the

3~ini,

||

50, 42

nan] and

?p"iy;

cf.

I 24,

Qr.

Ch.

which We. Bu.

prefer.
I 2, 10, in

This case
the class.

differs

from the one noticed on

which the

sing.,

with the plural, denotes

not, as here, the class as a whole, but

interchanging an individual of
:

To

the examples of the latter class there noted,

add

Lev. 21, 7

vrbvb
sing.).

NirT

vh\>

^
b
.

injp^
7,

vh FI^ND TWT&
3
f.

DBW

b (notice here 5-7* pi., 7 -s

"3bD

25, 17*. 3i

Dt.

Jud. 12,
Sin".

5. Jer. 8, i
. .

D&O miiV
nni>

DIB^y HN
44,9

-r

nirsxy. 22,4 Toyi vnajn

Is. 30,
22^rfli>

isoa ^y

DT^V
6,

D"3^.

(WJ).
Job
pi.

IDtWI KX nil

13

Dim. Am.

gf.

Zech. 14, 12.

occur in one
14"

^ ut extreme cases, as when the sing, and ai, 10 (after 7-9). 24, 16-24. and the same clause, the text should no doubt be corrected as Lev.
:

25,

(Versions

1Dn).
lS

31* (rd.
b
).

Bfn*;

cf.

p. Ixiif.

2
).

Dt.

7,

io a

(rd.

foyy

for

r&O2>,

and note

iw

in

Jos. 2, 4.

Hos.

4, 8 (rd. DJ^DJ).

10, 5 (rd. ^Jf).

Mic.

2, 9.

Zech. 14, 12
;

wrf(rd. irPB3). ^. 5, 10 (rd. 1D^B2). 62, 5. 63,

10, 15

n.

64, 9. Is. 5, 23

(LXX pHX
-on
For n

cf.

Qoh.

LXX

Codd.

N A ^D3H).

Cf.

GK.

145.
Lit.

aiw
/
. .

no]

Cf. Pr.

27,

ii nan ^anh nansw.

to: see

;or</

shall turn back

(=reply

on

3,

n) my

sender.

"im

no, see on I 26, 18.

Cf. the series of almost uninterrupted sing, in Dt. 31, 16-18. 20-21.

pronouns and verbs, referring to

19, 8
is

nin Dyn
2

The

principle of Lev. 17, 14 rn.3?

1^2N ^3.

different

(GK.

145

).

XXIV.
14- rvS3]

i2-i6

377
and Chron.
into the

very unjustly changed by

LXX

singular

(We.).

15*

LXX

has:

/cat

ceA.eaTO AauetS
Kuptos ev

eaural rov 6a.va.rov

KO.I rjp.cpal
7rpu>t$ev
ea>s

utpKr/jiov Trvptav, [/cat eSto/cev

lo-par/A. Qa.va.TQV O.TTO

uipas dptcrTou J

/cat

r)pa.TO
in

rj

Opavcris ev

TW

Aa<3,

[/cat

a.7re$avev,

/crX.J.

The
*

bracketed

words

the middle

agree

with

bracketed words

5>nrn

D Dn TXP

own

-imrrnx

MT. The unnn b nnTi

Dy3

dying,

naaon, the circumstantiality and tragic force of which (70,000 though the plague had only begun) constitute (see We.) a
their originality (so

presumption in favour of
as against the

Now. Bu. Sm.

in

Dh.),
. .

more
also

colourless

ljn):

mm

and ordinary narrative

s

MT.

jm

is

the natural sequel to 12-14;

and the time of

wheat-harvest agrees exactly with Araunah

threshing, in v. 20.

The
To
the

meaning of

*1J?1D

ny ny

in

MT.

is
it

altogether

uncertain.

appears from v. 16 that the was stopped before the three days had terminated. Targ. plague paraphrases the words nyio ny iy\ Ipuno by from the time when
the daily burnt offering

appointed time cannot be right, for

was

killed until it

was

offered ;

and so Rashi

and Kimchi

another Jewish explanation, cited by Kimchi, is until hour ). till the sixth midday (cf. LXX cws dpwrrov; Pesh. But neither of these explanations has any basis in usage and for
:
oy>as

the

former sense a different expression

*iy.

is

employed
is

(i Ki. 18, 29

nnjEn npy?
that

36.

2 Ki. 3, 20).
is

There

force in

We.

remark

an indication that the clause springs from a time when the word had acquired a technical sense, of the
season
fixed

the absence of the art.

by Yahweh

for

interposing:

cf.

ty.

76,

3.

102, 14.

Ehrlich would restore boldly [nm]B[n] n[^]g ny. b Nevertheless it i5 . nDM] The sing, as I i, 2.
originally the Hifil
1
n>1

is

possible that

was intended.
is

6.

*]JODn]

The

order verb, object, subject

unusual, and where

it

is

employed has the effect of emphasizing the subject at the end

So,

if

D^On
But
if

Tp ^
see
2, 24.

13, 20).

D OMl is merely a parenthetical note of time (cf. Nu. the words belong to the sequel, and are to be rendered (Now.),
etc., then,

And
i"l?>nn

it

was the time of wheat- harvest, when?

:

by analogy,
169).

it

should be

nSJOill

Gen. 19, 23. 44, 3 (Tenses,

The Second Book of Samuel,

(Tenses,

208. 4). Here there is no apparent reason order IT *]N^n rfatft should not have been used.

why the ordinary We. thinks the

originally

unusual position of

^N^n
(as a

an indication that

it

was not

part of the text, but was introduced afterwards as an

(see
in
p.
Ixii
f.),

Explicitum

and

corollary of this) that

it

was mentioned

be

some preceding part of defective), and was the

Djn]
3~l]

the narrative (which must now, accordingly,

subject of

DOM

v.

15*.

D?BTl*] towards Jerusalem:

partitive,

cf. Is.

10, 32.

^N^y.

among
28.
i

the people.

So 17 Djn
f).

n3n
To

as

Gen. 45,
2
.

Ki. 19, 4 (Lex. pi3 a

:

(Lex. 88 ). be joined with

!

what

follows,

though not closely with nny

Enough

now

relax

thy hand

By] as

I 10, 2.

Kt.]

v.

18 Kt.

iT

ilN, vv. 20.

22-24 n:nx: Ch. uniformly

LXX
is

in
:

impossible

both texts Opva. The article with a personal name Bo. may be right in attaching it to pi, perhaps
(

and reading JWiN njna DV

the other forms
is difficult.

c f.

on

I 23,

15).

The
is

choice between
"^H^,

The Qre

in

Samuel

everywhere

which Bertheau (on Ch.) and Keil prefer, supposing that just on account of its un-Hebraic form it may represent a genuine ancient
tradition.

17.

TPiyn] as

7,

14.
;

19,

20:

cf. p.

170 footnote

2.

Observe the

emphatic i3JK (twice) purpose of setting it

expresses njpfl,
1 8.

and JXn
in

r6tfl

placed before

1t?y

HE

for the

strong contrast to i33N.

gloss.

Luc., after 133x1

an unnecessary explanatory
so

r6y]

i.e.

to the higher ground, at the top of the

:

hill,

on which

the threshing-floor was

20. Pjptyi]

v.

yi.

looked out os forth, viz.

from the p3 or the enclosure

ch.

surrounding it. It is the word used of looking out through a window, somewhat more generally 6, 16 al., from heaven, \f/. 14, 2 al.
:

Gen.
1

18, 16.

19, 28.
in the

Against Movers proposal ^adopted

Speaker s

Comm. on Ch.

p. 200) to

read for
this text
2

VP

(after

Ch. DTlbsn) HliT,

it

was already
:

rightly objected

by Th. that

represent Yahweh as repenting directly after sending the angel. accentuation is not opposed to this rendering the position of the zdqef is Cf. regulated by the speech, the words introducing it being treated as subordinate.

would

The

Gen. 19, 2; and see Wickes, Hebrew Prose Accents (1887),

p.

35

f.

XXIV.
vby Dnay]
correlative
i>yc>

i6-24
as in
i>y

379

So

2 Ki. 4, 9

by=fy,
"iayn

3W

Gen.

18, 2,

cf.

the

z. 3

Toy

i>yn

KT^K.

Elsewhere always either HV"1N D^SX (the more usual cf. on I 25, 23. or mnK VBK ^y or mriX VBK^ phrase) Elsewhere T1ND, as &. 24, Gen. 21. *pyD] Cf. 3, 15 (Lex. 769 a c).
VStf]
:

mnx

25, 10

al.

!?y]
22.

Cf. I 6, 5. 20.
the threshing-boards (or -drags, or -sledges\ i.e. set in the

D^liSH]

boards with sharp stones

the corn
p.
:

under
illustr.,

side,

heavy which were dragged over

see the description, with

in the writer s Joel

and Amos,

227

f.;
^>ya

or

EB.
i.e.

i.

82,

83 (Fig. 10).

Cf. Is. 41, 15 aitoj)

jTtf
,

?pnop

nVD 2

enn pnn.
the

On

the plur. D

see

GK.
king,

93?P.

"ipan

^a]
Hi

wooden yoke, comp.

Ki. 19, 21.

23.

the whole doth

$>an]

Araunah,

give
v.

unto
22.

the

king/
it

the words being the continuation of the speech in

But

is

not in accordance with general

Hebrew custom
his

for a person,

in

ordinary conversation, to introduce

:

own name

in

the

3rd

Bo. conjectured that JIN *!3y had fallen out after rui~iN. We., on the basis of Bo. s suggestion, conjectures with still greater
person
plausibility that
"jay

has fallen out, and that HJIIN

"frtb

is

a corruption of
the whole doth

WK.
:

Read
the

therefore

^Dn

3i"lK

naj? fro

^an

the servant

of my

lord the king give unto the king

(so Bu.

Now. Sm.

courtly form of expression is quite natural under the Dh.) That the speech of Oman is continued in 23 a circumstances.
b which in might have been understood from 24 agreement with Hebrew custom restates the substance of the speech in a final sentence
,

marked by a
jnj]
v.
I

fresh iDiOl

(We.).

It is

24.

only meant by Oman as an offer, which is not accepted, But there is no occasion with We. to point on this account
is

implying that the gift is (in intention) completed, courteous: cf. Gen. 23, TlDi.
iCJ,

more

24.

"jniXD]

For ^IND, as (except

in the case

noted on
14, 12;

ch. 13, 14)

twice before in
in
i

MT.,

viz. DriiN J O s. 10, 25.

i

VtfN

ib.

and often
in

Ki. 20

2 Ki. 8 (as

Ki. 20, 25.

2,

22, 7. 8. 24),
:

and especially

Jer.

and Ez.
Lex. 8*.

(as Jer. i, 16.

35. 4, 12

Ez.

2,

i. 6.

3, 22. 24. 27).

Cf.

380
DJD ni^v] Cf. D tron D^pfc?]
2

The Second Book of Samuel

i

Ki.

2,

31 DJH
is

tn.
:

The

order

unusual, and generally late

gd. a shekel

Neh.
iii.

5, 15.

Ch.

3, 9.

50 shekels of
bullion,

silver, at 2s.

(DB.

420),

would be worth, as

6 17^. 6d., but would possess naturally

(ib.

much
25.

greater purchasing
PN!>

power

43i -432

a
).

"injn]

Cf. 21, 14. 21.

nsaon
106,

ivyni]

Cf.

So Nu.

17,

13

(cf.

15).

25,

(=

^r.

I.

INDEX OF SUBJECTS
174; after 73,310; after numeral, 223. See also Fern. sing. Compound names of deities, xc f. Confusion of letters, Ixiv-lxviii. Conjugation of attack (Po el), 152.
Collectives,

Abbreviations in Old Heb., p. Ixviiif. Abinadab, not = Ishui, 227. Abstract subst. for adj., 133, 182. Accus., cognate, strengthening verb, 8 f.
defining state, 32, 40, 42, 94, 102, 129 (adv.); 321 (after nTl); of limitation, 54, cf. XX. Adverbial relations expressed by a verb, l6 7, 33313, 24, Alphabet, early history of the Hebrew,
!35>

Dagesh
Sfj\oi

in yf?

<

nON v
117.

l,

68; dirimens, 215.

= D llN,

i-xxvi.

Amplicative plural, 25.

Apposition, 30, 45, 87, 108. Aquila, iiin., xl f., Ixxxiif.
Inscriptions at, xx. = our a, Article used idiomatically in comparisons, 6, 54) 85, 157; 208 with a distrib. force, 209.

Diminutives, 300. Dittography, 36 (?), 175, 264. Division of words, incorrect, xxviii Dod, divine title, xc, II 23, 9. 24.

f.

Doublets

(in

LXX),

xlix, Iv-lvii, Ixi.

Araq

el- Emir,

Dual names of

places, 2. Duplication of word for emphasis, 24.

used exceptionally
58, 96, 137,

as

PlTT^n ptf,
after
;

197 (a //#); a prep, or D, 356 with n.

force of relat, 75
f.
;

eyu elfu (with a verb} in LXX. lix. Egyptian Aramaic (inscriptions and notes on the dialect), xii-xix. Emendation, conjectural, XI f., xxxvw.,
xxxvii
.,

with

xlix.

m&6n
:

^1

H2T1D3 (incorrect), 124.

omitted exceptionally
in

with"inK,5;
1

See Order of words and Emphasis. Pronoun. English Versions (AV. and RV.), illegiti mate renderings in, I 23,23. Hi, 23. 8 (P- 260), p. 277, II 10, 7. !6 b . 15, 12. 23- 17, ii3419, 44. 20, 3. 6. 8. 19. 23. 21, 5. emendations implicitly 23, 19; adopted in, I 15, 9. 23, 6. 24, 20. 25, 30. II 15, 19.
3>

Kin Flbv3, 156;

incorrectly,

93,

36.

5>

I4>

233. 240.

Ashtart

(MT. Ashtoreth, plur. Ashtaroth), 62 f., 230.

12,4.
of,

Attraction,

Ba al, meaning
;

253

f.

as

name

of a

Explicita,

Ixii, Ixxiii.

deity, 63?. ; as applied to Yahweh, 254 f. in names of persons, II 2, 8,

Fellow-wife

(PHS), 9 f

26 3, II 23, 8. 31 ; of PP- 253- 2 places, II 5, 20. 6, a. Base in EVV. =low in position, 274. Be elyada changed to Elyada 263.
55>

Fern. sing, construed with collectives, 48, 288, 376; used of countries, and peoples, 143, 211 (JltaB^,

anomalous).
Final
letters, origin of, xix. First person sing, used of a people, 53,

Brjpaa&ef for Bath-sheba 289. Bichri, Bichrites, 340, 345. Bridal tent, the, 320.
,

Caleb-clan, the, 196. Casus pendens, 27, 96, 306 (v. 10), 360 in clause introd. by fTTH, 40, by
;

224. Fool, bad rend, of ?33, 200. Force of interrog. or neg. extending over

two clauses, 24. Futurum instans, 43,

95, 107, 183.

vn,

82.

rinLXX = V, i36.
81,

Cherethites, 223, 284. Circumstantial clauses, 13, 42 etc.;

183.

Gezer, Inscription of, vii f. Guilt-offering (DE>K), 53 f.

382
Hadad ezer
Hebrew,
(name), 280.

/.

Index of Subjects
Maps
of Palestine, X, xcv
for
nE>3~2K,
f.

illustrated

from Phoenician,

xxv-xxvi.

Hebrew

Inscriptions, iv, vii, ix, xi, xx,

xxi, xxiii.

240 n. 2. Mephibosheth, correction for Meribba 2 53- 2 55Moabite Stone, the, Ixxxiv-xciv.
Wtn<f>i0oa6e

al,

Hebrew MSS.,

character

of,

xxxiv-

xxxvii, Ixiv-lxix. Hexapla, Origen s, xli-xliv.

Nif
names,

al,

reciprocal sense of, 92

f.

tolera-

tivum, 353.
VIKOS in

Hypocoristic,
19, 262.

or

caritative,

LXX

for

n3,

129 n.

i.

Idem per idem

If- in

LXX

constructions, 21, 185

f.

119. Numerals, not expressed anciently by

letters, 97.

Nomen

unitatis,

for -\ -X, I2of.

Imperfect with frequent, force, I i, 7 (to). 13. 2,22. 3, 2. 5, 5. 13, 17.

Obed-edom, meaning of name, 268 f. Old Latin version, Hi f., characteristics

of,

with

II 12, 31, etc. ; = was to, II 3, 33. consec. introducing pred., 1 4, 20 (nj-airn nrno npi). 6, 6.

Ixxvi-lxxx.
in
I

waw

Omissions
i

17-18

(LXX),

140,

5 of., 155.
:

15, 27; 14, 19

(njn3

"IK>N

}inm
;

)^M DTltj6a). 17, 24; irreg. for pf. and waw consec., I 2, 16. 14, 52
continuing ptcp.,
Implicit subject,
i
2,

Order of words Obj. at end of long sentence,

HDl, 208; f,-D^
l,

7,

307

"6,

36;

I 2, 6.
f.
;

5;

&&>

blKts6l, 246;
;

Impersonal passive, 323

13

132, 242

with

ib
inf.,

njm
:

203

...

IDN n^i

(isan b$n3). u,

2.

ii

I 25, 35-

emphatic
in

emph. word next to

:

3,34Inf.

abs., force of, 31, 36, 38,

249;
;

the protasis, 12 f., 162; at the beginning of a speech, 162 defin See also Types of ing, 43, 280. sentence.

ON, H, *b, ?B, etc. 35 (m.T^ DN &r Non-), 55 (wa nyjj IT wb), II 15, 34 (ON), 17, 13 (ON), 367 (H, ^H) is] na 52 YIN,
;

"inN,

with

carrying on

finite

verb,

36
a

etc.,

(v. 28), or inf. constr. , 181. in Qal, emphasizing a verb

in

before verb (various cases), 121 (see also on I 8, 7. 14, 35. 18, 17. 20, 9. 2i, 10); 1J71

TUN

derived conjug., 347.

Inf.

js an
finite

nrn^>,

162,
f.;

24,

3; 3,
19,

constr.
26, 49.

continued by

verb,

ri;3

5>KTi

\ 241

K5fn
bjn,
B>1

PIN

Inf. constr. in

f.

213, 311

...
1^5,

Kin-"

Ishba

120, 240, 363. Ishbosheth, correction for Ishba al, 240. Ishui, correction for Ishba al, 120.
al,

39;

nVJX

319;

//^noun, 174; ^nsa

132, 249 (II
3, 25).
hxK>

and f*N
naTb,

Judge, the, God regarded as speaking through, 35 f. judgement a sacred

;

unusual:

"J^OH

(late),

151,

act, 66.

305

D^on D^pe
myi).

380.

Jussive with N?, 116, 323.

Kai
-ye

obj. first, introducing variety, I 22,

(LXX)

for DJ, lix

.

10 (ib ?na
.

3.

KapTTcuffis

(LXX), 30

I.

Origen, xli-xliv. Orthography, early

xxxiii
;

Hebrew,

xxvii-

Ixii-lxiv
;

Lapsus calami, 95, 198, 289, 352 Letters confused ( and 1, T and
2), Ixiv-lxvii
;

(bis}.

"I,

O and
orav,

verb)
rjviKa.

(V at the end of Ixiv-lxviii (letters con

3 and C,

Ixviii n.

fused).
indie.,

Letters wrongly transposed in MT., 80, 308 with n. 2. Lucian s text of LXX, xlviii-li, Iv-lvii.

av, etc. in 145 n. 2.

LXX
xxii.

with impf.

Palmyrene Inscription,

/.

Index of Subjects
12 -J.
I4(?).
II
25,
, ,

383
19,

Participle, force of, noted, I i, 9. 26, 3. 29, i. II i, 6. 6, 14. 15. 15, 30. b . 17, 17, etc.; with fTT!, I 2,

445

24,

20

(,.1iwp.
II ii, ii
(,

(...wipin);
;

17, 34. II 3,

17, or

W1,

I 7, 10.

1JN1)

15, 20.

18, 9. 23, 26. II 4, 3. 15, 32. 19, 10; in protasis after CN, I 19, 11 ; with

no
cf.

2
3>

subj. expressed, I 17, 25. 20, i, 6, 3; ptcp. absolute, I 2, 13. II delicate use of, to denote 3
!

Rephaim, the, 353 f. Resumption, 200 (various cases). of object by pron., I 9, I3 b

.

15, 9.

25,

29

incipient action, I 14, 8 ; expressing the/wA instans, I 3, n. 12, 16. 20, 36 ; with art. as predicate, I 4,
1

pb n

DSTI

with the

art.,

and subst. without

disj.

Di~6, I 9, 20. 116, 23; with emph., II 6, 22 (iTQriN DEiy . . . DJJ).

it,

I 25, 10.

of
accent,

"3

I 14, 39.

25, 34.
(?).

Pausal form with minor

Pelethites, 284. Perf. and simple
!3, 199-

14, 15, 244, 249, 287, 306.

b i5 (?; cf. p. 166), and on I 25, 26. Revised Version, margins of, XVII.

of other words, I 17, 13. 20, I4b

waw
4
b
.

used irregularly,

Roof-chamber 0~lpy), 333.

Runners, the (the royal escort), 181.
Scriptio plena
xxxii.

Perf.

and

waw

consec.
b

with frequent.
7, 16. a 15, 2 .

force, 1 1, 3.

2, 15. 19. 20.

14, 52. 17, 34 -35. 12, 16. II 17, 17, etc. introducing pred. or apod., I

and

defectiva,

xxx10

2,

ub

Sentences, unusual types of:

15,
pns*

25, 27. II 14, 10. Periphrastic future, 67. Perverse, sense of, in EVV., 17072. Peshitto, the, li f. ; characteristics of, in Sam., Ixxi-lxxvi.

0y nsi
TTxi
xliv

^n^nfj);

nbyn
f.

^ ^
;

6,

Septuagint, xxxix
;

Phoenician Inscription (Tabnith), xxivxxvi. Pluperfect, how expressed in Heb., 73, 199, cf. 311. Po lel, intensive (nnidJD), roS.

original text of
f.
;

the Hexapla, xliLXX, xlivof,

xlvi, liv

MSS.

xlvi

f.

Lu;

recension, xlviii-li, Iv-lvii characteristics of the translation, Iv-lxii (corruptions in the Greek,
s

cian

Ivii-lix

Pronominal
177 n.

anticipating object of verb, 177, 306, or genitive, 50,

I 8, 5.
(*J6t).

suffix

Heb. words
78 n.
;

transliterated,

Ix-lxi,

Pronoun emphatic: before verb,

17.

rend, suggested by similarity to Heb., 51); character and script of Heb. basis, Ixiii-lxix ;

10,
7

18.
b
.

12, 20.

17, 28

II 12,
1

19,

34

(-Ibi?

FIDM). 24,
t ,

breathings and accents, XVIII. Siloam Inscription, viii-x. Sing, nouns used collectively, 1 74 after
;

in response to question, II 2

7.

numerals, 223; after ?3, 310.

Sing, and plur. interchanging, 27, dif ferent cases of, 376. Sing, i ps., of nation or group of persons, I 5, 10. 30, 22. II 20, 19 cf. p. 37. Strange, stranger, often = foreign,
;

after verb, 1 17,

56 (iintf 7W0). 22,

23, 22

18 (Kin

wan).

(my: Diy

Kin).
!?>

15

II 12, 28 (MS OJN T^y).

13^

JB).

... Nin

(in

causal

sentence),

foreigner,
Suffix,

in

EVV.,

233, 313.
153. II 20, 19. 96 n.

now.

omission
xl

of, in inf.,

2, 153.
i, 13.

Kin, K^n, resuming subject, I

II 14, 19.

Suspended genitive,

I 28, 7.

Symmachus,
Tarmim,
li,

f.,

Ixxxi-lxxxiii,

characteristics of, Ixix-lxxi.

Question indicated by the tone of the

voice
21,
:

L Tertiumcomparationis t introduced by 7,

11,12 (U^Sf
22,

*]^
9
(,

^KB*).
16,

39Theodotion,
xl
f.,

16.
K>).

15. II

19, 23;

lx., 129
3"11D),

n. i.

18,29;

I 20,

Threshing-drags (D

379.

384
Tikkun sopherim, 340.

/.

Index of Subjects
Types of sentence with
(adj.) 311
1

ptcp.

TotauTj; (Hebraism), 46. Tone, retrocession of, 24, 356, 375. Types of sentence with inf. abs.
:

!]^n

oyrn., 36.

31J3

T|

Vn

(or Ijbn) Tj^.l (rare), 146.

subject,
finite,

ijn-i

*jbhi) ij^_, 56, ij?n (or cf. 45; four irregular cases, 160.

*rn

or

Verb with implicit

infin., 86.

90,

3b>1

!ji7n

JQiPM

(rare), 56.

Versions, ancient, value of, xxxiv-xxxix. Vile, sense of, in EVV., 125 i, 274. Vulgate, the, liii f., characteristics of, in
.

(Jerem.), 56.
)1

Sam., Ixxx-lxxxiii.
Zakef, the
first in

Ijn

7|\, no.

a half-verse the chief

divider, 22.

tf (rare), 318.

Zuphite,

i.

II.

INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS AND

IDIOMS
etc.
:

Heb. words, idioms,

Heb. words, idioms,

cf.

etc. (cont.}

softened from
of, 15.

*,

309,

120

ft.

onriN

D"nSs,

208.

K, elision

p,
I2 7-

133 M^X,
cf.

62.

58,
-

96.

p, 3 10
;

PjbK clan, 84.

PN DN and
.
, .

K^>

DN, 321 with

2.

= -nx, 298,379. = a, 54 1HN in

,

SJ3K DM,157-ItDK
1
"

J/. abs.,

325

nn3,

243;

... nnxa,

321.

H3 DK,I 14,9. OK, anomalous plural of HIDN, T

?

""N

=
. .

not, 49.

PN, idiom,
.

uses of: 70

(}W
.

?pK
.
,

dimin. form, 300.

,)

(ps) p

anm,

147/173,

cf.
"IDS

DN nnDN,
with
inf.
f

257.

7i;

P,

II 21, 4

(peculiar), 176. {^"N (collect.), construction of, 99.

PN

JN emph.,
,

in

and 7 222. answer to qu., 352.

Hinf., 174, 175, 183, 256.

K^Nn
"]K

prefixed to pr. n., 19.

in prose, 26, 345.

asseverative, 133, 199.

(inf. c.),
i

cjs,

if.

BK?) DISK,
x,
,

199, 332.

not = ^17; 212.

26.

a connecting link, 126;

=
;

K, 74.

7K =
=

among, 84, 174.

to,

= with reference

21, 43, 49.

^
nn

43. 10I

>

^ (^)
,
, .

281,348.
-

= ^a^, /cr Ma/, 34, 126, 172 = as, 133; pron. or dirives, 240; adv. supplement, when dispensed = 3 recitativum, with, 192
;

XXV

127,232,239:^03 I^N
286; omission
of, in

(idiom.),

2
>

34

n>)K,

47.
pi., 47.

in;
,
, ,

HN

prose (rare), 1t?X, 66;

1B>N

construed as a

Kin, 8 4;

? ntrx, 138, 172.

//.

Index of Hebrew Words and Idioms

etc. (tout. )
:
:

385

Heb. words, idioms,

]"IK,

irregular uses of, 29, 225

I

with

Heb. words, idioms, etc. (cont.} mil: mn ^31 DVD, I 14, 29;
correct, I 17, 12.

in

undefined noun,
16. II

9,

3.

26,

20

with a gramm. nom.,

I 17, 34.

26,

n,

25.

21, 22.

inn, nn,

112. 298.

3 and MT.,

interchanged in

LXX

and

nn, but vicnnni,

126.

Ixiv, Ixvii.
K>N33,

Bfcan,

98, 213.

(his condition, 85.

and ptcp. 6Vtf Participle. iTH, 94, 242, 291, 312.

-a, 200.

3H,
("OH

II 9,

T.

23, 19.

KTP3

in military sense, 188.

,

in Bethel,

but
2.

7V3H not

in the house,

3~.
See

wan

but

iran

183.

a, 57.
in pr.

T^ri, 105.

names.

Ba

al.

non,
5.

etc., i 9,
2, 24.

citizens, 185, 239.

n.

17,

23 (Him);

cf.

II

ni?3
,

(rare

and dub.), 68.

71, 45.

rsri, 102.

326.
in

Hjin, expressing vividly a condition,

added to jn

MT.,

164,

328;

without

suff.,

72,

125, 134;

inxip^ njm,

82.

np3 T T

49

f.

how

different

from

n3CJ>

"^H
>

expressing resignation, 119.

T T

221.

Dv3
02:
2 5.

(the terrain.), 139, 159.

4
in
5
3"

xix

f.

DJ>3

D3 correlativum, 21, 292; DJ nnDV3 1 1,6; fil IH?

,

I,
!

meaning
89.

of,

149.
of,

03,

3 2^n,
cf.

construction

144,

43-

247,

o
n H

"m,i 19,

25,39;

s i. 228.

23, 2.
,

of Hif.

inf.

elided after prep., 37.

}

of Hif. retained in impf., 147. (art.), retained after prep, or

and
=5

confused,
also, 55.

n.

2,

Ixiv w. 3, Ixv

f.

3,

and

356 with

n.
f.

^
1 1

apparently (not really)

as,

94

relative, 75

n emph. use
,

= &?M

of, 36, 368.

(rare), 197.

of concomitance, 29, 149, 288.

J1-, sf.

of 3

sg.

H_ for H__
ns
N^n p "3in,
"nynn,

masc., xxxiif., 350. S ( f. of 3 sg. fern.), 168.

n. 4.

subjoining an emph. exclam., 373. V, old nomin. termin., 18, 282.

}

3 Xn (Aram.), 308 T
280, 288.

of 3 plur. omitted, 103,

cf.

69, 91.

nnx pmn,
written

m,
,

227.

}*]!>

wrongly added in 3 sing., 91, 126. *]T JJK in l, 200 f.

for

formerly

NH

xxx

f.

H s ni
N31

VT1,

13.
iT HI
,

rum
in, senses

1 1,

13;

n^3 3

"IN^3n-^3
s<

40.

n, 20,33.
of, 279.
f.

i3rx
Vi*l
,

i,

149.

sq. plur., 5.

230 f.

nrn vw,
c c

6.

386

//.

Index of Hebrew Words and Idioms

etc. (cont.}
:

Heb. words, idioms,

iK-vi

Heb. words, idioms,

ai

etc. (cont.}

uwba
, ,

wi,

82.

D^n^N

-b
1 2,

nBT
p.

ns
.

44.

nrBh, 55T ION

.
. .

DiVG ,19,
.

356

niN-oi, 148.

jnb, 284!

N71 = and if not, 302. in 3 pi. impf., 30 f. }1-,

after oath, 117, 118

. .

(resumed)
;

O
3
. .

S
.

117, 202

f.,

247

*3
f.
i
;

IpSn RK

31, 229;
;>K

recitativum,

31

(construction), 167.

after
.

"]X,

DEN,
206;

etc., 1 8, 9. 10,
.

^DNJTI, 15.

ON
. .

"Q,

Dn^n
(IT,

POT, 20.
83 (nrno), 148 (nr

103;

Kin 3,
152.

nCN non. HO
.

,|B

3,

3,

as adv., 219 (DVD^ HT), 305; en

1 29, 8;

nny

3, 113, 13-

H, s-

DV21
Di>3

DV3,

clitic,

p),
first of all, 31, 78.

243 (nt
3;n, 223.

nn),

293 (nr

nS>).

-133,

133n,

331.

?3,
cf.

sq. collective sing., 310.

xxxiii, 241.
,

VI group of related families, 153,

197, 366

n?3,

(nn). T

Dn^a
,

n
f.

23, 6.
its subst.,

construction

of,

96, 193.

i?3 after

241

f.

^3,6 4
,

26.

DJ?3 vexation, oi?3

8.

i?n arrow, 172.

f.

DJ

nnoy3,

8f.

Bin, D nnn, 130

ri3t2

ITO

nj?a, 73.

DJ?S3 DVS3,43-

(meaning of form), 67.

of,
1

-\ Syr. sound
to X, 309.
*

20 n., 181
i n.

softened

nS3,47f. 123,88. D^ DB nans, 299 f.

;

and

confused,

2,lxiv.

3,

Ixv

f.

P, as dat. of reference, I 2, 33.

9, 3.

"P

= monument,
nn>,

125, 281, 330.

ii, 2; 13^

mutt;, 21, 6;
>!?

nbx no

pxn

1^,11
258.
=.

16, i;

L5N!j, 18, 3.

r, 5,

16,

210;

in respect of, I 8, 7*. 14, 33. II 14, 17. 25 (denning the tertium comparalionis).
reflexive,
1

II 13, 23.

3,

13

MT.
ch
19

8,

18

P p__,
,

in 2 fern. sg. impf., 14.

in masc. pi., xciii n. 3, 355.

(D3 ?
22, 5

omna).

20, 20

v, irvv, 287; nhn^, n6f. ,"147; \3&,

"

ixxxix.

(i? nx3i).
0]i>

3 o,

DH^). II 2,21

,"!D3).

16, 20

^,

etym. meaning
"\

of,

n8f.

(Da!? inn). 17,

as

i.

3 and
1

confused in MSS., 33.

of norm, I 23, 20. II 15, II.

nota accusativi, 122,7. 23, 10.

pass,
.

3, properly an undeveloped subst.,

06.
.

II 3, 30. 17,16.
after

verb

by,

25,

7.

y\

3, 225.
a.

II 2, 5
,
, ,

^3.

IP?. 8 5 io8w.

-vson

I3?i, 1 23, 20.

//.

Index of Hebrew
etc. (font.}
:

Words and Idioms

Heb. words, idioms,
etc. (cant.}
:

387

Heb. words, idioms,

7 with
inf.

as subj.

of sentence,

(T^yo
i>iNe>

jnp).

17,

15

15, 22.

^yo

N7 and Nb

3^1).
2,
.

26
(<-.

n
(c.

"6

confused, 32.

nsnn).
13,

n
by

27. 10,
.
.

14

with ptcp., 251.

sq. impf., 308.

17

obyo

in^).

19,

Tpab,

rra). 20, 21. 24

p7, idiom,

use

of, 44,

213; rendered
44.

^yo naaon ixyni).

oi/x ovrais in

LXX,

nw used idiom, in deprecation, 158.

ft)?,

DyD after
= from
from

!?X>,

1,

17,

H3p, II 24,
20,

beside, I 2, 33.
I

34;
3,

270, 274, 276, 301.

?

with,

1 14, 17. 18, 13.

II

of origination,

20, 7. II 3, 28.
.

ni^,

for

rvbyrb,

37-

^SD,

force

of,

278

3.

rrn,33415-

Aram. NDD, N^O, not rnsp, navo, 330.

187.

nmo,
in

i7cj.
,

JO

and H interchanged

LXX
i,

and

12.

MT., lxiv.3, Ixvii;

,

D and
I

3, Ixviii.

idiom,
8,

uses
(c.
;

of,

17
15,

(<:.

in concrete sense, 181.

SJDB>);

10

W);
(c.
1 8,

II

HJD, 279.

Ol^on riKO)

24, 24

rop).
J-,

in impf., I

i,

14.

2, 15.

HO =

a^A I
153.

19, 3. II

22. 23.

^33, 200; nbll3, 298.

-inb, 15433O, meaning of,

no

with n.

TM,73I.

K?10,
rrtp
,

nja, 31 s

*O,
4 .

mo, 106. how = w&w, 87 (cf. HD, TO, idiom., 256.

, ?

n^3 (Qre n^3),

161).

is8f.

?^O3, idiom, lor present,

DJ
,

71.

in

Heb. psychology, the

scat of
2, 16.

i?3Vp (II 17, 20),

meaning, 325.

new D^D,
}^,
"JD^D,

I i, 15. feeling, desire, etc.,

!9>4-

5.

?D,fig., I 12,9294-297.

y 3S3,

80, 181.

N-I^
18, 12; p. 373.

nw,
78.

i28f.

18,

18.
of,

^3
;

|O

= aught
f
JflD

I 3, 19,
14,
7,

cf.

on

23, 23

tJ

3 (with

11BN),to bear (not-wear).

of,

45

BO,

8;

T]^O
7, 29.

3.2D

<=

sit

round a

table, 134.
f.
;

ig

23; with verb, denoting source

TOD
in

or cause, 31, 3. II

(Massoreticterm),9O Samuel, 91 f.
to wail, 214.

3D, I39
,

f-

280.

ISO HDD
216: also on
6, 5 (:.

to sweep

away, 96.

DD

labour-gang, II 20, 24.

uses of,

^J?D, idiom,
I i,

y = T

in

LXX,

14

(c.

"$

*VDn).
ni>jp

bj?p.

D1X~"Qy,

136 meaning, 268

.

f.

20 (ir/jns

ns ^N). 15, 28

cniVs iy,

126.

388
11 eb.

II.

Index of Hebrew Words and Idioms

etc. (cont.}
:

words, idioms,

E>ny

(etymol.), I73f.
(_.

Heb words, idioms, nn*, 1 13, 6.

to go
ffip

etc. (font.)

r\\y

to bend; and
(cf. }iy),

(^c

and fbp, 74
"VtOpn,

n.
of, 31.

astray, err

i7of.
"ItSp,

meaning

nay, 114.

7y a

ni/ p voices, of thunder, 95.

substantive, 356.
1 17, 32 25,
(72"

7y, idiom, uses of:

7tf

V7y DIN

27).

36;
15,

21,

16

DDp, 215. 2np &jr///^ (Aram.),

=1,

322.

07y y^n^np);

n
ii

33

(^01
-byi);

10, 122, 190,

N^D? ^y);
24, 20

andesp.XIXf.
1 25, 27. 42.

18,

(nn?

?n:

^m, ^17,
17, 19.

(V7y Dnay).
I I, 10.

= 7X,

rriBi,ii
;

13.

2, ii
1

p. 101.

in, of the heart

be sad, 11.

3D 7y, usu.

<?

j^aj-/
<?/",

123, 191;

nyn,

fig. for

r?</^,

257.

Dy

not so, 205. = in the opinion, judge near, 78

;

ment
*JD7
ploy.,

^"}

his friends, 225.

of,

36, 273.

"IDy

=
cf.

^yin,
{?

10.

to -wait upon, i36f.

56

S.,

229.

D- NBI poy, 263.

W
1

= Aram. D = ^i,
written for D, 237,

237 n.
cf.

52

i.

n^ay,
ny, not

5 if.
="i^,i

28,

6.

115.

n S?y, with pregnant

217.

force, 107, 209,

= Aram.

B>~=

u-

237;?.
/*</,

nnwy,

niiri>yn

62-64

in

Ash-

^rr^,
B7
232.
5^,

W.l =
79.

22.

kelon, 230.

7NB>,

TV
HTD,
PIS,

^V?119.

353-

sq. accus., II 13, 14.

I 25, 31.

294.

jbs, ii 3, 29-

etym.
. .

of,

16-19.

7?3

to mediate, 35.

(II 6, 6), 267.

}Q, sq. perf., 342.

ot? (with

.wv?), 301.

pia

for

nVQ,

219.

TI3^, 301.
232.

and

D^S,

Db

(for

in

i|

DB

),

120.

.^ = Aram, y
81.

(and p), gn.

s?, ii 17, 29.

S, construed with fern, pi., I 17, 28.

s Day,
n, 95
9.
.

43.

7,

pBJf, I 25, 18.

x, 259.

idiom.
II 2, 23.

= where we
7,

are, I 14,

10.

(= s^j = Ji;^),
w-^j wife,

rival-

(or

DTI naipn,
,

16.

f.

336.

389

III.

INDEX OF PLACES
Ephraim (name of town), 301 Eshtemoa 226.
,

Abel of Beth-Ma achah, 344. Adullam, 1 78 cave of, prob. a textual

;

f.

error, ib.

Aijalon (Ayyalon), 115.

Ain JaluJ,

Far House, the, 313.

218.

Ammah,

244.

Ga

ash, 370.

Anathoth, 369. Aphek, 45 f., 218, XIX.

"Arab,

371.
the,
J

Gai (rd. Gath), 147. Gath, 57. Gaza, 57.

Arabah,

89, 244

f.

Geba
(2), 373.

Archite, the, 317. Aro er (i) ( Ar arah), 226; Ashdod, 50. Asherite, 241.

265 (on II 5, 25). 98, xcvi (i), 211 (2), 246. Gezer, 265, cf. 211.
,
;

Geshur

Giah, 244.

Ashkelon, 57. Athak, 227.

Azekah, 138.

= Gibeah of Benjamin (njQ3!"0 Gibeah of Saul, 69, xcvi, Gibeah of God, 80, 82. Gibeon, 242, 265, 351 f., xcvi n. 3.
Gibeah

Ba

al,

Ba alah, and Kiryath-Ba al, old names of Kiryath-ye arim, 265 f.

Gilboa

214.
(2),

Ba al-Hazor, 301. Ba al-Peraziro, 2635.

Bahurim, 248
Be"

Gilgal(i), 82; Giloh, 312.

65 (I

7, 16), 70.

f.

Hachilah, 204.

Be

eroth, 253, XX. er-sheba , 66.

Hamath,

282.

Havilah, 123.

Betah

Berites(?), the, 344 f. (? Tebah), 281.

Hebron, 227.

Helam,

288.
f.

Beth-aven, 99. Beth-car, 65. Bethel (i), 65, 79, 98 Beth ha- Arabah, 370,

(2), 225.

Helkath haz-zurim, 242 H^reth, 179 Horesh, 187.

.

Hormah,

226.

Beth-horon, 102, 134.

Beth-pelet, 369. Beth-reho b, 287. Beth-shean, 231.

lyyun, 375.
Jabesh of Gilead, 85. 225 f., 372. Ja zer, 374. Jezreel (in Judah), 204.
Jordan, the fords
the 316. 331. Judah, the wilderness of, 186.
of,

Beth-shemesh, 57. Bezek, 86.

Bithron, the, 245. Bor- ashan, 226!
.

Jattir,

Kikkar

of,

Carmel, 125, 195,

cf.

226

(for

?31).

Dan-ja an (corrupt), 375.

Desolation, the

Kedesh, 374

(bis}.

Ke
f.

ilah, 183.

(JID^H), 189

Kenites, the, 122.

Kiryath-ye arim, 59.

Eben- ezer, Ekron, 53.

45,

XIX.
Lo-debar, 286.

Elah, vale of, 138. En-dor, 214. En-gedi, 191. En-rogel, 324.

Ma achah, Ma on,

288; the
f.

Ma achathite,
of, 105, 106,

371.

Mahanaim, 240
189.
;

Ephes-dammim,

138.

Michmas, 98

Pass

XIX.

390
Millo, the, 261
f.

///.

Index of Places
Sha araim
Shen
(?), 147. Shalisha, the land of, 70.

Mizpah, 64.

Mizpeh of Moab, 179.

Naioth (Qre), 159.
of Judah, 213, of 213, 229, of the Qenite, 213, of the Cherethite, 213, 223, of Caleb, 213, 223. Netophah, 370. Nob, 172.

(fBTI),

65

rd. Yeshanah, 65,

XIX.

Negeb,

the, 212

f.;

the

Yerahme

elite,

Shiloh, 5. Shu al, the land of, 102. Shunem, 214. Shur, 123. Sirah (rTVDn), 250.

South, the.

See Negeb.

Tekoa

, 305, 369. Telarn, 122, 212.

Ophel, the, 259

Ophrali, 102.

f.

Timnath-heres

(-se"rah),

370.
;

Wilderness, the, of En-gedi, I 24, 2

Pir athon, 370.

of
on,

Gibeon(?Geba),II
I 23, 24.

2,

24;

ofMa
(?), 2.

Rabbath-

Ammon,

287,

293

f.

(the

25; of Paran of Ziph, 23, 14. 15. 26,

25, i;

Rachal
Rachel

Water-city ). (rd. Carmel), 226. s grave, 78.

(Is. 10, 29. Jer. 31, 15), 78.
.

Yerahme

elites, 213.

Ramah

Zebo im, Ravine of the,

Zela
,

103.

Ramah, Ramathaim, 3 f Ramathaim-Zophim (!), I. Ramath-Negeb, 225.

Rephaim,Vale Rogelim, 326.
of,

352

f.

263.

Zelzah, 78. Ziklag, 210. Zion, position of, 258. Ziph, 1 86 f. Zobah, 281.

Sha alabbim, 370, Sha alim, 70.

cf.

70.

Zor ah, 57. Zuph, land

of, 71, cf. i.

Oxford: Horace Hart M.A., Printer to the University

Section of

CENTRAL PALE

Railways

Section of

CENTRAL PALESTINE

Railways

3520

of Miles

<L

?
By
permission of the Palestine Explt

3520
35*30

eth-Jeshimoth

SwreunekQ

Heights in English

feet.

By

permission of the Palestine Exploration Fund and of Messrs. John Bartholomew

&

Co.

Sectionof

SOUTHERN PALEST
AefrflasanQ
rek

&&&&&
TimnaFfo^

TMah
\^
7

..

ZaJianm

V-

7 Z-anoatjA fii-%wJa?

,$^7

>

Gath? R
31

40

Y Vi*^^^ ^
X^-x
s

\
V

TULd-Jitdeiyideh,
1297

iash 7

s^-

En-Rimmomao
Si
.

Umm er-Ramamui>
3450

Railways

Section of

SOUTHERN PALESTINE
KefrMasanQ
tshtaol

^rilC--

Z-antfaboN

WLd-Jiideiyulefi

^SOfa
"

eshalio
^ferash

-&/
r-

j&ifffkJ 32

Lj^wQo ^!

En-Rimmonizso

.Cinmer-Ramamui

Railways

Scale

of

35"

10

3520

iies

012-345

10
By permission
of
tlie

Palestine Exploration

Fun

3520

3530

Heights in English feet.

By permission of
the Palestu.e Exploration

Fund ami

of

Messrs John Bartholomew

&

Co.

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

A
Treatise on the Use of the Tenses in Hebrew, and
some other Syntactical Questions.
Third Edition.
1892.
7*.
6</.

The

Parallel Psalter

being the Prayer-Book Version of

the Psalms and a New Version, arranged on opposite pages, with an Introduc tion and two Glossaries (I. Characteristic or otherwise noteworthy expressions occurring in the Psalms. II. Select List of Archaisms occurring in the PrayerBook Version of the Psalms). Second Edition. 1904. T,s,6d,

The Book

of Job in the Revised Version.

With

Intro

ductions, brief Annotations, and explanations of the Marginal Revised Version. 1906. 2.r. 6d.

Notes of the

Modern Research as
Schweich Lectures
for 1908).

illustrating the Bible (being the

1909.

y.

A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs, attributed Bodleian to Abraham Ibn Ezra. Edited from a MS. 1880.
in the

Library.

y.

(>d.

Jointly with

FRANCIS BROWN and C. A. BRIGGS.

A Hebrew and English

Lexicon of the Old Testament,

1906.
34^.

with an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic.

CLARENDON

PRESS.

An

Introduction to the Literature of the Old Testa

ment.
Eighth Edition.
1909.
I2S.

Critical

and Exegetical Commentary on Deuter onomy (in the International Critical Commentary}. Third Edition. 1902. 12s. T. & T. CLARK. and Times, and the writings which
Second Edition.
1893.

Isaiah, his Life

bear his name.

FRANCIS GRIFFITHS.

The Book
ment.

of Genesis.

With Introduction and Notes

Eighth Edition.
1911.
los. 6J.

(in

the Westminster Commentaries).

Sermons on Subjects connected with the Old Testa

6s. 1892. Introduction. On the Permanent Moral and Devotional Value of i. Evolution the Old Testament for the Christian Church, compatible with Faith. 2. Isaiah s Vision. 3. The Ideals of the Prophets. 4. Growth of Belief in a Future 6. The Voice of God in the Old Testament. State. 5. The Hebrew Prophets. 8. The First Chapter of Genesis. 7. Inspiration. 9. The Warrior from Edom. 10. The Sixty-eighth Psalm, n. The Lord our Righteousness. 12. Mercy, and not Sacrifice.

CONTENTS

METHUEN &

CO.

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

In the Cambridge Bible for Schools

(continued)

and

Colleges.

The Book
2S.
(>d.

of Exodus.

1911.

$s.6d.

The Books of
The Book

Joel and Amos.

Second Edition.

1901.

of Daniel.

Second Edition.

1901.

2s. 6d.

CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY

PRESS.

In the Century Bible.

The Minor Prophets (Nahum

T. C.

Malachi).

1906.

2s. 6d.

&

E. C.

JACK.

The Book
tion,

of the Prophet Jeremiah.

Jointly with A. F.

A revised
Second Edition.
of Ely).
its

Transla
1908.
6s.

with Introductions and short Explanations.

KIRKPATRICK (Dean

The Higher
importance.

Criticism.
1912.
is.

Four papers on

character and

HODDER & STOUGHTON.

Jointly with

H. A. WHITE.

The Book of
Old Testament}.
I.

Leviticus

(in

Haupt s Sacred Books of

short Notes on Textual Criticism.

the

The Hebrew
25.

Text. With

1894.

6d.

II.

A New English Translation.

Notes.
1898.
6s.

With

Introduction and Explanatory

JAMES CLARKE &

CO.,

LONDON.

Part

the bearings of Archaeology on the I (pp. 1-152 Old Testament) of Authority and Archaeology, Sacred and Profane, iSs. edited by D. G. HOGARTH. 1899.
:

On

The

aiithor hopes before long to re-publish this essay separately in

an

enlargedform

JOHN MURRAY.

COLLEGE
x^